P438 EN M R-b5-A 311 661 PDF

Easergy MiCOM P438
Rail Catenary Protection Device
P438/EN M/R-b5-A
Version P438 -311 -418/419/420 -661
Technical Manual
General Note on the PDF Version of this Technical Manual
All entries in the Table of Contents and all cross-references to other sections,
figures etc. in green letters are hyperlinks, i.e. by a single mouse click on the
reference one can navigate directly to the referenced part of the manual.
In the Adobe Reader (or the Acrobat Pro), one can return back to the previous
view by using the menu point View / Page Navigation / Previous View (keyboard
shortcut: ALT + Left cursor key). (It might be necessary to do this several times,
if the view at the target location has also been changed (e.g. by scrolling or
changing the zoom setting).
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
NOTICE: Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar
with the device before trying to install, operate, or maintain it. The following
special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment
to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or
simplifies a procedure.
The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates that an
electrical hazard exists, which will result in death or serious injury if the
instructions are not followed.
This is the safety alert symbol. It is used to alert you to a potential personal injury
hazard. Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or
death.
DANGER
DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
will result in death or serious injury.
WARNING
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
can result in minor or moderate injury with or without equipment damage.
NOTICE
NOTICE, used without safety alert symbol, indicates a potentially hazardous
situation which, if not avoided, can result in equipment damage.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in

certain parts of the equipment.
DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
⚫ Only qualified personnel, trained, authorized and familiar with the device
and all the safety instructions in the general Safety Guide (SFTY/5LM/L11
or later version) and appropriate Chapter 5, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
Chapter 12 and Chapter 13 of this manual, shall work on installation,
connection, commissioning, maintenance or servicing of this device.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Switch off the auxiliary power supply before any work in the terminal strip
area.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment before
any work in the terminal strip area to isolate the device.
⚫ Do not touch the terminal strip area when equipment is in operation.
⚫ Do not remove or add wires in the terminal strip area when equipment is
in operation.
⚫ Short-circuit the system current transformers before disconnecting wires
to the transformer board (valid only for pin terminals, not required for ring
terminals which have a shortening block).
⚫ A protective conductor (ground/earth) of at least 1.5 mm2 must be
connected to the protective conductor terminal on the power supply board
and on the main relay case.
⚫ Do never remove the protective conductor connection to the device casing
as long as other wires are connected to it.
⚫ Where stranded conductors are used, insulated crimped wire end ferrules
must be employed.
injury.
Note: Regarding the appropriate wiring connections of the equipment refer to the
document Px3x_Grounding_Application_Guide_EN_h.pdf.
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSAFE OPERATION
⚫ Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping
and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on
careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only
qualified personnel shall work on or operate this device.
⚫ Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If
any other modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in unintended
equipment operation.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED) are
permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM and can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the device.
It is recommended that the signals MA IN: Blocke d/faulty and
SFMON : Wa rning ( LED) are communicated to the substation automation
system for alarm purposes, using hardwiring via output relays or the
communication interface.
Changes after going to press
P438
Table of Contents
1 Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Overview .....................................................................................................................1-1
1.2 General Functions ....................................................................................................... 1-7
1.3 Control Functions ........................................................................................................ 1-8
1.4 Global Functions ......................................................................................................... 1-9
1.5 Design .......................................................................................................................1-10
1.6 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 1-11
1.7 Inputs and Outputs ................................................................................................... 1-12
1.8 Control and Display ...................................................................................................1-13
1.9 Information Interfaces ...............................................................................................1-14
2 Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Conformity .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.2 General Data ...............................................................................................................2-2
2.2.1 General Device Data ..................................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Tests ........................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3.1 Type Tests ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Environmental Conditions ........................................................................................... 2-8
2.5 Inputs and Outputs ..................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs ........................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs .....................................................................................................................................2-10
2.5.3 IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5.4 Direct Current Input .....................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer ............................................................................................................................ 2-11
2.5.6 Direct Current Output ..................................................................................................................................2-11
2.5.7 Output Relays ..............................................................................................................................................2-12
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 2-12
2.6 Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.1 Local Control Panel ......................................................................................................................................2-13
2.6.2 PC Interface ................................................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface .................................................................................................................. 2-13
2.6.4 Ethernet Communication Interface ..............................................................................................................2-14
2.6.5 IRIG‑B Interface ........................................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.7 Information Output ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data .......................................................................2-17
2.8.1 Main Function .............................................................................................................................................. 2-17
2.8.2 Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.8.3 High Impedance Protection ......................................................................................................................... 2-17
2.8.4 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection ............................................................................. 2-17
2.8.5 Time-Voltage Protection .............................................................................................................................. 2-18
2.9 Deviations ................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values ................................................................................................................ 2-19
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages ................................................................................................................... 2-21
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition .................................................................................................... 2-21
2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition ................................................................... 2-23
2.10.1 Time Resolution ...........................................................................................................................................2-23
2.10.2 Phase Currents System ............................................................................................................................... 2-23
2.10.3 Voltage ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-23
2.11 Recording Functions ................................................................................................. 2-24
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1

P438 Table of Contents
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-24

2.12 Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 2-25
2.13 Current Transformer Specifications .......................................................................... 2-26
2.13.1 Symbols .......................................................................................................................................................2-26
2.13.2 General Equations ....................................................................................................................................... 2-27
2.13.3 Distance Protection ..................................................................................................................................... 2-28
3 Operation ............................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Modular Structure ....................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication ............................................................................. 3-3
3.3 Cyber Security (Function Group CS) ............................................................................3-4
3.3.1 Users, Roles and Rights for Easergy MiCOM P30 ........................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Cyber Security Implementation ..................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group LOC) ..................................3-7
3.4.1 Bay Panel .......................................................................................................................................................3-8
3.4.2 Signal Panel .................................................................................................................................................3-11
3.4.3 Operation Panel ...........................................................................................................................................3-12
3.4.4 Fault Panel ...................................................................................................................................................3-13
3.4.5 Overload Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 3-14
3.4.6 Selection of the Control Point ...................................................................................................................... 3-15
3.4.7 Configurable Clear Key ................................................................................................................................ 3-15
3.5 Communication Interfaces ........................................................................................ 3-16
3.5.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC) ................................................................................................................ 3-17
3.5.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1) ................................................................................ 3-18
3.5.5 Communication Interface Ethernet (Function Groups IEC and GOOSE) ....................................................... 3-35
3.6 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB) ...............................................3-57
3.7 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY) ................................................ 3-58
3.8 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP) ......... 3-60
3.9 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI) .......................................................... 3-62
3.9.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y ...................................................................................... 3-63
3.9.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y .......... 3-66
3.10 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays (Function Group
OUTP) ........................................................................................................................3-68
3.11 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO) ......................................................3-71
3.11.1 General Settings ..........................................................................................................................................3-71
3.11.2 BCD Measured Data Output ........................................................................................................................ 3-73
3.11.3 Analog Measured Data Output .................................................................................................................... 3-77
3.11.4 Output of “External” Measured Data ........................................................................................................... 3-83
3.12 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED) ...... 3-84
3.12.1 Configuring the LED Indicators .................................................................................................................... 3-84
3.12.2 Layout of the LED Indicators ........................................................................................................................3-84
3.12.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators ......................................................................................................... 3-86
3.13 Main Functions of the P438 (Function Group MAIN) .................................................. 3-88
3.13.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables ...................................................................................................... 3-88
3.13.2 Operating Data Measurement ..................................................................................................................... 3-95
3.13.3 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions ........................................................................................ 3-105
3.13.4 Inrush Stabilization .................................................................................................................................... 3-107
3.13.5 Harmonics Blocking ................................................................................................................................... 3-109
3.13.6 Measurement of Frequency ....................................................................................................................... 3-111
3.13.7 Function Blocks ......................................................................................................................................... 3-112
2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Table of Contents P438
3.13.8 Multiple Blocking ....................................................................................................................................... 3-113

3.13.9 Blocked/Faulty ........................................................................................................................................... 3-113
3.13.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal .......................................................... 3-114
3.13.11 Close Command ........................................................................................................................................ 3-115
3.13.12 Multiple Signaling ...................................................................................................................................... 3-116
3.13.13 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic ........................................................................................................... 3-117
3.13.14 CB Trip Signal ............................................................................................................................................ 3-126
3.13.15 Communication Error .................................................................................................................................3-127
3.13.16 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization .................................................................................................. 3-127
3.13.17 Resetting Actions .......................................................................................................................................3-130
3.13.18 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications Channels .......................................... 3-132
3.13.19 Test Mode ..................................................................................................................................................3-133
3.14 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS) ................................................. 3-134
3.15 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON) ................................................................3-136
3.15.1 Tests During Start-up ................................................................................................................................ 3-136
3.15.2 Cyclic Tests ................................................................................................................................................3-136
3.15.3 Signals .......................................................................................................................................................3-136
3.15.4 Device Response ....................................................................................................................................... 3-137
3.15.5 Monitoring Signal Memory .........................................................................................................................3-138
3.15.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag ......................................................................................................... 3-138
3.16 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC) ............................................... 3-139
3.17 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC) ............................................ 3-140
3.18 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA) ............................................... 3-141
3.18.1 Overload Duration ..................................................................................................................................... 3-141
3.18.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload Protection .............................................. 3-142
3.19 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC) ..........................................................3-143
3.19.1 Start of Overload Recording ...................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.19.2 Counting Overload Events ......................................................................................................................... 3-143
3.19.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-143
3.19.4 Overload Logging ...................................................................................................................................... 3-144
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA) ...................................................... 3-145
3.20.1 Running Time and Fault Duration .............................................................................................................. 3-146
3.20.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time .......................................................................................................................3-147
3.20.3 Acquisition of Fault Data (Short Circuit Data) ............................................................................................ 3-149
3.20.4 Acquisition of Fault Location ......................................................................................................................3-151
3.20.5 Extended fault location data acquisition ................................................................................................... 3-152
3.20.6 Fault Data Reset ........................................................................................................................................3-153
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC) ................................................................ 3-154
3.21.1 Start of Fault Recording .............................................................................................................................3-154
3.21.2 Fault Counting ........................................................................................................................................... 3-154
3.21.3 Time Tagging .............................................................................................................................................3-155
3.21.4 Fault Recordings ........................................................................................................................................3-156
3.21.5 Fault Value Recording ............................................................................................................................... 3-157
3.22 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST) ............................................................. 3-158
3.22.1 Enable/Disable the Distance Protection .....................................................................................................3-158
3.22.2 Distance Protection Blocking ..................................................................................................................... 3-158
3.22.3 Base Point Release for Impedance and Direction Determination .............................................................. 3-161
3.22.4 Distance and Directional Measurement .....................................................................................................3-161
3.22.5 Impedance-Time Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-175
3.22.6 Train Start-Up Detection di/dt, dv/dt and dϕ/dt ......................................................................................... 3-176
3.22.7 Wrong Phase Coupling Protection ..............................................................................................................3-178
3.22.8 Multiple Signaling of Distance Protection .................................................................................................. 3-182
3.23 High Impedance Protection (Function Group DELTA) .............................................. 3-184
3.23.1 Enabling and Disabling the DELTA Function .............................................................................................. 3-184
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3

3.23.2 Minimum Current and Voltage Enabling of DELTA .....................................................................................3-185

3.23.3 Reactance-Limiting of High Impedance Protection .................................................................................... 3-187
3.23.4 Checking for Changes of the Phase Angle (Sudden Angle Change Detection) .......................................... 3-188
3.23.5 Harmonics Stabilization for Load Variations .............................................................................................. 3-189
3.23.6 Starting and Tripping of DELTA ................................................................................................................. 3-190
3.24 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON) ......................................... 3-192
3.24.1 Current Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-192
3.24.2 Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-193
3.24.3 Fuse Failure Monitoring ............................................................................................................................. 3-194
3.24.4 “Fuse Failure” Monitoring of the Reference Voltage ..................................................................................3-197
3.24.5 Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions ...........................................................................................3-197
3.25 Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection (Function Group BUOC) ................................ 3-199
3.25.1 Enabling and Disabling the BUOC Function ............................................................................................... 3-199
3.25.2 Starting and Tripping of BUOC ...................................................................................................................3-200
3.26 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF) ............................................. 3-201
3.26.1 Enabling and Disabling the SOTF Function ................................................................................................ 3-201
3.26.2 Tripping of SOTF ........................................................................................................................................ 3-201
3.27 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG1 and PSIG2) ......................................... 3-203
3.27.1 Disabling and Enabling Protective Signaling ..............................................................................................3-203
3.27.2 Readiness of Protective Signaling ..............................................................................................................3-203
3.27.3 Send and Receive Logic .............................................................................................................................3-205
3.27.4 Monitoring the Transmission Channel ....................................................................................................... 3-208
3.27.5 Protective Signaling Operating Modes .......................................................................................................3-208
3.27.6 Transient Blocking ..................................................................................................................................... 3-214
3.27.7 Weak-Infeed Logic ..................................................................................................................................... 3-215
3.27.8 Echo Function ............................................................................................................................................ 3-217
3.27.9 Testing the Communication Channel .........................................................................................................3-218
3.28 Auto-Reclosing Control (Function Group ARC) ........................................................ 3-219
3.28.1 Enabling and Disabling the ARC Function ..................................................................................................3-219
3.28.2 ARC Blocked .............................................................................................................................................. 3-221
3.28.3 ARC Tripping Times ................................................................................................................................... 3-222
3.28.4 Starting the ARC by Programmable Logic ..................................................................................................3-229
3.28.5 Starting the ARC Cycle .............................................................................................................................. 3-231
3.28.6 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) ..................................................................................................................... 3-232
3.28.7 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR) ..................................................................................................................3-236
3.28.8 Zone Extension ..........................................................................................................................................3-238
3.28.9 ARC after Trip by Thermal Overload Protection .........................................................................................3-240
3.28.10 ARC with Parallel Protection Device ...........................................................................................................3-240
3.28.11 ARC Counters ............................................................................................................................................ 3-243
3.28.12 Start of Operative Time Using Programmable Logic ..................................................................................3-243
3.29 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC) ............................................ 3-245
3.29.1 Disabling and Enabling the ASC Function .................................................................................................. 3-246
3.29.2 ASC Readiness and Blocking ..................................................................................................................... 3-247
3.29.3 Close Request ............................................................................................................................................3-248
3.29.4 Extended Settings for the Close Enable Conditions ................................................................................... 3-251
3.29.5 Considering the CB Close Time ..................................................................................................................3-252
3.29.6 ASC Operating Modes ................................................................................................................................3-252
3.29.7 Testing the ASC Function .......................................................................................................................... 3-259
3.29.8 Integrating the ASC Function into the Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units ...................................3-260
3.29.9 Measured Values Obtained by ASC ............................................................................................................3-261
3.29.10 ASC Counters .............................................................................................................................................3-261
3.30 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC) ................................3-263
3.30.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection ......................................................................................................3-263
3.30.2 Current Measurement ................................................................................................................................3-263
3.30.3 Direction Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-264
4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3.30.4 Load Flow Direction ................................................................................................................................... 3-265

3.31 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups DTOCA and DTOCB) .........3-269
3.31.1 Enabling and Disabling the DTOCA and DTOCB Functions ........................................................................ 3-269
3.31.2 Starting and Tripping .................................................................................................................................3-269
3.32 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT) ................................. 3-271
3.32.1 Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection .................................................................................................... 3-271
3.32.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics ............................................................................................................... 3-272
3.32.3 Determining Trip Time ...............................................................................................................................3-276
3.32.4 Direction Measurement ............................................................................................................................. 3-277
3.32.5 Load Flow Direction ................................................................................................................................... 3-278
3.32.6 Holding Time ............................................................................................................................................. 3-282
3.33 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups IDMTA and IDMTB) ........... 3-283
3.33.1 Enabling and Disabling the IDMTA and IDMTB Functions .......................................................................... 3-283
3.34 Defrost Protection (Function Group DFRST) ............................................................ 3-285
3.34.1 Enabling and Disabling DFRST Functions .................................................................................................. 3-285
3.34.2 Transformer Matching ............................................................................................................................... 3-285
3.35 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM) .......................................... 3-287
3.35.1 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection ................................................................................................3-287
3.35.2 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-287
3.35.3 Parallel line switching ................................................................................................................................ 3-288
3.35.4 Coolant Temperature Effect ...................................................................................................................... 3-288
3.35.5 Minimum Coolant Temperature ................................................................................................................. 3-289
3.35.6 Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition ..................3-290
3.35.7 Relative Replica .........................................................................................................................................3-290
3.35.8 Absolute Replica ........................................................................................................................................3-291
3.35.9 Tripping Characteristics .............................................................................................................................3-291
3.35.10 Warning Signal .......................................................................................................................................... 3-292
3.35.11 Trip ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-293
3.35.12 Cooling ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-294
3.35.13 Resetting ................................................................................................................................................... 3-294
3.36 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>) ......................................3-295
3.36.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection .....................................................................................................3-295
3.36.2 Voltage Monitoring .................................................................................................................................... 3-295
3.37 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>) ........................................ 3-298
3.37.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection ............................................................................3-298
3.37.2 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection .............................................................................. 3-298
3.37.3 Frequency Monitoring ................................................................................................................................3-299
3.37.4 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency Gradient Monitoring (df/dt) ........................3-299
3.37.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient Monitoring (Δf/Δt) ................................ 3-299
3.37.6 fmin/fmax Measurement ...............................................................................................................................3-302
3.38 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF) ........................................ 3-303
3.38.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection .........................................................................3-303
3.38.2 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection .................................................................................................... 3-303
3.38.3 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection ..............................................................................................................3-304
3.39 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM) .................................................. 3-307
3.39.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring ....................................................................................3-307
3.39.2 Variants ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-307
3.39.3 CB Wear Characteristic ..............................................................................................................................3-308
3.39.4 Calculating the CB Wear State .................................................................................................................. 3-309
3.39.5 Operating Modes ....................................................................................................................................... 3-310
3.39.6 Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring ..........................................................................................................3-312
3.39.7 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations ..................................................................................................3-313
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5

3.39.8 Monitoring Ruptured Currents ................................................................................................................... 3-313

3.39.9 Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring .......................................................................................................... 3-314
3.39.10 Resetting Measured Values ....................................................................................................................... 3-314
3.39.11 Setting Measured Values ........................................................................................................................... 3-314
3.40 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT) ....................................................... 3-315
3.40.1 Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function ................................................................................. 3-315
3.40.2 Monitoring Measured Values ..................................................................................................................... 3-315
3.40.3 Monitoring Measured Current Value .......................................................................................................... 3-316
3.40.4 Monitoring Catenary and feeder Currents ................................................................................................. 3-317
3.40.5 Monitoring Plausibility or Defrost Current ..................................................................................................3-318
3.40.6 Monitoring Voltage .................................................................................................................................... 3-319
3.40.7 Monitoring Catenary and feeder Voltages ................................................................................................. 3-320
3.40.8 Monitoring Frequency ................................................................................................................................3-321
3.40.9 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values ........................................................................................ 3-322
3.40.10 Monitoring the Measured “PT 100” Temperature Value ............................................................................ 3-323
3.41 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2) ..................................... 3-324
3.42 TIMER (Function Group TIMER) ............................................................................... 3-332
3.43 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10) ... 3-333
3.43.1 Bay Type Selection .................................................................................................................................... 3-333
3.43.2 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions ................................................................. 3-335
3.43.3 Designation of External Devices ................................................................................................................3-337
3.43.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type .........................................................................................................................3-337
3.43.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units ....................................................... 3-339
3.43.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units ............................................................................ 3-340
3.43.7 Direct Motor Control .................................................................................................................................. 3-352
3.44 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK) ..............................................................3-357
3.44.1 IEC 61850 Reporting ..................................................................................................................................3-358
3.45 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) ....................................................3-360
3.46 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) ............................................................ 3-361
3.46.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control ....................................................................................................3-363
3.47 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT) ..................................................................3-367
3.47.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function .......................................................................................................3-367
3.47.2 Debouncing ............................................................................................................................................... 3-367
3.47.3 Counting Function ..................................................................................................................................... 3-367
3.47.4 Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface ...............................................................3-367
3.47.5 Counter Values Reset ................................................................................................................................ 3-368
4 Design .................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Designs ....................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Dimensional Drawings ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case .....................................................................................................4-6
4.3 Hardware Modules ...................................................................................................... 4-8
5 Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing ...............................................................................................5-4
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type ................................................................... 5-5
5.3 Location Requirements ............................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions ..............................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions ...................................................................................................................................5-6
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply .................................................................... 5-6
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions ...........................................................................................................................5-6
6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-7

5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding ......................................................................5-14
5.6 Connection ................................................................................................................5-16
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits .............................................................................................. 5-16
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface .................................................................................................................. 5-29
5.6.3 Connecting the Communication Interfaces ..................................................................................................5-29
5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams .......................................................................... 5-34
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P438‑418/419/420 ........................................................................................................ 5-34
5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P438‑418/419/420 ..................................................................................... 5-35
6 Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI) ............................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Ordering options ............................................................................................................................................6-1
6.2 Display and Keypad .................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1 Text Display ...................................................................................................................................................6-2
6.2.2 Graphic Display ............................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.3 Display Illumination ....................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.4 Contrast of the Display .................................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.2.5 Short Description of Keys .............................................................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 Display Levels ............................................................................................................. 6-7
6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel ....................................................................................... 6-8
6.5 Display Panels on the Text Display ............................................................................. 6-9
6.6 Display Panels on the Graphic Display ......................................................................6-10
6.7 Menu Tree and Data Points ....................................................................................... 6-11
6.8 List Data Points ......................................................................................................... 6-12
6.9 Configurable Function Keys ...................................................................................... 6-13
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx ................................................................................................ 6-13
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys ....................................................................................................... 6-15
6.10 Changing between Display Levels ............................................................................ 6-16
6.10.1 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions ..........................................................................................6-16
6.10.2 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Text Display) ......................................................................... 6-16
6.10.3 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Graphic Display) ....................................................................6-17
6.11 How to use Cyber Security Features ......................................................................... 6-18
6.11.1 Usage .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-18
6.12 Control at Panel Level ............................................................................................... 6-20
6.12.1 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Text Display) ............................................................................................ 6-20
6.12.2 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Graphic Display) .......................................................................................6-23
6.13 Control at the Menu Tree Level .................................................................................6-36
6.13.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree ....................................................................................................................... 6-36
6.13.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode .............................................................................. 6-37
6.13.3 Change-Enabling Function ...........................................................................................................................6-38
6.13.4 Changing Parameters .................................................................................................................................. 6-41
6.13.5 List Parameters ........................................................................................................................................... 6-44
6.13.6 Memory Readout ......................................................................................................................................... 6-47
6.13.7 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-50
6.13.8 Password-Protected Control Actions ............................................................................................................ 6-52
6.13.9 Changing the Password ............................................................................................................................... 6-54
7 Settings ...............................................................................................................7-1
7.1 Parame ters .............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 D e v i c e I d e n t i f i c a t i o n ............................................................................................................................. 7-4
7.1.2 C o n f i g u r a t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .................................................................................................................. 7-13
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7

7.1.3 F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .......................................................................................................................... 7-112
8 Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

8.1 Operation ................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1 C y c l i c V a l u e s ............................................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 C o n t r o l a n d T e s t i n g ............................................................................................................................8-186
8.1.3 O p e r a t i n g D a t a R e c o r d i n g ................................................................................................................8-199
8.2 E vent s ................................................................................................................... 8-201
8.2.1 E v e n t C o u n t e r s .................................................................................................................................... 8-201
8.2.2 M e a s u r e d E v e n t D a t a .........................................................................................................................8-208
8.2.3 E v e n t R e c o r d i n g .................................................................................................................................. 8-215
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

9.1 Manage IED .................................................................................................................9-2
9.2 IED Details .................................................................................................................. 9-3
9.3 Communications ......................................................................................................... 9-4
9.4 SNTP ........................................................................................................................... 9-7
9.4.1 General Config ...............................................................................................................................................9-7
9.4.2 External Server 1 ...........................................................................................................................................9-7
9.4.3 External Server 2 ...........................................................................................................................................9-7
9.5 Dataset Definitions ..................................................................................................... 9-8
9.6 GOOSE Publishing ....................................................................................................... 9-9
9.6.1 System/LLN0 ................................................................................................................................................. 9-9
9.7 GOOSE Subscribing ...................................................................................................9-11
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs .............................................................................................................................................9-11
9.8 Report Control Blocks ............................................................................................... 9-14
9.8.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.9 Controls .....................................................................................................................9-15
9.9.1 Control Objects ............................................................................................................................................9-15
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control ................................................................................................................................. 9-15
9.10 Measurements .......................................................................................................... 9-17
9.11 Configurable Data Attributes .................................................................................... 9-18
9.11.1 System/LLN0 ............................................................................................................................................... 9-18
10 Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

10.1 Safety Instructions .................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Commissioning Tests ................................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.1 Preparation ..................................................................................................................................................10-5
10.2.2 Cyber Security Commission .........................................................................................................................10-7
10.2.3 Testing .........................................................................................................................................................10-9
10.2.4 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs ............................................................................................................... 10-9
10.2.5 Checking the Output Relays ...................................................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.6 Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals ..................................................................................... 10-10
10.2.7 Checking the Transformer Connections .....................................................................................................10-10
10.2.8 Checking the Protection Function ..............................................................................................................10-10
10.2.9 Checking Control Functions ....................................................................................................................... 10-16
10.2.10 Completing Commissioning ....................................................................................................................... 10-17
11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1
12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area .................................................. 12-2
8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

12.2 Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-4

12.3 Analog Input Circuits .................................................................................................12-5
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs .................................................................................................... 12-6
12.5 Binary Outputs .......................................................................................................... 12-7
12.6 Communication Interfaces ........................................................................................ 12-8
13 Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1
14 Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1
15 Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1
A1 Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1
A2 Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1
A3 Glossary ............................................................................................................A3-1
Modules ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Symbols ...................................................................................................................................... A3-1
Examples of Signal Names ......................................................................................................... A3-7
Symbols Used ............................................................................................................................. A3-8
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A4.1 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101 (Companion Standard)
.................................................................................................................................. A4-1
A4.1.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-1
A4.2 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103 ........................................................ A4-9
A4.2.1 Interoperability ............................................................................................................................................A4-9
A5 Version History ................................................................................................. A5-1

A5.1 Version History – MiCOM P30 .................................................................................... A5-1
A5.1.1 P438 ‑301 ‑40x ‑601 … ‑309 ‑4xx ‑617 .................................................................................................. A5-1
A5.2 Version History – Easergy MiCOM 30 ...................................................................... A5-34
A5.2.1 P438 ‑311 ‑4xx ‑661 ff ...............................................................................................................................A5-34
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9

10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
1 Application and Scope
1.1 Overview
The P438 catenary protection device is used for selective short-circuit and
overload protection of catenaries and is designed for various applications in
single- or multi-voltage systems with nominal frequencies of 25, 50 or 60 Hz
(settable).
The multitude of protection functions incorporated into the P438 enable the user
to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of catenaries.
In addition, many supplementary protective functions are incorporated in the
devices. The P438 provides four setting groups for easy adaptation to varying
system operation conditions. Due to the powerful, freely configurable logic of the
device, special applications can be accommodated.
Fig. 1-1: P438 in a 40 TE sized case with text display.
Fig. 1-2: P438 in a 40 TE sized case with graphic display.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-1

P438 1 Application and Scope
Fig. 1-3: P438 in a 84 TE sized case with text display.
Fig. 1-4: P438 in a 84 TE sized case with graphic display.
The control functions are designed for the control of up to ten electrically
operated switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the
bay of a railway substation.
The number of external auxiliary devices required is largely minimized by the
integration of binary signal inputs operating from any auxiliary voltage, and
versatile relay output contacts, by the direct connection option for current and
voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive interlocking capabilities. This
simplifies the handling of switch protection and control technology from planning
to commission.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device
parameters and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing
nonpermissible switching operations.
All main functions are individually configurable. The user can adapt the device
flexibly to the scope of protection and control required in each particular
application.
1-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1 Application and Scope P438
Protection functions P438
ANSI IEC 61850 Function

Function
group
21 DisPDISn DIST Distance protection ✓

● 4 zones, settable forward and backward parameters ✓
● Train start detection for 2nd, 3rd and 4th zones ✓
● Settable zone extension ✓
● Wrong phase coupling protection ✓
● Classic single feed / ✓/
Single feed w. sum I / ✓/
Autotransformer feed ✓
DELTA Biased high impedance protection (Delta I functionality) ✓
30 / 74 CALHx/ MCMON Measuring circuit supervision voltage and plausibility ✓

PlsPhsPDIF1 differential current
50BU BocPhsPTOCx BUOC Backup definite time overcurrent protection, two stages ✓
50 / 27 SofPhsPSOF1 SOTF Switch on to fault protection ✓
85 - 21 PSCH1/2 PSIG1/2 Protective signaling (two independant channels) ✓
79 RREC1 ARC Auto-reclosing control ✓
25 RSYN1 ASC Automatic synchronism check (✓)
50TD DtpPhsPTOCx DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages ✓

67 ● Short circuit direction determination, per stage ✓
50V ● Undervoltage clearance, per stage ✓
50HS ● High current stage with instantaneous tripping ✓
50TD DtpPhAPTOCx/ DTOCA/ Definite time overcurrent protection, two stages, for ✓
DtpPhBPTOCx DTOCB "Autotranformer feed" only
51 ItpPhsPTOCx IDMT Inverse time overcurrent protection, single-stage ✓

67 ● Short circuit detection determination ✓
50V ● Undervoltage clearance ✓
51 ItpPhAPTOCx/ IDMTA/ Inverse time overcurrent protection, single stage, for ✓

ItpPhBPTOCx IDMTB "Autotranformer feed" only
DfrPhsPDIF1 DFRST Defrost differential current protection ✓
49 ThmPTTR1 THERM Thermal overload protection with parallel line switching ✓

● Coolant temperature measuring (using MEASI) (✓)
27 / 59 VtpPhsPTOVx/ V<> Over- /Undervoltage Protection ✓

VtpPhsPTUVx
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-3

Protection functions P438

Function
group
81 FrqPTOFx/ f<> Over- /Underfrequency protection ✓

FrqPTUFx
50BF RBRF1 CBF Circuit breaker failure protection ✓
XCBR1/2 CBM Circuit breaker supervision ✓
LIMIT Limit value monitoring ✓
LGC PloGGIO1-4 LOGIC Programmable logic 128
LGC PloGGIO5 LOG_2 Programmable logic with extended timers 4
Communication functions P438

Function
group
16S COMM1, 2 communication interfaces serial, RS 422 / 485 or (✓)

COMM2 fiber optic
CLK IRIGB Time synchronization IRIG-B (✓)
COMM3 Protection communication interface InterMiCOM, (✓)

serial, RS 422/485, RS 232 or FO
16E IEC Communication interface Ethernet (✓)
16E GosGGIO1 GOOSE GOOSE communication IEC 61850 (✓)
Measuring inputs P438

Function
group
Phase currents / Plausibility or Defrost protection 2/1

return current
Voltages 2
Binary inputs and outputs P438

Function 40 TE 84 TE
group
INP Optical coupler inputs 4 … 50 4 … 56
OUTP Output relays (incl. Opt. high break 8 … 32 8 … 48

outputs (max 4))
1-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Measured value functions, analog inputs and outputs P438

Function
group
Mmuxxx Measuring ✓
26 RtdGGIO1 MEASI RTD input (✓)

IdcGGIO1 Measuring data input 20 mA, one settable input (✓)
value
MEASO Measuring data output 20 mA, two settable output (✓)

values
Control functions P438

Function
group
52 XCBRx / DEVxx Switchgear control and monitoring (depend on (3)/(10)

XSWIx / config)
CSWIx
CtlGAPC2 CMD_1 Single-pole commands 26
CtlGAPC1 SIG_1 Single-pole signals 64
LGC CILOx ILOCK Interlocking logic 32
CntGGIO1 COUNT Binary counters 4
TIMER Timer 4
Miscellaneous functions P438

Function
group
CS Cyber Security (✓)
LLN0.SGCB PSS Parameter subset selection ✓
PTRCx / FT_RC Fault recording

RDRE1
RFLOx FT_DA Fault Locator with adaptive forward/backward ✓

reactance characteristic
FKT_T Function keys (only for text display) (✓)
✓ = Standard; (✓) = Ordering option.

"IEC 61850" = IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2.
For a list of all available function groups see the Appendix.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-5

Communication 16S 16S 16E 77 CLK Self

IEC COMM3 IRIGB Monitoring Recording and
COMM1 COMM2
Data Overload rec.
Acquisition
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ...
via RS485 or Fiber optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier LGC 85
LIMIT Metering Fault rec.
resp. via RJ45 or Fiber optics using IEC 61850 LOGIC PSIG
Plausibility/
21 50/27 50TD/50V/67 50HS 51/50V/67 49 50BF 79 25 27/59 81
Defrost-line DIST SOTF DTOC DTOC IDMT THERM CBF CBM ARC ASC DFRST V<> DELTA
f <>
I Plaus / I Dfrst
Vref
Further Always
30/74 50BU
options available
DELTA MCMON BUOC
Catenary protection device

MEASI MEASO MiCOM P438
Communication 16S 16S 16E CLK Self

IEC COMM3 IRIGB Monitoring Recording and
COMM1 COMM2
Data Overload rec.
Acquisition
to SCADA / substation control / RTU / modem ...
via RS485 or Fiber optics
using IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier LGC 85
LIMIT Metering Fault rec.
resp. via RJ45 or Fiber optics using IEC 61850 LOGIC PSIG
Plausibility/ 21 50/27 50TD/50V/67 50HS 50TD 51/50V/67 51 49 50BF 79 27/59 81

DIST SOTF DTOC DTOC DTOCA IDMT IDMTA THERM CBF CBM ARC DFRST V<> f <> DELTA
Defrost-line
IA
IB Φ
I Plaus / I Dfrst
VA
VB Φ
Further Always
30/74 50BU 50TD 51
options available
DELTA MCMON BUOC DTOCB IDMTB
Catenary protection device

MEASI MEASO MiCOM P438
Fig. 1-5: Functional diagram for P438.
1-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1.2 General Functions

Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups (except
for ILOCK) and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the
specific application requirements. Unused or cancelled function groups are
hidden to the user, thus simplifying the menu.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging
application of the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the
other hand simple and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be
included in or excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch
"General Functions" of the menu tree.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-7

1.3 Control Functions

Switchgear contact positions are acquired by binary signal inputs, that can signal
and process a maximum of 10 two-pole contact positions. Output relays are
available to control a maximum of 6 two-pole switchgear units.
Up to 56 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they
are processed according to their primary significance (e.g. CB readiness). Each
binary signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can
have the debouncing and chatter suppression from eight groups assigned, for
which the debouncing and chatter time can be individually set.
For the acquisition of binary counters, up to four binary inputs may be
configured. The contents of these counters are transmitted cyclically via the
serial link. The counter values are stored so that they are not lost if the supply
voltage should fail. Counting continues from the stored value as the initial value
when the P438 restarts.
The P438 sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and
validity to carry out such commands, and it then monitors the operating time of
the switchgear units. If the protection device detects that a switchgear unit has
failed, it will signal this information (e.g. by configuration to a LED indicator).
Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the P438 checks
if this new switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. The
interlocking logic is stored in form of bay interlocking, with and without station
interlocking, for each Bay Panel in the default setting. The interlocking conditions
can be adapted to the actual bay and station topology. Interlocking display and
operation correspond to the programmable logic.
When the P438 is included in a station control system the local interlocking can
easily be integrated with the overall system interlocking.
When the P438 is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is
applied without station interlocking.
If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is
issued. If a non-permissible status would result from the switching action then
the issuing of such a switching command is refused and an alarm is issued.
If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary
outputs can be freely utilized for other purposes.
Besides issuing switching commands binary outputs may also be triggered by
persistent commands.
1-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1.4 Global Functions

In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P438 is
equipped with the following global functions:
● Parameter subset selection
● System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing
and operation
● Operating data recording
(time-tagged event logging)
● Overload data acquisition
● Overload recording
(time-tagged event logging)
● Fault recording
(time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the three
phase currents, the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-9

1.5 Design
The P438 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust
aluminum case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one
digital p/c board.
1-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1.6 Configurable Function Keys
Configurable function keys are available on the HMI with text display only.
To the right of the text display, there are six freely configurable function keys
available. These may be used for easy control operation access.
See also Chapter 6, (p. 6-1).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-11

1.7 Inputs and Outputs

The following inputs and outputs are available with the device:
● 3 current measuring inputs
● 2 voltage measuring inputs
● Up to 6 (12) binary signal inputs (optical couplers) and 6 (12) output relays
for control of 6 (6) switchgear units (2-pole contacts)
● Up to 56 binary signal inputs (optical couplers) with freely configurable
function assignment for individual control or protection signals
● Up to 44 output relays with freely configurable function assignment for
individual control or protection applications
● Up to 4 high break output relays applicable for DC circuits with max. 2500
W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A at 250 VDC
Depending on the order options (Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)) there are several more
modules available. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)) give an
overview of the combinations of modules that are technically possible. The
module list (Section 4.3, (p. 4-8)) details the designations that appear in the
location diagrams.
With the maximum number of binary signal inputs and output relays fitted, 10
switchgear units can be controlled and 6 of these can be 2pole controlled by
using pre-defined standard bay-types.
The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs can
be set.
The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to
250 V DC. As an option binary signal input modules with a higher operate
threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended
range. The nominal voltage ranges are 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As
an option there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to
60 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional PT 100 input (on the analog module Y(4I)) is lead-compensated and
balanced and linearized for PT 100 resistance thermometers as per IEC 751.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring,
zero suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input
variable via 20 adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data
and stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct
current via the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined
by 3 adjustable interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA,
for example) for slave-side open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine
scaling, and a limitation to lower nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where
sufficient output relays are available, a selectable measured variable can be
output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
1-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1.8 Control and Display

Local control panel, with two ordering options:
● Display:
o Text display: LC-display with 4 lines of 20 characters each
o Graphic display: LC-display with 16 lines of 21 characters each with a
resolution of 128 x 128 pixels
● LED indicators:
o Text display: 23 multi-colored LED indicators, with 18 freely configurable
function assignments for the colors red, green or yellow
o Graphic display: 17 multi-colored LED indicators, with 12 freely
configurable function assignments for the colors red, green or yellow
o Various operating modes and flashing functions available with the LED
indicators
● PC interface
● One or two communication interface(s) for connection to a substation
control system (optional)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-13

1.9 Information Interfaces

Information exchange is done via the local control panel, the PC interface and
optional Communication modules for serial and Ethernet based communication.
The serial communication module offers settable protocols conforming to IEC
60870-5-103, IEC 60870-5-101, DNP 3.0, Modbus and Courier. The second
communication interface (COMM2) conforms to IEC 60870-5-103 and is intended
for remote setting access only.
The 4 available Ethernet modules variants provide IEC 61850 communication
with single Ethernet or alternatively redundancy PRP, HSR or RSTP protocols with
RJ45 wire or LC fiber optic connectors and RJ45 service interface.
External time synchronization can be done using a configured binary input, using
one of the communication protocols or by using the optional IRIG-B signal input.
A direct link to another protection device (out of the platform Easergy MiCOM 30)
can be set up by applying the optional InterMiCOM interface (COMM3).
1-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P438, version ‑311 ‑418/419/420 ‑661.
Declaration of Conformity
The product designated “P438 Rail Catenary Protection Device” has been
designed and manufactured in conformance with the EMC and safety standards
IEC 60255‑26 and IEC 60255‑27 and with the “EMC Directive” and the “Low
Voltage Directive” issued by the Council of the European Community.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-1

P438 2 Technical Data
2.2 General Data
2.2.1 General Device Data
Design
● Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation, or
● Flush-mounted case for 19″ cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
● Vertical ± 30°.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and IEC 60529.
● IP 52 for the front panel.
● Flush-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case (excluding the rear connection area)
o IP 20 for the rear connection area, pin-terminal connection
o IP 10 for the rear connection area, ring-terminal connection
● Surface-mounted case:
o IP 50 for the case
o IP 50 for the fully enclosed connection area with the supplied rubber
grommets fitted
Weight
● 40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
● 84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Section 4.2, (p. 4-4)), and the location and
terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)).
Terminals
PC interface (X6)
● EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin
Communication interfaces COMM1 to COMM3

● Fiber (X7, X8 and X31, X32)
o F-SMA optical fiber connection per IEC 60874‑2 (for plastic fibers), or
o optical fiber connection BFOC-ST® connector 2.5 per IEC 60874‑10‑1 (for
glass fibers).
(ST® is a registered trademark of AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors.)
● Wire leads (X9, X10 and X33)
o M2 threaded terminal ends for wire cross-sections up to 1.5 mm².
● RS232 (X34) (for COMM3 / InterMiCOM only)
o EIA RS232 (DIN 41652) connector, type D-Sub, 9-pin.
2-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2 Technical Data P438
Communication interface IEC 61850

● Fiber (X13, X14)
o Industry Standard Small Form Pluggable (SFP) package, LC duplex
connector optical interface.
● Wire leads (X15)
o RJ45 connector.
● IRIG-B Interface (X11)
o 3 pin terminal block.
Current measuring inputs (conventional inputs)

● Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections ≤ 4 mm², or:
● Threaded terminal, ring-terminal connection: M4.
Other inputs and outputs

● Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3, self-centering with cage
clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm², or:
● Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4.
Creepage Distances and Clearances

● Per IEC 60255-27.
● Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V,
● overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-3

2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
2.3.1.1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
Conducted Emission
Per IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 22 Class A.
● 0.15 - 0.5 MHz, 79 dBμV (quasi peak) 66 dBμV (average).
● 0.5 - 30 MHz, 73 dBμV (quasi peak) 60 dBμV (average).
Radiated Emission
Per IEC 60255-26 and CISPR 11 Class A.
● 30 - 230 MHz, 40 dBμV / m at 10 m measurement distance.
● 230 - 1 GHz, 47 dBμV / m at 10 m measurement distance.
100 kHz and 1 MHz Damped Oscillatory Test

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-18. level 3.
● Frequency: 100 kHz and 1 MHz.
● Common mode test level: ±2.5 kV.
● Differential mode test level : ±1 kV.
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-2, severity level 4.
● 15 kV discharge in air to user interface, display, to all communication ports
(outer earthed shell).
● 8 kV contact discharge to any metal part of the front of the product.
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Field

● 10 V / m, 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4 GHz to 2.7 GHz with 1 kHz 80 % AM.
● Spot tests at 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 380 MHz, 450 MHz, 900 MHz, 1850 MHz,
and 2150 MHz.
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Test

Per IEC 60255-26, Zone A.
● ±4 kV, 5 kHz applied directly to auxiliary supply, CTs, VTs, opto inputs,
output relays.
● ±2 kV, 5 kHz applied to communication ports.
Per IEC 61000-4-4, Severity level 4.
● ±4.0 kV, 5 kHz applied to all power supply and earth port.
● ±2.0 kV, 5 kHz applied to all other ports.
EFT/Burst waveform parameter.
● Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns.
● Impulse duration (50 % value): 50 ns.
● Burst duration: 15 ms.
● Burst cycle: 300 ms.
● Source impedance: 50 Ω.
2-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Power Frequency Immunity

Per IEC 60255-26, severity Zone A.
Phase-to-phase
● RMS value 150 V.
● Coupling resistance 100 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.1 μF, for 10 s.
Phase-to-ground
● RMS value 300 V.
● Coupling resistance 220 Ω.
● Coupling capacitor 0.47 μF, for 10 s.
To comply with this standard, it is suggested to set the parameter (010 220)
IN P: F il ter to 6 [steps].
Surge Immunity Test

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-5, severity Zone A or level 4.
● ±4 kV line to earth and ±2 kV line to line for power supply, CTs, VTs, opto
inputs and output contacts.
● ±4 kV cable shielded layer to ground for communication ports.
Surge waveform parameter.
● Open-circuit voltage front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 μs.
● Short-circuit current front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 μs.
CDN parameter.
● 12 Ω / 9 uF (line to earth) and 2 Ω / 18 uF (line to line) for power supply
port.
● 42 Ω / 0.5 uF (line to earth) and 42 Ω / 0.5 uF (line to line) for IO ports.
● 2 Ω cable shielding layer to ground for shielding communication ports.
Conducted Immunity Test

● Test level: 10 V.
● Test frequency range: 150 kHz - 80 MHz.
● Modulation: 1 kHz sine wave, 80 % AM modulated.
● Spot test frequency: 27 MHz, 68 MHz.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Per IEC 61000-4-8, severity level 4.
● Test frequency: 50 Hz
● Test level: 30 A / m applied continuously, 300 A / m applied for 3 s.
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 60255-26 and IEC 61000-4-17.
● Test level: 15 % of rated DC value.
2.3.1.2 Insulation
Insulation Resistance
Per IEC 60255-27.
Insulation resistance > 100 MΩ at 500 Vdc.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-5

Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per IEC 60255-27.
Pollution degree 3, Overvoltage category III.
High Voltage Withstand (Dielectric) Test

Per IEC 60255-27.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute between RJ45 ports and the case earth (ground).
● 2 kV rms AC for 1 minute between all other terminals connected together
and the case earth. Between all terminals of independent circuits.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute, across open watchdog contacts.
● 1 kV rms AC for 1 minute, across open contacts of output relays.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 60255-27.
● Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs.
Peak value: 1.5 kV, 0.5 J.
Between RJ45 ports and the case earth (ground).
● Front time: 1.2 μs, Time to half-value: 50 μs,
Peak value: 5 kV, 0.5 J.
Between all other independent circuits and the case earth, also between all
terminals of independent circuits.
2.3.1.3 Environmental test
Ambient Temperature Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-1 & IEC 60068-2-2.
● Operating temperature range: -25°C to +55°C (or -13°F to +131°F).
● Storage and transit: -25°C to +70°C (or -13°F to +158°F).
Ambient Humidity Range Test

Per IEC 60068-2-78.
● 21 days at 93 % relative humidity and +40°C.
Per IEC 60068-2-14.
● 5 cycles, -25°C to +55 °C, 1°C / min rate of change.
Per IEC 60068-2-30.
● Damp heat cyclic, six cycles(12 hours + 12 hours), 93 % RH, +25°C to
+55°C.
Corrosive Environment Test

Per IEC 60068-2-60: 1995, Part 2, Test Ke, Method (class) 3
Industrial corrosive environment/ poor environmental control, mixed gas flow
test.
● 21 days at 75 % relative humidity and 30°C (86°F) with exposure to
elevated concentrations of H2S, NO2, Cl2 and SO2.
2.3.1.4 Mechanical Test

Applicable to the following case variants:
● Surface-mounted 40 TE or 84 TE case
● Flush-mounted 40 TE or 84 TE case
2-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Vibration Test
Per IEC 60255‑21-1, test severity class 1.
Frequency range in operation

● 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm, and
● 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport

● 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per IEC 60255-21-2.
Acceleration and pulse duration:
● Shock Response tests are carried out to verify full operability (during
operation), test severity class 1:
5 g for 11 ms.
● Shock Withstand tests are carried out to verify the endurance (during
transport), test severity class 1:
15 g for 11 ms.
● Shock bump tests are carried out to verify permanent shock (during
transport), test severity class 1:
10 g for 16 ms.
Seismic Test
Per IEC 60255‑21‑3, test procedure A, class 1.
Frequency range
● Horizontal axes of vibration: 1 Hz to 8 Hz with 3.5 mm peak displacement, 8
to 35 Hz with 10 m / s² peak acceleration. 2 x 1 cycle.
● Vertical axis of vibration: 1 Hz to 8 Hz with 1.5 mm peak displacement, 8 to
35 Hz with 5 m / s² peak acceleration. 1 x 1 cycle.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-7

2.4 Environmental Conditions
Temperatures
Per IEC 60255-1 & IEC 60068-2-1
Recommended temperature range

● -5°C to +55°C [+23°F to +131°F].
Limit temperature range

● Operation: -25°C to +55°C [-13°F to +131°F].
● Storage and transport: -25°C to +70°C [-13°F to +158°F].
Ambient Humidity Range

● ≤ 75 % relative humidity (annual mean).
● 21 days at ≤ 95 % relative humidity and 40°C [104°F].
● Condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.5 Inputs and Outputs
2.5.1 Measuring Inputs
Frequency
● Nominal frequency fnom: 25 Hz, 50 Hz and 60 Hz (settable).
● Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom.
Current Measuring Inputs

● Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (settable).
● Nominal consumption per phase:
o 1 A CT burden: < 0.1 VA
o 5 A CT burden: < 0.3 VA
● Load rating:
o continuous: 4·Inom,
o for 10 s: 30·Inom,
o for 1 s: 100·Inom.
● Nominal surge current: 250·Inom.
Voltage Measuring Inputs

● Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (settable).
● Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC.
● Load rating:
o continuous: 150 V AC
o for 10 s: 300 V AC
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-9

2.5.2 Binary Signal Inputs

Threshold pickup and drop-off points as per ordering option
● Standard variant with switching threshold at 65% of 24 V DC (VA,min)
Special variants with switching thresholds from 58% to 72% of the nominal input
voltage (i.e. definitively “low” for VA < 58% of the nominal supply voltage,
definitively “high” for VA > 72% of the nominal supply voltage).
● Special variant with switching threshold at 65% of 110 V DC (VA,nom).
Power consumption per input

● 18 V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC : 0.5 W ± 30%,
VA > 110 V DC: VA ·5 mA ± 30%.
● Special variants:
VA > switching threshold: VA ·5 mA ± 30%.
The standard variant of binary signal inputs (opto couplers) is recommended in

most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 19 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds are provided for applications where
a higher switching threshold is expressly required.
The maximum voltage permitted for all binary signal inputs is 300 V DC.
2-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.5.3 IRIG‑B Interface

● Minimum / maximum input voltage level
Demodulated: 2 Vpp / 6 Vpp (peak-peak)
Modulated: a few hundred mVpp / 10 Vpp
● Electrical isolation: 2 kVrms
2.5.4 Direct Current Input

● Input current: 0 to 26 mA
● Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
● Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
● Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
● Input load: 100 Ω
● Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
● Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
● Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable).
2.5.5 Resistance Thermometer

Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1.
● Value range: ‑40.0°C to +215.0°C (‑40°F to +419°F).
● 3-wire configuration: max. 20 Ω per conductor.
● Open and short-circuited input permitted.
● Open-circuit monitoring: Θ > +215°C and Θ < -40°C (Θ > +419°F and
Θ < -40°F).
2.5.6 Direct Current Output

● Output current: 0 to 20 mA
● Maximum permissible load: 500 Ω
● Maximum output voltage: 15 V
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-11

2.5.7 Output Relays
Binary I/O Module X(6I 6O) Binary I/O Modules X(4H) All other modules
for switchgear control. with high-break contacts,
applicable to DC circuits
only.
Rated 250 V DC 250 V DC 250 V DC, 250 V AC.

voltage: 250 V AC
Continuous 8A 10 A 5A
current:
Short- ● 30 A for 0.5 s ● 250 A for 0.03 s, 30 A for 0.5 s.

duration ● 30 A for 3 s
current:
Making 1000 W (VA) at 30 A 1000 W (VA) at

capacity: L/R = 40 ms. L/R = 40 ms.
Breaking ● 0.2 A at 220 V DC and ● 7500 W resistive or ● 0.2 A at 220 V DC and

capacity: L/R = 40 ms, 30 A at 250 V DC, L/R = 40 ms,
● 4 A at 230 V AC and Maximum values: 30 A ● 4 A at 230 V AC and
cos φ = 0.4. and 300 V DC. cos φ = 0.4.
● 2500 W inductive
(L/R = 40 ms) or 10 A
at 250 V DC,
Maximum values: 10 A
and 300 V DC.
Operating less than 5 ms less than 0.2 ms less than 5 ms

time:
Reset time: less than 5 ms less than 8 ms less than 5 ms
2.5.8 BCD Measured Data Output

Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
2-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.6 Interfaces
2.6.1 Local Control Panel

Input or output
● Graphic display ordering option: With 12 keys and an LC-display consisting
of 16 lines and 21 columns (128 x 128 pixels)
● Text display ordering option: With 13 keys (6 freely configurable function
keys) and a 4 x 20 alphanumeric character liquid crystal display (LCD)
State and fault signals

● Graphic display ordering option: 17 LED indicators (with 12 freely
configurable function assignments for three colors (independent
configuration in red, green and yellow)
● Text display ordering option: 23 LED indicators (with 18 freely configurable
function assignments for three colors (independent configuration in red,
green and yellow)
2.6.2 PC Interface
● Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
2.6.3 Serial Communication Interface

The communication modules can be provided with up to three communication
channels, depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be
equipped to connect wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to
connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on
IEC 870-5‑103, IEC 60870‑5‑101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set.
● Transmission rate: 300 to 64000 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 2 can only be operated with the interface protocol
based on IEC 60870-5-103.
● Transmission rate: 300 or 57600 baud (adjustable).
Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication
schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two
protection devices (InterMiCOM protective interface).
● Transmission rate: 600 or 19200 baud (adjustable).
Wire Leads
● Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
● Distance to be bridged
o Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
o Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-13

Plastic Fiber Connection

● Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
● Optical output: min. -7.5 dBm
● Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
● Optical input: max. -5 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 45 m
(Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at
both ends, a system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation)
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

● Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

● Optical output: min. -16 dBm
● Distance to be bridged: max. 1,400 m
2.6.4 Ethernet Communication Interface

100 Base-TX Interface (in accordance with IEEE 802.3 and IEC 61850)
Optical Fiber (-X13, -X14)

● Industry Standard Small Form Pluggable (SFP) package, LC duplex
connector optical interface
● Glass fiber connection G 50/125:
o Optical central wavelength: typ. 1308 nm
o Optical output: min. −23.5 dBm
o Loss of signal - de-asserted: max. −32 dBm
o Loss of signal - asserted: min. −45 dBm
o Optical input: max. −14 dBm
● Glass fiber connection G 62.5/125:
o Optical central wavelength: typ. 1308 nm
o Optical output: min. −20 dBm
o Loss of signal - de-asserted: max. −32 dBm
o Loss of signal - asserted: min. −45 dBm
o Optical input: max. −14 dBm
2-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Wire Leads (-X15)

● RJ45, 1.5 kV isolation
● Transmission rate: 100 Mbit/s
2.6.5 IRIG‑B Interface

● Modulated signal (B122 format)
● Demodulated signal (B000 format)
● Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
● BCD- coded variable data (daily)
● 2kVrms Dielectric withstand
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-15

2.7 Information Output

Counters, measured data, and indications: see chapter “Information and Control
Functions”.
2-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.8 Settings – Typical Characteristic Data
2.8.1 Main Function

● Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
● Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
2.8.2 Distance Protection

● Directional sensitivity up to 6 s after fault detection: ∞
● Directional sensitivity after 6 s after fault detection and for switching on to
fault: 200 mV ± 10%
● Operating frequency 25 Hz:
o Maximum tripping time (with static high break output, tZx=0):
In zone area up to 85% of characteristic boundary and and load blinding
area with V > 0.1 Vnom: ≤ 35 ms
In zone area above 85% of characteristic boundary or and load blinding
area with V ≤ 0.1 Vnom: ≤ 70 ms
Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:
o Maximum tripping time (with normal output relay, tZx=0):
In zone area up to 90% of characteristic boundary and and load blinding
area with V > 0.1 Vnom: ≤ 25 ms
In zone area above 90% of characteristic boundary or and load blinding
area with V ≤ 0.1 Vnom: ≤ 50 ms
● Fault detection and measurement resetting ratio: 0.95
2.8.3 High Impedance Protection

● Shortest tripping time: approx. 2.5 cycles
● Resetting ratio (hysteresis): tDelta + 150 ms
with tDelta = Blocked: 150 ms
2.8.4 Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

● Maximum tripping time (with static high break output, tIx=0):
High-current stage I>H: ≤ 3 ms
All other current stages: ≤ 35 ms (measured from 0 to 2-fold operate value)
● Starting reset time ≤ 45 ms (measured from 2-fold operate value to 0)
● Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-17

2.8.5 Time-Voltage Protection

● Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value
to 1.2-fold operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-
fold operate value):
o Operating frequency 25 Hz:
Maximum tripping time: ≤ 100ms
o Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:
● Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal
value or measured variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
o Operating frequency 25 Hz:
o Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:
● Resetting ratio for V<>:
o 1% to 10% (adjustable)
2-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
2.9.1.1 Definitions
Reference Conditions
● Quasi-stationary sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom (frequency
protection excepted), total harmonic distortion ≤ 2 %, ambient
temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.1.2 Distance Protection

● Impedance measurement Z<:
Deviation: ± 5 % of the setting or ± 10 mΩ
● Direction determination: ± 5°
● Harmonics adaptation: ± 5 %
2.9.1.3 High Impedance Protection
Operate values
● Delta I / Delta Phi deviation: ± 3% of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal
value
● Line reactance measurement X<:
Deviation at ϕ = 0°, 90°: ± 3% of the setting
Deviation at ϕ = 30°, 60°: ± 5% of the setting
● Harmonics dependence: ± 5% of the setting
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-19

2.9.1.4 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring
Operate values Idiff>, Vmin<

● Deviation: ± 3 %
2.9.1.5 Backup, Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection
Operating frequency 25 Hz:

● Operate values: ± 8 % of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
Direction determination: ± 10°
Operating frequency 50, 60 Hz:

● Operate values: ± 5 % of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
Direction determination: ± 5°
2.9.1.6 Thermal Overload Protection
Operate value Θ
● Deviation: ± 5% of the setting or ± 1% of the nominal value
2.9.1.7 Time-Voltage Protection
Operate values
● V<>: ± 1% (in the range 0.6 to 1.4 Vnom)
2.9.1.8 Frequency Protection
Operate values f<>

● ± 5 mHz
Operate values df/dt

● ± 100 mHz/s
2.9.1.9 Direct Current Input

2.9.1.10 Resistance Thermometer

● Deviation: ± 2°C (in the range −40°C ... 120°C)
2.9.1.11 Analog Measured Data Output

● Output residual ripple with max. load: ± 1 %
2-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages
2.9.2.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion
≤ 2 %, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
2.9.2.2 Definite-time stages

● Deviation: ± 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
2.9.2.3 Inverse-time stages

● Deviation when I ≥ 2 Iref: ± 5% + 10 to 25 ms
● For “extremely inverse” IEC characteristics and for thermal overload
characteristics: ± 7.5% + 10 to 20 ms
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
2.9.3.1 Definitions
Reference conditions
● Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion ≤
2%, ambient temperature 20°C (68°F), and nominal auxiliary voltage
VA,nom.
Deviation
● Deviation relative to the nominal values under reference conditions.
2.9.3.2 Operating Data Measurement
Measuring input currents

● Deviation: ± 1%
Measuring input voltages

● Deviation: ± 0.5%
Active power / active energy

● Deviation: ± 2% when cos φ = ± 0.7
Reactive power / reactive energy

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-21

Load angle
● Deviation: ± 1°
Frequency
● Deviation: ± 10 mHz
2.9.3.3 Fault Data
Short-circuit current and voltage

Short-circuit impedance, reactance, and fault location

2.9.3.4 Internal Clock
With free running internal clock

● Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval ≤ 1 min)

● Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface

● ± 1 ms
2-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.10 Resolution of the Fault Data Acquisition
2.10.1 Time Resolution

● 25 Hz - 20 samples per cycle
2.10.2 Phase Currents System

Dynamic range
● 25 Inom
Amplitude resolution
● at Inom = 1 A: 2.0 mA rms
● at Inom = 5 A: 10.1 mA rms
2.10.3 Voltage
Dynamic range
● 150 V
Amplitude resolution
● 9.2 mV rms
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-23

2.11 Recording Functions
2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories
Operating Data Memory
Scope for signals

● All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of up to 2048 different
logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● The 1000 most recent signals.
Monitoring Signal Memory
Scope for signals

● All self-monitoring logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● Up to 30 signals.
Overload Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent overload events
Scope for signals

● All signals relevant for an overload event from a total of up to
2048 different logic state signals.
Depth for signals

● 200 entries per overload event.
Fault Memory
Number
● The 8 most recent faults.
Scope for signals and fault values

● All fault-relevant signals from a total of up to 2048 different logic state
signals.
● Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth for signals and fault values

● 200 entries per fault event
● max. number of cycles per fault can be set by user;
820 periods in total for all faults, i.e.:
o 32.8 s (for fnom = 25 Hz)
Resolution of the Recorded Data

● As per Section 2.10, (p. 2-23).
2-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

2.12 Power Supply

Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom
● 24 to 60 V DC or 60 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option).
Operating range for direct voltage

● 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 15 % VA,nom.
Operating range for alternating voltage

● 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom.
Nominal burden
● … where VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration
o 40 TE case, relays de-energized/energized: approx. 12.6 W / 34.1 W
o 84 TE case, relays de-energized/energized): approx. 14.5 W / 42.3 W
Start-up peak current

● < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time

● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 220 V DC (upper range supply)
● ≥ 50 ms for interruption of VA ≥ 60 V DC (lower range supply)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-25

2.13 Current Transformer Specifications
2.13.1 Symbols
The following symbols are used in accordance with IEC 61869 standards:
Ipn Rated primary current (nominal primary current) of the CT

Isn Rated secondary current (nominal secondary current) of the CT
Ipsc Rated primary (symmetrical) short-circuit current
KsscRated symmetrical short-circuit current factor:
I psc
K ssc = I pn
Iref Reference current of IDMT protection element

Rbn Rated resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT
Pbn Equivalent power over the rated resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pbn = Rbn · I sn
Rb Actual resistive burden (secondary connected) of the CT

Pb Equivalent power over the actual resistive burden of the CT for rated
secondary current:
2
Pb = Rb · I sn
Rct Secondary winding resistance of the CT

Pct Equivalent power over the secondary winding resistance of the CT for
secondary rated current:
2
Pct = Rct · I sn
Vsal Secondary accuracy limiting voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT

Vk Rated knee point voltage (e.m.f.) of the CT
nn Rated accuracy limit factor of the CT
nb Actual accuracy limit factor of the CT:
Rct + Rbn Pct + Pbn
nb = nn · Rct + Rb = nn · Pct + Pb
2-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Rl One-way lead resistance from CT to relay

Rrel Resistive burden of relay’s CT input
Tp Primary time constant (primary system time constant)
ω (System) angular frequency
Xp/Rp Primary impedance ratio (system impedance ratio):
Xp
Rp = ω · Tp
Kd Dimensioning factor for the CT

Kemp Relay specific, empirically determined dimensioning factor for the CT
2.13.2 General Equations

The current transformer can be dimensioned
● either for the minimum required secondary accuracy limiting voltage acc.
to IEC 61869, 3.4.209:
V sal ≥ K d · K ssc · I sn · (Rct + Rb)
● or for the minimum required rated accuracy limit factor acc. to IEC 61869,
3.4.208, as follows:
Rct + Rb Pct + Pb
nn ≥ K d · K ssc · Rct + Rbn = K d · K ssc · Pct + Pbn
The relation between both methods is given as follows:

Pbn
V sal = nn · ( I sn + I sn · Rct )
The actual secondary connected burden Rb is given as follows:

● For phase-to-ground faults: Rb = 2 · Rl + Rrel
● For phase-to-phase faults: Rb = Rl + Rrel
The wire lead burden is calculated as:
l
Rl = ρ ⋅ A
● ρ = specific conductor resistance

(e.g. for copper 0.021 Ω mm²/m = 2.1⋅10-8 Ω m, at 75°C)
● l = wire length
● A = wire cross section
For devices out of the platform Easergy MiCOM 30, the input CT burden Rrel is
less than 20 mΩ, independent of the set nominal current (1 A or 5 A). Usually this
relay burden can be neglected.
The rated knee point voltage Vk according to IEC 61869, 3.4.217 is lower than
the secondary accuracy limiting voltage Vsal according to IEC 61869, 3.4.209. It is
not possible to give a general relation between Vk and Vsal, but for standard core
material the following relations applies:
● VK≈0.85⋅Vsal for class 5P CTs, and
● VK≈0.75⋅Vsal for class 10P CTs, respectively.
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated to
avoid saturation by inserting its maximum value, instead of the required over-
dimensioning factor Kd:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-27

Xp
K d = K max ≈ 1 + Rp = 1 + ω · Tp
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to consider an empirically

determined dimensioning factor Kd=Kemp such that the appropriate operation of
the protection function is ensured under the given conditions. This factor
depends on application and relay type, as outlined in the following.
2.13.3 Distance Protection

For the P438, the empirical dimensioning factor Kd = Kemp can be taken from the
following diagram, which shows three practical curves:
● Curve A (red): Choosing Kemp according to this line assures that transient
CT saturation practically does not affect distance protection: Distance
(instantaneous) zone trip is assured within −0/+40 ms for up to 95% of the
set zone reach.
● Curve B (blue): Choosing Kemp according to this line allows transient CT
saturation to slightly affect distance protection: Distance (instantaneous)
zone trip is assured within −0/+50 ms for up to 90% of the set zone reach.
● Curve C (green): Choosing Kemp according to this line allows transient CT
saturation to affect distance protection: Distance zone trip is assured for up
to 85% of the set zone reach.
30
A
25
20
15
K emp B
10
C
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Xp / R p
As per IEC 60255-121 (draft 2011), the following 4 fault conditions have to be
checked to determine the required CT dimensioning.
2-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A B
DIST
2 3 4
Fig. 2-1: Check conditions.
Case 1:
● Close-up backward short-circuit (security case)
Acceptance criteria: Stable backward direction decision, no trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Case 2:
● Close-up forward short-circuit (dependability case)
Acceptance criterion: Instantaneous trip with less than 1 period add. delay
Required Kemp = 1.5
Case 3:
● Short-circuit at 80% of Zone 1 reach limit (dependability case)
Acceptance criterion: Trip with less than 3 periods add. delay
Select required Kemp per curve B
Case 4:
● Short-circuit at 110% of Zone 1 reach limit (security case)
Acceptance criterion: Correct time delayed zone 2 trip
Select required Kemp per curve C
Depending on the fault location, different maximum short-circuit currents and
primary system X/R ratios apply! Therefore the required CT dimensioning has to
be calculated separately for all 4 cases. The biggest sizing from all 4 cases then
has to be used.
It is recommended to use CTs of accuracy class 5P (or equivalent).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 2-29

2-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure

The P438 is a numerical device out of Schneider Electric's family of devices
named “Easergy MiCOM 30”. The device types included in this family are built
from identical uniform hardware modules. The figure below shows the basic
hardware structure of the P438.
Communication Protection interface

PC interface interface(s) InterMiCOM
Local control module

L
Communic. module
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
A A A
EDIT MODE
P μP
Processor module
Analog
Digital busbus module
module
B Analog bus module
T X Y V
Transformer module
Binary I/O module
Analog I/O module
Power supply module
Voltages Currents Signals Commands Signals Measured data Signals Commands Auxiliary voltage
Commands Signals Commands Commands Signals
Fig. 3-1: Basic hardware structure.
External analog quantities and binary quantities – electrically isolated – are

converted to the internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X.
The optional binary I/O modules X are equipped with optical couplers for binary
signal input as well as output relays for the output of signals and commands or
combinations of these.
The external auxiliary voltage is applied to the power supply module V, which
supplies the auxiliary voltages that are required internally.
Analog data is transferred from the transformer module T via the analog bus
module B to the processor module P. The processor module contains all the
elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including
multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data conditioned by the
analog I/O module Y is transferred to the processor module P via the digital bus
module.
The processor handles the processing of digitized analog variables and of binary
signals, generates the protective trip and signals, and transfers them to the
binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The processor module also
handles overall device communication.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-1

P438 3 Operation
The optional communication modules provide one or two serial communication

interfaces for the integration of the protection and control unit into a substation
control system and for remote access respectively a protection communication
interface for the transfer of digital information between two protection devices.
The local control module L is located behind the front panel and connected to the
processor module via a ribbon cable. It encompasses all control and display
elements as well as a PC interface for running the operating program Easergy
Studio.
3-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication

The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between
the user and the P438:
● Integrated user interface (LOC: local control panel)
● PC interface
● Communication interface
All settings and signals as well as all measurements and control functions are
arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
“Parameters” Branch
All settings are contained in this branch. This branch carries all settings,
including the identification data of the P438, the configuration parameters for
adapting the P438 interfaces to the system, and the function parameters for
adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this group are stored
in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved even if
the power supply fails.
“Operation” Branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured
operating data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically
and consequently is not stored. In addition, various controls are grouped here,
for example those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
“Events” Branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. All information in this
group is therefore stored. In particular, the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data, and the sampled fault waveforms are stored here and can
be read out when required.
Display of Settings and Signals

Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in
accordance with the user’s choice. All settings and signals of the P438 are
documented in a separate collection of documents, the so-called
“DataModelExplorer”. The “Addresses” document (being part of the
“DataModelExplorer”) is complete in the sense that it contains all settings,
signals and measured variables that are relevant for the user of the P438.
The configuration of the local control panel also permits the installation of
Measured Value “Panels” on the LCD display. Different Panels are automatically
displayed for specific system operating conditions. Priority increases from normal
operation to operation under overload conditions and finally to operation
following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P438 provides the measured
data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-3

P438 3 Operation
3.3 Cyber Security (Function Group CS)

This product contains a Cyber Security function, which manages the encryption
of the data exchanged through some of the communication channels. The aim is
to protect the data (configuration and process data) from any corruption, malice,
attack. Subsequently, this product might be subject to control from customs
authorities, and it might be necessary to request special authorization from these
customs authorities before any export/import operation. For any technical
question relating to the characteristics of this encryption please contact your
Customer Care Centre - http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC.
For devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30 platform, Cyber Security is available as of

software version ‑661.
Please refer to separately available "Cyber Security" Technical Manual for all
details.
Cyber Security is based on the model of Role Based Access Control (RBAC) which
is a method to restrict resource access to authorized users. One role can have
one and more access rights, one user (subject) can have several roles. A user
(subject) is based on a session. This session controls for example the activity of
the user. If the user is inactive for 15 minutes (default setting) the user will be
locked out automatically.
Static separation
of duty
Subject Right
assignment assignment
Subject Role Operation Object

1..n 1..n 1 1..n
1 1..n Right
Dynamic
1..n 1 separation of duty
Session
Fig. 3-2: RBAC model.
3.3.1 Users, Roles and Rights for Easergy MiCOM P30
User accounts
When the user tries to access an IED, they need to login using their own
username and their own password. The username/ password combination is then
checked against the records stored on the IED. It is the role that defines their
access to the relevant parts of the system.
The default user accounts for Easergy MiCOM P30 is as below:
3-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
User Accounts Roles
ENGINEER OPERATOR VIEWER SECADM
DefaultEngineer x x x
DefaultOperator x x
DefaultViewer x
SecurityAdmin x
(for SAT only)
DefaultUser x
(for HMI only)
Tab. 3-1: Default user accounts for Easergy MiCOM P30.
Roles
Different named roles are associated with different access rights. Roles and
Rights are setup in a pre-defined arrangement, according to the IEC 62351
standard, but customized to the Easergy MiCOM P30 equipment.
The default roles for Easergy MiCOM P30 is as below:
Role Description
VIEWER Can View what objects are present within a Logical-Device by presenting the
type ID of those objects.
OPERATOR An Operator can view what objects and values are present within a Logical-
Device by presenting the type ID of those objects as well as perform control
actions.
ENGINEER An Engineer can view what objects and values are present within a Logical-
Device by presenting the type ID of those objects. Moreover, an engineer has
full access to Datasets and Files and can configure the server locally or
remotely.
SECADM Security Administrator can change subject-to-role assignments (outside the

device) and role-to-right assignment (inside the device) and security policy
setting; change security setting such as certificates for subject authentication
and access token verification.
Tab. 3-2: Default roles summary for Easergy MiCOM P30.
Rights
In a similar way in which a set of pre-defined Roles have been created, a
predefined set of Rights have been created.
The reason why these are described as Default, is that it is possible to change the
definitions of Roles and Rights, by using the SAT software. Depending on the work
done by the system administrator, it is possible that your own situation may vary
from these initial recommendations.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-5

P438 3 Operation
3.3.2 Cyber Security Implementation

The P438 Rail Catenary Protection Device can be ordered with or without Cyber
Security compatibility. (See Chapter 15, (p. 15-1) for the exact order
information.)
With Cyber Security Compatibility

For Easergy MiCOM 30 Series support CS, which means the IED supports
advanced user account right management. The SAT (EcoStruxureTM
Cybersecurity Admin Expert - Security Administration Tool) is required for RBAC
configuration.
At the IED level, these Cyber Security features have been implemented:
● Passwords management (via the SAT)
● RBAC Management (via the SAT)
● User Locking
● Inactivity Timer
● RBAC recovery
● Port Disablement (via Easergy Studio or the front panel)
● Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
● Security Logs
Without Cyber Security Compatibility

For Easergy MiCOM 30 Series without CS, no need to use SAT software in order to
change and validate the password. If the SAT is connected to device, it has to be
blocked in order to avoid password management and modification. Password
shall be managed and modified through HMI and Easergy Studio only, as
previous password management. No security logs is available.
3-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.4 Configuration of the Local Control Panel (Function Group

LOC)
The configuration of the Local Control Panel includes the configuration of the Bay
Panel and of the Measured Value Panels, and the selection of the control point.
When the graphic display has been fitted then the layout of a bay with its
switchgear units will be shown on the Bay Panel. A Bay Panel usually consists of
one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor from the PC
Access Software Easergy Studio and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it can
be sub-divided into up to eight pages. The graphic display also permits the
display of the Event Panel and the configurable Signal Panel.
To create customized bay types, the “Bay Type Configurator” (BTC), version 2.7
or higher, is needed. Older versions of the BTC can create not compatible hex files
and thus can lead to communication failures.
When the text display has been fitted the Bay Panel will display switching state
signals from external devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active
control site (local or remote).
In addition the P438 offers Measured Value Panels, which display the measured
values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or – if activated – the
Operation Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event
occurs, the display switches to the appropriate Event Panel – provided that
measured values have been selected for the Event Panels. In the event of
overload or ground fault events, the display will automatically switch to the
Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the event of a fault, the Fault Panel
remains active until the LED indicators or the fault memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued (LOC: Param. change
enabl.) it will be cancelled after the time period, defined by setting L OC: Hold-
time for Panels has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called up.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-7

P438 3 Operation
3.4.1 Bay Panel

The P438 supports bay types. User can contact the manufacturer of the P438 to
request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P438. By
applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software Easergy Studio the user can
also define new bay types.
The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in Chapter 6, (p. 6-1).
Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation (see Section 3.43.3, (p. 3-337)).
With the graphic display fitted the Bay Panel displays the up-to-date status of the
selected bay as a single (phase) diagram. The user can choose between
character sets to represent switch gear on the bay panel. The character sets are
described in Section 6.12.2.1.1, (p. 6-23). The user can also define the
designations for busbars and busbar sections (see descriptions of parameters
LOC : De sign ation b usbar 1 or LO C: D es ignat. bus se ct.1, respectively,
in the “Settings” chapter).
The display of external device designations can also be disabled. The display of
the control point (local or remote control) and interlocking can also be disabled.
The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is
cancelled if the return time for illumination (LO C: Re turn time illumin.) or the
return time for selection (L OC: Re tu rn ti me s el ect.) has elapsed.
3-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
LOC:
DEV01: Character set
Designat. ext. dev. [ 221 038 ]
[ 210 000 ]
LOC: LOC:
Displ. ext.dev.desig Fct.asg. num. displ.
[ 221 032 ] [ 221 041 ]
LOC: LOC:
Display L/R Fct. asg. bar displ.
[ 221 070 ] [ 221 042 ]
LOC: LOC:
Displ. interl. stat. Bar display type
[ 221 071 ] [ 221 039 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designation busbar 1 Scal. bar display I
[ 221 033 ] [ 221 044 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designation busbar 2 Scal. bar display V
[ 221 034 ] [ 221 045 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designation busbar 3 Display bar scale
[ 221 043 ] [ 221 046 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designat. bus sect.1 Return time select.
[ 221 035 ] [ 221 030 ]
LOC: LOC:
Designat. bus sect.2 Return time illumin.
[ 221 036 ] [ 003 023 ]
BB1
Q0
LOC:
Return t.select. trg
305 551
19Z5003A
Fig. 3-3: Bay panel (graphic display).
LOC:
DEV01: Display L/R
Designat. ext. dev. [ 221 070 ]
[ 210 000 ]
LOC:
Displ. interl. stat.
[ 221 071 ]
LOC:
Return time select.
[ 221 030 ]
LOC:
Return time illumin.
[ 003 023 ]
Q0
Remote Locked
LOC:
305 551
45Z8003A
Fig. 3-4: Bay panel (text display).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-9

P438 3 Operation
3.4.1.1 Measured Values Display

The measured values that will be displayed on the Bay Panel can first be selected
separately for the numerical and the bar chart display by an “m out of n”
parameter. Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be
selected for display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured
values that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart
form. In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the selection
list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured value that
cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list for numerical
measured values. For the bar chart display, the orientation of the bar and the
scaling can be selected (the latter separately for the current and voltage data).
Display of the scaling can be disabled.
3.4.1.2 Hold-Time Measured Values Display

With the Bay Panel display the next or the previous configured measured value
may be selected by pressing the keys “cursor down” or “cursor up”. Furthermore
the respective subsequent measured value is displayed when the hold-time
period set for L OC : Hold-t. me as. v.di spl has elapsed. The standard default
for LOC : Hold -t . me as .v.dis pl is Blocked; in this case the automatic change
over feature to the subsequent measured value is not available.
3-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.4.2 Signal Panel

The Signal Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one signal has
been configured. From all physical and logical binary states that the P438 has
available up to 28 signals can be selected for display on the Signal Panel by an
“m out of n” parameter. This occurs without influencing the Event Panel, which is
additionally available. When more signals are selected for display than the LC
display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of signals
at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time f or Pan els or when the
appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed. If automatic switching to
the Signal Panel is configured at LOC: Au t. activ.Sign. Panel then the Signal
Panel is automatically selected when there is a change of state for a signal
configured in the panel.
With the parameterLOC: Stat.i nd. Si gn. Pan elit is possible to differentiate
between the states “signal active/available” and “signal inactive/not available”
shown on the Signal Panel. This is shown by the “clear to black” square alone
and the simultaneous change over from “normal” display to “highlighting” of text
in the lines. The type of signaling and the clearing, which may become necessary
is selected by setting LOC : In di cat.Si gn.P ane l.
LOC:
Fct. Signal Panel
[ 221 072 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3 LOC: LOC:
Autom. return time Autom. return time
[ 003 014 ]
Signal n
LOC: LOC:
Selected signals Hold-time for Panels Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
LOC:
LOC: Aut.activ.Sign.Panel
Indicat.Sign.Panel [ 221 073 ]
[ 221 075 ]
LOC:
Stat.ind.Sign.Panel
[ 221 074 ]
0: Without signalling 0
1: Flashing box 1 ≥1 LOC:

Sign.caus.Sign.Panel
2: Flashing rows 2 [ 221 078 ]
&
c
Selection
1)
LOC:
Chg.Sig.Panel stat.
[ 221 076 ]
Sig. Panel
LOC:
1) Chg.Sig.Panel flash.
[ 221 077 ]
1) Keys, local control
44Z5209A
Fig. 3-5: Signal Panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-11

P438 3 Operation
3.4.3 Operation Panel

The Operation Panel is displayed after the set return time has elapsed, provided
that at least one measured value has been configured.
The user can select which of the measured operating values will be displayed on
the Operation Panel by means of an “m out of n” parameter. When more
measured operating values are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will either switch to the next set of measured
operating values at intervals defined by the setting for LOC: Hold-time for
Pa nels or when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Operation Panel
[ 053 007 ]
Measured value 1 m out of n

Measured value 2
Measured value 3 LOC:

Autom. return time LOC:
[ 003 014 ] Autom. return time
Measured value N
LOC:
Selected meas. val. Hold-time for Panels LOC:
[ 031 075 ] Hold-time for Panels
FT_RC:
Record. in progress S1 1 ≥1 C
[ 035 000 ]
R1
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ] Operation Panel
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
47Z1301A
Fig. 3-6: Operation Panel.
3-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.4.4 Fault Panel

The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault
Panel by setting an “m out of n” parameter. When more measured fault values
are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display
will either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by
the setting for L OC: H old-time for Pan els or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Fault Panel
[ 053 003 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value N
Selected meas. val.
LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Fault Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z01EJA
Fig. 3-7: Fault panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-13

P438 3 Operation
3.4.5 Overload Panel

The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel
when there is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been
configured. The Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends,
unless a fault occurs. In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload
Panel by setting a “m out of n” parameter. When more measured fault values are
selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will
either switch to the next set of measured fault values at intervals defined by the
setting for L OC : Hold -ti me f or P ane ls or when the appropriate key on the
local control panel is pressed.
LOC:
Fct. Overload Panel
[ 053 005 ]

Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Select. meas. values

LOC:
Hold-time for Panels
[ 031 075 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1 Overload Panel
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
50Z0140A
Fig. 3-8: Overload Panel.
3-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.4.6 Selection of the Control Point

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching
between local and remote control is achieved by using either the L/R key on the
local control panel or an external key switch. The position of this external key
switch is checked by an appropriately configured binary signal input
(configuration at MAI N: I np. asg. L /R key s w.).
If the binary signal input is configured to L/R key switch then the L/R key on the
local control panel is without function when the graphic display is fitted.
This setting for L OC: Fct. ass ign . L/R ke y determines whether the switching
using either the L/R key or the key switch is between local and remote control
(L↔R) or between local+remote and local control (R&L↔L).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only
local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
LOC:
Fct. assign. L/R key
[ 225 208 ]
1: R <-> L
2: R & L <-> L
1)
& & 1
& & 2,3 LOC:

Rem.acc.block.active
& [ 221 004 ]
Local 1
& LOC:
Remote Loc.acc.block.active
2
[ 221 005 ]
&
Remote & Local 3 LOC:
Remote&local control
305 560
MAIN:
Inp.asg. L/R key sw.
[ 221 008 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Selected signal

19Z5261C
Fig. 3-9: Selection of the control point.
3.4.7 Configurable Clear Key

The P438 has a Clear key – –, to which one or more reset functions can be
assigned by selecting the required functions at L OC : Fct. re set key. Details on
the functions' resetting features are given in Section 3.13.17, (p. 3-130).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-15

P438 3 Operation
3.5 Communication Interfaces

The P438 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A
is optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels –
depending on the design version. Communication between the P438 and the
control station’s computer is through the communication module A. Setting and
interrogation is possible through all the P438's interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed,
settings for two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of
communication interface 1 (COMM1) may be assigned to the physical
communication channels 1 or 2 (see Section 3.13.18, (p. 3-132)). If the COMM1
settings have been assigned to communication channel 2, then the settings of
communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be active for
communication channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P438 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
If tests are run on the P438, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this
way the PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals
accordingly (see Section 3.13.19, (p. 3-133)).
3-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.5.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)

Communication between the P438 and a PC is through the PC interface. In order
for data transfer between the P438 and the PC to function, several settings must
be made in the P438.
There is support software available as an accessory for P438 control.
PC:
Bay address
[ 003 068 ]
PC:
Device address
[ 003 069 ]
PC:
Baud rate
[ 003 081 ]
PC:
Parity bit
[ 003 181 ]
PC:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 003 187 ]
PC:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 189 ]
PC:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 084 ]
PC:
Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 185 ]
PC:
Delta V
[ 003 055 ]
PC:
Delta I
[ 003 056 ]
PC:
Sig./meas.val.block. PC:
[ 003 086 ] Delta P
[ 003 059 ]
0 PC:
Delta f
1 [ 003 057 ]
0: No PC:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 003 155 ]
PC:
Delta t
MAIN: [ 003 058 ]
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
PC:
Time-out
PC: [ 003 188 ]
Command blocking
[ 003 182 ]
0: No
1: Yes
PC interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z80ECA
Fig. 3-10: PC interface settings.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-17

P438 3 Operation
3.5.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)

There are several different interface protocols available at the communication
interface 1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use
with the P438:
● IEC 60870‑5‑103, "Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12
(corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI Recommendation, “Protection communication
companion standard 1, compatibility level 2”, February 1995 edition) with
additions covering control and monitoring
● IEC 870‑5‑101, "Telecontrol equipment and systems ‑ Part 5: Transmission
protocols ‑ Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks,"
first edition 1995‑11
● ILS‑C, proprietary protocol of Schneider Electric
● MODBUS
● DNP 3.0
● COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P438.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In
addition, a signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary
signal input.
3-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
COMM1:
Command block. USER
[ 003 172 ]
0: No COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command block. EXT
[ 003 173 ]
COMM1:
Basic IEC870-5 enabl
[ 003 215 ] COMM1:
Communicat. protocol
[ 003 167 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. -101 enable
[ 003 216 ]
COMM1:
0 Selected protocol Selected protocol
304 415
1
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Addit. ILS enable
[ 003 217 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
MODBUS enable
[ 003 220 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
DNP3 enable
[ 003 231 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
COURIER enable
[ 103 040 ]
0: No
1: Yes
64Z51FEA
Fig. 3-11: Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-19

P438 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
-103 prot. variant Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 178 ] [ 003 179 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta I
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta P
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 60870-5-103
[ 003 219 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Communic. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
COMM1:
Sig./meas.block.USER
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
Sig./meas.val.block.
1: Yes
[ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
Sig./meas. block EXT
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
12Z62FFA
Fig. 3-12: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870‑5-103 interface protocol.
3-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Delta t
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Delta t (energy)
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Contin. general scan
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Comm. address length
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 201 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Octet 2 comm. addr.
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 200 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Cause transm. length
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 192 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Address length ASDU
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 193 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Octet 2 addr. ASDU
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 194 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Addr.length inf.obj.
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 196 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Oct.3 addr. inf.obj.
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 197 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig. Inf.No.<->funct.type
[ 003 179 ] [ 003 195 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat Time tag length
[ 003 074 ] [ 003 198 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Cycl. data ILS tel. ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv.
[ 003 175 ] [ 003 190 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta V ASDU2 conversion
[ 003 050 ] [ 003 191 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta I Initializ. signal
[ 003 051 ] [ 003 199 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Delta P Balanced operation
[ 003 054 ] [ 003 226 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415 COMM1: COMM1:
Delta f Direction bit
COMM1: [ 003 052 ] [ 003 227 ]
IEC 60870-5-101
[ 003 218 ] COMM1: COMM1:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel Time-out interval
[ 003 150 ] [ 003 228 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0 Comm. interface COMM1:

Communication error
1 304 422
0: No
COMM1:
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ] 19Z51FGA
Fig. 3-13: Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-21

P438 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Transm.enab.cycl.dat
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 074 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 175 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Delta V
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 050 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Delta I
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 051 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta P
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 054 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Delta f
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 052 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Delta meas.v.ILS tel
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 150 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Name of manufacturer Delta t
[ 003 161 ] [ 003 053 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet address ASDU Delta t (energy)
[ 003 073 ] [ 003 151 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Spontan. sig. enable Contin. general scan
[ 003 177 ] [ 003 077 ]
COMM1:
Select. spontan.sig.
[ 003 179 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
IEC 60870-5, ILS
[ 003 221 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ] COMM1:
Comm. interface Communication error
304 422
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
COMM1:
[ 003 076 ]
0: No COMM1:
1: Yes [ 037 075 ]
COMM1:
[ 037 074 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
19Z51FHA
Fig. 3-14: Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS-C interface protocol.
3-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
COMM1: COMM1:
MODBUS prot. variant Test monitor on
[ 003 214 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Reg.asg. selec. cmds
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 210 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Reg.asg. selec. sig.
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 211 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Reg.asg. sel. m.val.
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 212 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Reg.asg. sel. param.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 213 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Delta t (MODBUS)
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 152 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Autom.event confirm.
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 249 ]
COMM1:
Selected protocol
304 415
COMM1:
MODBUS
[ 003 223 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Commun. interface Communication error
304 422
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
19Z50FJB
Fig. 3-15: Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-23

P438 3 Operation
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Link Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 244 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Link Max. Retries
[ 003 071 ] [ 003 245 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Parity bit Appl.Confirm.Timeout
[ 003 171 ] [ 003 246 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Dead time monitoring Appl. Need Time Del.
[ 003 176 ] [ 003 247 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Ind./cl. bin. inputs
[ 003 202 ] [ 003 232 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Octet comm. address Ind./cl. bin.outputs
[ 003 072 ] [ 003 233 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 Ind./cl. bin. count.
[ 003 240 ] [ 003 234 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Test monitor on Ind./cl. analog inp.
[ 003 166 ] [ 003 235 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Phys. Charact. Delay Ind./cl. analog outp
[ 003 241 ] [ 003 236 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout Delta meas.v. (DNP3)
Selected protocol [ 003 242 ] [ 003 250 ]
304 415
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:

DNP3 Link Confirm. Mode Delta t (DNP3)
[ 003 230 ] [ 003 243 ] [ 003 248 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER
[ 003 170 ]
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z50AZA
Fig. 3-16: Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
3-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
COMM1: COMM1:
Line idle state Test monitor on
[ 003 165 ] [ 003 166 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Baud rate Command selection
[ 003 071 ] [ 103 042 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
COMM1: Parity bit Signal selection
Selected protocol [ 003 171 ] [ 103 043 ]
304 415
COMM1: COMM1: COMM1:

COURIER Dead time monitoring Meas. val. selection
[ 103 041 ]
[ 003 176 ] [ 103 044 ]
COMM1: COMM1:
Mon. time polling Parameter selection
[ 003 202 ] [ 103 045 ]
COMM1:
General enable USER COMM1: COMM1:
[ 003 170 ] Octet comm. address Delta t (COURIER)
[ 003 072 ] [ 103 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Command blocking
[ 003 174 ]
MAIN: COMM1:
Test mode Commun. interface Communication error
[ 037 071 ] 304 422
19Z51BAA
Fig. 3-17: Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-25

P438 3 Operation
3.5.2.1 COMM1 – Checking Spontaneous Signals

For interface protocols based on IEC 60870‑5‑103, IEC 870‑5‑101, or ILS-C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered using setting
parameters.
COMM1:
Sel.spontan.sig.test
[ 003 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM1:
Test spont.sig.start
[ 003 184 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM1:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 003 186 ]
COMM1:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FKA
Fig. 3-18: COMM1 – Checking spontaneous signals.
3.5.2.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals

When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 60870‑5‑103 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV)
from the control part.
The following parameters are available:
● (221 105) CO MM1: Se l . pos. dev.te st
Selection possibilities:
o Not assigned
o DEV01 ... DEV10
● (221 106) C OMM1 : Tes t posi tion dev.
o don't execute
o execute open
o execute close
o execute intermed.
3-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438

Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870‑5‑103 interface protocol.
It is provided only on the Serial communication module. It is intended for remote
setting access only.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in
the P438.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-27

P438 3 Operation
COMM2:
Line idle state
[ 103 165 ]
COMM2:
Baud rate
[ 103 071 ]
COMM2:
Parity bit
[ 103 171 ]
COMM2:
Dead time monitoring
[ 103 176 ]
COMM2:
Mon. time polling
[ 103 202 ]
COMM2:
Octet comm. address
[ 103 072 ]
COMM2:
Name of manufacturer
[ 103 161]
COMM2:
Octet address ASDU
[ 103 073 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. enable
[ 103 177 ]
COMM2: COMM2:
General enable USER Select. spontan.sig.
[ 103 170 ] [ 103 179 ]
COMM2:
Transm.enab.cycl.dat
0
[ 103 074 ]
1
COMM2:
0: No Cycl. data ILS tel.
[ 103 175 ]
1: Yes
COMM2:
Delta V
[ 103 050 ]
COMM2:
Delta I
[ 103 051 ]
COMM2:
Sig./meas.block.USER COMM2:
Delta P
[ 103 076 ]
[ 103 054 ]
0 COMM2:
Delta f
1 [ 103 052 ]
0: No COMM2:
Delta meas.v.ILS tel
1: Yes [ 103 150 ]
COMM2:
MAIN: Delta t
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 103 053 ]
[ 038 046 ]
COMM2:
Command block. USER
[ 103 172 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
40Z5070A
Fig. 3-19: Settings for communication interface 2.
3.5.3.1 COMM2 – Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
3-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
COMM2:
[ 103 180 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
COMM2:
[ 103 184 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COMM2:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 103 186 ]
COMM2:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z50FLA
Fig. 3-20: COMM2 – Checking spontaneous signals.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-29

P438 3 Operation
3.5.4.1 Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link
between two devices from Schneider Electric's device family “Easergy MiCOM
30”.
Over this communication link can be transmitted up to 8 binary protection
signals. Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information
interfaces to connect to data acquisition subsystems and for remote access,
communication interface 3 is designed as a protection signaling interface that
will transmit real time signals (InterMiCOM protection signaling interface). Its
main application is to transmit signals from protective signaling (function group
PSIG). In addition, any other internal or external binary signals may also be
transmitted.
3.5.4.2 Physical Medium

COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface.
To transmit data the following physical media are available:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

● Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
● Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:

● FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC‑1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
● Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max.
10 km)
● Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD‑32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
● Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
3.5.4.3 Configuration and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, the communication interface COMM3 has to be
configured using the parameter COMM3 : Function group COMM3. This
setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module
is fitted. After activation of COMM3, all addresses associated to this function
group (setting parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting COMM3: General
enable USER.
3.5.4.4 Telegram Configuration

The communication baud rate is settable (C OMM3 : Baud rate) to adapt to the
transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses
COMM3 : S ource addre ss and COMM3: Re ce iving address can be set to
different values, thus avoiding that the P438 communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protection signaling interface provides independent transmission
of eight binary signals in each direction. For the send signals C OMM3: Fct.
assign m. sen d 1, …) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs
(OUTP) can be chosen. For the receive signals (COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec.
1, …) any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be
chosen.
3-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set

COMM3: Ope r. mode rece i ve 1, …), thus defining the required checks for
accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected telegram
structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual
balance of “Speed”, “Security” and “Dependability” for each signal:
● Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to Blocking or Direct intertrip
● Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to Permissive or Direct intertrip
EN 60834‑1 classifies 3 categories of command based teleprotection schemes
according to their specific requirements (see Fig. 3-21, (p. 3-32)). By selection
of a binary signal and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these
requirements can be fulfilled as follows:
Direct transfer trip or intertripping:
Preference: Security.
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and set operating
mode Direct intertrip.
Permissive teleprotection scheme:
Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the presence of

channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and set operating mode
Permissive.
Blocking teleprotection scheme:
Preference: Speed.
Implication: Fast peer-to-peer signal transfer.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 4 and set operating mode
Blocking.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-31

P438 3 Operation
Speed
Blocking
Permissive
slow
low
high Direct high
Intertrip
Security Dependability
47Z1030A
Fig. 3-21: Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
3.5.4.5 Communication Monitoring

Timer stage C OMM3 : Ti me -out comm.f aul t is used for monitoring the
transmission channel (this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct
received telegram). The wide setting range allows adaptation to the actual
channel transmission times and above all this is needed for time-critical schemes
such as the blocking scheme. After the timer has elapsed, signals
COMM 3: C ommunication s fau lt and SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3
are issued and the received signals are automatically set to their user-defined
default values (C OMM3: D efault val ue rec. 1, …, CO MM3: Default value
rec. 8).
Timer stage C OMM3: Ti me -ou t l ink f ail.. is used to determine a persistent
failure of the data transmission channel. After the timer has elapsed, signals
COMM 3: C omm. lin k f ai lu re and SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 are
issued.
3-32 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Message
received
Character frame &

Source address check
Blocking signals
accepted
Telegram
receive check
Permissive signals
accepted
Telegram CRC check
Direct Trip signals

accepted
(Re)start of the
monitoring
timer stages
COMM3:
Time-out comm.fault
[ 120 033 ]
COMM3:
1 Communications fault
[ 120 043 ]
COMM3:
Time-out link fail.
[ 120 035 ]
COMM3:
1 Comm. link failure
[ 120 044 ]
47Z1031B
Fig. 3-22: Message processing and communication monitoring.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-33

P438 3 Operation
3.5.4.6 Supervision of Communication Link Quality

After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received
messages. The result is provided as an updating measurand COMM3: No . t el.
err ors p .u.. and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.t.e rr.,max,st or ed.
If the set threshold C O MM 3 : L imit te l e gr. er rors is exceeded the
corresponding signals C OMM3 : Li m.e xcee d.,te l.er r. and
S FMON: L im.ex ceed. ,t e l.e rr. will be issued. All corrupted telegrams are
counted (C OMM3: N o. tele gram errors). This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via
COMM3: Rse t.No.t lg.e rr.USER (as well as via the binary signal
COMM3: Reset N o.t lg.e rr.EXT).
3.5.4.7 Commissioning Tools

The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the P438 as
physical state signals (COMM3: State s e nd 1 and C OMM3 : State re ce ive
1, with x = 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for
commissioning of the protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input.
After setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C OMM3: Loop back sen d) the test can be triggered via COMM3: Loo p back
t est. This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time set at
C OMM3: Hold ti me for te s t. For this test only, the source address is set to
'0'; this value is not used for regular end-to-end communication. The test result
can be checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured
operating data C OMM3 : L oop back res ul t and C OMM3: Loop back
receiv e. As soon as the hold-time has expired, the loopback test is terminated
and InterMiCOM reverts to the normal sending mode (e.g. sending the actual
values of the configured send signals, using the set source address).
Thus, in case of problems with the InterMiCOM protection signaling interface, the
loopback test can be used to verify or to exclude a defective device. The
transmission channel including the receiving device can be checked manually by
setting individual binary signals (COMM3: Se nd signal for test) to user-
defined test values (C OMM3: Log. s tate for tes t). After triggering the test by
C OMM3: Send signal, te st, the preset binary signal is sent with the preset
value for the set hold time COMM3: H ol d ti me f or test. The 7 remaining
binary signals are not affected by this test procedure and remain to be sent with
their actual values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the
receiving device, e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time
has expired, the test mode is reset automatically and the actual values of all
8 signals are transmitted again.
3-34 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.5.5 Communication Interface Ethernet (Function Groups IEC and

GOOSE)
3.5.5.1 Communication Module
From the software version -661, the Single IP Ethernet module and Redundant IP
Ethernet module are available for the devices of the Easergy MiCOM 30 Series. To
get information of the former Ethernet module, please refer to the manuals before
-661.
The P438 Rail Catenary Protection Device can be fitted with new communication
module, the Single IP Ethernet module or Redundant IP Ethernet module. (See
Chapter 15, (p. 15-1) for the exact order information and Section 5.7, (p. 5-
34) for the location and connection diagrams.)
The Ethernet modules are developed to support PRP/HSR/RSTP redundancy
protocol, conformance of IEC 61850 edition 1 and 2, Cyber Security (CS) and
Flexible Product Naming (fPN).
3.5.5.1.1 Hardware Modules

Four modules are available for Ethernet communication, two Single IP Ethernet
Boards (SEB) and two Redundant IP Ethernet Boards (REB). Easergy MiCOM 30
Series are constructed from standard hardware modules.
The Ethernet module is fitted into Slot 2 of the P438. For REB, each module has
three MAC addresses, one for the managed embedded switch and two for the
P438. The following table lists the item numbers of the Ethernet module variants:
Type Item number Description Width
A 9652161 SEB copper: 1 * RJ45 + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE
A 9652162 SEB fiber: 1 * RJ45 + 1 * SFP-LC + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE

Tab. 3-3: Single IP Ethernet Module variants.
Type Item number Description Width
A 9652159 REB copper: 3 * RJ45 + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE
A 9652160 REB fiber: 1 * RJ45 + 2 * SFP-LC + 1 * IRIG-B 4 TE

Tab. 3-4: Redundant IP Ethernet Module variants.
Only Redundant IP Ethernet module can support PRP/HSR/RSTP protocol.
3.5.5.1.2 Redundancy Protocols

The following list shows Schneider Electric’s implementation of Ethernet
redundancy, which has three variants with embedded IEC 61850, plus PRP, HSR
and RSTP redundancy protocols.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-35

P438 3 Operation
Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP IEC 62439‑3 (2012))

● The PRP uses two independent Ethernet networks that operate in parallel.
The PRP is a “redundancy in the devices” method that provides bumpless
switchover in case of failure or reintegration. Furthermore, it provides the
shortest Ethernet network reconfiguration time as network reconfiguration
is seamless.
High-availability Seamless Redundancy Protocol

(HSR IEC 62439‑3 (2012))
● HSR method is independent of any industrial Ethernet protocol and typically
used in a ring topology. Nodes within the ring are restricted to be HSR-
capable bridging nodes, thus avoiding the use of dedicated bridges. A
simple HSR network consists of doubly attached bridging nodes, each
having two ring ports, interconnected by full-duplex links.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP IEEE 802.1w)

● This protocol variant offers compatibility with any RSTP device. RSTP is a
standard used to quickly reconnect a network fault by finding an alternative
path, allowing loop-free network topology. Although RSTP can recover
network faults quickly, the fault recovery time depends on the number of
devices and the topology.
3.5.5.1.3 RSTP Configuration
Fig. 3-23: RSTP configuration.
3-36 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Parameter Description
Priority The port priority in the spanning tree.
The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the
Max age
Root Bridge.
Forward delay The delay used by Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding.
Hello time The interval between periodic transmissions of BPDU message.

Tab. 3-5: RSTP configurable parameters.
From the software version -661, Easergy MiCOM P30 redundant brick configuration
tool is available to configure and read the RSTP configurations.
3.5.5.1.4 Generic Functions for All Redundant Ethernet Modules
Ethernet 100Base Fx/Tx

The fiber optic ports are full duplex 100 Mbps LC connectors or wire RJ45
supports 100 Mbps.
Forwarding
The devices from the families Easergy MiCOM 30, 40, the C264 and the MiCOM H
switches support store and forward mode. The MiCOM switch forwards messages
with known addresses to the appropriate port. The messages with unknown
addresses, the broadcast messages and the multicast messages are forwarded
out to all ports except the source port. MiCOM switches do not forward error
packets, 802.3x pause frames or local packets.
Forwarding is active when HSR or RSTP protocol is selected.
Priority Tagging
802.1p priority is enabled on all ports.
Simple Network Management Protocol – SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is the network protocol developed
to manage devices in an IP network. SNMP relies on a Management Information
Base (MIB) that contains information about parameters to supervise. The MIB
format is a tree structure, with each node in the tree identified by a numerical
Object IDentifier (OID). Each OID identifies a variable that can be read or set
using SNMP with the appropriate software. The information in the MIBs is
standardized.
Various SNMP client software tools can be used with the Series 30, 40, C264 and
Hx5x range. Schneider Electric recommends using an SNMP MIB browser which
can perform the basic SNMP operations such as GET, GETNEXT, RESPONSE. To
access the network using SNMP, use the IP address of the embedded switch in
the Redundant IP Ethernet module.
SNMP is applied for Cyber Security.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-37

P438 3 Operation
Network Time Protocol – NTP

Network Time Protocol is supported by both the P438 and the Redundant
Ethernet switch. NTP is used to synchronize the clocks of computer systems over
packet-switched, variable-latency data networks. A jitter buffer is used to reduce
the effects of variable latency introduced by queuing in packet switched
networks, ensuring a continuous data stream over the network.
The P438 receives the synchronization from the NTP server. This is done using
the IP address of the NTP server entered into the P438 from the IED Configurator
software.
3.5.5.2 Communication Protocols
3.5.5.2.1 IEC 61850

IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international
standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This
includes the capability of two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED),
manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data
for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common
basis for communication from the process control level down to the network
control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field
device, a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data
model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of
data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such
information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a
standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the
help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the
relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes
possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal
images.
Available is the following documentation providing the description of the
IEC 61850 data model which is used with the P438:
● ICD file based on XML in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description
Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available
from the P438, that are to be imported into the configuration tool “IED
Configurator” or into a system configurator.
● PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
o PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an
overview of available services.
o MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview
of available object types.
o ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of
parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used
by the P438 with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
3.5.5.2.1.1 Client Log-on

Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system,
as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as
defined in the “Abstract Communication Service Interface” (ACSI, IEC 61870‑7‑2),
are assigned to the devices. A “server” is always that device which provides
information to other devices. A client may log on to this server in order to receive
3-38 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
information, for instance “reports”. In its function as server the P438 can supply
up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
3.5.5.2.1.2 Clock Synchronization

With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined
as standard for Ethernet. Here the P438 functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast
from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode
synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all
devices in the network, and in the second operating mode the P438 requests a
device-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably
performed by the first server. The second server is only reverted to if no signal is
received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the
MAIN function then, by selecting COMM1/IEC, synchronization per IEC 61850 is
automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
3.5.5.2.1.3 Generating Datasets, Reporting

The specific project related feature of the P438’s communications behavior is
determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority
transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as
to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects.
The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset is
determined by the application; merely the GOOSE capacity, i.e. the maximum
size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE, is limited to 1500 bytes.
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P438 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
GOOSE capacity should not be exceeded, neither for GOOSE nor for reports.
Data objects provided by the P438 are available for selection with a structure as
specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of
information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the P438’s
state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created
with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The
knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received
signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of
all data objects included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see
Section 3.5.5.2.1.9, (p. 3-45)) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The P438
provides up to 16 unbuffered reports and 8 buffered reports independent of the
number of clients logged-on. Management is arranged into 16 Unbuffered Report
Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and 8 Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to
brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost
during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a
buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A
pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine
which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets
is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in
GOOSEs.
The P438 can serve up to 16 clients. Each client can log-on to any number of
available reports. One unbuffered report can be allocated to max. 8 clients, and
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-39

P438 3 Operation
one buffered report can be allocated to max. 4 clients. A client is then able to
activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his
requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into
account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the P438.
3.5.5.2.1.4 Transmitting Modeled Signals Not Provided by the IEC 61850 Data Model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional
number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the
P438 to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to
communications) is made by setting IEC: SigGGIO1 selection. The data
object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m
out of n’ selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to
SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data
objects.
3.5.5.2.1.5 Single Commands

Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command)
are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the P438 can
be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the P438. But
only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control
with normal security is provided for single commands.
3.5.5.2.1.6 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible
with a special configuration software, the IED Configurator.
Control of switchgear units can be carried out from all clients that have
previously logged on to the P438. Only one control command is executed at a
time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of
such a command are rejected. The following operating modes [IC ]: ctlMode l
are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually
set for each switchgear device:
● Status only
● Direct control with enhanced security
● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is
selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this
selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by
other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by
the client the P438 resets this selection after a settable timeout period [IC ]:
sb oT imeout (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details
see description of function group GOOSE.
The switchgear device’s contact positions are signaled to the clients with the
reports.
Setting parameters labeled with brackets – i. e. “[ I C ] :…” – instead of a normal

function group are set with the “IED Configurator”. They cannot be modified from
the local control panel (HMI), nor with the operating program.
There is a separate Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator” with a
description of all such setting parameters.
3-40 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.5.5.2.1.7 Originator Category

The Originator is an information type defined by IEC 61850, which is sent with
switch commands and position signals of switchgear units. This kind of data
consists of two information items:
● Originator Identification: This is text describing the originator of the switch
command. (If unknown, then an empty text string is sent.)
● Originator Category: This is the originator of the command according to a
list of standardized categories.
The range of values of the Originator Category, as listed in the following table, is
supported.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-41

P438 3 Operation
Originator Originator Use Case / Comment

category Identification
1 remote-control See note [1] The control command is sent by an operator at station level.
(at the end of
this table).
2 automatic-remote See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
station level.
3 station-control See note [1]. The control command is sent by an operator at network
level.
4 automatic-station See note [1]. The control command is sent by an automatic function at
network level.
5 bay-control Local HMI The control command is generated at the local HMI of the
Control P438.
6 bay-control Local EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MA IN: El ectri cal contr ol = Local
and any of the following input signals:
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l .ct rl .open
● DEVxx: In p.asg. el. ctr.cl ose .
7 remote-control Remote EXT The control command is sent via binary input (see note [2])
Control by an operator at an external local control panel, using the
setting
● (221 061) MA IN: El e ctrical con trol = Remote
and any of the following input signals:
● DEV xx: Inp.asg.e l .ctrl .open
● DEV xx: In p.asg. e l. ctr.cl ose .
8 process Spontaneous A trip or close command which is generated by a protection

Process Event function.
Usually this is a circuit breaker trip or a close command from
the ARC function, regardless whether originating from an
internal function of the P438, from external devices or a
manual command.
The internal commands are as follows:
● (035 071) MA IN : Ge n. trip comm an d
● (037 009) MA IN : C lose comman d
Examples of external signals that can be assigned to these
two commands:
● (037 019) MA IN: Parall e l trip E XT
● (039 054) MAI N: Man . M-tri p cmd1 EXT
● (039 056) MA IN: Man. M-tri p cmd2 EXT
● (041 022) MA IN: Man . clos e cmd. E XT
(See also note [2].)
3-42 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Originator Originator Use Case / Comment

category Identification
9 process Spontaneous There is a spontaneous position change of the switchgear

Process Event device.
Possible causes:
● A manual switch command
● The operation of another protection and control device
Further possible causes:
● Loss of supply voltage of electrical input signals
● Faulty wiring
● Faulty switchgear device
(However, this usually results in an intermediate position 00
or 11 of the switchgear device.)
10 process IED Restart Power-up or restart of the P438, intentionally or

spontaneously. Possible causes:
● Loss of the auxiliary supply voltage of the P438
● Commissioning activities
● Operation of self-monitoring of the P438
11 maintenance Test Mode The P438 is in test mode.

Operation The test mode can be activated either by setting parameter
● (003 012) MA IN: Test mode USER
or by the binary signal
● (037 070) MAIN: Test mode EXT
(See also note [2].)
[1]: The P438 copies the Originator Identification from the command request into
the information report.
[2]: External binary signals can be received via various interfaces:

● Opto-coupler inputs
● InterMiCOM protection communication
● GOOSE substation communication
● Assignment of LOGIC outputs
The P438 does never send the Originator Category “automatic-bay”. In all
protection devices from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family, Automatic Reclose is
implemented as part of the protection functionality, and therefore it is treated as
process, see table row No. 8 above.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-43

P438 3 Operation
UC 7
UC 1,2
Network
HMI
Trip/close by external
Gateway protection or control
UC 7
UC 3,4 UC 10 , 11
UC 9
Circuit
Station
breaker
HMI UC 6, 7 UC 5 UC 8
F1
F2
t
F3
F4
F5
F6 I
Binary signal
Communication link
Internal interface 12Z7312D
Fig. 3-24: Use cases in the network context. The “UC” numbers refer to Originator Categories in the table above.
3-44 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.5.5.2.1.8 Fault Transmission

Including fault transmission for the IEC 61850 in the configuration is only possible
with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per “File Transfer”. COMTRADE fault files
in the P438 are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files.
Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
3.5.5.2.1.9 High Priority Transmission of Information

Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP
level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at
Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received
by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or
client function. They are deployed in instances where high speed transmission of
information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example,
are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The standard IEC 61850 provides the Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) for high priority transmission of information. The GOOSE enables
transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary
information, integer values, two-pole contact position signals or analog measured
values. The P438 supports receipt and evaluation of GOOSE including binary
information and two-pole contact position signals from external devices.
3.5.5.2.1.10 Setting Group Control Block

The setting-group-control-block (SGCB) model allows for an instance to have
several values that can be used one at a time. The SGCB provides mechanisms
to switch between several values of one or more data objects. Values that belong
together build the setting group.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-45

P438 3 Operation
3.5.5.2.2 Virtual Local Area Network
From the software version -661, VLAN is available for the devices of the Easergy
MiCOM 30 Series.
A virtual LAN (VLAN) is any broadcast domain that is partitioned and isolated in a
computer network at the data link layer (OSI layer 2). VLANs work through tags
within network packets and tag handling in networking systems - recreating the
appearance and functionality of network traffic that is physically on a single
network but acts as if it is split between separate networks. It is possible to
assign traffic to different VLANs to allow the separation of the traffic while using
a single physical network.
In the table below shows the link between the Hardware modules/ ports and IED
configurator inclusive requested VLAN support capability. Only physical interface
1 is to support VLANs in fixed number (2 VLANs for physical interface 1).
Interface 1 & Interface 2 &

Module Type Interface 1 Interface 2
VLAN support VLAN support
REB fiber Port A/B Port C Yes No
REB copper Port A/B Port C Yes No
SEB fiber Port A Port C Yes No
SEB copper Port C - Yes -

Tab. 3-6: VLAN support capability.
3.5.5.2.3 Port Assignment

Port assignment is the capability to assign TCP/IP services to a dedicated
communication interface. The communication interface can be a physical
interface or a virtual interface of the communication module. The port
assignment can be configured for physical Ethernet interfaces as well as for
VLANs.
Port assignment allows to configure TCP/IP services of networks for the customer
needs.
Default configuration
In general the Ethernet communication module is designed that all TCP/IP
services are working on all physical / virtual interfaces. The factory delivers a
communication module without any specific port assignment. In this case –
without port assignment and without VLAN – the communication services are
available without restriction on the physical Ethernet Interfaces. Depending on
the physical module type all services are working on A/B and C for redundant
modules or A and C for the single fiber module or only C for the single copper
module.
There is one exception the Web services for the SAT tool are only available on
one interface at a time. Please find the details in Section 3.5.5.2.4, (p. 3-48).
Port assignment example

With the port assignment the user can choose which services shall work on which
physical/ virtual interface. This allows for example to configure two networks,
where one network is dedicated to the station bus and the related services and
3-46 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
the second network is dedicated for maintenance services. The user can
configure configuration / administration services (configuration bus) as available
on physical port C and the client application services (station bus) as available on
port A/B.
The port assignment feature is available to together with the VLAN feature since
the firmware version 661. The same scenario as above can be configured with
VLAN together. For example VLAN1 as station bus and VLAN2 as configuration
bus.
TCP/IP service
The following list of TCP/IP services can be assigned to interfaces.
Services Description
IEC 61850 (MMS)1) All MMS services including report
Network time protocol (NTP) NTP Service
IED configuration (TLS) Services via TLS to configure the device from Easergy Studio
Basic administration (SSH/SFTP)1) Update firmware, Read/Write MAC addresses
User management via RBAC

Web services for the SAT tool to configure security and the RBAC
(Webservice)2)
1) Minimum configuration: at least ONE "IEC 61850 (MMS)" and at least ONE "Basic administration
(SSH/SFTP)" should be enabled across all interfaces
2) "User management via RBAC (Webservice)" option can be fully disabled or only enabled on ONE of
the available interfaces
Tab. 3-7: TCP/IP service in port assignment.
Configured example
Fig. 3-25: VLANs and port assignment configured example.
Note that the "VLAN Id" is configured in HEX.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-47

P438 3 Operation
3.5.5.2.4 SAT-Tool Connectivity (w/wo Port Assignment)

The SAT (EcoStruxureTM Cybersecurity Admin Expert - Security Administration
Tool) allows to configure security rights for the IEDs, e.g. the user names and
passwords, access rights and roles for the user. The SAT tool is working with Web
services.
The communication between SAT and IED is restricted to one interface at the
same time. The interface can be changed via port assignment configuration. The
default behaviour of the SAT tool – without port assignment is described in the
following table:
Port Toggle Mode

VLAN Behavior
Assignment (physical Ethernet
Active SAT Web services are available on:
Active port A/B or C)
Depending on the plugged cable to the physical

interfaces the services switch between the physical
No No Ethernet port A/B and C. Yes
● Preferred is physical Ethernet port C
Fixed port assignment

No Yes No
● Physical Ethernet port C
One of the available physical interface is assigned via

Yes No configuration for the Web services No
● Physical Ethernet port A/B or C
One of the available physical and possible virtual

interfaces is assigned via configuration for the Web
Yes Yes services No
● Physical Ethernet C or VLAN1 or VLAN2

Tab. 3-8: SAT Web services behavior.
3.5.5.2.5 Secure Communication with the Easergy Studio via the Ethernet Interface
The secure communication is available as of software version -661.

The communication will be done using port 4422. Ensure this port is left unblocked
on the network.
When P438 and Easergy Studio are connected via the Ethernet interface, they
will communicate securely using TLS (Transport Layer Security Protocol). The
benefits of secure communication are:
● Help in the prevention of unwanted eavesdropping between Easergy Studio
and the IED.
● Help in the prevention of modification of data between Easergy Studio and
the IED.
● Ensure integrity of data.
● Help to prevent replay of data at a later data.
Setting up a connection, as a quick guide you need to do the following:
3-48 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
● In Easergy Studio, click the Quick Connect... button.

● Select the relevant Device Type in the Quick Connect dialog box.
● Select Ethernet port.
● Enter the relevant data i.e. IP address of IEDn
● Click Finish.
● Easergy Studio will attempt to communicate with the device.
When attempting to connect to the IED via Ethernet, Easergy Studio will first
attempt to communicate with the IED via secure communication.
3.5.5.3 Configuration and Enabling

The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the
parameter I EC : Fun ction group IE C. This parameter is only visible if the
optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the P438. After activation of
IEC, all data points associated with this function group (setting parameters, IEC
prot.variant etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting IE C : Gen er al enable
USE R. IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 Edition 1 or Edition 2 can be selected by
setting IEC : I EC prot. var ian t. When Redundant IP Ethernet module is used,
the redundancy protocols PRP/HSR/RSTP can be switched via IEC : E TH COMM
Mode. Port A/B and service port C can be blocked with I EC: Block Port A/B
and IE C: Block Port C.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-49

P438 3 Operation
IEC:
IEC 61850 enable
[ 104 077 ]
IEC:
IEC prot. variant
[ 104 084 ]
IEC:
ETH COMM Mode
[ 104 080 ]
IEC:
Block Port A/B
[ 104 073 ]
IEC:
Block Port C
[ 104 074 ]
IEC:
Switch Config. Bank
[ 104 043 ]
IEC:
SigGGIO1 selection
[ 104 064 ]
IEC:
Diff. local time
[ 104 206]
IEC:
Diff. dayl.sav. time
[ 104 207 ]
IEC:
Switch.dayl.sav.time
[ 104 219 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time start
[ 104 220 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time st. d
[ 104 221 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time st. m
[ 104 222 ]
IEC:
General enable USER IEC:
Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 +
[ 104 000 ]
[ 104 223 ]
0 IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end
1 [ 104 225 ]
0: No IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end d
1: Yes [ 104 226 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.time end m
[ 104 227 ]
IEC:
Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+
IEC: [ 104 228 ]
Ctrl blocked user
[ 221 125 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Commun. interface IEC:
Comm. link faulty
[ 105 180 ]
MAIN:
Test mode
[ 037 071 ] IEC:
Control blocked
[ 221 126 ]
48Z93A1A
Fig. 3-26: Settings for communication interface IEC 61850.
The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related GOOSE
function group are not automatically active in the P438. The P438 features two
memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other
memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the
IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of
the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the P438 by
downloading a .MCL file (Ed1) or .CID file (Ed2). The inactive communication
parameters are activated by executing the command IEC: Switch Config.
Bank. This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
3-50 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
System configurator
PACiS SCE
.iid
.scd
.icd
IED Configurator IED Configurator
Operating program
.mcl (Ed1)
.cid (Ed2) .x3v
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
P438
12Z9002A
Fig. 3-27: Configuration according to IEC 61850-6.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-51

P438 3 Operation
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!
IED
Control PC
Processor module
Operating program
Device
parameters
Parameter
switch
Parameter download
IED Ethernet module
Configurator Parameter upload IEC 61850 IEC 61850

parameter parameter
Bank 1 Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the

device parameters
New approach to IED parameter management

19Z7002B
Fig. 3-28: Saving configuration parameters.
3.5.5.3.1 IEC – Checking Spontaneous Signals

It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to
the control station as ‘sig. start‘ or ‘sig. end‘ can then be triggered via the local
control panel.
3-52 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
IEC:
[ 104 245 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
IEC:
[ 104 246 ]
IEC:
Spontan. sig. start
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
IEC:
Test spont.sig. end
[ 104 247 ]
IEC:
Spontan. sig. end
0 [ --- --- ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
49Z9002A
Fig. 3-29: IEC – Checking spontaneous signals.
3.5.5.3.2 Checking Switchgear Contact Positions and Signals

When checking during test operations with the interface protocols based on
IEC 61850 it is possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV) from
the control part.
The following parameters are available:
● (104 248) IEC : Se l. pos . de v.te s t
o Not assigned
o DEV01 ... DEVxx
● (104 249) I EC: Te st pos iti on DE V
o don't execute
o execute open
o execute close
o execute intermed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-53

P438 3 Operation
3.5.5.4 Communication Interface (Function Group GOOSE)

For high priority exchange of information between individual devices (IEDs) in a
local network, the P438 provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the
standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of
information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip
commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE Messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE
messages therefore remain in the local network to which the P438 is connected.
This function group is only visible if IEC: IE C 6185 0 enable is set to Yes. After
having configured the GOO SE : Fu n ction group GOOSE, all parameters
associated to this function group are then visible and ready to be configured.
Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the
IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (MMI)
or with the operating program.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting GO OSE: General
enable USER.
» Device A » Device B
IEC 61850
Mapping
Easerg Studio
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 128 (SPS)

Ext. Dev 1 ... 128 (DPS)
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset x
IED Configurator MCL (Ed1) IED Configurator System/GosGGIO1

or
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08 Ind1.stVal ... Ind128.stVal
CID (Ed2)
19Z8203C
Fig. 3-30: GOOSE configuration.
3.5.5.4.1 Sending GOOSE

The GOOSE can send up to 8 different GOOSE messages which are managed in 8
GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the
respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be
sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED
Configurator to check this limit.
It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P438 if the “Dataset”
sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Therefore it is recommended to
limit the “Dataset” size(s) to 100% of the GOOSE capacity. Too large a dataset can
spoil IEC 61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
3-54 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data
attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is
kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value
changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then
the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending
time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the
parameter [IC]: Minimum Cycle Time. The cycles for the following send
repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the
parameter [IC] : Incre me nt. Should no further state changes occur up to the
time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximu m Cy cle Time,
then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle
time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics
such as [I C]: Multicas t MAC Addres s, [IC] : A pplication I D (hex ),
[I C]: VL A N Identi fi er (he x), [I C] : V LA N P r iorit y and
[I C]: G OOSE Id en tif ie r must be entered in the IED Configurator settings.
Further characteristics are [IC ] : Datase t Ref e rence and
[IC]: Confi gu rat io n Re vis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
3.5.5.4.2 Receiving GOOSE

With GOOSE up to 128 logic binary state signals as well as 128 two-pole contact
position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each
state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message
is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting
[I C]: M ul ticast MAC A ddre ss, [I C] : A ppl icati on I D (hex ),
[IC ]: Source Path, [IC] : GOOSE Ide nti fie r and [I C]: D ataSet R efere nce.
With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj In de x / Type, which corresponds to
the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending device,
the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The
identification features "VLAN identifier" and [I C] : Con figurat ion Re vision
that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from
device or project planning documentation of the sending device or from a
configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will
support the import of .IID, .SCD, .MCL (Ed1) and .CID (Ed2) files when the
"browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of
parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and
very reliable data input.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its
information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE
repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without having received this
GOOSE again (i.e. because of a fault in communications), the signals received
will automatically be set to their respective default value
[IC]: De fault I npu t V alu e. Which of the possible state values will set the
wanted security grade is dependent on the relevant application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state
signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (GOOSE : Inpu t 1 fct .assig.
(or Input 2, …, Input 128)) is made on the basis of the selection table of the
binary signal inputs (opto‑coupler inputs).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-55

P438 3 Operation
3.5.5.4.3 Uniqueness of Control within a System
» Device A » Device B
IED Configurator S1 Studio
Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal
IED Configurator
System/LLN0/Dataset
x
IED Configurator MCL (Ed1) IED Configurator System/OrdRunGGIO1

or
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08 CID (Ed2) Ind1.stVal ... Ind32.stVal
19Z7004C
Fig. 3-31: Uniqueness of Control.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at
a time is being processed system wide (“uniqueness”) then interlocking of
secondary devices among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The P438 sets the
status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control
command. This information – stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by
GOOSE and is therefore available to all other devices as an interlocking
condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after
termination of the command sequence.
The P438 is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further devices.
With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal
are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the
interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command
checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured.
During a signaling receipt phase command effecting will be rejected.
3-56 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.6 IRIG-B Clock Synchronization (Function Group IRIGB)

If, for example, a GPS receiver with IRIG-B connection is available, the internal
clock of the P438 can be synchronized to run on GPS time using the optional
IRIG-B interface. It should be noted that the IRIG-B signal holds information on
the day only (day of the current year). Using this information and the year set at
the P438, the P438 calculates the current date (DD.MM.YY).
Disabling and Enabling the IRIG-B Interface

The IRIG‑B interface can be disabled or enabled using a setting parameter.
Synchronization Readiness
If the IRIG-B interface is enabled and receiving a signal, the P438 checks the
received signal for plausibility. Implausible signals are rejected by the P438. If
the P438 does not receive a correct signal in the long run, synchronization will
not be ready any longer.
IRIGB:
General enable USER
[ 023 200 ]
IRIGB:
Enabled
[ 023 201 ]
IRIGB:
Synchron. ready
[ 023 202 ]
IRIGB:
EBR Synchron. ready
[ 023 203 ]
19Z9001A
Fig. 3-32: IRIG‑B interface.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-57

P438 3 Operation
3.7 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
Configurable function keys are available on the HMI with text display only.
The P438 provides six freely configurable function keys. A password may be
configured for each function key (e.g. for F1 at F_KEY: Password funct .k ey
1), and if a password has been configured then the respective function key will
only be enabled when the configured password is entered.
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in Fig. 3-33, (p. 3-59).
After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the
time period set at F_KEY: Re tu rn ti me f ct.ke ys. Thereafter, the function key
is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function
keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a
password request is only issued when the function “Local/Remote switching” has
been assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function keys with a single function

One function may be assigned to each function key (e.g. for F1) at F_KEY: Fct .
assignm. F1 or by selecting a logic state signal (except LOC: Trig. menu
jmp 1 EXT and LOC : Tri g. me nu j mp 2 EX T). The assigned function is
triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P438.
Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists

Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu
jump lists assigned (e.g. for F1) at F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1 by selecting the
listing at LOC : Tri g. me n u j mp 1 E XT or LO C: Tr ig. menu jmp 2 EXT. The
functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated
pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at L OC: Fct. menu jmp list 1 or
LOC : F ct . me nu jmp list 2. Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters,
event counters and/or event logs may be selected.
LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are
configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the
respective function key configuration.
Configuration of the READ key

As with L OC: Fct . m en u jmp l is t 1 or L OC: Fct. menu jmp list 2 up to 16
functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at LOC : F ct .
rea d k ey. They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the “READ”
key.
Configuring function keys as control keys

Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the
functions at (e.g. for F1) F_KEY: Fct. as s ignm. F1:
● MA IN : Local /Remote ke y (060 004)
● MA IN : De vi ce s ele ction ke y (060 001)
● MA IN : D ev ice O PEN ke y (060 002)
● MAI N: De vice C LOSE ke y (060 003)
3-58 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above
commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function
keys.
Operating mode of the function keys

For each function key the operating mode may be selected (e.g. for F1) at
F_KEY: O pe rat ing mode F1. Here it is possible to select whether the function
key operates as a key or as a switch. In the Key operating mode the selected
function is active while the function key is pressed. In the Switch operating mode
the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed.
The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is
irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys
If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when
a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be
triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for
the other keys.
F_KEY:
Fct. assignm. F1
[ 080 112 ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function & Activate function
F_KEY:
Operating mode F1
[ 080 132 ]
1 & F_KEY:
State F1
2 [ 080 122 ]
1: Key
2: Switch
& & S1 1
& R1 0
1)

40Z5003A
Fig. 3-33: Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a
menu jump list.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-59

P438 3 Operation
3.8 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

(Function Group INP)
The P438 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
substation. The functions that will be activated in the P438 by triggering these
binary signal inputs are defined by the configuration of the binary signal inputs.
In order to ensure that during normal operation the P438 will recognize an input
signal, the input signal must persist for at least 8 ms plus the set filter time
(provided that Active "high", filt. or Active "low", filt. has been selected for
IN P: Ope r. mode U xxx).
Configuring the Binary Inputs

One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The
same function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be
activated from several control points having different signal voltages.
It should be noted that time-critical applications such as time synchronization
commands should not be mapped to the binary signal inputs of the analog I/O
module as these have an increased reaction time due to internal processing.
In this technical manual, it is assumed that the required functions (marked “EXT”
in the address description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by
configuration.
Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs

The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can
specify whether the presence (Active "high" mode) or absence (Active "low"
mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic ‘1’ signal. The display of the
state of a binary signal input – "low" or "high" – is independent of the setting for
the operating mode of the signal input.
Filter Function
An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient
interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes Active "high", filt.
or Active "low", filt.). With this function enabled a status change at the binary
logic input is only signaled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level
during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The
number of sampling steps is set at parameter INP : Filt er.
3-60 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ XXX XXX ]
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Selected function & Activate function
INP:
Oper. mode U xxx
[ YYY XXX ]
0: Active "low"
1: Active "high"
2: Active "low", filt.
3: Active "high", filt.
-Uxxx
&
Input signal
&
INP: &
Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
INP:
State U xxx
&
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
&
12Z6213A
Fig. 3-34: Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-61

P438 3 Operation
3.9 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)

The P438 has a measured data input function involving two inputs. Direct current
is fed to the P438 through one of the inputs. The other input is designed for
connection of a resistance thermometer.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a
measured operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring
purposes (IDC,lin) is also displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or
falls below set thresholds (see Section 3.40, (p. 3-315)).
The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values
and monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they
exceed or fall below set thresholds (see Section 3.40, (p. 3-315)).
Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Input Function

The Measured Data Input function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-35: Disabling or enabling the measured data input function.
3-62 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.9.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y

External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA
that is directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured – the
temperature, for example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the
measured quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged,
provided that the measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for
certain applications it may be necessary to limit the range being monitored or to
monitor certain parts of the range with a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair MEA SI: ID C 1 and MEA SI: ID C,lin 1, the user
specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored
by the Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e. IDC,lin. (These two setting parameters
refer to value pair number 1; setting parameters for value pairs 2 to 20 are
available, too.)
The resulting points, called “interpolation points”, are connected by straight lines
in an IDC‑IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a simple characteristic, it is
sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also used as limiting
values (see Fig. 3-36, (p. 3-63)). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising
or falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting
differs, the signal SFMON: In vali d s calin g IDC will be generated.
I DC,lin / I DC,nom
1.2
1.1
I DC,lin20 1
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
I DC,lin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 I DC / I DC,nom
I DC1 I DC20
19Z5266A_EN
Fig. 3-36: Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-63

P438 3 Operation
IDC,lin / IDC,nom
0.8
Interpolation points
IDC,lin20 0.7
0.6
IDC,lin4 0.5
0.4
IDC,lin3 0.3
IDC,lin2 0.2
IDC,lin1 0.1
0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom
Enable IDC p.u.

D5Z52KEC_EN
Fig. 3-37: Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of
0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken line).
3-64 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MEASI: MEASI: MEASI:

IDC 1 IDC 8 IDC 15
[ 037 150 ] [ 037 164 ] [ 037 178 ]

IDC,lin 1 IDC,lin 8 IDC,lin 15
[037 151 ] [037 165 ] [037 179 ]

IDC 2 IDC 9 IDC 16
[ 037 152 ] [ 037 166 ] [ 037 180 ]

[ 037 153 ] [ 037 167 ] [ 037 181 ]

IDC 3 IDC 10 IDC 17
[ 037 154 ] [ 037 168 ] [ 037 182 ]

[ 037 155 ] [ 037 169 ] [ 037 183 ]

IDC 4 IDC 11 IDC 18
[ 037 156 ] [ 037 170 ] [ 037 184 ]

[ 037 157 ] [ 037 171 ] [ 037 185 ]

IDC 5 IDC 12 IDC 19
[ 037 158 ] [ 037 172 ] [ 037 186 ]

[ 037 159 ] [ 037 173 ] [ 037 187 ]

IDC 6 IDC 13 IDC 20
[ 037 160 ] [ 037 174 ] [ 037 188 ]

[ 037 161 ] [ 037 175 ] [ 037 189 ]

IDC 7 IDC 14 Enable IDC p.u.
[ 037 162 ] [ 037 176 ] [ 037 190 ]

IDC,lin 7 IDC,lin 14 IDC< open circuit
[ 037 163 ] [ 037 177 ] [ 037 191 ]
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
SFMON:
Invalid scaling IDC
[ 093 116 ]
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
Input channel 1(I-1) SFMON:
Overload 20 mA input
[ 098 025 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 040 192 ]
SFMON:
Open circ. 20mA inp.
[ 098 026 ]
MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u.
[ 004 136 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC p.u.
[ 004 135 ]
MEASI:
Current IDC
[ 004 134 ]
S8Z52H2A
Fig. 3-38: Analog direct current input.
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well
and are available for further processing by protection functions.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-65

P438 3 Operation
MEASI:
Scaled val. IDC,lin1
[ 037 192 ]
MEASI:
Scaled val.IDC,lin20
[ 037 193 ]
MEASI: MEASI:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. Scaled value IDC,lin
[ 004 136 ] [ 004 180 ]
Q9Z5029A
Fig. 3-39: Scaling of the linearized measured value.
3.9.1.1 Zero Suppression

Zero suppression is defined by setting MEASI: Ena ble IDC p.u. If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and
the current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of “0”.
3.9.1.2 Open-Circuit and Overload Monitoring

The P438 is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls
below the set threshold MEASI: IDC < open ci rcuit, the signal MEA SI: Open
circ. 20mA i np . is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal
MEAS I: Ov erload 20m A inpu t is issued.
3.9.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the “PT 100 Analog

Input” on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance
thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance
thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is
required.
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand
(temperature T), a normalized value (temperature norm. T), and as the maximum
value since the last reset.
3-66 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MEASI:
Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
MEASI:
Open circ. PT100
Measur. input PT100 [ 040 190 ]
SFMON:
PT100 open circuit
[ 098 024 ]
MEASI:
Temperature T
[ 004 133 ]
MEASI:
Temperature p.u. T
[ 004 221 ]
MEASI:
Temperature Tmax
[ 004 233 ]
19Z5262A
Fig. 3-40: Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O)
module.
3.9.2.1 Open-Circuit Monitoring

If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal
MEASI : Ope n circ. PT100 is issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-67

P438 3 Operation
3.10 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output

Relays (Function Group OUTP)
The P438 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signal
assignment is freely configured by the user.
Configuration of the Output Relays

One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal
can be assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating Mode of the Output Relays

The user can set an operating mode for each output relay that determines
whether the output relay operates in a normally open arrangement (NO) or
normally closed arrangement (NC) and whether it operates in latching mode.
Depending on the selected operating mode, latching can be disabled, either
manually using a setting parameter or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input at the start of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general
starting, or of a new system disturbance.
Blocking the Output Relays

The P438 offers the option of blocking all output relays via setting parameters or
by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are
likewise blocked if the P438 is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs
or if self-monitoring detects a hardware fault. Any output relay configured for
MAIN: Block ed /faul ty will not be included in the blocking signals.
3-68 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
OUTP:
Outp.rel.block USER
[ 021 014 ]
0
OUTP:
1 Outp. relays blocked
≥1 [ 021 015 ]
0: No
OUTP: 1: Yes
Block outp.rel. EXT
[ 040 014 ] ≥1
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
[ 038 046 ]
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
OUTP:
Oper. mode K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
1 ≥1
2
3
-K xxx
4
≥1
5
6
≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
≥1
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) OUTP:

& ≥1 State K 301
5: NE updating [ zzz zzz ]
&
6: NE manual reset &
& ≥1
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx & S1 1
[ yyy xxx ]
R1
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
≥1 & ≥1
Selected signal
&
MAIN:
General starting OUTP:
1 Latching reset
[ 036 000 ] & [ 040 088 ]
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latch. USER
[ 021 009 ]
1 1
100 ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
OUTP:
Reset latch. EXT
[ 040 015 ]
45Z8001A
Fig. 3-41: Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays.
Testing the Output Relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via setting
parameters. Therefore the P438 must be switched to “off-line”. Triggering
persists for the duration of the set hold time.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-69

P438 3 Operation
OUTP:
Relay assign. f.test
[ 003 042 ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx1
[ AAA AAA ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx2
[ BBB BBB ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xx3 -K xxx
[ CCC CCC ]
OUTP:
Fct.assignment K xxx
[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
MAIN: Selected relay

Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
OUTP:
Relay test
OUTP:
[ 003 043 ] Hold-time for test
[ 003 044 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Q6Z0139B
Fig. 3-42: Testing the output relays.
3-70 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.11 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)

Measurands made available by the P438 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output.
Output as direct current can only occur if the P438 is equipped with analog
module Y. BCD output is always possible, whether the P438 is equipped with
analog module Y or not.
3.11.1 General Settings
3.11.1.1 Disabling or Enabling the Measured Data Output Function

The Measured Data Output function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
MEASI:
General enable USER
[ 011 100 ]
0
MEASI:
1 Enabled
[ 035 008 ]
0: No
1: Yes
S8Z52H1A
Fig. 3-43: Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
3.11.1.2 Enabling Measured Data Output

The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input,
provided that the function MEA SO: Ou tpu t e nabled EXT has been
configured. If the function MEASO: Outpu t en abled E XT has not been
configured to a binary signal input, then the measured data output is always
enabled.
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 036 085 MEASO:

Enable
304 600
MEASO:
Output enabled EXT
[ 036 085 ]
S8Z52H5A
Fig. 3-44: Enabling measured data output.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-71

P438 3 Operation
3.11.1.3 Resetting the Measured Data Output Function

BCD or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
● The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control
panel or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
● There is a general reset.
● LED indicators reset
MEASO:
Reset output USER
[ 037 116 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MEASO:
MEASO: Output reset
Reset output EXT
[ 036 087 ] [ 037 117 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] MEASO:
Reset meas.val.outp.
1: execute 304 601
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
47Z13H6A
Fig. 3-45: Resetting the measured data output function.
3.11.1.4 Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the P438 inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-72 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.11.2 BCD Measured Data Output

The user can select a measurand for output in BCD form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the
set hold time MEA SO: H old t ime outpu t BCD. If the selected variable was
not measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.11.2.1 Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.11.2.2 Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.11.2.3 Scaling of BCD Output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
(Mx,min ... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the
associated BCD display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
● MEA SO: S cale d min . val . BCD
● ME ASO: S cale d m ax. val. BCD
● MEASO: BC D-Out m in. value
● MEA SO: BC D-Ou t max. valu e
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If
this should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range,
then the value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measurands 0 ... 1
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program - Easergy Studio - under “minimum” and “maximum”.)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-73

P438 3 Operation
Measurands to be output Range
Measurands to be output Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be output Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max

with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data "Scaled min. val. BCD" ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
model
Measurands BCD display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to BCD-Out min. value ... BCD-Out max. value
be output" (Valid BCD value)
Measurands: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)

Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3.11.2.4 Example for Scaling of BCD Output

The value range for the fault measurand is set from –320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.
Measurands Range
Fault measurand: -320.00% ... +320.00%

FT_DA: Fa ult locat . pe rcent
Measurands to be output 0% ... 200%
Scaled measurands to be output 0.5 ... 0.813

with:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640
3-74 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Measurands BCD display values
Measurands in the range “Measurands to be 0 ... 200

output”
In this example the following P438 settings are selected:
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO : F unction group With

MEASO
031 074 MEASO : Ge ne ral en able Yes

USE R
053 002 ME ASO : F ct. assi gnm. BC D FT_DA: Fau lt locat. pe rce nt
010 010 MEASO : Hold time output 1.00 s

BCD
037 140 ME ASO : Scal ed m in . val. 0.500

BCD
037 141 M EASO : Scale d m ax. val . 0.813

BCD
037 142 MEASO : BC D-Out m in . valu e 0
037 143 MEASO : BC D-Out m ax. 200

va lue
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location.
The BCD value and the signal MEASO: Vali d BCD value = Yes are only issued
in the value range 0% to 200%.
FT_DA: MEASO: FT_DA:

Fault locat. percent Valid BCD value Fault locat. percent
BCD value [004 027] [037 050] [004 027]
200
FT_DA:
-320% 0% 200% 320% Fault locat. percent
[004 027]
47Z1040A
Fig. 3-46: Example of BCD output of fault location.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-75

P438 3 Operation
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable
value only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault
location is more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote
substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and
sensible range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p . f l t . l o c a t . P S x = Only aft.tr.
Z1ze/t1.
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output BCD
Enabled [ 010 010 ]
[ 037 102 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 051 ]
MEASO:
1-digit bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 052 ]
Setting blocked
MEASO:
1-digit bit 2 (BCD)
[ 037 053 ]
MEASO: MEASO:
Enable 1-digit bit 3 (BCD)
304 600 [ 037 054 ]
MEASO:
10-digit bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 055 ]
MEASO:
MEASO: [ 037 056 ]
304 601 MEASO:
[ 037 057 ]
MEASO:
[ 037 058 ]
MEASO:
100-dig. bit 0 (BCD)
[ 037 059 ]
Selected
MEASO:
meas. oper. value 100-dig. bit 1 (BCD)
[ 037 060 ]
Selected
Meas. event value
being updated
MEASO:
Selected meas. val. Valid BCD value
Value not measured [ 037 050 ]
Selected meas. val.

Overflow
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. BCD Meas. value ≥ 399
[ 053 002 ]
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n c1
c2
Scaling of the
BCD output
Selected meas. val. 1
++ 2
MEASO: 1...2
Output value x
[ * ]
0 . . . 100 %
Scaling of the BCD output

++
MEASO:
MEASO: Address Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140
Output value x
MEASO:
x: 1 037 120 Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141
MEASO:
x: 2 037 121 BCD-Out min. value 037 142
x: 3 MEASO:
037 122 BCD-Out max. value 037 143
19Z5264A
Fig. 3-47: BCD measured data output. Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure).
3-76 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.11.3 Analog Measured Data Output

Analog output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P438 for output in the
form of load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel
can be defined for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a
measuring instrument. The direct current that is output is displayed as a
measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set
hold time ME AS O: Hold ti me outpu t A -1. If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a measurand value.
3.11.3.1 Output of Measured Event Values

If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand
output memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an
immediate availability at the output of the updated value.
3.11.3.2 Output of Measured Operating Values

The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set
hold time. After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the
hold time is re-started. If the hold time has been set to blocked, the measured
operating value that has been output will be stored until the measured data
output function is reset.
3.11.3.3 Configuration of Output Relays Assigned to the Output Channels

The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the
output relays assigned to the output channels are configured for MEA SO: Value
A-1 out put, since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited
(see the terminal connection diagrams, Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)).
3.11.3.4 Scaling the Analog Display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range
in scaled form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional
value for the knee point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an
analog output characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Fig. 3-48, (p. 3-
81).
3.11.3.5 Measurand Range to be Output

The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max), with:
● Mx,min: minimum value to be output
● Mx,knee: Knee-point value for the measurand range to be output
● Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following
parameters:
● MEAS O: Scal e d mi n. val . A-1 or MEA SO: Scaled min . val. A-2,
resp.
● ME ASO : S cale d k ne e val . A-1 or ME ASO: Scaled k nee val. A -2,
resp.
● ME ASO: Scale d max. val. A-1 or MEA SO: Scaled max . val. A-2,
resp.
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-77

P438 3 Operation
values Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating
program – Easergy Studio – under “minimum” and “maximum”.)
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Measurands with knee-point to be output Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
Scaled measurands with a scaled knee-point to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 -
Mx,RL1
Designation of the set values in the data model "Scal. min. value Ax" ...
... "Scal. knee-point Ax"
... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
3.11.3.6 Associated Display Range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
● ME ASO: A nOu t mi n. val . A-1 or MEA SO: AnOut min. val. A-2, resp.
● ME AS O: An Out kn ee poin t A-1 or ME ASO : AnOut knee point A -2,
resp.
● MEA SO: A nOu t max. val. A -1 or MEA SO: AnOut max. val. A-2,
resp.
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...

output" ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
... "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x valid)
Measurands: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)

Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)

Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)

Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-78 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.11.3.7 Example for Scaling of Analog Display Ranges

Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom with the associated display
range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of
16 mA.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the variable Mx 0 V ... 150 V
Measurands with knee-point to be output 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
Associated scaled measurands 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67

with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) =
0.67
Measurands Analog display values
Measurands in the range "Measurands to be 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA

output"
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following P438 settings are selected in the menu branch
Parameter/Config. parameters:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-79

P438 3 Operation
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO : F unct ion group MEASO With
031 074 MEASO : Ge ne ral e nab le USER Yes
053 000 MEASO : F ct. assig nm. A-1 MAIN: Freque ncy f
010 114 ME ASO : Hold ti me out pu t A -1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO : Scaled m in. val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105 ME ASO : Scaled k ne e val. A -1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO : Sca le d m ax. val . A-1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom)
037 107 MEASO : AnOut min. va l. A -1 4 mA
037 108 MEASO : AnOut kn ee poi nt A-1 16 mA
037 109 ME ASO : A nOu t max . val. A -1 18 mA
By setting MEASO: AnOu t m in. val. A -1, the user can specify the output
current that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set
minimum measured value to be transmitted. The setting at MEASO: AnO ut
max . va l. A-1 defines the output current that is output for the maximum
measured value to be transmitted. By defining the knee-point, the user can
obtain two characteristic curve sections with different slopes. When entering this
setting the user must keep in mind that only a rising/rising or falling/falling curve
sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed). If the setting was not
properly entered, the signal SFMON: I nvalid scaling A -1 will be issued.
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the P438, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the P438 is switched on-line again (with the
setting M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d).
3-80 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Ia / mA
20
Max. 18
output value
Knee point 16
output value
14
12
10
Min. 4
output value
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0.013 0.067 0.667 1.0 Mx,scal
19Z5265A
Fig. 3-48: Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting
value is = 0; also possible is directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD Measured Data
Output).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-81

P438 3 Operation
MEASO:
Value A-1 output
[ 037 118 ]
MEASO:
MEASO: Hold time output A-1
Enabled [ 010 114 ]
[ 037 102 ]
Setting(s) blocked c
MEASO:
Enable
304 600
An. outp. ch.1 (A-1)
[ --- --- ]
MEASO: R
304 601
Selected
meas. oper. value
OUTP: Selected
Fct.assignment K xxx Meas. event value
[ xxx xxx ] being updated
c
K x1
K x2 MEASO:
Scaled min. val. A-1
K x3 [ 037 104 ]
K xx MEASO:
Scaled knee val. A-1
[ 037 105 ]
c
MEASO:
Value A-1 output MEASO:
[ 037 118 ] Scaled max. val. A-1
[ 037 106 ]
MEASO:
AnOut min. val. A-1
[ 037 107 ]
MEASO:
Fct. assignm. A-1
MEASO:
[ 053 000 ] AnOut knee point A-1
[ 037 108 ]
Measured value 1
MEASO:
AnOut max. val. A-1
Measured value 2 [ 037 109 ]
Measured value 3
Measured value n
SFMON:
Selected meas. val. Invalid scaling A-1
[ 093 114 ]
Value in AnOut range MEASO:

Value A-1 valid
and in scaled range [ 069 014 ]
MEASO:
Output value x
[ * ] Value in AnOut range
but above scaled
range
c1
0 . . . 100 % Value < AnOut range c2
c3
MEASO: Address AnOut value 1

Output value x
2
X: 1 037 120
AnOut min. value 3
X: 2 037 121
1 . . . 3 MEASO:
X: 3 037 122 Current A-1
AnOut max. value [ 005 100 ]
Selected meas. val.

Value not measured
Selected meas. val.

Value measured
Selected meas. val.

Overflow
S8Z52H8B
Fig. 3-49: Analog measured data output.
3-82 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.11.4 Output of “External” Measured Data

Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be
written to the following parameters of the P438 via the communications
interface.
● ME ASO : Ou tpu t valu e 1
● ME ASO: Out pu t valu e 1
● MEA SO: Ou tput val ue 1
These “external” measured values are output by the P438 either in BCD data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD measured
data output function or the channels of the analog measured data output
function are configured accordingly.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-83

P438 3 Operation
3.12 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P438 may be fitted with either a text or a graphic display HMI (ordering
option). The HMI with text display is fitted with 23 LED indicators for binary
signals and the HMI with graphic display has 17 LED indicators.
Four of the LED indicators are permanently assigned to fixed functions. The other
LED indicators are freely configurable. These freely configurable LEDs will emit
either red or green or amber light (amber is made up of red and green light and
may not be configured independently).
3.12.1 Configuring the LED Indicators

One binary signal can be assigned to each of the red and green LED color
indications. The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators (or
colors), if required.
LED indicator Label Configuration
H 4 (red) TRIP With the P438 this LED indicator is customarily configured with
function MA IN: Ge n. tri p si gnal, but the configuration may
be modified.
H 4 (green) ― Function assignment to this green LED indicator is freely

configurable.
H 3 (amber) ALARM Permanently configured with function SFMON: Warning

(LED ).
H 2 (amber) OUT OF SERVICE Permanently configured with function MAIN: B locked/fault y.
H 1 (green) HEALTHY Not configurable. H 1 indicates the operational readiness of the

P438 (supply voltage is present).
H 17 (red) EDIT MODE Not configurable. H 17 indicates the input (edit) mode. Only
when the P438 is in this mode, can parameter settings be
changed by pressing the “Up” and “Down” keys. (See
Section 6.2, (p. 6-2))
H 5 to H 16 ― For each of these LED indicators both colors (red & green) may
H 18 to H 23 be configured freely and independently.
3.12.2 Layout of the LED Indicators

The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel with text display.
3-84 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 3-50: Layout of the LED indicators (local control panel with text display)
The following figure illustrates the layout of LED indicators situated on the local
control panel with graphic display.
H4 TRIP
H3 ALARM
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1 HEALTHY
H17 EDIT MODE
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
Fig. 3-51: Layout of the LED indicators (local control panel with graphic display)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-85

P438 3 Operation
3.12.3 Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

For each of the freely configurable LED indicators, the operating mode can be
selected separately. This setting will determine whether the LED indicator will
operate either in energize-on-signal (ES) or normally-energized (NE) mode,
whether it will be flashing and whether it will be in latching mode.
Latching is disabled, depending on the selected operating mode:
● either manually via setting parameters or by an appropriately configured
binary signal input (see Section 3.13.17, (p. 3-130))
● or at the onset of a new fault, signalized by the onset of a general starting
or of a new system disturbance.
Therefore there are eight operating modes available, which are built from
combinations of the following components:
updating latching with manual

reset
continuous (i.e. not energize-on-signal ES updating ES manual reset

flashing) (ES)
normally-energized NE updating NE manual reset

(NE)
flashing energize-on-signal ES updating bl ES manual reset bl

(ES)
normally-energized NE updating bl NE manual reset bl

(NE)
In addition to these there are the following 4 operating modes:
energize-on-signal (ES) with reset energize-on-signal (ES) with reset

after new fault after new system disturbance
continuous (i.e. not ES reset (fault) ES reset (syst.dist)

flashing)
flashing ES reset (fault) bl ES rst (syst.dst) bl
This results in 12 operating modes that are available for every freely configurable
LED indicator.
3-86 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
LED:
Oper. mode H xx
[ xxx xxx ]
10
11
12
13 ≥1
1: ES updating
2: ES manual reset
3: ES reset (fault)
4: ES reset (syst.dist) !G!
5: NE updating
6: NE manual reset
7: ES updating bl
8: ES manual reset bl -Hxx (red)
9: ES reset (fault) bl
10: ES rst (syst.dst) bl
11: NE updating bl
12: NE manual reset bl
13: ES Alarmunit
& LED:
State Hxx red
[ zzz zzz ]
LED: &
Fct.assig. Hxx red
[ yyy yyy ]
&
Signal 1 &
Signal 2 &
Signal 3 m out of n
Signal n
& S1 1
& R1
Selected signals
&
&
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
&
FT_RC:
System disturb. runn
[ 035 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020 19Z8100A
Fig. 3-52: Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-87

P438 3 Operation
3.13 Main Functions of the P438 (Function Group MAIN)
3.13.1 Conditioning of the Measured Variables

The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed into the P438
and are – electrically isolated – converted to normalized electronics levels. Air-
gap transformers are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency
(DC decays and offsets) signal components. The analog quantities are digitized
and are thus available for further processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P438 to
nominal quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents
and voltages of the system transformers.
The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P438 must also be set.
Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89) to Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91) show the standard connection. By
this setting the phase of the digitized currents is rotated by 180°.
The P438 is designed for operation in Classic single feed, Autotransformer feed or
single feed with summated current modes. The operating mode is selected by
setting the parameter MA IN: Fee de r mode. Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89) shows the
connection in Classic single feed mode, Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90) the connection in
Autotransformer feed mode and Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91) the connection in single
feed with summated current mode.
3-88 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Supply Catenary
MAIN:
I> Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
1: Classic single feed

2: Autotransformer feed
3: Single feed w. sum I
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
MAIN: MAIN:
Conn. meas. circ. I Inom device
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Catenary
Rail 48Z9301A
Fig. 3-53: Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Classic single feed' operating mode.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-89

P438 3 Operation
Supply Catenary
Supply Feeder
MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
2
I>
3

MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
I>
V̲A
V̲B/V̲ref
V̲B/V̲ref
+ V̲
-
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲A
I̲B
X.Y I̲B
1: Standard
2: Opposite
+ I̲
-
Feeder
Catenary
Rail 48Z9302A
Fig. 3-54: Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Autotransformer feed' operating mode.
3-90 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Supply Catenary
I>
MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]

3: Single feed w. sum I MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲A
I̲B
X.Y I̲B
1: Standard
2: Opposite
+ I̲
-
Catenary
Rail
Catenary
Rail 48Z9304A
Fig. 3-55: Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'single feed with summated current' operating mode.
In addition to the protection of the catenary in normal train operation, the P438
also provides defrost protection. An additional current transformer must be
connected when the device is in the 'Defrost operation' operating mode.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-91

P438 3 Operation
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-92) shows the connection with 'Defrost operation'. In this
operating mode, circuit breakers Q1, Q3 and Q4 are closed whereas circuit
breaker Q2 is open. It is important to ensure - from the installation side - that
circuit breaker Q2 is opened before circuit breakers Q3 and Q4 are closed.
Supply Catenary
Q1 Q2
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
I̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
MAIN: MAIN:
MsCirc.Iplaus/Idfrst Iplaus/Idfrst,CTnom
[ 010 036 ] [ 010 017 ]
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst
X.Y I̲plaus/I̲dfrst
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Catenary 1
Q3
Catenary 2
Q4
Rail
48Z9303A
Fig. 3-56: Connecting the P438 measuring circuits for 'Defrost operation'.
3-92 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Supply Catenary
I>
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 036 ] [ 010 017 ]
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Catenary
Rail 48Z9300A
Fig. 3-57: Connecting the P438 measuring circuits for 'Plausibility check'.
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-94) shows the connection with optional function Automatic
Synchronism Check. The ASC is available in classical single feeding mode or
Single feed w. sum I mode, 1st voltage for the phase voltage, and 2nd voltage for
the reference voltage of the network.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-93

P438 3 Operation
Supply Catenary
MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
I> 1

Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
I>
V̲B/V̲ref
V̲B/V̲ref
Catenary
Rail
48Z9305A
Fig. 3-58: Connecting the P438 measuring circuits in the 'Classic single feed' operating mode, optional with
reference voltage for ASC.
3-94 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.2 Operating Data Measurement

The P438 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents
and voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured
values. For the display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be
exceeded, to avoid fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds
are not exceeded, the value Not measured is displayed. The following measured
variables are displayed:
● CT Plausibility check current or alternatively Defrost protection current
Iplaus/Idfrst
● Currents I, IA, IB
● Fundamental current and second, third, fifth, seventh harmonic currents
I(fn), I(2fn), I(3fn), I(5fn), I(7fn)
● Voltages V, VA, VB/Vref
● Active and reactive energy output and input
● Active and reactive power P, Q
● Load impedance Z
● Load reactance X
● Load resistance R
● Load flow direction
● Load angle φ
● System frequency f
The measured data are updated at approx. 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted
if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-95

P438 3 Operation
3.13.2.1 Measured Current Values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities. To allow display
in primary values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer
should be set in the P438.
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. I
MAIN: [ 011 030 ]
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲ c1
I̲A c2
I̲B c3
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst c4
1 MAIN:
Current I p.u.
[ 004 111 ]
2 MAIN:
Current IA p.u.
[ 005 041 ]
3 MAIN:
Current IB p.u.
[ 006 041 ]
4 MAIN:
Iplaus/Idfrst. p.u.
[ 004 201 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Current I prim.
[ 004 110 ]
MAIN:
Current IA prim.
[ 005 040 ]
MAIN:
Current IB prim.
[ 006 040 ]
MAIN:
Iplaus/Idfrst,CTprim
[ 010 016 ]
MAIN:
Iplaus/Idfrst. prim.
[ 004 200 ]
48Z9306A
Fig. 3-59: Measured operating data - current.
The harmonic current components are displayed both as per-unit quantities

referred to the nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities.
3-96 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
Meas. value rel. I
MAIN: [ 011 030 ]
General start. int.
306 539
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲ c1
fnom MAIN:
Current I(fn) p.u.
[ 008 110 ]
2 * fnom
MAIN:
Current I(2fn) p.u.
[ 008 096 ]
3 * fnom MAIN:
Current I(3fn) p.u.
[ 008 098 ]
5 * fnom MAIN:
Current I(5fn) p.u.
[ 008 100 ]
7 * fnom
MAIN:
Current I(7fn) p.u.
[ 021 058 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Current I(fn) prim
[ 008 109 ]
MAIN:
Current I(2fn) prim
[ 008 095 ]
MAIN:
Current I(3fn) prim
[ 008 097 ]
MAIN:
Current I(5fn) prim
[ 008 099]
MAIN:
Current I(7fn) prim
[ 021 051 ]
48Z9307A
Fig. 3-60: Measured operating data - harmonic current.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-97

P438 3 Operation
3.13.2.2 Measured Voltage Values
MAIN:
MCMON: Meas. value rel. I
Meas. circ. V faulty [ 011 030 ]
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: c
Hardware fault
306 540
V̲ c1
V̲A c2
V̲B/V̲ref c3
1 MAIN:
Voltage V p.u.
[ 004 113 ]
2 MAIN:
Voltage VA p.u.
[ 005 043 ]
3 MAIN:
Voltage VB/Vref p.u.
[ 006 043 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Voltage V prim.
[ 004 112 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VA prim.
[ 005 042 ]
MAIN:
Voltage VB/Vref prim
[ 006 042 ]
48Z9308A
Fig. 3-61: Measured operating data - voltage.
The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred
to the nominal quantities of the P438 and as primary quantities. To allow a
display in primary values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer
needs to be set in the P438.
3.13.2.3 Measured Values for Power, Active Power Factor, and Load Flow
If there is a fault in the hardware or in the voltage-measuring circuit, the
measured values are not determined.
The fundamental components of current and voltage are used for determining
the measured values.
Calculation of these derived operating quantities is subject to the following
conditions:
● Angles and load flow direction are determined only if the current exceeds
the minimum threshold of 0.1 In and if the voltage exceeds the threshold of
1 V.
● Values for active and reactive power will always be calculated and
displayed as these quantities are required for the subsequent energy
measurement. Greater deviations in measurements may occur with low
phase currents or a critical power factor value.
● The active power factor will be calculated only if the apparent power value
exceeds 5% of the nominal apparent power Snom.
3-98 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 038 023 ] & &
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲
>0.1 Inom
V̲
<1V
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom c
[ 010 030 ]
fnom
MAIN:
fnom Load angle phi
[ 004 167 ]
/100° MAIN:
Load angle phi p.u.
[ 004 078 ]
-45°> N <135° 1
-45°< N >135° 2
MAIN:
1 ... 2 Load flow direction
[ 004 166 ]
1 MAIN:
Load flow forward
[ 039 076 ]
2 MAIN:
Load flow backwards
[ 039 077 ]
48Z9309A
Fig. 3-62: Measured operating data – Angle and load flow direction.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-99

P438 3 Operation
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ] &
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
MAIN:
[ 010 030 ]
I̲ fnom
MAIN:
Active power P p.u.
[ 004 051 ]
V̲ fnom
MAIN:
Reac. power Q p.u.
[ 004 053 ]
S > 0.05 Snom

&
MAIN:
Active power factor
[ 004 054 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ]
48Z9310A
Fig. 3-63: Measured operating data – Power and active power factor.
3.13.2.4 Operating impedance, reactance and resistance

If there is a fault in the hardware or in the voltage-measuring circuit, the
measured values are not determined.
The fundamental components of current and voltage are used for determining
the measured values. The values are determined only if the current exceeds the
minimum threshold of 0.1 In and if the voltage exceeds the threshold of 1 V.
3-100 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ] & &
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
I̲
>0.1 Inom
V̲
<1V
MAIN:
[ 010 030 ]
fnom
MAIN:
Load impedance Z p.u
[ 005 004 ]
fnom
c
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
MAIN:
Load impedance Z sec
[ 005 000 ]
MAIN:
Load reactance X sec
[ 005 195 ]
MAIN:
Load resist. R sec
[ 005 197 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
MAIN:
Load imped. Z prim.
[ 005 005 ]
MAIN:
Load react. X prim.
[ 005 196 ]
MAIN:
Load resist. R prim.
[ 005 198 ]
48Z9311A
Fig. 3-64: Measured operating data – Operating impedance, reactance and resistance.
3.13.2.5 Frequency
< 10 V
MCMON:
Meas. circ. V faulty c
[ 038 023 ] &
MAIN:
Hardware fault
306 540
V̲ c
f MAIN:
Frequency f
[ 004 040 ]
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
MAIN:
Frequency f p.u.
[ 004 070 ]
48Z9312A
Fig. 3-65: Frequency measurement.
The P438 determines the frequency from the voltage. The frequency is
determined only if the voltage exceeds a minimum threshold of 10 V and if there
is no fault in the voltagemeasuring circuit.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-101

P438 3 Operation
3.13.2.6 Active and Reactive Energy Output and Input
MAIN:
Active power P prim.
[ 004 050 ] ∫P(t) dt MAIN:
Act.energy outp.prim
R [ 005 061 ]
-∫P(t) dt MAIN:
Act.energy inp. prim
R [ 005 062 ]
MAIN:
Reac. power Q prim.
[ 004 052 ] ∫Q(t) dt MAIN:
MAIN: React.en. outp. prim
Reset meas.v.en.USER R [ 005 063 ]
[ 003 032 ]
0 -∫Q(t) dt MAIN:
React. en. inp. prim
R [ 005 064 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute Overflow MAIN:

No.overfl.act.en.out
Transfer [ 009 090 ]
Overflow MAIN:
No.overfl.act.en.inp
Overflow MAIN:
No.ov/fl.reac.en.out
MAIN:
Overflow No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp
[ 009 093 ]
Transfer
48Z9356A
Fig. 3-66: Determining the active and reactive energy output and input.
The P438 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on
the primary active or reactive power.
Measured energy values are presented as text parameters with a value range of
about 0 … 6.5 TWh and a resolution of 10 kWh. In addition, 16 bit values and
overflow counters are provided, which are needed for transmission via serial
protocols (e.g. Modbus, DNP3, Courier).
Energy values as 32 bit / text Energy values as 16 bit values Overflow counters for the 16 bit
values Value range: 0 … 655,35 MWh energy values
Value range: 0 … Value range: 0 … 10000
6553500.00 MWh
(008 065) MAIN: Act .energy (005 061) MAI N: A ct. en ergy (009 090)
ou tp. prim outp.pri m MA IN: No.overfl .act.en.out
(008 066) MAIN: Act .energy (005 062) MAI N: A ct.en ergy (009 091)
in p. p rim inp. prim MA IN: No.overfl. act.e n.inp
(008 067) M AIN: React .en. (005 063) MA IN: React.e n. (009 092) MAI N: No.ov/
outp. prim out p. prim fl .re ac.en.ou t
(008 068) MAIN: R eact . en. (005 064) MA IN: React. en . (009 093) MA IN: No.ov/
inp. prim inp. prim f l.reac.en .in p
3-102 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
The total energy is calculated as follows:

Total energy = number of overflows · 655.35 + current count
For example:
(MAIN : Act .e ne rgy ou tp.pri m) = (MA IN: No. overfl. act. en. out) · 655.35 +
(MAIN: Act.e ne rgy ou tp.pri m)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-103

P438 3 Operation
3.13.2.7 Selection of the Procedure to Determine Energy Output
Procedure Characteristics Applications
1 ● Determination of the active and ● Constant load and slow load

reactive energy every 2 s variations (no significant load
(approximately) variations within 1 second).
● Reduced system loading ● Phase angles below 70°
(cos φ > 0.3 ).
2 ● Determination of the active and ● Fast load variations

reactive energy every 100 ms ● Phase angles below 70°
(approximately). (cos φ > 0.3 ).
● Increased system loading
The maximum phase-angle error of the P438 of 1° leads to greater errors in

measurement when the phase angle increases, as shown (for the range
0° ≤ φ < 90°) in the following diagram.
Fault
5%
2%
45° 70°
Phase Angle
S8Z0401B
Fig. 3-67: Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the
P438.
Error of measurement:
● Approx. ±2% of the measured value for |cos φ| ≥ 0.7
● Approx. ±5% of the measured value for |cos φ| ≥ 0.3
● where the whole measuring range is −180° ≤ φ ≤ 180°.
For phase angles φ with |cos φ| < 0.3, or when the error of measurement
resulting from the maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external
counters should be used to determine the energy output.
3-104 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.3 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions

The P438 can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system
by configuring the available function range. By including the desired P438
functions in the configuration and canceling all other, the user creates an
individually configured device appropriate to the specific application. Parameters,
signals and measured values of cancelled device functions are not displayed on
the local control panel. Functions of general applicability such as operating data
recording (OP_RC) or main functions (MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
3.13.3.1 Canceling a Device Function

The following conditions must be met before a P438 function can be cancelled or
removed:
● The P438 function must be disabled.
● None of the functions of the P438 function to be cancelled can be assigned
to a binary input.
● None of the signals of the P438 function can be assigned to a binary output
or an LED indicator.
● None of the functions of the P438 function to be cancelled may be selected
in a list parameter setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the “Configuration” branch of
the menu tree to access the setting relevant for the P438 function to be
cancelled. If, for example, the “LIMIT” function group is to be cancelled, the
setting of LI MI T: Function gr ou p L IMI T is set to Without. To re-include the
“LIMIT” function in the P438 configuration, the same setting is accessed and its
value is changed to With.
The P438 function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is
defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT”). In the following
description of the P438 functions, it is presumed that the corresponding P438
function is included in the configuration.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-105

P438 3 Operation
3.13.3.2 Enabling or Disabling a Device Function
MAIN:
Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0 0: No (= off)
1 MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
0: No (= off)
1: Yes (= on)
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 003 027 MAIN:

Prot. ext. enabled
Address 003 026 [ 003 028 ]
MAIN:
Enable protect. EXT
[ 003 027 ]
MAIN:
Prot. ext. disabled
MAIN: [ 038 046 ]
Disable protect. EXT
[ 003 026 ]
D5Z5004A
Fig. 3-68: Enabling or disabling a device function.
Besides cancelling P438 functions from the configuration, it is also possible to

disable protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection
can only be disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the
MAIN : D isabl e p rote ct. E XT and MA IN: En able prote ct. EXT functions are
both configured. When neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the
condition is interpreted as “Protection externally enabled”. If the triggering
signals of the binary signal inputs are implausible – i.e. both are at logic level =
“1” – then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T, the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not issued.
3-106 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.4 Inrush Stabilization
MAIN: MAIN:
Protection active &
Rush restraint ready
306 001
[ 041 024 ]
MAIN:
Block.rush restr.EXT
[ 039 169 ]
MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
[*]
blocked
MAIN: MAIN:
I> lift rush rstrPSx t lift rush rstr.PSx
C
[ * ] [ * ]
I̲ MAIN:
Rush restr.triggered
& 1 t &
[ 041 025 ]
MAIN:
I> enable rush r.PSx
[ * ]
Parameter MAIN: MAIN:

I> lift rush rstrPSx I> enable rush r.PSx
set 1 017 095 017 058
set 2 001 085 017 113
set 3 001 086 017 254

MAIN:
Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx
set 4 001 087 017 255
[ * ]
Parameter MAIN: MAIN:

Rush I(2fn)/I(fn)PSx t lift rush rstr.PSx
fnom
set 1 017 098 019 001

I(2⋅fn)/I(fn)
2* fnom set 2 001 091 019 002
set 3 001 092 019 003
set 4 001 093 019 004
48Z9313A
Fig. 3-69: Inrush stabilization.
Turning an autotransformer on or reclosing a circuit breaker on a locomotive,

after passing through a neutral section, could lead to inrush currents that are
interpreted as starting criteria by the protection device P438. The inrush
stabilization fonction detects such inrush currents and can selectively prevent
starting of selected protection functions.
Inrush stabilization is blocked if MA IN: Ru s h I( 2 fn )/I(fn )PSx is set to 'Blocked'
or if an external blocking signal has been triggered.
The inrush stabilization function detects an inrush current by evaluating the ratio
of the second harmonic current component to the fundamental. If this ratio
exceeds the threshold that can be set with the parameter MA IN: Rush I(2fn)/
I(fn)PSx, then the inrush stabilization operates.
The current trigger MAI N: I > l i ft rush rst rP Sx and a threshold MA IN: I>
e nabl e rush r .PSx define the range in which the inrush stabilization operates.
If the current is outside of this range then the inrush stabilization is blocked.
The parameter MAI N: t li f t rus h rs tr. PSx defines the maximum hold-time for
the inrush stabilization.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-107

P438 3 Operation
3.13.4.1 Selection of Functions
MAIN:
Funct.Rush restr.PSx
[ * ]
m out of n
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg
306 014
BUOC: BUOC:
MAIN: Starting I> Bl.Start. I>
Rush restr.triggered 036 013
[ 041 025 ] BUOC: BUOC:
Starting I>> Bl.Start. I>>
036 115
DELTA: DELTA:
Delta I starting Bl.Start Delta I
038 060
DIST: DIST:
WPC starting Bl.Start. WPC
039 158
DIST: DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting Bl.Start. Z1(Z1, ze)
039 003
DIST: DIST:
Z1'(Z1',ze) starting Bl.Start. Z1'(Z1', ze)
039 004
DIST: DIST:
Z2 starting Bl.Start. Z2
039 005
DIST: DIST:
Z2' starting Bl.Start. Z2'
039 006
DIST: DIST:
039 140
DIST: DIST:
039 141
DIST: DIST:
039 042
DIST: DIST:
039 043
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I> Bl.Start. I>
035 020
DTOC: DTOC:
035 021
DTOCA: DTOCA:
130 069
DTOCA: DTOCA:
130 070
DTOCB: DTOCB:
130 089
DTOCB: DTOCB:
130 090
MAIN:
Parameter Funct.Rush restr.PSx IDMT: IDMT:
Starting Iref> Bl.Start. Iref>
040 080
set 1 017 093
48Z9314A
IDMTA: IDMTA:
set 2 017 064 Starting Iref> Bl.Start. Iref>
130 110
set 3 017 082
IDMTB: IDMTB:
set 4 017 083 Starting Iref> Bl.Start. Iref>
130 130
Fig. 3-70: Selection of the stabilization criteria for the inrush stabilization.
The inrush stabilization is designed with respect to function groups DIST, DELTA,
BUOC, DTOC, DTOCA, DTOCB, IDMT, IDMTA and IDMTB. Depending on the
parameter MAIN : Funct.R ush re str .P Sx the starting of these function groups
is blocked selectively.
3-108 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.5 Harmonics Blocking
MAIN: MAIN:
Protection active &
Harm.blocking ready
306 001
[ 021 016 ]
MAIN:
Block. harm.blk. EXT
[ 021 073 ]
MAIN:
I(3fn)/I(fn) PSx &
[*]
blocked
MAIN:
I(5fn)/I(fn) PSx
[*]
blocked MAIN:
I>Lift harm.blk. PSx
MAIN: C
I(7fn)/I(fn) PSx [ * ]
[*]
blocked
t MAIN:
I̲ & 0 HARM. blk. triggered
[ 021 011 ]
MAIN:
I>Enable harm.b. PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
I(3fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]
MAIN:
& I(3fn) starting
3*fnom
[ 023 253 ]
MAIN:
I(5fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]
fnom
MAIN:
& I(5fn) starting
5*fnom
[ 023 254 ]
MAIN:
I(7fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]
fnom
MAIN:
I(7fn) starting
&
7*fnom [ 023 255 ]
Parameter MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

I>Lift harm.blk. PSx I>Enable harm.b. PSx I(3fn)/I(fn) PSx I(5fn)/I(fn) PSx I(7fn)/I(fn) PSx
set 1 020 248 020 244 020 229 020 233 020 238
set 2 020 249 020 245 020 230 020 235 020 239
set 3 020 250 020 246 020 231 020 236 020 242
set 4 020 251 020 247 020 232 020 237 020 243
48Z9315A
Fig. 3-71: Harmonics Blocking.
Harmonics blocking is blocked if all of MAI N: I( 3fn )/I(fn ) PSx, MAI N: I(5fn)/
I (fn) PSx and MA IN: I(7f n) /I(f n) PSx are set to 'Blocked' or if an external
blocking signal has been triggered.
The harmonics blocking function detects the ratio of the third, fifth and seventh
harmonic currents to the fundamental and can selectively prevent starting of
selected protection functions. If this ratio exceeds the threshold, then the
harmonics blocking operates.
The current trigger MA IN: I >En able harm.b. PSx and a threshold
MAI N: I>Lift harm.blk. PSx define the range in which the harmonics blocking
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-109

P438 3 Operation
operates. If the current is outside of this range then the harmonics blocking is
blocked.
The harmonics blocking function gets activated only, if the harmonics were
detected for minimal 2 periods of the base frequency. This avoids an early
blocking of the distance protection in the transient phase of a real network fault
appearance.
3.13.5.1 Selection of Functions
MAIN:
Funct.Harm.block.PSx
[ * ]
m out of n
MAIN:
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
BUOC: BUOC:
MAIN: Starting I> Bl.Start. I>
HARM. blk. triggered 036 013
[ 021 011 ] BUOC: BUOC:

036 115
DIST: DIST:
WPC starting Bl.Start. WPC
039 158
DIST: DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting Bl.Start. Z1(Z1, ze)
039 003
DIST: DIST:
Z1'(Z1',ze) starting Bl.Start. Z1'(Z1', ze)
039 004
DIST: DIST:
039 005
DIST: DIST:
039 006
DIST: DIST:
039 140
DIST: DIST:
039 141
DIST: DIST:
039 042
DIST: DIST:
039 043
DTOC: DTOC:
035 020
DTOC: DTOC:
035 021
DTOCA: DTOCA:
130 069
DTOCA: DTOCA:
130 070
DTOCB: DTOCB:
130 089
DTOCB: DTOCB:
130 090
IDMT: IDMT:
MAIN: Starting Iref>
Parameter Funct.Harm.block.PSx Bl.Start. Iref>
040 080
set 1 020 252 IDMTA: IDMTA:

48Z9316A

set 2 020 253 130 110
set 3 020 254 IDMTB: IDMTB:

set 4 020 255 130 130
Fig. 3-72: Selection of the stabilization criteria for the Harmonics blocking.
The harmonics blocking is designed with respect to function groups DIST, BUOC,
DTOC, DTOCA, DTOCB, IDMT, IDMTA and IDMTB. Depending on the parameter
MAIN : Funct.Harm .bl ock.P Sx the starting of these function groups is blocked
selectively.
3-110 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.6 Measurement of Frequency
MAIN: &
Protection active
f<>:
Ready
[ 042 101 ]
& f<>:
V̲Meas
fnom
V̲
MAIN:
Undervolt. block. V<
[ 018 200 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
Evaluation time
[ 018 201 ]
f Φ
f<>:
No. periods reached
f<>:
fMeas
48Z9317A
Fig. 3-73: Measurement of frequency: evaluation time, undervoltage blocking.
The over-/underfrequency protection f<> uses some general settings for the
frequency measurement:
● the evaluation time
● the undervoltage blocking
The over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient
magnitude. Therefore it is blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage falls
below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations
or interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate
conditions must be satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in
order for a signal to be issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-111

P438 3 Operation
3.13.7 Function Blocks
MAIN:
Inp.asg. fct.block.1
[ 221 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 MAIN:
Op. delay fct. block
Signal 3 [ 221 029 ]
Signal n
t 0 MAIN:
Selected signal Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
t 0 MAIN:
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active
Inp.asg. fct.block.2 [ 221 023 ]
[ 221 022 ]
Selected signal
F0Z5016B
Fig. 3-74: Function blocks.
By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations

can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example,
by an external signal “CB drive not ready” or by the trip command from an
external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or
output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the
function blocks 1 and 2 by setting a “1 out of n” parameter. The input signal from
the function blocks starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal
MAI N: Fct. block . 1 active is issued.
3-112 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.8 Multiple Blocking
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 1
[ 021 021 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
Selected functions MAIN:

Blck.1 sel.functions
306 022
MAIN:
Blocking 1 EXT
[ 040 060 ]
MAIN:
Fct.assign. block. 2
[ 021 022 ]
Function 1
m out of n
Function 2
Function n
Selected functions MAIN:

Blck.2 sel.functions
306 023
MAIN:
Blocking 2 EXT
[ 040 061 ]
D5Z50CLA
Fig. 3-75: Multiple blocking.
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via “m out of n” parameters.

The functions defined by selection may be blocked via an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3.13.9 Blocked/Faulty
MAIN:
Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off) MAIN:
Protect. not ready
[ 004 060 ]
MAIN:
SFMON: Blocked/faulty
Blocking [ 004 065 ]
304 951
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Fct. assign. fault
[ 021 031 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
D5Z50EHA
Fig. 3-76: “Blocked/Faulty” signal.
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a
signal from an output relay configured MAIN: Bloc ked/fau lty. In addition
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-113

P438 3 Operation
functions can be selected that will issue the MAIN: Blocked/faulty signal by
setting a “m out of n” parameter.
3.13.10 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that
represents the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the
“Closed” position signal is made by the setting MAIN: Sig.assign. CB close.
As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input
only if this coupling is implemented.
MAIN:
Sig.assign. CB close
[ 021 020 ]
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 031 ]
DEV02:
Closed signal EXT
[ 210 081 ]
DEV10:
Closed signal EXT
[ 211 231 ] Selected signal
INP:Fct. assign. UXX
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx

CB closed A EXT
[ 036 051 ]

CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
19Z9301A
Fig. 3-77: Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal.
3-114 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.11 Close Command
MAIN:
M-trip signal 1
[ 039 101 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 036 051 ]
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ]
MAIN:
ClCmd inhib.by CB cl
[ 015 042 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
En.man.clos.cmd.USER Rel.t. enab. man.cmd
[ 003 105 ] [ 003 088 ]
0
1 t MAIN:
1 Man. cl. cmd.enabl.
[ 039 113 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. USER
[ 018 033 ]
MAIN:
tCB, Close
0 [ 000 032 ]
0: don't execute MAIN:

1 t
1: execute Man. close command
[ 037 068 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 023 ] [ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
Man. close cmd. EXT
[ 041 022 ]
MAIN:
C Close cmd.pulse time
ARC: &
(Re)close request [ 015 067 ]
[ 037 077 ]
MAIN:
ASC: Close command
Close enable
[ 037 083 ] 1 t [ 037 009 ]
ASC:
Enabled
&
[ 018 024 ]
&
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000 &
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
0 + MAIN:
No. close commands
1 [ 009 055 ]
MAIN: 0: don't execute R

General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ]
48Z9318A
Fig. 3-78: Close command.
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by
the automatic synchronism check (ASC), by parameters or via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The close command by parameters or a binary
signal input is only executed if there is no trip command 1 present and no trip
has been issued by a protection device operating in parallel. Moreover, with the
setting of MAI N: C lCm d i nh ib.by CB cl to Yes, the close command is not
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-115

P438 3 Operation
executed if there is a “CB closed” position signal present. The duration of the
close command can be set.
If the ARC function issues a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then
the close command requires a close enable by the ASC function.
Close Command Counter

The number of close commands are counted. This counter may be reset
individually or together with other counters (see Section 3.13.17, (p. 3-130)).
3.13.12 Multiple Signaling
MAIN:
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1
[ 221 051 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal MAIN:

Mult. sig. 1 active
[ 221 017 ]
MAIN:
Mult. sig. 1 stored
MAIN: S 11
[ 221 054 ]
Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2
[ 221 052 ] R1
Selected signal MAIN:

Mult. sig. 2 active
[ 221 053 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 1 MAIN:
[ --- --- ] Mult. sig. 2 stored
S 11 [ 221 055 ]
COMM1:
Reset mult. sig. 2 R1
[ --- --- ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OUTP:
Reset latching
402 102
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
12Z62FMA
Fig. 3-79: Multiple signaling.
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function
using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple
signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment
with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal
are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:
● General reset
● Latching reset
● LED indicators reset
● A command received through the communication interface
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal
will follow the updated signal.
3-116 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.13 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
3.13.13.1 Starting Signals
MAIN:
General reset USER MAIN:
[ 003 002 ] >+ No. general start.
↗ 1: execute ≥1 >R [ 004 000 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
DIST: ≥1
Starting MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 135 ]
[ 036 000 ]
DELTA:
Delta I starting
[ 038 060 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>>
[ 036 115 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>
[ 130 069 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>>
[ 130 070 ]
DTOCB:
Starting I>
[ 130 089 ]
DTOCB:
Starting I>>
[ 130 090 ]
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMTA:
Starting Iref>
[ 130 110 ]
IDMTB:
Starting Iref>
[ 130 130 ]
48Z9319A
Fig. 3-80: General start of the P438.
The starting signals from the distance, backup overcurrent, definite-time

overcurrent, inverse-time overcurrent and high impedance protection functions
are linked to form common starting signals. The number of general starts is
counted.
MAIN:
MAIN: ≥1 500 ms Start. PIR M-trip
M-trip command 1
[ 039 014 ]
[ 039 011 ]
MAIN:
M-trip command 2
[ 039 058 ]
MAIN: ≥1 MAIN:
500 ms Start. PIR R-trip
R-trip command 1
[ 039 012 ] [ 039 015 ]
MAIN:
R-trip command 2
[ 039 059 ] 48Z9320A
Fig. 3-81: PIR starting.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-117

P438 3 Operation
In the event of the end of the main-trip and re-trip command a timer stage of 500
ms is started. While this timer stage is running, the 'PIR Starting' signals are set.
(PIR: Automatic testing device for Catenary, with a pre-insertion/pre-closing
resistor as a line check)
3.13.13.2 Trip Command

The P438 provides the following trip commands:
● Main-Trip command
● Re-Trip command
● Back-Trip command
The functions required to trip can be selected by setting an 'm out of n'
parameter independently for each of the trip commands. The trip command
minimum trip time is settable. The trip signals are present only as long as the
conditions for the signal are satisfied.
3-118 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Block. M-trip USER
[ 022 090 ]
MAIN:
0 M-trip blocked
[ 039 050 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. M-trip EXT
[ 038 050 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. M-trip signal 1 M-trip signal 1
[ 039 081 ] [ 039 101 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. M-trip cmd1
MAIN:
Fct.asg. M-trip cmd1 [ 021 034 ]
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
M-trip command 1
Signal 2 [ 039 011 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching M-trip cmd1
[ 021 040 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. M-trip signal 2 M-trip signal 2
[ 039 084 ] [ 039 102 ]
MAIN:
MAIN:
Fct.asg. M-trip cmd2 [ 021 035 ]
[ 021 008 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
M-trip command 2
Signal 2 [ 039 058 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching M-trip cmd2
[ 021 041 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Latch. trip c. reset
[ 040 139 ] 48Z9321A
Fig. 3-82: Main-trip command.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-119

P438 3 Operation
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Block. R-trip USER
[ 022 091 ]
MAIN:
0 R-trip blocked
[ 039 051 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. R-trip EXT
[ 038 051 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. R-trip signal 1 R-trip signal 1
[ 039 082 ] [ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. R-trip cmd1
MAIN:
Fct.asg. R-trip cmd1 [ 021 036 ]
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
R-trip command 1
Signal 2 [ 039 012 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching R-trip cmd1
[ 021 042 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. R-trip signal 2 R-trip signal 2
[ 039 085 ] [ 039 104 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. R-trip cmd2
MAIN:
Fct.asg. R-trip cmd2 [ 021 037 ]
[ 021 026 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
R-trip command 2
Signal 2 [ 039 059 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching R-trip cmd2
[ 021 043 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
[ 040 139 ] 48Z9322A
Fig. 3-83: Re-trip command.
3-120 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN:
Block. M-trip USER
[ 022 092 ]
MAIN:
0 B-trip blocked
[ 039 052 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. B-trip EXT
[ 038 052 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. B-trip signal 1 B-trip signal 1
[ 039 083 ] [ 039 105 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. B-trip cmd1
MAIN:
Fct.asg. B-trip cmd1 [ 021 038 ]
[ 021 027 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
B-trip command 1
Signal 2 [ 039 013 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching B-trip cmd1
[ 021 0404 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: MAIN:
Man. B-trip signal 2 B-trip signal 2
[ 039 098 ] [ 039 106 ]
MAIN:
Min.dur. B-trip cmd2
MAIN:
Fct.asg. B-trip cmd2 [ 021 039 ]
[ 021 028 ]
Signal 1 1 t MAIN:
B-trip command 2
Signal 2 [ 039 060 ]
m out of n
Signal 3
…
Signal n
Selected signals
MAIN:
Latching B-trip cmd2
[ 021 045 ]
>S1 1
0
>R1
1
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
[ 040 139 ] 48Z9323A
Fig. 3-84: Back-trip command.
3.13.13.2.1 Latching of the Trip Commands

Each of the trip commands can be individually set to operate in the latching
mode. The following parameters are available for this setting: (via or ,
respectively).
● (021 040) MA IN: Latchi ng M-trip cmd1
● (021 041) MAIN: Latchi ng M-trip cmd2
● (021 042) MAI N: L atchin g R-tr ip cmd1
● (021 043) MA IN: Latchi ng R-tri p cmd2
● (021 044) MA IN: Latchi ng B-trip cmd1
● (021 045) MA IN: Latchi ng B-trip cmd2
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-121

P438 3 Operation
The trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by parameter
(MAIN : R set.l atch .tri p USE R) or reset through an appropriately configured
binary signal input (MAI N: R es et latch.trip E XT).
3.13.13.2.2 Blocking of the Trip Commands
MAIN:
Trip cmd.block. USER
[ 021 012 ]
1 MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
0: No [ 021 013 ]
1: Yes
MAIN:
Block. trip cmd. EXT
[ 036 045 ]
47Z01AWA
Fig. 3-85: Blocking of the trip commands.
The trip commands can be blocked via parameters or an appropriately

configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for all trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip
commands are blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED
indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay
configured to “Blocked/Faulty”.
3.13.13.2.3 General Trip Signal
MAIN: ≥1
M-trip signal 1 MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 039 101 ]
[ 036 251 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
B-trip signal 1
[ 039 105 ]
MAIN:
M-trip signal 2
[ 039 102 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 2
[ 039 104 ]
MAIN:
B-trip signal 2
[ 039 106 ] 48Z9326A
Fig. 3-86: Blocking of the trip commands.
Trip signals from the Main-Trip command, the Re-Trip command and the Back-
Trip command are collectively issued as the "Gen Trip Signal" (general trip).
3-122 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.13.2.4 Counter of Trip Commands
DIST: MAIN:
Trip signal >+ No. final trip cmds.
≥1 & ≥1 &
[ 036 009 ] >R [ 004 005 ]
BUOC: MAIN:
Trip signal I> Final trip
1 100ms
[ 036 014 ] [ 038 103 ]
DELTA:
Trip signal
[ 038 056 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tI>
[ 041 020 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tI>H
[ 040 076 ]
DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>
[ 130 071 ]
DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 130 072 ]
DTOCB:
Trip signal tI>
[ 130 091 ]
DTOCB:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 130 092 ]
IDMT:
Trip signal tIref>
[ 040 084 ]
IDMTA:
Trip signal tIref>
[ 130 113 ]
IDMTB:
Trip signal tIref>
[ 130 133 ]
ARC: ≥1
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ] >S
11 &
1
>R
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ARC:
Close command
MAIN:
Trip cmd. blocked
[ 021 013 ]
MAIN: >+ MAIN:
M-trip command 1 No. M-trip cmds. 1
[ 039 011 ] >R
[ 009 005 ]
MAIN: >+ MAIN:
R-trip command 1 No. R-trip cmds. 1
>R
[ 039 012 ] [ 009 006 ]
>+ MAIN:
MAIN: No. B-trip cmds. 1
B-trip command 1 >R
[ 009 007 ]
[ 039 013 ]
>+ MAIN:
MAIN: No. M-trip cmds. 2
M-trip command 2 >R
[ 009 027 ]
[ 039 058 ] >+ MAIN:
No. R-trip cmds. 2
MAIN: >R
R-trip command 2 [ 009 028 ]
[ 039 059 ] >+ MAIN:
No. B-trip cmds. 2
MAIN: >R
B-trip command 2 [ 009 029 ]
[ 039 006 ] MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.cUSER
[ 003 007 ]
1 ≥1
MAIN: 0: don't execute

General reset USER 1: execute
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT
[ 005 210 ] 48Z9325A
Fig. 3-87: Trip command counters.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-123

P438 3 Operation
The number of trip commands is counted (individually for each of the trip
commands).
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
3.13.13.3 Blocking of the Trip Commands
MAIN:
En.man.trip cmd. EXT
[ 039 053 ]
MAIN:
En.man.trip cmd.USER MAIN:
[ 003 064 ] Rel.t. enab. man.cmd
[ 003 088 ]
MAIN:
0 Man. trip cmd enabl.
[ 039 080 ]
1 1 t
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Man.M-trip cmd USER
[ 003 065 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. M-trip signal 1
[ 039 081 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. M-trip cmd1 EXT
[ 039 054 ]
MAIN:
Man.M-trip cmd2 USER
[ 003 082 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. M-trip signal 2
[ 039 084 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. M-trip cmd2 EXT
[ 039 056 ]
MAIN:
Man.R-trip cmd USER
[ 003 066 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. R-trip signal 1
[ 039 082 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. R-trip cmd1 EXT
[ 039 055 ]
MAIN:
Man.R-trip cmd2 USER
[ 003 083 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. R-trip signal 2
[ 039 085 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. R-trip cmd2 EXT
[ 039 057 ]
MAIN:
Man.B-trip cmd USER
[ 003 067 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. B-trip signal 1
[ 039 083 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. B-trip cmd1 EXT
[ 039 107 ]
MAIN:
Man.B-trip cmd2 USER
[ 003 087 ]
MAIN:
0 1 100ms Man. B-trip signal 2
[ 039 098 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Man. B-trip cmd2 EXT
[ 039 108 ] 48Z9324A
Fig. 3-88: MAnual trip command.
The manual trip command may be issued using setting parameters or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. It will be issued only if the manual
trip command was enabled. The manual trip command issued using a setting
3-124 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
parameter is enabled only for a set time period. The manual trip command
issued from an appropriately configured binary signal input is enabled only for as
long as the associated enabling input is set.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-125

P438 3 Operation
3.13.14 CB Trip Signal
MAIN:
Inp.assign. tripping
[ 221 010 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
MAIN: MAIN:
R-trip command 1 Prot.trip>CB tripped
[ 039 012 ] [ 221 012 ]
MAIN:
B-trip command 1 0
[ 039 013 ]
1
MAIN:
M-trip command 2 2
[ 039 058 ]
3
MAIN:
R-trip command 2
[ 039 059 ] 0 3
MAIN:
B-trip command 2 0: Without function
[ 039 060 ] 1: Gen. trip command 1
2: Gen. trip command 2
3: Gen.trip command 1/2
MAIN:
Oper. mode CB Trip
[ 221 080 ]
1 2
1: With command
2: W/o command
MAIN:
Inp. asg. CB trip
[ 221 013 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV10:
Switch. device open
[ 211 236 ] MAIN:
CB trip internal
Selected signal [ 221 006 ]
MAIN:
Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext
[ 221 050 ]
MAIN:
CB tripped
[ 221 016 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg. CB trip ext
[ 221 024 ]
Selected signal
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
48Z9327A
Fig. 3-89: CB trip signal.
3-126 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
The signal “CB Trip” depends on the mode of operation and is based on different
events:
Mode of operation: “With command” (MA IN: Ope r. mode C B Tr ip, 221 080):
In this mode of operation, in addition the MA IN: C B trip int ernal (221 006)
signal is formed.
The signal MA IN : C B tr ip i ntern al is issued if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
● The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of
“1” or the selected trip command from the P438 is present.
● At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of “1” is
present.
Mode of operation: “W/o command” (MAI N: Oper. mode CB Trip, 221 080):
The MAI N: C B tri pped signal will only be issued, if the circuit breaker is
tripping without any command issued by the P438. Commands via
communication interfaces, local control panel or binary inputs are treated in the
same manner. This mode of operation disables the MAI N: CB trip int e rnal
signal.
The CB trip signal of an external device can also be signaled. For this task, one
input needs to be configured for “MA IN: In p.as g.C B t r.en .e xt“, a further
input for “MAI N: I np.asg. CB trip e xt“.
3.13.15 Communication Error
COMM1: MAIN:
Communication error ≥1 Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
304 422
DVICE:
Module A not fitted
307 140
19Z5070A
Fig. 3-90: Communication Error.
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted,

the signal “Communication error” will be issued. This signal will also be issued if
communication module A is not fitted.
3.13.16 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
MAIN:
Date
[ 003 090 ]
MAIN:
Time of day
[ 003 091 ]
MAIN:
Time switching
[ 003 095 ]
MAIN:
Min-pulse clock EXT
[ 060 060 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
Time switching
Setting 0: Standard time

1: Daylight saving time
Q6Z0152B
Fig. 3-91: Date/time setting and clock synchronization with minute pulses presented at a binary signal input.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-127

P438 3 Operation
Switching from standard to daylight saving time or back requires correct time
setting frames from the time synchronization master (according the applied
communication protocol).
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory
and the event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date
and time need to be set in the P438.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The P438 evaluates the rising edge.
This will set the clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If
several start/end signals occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is
evaluated.
3-128 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.16.1 Synchronization Source

The P438 provides numerous options to synchronize the internal clock:
● Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM1/IEC
(full time)
● Telegram with the time of day via the communication interface COMM2/PC
(full time)
● IRIG-B Signal (IRIGB; time of day only)
● Minute pulse presented at a binary signal input (MAIN), see Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-
127) and previous paragraph
With older P438 versions these interfaces had equal ranking i.e. clock
synchronization was carried out regardless of which sub-function initiated
triggering. No conflicts have to be taken into account as long as synchronization
sources (communication master, IRIG‑B and minute pulse source) operate at the
same time of day. Should the synchronization sources operate with a different
time basis unwanted step changes in the internal clock may occur. On the other
hand a redundant time of day synchronization is often used so as to sustain time
synchronization via IRIG‑B interface even if and while the SCADA communication
is out of service.
With the current P438 versions a primary and a backup source for time of day
synchronization may now be set, where both provide the four options listed in
the above.
MAIN : Prim.Source Ti me Sync
MAIN : BackupSource TimeSyn c
With this feature synchronization occurs continuously from the primary source as
long as time synchronization telegrams are received within a time-out period set
at M AI N: T ime syn c. time -out The backup source is required if after the set
time-out there is no synchronization through the primary source.
When selecting the time telegram via IEC as the primary source the P438 will
expect time synchronization telegrams from server SNTP2 after server SNTP 1
has become defective, before it will switch over to the backup source.
Time synchronization occurs solely from the primary source when the time-out
stage is blocked.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-129

P438 3 Operation
3.13.17 Resetting Actions

Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in
several ways. The following types of resetting actions are possible:
● Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given
that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display
of measured event data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new
event occurs. In this case only the displays on the local control panel LCD
are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
● Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local
control panel LCD by pressing the “Clear” key located on the local
control panel. By selecting the required function at L OC: Fct. reset k ey
further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when
the “Clear” key is pressed.
● Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point
FT_R C: R ese t re cord. USER and set to execute, see also the exact step-
by-step description in Section 6.13.7, (p. 6-50).)
● Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory)
through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example:
Assign parameter FT_RC: Re se t re cord. EXT to the relevant binary
signal input e.g. INP: Fct. assi gn m. U 301 .)
● Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point
MAIN : Group re se t 1 USER (or MAI N: Group rese t 2 USER) and
setting it to execute. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset)
must be assigned to parameter MAI N: Fct. assign. reset 1 (or
MAI N: Fct .assign . res et 2, resp.)
● Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(That is assign parameter MAI N: Grou p r es et 1 EXT (or MA IN: Gr oup
rese t 2 EXT) to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. INP : Fct. assig nm.
U 301 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter
MAI N: Fct .assi gn . res et 1 (or MA IN: Fct.assign. reset 2).
● General resetting by setting parameters (menu point MAIN: Genera l
rese t USER). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any
special configuration options.
● General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
(MAI N: General res et EXT is assigned to the relevant binary signal
input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special
configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory
then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart or simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored counter values will be lost.
3-130 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
Reset indicat. USER
[ 021 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute MAIN:
≥1 Reset LED
306 020
MAIN:
Reset indicat. EXT
[ 065 001 ]
12Z6115A
Fig. 3-92: General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel.
LOC: OP_RC:
Reset key active & ≥1 Reset record. EXT
310 024 [ 005 213 ]
LOC:
Fct. reset key
[ 005 251 ]
m out of n
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[005 213]
MAIN: MAIN:
Group reset 1 USER Group reset 2 USER
[ * ] [ * ]
0 0
1 ≥1 & 1 ≥1 &
0: don't execute 0: don't execute
MAIN: 1: execute 1: execute

Group reset 1 EXT
[ * ]
MAIN:
Group reset 2 EXT
MAIN: MAIN:
[ * ] Fct.assign. reset 1 Fct.assign. reset 2
[ * ] [ * ]
m out of n m out of n
OP_RC: OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT Reset record. EXT
[005 213] [005 213]
12Z61RMB
Fig. 3-93: “CLEAR” key on the local control panel and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data
recording (e.g. as an example for the reset signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T.
A complete list of all resetting parameters that can be used in the way shown in
Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131) can be obtained from the separately available
DataModelExplorer: Look up the setting parameter MA IN: Fct. ass ign. reset 1
in the file P438‑661_en_Addresses.pdf, and there follow the link to the referenced
config. table.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-131

P438 3 Operation
3.13.17.1 Resetting Actions through Keys on the Local Control Panel

Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make
access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by
configuring them to a configurable key.
● One can include the relevant resetting action in the configuration of the
“READ” ( ) key (through LOC: Fct. re ad k ey).
3.13.18 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical

Communications Channels
MAIN:
Chann.assign.COMM1/2
[ 003 169 ]
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2)
2: COMM1->chann.2,(2-1)
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM1
Comm. interface
Channel 1
"Logical"
Communic. interface
COMM2
Comm. interface
Channel 2
45Z5171A
Fig. 3-94: Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up

to two communications channels available (see “Technical Data”, Chapter 2,
(p. 2-1)). These physical communications channels may be assigned to
communications interfaces COMM1 and COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2,
then the settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically
assigned to communications channel 1.
COMM2 can only be used to transmit data to and from the P438 if its PC interface
has been de-activated. As soon as the PC interface is used to transmit data,
COMM2 becomes “dead”. It will only be enabled again when the “time-out”
period for the PC interface has elapsed.
3-132 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.13.19 Test Mode
MAIN:
Test mode USER
[ 003 012 ]
0
MAIN:
1 ≥1 Test mode
[ 037 071 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Test mode EXT
[ 037 070 ]
D5Z50EBB
Fig. 3-95: Setting the test mode.
If tests are run on the P438, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that
all incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-133

P438 3 Operation
3.14 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)

With the P438, four independent parameter subsets may be pre-set. The user
may switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the
protection function.
Selecting the Parameter Subset

The control path determining the active parameter subset (function setting or
binary signal input) may be selected via the function setting PSS: C ontrol via
USER or via the external signal PSS: Control via user EXT. Correspondingly,
the parameter subset is selected either in accordance with the pre-set function
setting PSS: Par am.su bs. se l. USE R or in accordance with external signals.
Which parameter subset is actually active at a particular time may be
determined by scanning the logic state signals PSS: Actual param . subset or
PSS : PS 1 act iv e.
Selecting the Parameter Subset via Binary Inputs

If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the
P438 first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured
for parameter subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset
selected via the function setting will be active. The P438 also checks whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter
subset selection. This is only true when only one binary signal input is set to a
logic level of “1”. If more than one signal input is set to a logic level of “1”, then
the parameter subset previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval
occur while switching between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary
signal inputs have a logic level of “0”), then the stored hold time is started. While
this timer stage is running, the previously selected parameter subset remains
active. As soon as a signal input has a logic level of “1”, the associated
parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored time has elapsed, there is
still no signal input with a logic level of “1”, the parameter subset selected via
the function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic level of “1” is present at any of
the binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the
parameter subset selected via the function parameter will become active once
the stored time has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while
the stored hold timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When
subset selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of
approximately 100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
3-134 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
PSS:
Control via USER
[ 003 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes PSS:
Control via user
PSS: [ 036 102 ]
Control via user EXT
[ 036 101 ] PSS:
Param.subs.sel. USER
INP: [ 003 060 ]
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
1
2
U x1
3
U x2
4
U x3
1: Parameter subset 1
U xx
2: Parameter subset 2
Address 065 002
Address 065 003 3: Parameter subset 3

1
Address 065 004 4: Parameter subset 4 2
Address 065 005 3
PSS:
1 4 Actual param. subset
[ 003 062 ]
PSS:
PS 1 active
[ 036 090 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 1 EXT PSS:
[ 065 002 ] PS 2 active
[ 036 091 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 2 EXT PS 3 active
[ 065 003 ] [ 036 092 ]
PSS: PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT PS 4 active
[ 065 004 ] [ 036 093 ]
PSS:
Activate PS 4 EXT
[ 065 005 ]
1 4
PSS:
Keep time
[ 003 063 ]
1
PSS:
0 4 Ext.sel.param.subset
[ 003 061 ]
PSS:
PS 1 activated ext.
[ 036 094 ]
PSS:
PS 2 activated ext.
[ 036 095 ]
PSS:
PS 3 activated ext.
[ 036 096 ]
PSS:
PS 4 activated ext.
[ 036 097 ]
D5Z5002A
Fig. 3-96: Activating the parameter subsets.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-135

P438 3 Operation
3.15 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)

Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P438 ensure that internal faults are
detected and do not lead to malfunctions. The selection of function assignments
to the alarm signal includes, among others, self-monitoring signals from the
communications monitor, measuring-circuit monitoring, open-circuit monitoring
and the logic outputs.
3.15.1 Tests During Start-up

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to
verify full operability of the P438. If the P438 detects a fault in one of the tests,
then start-up is terminated. The display shows which test was running when
termination occurred. No control actions may be carried out. A new attempt to
start up the P438 can only be initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then
on again.
3.15.2 Cyclic Tests

After start-up has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will
be run during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified
monitoring signal will be issued and stored in a non-volatile(NV) memory – the
monitoring signal memory – along with the assigned date and time (see
Section 3.17, (p. 3-140)).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the
minimum acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is
displayed, then the power supply module should be replaced within a month,
since otherwise there is the danger of data loss if the supply voltage should fail.
Section 12.1, (p. 12-2) gives further information on maintenance procedures.
3.15.3 Signals
SFMON:
Fct. assign. warning
[ 021 030 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
SFMON:
Selected monit. sig. ≥1 Warning (LED)
[ 036 070 ]
SFMON:
SFMON: Warning (relay)
Hardware fault [ 036 100 ]
304 950
Q6Z0154B
Fig. 3-97: Monitoring signals.
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay configured
SFMON : Warnin g ( rel ay). The output relay operates as long as an internal
fault is detected.
Note: It is strongly recommended to use an output relay of the power supply

module for signaling “blocked/faulty” state (so-called watchdog relay).
3-136 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.15.4 Device Response

The response of the P438 is dependent on the type of monitoring signal. The
following responses are possible:
● Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a
signal is issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation
exists, for example, when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
● Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective
functions, then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for
example, to the detection of a fault on the communication module or in the
area of the PC interface.
● Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a
system restart – such as a fault caused by excessive electro-magnetic
interference –, then a procedure called a warm restart is automatically
initiated. During this procedure, as with any start-up, the computer system
is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that
no stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the
procedure. A warm restart can also be triggered manually by control action.
During a warm restart sequence the protective functions and the
communication through serial interfaces will be blocked.
If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been triggered by the
self-monitoring system within the set SF MO N: Mon . sig. ret e nt ion, then
the protective functions remain blocked but communication through the
serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
If a corrupted setting is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, settings are restored from an internal
back-up memory. Nevertheless, in order to get the device back to well
defined operation conditions a warm restart is executed.
For any warm restart initiated by self-monitoring, the root cause (alarm
event) is logged in the monitoring buffer.
● Cold Restart
In case the recovery of corrupted settings failed (e.g. because of an
electrical defect of the memory chip), then a cold restart is carried out. This
is necessary because the P438 cannot identify which parameter in the
subset is corrupted. A cold restart causes all internal memories to be reset
to a defined state. This means that all the protection device settings are
also erased after a cold restart. In order to establish a safe initial state, the
default values have been selected so that the protective functions are
blocked. Both the monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the
value indicating parameter loss are entered in the monitoring signal
memory.
A cold restart can also be triggered manually by control action (to
intentionally erase all memories and reset the device to default settings).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-137

P438 3 Operation
3.15.5 Monitoring Signal Memory

Depending on the type of internal fault detected the P438 will respond by trying
to eliminate the problem with a warm restart. (See above; for further details read
also about P438 behavior with problems in Chapter 11, (p. 11-1).) Whether or
not this measure will suffice can only be determined if the monitoring signal has
not already been stored in the monitoring signal memory because of a previous
fault. If it was already stored and a second fault is detected then, depending on
the type of fault detected, the P438 will be blocked after the second warm
restart.
In order to better monitor this behavior the parameter at SFMON: Mon. sig.
re t ent ion is applied. This parameter may either be set to ‘Blocked’ or to a time
duration (in hours). (It is, however, discouraged to set it to 0, because in this
case, there would be no blocking at all, so that there would be the danger of
maloperation in case of a permanent failure.)
The default for this timer stage is Blocked, i.e. blocking of the protection device
with two identical faults occurs independently of the time elapsed since the first
fault monitoring signal was issued.
The behavior caused by sporadic faults could lead to an unwanted blocking of the
P438 if the monitoring signal memory had not been reset in the interim, for
example, because the substation is difficult to reach in wintertime or reading-out
and clearing of the monitoring signal memory via the communication interfaces
was not enabled. To defuse this problem it is suggested to set the function
parameter to a specific time period so that blocking will only occur if the same
fault occurs again within this time period. Otherwise, the P438 will continue to
operate normally after a warm restart.
3.15.6 Monitoring Signal Memory Time Tag

The time when the device fault occurred last is recorded.
3-138 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.16 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)

For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of
events, a non-volatile memory is provided (cyclic buffer). The “operationally
relevant” signals, each fully tagged with date and time at signal start and signal
end, are entered in chronological order. The signals relevant for operation
include control actions such as function disabling and enabling and triggers for
testing and resetting. The start and end of system loggings and recordings that
represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads, ground faults or
short-circuits are also recorded. The overload or fault events itself are stored in
the relevant event recordings only. The operating data memory can be cleared/
reset.
Counter for Signals Relevant to System Operation

The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
OP_RC:
Operat. data record.
[ 003 024 ]
Operating memory
MAIN:
Oper.-relev. signal
306 024
MAIN: OP_RC:
General reset USER No. oper. data sig.
[ 003 002 ] +
[ 100 002 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 213 ]
OP_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 001 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z61CMA
Fig. 3-98: Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-139

P438 3 Operation
3.17 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)

The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in
the monitoring signal memory. The memory buffer allows for a maximum of
30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O ve rf low MT_RC signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered
in the monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral
fault can be entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can
select this option by setting an “m out of n” parameter (see Section 3.15, (p. 3-
136)).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is
signaled by the red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry
causes the LED to flash (on/off/on....).
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action.
Entries in the monitoring signal memory are not cleared automatically, even if
the corresponding test in a new test cycle now shows the P438 to be healthy.
The contents of the monitoring signal memory can be read from the local control
panel or through the PC or communication interface. The time and date
information assigned to the individual entries can be read out through the PC or
communication interface or from the local control panel.
Monitoring Signal Counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on
the monitoring signal counter (MT_RC : N o. mon it. signals).
MT_RC:
Mon. signal record.
[ 003 001 ]
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021
SFMON:
Hardware fault
304 950
Selected monit. sig.
MT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 008 ]
CT30 SFMON:
≥1 Overflow MT_RC
[ 090 012 ]
0
MT_RC:
1 ≥1 No. monit. signals
[ 004 019 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 240 ]
12Z6155A
Fig. 3-99: Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter.
3-140 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.18 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
3.18.1 Overload Duration

In the event of an overload, the P438 determines the overload duration. The
overload duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
OL_R C: R ecord. in progr e ss signal.
OL_RC: OL_DA:
Record. in progress + Overload duration
[ 035 003 ] [ 004 102 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
50Z0137A
Fig. 3-100: Overload duration.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-141

P438 3 Operation
3.18.2 Acquiring Measured Overload Data from the Thermal Overload

Protection
Measured overload values are derived from the thermal overload protection’s
measured operating data. They are stored at the end of an overload event.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress C
[ 035 003 ]
THERM: OL_DA:
Status therm.replica Status THERM replica
[ 004 016 ] [ 004 147 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
I Load current THERM
305 202 [ 004 058 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Object temperature Object temp. THERM
[ 004 137 ] [ 004 035 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Coolant temperature Coolant temp. THERM
[ 004 149 ] [ 004 036 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Pre-trip time left Pre-trip t.leftTHERM
[ 004 139 ] [ 004 148 ]
R
THERM: OL_DA:
Temp. offset replica Offset THERM replica
[ 004 109 ] [ 004 154 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
12Z6238A
Fig. 3-101: Measured overload values from the thermal overload protection.
3-142 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.19 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
3.19.1 Start of Overload Recording

An overload exists – and consequently overload recording begins – if at least the
signal THER M: St art ing k*Ire f > is issued.
3.19.2 Counting Overload Events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
OL_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
[ 041 108 ] +
R OL_RC:
No. overload
[ 004 101 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
1: execute
52Z01C3A
Fig. 3-102: Counting overload events.
3.19.3 Time Tagging

The date of each overload event is stored. The overload start or end signals are
likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time assigned to an
overload event when the event begins can be read out from the overload
memory on the local control panel or through the PC and communication
interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload) can be
retrieved from the overload memory or through the PC or one of the
communication interfaces.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-143

P438 3 Operation
3.19.4 Overload Logging

Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order
with reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each
involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-
volatile overload memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the
oldest overload log will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in
the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single
overload event, then OL_RC: Ove rl. mem. ove rflow will be entered as the
last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data will also be entered in the
overload memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
OL_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 003 ]
Signal 1 + CT200 OL_RC:

1 ≥1 Overl. mem. overflow
Signal 2 1 R [ 035 007 ]
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 OL_RC:
Overload recording 1
[ * ]
OL_RC:
n Overload recording 1
Measured value 1
1 033 020
Measured value 2
2 033 021
Measured value 3
3 033 022
Measured value N
4 033 023
MAIN:
Time tag
306 021 5 033 024
FT_RC: & 6 033 025

Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ] 7 033 026
R
8 033 027
OL_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 100 003 ]
MAIN:
1 ≥1
General reset USER 0: don't execute
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
OL_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 241 ]
12Z6117A
Fig. 3-103: Overload memory.
3-144 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)

When there is a primary system fault, the P438 collects the following measured
fault data:
Running time:
(004 021) FT_DA: Ru nni ng time
Fault duration:
(008 010) FT_ DA: Faul t duration
Fault determination and run time to measurement:

(004 198) FT_DA : Faul t deter m.
(004 199) FT_DA: Ru n ti me to me as.
Phase voltage and fault current (short-circuit current), as p.u. value:

(004 026) FT_DA : Faul t voltage p.u .
(004 183) FT _D A: Faul t vol tage A p.u.
(004 184) FT_ DA: Faul t vol tage B p. u.
(004 025) FT_DA : Fault curren t p.u.
(004 181) FT_DA : Fa ult curren t A p.u.
(004 182) FT_DA : Faul t cu rre nt B p. u.
Phase fault loop angle:

(004 024) FT_DA : Fault loop an gle
(235 203) FT _D A: Faul t loop an gle A
(236 203) FT_DA : Fa ult loop angle B
Fault impedance (short-circuit impedance) in secondary and primary Ohms:

(004 176) FT_DA: Faul t impe dance, pri m
(235 207) FT_DA : Fault imped., pri A
(236 207) FT_DA : Fault imped., pri B
(004 023) FT_DA : Fault impedance ,s e c.
(235 202) FT_DA : Fa ult imped.,se c. A
(236 202) FT_DA : Faul t i mpe d.,se c B
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-145

P438 3 Operation
Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in secondary and primary Ohms:

(004 029) FT_DA: Fau lt r eact ance ,prim
(235 206) FT_DA : Fau lt r eact .,pri A
(236 206) FT _DA: Fau lt r eact .,pri B
(004 028) FT_D A: Fa ult r eact ance ,s ec.
(235 205) FT _DA: Faul t re act .,se c A
(236 205) FT_DA : Fa ul t re act .,se c B
Fault location in percentage of line length and in km (or miles):

(004 027) FT_D A: Fau lt locat. pe rce nt
(235 204) FT _DA: Faul t loc. pe rce nt A
(236 204) FT _DA: Fau lt loc. pe rcen t B
(004 022) FT_DA : Fa ul t locati on
(235 201) FT_D A: Fa ult locati on A
(236 201) FT_DA: Fau lt location B
Plausibility check or defrost current, as p.u. value:

(004 177) FT_DA : I plaus/I dfrst. p. u.
The fault data with suffix A and B are available only when the Autotransformer feed
mode or Single feed with sum I mode is selected.
3.20.1 Running Time and Fault Duration

The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general
starting signal, and the fault duration is defined as the time between the start
and end of the FT_RC : Recor d. in progres s signal.
! G ! FT_DA:
MAIN: Running time
General starting +
[ 004 021 ]
[ 036 000 ]
R
≥1
FT_RC: ! G ! FT_DA:

Record. in progress + Fault duration
[ 035 000 ] [ 008 010 ]
R
MAIN: ≥1
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
306 020
49Z64DMA
Fig. 3-104: Running time and fault duration.
3-146 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.20.2 Fault Data Acquisition Time

The P438 determines the measured fault data for a particular point in time
during a fault. Depending on which protection function detects the fault, the
criterion for the determination of the recording start time is selected by the P438.
Normally, this occurs when the maximum current flows. If the defrost protection
function detects a fault, the acquisition of the fault data occurs when the
maximum current flows. The measured fault data are displayed at the end of the
fault. The protection function which detects a fault will be displayed on the P438.
If several protection functions detect a fault, then the protection function with
the highest priority is displayed. The priorities are given in the table below.
Priority Function Recognizing the Fault Acquisition Time Criterion
1 I>H of DTOC protection Maximum current
2 Distance protection Maximum current
3 Backup overcurrent-time protection Maximum current
4 DTOC/IDMT protection Maximum current
5 Defrost protection Maximum differential current
6 CT Plausibility check Maximum differential current
7 Time-voltage protection Maximum current
8 Thermal overload protection Maximum current
9 I> Trigger of the fault recording Maximum current
10 Manual trigger Maximum current
The time difference between the begining of the fault and the fault data
acquisition time is also displayed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-147

P438 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>H
[ 035 022 ]
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>>
[ 036 115 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>
[ 130 069 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>>
[ 130 070 ]
DTOCB:
Starting I>
[ 130 089 ]
DTOCB:
Starting I>>
[ 130 090 ]
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMTA:
Starting Iref>
[ 130 110 ]
IDMTB:
Starting Iref>
[ 130 130 ]
DFRST:
Starting
[ 041 204 ]
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
[ 041 096 ]
V<>:
Starting V< FT_DA:
Fault determ.
[ 041 037 ]
[ 004 198 ]
V<>:
Starting V<<
[ 041 099 ] C1
THERM:
Trip signal C2
[ 039 020 ]
C3
C4
C5
FT_RC:
I> triggered C6
[ 035 013 ] C7
C8
C9
FT_RC:
Trigger
[ 037 076 ]
|I̲max|
I̲ 1 4 6 9
,
|I̲d,max| 5
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst
1 9 FT_DA:
Save measured values
305 052
FT_DA:
MAIN: Run time to meas.
General reset USER [ 004 199 ]
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED 48Z9329A
Fig. 3-105: Determination of the fault data acquisition time.
3-148 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
The setting at FT_DA : Outp. flt .l ocat. P Sx determines the conditions under
which calculation and output of the fault location occur. The following settings
are possible:
● Always: Calculation and output of the fault location always occurs if the
other measured fault data are also being determined.
● Only aft. trip Z1/t1: Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the
P438 decides in favor of a trip in impedance zone 1 with standard reach
(non-extended zone).
● Only aft.tr. Z1ze/t1: Calculation and output of the fault location occurs if the
P438 decides in favor of a trip in impedance zone 1 with standard and
extended reach.
FT_DA:
305 052
FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
[ * ]
1: Always
2: Only aft. trip Z1/t1
3: Only aft.tr. Z1ze/t1

FT_DA:
Outp. fault location
305 051
DIST:
Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 016 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z1,ze
[ 035 074 ] Parameter FT_DA:
Outp. flt.locat. PSx
set 1 010 032
set 2 010 033
set 3 010 034
set 4 010 035
48Z9328A
Fig. 3-106: Fault location output.
3.20.3 Acquisition of Fault Data (Short Circuit Data)

The P438 stores the fault's current and voltage data determined at the time of
acquisition, as well as the calculated values of the fault reactance, fault
impedance and fault angle. The CT Plausibility check current or defrost current is
stored.
If the fault is detected by the backup overcurrent-time protection function, then
only the fault current can be determined, the fault voltage, the voltage of the
catenary and feeder, as well as the fault reactance, the fault impedance and the
fault angle cannot be determined.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and
Vnom. If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring
range, the Overflow indication will be displayed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-149

P438 3 Operation
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
C
035 052
BUOC:
Starting I> C1
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>>
[ 036 115 ]
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ] C
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. prim.
[ 010 002 ]
I̲ FT_DA:
Fault current p.u.
[ 004 025 ]
R
V̲
FT_DA:
Fault voltage p.u.
[ 004 026 ]
R
FT_DA:
Fault loop angle
[ 004 024 ]
R
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec.
[ 004 028 ]
R
FT_DA:
Fault impedance,sec.
[ 004 023 ]
R
FT_DA:
Fault reactance,prim
[ 004 029 ]
R
FT_DA:
Fault impedance,prim
[ 004 176 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
↗1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED 48Z9330A
Fig. 3-107: Acquisition of the fault currents and voltage, fault angles, fault reactance and impedance. (The fault
data with suffix A and B are available only when the Autotransformer feed mode or Single feed with sum I mode is
selected. )
3-150 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
FT_RC:
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_DA:
Save measured values C C
305 052
FT_DA:
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst Iplaus/Idfrst. p.u.
[ 004 177 ]
R
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED
48Z9331A
Fig. 3-108: Acquisition of the CT Plausibility check current or defrost current.
3.20.4 Acquisition of Fault Location

In order to determine the fault location as a percentage of the line length and in
km, the value of the forward and backward line reactance, which corresponds to
100% of the monitored line section, as well as the corresponding line length in
km, must be set.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-151

P438 3 Operation
FT_DA:
Forw.length A-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
XLforw.,sec A-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Forw.length B-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
XLforw.,sec B-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Backw.length A-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
XLbackw.,secA-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Backw.length B-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
XLbackw.,secB-1 PSx
[ * ]
FT_DA:
Outp. fault location C
305 051
FT_DA: FT_DA:
Fault reactance,sec. Fault location
[ 004 028 ]
R [ 004 022 ]
FT_DA:
Fault react.,sec A FT_DA:
[ 235 205 ] Fault location A
R [ 235 201 ]
FT_DA:
Fault react.,sec B FT_DA:
[ 236 205 ] Fault location B
R [ 236 201 ]
FT_DA:
Fault locat. percent
[ 004 027 ]
R
FT_DA:
Fault loc. percent A
[ 235 204 ]
R
MAIN: FT_DA:
General reset USER Fault loc. percent B
[ 003 002 ] [ 236 204 ]
1: execute R
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ] Parameter FT_DA: FT_DA: FT_DA: FT_DA:
Forw.length A-1 PSx XLforw.,sec A-1 PSx Forw.length B-1 PSx XLforw.,sec B-1 PSx
MAIN:
Reset LED set 1 010 005 010 012 011 145 011 185
306 020
set 2 010 006 010 013 011 146 011 186
set 3 010 007 010 014 011 147 011 187
set 4 010 008 010 015 011 148 011 188
Parameter FT_DA: FT_DA: FT_DA: FT_DA:

Backw.length A-1 PSx XLbackw.,secA-1 PSx Backw.length B-1 PSx XLbackw.,secB-1 PSx
set 1 023 053 023 157 023 117 023 205
set 2 023 064 023 167 023 127 023 223
set 3 023 065 023 168 023 128 023 224
set 4 023 066 023 169 023 129 023 225 48Z9332A
Fig. 3-109: Acquisition of fault location. (The diagram displays data points with only one line section used. The P438
can consider a maximum of 10 line sections in its acquisition of the fault location.)
The settings with suffix B are available only when the Autotransformer feed or
Single feed with sum I mode is selected.
3.20.5 Extended fault location data acquisition

10 line sections in forward and backward direction (with differing reactance
values) can be considered by the fault locator. The lengths and reactances of the
relevant line sections are entered using the following parameters: (Settings with
suffix B can only be seen when the Autotransformer feed or Single feed with sum
I mode is selected. )
3-152 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
● FT_DA: Forw.length A-n PSx

FT_DA: Forw.length B-n PSx
FT_DA: Backw.length A-n PSx
FT_DA: Backw.length B-n PSx
Value range for n=1: 0.01 to 500.00 km
Value range for n=2, to 10: Blocked or 0.01 to 500.00 km
● FT_DA: XLforw.,sec A-n PSx
FT_DA: XLforw.,sec B-n PSx
FT_DA: XLbackw.,sec B-n PSx
FT_DA: XLbackw.,sec A-n PSx
Value range for n=1: 0.01 to 500.00 Ω
Value range for n=2, to 10: Blocked or 0.01 to 500.00 Ω
3.20.6 Fault Data Reset

After pressing the clear key on the local control panel, the fault data value is
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can still be
read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-153

P438 3 Operation
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
3.21.1 Start of Fault Recording

A fault exists and fault recording begins if at least one of the following signals is
present:
● MAIN : Gen eral star tin g
● MAIN : Ge n. trip si gn al
● FT_RC : Tri gger
● FT_R C: I > trigge re d
In addition, the user can set a logical “OR” combination of logic signals (m out of
n parameter) whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
3.21.2 Fault Counting

Faults are counted and identified by sequential numbers.
FT_RC:
Fct. assig. trigger
[ 003 085 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
m out of n
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signals
FT_RC: FT_RC:
Trigger
Trigger EXT ≥1
[ 036 089 ] [ 037 076 ]
FT_RC:
Trigger USER
[ 003 041 ]
0 0 1 min FT_RC:
≥1 Record. in progress
1 [ 035 000 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MAIN:
Gen. trip signal
[ 036 251 ]
FT_RC:
MAIN: + No. of faults
General reset USER [ 004 020 ]
[ 003 002 ]
≥1 R
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT FT_RC:
[ 005 255 ] + No. system disturb.
[ 004 010 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER R
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
& System disturb. runn
≥1 [ 035 004 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
& S1 1
R1
48Z9333A
Fig. 3-110: Start of fault recording and fault counter.
3-154 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.21.3 Time Tagging

The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A fault’s
individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory
on the local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The
time information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals
can be retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication
interfaces.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-155

P438 3 Operation
3.21.4 Fault Recordings
FT_RC: C
Record. in progress
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Signal 1 + CT200 Fault mem. overflow
1 ≥1 [ 035 001 ]
Signal 2 1 R
Signal 3 1
Signal n 1 FT_RC:
Fault recording n
[ * ]
1
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
FT_RC:
n Fault recording n
Fault memory n
1 003 000
2 033 001
3 033 002
Measured value 1 4 033 003
Measured value N 7 033 006
MAIN: 8 033 007

Time tag
306 021
MAIN:
General reset USER &
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute R
≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1 1: execute
0: don't execute
1: execute
12Z6161B
Fig. 3-111: Fault memory.
Protection signals, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and post-
fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault.
A total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can
be stored in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been
recorded, the oldest fault recording will be overwritten, unless memories have
been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or end signals have occurred
during a single fault, then FT_RC : F aul t me m . overflow will be entered as the
last signal. If the time and date are changed during the pre-fault time, the signal
F T_RC : F aulty t ime tag is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data will also be entered in the
fault memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
3-156 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.21.5 Fault Value Recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
● The catenary current
● The catenary current or the catenary 1 current
● The feeder current or the catenary 2 current
● CT Plausibility check current or alternatively Defrost protection current
Iplaus/Idfrst
The catenary voltage
The feeder voltage
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The window length for
oscillography recording before and after the fault can be set. A maximum time of
300 periods is available for recording. This period can be divided among a
maximum of eight faults. The maximum recording time per fault can be set. If a
fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault times, lasts longer than the set
maximum recording time, then recording will terminate when the set maximum
recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum
recording time. Otherwise the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording
time minus a sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest fault
are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have
occurred since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog oscillography data of the fault record can only be read out through
the PC or communication interfaces.
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all
faults remain stored.
FT_RC:
Record. in progress C
[ 035 000 ]
FT_RC:
Max. recording time
[ 003 075 ]
FT_RC:
Pre-fault time
[ 003 078 ]
FT_RC:
Post-fault time
[ 003 079 ]
I̲A Analog channel 1

R
I̲B Analog channel 2

R
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst Analog channel 3

R
V̲A Analog channel 4

R
V̲B/V̲ref Analog channel 5

R
FT_RC:
Reset record. USER
[ 003 006 ]
1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
FT_RC:
Reset record. EXT
[ 005 243 ] 48Z9334A
Fig. 3-112: Fault value recording.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-157

P438 3 Operation
3.22 Distance Protection (Function Group DIST)

Four impedance zones are provided by the distance protection function. The first
impedance zone offers dynamic reach settings. Zones 2, 3 and 4 provide train
start-up detection, di/dt, dv/dt and dϕ/dt, to differentiate start-ups from short
circuits and overload conditions. The user can select polygonal (quadrilateral) or
circular tripping characteristics.
Wrong phase coupling protection is integrated.
3.22.1 Enable/Disable the Distance Protection
DIST:
General enable USER
[ 031 073 ]
& DIST:
1 Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Parameter Enable PSx
0 set 1 072 200

set 2 073 200
1
set 3 074 200
0: No set 4 075 200
1: Yes 48Z9350A
Fig. 3-113: Enable/disable the distance protection and fault detection blocking.
The distance protection can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters.

Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
3.22.2 Distance Protection Blocking
DIST: DIST:
Enabled Blocking
[ 036 104 ] 303 667
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
DIST:
Wrong setting DIST
[ 041 085 ]
48Z5028A
Fig. 3-114: Distance protection blocking.
The distance protection is blocked if one of the following conditions occurs:

● Distance protection has not been enabled.
● The voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
● Monitoring (VT supervision) has detected a fault in the voltage-measuring
circuit.
● Distance protection is not set correctly.
3-158 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST: DIST:
Z1 enabled Zone 1 not ready
[ 039 066 ] [ 038 034 ]
DIST:
Blocking
303 667
DIST:
Z1, forward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Z1, backward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
t1 PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Blocking t1 EXT
[ 039 163 ]
DIST:
Z1' enabled
[ 039 067 ]
DIST:
Z1', forward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Z1', backward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:

Z1, forward PSx Z1, backward PSx t1 PSx Z1', forward PSx Z1', backward PSx
set 1 076 093 076 100 012 028 076 096 076 103
set 2 077 093 077 100 012 078 077 096 077 103
set 3 078 093 078 100 013 028 078 096 078 103
set 4 079 093 079 100 013 078 079 096 079 103 48Z5030A
Fig. 3-115: Blocking of impedance zone 1.
An impedance zone is blocked if the impedances of that zone in forward and

reverse directions have been set to Blocked, or if the associated time stage has
been set to Blocked. The blocking of impedance zones 3 and 4 is similar to zone
2.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-159

P438 3 Operation
DIST: DIST:
Z2 enabled Zone 2 not ready
[ 039 068 ] [ 038 035 ]
DIST:
Z2' enabled
[ 039 069 ]
DIST:
Blocking
303 667
DIST:
Z2, forward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Z2, backward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Z2', forward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Z2', backward PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
t2S PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Blocking t2S EXT
[ 039 164 ]
DIST:
t2L PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Blocking t2L EXT
[ 039 165 ]
DIST:
Op.mode dx/dt, Z2PSx
[ * ]
0: Without
DIST:
Delta I(di/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Delta V(dv/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
D.phi(dphi/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
blocked
Z2, forward PSx Z2, backward PSx Z2', forward PSx Z2', backward PSx t2S PSx
set 1 076 094 076 101 076 097 076 104 012 029
set 2 077 094 077 101 077 097 077 104 012 079
set 3 078 094 078 101 078 097 078 104 013 029
set 4 079 094 079 101 079 097 079 104 013 079

t2L PSx Op.mode dx/dt, Z2PSx Delta I(di/dt),Z2PSx Delta V(dv/dt),Z2PSx D.phi(dphi/dt),Z2PSx
set 1 012 190 072 107 072 198 072 139 072 206
set 2 012 191 073 107 073 198 073 139 073 206
set 3 012 192 074 107 074 198 074 139 074 206
set 4 012 193 075 107 075 198 075 139 075 206 48Z5410C
Fig. 3-116: Blocking of impedance zone 2.
3-160 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST: DIST:
Zone 1 not ready Not ready
[ 038 034 ] [ 041 086 ]
DIST:
Zone 2 not ready
[ 038 035 ]
DIST:
Zone 3 not ready
[ 038 036 ]
DIST:
Zone 4 not ready
[ 038 064 ]
DIST:
WPC not ready
[ 039 156 ]
48Z6332A
Fig. 3-117: Distance protection not ready.
The distance protection function issues the DIST: Not ready signal if all
impedance zones and the wrong phase coupling protection are blocked.
3.22.3 Base Point Release for Impedance and Direction Determination

The base point trigger compares the r.m.s. value of the current to the set value
I>. The pickup of the base point trigger is determined by a half-cycle r.m.s.
calculation of the current in order to ensure a short response time.
After operation, the full-cycle r.m.s. value of the current is monitored. This
ensures the required stability and accuracy of the measuring system.
DIST:
I> PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ]
I̲ DIST:
I> starting
[ 039 001 ]
Parameter DIST:
I> PSx
set 1 072 195

set 2 073 195
set 3 074 195
set 4 075 195 48Z5032A
Fig. 3-118: Base point release for impedance and direction determination.
3.22.4 Distance and Directional Measurement

The P438 determines the fault impedance and the fault direction on the basis of
the measured voltage and current. A voltage memory is available so that
measurement will function correctly, even with very low fault voltages.
3.22.4.1 Direction Determination

A decision is made for the forward direction if the angle φ for direction
determination is in this range:
● Forward direction: −45° < φ < +135°
● Reverse direction: −45° > φ > +135°
For very low fault voltages, the voltage from the voltage memory is used in place
of the measured voltage in order to avoid erroneous direction decisions. The
direction decision is dependent on the following conditions:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-161

P438 3 Operation
● VF > 0.1 Vn
The direction decision is issued on the basis of the fault current and the
measured fault voltage.
● VF < 0.1 Vn
Voltage memory enabled: The direction decision is issued on the basis of
the fault current and the voltage stored in the voltage memory.
Voltage memory not enabled: The direction decision is issued on the basis
of the fault current and the measured fault voltage down to a minimum
value of 1 V. If the fault voltage drops to a value of less than approximately
1 V, an accurate direction determination is no longer possible. In this case,
a forward decision is issued - independent of the actual fault direction.
DIST:
Voltage mem. enabled
303 549
DIST:
I> starting
[ 039 001 ]
<1V DIST:
Forw. w/o measurem.
[ 038 044 ]
DIST:
Direct. using Vmeas
[ 038 045 ]
< 0.1 Vnom
DIST:
Direct. using memory
[ 038 047 ]
1
2
V̲ φF 1
DIST:
I̲ Direction forward
φS 2 -45° < φN < 135°
V̲(memory) C 303 669
135° < φN < 315° DIST:

1 ... 2 C
φN Direction backward
303 670
MAIN:
DIST: Fault forward
Starting
[ 036 018 ]
[ 036 135 ]
MAIN:
Fault backward
[ 036 019 ]
48Z6335A
Fig. 3-119: Direction determination.
3.22.4.2 Distance Measurement

One of the following types of characteristics may be selected for distance
measurement by way of the setting at DIST: Ch aracteristic PSx:
● Circle
● Polygon
3-162 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST:
Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
1 1: Circle
2 2: Polygon
1: Circle
2: Polygon
Parameter DIST:
Characteristic PSx
set 1 012 040
set 2 073 097
set 3 074 097
set 4 075 097
D5Z5019A
Fig. 3-120: Selecting the characteristic.
3.22.4.2.1 Selecting the Reach

The zones' reaches can be switched dynamically from Zn (or Xn for polygon
characteristic when DIST: X parame ter us e d is set to Yes), Rn, Rgn to Zn' (or
Xn’), Rn', Rgn’ (n = 1 to 4) in order to adapt the distance measurement system
to different switching states of the catenary installation.
The setting at D I ST: Con trol vi a USER determines whether switching is
carried out from the user interface (HMI) or using the binary signal inputs.
Switching using the binary signal inputs is only possible by setting
DIS T: Control vi a USE R to Yes. If the setting for DI ST: Con trol via USER is
No, switching using the binary signal inputs is not possible.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-163

P438 3 Operation
DIST:
Control via USER
[ 022 008 ]
0
1 DIST:
Control via user
0: No [ 038 172 ]
1: Yes
DIST:
Control via user EXT
[ 038 171 ]
DIST:
Select Z1/Z1' USER
[ 022 011 ] DIST:
& Z1 enabled
1 [ 039 066 ]
2 &
1: Z1
2: Z1'
& DIST:
DIST: Z1' enabled
Z1' enabled EXT [ 039 067 ]
&
[ 038 067 ]
DIST:
Z1' ext. enabled
[ 038 078 ]
DIST:
Select Z2/Z2' USER
[ 022 021 ] DIST:
& Z2 enabled
1 [ 039 068 ]
2 &
1: Z2
2: Z2'
& DIST:
DIST: Z2' enabled
Z2' enabled EXT [ 039 069 ]
&
[ 038 069 ]
DIST:
Z2' ext. enabled
[ 038 079 ]
DIST:
Select Z3/Z3' USER
[ 022 038 ] DIST:
& Z3 enabled
1 [ 036 124 ]
2 &
1: Z3
2: Z3'
&
DIST:
DIST: Z3' enabled
Z3' enabled EXT
[ 036 123 ] & [ 036 125 ]
DIST:
Z3' ext. enabled
[ 038 147 ]
DIST:
Select Z4/Z4' USER
[ 022 194 ]
& DIST:
Z4 enabled
1 [ 036 154 ]
2 &
1: Z4
2: Z4'
&
DIST:
DIST: Z4' enabled
Z4' enabled EXT
& [ 036 156 ]
[ 036 129 ]
DIST:
Z4' ext. enabled
[ 038 090 ]
48Z6334A
Fig. 3-121: Selecting the reach.
3.22.4.2.2 Circle Characteristic

The characteristic is determined by the settings listed below. It can be set
separately for all four zones (n: 1 to 4).
3-164 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
● Impedance Zn or Zn' in forward direction.

● Impedance Zn or Zn' in reverse direction.
The impedance limits the maximum reach of the circular characteristic.
If the setting is Blocked, the zone in the corresponding direction is
ineffective.
● Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in forward direction.
● Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in reverse direction.
Therefore the tripping zone is limited to the resistances within the load
blinder – i.e. lower than Rgn (Rgn’).
For this setting, the condition: Rgn ≤ Zn must be met for all enabled zones
(all 4 setting groups, all unblocked Z and Z´ zones). If the condition is not
satisfied, a warning indication and the device blocking alarm are issued.
● Load blinding angle αn
This setting is only applied if the resistive limit line, defined by Rgn, falls
within the Z circle (this is the case for α < arccos (Rgn/Zn) or α < arccos
(Rgn‘/Zn‘)).
At fault impedance angles outside of the blinder cone region, the circle
characteristic operates unaffected (non-blinded).
● Angle βn
● Angle γn
These angles limit the tripping area in quadrants 2 and 4.
Angle γn defines areas with the form of a triangle in the 2nd and 4th
quadrants. The limit in the R-direction is given either by Rgn or by Zn,
depending on the value leading to the smaller zone.
The P438 checks whether the impedance locus is within the defined tripping area
or not. Since the reach for forward and reverse direction can be selected
separately, the direction decision determines the quadrilateral segment where
the measured impedance locus must be located so that a distance decision is
issued. If the short-circuit voltages are lower than 10 V, angles αn, βn and γn are
not taken into account.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-165

P438 3 Operation
Forward direction
Zn,fwd
Backward direction αLn
ßn
αn
Rgn,rev
R
Rgn,fwd
γn
Zn,rev
48Z5453A
Fig. 3-122: P438 impedance and direction characteristic for the 'Circle' setting
For zone 1, the impedance reach can be extended by the zone extension factor
kze. Valid impedance and reactance values are extended for each of the set
directions.
Z1,kze=kze·Z1 or Z1,kze'=kze·Z1'
Rg1,kze=kze·Rg1 or Rg1,kze'=kze·Rg1'
Impedance reach is extended using the following parameters:
● Zone extension factor for high-speed reclosure (DIST: kze, HSR PSx)
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if the internal auto-reclose
function permits a zone extension during high-speed reclosures
(AR C : Z one ex t. f. H SR P Sx). Depending on the setting, zone extension
may remain active until the reclosure command (ARC: Zone ext.dur . RC
PS x) is terminated.
● Zone extension factor for time-delay reclosure (DIST: k ze , TDR PSx)
function permits a zone extension during time-delayed reclosures
(AR C: Z one ex t. f. TDR PSx). Depending on the setting, zone extension
may remain active until the reclosure command (ARC: Zone ext.d ur. RC
PS x) is terminated.
● Zone extension factor for external extension or tripping by the switch on to
a fault protection (DI ST: kze Ext/SOTF/PSIG PSx)
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if switch on to fault
protection (SOTF: Z1 e xte nded) has been activated or an external signal
(D IST: Zon e e xte n si on EXT) is set.
3-166 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST: Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:

Enabled Characteristic PSx Z1, forward PSx Rg1, forward PSx
[ 036 104 ] c
& set 1 012 040 076 093 076 138
DIST: 073 097
I> starting set 2 077 093 077 138
DIST: set 3 074 097 078 093 078 138
[ 039 001 ] c Z1, forward PSx set 4 075 097 079 093 079 138
MCMON: [ * ]
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ 038 023 ] DIST: Z1', forward PSx Rg1', forward PSx Z1, backward PSx
c Rg1, forward PSx
DIST: set 1 076 096 076 141 076 100
Characteristic PSx [ * ]
[ * ] set 2 077 096 077 141 077 100
1: Circle DIST:
set 3 078 096 078 141 078 100
c Z1', forward PSx
[ * ] set 4 079 096 079 141 079 100

c Rg1', forward PSx Rg1, backward PSx Z1', backward PSx Rg1', backward PSx
DIST: & [ * ]
Direction forward set 1 076 144 076 103 076 147
303 669 DIST: set 2 077 144 077 103 077 147
DIST: c Z1, backward PSx
set 3 078 144 078 103 078 147
Z1 enabled & [ * ] set 4 079 144 079 103 079 147
[ 039 066 ] DIST:
DIST: c Rg1, backward PSx Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
Z1' enabled Alpha 1 PSx Beta 1 PSx Gamma 1 PSx
& [ * ]
[ 039 067 ] set 1 076 090 072 208 076 247
DIST: DIST:
c Z1', backward PSx set 2 077 090 073 208 077 247
Direction backward
[ * ] set 3 078 090 074 208 078 247
303 670
& set 4 079 090 075 208 079 247
DIST:
c Rg1', backward PSx Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ * ] kze, HSR PSx kze, TDR PSx kzeExt/SOTF/PSIG PSx
DIST:
Z parameter avail. DIST: set 1 012 034 012 046 012 067
c Alpha 1 PSx 012 084
[ 023 051 ] set 2 012 096 012 068
& [ * ] set 3 013 034 013 046 012 069
0 DIST: set 4 013 084 013 096 012 070
c Beta 1 PSx
1 [ * ]
0: No DIST:
c Gamma 1 PSx
1: Yes [ * ]
DIST:
ARC: c kze, HSR PSx
Zone extension HSR [ * ]
[ 036 226 ]
DIST:
ARC: c kze, TDR PSx
Zone extension TDR DIST:
[ * ] Starting
[ 036 227 ]
DIST: [ 036 135 ]
SOTF: ckzeExt/SOTF/PSIG PSx
Z1 extended & DIST:
[ * ] Z1 (Z1,ze) starting
[ 035 076 ]
[ 039 003 ]
DIST:
Zone extension EXT DIST:
& Z1'(Z1',ze) starting
[ 036 046 ]
[ 039 004 ]
MAIN: SFMON:
ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) Wrong set. DIST Rg1
310 053
[ 098 046 ]
I̲ SFMON:
Wrong set. DIST Rg1'
[ 098 047 ]
DIST:
V̲ Wrong setting DIST
[ 041 085 ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg SFMON:
306 014
Wrong set. DIST X/R
MAIN: [ 097 023 ]
Harm. blk. trigg DIST:
460 649 & Zone extension HSR
[ 036 103 ]
& DIST:
Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
DIST:
& Zone extension SOTF
[ 036 134 ]
DIST:
& Z1 extended extern.
[ 036 140 ]
48Z9352A
Fig. 3-123: Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement, operating mode set to 'Circle'.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-167

P438 3 Operation
DIST:
Enabled
[ 036 104 ] c
& Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
DIST: Characteristic PSx Z2, forward PSx Rg2, forward PSx
I> starting
DIST:
set 1 012 040 076 094 076 139
[ 039 001 ] c Z2, forward PSx
MCMON: [ * ] set 2 073 097 077 094 077 139
Meas. circ. V faulty set 3 074 097 078 094 078 139
DIST:
[ 038 023 ] set 4 075 097 079 094 079 139
c Rg2, forward PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Characteristic PSx Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ * ] Z2', forward PSx Rg2', forward PSx Z2, backward PSx
1: Circle DIST:
c Z2', forward PSx set 1 076 097 076 142 076 101
[ * ] set 2 077 097 077 142 077 101
DIST: set 3 078 097 078 142 078 101
c Rg2', forward PSx set 4 079 097 079 142 079 101
DIST: & [ * ]
Direction forward Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
303 669 DIST: Rg2, backward PSx Z2', backward PSx Rg2', backward PSx
DIST: c Z2, backward PSx
Z2 enabled & [ * ] set 1 076 145 076 104 076 148
[ 039 068 ] set 2 077 145 077 104 077 148
DIST:
DIST: set 3 078 145
c Rg2, backward PSx 078 104 078 148
Z2' enabled set 4 079 145 079 104 079 148
& [ * ]
[ 039 069 ]
DIST: DIST: Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
Direction backward c Z2', backward PSx Alpha 2 PSx Beta 2 PSx Gamma 2 PSx
303 670
& [ * ] set 1 076 091 072 209 076 248
DIST: set 2 077 091 073 209 077 248
c Rg2', backward PSx set 3 078 091 074 209 078 248
[ * ] set 4 079 091 075 209 079 248
DIST:
Z parameter avail. DIST:
[ 023 051 ] c Alpha 2 PSx
[ * ]
&
0 DIST:
c Beta 2 PSx
1 [ * ]
DIST:
0: No DIST: Starting
c Gamma 2 PSx
1: Yes [ 036 135 ]
[ * ]
& DIST:
Z2 starting
[ 039 005 ]
DIST:
& Z2' starting
[ 039 006 ]
MAIN: SFMON:
ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) Wrong set. DIST Rg2
310 053
[ 098 048 ]
I̲ SFMON:
Wrong set. DIST Rg2'
[ 098 049 ]
V̲
MAIN:
306 014 DIST:
MAIN: Wrong setting DIST
Harm. blk. trigg [ 041 085 ]
460 649
SFMON:
Wrong set. DIST X/R
[ 097 023 ]
48Z9353A
Fig. 3-124: Setting impedance zones 2 to 4 (showing the example of zone 2) and distance measurement, operating
mode set to 'Circle'.
3.22.4.2.3 Polygon (Quadrilateral) Characteristic

The characteristic is determined by the settings listed below. It can be set
separately for all four zones (n: 1 to 4).
3-168 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
● Impedance Zn (or Xn when DIST: X parameter avail. and D IST: X

paramet e r use d are set to Yes) or Zn' (or Xn') in forward direction.
● Impedance Zn (or Xn) or Zn' (or Xn') in reverse direction.
● Line impedance angle αLn.
The maximum X-reach of the polygonal characteristic is calculated using
the impedance and the line angle. If the impedance setting is Blocked, the
zone in the corresponding direction is disabled.
● Resistance Rn or Rn' in forward direction.
● Resistance Rn or Rn' in reverse direction.
Therefore the R-reach of the tripping zones is limited. The gradient of the
resistive reach line is also defined by the line angle αLn.
● Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in forward direction.
● Resistance limit Rgn or Rgn' in reverse direction.
Therefore the tripping zone is limited to the resistances within the load
blinder – i.e. lower than Rgn (Rgn’).
For this setting, the condition: Rgn ≤ Rn must be met for all enabled zones
(all 4 setting groups, all unblocked Z and Z’ zones). If the condition is not
satisfied, a warning indication and the device blocking alarm are issued.
● Load blinding angle αn
At fault impedance angles outside of the blinder cone region, the circular
characteristic operates unaffectedly (non-blinded).
● Angle βn
● Angle γn
These angles limit the tripping area in quadrants 2 and 4.
The P438 checks whether the impedance locus is within the defined tripping area
or not. Since the reach for forward and reverse direction can be selected
separately, the direction decision determines the quadrilateral segment where
the measured impedance locus must be located so that a distance decision is
issued. If the short-circuit voltages are lower than 10 V, angles αn, βn and γn are
not taken into account.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-169

P438 3 Operation
Forward direction
(Xn,fwd) Zn,fwd
Backward direction αLn
ßn
αLn
αn
Rgn,rev
Rn,fwd
R
Rn,rev
Rgn,fwd
γn
Zn,rev (Xn,rev)
48Z9351A
Fig. 3-125: P438 impedance and direction characteristic for the 'Polygon’ setting.
For zone 1, the impedance reach can be extended by the zone extension factor
kze. Valid impedance and reactance values are extended for each of the set
directions.
Z1,kze=kze·Z1 or Z1,kze'=kze·Z1'
(X1,kze=kze·X1 or X1,kze'=kze·X1')
R1,kze=kze·R1 or R1,kze'=kze·R1'
Rg1,kze=kze·Rg1 or Rg1,kze'=kze·Rg1'
Impedance reach is extended using the following parameters:
3-170 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
● Zone extension factor for high-speed reclosure (D IST: k ze , HSR PSx)

function permits a zone extension during high-speed reclosures
(AR C: Z one e xt. f. HSR PSx). Depending on the setting, zone extension
may remain active until the reclosure command (A RC: Zone e xt .dur. RC
PSx) is terminated.
● Zone extension factor for time-delay reclosure (D IST: kze, TD R PSx)
function permits a zone extension during time-delayed reclosures
(AR C: Z one e xt. f. TDR P Sx). Depending on the setting, zone extension
may remain active until the reclosure command (A RC: Zone e xt .dur. RC
PSx) is terminated.
● Zone extension factor for external extension or tripping by the switch on to
a fault protection (DIST: k ze E xt/SOTF/PSIG PSx)
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if switch on to fault
protection (SO TF: Z1 e xte nded) has been activated or an external signal
(D IST: Zon e e xte nsi on EXT) is set.
● Zone extension factor for external extension or tripping by the protection
signaling (DIS T: kzeE xt /SOTF/PSIG PSx) with the PSI G1 : O pe rat ing
mode PSx (or P SI G2: Operati ng mode P Sx) is set in the Zone
extention mode.
Impedance reach is extended by the set factor if protection signaling
(PSI G1: Z1 Ext e nde d or PSIG2: Z1 E xt e nde d) has been activated or
an external signal (DI ST: Zone exte nsi on EX T) is set.
Using these settings in the R-X diagram we obtain the characteristic shown in the
following figure.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-171

P438 3 Operation
DIST: &
Enabled Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ 036 104 ] Characteristic PSx Z1, forward PSx X1, forward PSx
c
DIST: set 1 012 040 076 093 021 239
I> starting 073 097 021 245
DIST: set 2 077 093
[ 039 001 ]
MCMON: c Z1, forward PSx set 3 074 097 078 093 021 246
[ * ] set 4 075 097 079 093 021 247
[ 038 023 ] DIST: Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
DIST: c X1, forward PSx R1, forw. (poly) PSx Rg1, forward PSx Z1', forward PSx
[ * ] set 1 076 115 076 138 076 096
2: Polygon DIST: set 2 077 115 077 138 077 096
& & c R1, forw. (poly) PSx set 3 078 115 078 138 078 096
[ * ] set 4 079 115 079 138 079 096
DIST:
Z1 enabled DIST:
c Rg1, forward PSx Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ 039 066 ] & X1', forward PSx R1', forw.(poly) PSx Rg1', forward PSx
[ * ]
set 1 021 243 076 118 076 141
DIST: set 2 077 141
021 251 077 118
DIST: & & c Z1', forward PSx
[ * ] set 3 021 252 078 118 078 141
Direction forward set 4 021 253 079 118 079 141
303 669 DIST:
DIST: & c X1', forward PSx Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
Z1' enabled [ * ] Z1, backward PSx X1, backward PSx R1, backw.(poly) PSx
[ 039 067 ] DIST: set 1 076 100 021 242 076 121
R1', forw.(poly) PSx
c set 2 077 100 021 248 077 121
[ * ]
set 3 078 100 021 249 078 121
DIST: set 4 079 100 021 250 079 121
c Rg1', forward PSx
[ * ] Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
Rg1, backward PSx Z1', backward PSx X1', backward PSx
DIST:
c Z1, backward PSx set 1 076 144 076 103 021 244
& &
[ * ] set 2 077 144 077 103 021 254
DIST:
Direction backward DIST: set 3 078 144 078 103 021 255
303 670 c X1, backward PSx set 4 079 144 079 103 022 198
& [ * ]
X parameter avail. DIST: R1', backw.(poly)PSx Rg1', backward PSx Alpha_L 1 (poly) PSx
c R1, backw.(poly) PSx
set 1 076 124 076 147 012 013
[ 023 051 ] & & [ * ]
set 2 077 124 077 147 012 063
DIST: set 3 078 124 078 147 013 034
0 c Rg1, backward PSx
& set 4 079 124 079 147 013 063
1 [ * ]
0: No Alpha 1 PSx Beta 1 PSx Gamma 1 PSx
c Z1', backward PSx
1: Yes [ * ] set 1 076 090 072 208 076 247
set 2 077 090 073 208 077 247
DIST:
DIST: c X1', backward PSx set 3 078 090 074 208 078 247
X parameter avail. [ * ] set 4 079 090 075 208 079 247
[ 023 050 ] DIST: Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:

c R1', backw.(poly)PSx kze, HSR PSx kze, TDR PSx kzeExt/SOTF/PSIG PSx
0 [ * ] 012 034
set 1 012 046 012 067
DIST: set 2 012 084 012 096 012 068
1 & c Rg1', backward PSx set 3 013 034 013 046 012 069
[ * ] set 4 013 084 013 096 012 070
0: No
DIST:
1: Yes c Alpha_L 1 (poly) PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
X parameter used
c Alpha 1 PSx
[ 023 052 ] [ * ]
& DIST:
0 c Beta 1 PSx
& [ * ]
1
DIST:
0: No c Gamma 1 PSx DIST:
Starting
[ * ]
1: Yes [ 036 135 ]
DIST:
ARC: c kze, HSR PSx DIST:
Zone extension HSR & Z1 (Z1,ze) starting
[ * ]
[ 036 226 ] [ 039 003 ]
DIST:
ARC: c kze, TDR PSx DIST:
Zone extension TDR & Z1'(Z1',ze) starting
[ * ]
[ 036 227 ] [ 039 004 ]
DIST: DIST: SFMON:
Zone extension EXT c kzeExt/SOTF/PSIG PSx
Wrong set. DIST Rg1
[ 036 046 ] [ * ] [ 098 046 ]
SOTF: SFMON:
Z1 extended Wrong set. DIST Rg1'
[ 035 076 ] [ 098 047 ]
PSIG1:
Z1 Extended DIST:
Wrong setting DIST
[ 019 233 ]
PSIG2: [ 041 085 ]
Z1 Extended SFMON:
Wrong set. DIST X/R
[ 020 063 ]
[ 097 023 ]
MAIN:
ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) DIST:
& Zone extension HSR
310 053
[ 036 103 ]
I̲
DIST:
V̲ & Zone extension TDR
[ 038 022 ]
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg DIST:
& Z1 extended extern.
306 014
MAIN: [ 036 140 ]
Harm. blk. trigg DIST:
460 649 & Zone extension SOTF
[ 036 134 ] 48Z9354A
Fig. 3-126: Setting impedance zone 1 and distance measurement, operating mode set to ‘Polygon’.
3-172 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST: &
Enabled
[ 036 104 ] c
DIST:
I> starting Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
DIST: Characteristic PSx Z2, forward PSx X2, forward PSx
[ 039 001 ] c Z2, forward PSx
MCMON: [ * ]
set 1 012 040 076 094 022 199
Meas. circ. V faulty set 2 073 097 077 094 023 004
[ 038 023 ] DIST: set 3 074 097 078 094 023 005
DIST: c X2, forward PSx set 4 075 097 079 094 023 006
[ * ]
2: Polygon DIST: Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
c R2, forw. (poly) PSx R2, forw. (poly) PSx Rg2, forward PSx Z2', forward PSx
& &
[ * ] set 1 076 116 076 139 076 097
DIST: set 2 077 116 077 139 077 097
Z2 enabled DIST:
c Rg2, forward PSx set 3 078 116 078 139 078 097
[ 039 068 ] & set 4 079 116 079 139 079 097
[ * ]
DIST: & & c Z2', forward PSx X2', forward PSx R2', forw.(poly) PSx Rg2', forward PSx
Direction forward [ * ]
set 1 023 002 076 119 076 142
303 669 DIST: set 2 023 044 077 119 077 142
DIST: & c X2', forward PSx
set 3 023 045 078 119 078 142
Z2' enabled [ * ] set 4 023 046 079 119 079 142
[ 039 069 ] DIST:
Rg2', forward PSx Parameter
c DIST: DIST: DIST:
[ * ] Z2, backward PSx X2, backward PSx R2, backw.(poly) PSx
DIST: set 1 076 101 023 001 076 122

c R2', forw.(poly) PSx set 2 077 101 023 007 077 122
[ * ] set 3 078 101 023 008 078 122
DIST: set 4 079 101 023 009 079 122
c Z2, backward PSx
& &
[ * ] Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
DIST: Rg2, backward PSx Z2', backward PSx X2', backward PSx
Direction backward DIST:
set 1 076 145 076 104 023 003
303 670 c X2, backward PSx
set 2 077 145 077 104 023 010
& [ * ]
DIST: set 3 078 145 078 104 023 011
Z parameter avail.
DIST:
set 4 079 145 079 104 023 012
c R2, backw.(poly) PSx
[ 023 051 ] & & [ * ] Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
R2', backw.(poly)PSx Rg2', backward PSx Alpha_L 2 (poly) PSx
DIST:
0 cRg2, backward PSx
& set 1 076 125 076 148 012 014
1 [ * ] set 2 077 125 077 148 012 064
DIST: set 3 078 125 078 148 013 014
0: No c Z2', backward PSx set 4 079 125 079 148 013 064
1: Yes [ * ]
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST:
DIST: Alpha 2 PSx Beta 2 PSx Gamma 2 PSx
DIST: c X2', backward PSx
set 1 076 091 072 209 076 248
X parameter avail. [ * ]
set 2 077 091 073 209 077 248
[ 023 050 ] DIST: set 3 078 091 074 209 078 248
cR2', backw.(poly)PSx set 4 079 091 075 209 079 248
0 [ * ]
DIST:
1 & c Rg2', backward PSx
[ * ]
0: No
DIST:
1: Yes c Alpha_L 2 (poly) PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
X parameter used
c Alpha 2 PSx
[ 023 052 ] [ * ]
& DIST:
0 c Beta 2 PSx
& [ * ]
1
DIST: DIST:
0: No c Gamma 2 PSx Starting
[ * ] [ 036 135 ]
1: Yes
& DIST:
Z2 starting
[ 039 005 ]
DIST:
& Z2' starting
[ 039 006 ]
SFMON:
Wrong set. DIST Rg2
[ 098 048 ]
SFMON:
MAIN: Wrong set. DIST Rg2'
ΣI(xfn)/I(fn) [ 098 049 ]
310 053
DIST:
I̲ Wrong setting DIST
V̲ [ 041 085 ]
SFMON:
MAIN: Wrong set. DIST X/R
306 014
[ 097 023 ]
MAIN:
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
48Z9355A
Fig. 3-127: Setting impedance zones 2 to 4 (showing the example of zone 2) and distance measurement, operating
mode set to ‘Polygon’.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-173

P438 3 Operation
3.22.4.2.4 Distance Measurement

If the base point current is exceeded, the inductive and resistive components (X
and R) of the loop impedance (Z) are calculated continuously even during normal
operation. The algorithm is based on solving the first-order line differential
equation according to "Bonard-Bastide".
The X and R components are calculated from the 0.5 ms instantaneous values of
current and voltage and updated every 2 ms.
In the event of a line fault there is the danger of a transient overreach and an
incorrect angle measurement since the measured impedance can be lower than
the static fault impedance for a period longer than a cycle.
In order to avoid unwanted operation or failure to operate, the following
optimization measures have been implemented in the distance protection
system so as to ensure stable operation:
● Monitoring the Current and Voltage Values:
The RMS values of current and voltage are monitored for a sudden increase
or decrease. Any such change is regarded as occurrence of a fault and a
dead time is started.
o Monitoring of the current for a sudden step increase:
For I ≤ 0.25 In: ΔI = 0.1 In
For I > 0.25 In: ΔI = 0.17 I
o Monitoring of the voltage for a sudden step decrease:
For V < 0.5 Vn: ΔV = 0.1 Vn
For V ≥ 0.5 Vn: ΔV = 0.06 V
o Dead time for a setting of tZ1 = 0 s:
For I < 0.75 In: 53 ms
For 0.75 In < I < 3.5 In: 32 ms
For I > 3.5 In: 28 ms
For a setting of tZ1 > 0 s, the dead time is 45 ms
Impedance measurements taken during the dead time are rejected.
Impedance measurements taken after the end of the dead time are
valid.
These measures ensure the selectivity of impedance and direction for
any zones with zero, or short applied time delays.
● Switching on to a Line Without Voltage:
In this event, impedance measurement can temporarily yield undefined
measured values.
In order to avoid unwanted tripping, the impedance comparison is
interrupted for 75 ms after a voltage rise above a threshold value voltage
of 0.008 Vn. After this period of 75 ms, the voltage gradient must have
fallen to less than 3 %. If this is not the case, the dead time is extended
until the voltage gradient falls below this value.
● Isolation of a Line:
When a faulty or healthy line is isolated externally, the impedance
measurement can also temporarily yield undefined values.
The danger of an unwanted tripping is eliminated by a special di/dt stage
that will block distance measurement if a negative current gradient of
approx. 8 % within a half-cycle occurs with a simultaneous voltage drop
(breaker open blocking).
These optimization measures provide stable operation of the device in normal
operation of the installation.
3-174 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
The distance measurement system exhibits the following time response:

● For a timer stage setting of tZ1 = 0 s, the trip command times in zone 1 are
approx. 1.5 cycles in the 'core region'. For the P438, the 'core region' is
defined as 0 to 95 % of the set tripping area.
● Outside the 'core region', the trip times are longer. For fault currents < 0.8
In the calculation window is extended to achieve a stable response.
3.22.5 Impedance-Time Characteristics

Each impedance zone has a timer stage assigned. These timer stages are
triggered by a distance decision of the associated impedance zone. Each timer
stage can be blocked through a binary input signal.
3.22.5.1 Timer Stage Logic for Extended Zone 1

The impedance reach for zone 1 may be extended by the zone extension factor
set at DI ST: kzeExt/SO TF /PSIG PSx. Tripping in the extended zone takes
place after the set time-delay DIST: t1,ze Ext/SOF/PSG PSx has elapsed, and
if the impedance Z1 lies within the tripping zone of the Impedance and direction
characteristic of the P438 for the 'Polygon’ setting (see Fig. 3-125, (p. 3-170)).
The latter condition is determined by means of the “Z1 Decision” block which
evaluates the amount of harmonics, the zero-crossings and the logic to detect
fault- clearance at the end of a fault.
DIST:
DIST: t1 PSx
Blocking t1 EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 163 ]
DIST: t 0 DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting t1 elapsed
[ 039 003 ] [ 036 026 ]
DIST: Z1 Decision DIST:
Z1'(Z1',ze) starting Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 004 ] [ 039 016 ]
DIST:
& t1,zeExt/SOF/PSG PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Z1 extended extern.
[ 036 140 ] t 0
DIST: DIST:
Zone extension SOTF t1,ze elapsed
[ 036 134 ] [ 035 079 ]
Parameter DIST: DIST: Z1 Decision DIST:
t1 PSx t1,zeExt/SOF/PSG PSx Trip signal Z1,ze
set 1 012 028 012 198 [ 035 074 ]
set 2 012 078 012 199
set 3 013 028 012 200
set 4 013 078 012 201 48Z6336B
Fig. 3-128: Setting the time-delay period for distance protection, zone 1.
3.22.5.2 Timer Stage Logic for Extended Zones 2, 3 and 4

There are two timer stages available for zone 2 and two timer stages for zone 3.
One of these timer stages is triggered if fault (short-circuit) conditions apply, the
other for overload conditions. The train start-up detection stages di/dt, dv/dt and
dϕ/dt determine which timer stage is triggered. “Zn Decision” blocks similar to
zone 1.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-175

P438 3 Operation
DIST:
DIST: t2S PSx
Blocking t2S EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 164 ]
t 0 DIST:
DIST: & t2S elapsed
t2S enable
[ 039 009 ]
303 671
Z2 Decision DIST:
DIST: Trip signal Z2/t2S
DIST: t2L PSx [ 039 017 ]
Blocking t2L EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 165 ]
t 0 DIST:
& t2L elapsed
DIST:
Z2 starting [ 039 010 ]
[ 039 005 ] Z2 Decision DIST:
Trip signal Z2/t2L
DIST:
Z2' starting [ 039 018 ]
[ 039 006 ]
DIST:
DIST: t3S PSx
Blocking t3S EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 166 ]
t 0 DIST:
DIST: & t3S elapsed
t3S enable
[ 039 143 ]
303 672
Z3 Decision DIST:
DIST: t3L PSx [ 039 145 ]
Blocking t3L EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 167 ]
t 0 DIST:
& t3L elapsed
DIST:
Z3 starting [ 039 144 ]
Trip signal Z3/t3L
DIST:
Z3' starting [ 039 146 ]
[ 039 141 ]
DIST:
DIST: t4S PSx
Blocking t4S EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 002 ]
t 0 DIST:
DIST: & t4S elapsed
t4S Enable
[ 039 047 ]
310 056
Z4 Decision DIST:
DIST: t4L PSx [ 039 040 ]
Blocking t4L EXT
[ * ]
[ 039 019 ]
t 0 DIST:
& t4L elapsed
DIST:
Z4 starting [ 039 048 ]
Trip signal Z4/t4L
DIST:
Z4' starting [ 039 041 ]
[ 039 043 ]
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:
t2S PSx t2L PSx t3S PSx t3L PSx t4S PSx t4L PSx
set 1 012 029 012 190 012 030 012 194 080 011 080 012
set 2 012 079 012 191 012 080 012 195 081 011 081 012
set 3 013 029 012 192 013 030 012 196 082 011 082 012
set 4 013 079 012 193 013 080 012 197 083 011 083 012 48Z6337B
Fig. 3-129: Setting the time-delay period for distance protection, zones 2, 3 and 4.
3.22.6 Train Start-Up Detection di/dt, dv/dt and dϕ/dt

It may be difficult, by impedance measurement alone, to discriminate between
faults far along the catenary, and heavy loading at poor power factors. Zones 2,
3 and 4 of the distance protection are therefore equipped with three additional
functions to distinguish faults (short circuits) from features of normal operation
(high load due to the acceleration of powerful traction vehicles). The three train
start-up detection stages can be enabled and set separately for zones 2, 3 and 4.
3.22.6.1 Readiness of Train Start-up Detection

The train start-up detection stages are ready if the following conditions are met:
● Distance protection is not blocked.
● The second and/or third and/or fourth stage(s) of distance protection are
(is) to operate with train start-up detection stages.
● The operate value of the respective train start-up detection stages (di/dt,
dv/dt or dϕ/dt) is not set to Blocked.
3-176 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Using zone 2 as an example, the following figure shows conditions to be met for
the train start-up detection stages to be ready. This applys accordingly to zones
3 and 4.
DIST: > 1 DIST:

Blocking di/dt not ready, Z2
303 667
[ 039 030 ]
DIST:
[ * ]
blocked
DIST:
Delta I(di/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
blocked > 1 du/dt not ready, Z2
[ 039 031 ]
DIST:
Delta V(dv/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
blocked > 1 DIST:
dphi/dt not ready,Z2
[ 039 032 ]
DIST:
D.phi(dphi/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
blocked
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:

Op.mode dx/dt, Z2PSx Delta I(di/dt),Z2PSx Delta V(dv/dt),Z2PSx D.phi(dphi/dt),Z2PSx
set 1 072 107 072 198 072 139 072 206
set 2 073 107 073 198 073 139 073 206
set 3 074 107 074 198 074 139 074 206
set 4 075 107 075 198 075 139 075 206 48Z5443
Fig. 3-130: Readiness of the train start-up detection stages, zones 2 to 4 (showing the example of zone 2).
3.22.6.2 Operation of Train Start-up Detection

The maximum change in measured values Delta I , Delta V and Delta ϕ during
sampling intervals Delta t = 9 0 ms can be set separately for zones 2, 3 and 4. A
short circuit is detected if the following conditions are met during a sampling
interval:
● The current rises by more than the set Delta I
AND/OR
● The voltage falls by more than the set Delta V
AND/OR
● The angle changes by more than the set Delta ϕ and the current has
exceeded a 0.2 Inom threshold.
The P438 user can select by setting whether all three criteria (AND operation) or
just one criterion (OR operation) must be met for a short-circuit detection. If not
all the criteria are used, the P438 will set outputs of the blocked stages according
to the operation selected such that a switch between overload and short-circuit
mode can be effected by the remaining stages, as required.
If all three delta criteria are set to Blocked, short time-delays tZ2S, tZ3S or tZ4S
are always used regardless of the operation criteria (WITHOUT, OR, AND).
If a short-circuit is detected, short time-delays tZ2S, tZ3S or tZ4S are used; if an
overload is detected, long time-delays tZ2L, tZ3L or tZ4L are used. If no dx/dt
stage is enabled, time delays tZ2S, tZ3S or tZ4S are always used.
The dx/dt decisions remain stored for the duration of the distance protection
start.
Using zone 2 as an example, the following figure shows the operation of the train
start-up detection stages. This applys accordingly to zones 3 and 4.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-177

P438 3 Operation
DIST:
[ * ] DIST:
t2S enable
0 303 671
1 &
2
&
0: Without
1: OR
2: AND
DIST:
di/dt not ready, Z2 &
[ 039 030 ]
DIST:
du/dt not ready, Z2
[ 039 031 ]
DIST:
dphi/dt not ready,Z2
[ 039 032 ]
DIST:
C Delta I(di/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
I̲ COMP S 1 DIST:
di/dt starting, Z2
R [ 039 007 ]
1 t &
DIST:
C Delta V(dv/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
COMP S 1 DIST:
V̲ dv/dt starting, Z2
[ 039 008 ]
R
1 t &
DIST:
C D.phi(dphi/dt),Z2PSx
[ * ]
COMP S 1 DIST:
dphi/dt starting, Z2
R [ 039 142 ]
1 t &
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ] Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:
Op.mode dx/dt, Z2PSx Delta I(di/dt),Z2PSx Delta V(dv/dt),Z2PSx D.phi(dphi/dt),Z2PSx
set 1 072 107 072 198 072 139 072 206
set 2 073 107 073 198 073 139 073 206
set 3 074 107 074 198 074 139 074 206
set 4 075 107 075 198 075 139 075 206 48Z6338A
Fig. 3-131: Train start-up detection stages, zones 2 to 4 (showing the example of zone 2).
3.22.7 Wrong Phase Coupling Protection

This protection function is required for the detection of inadvertent paralleling of
phase-displaced infeeds. A typical example presents the direct feed from the
3-178 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
three-phase system (see figure below). Each catenary section has its own supply.
In order to achieve an optimum load balance in the three-phase system, the
catenary sections are usually supplied from different phases of the three-phase
system.
The catenary sections can be connected to allow compensation for the failure of
one of the section supplies. This coupling is permissible only when the supply of
a section has actually failed. If two out-of-phase supplies are inadvertently
connected via the catenary, a short circuit results. The fault (short-circuit)
impedance is located on the line perpendicular to the resultant impedance of
catenary and transformers.
A
B
C
Transformer a Transformer b
Catenary
Rail
Section a Section b
X
X transf. a
Angle between
feed Z̲res
voltages
Z̲ Section a + b
Z̲
X transf. b
48Z5445A
Fig. 3-132: Wrong phase coupling.
The settings for the characteristics of the wrong phase coupling protection
function have to be selected such that the fault (short-circuit) impedance is
located safely within the tripping area.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-179

P438 3 Operation
Tripping zone
WPC Zmax
WPC Zmin
WPC ß
WPC γ
R
48Z5448A
Fig. 3-133: Characteristics of the wrong phase coupling protection function.
3.22.7.1 Readiness of Wrong Phase Coupling Protection

The wrong phase coupling protection function can be disabled or enabled via
parameter settings. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each
parameter subset.
The wrong phase coupling protection function is not ready if any one of the
following conditions applies:
● Distance protection is disabled.
● Distance protection is blocked.
● The time-delay of the wrong phase coupling protection function is set to
Blocked.
● The wrong phase coupling protection function is blocked by way of an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-180 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST:
WPC zone available
[ 022 002 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
DIST:
WPC enabled PSx
[ * ]
& DIST:
1 WPC enabled
0: No [ 039 155 ]
1: Yes
DIST:
Enabled
& DIST:
[ 036 104 ] WPC not ready
[ 039 156 ]
> 1
DIST:
Blocking
303 667
DIST:
WPC t PSx Parameter DIST: DIST:
[ * ] WPC enabled PSx WPC t PSx
blocked
set 1 076 130 076 137
DIST: set 2 077 130 077 137
Blocking tWPC EXT
set 3 078 130 078 137
[ 039 168 ]
set 4 079 130 079 137 48Z5447A
Fig. 3-134: Disabling, enabling and readiness of the wrong phase coupling protection.
3.22.7.2 Operation of Wrong Phase Coupling Protection

The P438 checks whether the voltage is lower than the set threshold DIST: WPC
V< PS x and whether the current exceeds the set base-point current (D IST: I>
PS x ). If this is the case, the P438 calculates the impedance. If the impedance
value is within the set tripping area, a timer stage is started. Once this time
period has elapsed, the trip signal is issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-181

P438 3 Operation
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
DIST: DIST:
WPC enabled WPC Zmin PSx
[ 039 155 ] [ * ]
DIST: DIST:
WPC not ready WPC Zmax PSx
[ 039 156 ] [ * ]
DIST:
I> starting DIST:
WPC beta PSx
[ 039 001 ]
DIST: [ * ]
WPC V< PSx
DIST:
[ * ] WPC alpha PSx
[ * ]
V̲
I̲
& DIST:
WPC starting
MAIN: [ 039 158 ]
306 014
DIST:
MAIN: WPC t PSx
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
[ * ]
DIST:
Trip signal WPC
[ 039 159 ]
Parameter DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST: DIST:

WPC V< PSx WPC Zmin PSx WPC Zmax PSx WPC beta PSx WPC alpha PSx WPC t PSx
set 1 076 132 076 135 076 136 076 134 076 133 076 137
set 2 077 132 077 135 077 136 077 134 077 133 077 137
set 3 078 132 078 135 078 136 078 134 078 133 078 137
set 4 079 132 079 135 079 136 079 134 079 133 079 137 48Z5449A
Fig. 3-135: Wrong phase coupling protection.
3.22.8 Multiple Signaling of Distance Protection

The starting and trip signals generated by the distance protection function are
grouped together to form multiple (composite) signals.
DIST: DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting Starting
[ 039 003 ] [ 036 135 ]
DIST:
Z2 starting
[ 039 005 ]
DIST:
Z3 starting
[ 039 140 ]
DIST:
Z4 starting
[ 039 042 ]
DIST:
Z1'(Z1',ze) starting
[ 039 004 ]
DIST:
Z2' starting
[ 039 006 ]
DIST:
Z3' starting
[ 039 141 ]
DIST:
Z4' starting
[ 039 043 ]
DIST:
WPC starting
[ 039 158 ] 48Z6339A
Fig. 3-136: Starting signals of distance protection.
3-182 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DIST: DIST:
Trip signal Z1/t1 Trip signal
[ 039 016 ] [ 036 009 ]
THERM:
3 PL active
[ 039 074 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z2/t2S
[ 039 017 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z2/t2L
[ 039 018 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z3/t3S
[ 039 145 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z3/t3L
[ 039 146 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z4/t4S
[ 039 040 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z4/t4L
[ 039 041 ]
DIST:
Trip signal WPC
[ 039 159 ] 48Z6340A
Fig. 3-137: Trip signal of distance protection.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-183

P438 3 Operation
3.23 High Impedance Protection (Function Group DELTA)

High impedance protection is designed to detect faults with high transient
resistances and it is based on a continuous monitoring for sudden current
changes. The third and fifth harmonic current components are continuously
monitored so as to provide stabilization during sudden current changes caused
by load variations (e.g. a train enters an adjacent feeder section). The operating
range of the high impedance protection function is characterized by adjustable
minimum current and reactance limit values.
The sudden change of the current’s phase angle may additionally be selected as
a stabilization criterion.
3.23.1 Enabling and Disabling the DELTA Function

High impedance protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
DELTA:
General enable USER
[ 022 179 ]
0
DELTA:
1 Enabled
[ 038 054 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DELTA:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter DELTA:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 062 030
1 set 2 063 030
set 3 064 030
0: No set 4 065 030
1: Yes
48Z6351A
Fig. 3-138: Disabling and enabling high impedance protection.
High impedance protection is not ready when one of the following conditions are
met:
● High impedance protection has not been enabled.
● High impedance protection is blocked by an appropriately configured binary
input function.
● High impedance protection is blocked by a Close command, issued to the
circuit breaker, dependent on the duration of the blocking time period
tBlock.
● Time-delay tDelta is set to Blocked.
● Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the voltage-measuring
circuit AND the function is to be blocked according to the setting.
3-184 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DELTA:
Enabled DELTA:
Not ready
[ 038 054 ]
[ 038 055 ]
DELTA:
Block. tDelta EXT
[ 038 053 ]
DELTA:
tDelta PSx
[ * ]
blocked
DELTA:
Blocking by CB-close DELTA:
tBlock PSx
[ 022 191 ]
[ * ]
0
1 & 1 t
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
MAIN:
Manual close EXT
[ 036 047 ]
DELTA:
Mode w/o Voltg. PSx
[ * ]
1
2 &
1: Delta I only
2: blocked
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
DELTA:
Vmin triggered
310 051
DELTA:
Delta Phi available
[ 022 189 ]
1: Yes
DELTA:
X superv. available
[ 022 188 ]
Parameter DELTA: DELTA: DELTA:
1: Yes tDelta PSx tBlock PSx Mode w/o Voltg. PSx
set 1 062 039 062 045 062 036
set 2 063 039 063 045 063 036
set 3 064 039 064 045 064 036
set 4 065 039 065 045 065 036 48Z6352C
Fig. 3-139: DELTA readiness in the P438.
3.23.2 Minimum Current and Voltage Enabling of DELTA

The minimum current trigger for high impedance protection compares the RMS
value of the current to the set value Imin. The pickup of the base point trigger is
determined by a half-cycle RMS calculation of the current in order to ensure a
short response time.
After operation, the full-cycle RMS value of the current is monitored. This ensures
the required stability and accuracy of the measuring system.
A permanent minimum voltage threshold (0.1 Vnom) is provided as additional
stabilization for reactance and angle measured values.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-185

P438 3 Operation
DELTA: c
Enabled
[ 038 054 ] DELTA:
Imin PSx
[ * ]
I̲ DELTA:
Imin starting
[ 038 059 ]
V̲ >0.1 Vnom DELTA:

Vmin triggered
310 051
Parameter DELTA:
Imin PSx
set 1 062 031

set 2 063 031
set 3 064 031
set 4 065 031 48Z6353B
Fig. 3-140: Minimum current and voltage enabling of DELTA.
3-186 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.23.3 Reactance-Limiting of High Impedance Protection

The high impedance protection function can be stabilized selectively by a
reactance check in forward and/or reverse direction which will issue a release
signal to authorize tripping. The function will operate independently of the
setting for distance protection.
The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds the minimum current value
set at DE LTA : Imin P Sx and that no fault is apparent in the voltage-measuring
circuit. If such is the case, the P438 will calculate the reactance value. If the
resulting reactance value lies within the set limits then the DE LTA : X-r elease
authorization signal is issued.
Triggering of high impedance protection will be fairly unlikely when the minimum
value is set in only one direction. In such a case high impedance protection will
operate only in the direction "opposite" to the set reactance limit.
DELTA: c
Enabled
[ 038 054 ] DELTA:
X superv. available
[ 022 188 ]
0: No
1: Yes
&
DELTA:
Imin starting
[ 038 059 ]
MCMON: c
[ 038 023 ] DELTA:
MAIN: X, forward PSx
M.c.b. trip V EXT [ * ]
[ 004 061 ] DELTA:
DELTA: X, backward PSx
Vmin triggered [ * ]
310 051
V̲ DELTA:
X-release
I̲ [ 038 065 ]
Parameter DELTA: DELTA:
X, forward PSx X, backward PSx
set 1 062 032 062 033

set 2 063 032 063 033
set 3 064 032 064 033
set 4 065 032 065 033 48Z6354B
Fig. 3-141: Reactance-limiting of DELTA.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-187

P438 3 Operation
3.23.4 Checking for Changes of the Phase Angle (Sudden Angle Change
Detection)
The P438 will check for sudden angle changes to distinguish between load
variations and high impedance faults. A the phase angle change may be used as
a criterion for a fault.
The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds the minimum current value
set at DEL TA: I mi n P Sx and that no fault is apparent in the voltage-measuring
circuit. If this is the case, the P438 will monitor the phase angle. Should the
phase angle value change by more than the set DELTA: Delta Phi PSx value
during a set sampling interval then the DELTA: De lta Phi starting signal is
issued.
DELTA: c
Enabled
[ 038 054 ] DELTA:
Delta Phi available
[ 022 189 ]
0: No
1: Yes
&
DELTA:
Imin starting
[ 038 059 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: c
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ] DELTA:
DELTA: Delta Phi PSx
Vmin triggered [ * ]
310 051
V̲ DELTA:
Delta Phi starting
I̲ [ 038 063 ]
Parameter DELTA:
Delta Phi PSx
set 1 062 034

set 2 063 034
set 3 064 034
set 4 065 034 48Z6357B
Fig. 3-142: Monitoring feature for sudden angle changes.
3-188 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.23.5 Harmonics Stabilization for Load Variations

The P438 will monitor the third and, selectively, the fifth harmonic current
components to distinguish between load variations and high impedance faults.
Sudden current changes caused by high impedance faults do not create any odd-
numbered harmonic components.
The P438 will evaluate the ratio to the fundamental of the third and/or fifth
harmonic current components so as to detect load variations. Should these ratios
exceed the threshold values set at DEL TA : I( 3 fn) /I ( fn) PSx or
DE LTA: I(5fn)/I (fn) P Sx then the device has detected a load variation.
DELTA: C
Enabled &
[ 038 054 ] DELTA:
I(3fn)/I(fn) PSx
DELTA:
Imin starting [ * ]
[ 038 059 ]
MAIN: DELTA:
I(3fn)/I(fn) I(3fn) starting
310 054 [ 038 076 ]
c
DELTA:
Superv. I(5fn)avail.
[ 022 193 ]
&
0
1 C
0: No DELTA:
1: Yes I(5fn)/I(fn) PSx
[ * ]
MAIN: DELTA:
I(5fn)/I(fn) I(5fn) starting
310 055
[ 038 077 ]
DELTA:
& Delta I blocked
[ 038 068 ]
DELTA:
kSt,I(xfn)/I(fn) PSx DELTA:
[ * ]
Parameter DELTA: DELTA: DELTA: Delta I extended
blocked I(3fn)/I(fn) PSx I(5fn)/I(fn) PSx kSt,I(xfn)/I(fn) PSx
[ 038 066 ]
set 1 062 040 062 042 062 041
set 2 063 040 063 042 063 041
set 3 064 040 064 042 064 041
set 4 065 040 065 042 065 041 48Z6355C
Fig. 3-143: Harmonics stabilization for load variations.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-189

P438 3 Operation
3.23.6 Starting and Tripping of DELTA

The sudden current change criterion of by the high impedance protection
function monitors the fundamental component of the current during a set
sampling interval. With this feature the setting of the sudden current change
criterion can be handled dynamically according to the harmonics stabilization
setting. The high impedance protection function is either blocked or stabilized
(dynamically extended by multiplication with the set factor) in accordance with
the setting of parameter DELTA : kSt,I(xf n) /I( f n) PSx.
The sudden current change criterion represents the stabilized starting criterion
and is considered to be satisfied when the following conditions are met:
● The minimum current threshold enabling the high impedance protection
function has been triggered.
● The setting-dependent harmonics stabilization block is not active.
● Reactance limits monitoring has been triggered OR is not configured.
● Sudden angle change monitoring has been triggered OR is not configured.
● Measuring-circuit monitoring of the voltage has not been triggered OR a
settingdependent enabling of the sudden current change function has been
issued with a faulty voltage measuring-circuit.
● A sudden current change, (possibly stabilized) has been detected.
Starting of the high impedance protection function is recorded. Recording is reset
when minimum current enabling and reactance limit monitoring have dropped
out. Additionally recording is reset when both the tDelta time-delay and a 100 ms
pulse duration have elapsed.
When tDelta is set to Blocked then resetting of the recorded start is carried out
after the 100 ms pulse duration.
Depending on the settings of the MAIN: Fu nct.Rush re str.PSx parameters

starting decisions issued by the high impedance protection function can be
cancelled when the inrush stabilization function has detected an inrush current.
tDelta is triggered when the high impedance protection function operates. Once
the starting time has elapsed, a trip signal is generated.
3-190 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
DELTA:
Enabled
&
[ 038 054 ]
DELTA:
Not ready
[ 038 055 ]
DELTA:
Imin starting
[ 038 059 ]
DELTA:
Delta I blocked
[ 038 068 ]
MAIN:
306 014
DELTA:
Mode w/o Voltg. PSx
[ * ]
1
2 &
1: Delta I only
2: blocked
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
DELTA:
Vmin triggered
310 051
DELTA:
X-release
[ 038 065 ]
C
DELTA:
X superv. available
[ 022 188 ] DELTA:
Delta I PSx
1: Yes
[ * ]
DELTA:
Delta Phi starting DELTA:
[ 038 063 ] kSt,I(xfn)/I(fn) PSx
DELTA: [ * ]
Delta Phi available
[ 022 189 ] fnom
1: Yes
S 1 DELTA:
I̲ & Delta I starting
R [ 038 060 ]
DELTA:
Delta I extended
[ 038 066 ]
t 0
DELTA: C
Block. tDelta EXT
[ 038 053 ] DELTA:
tDelta PSx
[ * ]
t 0 DELTA:
Trip signal
[ 038 056 ]
Parameter DELTA: DELTA: DELTA: DELTA:

Mode w/o Voltg. PSx Delta I PSx kSt,I(xfn)/I(fn) PSx tDelta PSx
set 1 062 036 062 037 062 041 062 039
set 2 063 036 063 037 063 041 063 039
set 3 064 036 064 037 064 041 064 039
set 4 065 036 065 037 065 041 065 039 48Z6356B
Fig. 3-144: Starting and tripping of the DELTA.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-191

P438 3 Operation
3.24 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)

The P438 monitors the measured currents and the voltages continuously. When
the supervision detects an a.c. input problem, appropriate measures are taken to
prevent malfunction of the device and the faulty condition is alarmed.
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be disabled by the appropriate setting. In the
event of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
MCMON:
General enable USER
[ 014 001 ]
0
MCMON:
1 Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MCMON:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter MCMON:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 014 200
1 set 2 014 201
set 3 014 202
0: No set 4 014 203
1: Yes
48Z5053A
Fig. 3-145: Enabling or disabling MCMON.
3.24.1 Current Monitoring

Via a second current-measuring input, the P438 can provide acquisition of the
plausibility check current (Iplaus) in addition to the catenary current (I). For this
purpose, a second current transformer or current transformer core must be
available in the installation. For the acquisition of the plausibility-check current, a
measurement class CT is adequate since monitoring is automatically deactivated
if one of the two currents exceeds the nominal current of the plausibility check
current transformer (FT_D A: Forw.le ngth A -1 PSx) and thus unwanted
operation due to unbalanced CT saturation is prevented.
The P438 evaluates the primary values of the catenary and plausibility check
current. From the CT transformation ratio data, it calculates a matching factor.
f=I plaus, CT.prim / I nom, CT.prim
This factor must be in the range 1/32 ... 32 in order to avoid numerical problems.
If this condition is not met, the current plausibility is blocked and a appropriate
alarm is entered in the monitoring signal memory.
The P438 forms a differential (Id) and a restraining current (IR) from the primary
values of the catenary current and the plausibility-check current.
Current monitoring is based on a single differential protection characteristic with
two slopes. The equations for the two parts of the characteristic are given below.
The below figure shows the tripping characteristic.
3-192 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Operating zone
Blocking zone
48Z5066A
Fig. 3-146: Differential characteristic, monitoring of the current-measuring circuits.
The P438 signals a fault in the current-measuring circuit if the differential current
is in the operate region shown.
MCMON:
I-monit. enabled PSx
[ * ]
1 c
0: No MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
1: Yes [ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 016 ]
SFMON:
Match.fct.I MCMONinv
COMP [ 098 059 ]
MCMON:
Mismatch scal.Iplaus
[ 040 129 ]
MCMON:
Scaling fact. Iplaus
[ 004 255 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ]
& c
MCMON:
Id>, I-monit. PSx
[ * ]
MCMON:
I̲ <Inom C.T.prim. m1, I-monit. PSx
[ * ]
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst <Iplaus,nom C.T.prim.
MCMON:
Meas. circ. I faulty
[ 040 087 ]
Parameter MCMON: MCMON: MCMON:

I-monit. enabled PSx Id>, I-monit. PSx m1, I-monit. PSx
set 1 014 240 014 244 014 248
set 2 014 241 014 245 014 249
set 3 014 242 014 246 014 250
set 4 014 247 014 251 014 228 48Z9335A
Fig. 3-147: Monitoring of the current-measuring circuits.
3.24.2 Voltage Monitoring

In addition to the monitoring of m.c.b. trip operating independently in function
group MAIN, the P438 also offers monitoring of the voltage-measuring circuits
based on measured values. This is divided into the following sub-functions:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-193

P438 3 Operation
● Undervoltage monitoring
● Fuse failure monitoring
If triggered both sub-functions automatically block all functions using the
measured voltage.
If undervoltage monitoring is enabled and it is not blocked by a binary signal
input and there is no general starting, the P438 monitors the voltage for it to fall
below the threshold set at MCMON: V <, V -moni t. PSx. In this case the
current must exceed the threshold set at MC MON: I> enable V <,F F PSx.
Once the set time delay has elapsed, the MCMON: Undervoltage signal is
issued.
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MCMON:
Blocking V< EXT
[ 038 033 ]
MCMON:
V-monit. enabled PSx
[ * ]
0
& c
1
MCMON: MCMON:
0: No V<, V-monit. PSx tV<, V-monit. PSx
1: Yes [ * ] [ * ]
& S1 1 MCMON:
Undervoltage
t 0 R1 [ 038 038 ]
V̲
MCMON:
V< triggered
MCMON:
I> enable V<,FF PSx 304 652
[ * ]
I̲
Parameter MCMON: MCMON: MCMON: MCMON:

V-monit. enabled PSx V<, V-monit. PSx tV<, V-monit. PSx I> enable V<,FF PSx
set 1 014 225 014 229 014 233 014 188
set 2 014 226 014 230 014 234 014 237
set 3 014 227 014 231 014 235 014 238
set 4 014 228 014 232 014 236 014 239 48Z5520B
Fig. 3-148: Undervoltage monitoring.
3.24.3 Fuse Failure Monitoring

In addition to monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits, as described above, the
P438 also provides for fuse failure monitoring. If fuse failure monitoring is not
desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
If fuse failure monitoring is enabled and it is not blocked by a binary signal input
and there is no general starting, the voltage is monitored. Fuse failure monitoring
issues an alarm if the following conditions are met:
3-194 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
● A voltage drop has to exceed the set threshold MCMON: D elta V , FF PSx
within 2 power frequency cycles.
● As the voltage drops, the change in current must not exceed the set
threshold MC MON: De l ta I, FF P Sx.
● After the voltage drop, the voltage must be lower than the set threshold
MC MO N : V <, FF P Sx.
● After the voltage drop, the current is higher than the set threshold
MC MO N : I> e nabl e V <,F F PSx.
The MC MON: FF, V tri gge r ed signal will be reset if the following conditions
are satisfied:
● The voltage is higher than the set threshold: MC MO N: V >, FF PSx
● A minimum hold-time period of 125 ms has elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-195

P438 3 Operation
MAIN:
General starting
[ 036 000 ]
MCMON:
Enabled
[ 040 094 ]
MCMON:
Blocking FF EXT
[ 038 037 ]
MCMON:
FF enabled PSx
[ * ]
MCMON:
0: No Delta V, FF PSx
1: Yes [ * ]
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
V̲ - ΔV/Δt [ 035 081 ]
MCMON:
Delta I, FF PSx
[ * ]
I̲ + ΔI/Δt
MCMON:
V<, FF PSx
[ * ]
MCMON:
I> enable V<,FF PSx
[ * ]
MCMON:
V>, FF PSx
[ * ]
Parameter MCMON: MCMON: MCMON: MCMON: MCMON: MCMON:

FF enabled PSx Delta V, FF PSx Delta I, FF PSx V<, FF PSx I> enable V<,FF PSx V>, FF PSx
set 1 014 204 014 216 014 221 014 208 014 188 014 212
set 2 014 205 014 217 014 222 014 209 014 237 014 213
set 3 014 206 014 218 014 223 014 210 014 238 014 214
set 4 014 207 014 211
014 219 014 224 014 239 014 215 48Z9335A
Fig. 3-149: Fuse failure monitoring.
3-196 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.24.4 “Fuse Failure” Monitoring of the Reference Voltage
MCMON:
FF,Vref enabled USER
MCMON:
[ 014 013 ] Oper. delay FF, Vref
[ 014 012 ]
0
t 0
1 & MCMON:
FF, Vref triggered
0: No [ 038 100 ]
1: Yes
MCMON:
Blocking FF,Vref EXT
[ 018 099 ]
V̲B/V̲ref
|V̲ref|-|V̲Meas|≥
ASC: 0.1 Vnom
Vmeas
MAIN:
CB closed B EXT
[ 031 030 ] 48Z9336A
Fig. 3-150: “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage.
The P438 includes “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage function,
which is required by the “Automatic Synchronism Check” (ASC).
Fuse Failure monitoring of the reference voltage is only possible if the ASC
function has been configured. This is specifically applied when no auxiliary
contact is available on the voltage transformer m.c.b. If fuse failure monitoring is
not desired it can be disabled by setting parameters.
Fuse Failure monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in
the network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a short
circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference
voltage is present when the following conditions are met:
● The circuit breaker is closed.
● The voltage difference between the line side and the busbar must exceed
0.1⋅Vnom.
3.24.5 Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions

The M CMON: Meas. voltage o. k. signal is issued if the following conditions
are met:
● No general starting signal is present.
● The binary signal input configured to MAIN: M. c.b. t rip V E XT is not
energized.
● Undervoltage monitoring has not operated.
● Fuse failure monitoring has not operated.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-197

P438 3 Operation
MAIN: & MCMON:

General starting Meas. voltage o.k.
[ 036 000 ] [ 038 048 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON:
V< triggered
304 652
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ] 48Z5060A
Fig. 3-151: M C M O N : M e a s . v o l t a g e o . k .signal.
MAIN: MCMON:
M.c.b. trip V EXT Meas. circ. V faulty
[ 004 061 ] [ 038 023 ]
MCMON:
Undervoltage
[ 038 038 ]
MCMON:
FF, V triggered
[ 035 081 ] 48Z5470A
Fig. 3-152: Multiple signaling of the monitoring functions.
3-198 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.25 Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection (Function Group BUOC)

If there is a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit, distance protection is blocked,
since accurate impedance measurement is not possible. Backup overcurrent-
time protection (BUOC) is then automatically activated – if set accordingly. The
backup overcurrent protection function provides two definite-time overcurrent
protection stages.
3.25.1 Enabling and Disabling the BUOC Function

BUOC protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Enabling
can be carried out separately for each setting group.
BUOC:
General enable USER
[ 014 011 ]
0
BUOC:
1 Enabled
[ 040 093 ]
0: No
1: Yes
BUOC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter BUOC:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 072 118
1 set 2 073 118
set 3 074 118
0: No set 4 075 118
1: Yes
48Z5055A
Fig. 3-153: Disabling and enabling BUOC protection.
BUOC protection is ready when it is activated, enabled and at least one stage is
unblocked. If this is the case then BUOC protection will become effective
automatically as soon as the distance protection function is not ready. The latter
can occur, for example, if there is a malfunction in the voltage-measuring circuit
or if the distance protection function is not enabled in the active setting group.
Provided that the backup time-delayed overcurrent protection has started, it
remains active at least until the end of this starting, even when the condition for
its activation disappear (for example M.c.b. trip).
BUOC: BUOC:
Enabled Not ready
[ 040 093 ] [ 040 030 ]
BUOC:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 038 127 ]
BUOC:
Blocking tI>> EXT
BUOC:
[ 038 128 ] Active
DIST: [ 037 021 ]
Not ready
[ 041 086 ]
48Z5056A
Fig. 3-154: BUOC readiness in the P438.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-199

P438 3 Operation
3.25.2 Starting and Tripping of BUOC

When the BUOC protection function is active, it monitors the current I to detect
when the set thresholds are exceeded. When a stage operates and the set time-
delays have elapsed, signals are issued and can be used as criteria for fault
recording or tripping. The timer stages connected in series to the triggers can be
blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Depending on the settings of the MAIN: F un ct.Rush re str.PSx or
MAIN : Funct.Harm.block. PSx parameters, starting decisions issued by the
BUOC function can be cancelled when an inrush current or harmonic blocking is
detected.
BUOC:
Active
[ 037 021 ]
BUOC:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 038 127 ]
BUOC: BUOC:
I> PSx tI> PSx
MAIN: [ * ] [ * ]
Protection active
306 001
BUOC:
Trip signal I>
I̲ [ 036 014 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>
[ 036 013 ]
BUOC: BUOC:
Blocking tI>> EXT Gen. trip signal
[ 038 128 ] [ 036 122 ]
BUOC: BUOC:
I>> PSx tI>> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
BUOC:
Trip signal I>>
[ 036 116 ]
BUOC:
Starting I>>
[ 036 115 ]
MAIN:
306 014
MAIN:
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
Parameter BUOC: BUOC: BUOC: BUOC:

I> PSx I>> PSx tI> PSx tI>> PSx
set 1 010 058 010 127 010 059 010 128
set 2 010 078 010 129 010 079 010 130
set 3 010 098 010 131 010 099 010 132
set 4 011 018 010 133 011 019 010 134 48Z5457A
Fig. 3-155: Starting and tripping of the BUOC.
3-200 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.26 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)

When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an
existing fault (for example a forgotten grounding after work carried out on a
primary conductor). This is especially critical if a maintenance ground clamp
were inadvertently left connected at the remote end of the line, since the
distance protection function would not clear the fault until zone 2 delay t2 had
elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest possible clearance is desired
which can be achieved by means of the “switch on to fault protection” function.
3.26.1 Enabling and Disabling the SOTF Function

Switch on to fault protection can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters. Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
SOTF:
General enable USER
[ 011 068 ]
0
SOTF:
1 Enabled
[ 040 069 ]
0: No
1: Yes
SOTF:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter SOTF:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 011 120
1 set 2 011 121
set 3 011 122
0: No set 4 011 123
1: Yes
48Z5065A
Fig. 3-156: Disabling and enabling switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.
3.26.2 Tripping of SOTF

Switch on to fault protection can be blocked if the following conditions are met:
● External blocking command signal SO TF : Bl ock ing EXT
● External auto-reclose signal SOTF: Par. A RC run nin g EX T
● Reclose command issued by the internal auto-reclose control function
To ensure fast fault clearance upon manual closing, the manual close signal must
be applied not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P438. The manual close
signal is converted to an internal pulse, of settable duration. The user may
specify whether the following shall occur while this timer is running.
The setting SOTF: Ope ratin g m ode PSx allows the user to choose between
the following operating modes:
● Occurrence of a general start while a timer stage is running shall cause a
trip (SOTF : Tri p sign al)
● While the timer is running, a zone 1 extension shall occur (SOTF: Z1
ext e nde d) .
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-201

P438 3 Operation
MAIN: & SOTF:

General starting Trip signal
[ 036 000 ] [ 036 064 ]
SOTF:
Enabled &
[ 040 069 ]
SOTF: & SOTF:
Par. ARC running EXT Z1 extended
[ 039 063 ] [ 035 076 ]
SOTF:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 098 ] SOTF:
MAIN: Man. close timer PSx
Protection active
306 001 [ * ]
MAIN: & 1 t SOTF:

Manual close EXT tManual-close runn.
[ 036 047 ] [ 036 063 ]
ARC:
Close command
303 021
SOTF:
ARC blocked
305 650
SOTF:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
Parameter SOTF:
4
Operating mode PSx
5
set 1 011 061
set 2 011 114 4: Trip with starting
set 3 011 115
set 4 011 116
5: Trip with overreach
48Z5321A
Fig. 3-157: Tripping of the SOTF
3-202 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.27 Protective Signaling (Function group PSIG1 and PSIG2)

Protective signaling function is transmitting binary signals via binary inputs/
outputs, InterMicom (COMM3) or Ethernet interface (GOOSE) from one to the
other protection device for system wide distance protection applications.
This function can be used for any kind of direct or permissive intertripping or
interblocking application with link to all protection functions available in the
device. Typically it is used for the distance protection function to extend the line
protection to 100% using the transmitted signal for intertripping or zone
extension, for which this function provides also a dedicated operating mode.
Two function groups for programmable logic are available, that can be used
independently of each other.
PSIG1 and PSIG2 provide with exact similar functionality. PSIG1 is shown as an
example in the following chapters.
3.27.1 Disabling and Enabling Protective Signaling

The function can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through
binary signal inputs.
The function is enabled independently of parameter subsets via
PSIG1: General e nable USER. It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via PSIG1: En able P Sx. If these enabling functions have been
activated, protective signaling can be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Parameters
and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the
PSIG1: Enab le EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then
protective signaling is enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and it is
disabled by a negative edge. If only the PSIG1: Di sable EXT function is
assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3.27.2 Readiness of Protective Signaling

In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements
must be satisfied:
● It must be enabled.
● There must be no external block.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-203

P438 3 Operation
PSIG1:
General enable USER
[ 015 004 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
PSIG1:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
PSIG1:
0 Enabled
[ 015 008 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 037 025
Address 037 026
PSIG1:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 023 ]
PSIG1:
Enable EXT
[ 037 025 ]
PSIG1:
Enable USER
[ 003 132 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
PSIG1:
Disable EXT
[ 037 026 ]
PSIG1:
Disable USER
[ 003 131 ]
0: don't execute
PSIG1:
Ready
1: execute
[ 037 027 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
PSIG1:
Blocking EXT
[ 036 049 ]
Parameter PSIG1:
Enable PSx
set 1 015 014

set 2 015 015
set 3 015 016
set 4 015 017
48Z9375A
Fig. 3-158: Enabling, disabling and readiness of protective signaling.
If protective signaling is ready, distance protection tripping takes place in zone 1.

● With normal reach: after distance protection stage t1 has elapsed.
● With extended reach: after the protective signaling tripping time has
elapsed.
3-204 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.27.3 Send and Receive Logic

In send logic, m-out-of-n parameters are selected in PSI G1: Fct . Send Signal
PS x, which starting, trip and direction signals can logically combined with
NOT/AND/OR logic to get sent as an active PSIG signal to the opposite device.
PS IG1: Re le ase t. se nd P Sx is available to provide the send signal for a
minimal duration time.
PS IG1: Se nd signal is the output of an OR logic gate to signalize if the
PSI G1: Se nd or the PSIG1 : Se nd Ech o signal get activated.
PSIG1:
PSIG1: Release t. send PSx
Reset send timer
[ * ]
[ 019 148 ]
PSIG1:
Fct. Send Signal PSx 0 t
PSIG1:
[ * ] Send
[ 012 243 ]
Signal 1
m out of n
Signal 2
Signal n
Selected signals
& PSIG1:
Send signal
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG1:
Send Echo
[ 019 228 ]
Parameter PSIG1: PSIG1:

Release t. send PSx Fct. Send Signal PSx
set 1 015 002 019 108
set 2 024 001 019 114
set 3 024 061 019 115
set 4 025 021 019 117

48Z9384A
Fig. 3-159: Send logic of protective signaling.
To secure that an active receive signal get processed only when it was send by
the sender, a plausibility check with the PSIG1: Telecom. fault y is required
(see Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-208)).
The received signal PSIG1: Re ce ive s ignal can be used for the following
different functionalities:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-205

P438 3 Operation
● Direct or permissive inter trip with or without consideration of other internal

signals (see Section 3.27.5.2, (p. 3-209)).
With PSI G1: Fct. Trip Sign al PSx, m-out-of-n parameters are logical
interconnection with NOT/AND/OR logic of the receive signal in combination
with internal starting & state signals to generate a related trip command.
PSIG1: Tri p sign al will be generated, when PSIG1: Trip delay t ime
PSx and no transient blocking is stabile for the set time delay.
● Inter blocking of protection stages to avoid unselective trip (see
Section 3.27.5.3, (p. 3-211)).
With PSI G1: Funct.Block Sig P Sx, m-out-of-n parameters are defined as
blocking signal which should be activated by the received signal.
● Zone extension to extend the fast trip area of the distance protection (see
Section 3.27.5.4, (p. 3-213)).
When PSI G1: Z1 Exte nde d gets active, it shall directly switch DIST zone
Z1 to Z1e in the receiving relay.
3-206 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
PSIG1:
Fct. Trip Signal PSx
[ * ]
Signal 1
PSIG1:
Start signal
Signal 2
m out of n [ 019 183 ]
Signal n PSIG1:
Trip delay time PSx
[ * ]
Selected signals
& t 0 PSIG1:
& Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG1:
Transient blocking
[ 037 255 ]
INP:Fct. assign. UXX
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
PSIG1:
Address 036 048 & & Receive signal
[ 006 036 ]
COMM3: Fct. assignm. send x

PSIG1: PSIG1:
Funct.Block Sig PSx Block signal
[ XXX XXX ]
[ * ] [ 019 226 ]
X Blocking signal 1
Address 036 048 & 1 out of n Blocking signal 2
Blocking signal n
GOOSE: Input x fct.assign.
[ XXX XXX ]
Selected signals
1
& PSIG1:
Z1 Extended
2
[ 019 233 ]
X
PSIG1:
Address 036 048 & Operating mode PSx
PSIG1: [ * ]
Receive EXT
[ 036 048 ]
0
PSIG1:
Telecom. faulty 4
[ 036 060 ]
5
0: Without
4: Release scheme
5: Blocking scheme
3: Zone extension
Parameter PSIG1: PSIG1: PSIG1: PSIG1:

Operating mode PSx Fct. Trip Signal PSx Trip delay time PSx Funct.Block Sig PSx
set 1 015 000 019 118 019 179 019 222
set 2 024 000 019 119 019 180 019 223

set 3 024 060 019 146 019 181 019 224
set 4 025 020 019 147 019 182 019 225

48Z9383A
Fig. 3-160: Receive logic of protective signaling.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-207

P438 3 Operation
3.27.4 Monitoring the Transmission Channel
PSIG1:
Fct.Telecom.chnl.PSx
[ * ]
PSIG1:
Telec.faulty EXT PSIG1:
Telecom.flt.enl. PSx
[ 004 064 ]
[ * ]
COMM3:
Communications fault
1 out of n 0 t PSIG1:
[ 120 043 ] Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
COMM3:
Comm. link failure
[ 120 044 ]
GOOSE:
Input 01 faulty
[ 111 100 ]
.
.
.
GOOSE:
Input 128 faulty
[ 111 227 ]
Selected signal
* PSIG1: PSIG1:
Parameter
Fct.Telecom.chnl.PSx Telecom.flt.enl. PSx
set 1 019 149 019 175
set 2 019 160 019 176
set 3 019 161 019 177
set 4 019 162 019 178
48Z9378A
Fig. 3-161: Transmission fault.
The function is transmitting binary signals via binary inputs/outputs, InterMiCOM

(COMM3) or Ethernet interface (GOOSE) from one to the other protection device
for system wide distance protection applications.
A transmission fault leads to a blocking of the protective signaling function.
3.27.5 Protective Signaling Operating Modes
PSIG1:
Operating mode PSx
[ * ]
0 0: Without
4 4: Release scheme
5 5: Blocking scheme
3 3: Zone extension
0: Without
4: Release scheme Parameter PSIG1:
Operating mode PSx
5: Blocking scheme
3: Zone extension set 1 015 000
set 2 024 000
set 3 024 070
set 4 025 020
48Z9377A
Fig. 3-162: Setting the protective signaling operating modes.
Protective signaling can be operated in three different modes, which can be

selected with the setting P SIG1: Ope ratin g mode PSx:
● Release (permissive) scheme (setting: Release scheme, see
Section 3.27.5.2, (p. 3-209))
● Blocking scheme (setting: Blocking scheme, see Section 3.27.5.3, (p. 3-
211))
● Zone extension (setting: Zone extension, see Section 3.27.5.4, (p. 3-213))
3-208 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
All operating modes transmit binary signals. These are exchanged either via the
integrated InterMiCOM interface, via IEC 61850 GOOSE over Ethernet, or via
binary inputs / output relays (directly using pilot wires in case of short distances,
otherwise using external signal transmission devices).
3.27.5.1 Limiting to Weak-Infeed Logic or Echo Function

If only the weak-infeed logic or the echo function will be used and no other
protective signaling functions, then this can be implemented by setting the
operating mode to Without.
3.27.5.2 Operating Mode “Release Scheme”

Release procedure – A received active signal generates in combination with a
local criteria (different starting signals), a release of a protection stage/function
or generates a direct trip. Typically the active signal will be sent only for faults in
forward direction. When CB is open, the active PSIG signal will be reflected to the
sending signal (echo to fastly trip other end device, see Section 3.27.8, (p. 3-
217)).
Two applications are used to explain two examples of release procedures with
distance protection.
Release procedure example 1 – Z1 starting generates directly a send signal. If Z1
starting is active as well on the receiving side and the PSIG signal is active, a
direct trip PS IG1: Tri p s ignal will be generated skipping trip time D IST: t1
PSx.
IED1 IED2
> <
t Release Procedure 1 105%

Z1 Z2
Z2 Z1
105% t
48Z9388A
Fig. 3-163: Fault in zone 1.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-209

P438 3 Operation
PSIG1: & PSIG1:

Receive signal Trip signal
[ 006 036 ] [ 038 007 ]
PSIG1: &
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
DIST:
t1 PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST: DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 003 ] [ 039 016 ]
Parameter DIST:
t1 PSx
set 1 012 028
set 2 012 078
set 3 013 028
set 4 013 078
48Z9385A
Fig. 3-164: Release procedure example 1. (Note: The dotted line block is an example of send logic configured by
P S I G 1 : F c t . T r i p S i g n a l P S x.)
Release procedure example 2 – Z2 starting generates directly a send signal. If Z2

starting is active with no train start detected at receiving side and the PSIG signal
is active, a direct trip P SI G1: Trip si gn al will be generated skipping trip time
DI ST: t 2S PSx. No influence when communication error occurs.
IED1 IED2
> <
Release Procedure 2
t
85%
Z1 Z2
Z2 Z1
85%
t
48Z9389A
Fig. 3-165: Fault in zone 2.
3-210 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
PSIG1: & PSIG1:

Receive signal Trip signal
[ 006 036 ] [ 038 007 ]
PSIG1:
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
DIST:
t2S PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST: OR / &
di/dt starting, Z2 DIST:
AND Trip signal Z2/t2S
[ 039 007 ]
[ 039 017 ]
DIST:
dv/dt starting, Z2
[ 039 008 ]
DIST:
dphi/dt starting, Z2
[ 039 142 ]
DIST: Parameter DIST:

Z2 starting t2S PSx
[ 039 005 ] set 1 012 029
set 2 012 079
set 3 013 029
set 4 013 079 48Z9386A
Fig. 3-166: Release procedure example 2. (Note: The dotted line block is an example of send logic configured by
P S I G 1 : F c t . T r i p S i g n a l P S x.)
3.27.5.3 Operating Mode “Blocking scheme”

Blocking procedure example – A received active signal will block the tripping or
specific protection stages/functions. Typically the active signal will be sent only
for faults in backward direction to detect an error outside of the protected line
section. A fault in backward direction generates directly a blocking signal
PSIG1 : Block signal to be sent. At receiving side the active signal blocks the
tripping of the Z1 and/or Z2 stages.
For the case of a communication error (PSIG1: Telecom. fault y = true)
typically an accelerated trip will be generated in parallel to the blocking scheme.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-211

P438 3 Operation
105%
IED1 IED2
> <
Blocking Procedure
t 105%
Z1 Z2
Z2 Z1
105% t
48Z9390A
Fig. 3-167: Blocking of receiving device.
PSIG1:
Block signal
[ 019 226 ]
& PSIG1:
Trip signal
[ 038 007 ]
PSIG1: &
Telecom. faulty
[ 036 060 ]
DIST:
t1 PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST: DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 003 ] [ 039 016 ]
DIST:
t2S PSx
[ * ]
t 0
DIST: DIST:
Z2 starting Trip signal Z2/t2S
[ 039 005 ] [ 039 017 ]
Parameter DIST: DIST:

t1 PSx t2S PSx
set 1 012 028 012 029
set 2 012 078 012 079
set 3 013 028 013 029
set 4 013 078 013 079
48Z9387A
Fig. 3-168: IED2 receive logic - blocking procedure example. (Note: The dotted line block is an example of send
logic configured by P S I G 1 : F c t . T r i p S i g n a l P S x.)
3-212 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.27.5.4 Operating Mode “Zone Extension”

When a distance protection trip has occurred in zone 1, a signal is sent to the
remote station’s protection device. Upon receipt of the transmitted signal, the
measuring range of zone 1 in the remote station is increased by the zone
extension factor DIST: kze Ext/SOTF/PSIG PSx.
The receive signal is ignored during transient blocking.
The figures Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172) and Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175) show how PSIG1: Z1
E xt en ded switch DIST zone Z1 to Z1e.
Nfw
zone 1 extended zone 1
A B
extended zone 1 zone 1
Nfw
49Z8953A
Fig. 3-169: Reaches with zone extension. Dashed line: measuring range extended by zone extension factor.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-213

P438 3 Operation
3.27.6 Transient Blocking
DIST: PSIG1:
Backwards fault Reset send timer
& ≥1
[ 036 139 ] [ 019 148 ]
PSIG1:
Operating mode PSx
[*]
5 &
0: Without
3: Zone extension
4: Release scheme
DIST: 5: Blocking scheme
Forward fault
[ 036 138 ]
PSIG1:
t Trans.block. PSx
[ * ]
t+1s PSIG1:
S1 1 Transient blocking
DIST: [ 037 255 ]
Starting R1
[ 036 135 ]
* PSIG1: PSIG1:
Parameter
Operating mode PSx t Trans.block. PSx
set 1 015 000 015 024

set 2 024 000 024 010
set 3 024 060 024 070
set 4 025 020 025 030
48Z9380A
Fig. 3-170: Transient blocking.
In the event of a reset of the distance protection fault backward direction

decision, protective signaling will be blocked for the time set at PSIG1: t
Tr ans.block. PSx.
When a backward fault in the operating modes “Zone extension” or “Release
scheme” comes during an active general starting, the PSIG1: Reset send
t imer becomes active.
When a forward fault in the operating mode “Blocking scheme” comes during an
active general starting and the transient blocking is not in progress, the
PSIG1: R ese t se nd ti me r becomes active.
3-214 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.27.7 Weak-Infeed Logic
PSIG1:
V< triggered
[ 019 230 ]
&
PSIG1: PSIG1:
PSIG1: Trip signal V< PSx
Weak inf. ready V< weak infeed PSx
[ 019 231 ] [ * ] [ * ]
PSIG1:
tV< PSx
[ * ]
0
V̲
1
t 0 PSIG1:
WI Trip Signal
0: Without
[ 019 232 ]
1: With
PSIG1:
Receive signal
[ 006 036 ] &
& PSIG1:
Weak infeed start.
INP:Fct. assign. UXX [ 043 064 ]
≥1
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Without function
Address 043 062 &
PSIG1:
Weak inf. trigg. EXT
[ 043 062 ]
Parameter PSIG1: PSIG1: PSIG1:

tV< PSx V< weak infeed PSx Trip signal V< PSx
set 1 015 019 015 020 015 021
set 2 024 005 024 006 024 007
set 3 024 065 024 066 024 067
set 4 025 025 025 026 025 027
48Z9381A
Fig. 3-171: Weak-infeed logic.
The P438 features a “weak-infeed logic” function.

The weak-infeed logic checks the voltage to determine whether it falls below the
PSI G1 : V< weak in feed P Sx set threshold. If the voltage falls below the set
threshold, then a timer stage P SI G1: tV< PSx is started. Once it has elapsed –
provided that the appropriate setting has been selected with parameter
PSIG1 : Trip signal V< P Sx– a protective signaling WI trip is issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-215

P438 3 Operation
3.27.7.1 Enable for the Weak-Infeed Logic
PSIG1: & PSIG1:

Ready Weak inf. ready
[ 037 027 ] [ 019 231 ]
PSIG1:
Block. weak inf. EXT
[ 036 255 ]
V < 0.35Vnom
5s 0
V̲
MAIN:
CB open A EXT
[ 044 131 ]
DIST:
Starting
[ 036 135 ]
MAIN:
General starting S1 1
[ 036 000 ]
& R1
PSIG1: 0 50ms
Receive signal
[ 006 036 ]
48Z9382A
Fig. 3-172: Enabling of weak-infeed logic.
The following is relevant to enable the weak-infeed logic:

● PSIG1 : Ready is active.
● PSI G1: Bl ock. weak in f. E XT is not active.
● MAI N: C B ope n A EXT is not active
● The voltage exceeds 0.35 Vnom for more than 5s.
● DI ST: St arti ng is not active
● Falling edge of MAI N: Ge ne ral s tarti ng and no active receive signal for
more than 50ms (flip flop function).
3-216 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.27.8 Echo Function
PSIG1:
Echo on receive PSx PSIG1:
[ * ] Echo starting
[ 019 227 ]
1 & PSIG1: PSIG1:

Op. delay echo PSx Pulse dur. echo PSx
0: Without [ * ] [ * ]
1: With
PSIG1: t 0 t PSIG1:
Receive signal ≥1 Send Echo
[ 006 036 ] [ 019 228 ]
t+1s
DIST:
Starting ≥1
[ 036 135 ]
PSIG1:
Echo started
[ 019 229 ]
&
MAIN:
CB open A EXT
[ 044 131 ]
Parameter PSIG1: PSIG1: PSIG1:

Echo on receive PSx Op. delay echo PSx Pulse dur. echo PSx
set 1 015 003 015 022 015 023
set 2 024 002 024 008 024 009
set 3 024 062 024 068 024 069
set 4 025 022 025 028 025 029
48Z9379A
Fig. 3-173: Echo function.
The conditions for activation of the echo pulse should persist for a period in
excess of the set operate time delay PSIG1: Op. delay echo PSx, and
distance protection starting is absent for the echo pulse to be activated. But if
the local CB is open, the operate delay time P SIG1: Op. de lay ech o PSx will
be bypassed to active the echo pulse without time delay. The echo pulse is then
transmitted to the remote station for the set pulse duration PSIG1: Pulse dur.
echo PS x. Thereafter, the transmission of the receive signal is blocked for the
set pulse duration + 1 s. This prevents a permanent signal from being
transmitted.
The echo function can be disabled.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-217

P438 3 Operation
3.27.9 Testing the Communication Channel
PSIG1:
Release t. send PSx
[ * ] PSIG1:
Send
[ 012 243 ]
0 t PSIG1:
Send signal
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG1: 1 PSIG1:
Test telecom. EXT ≥1 Test telecom. chann.
500ms
[ 036 038 ] [ 034 016 ]
PSIG1:
Test telecom. USER
[ 015 009 ]
0 PSIG1:
Parameter Release t. send PSx
1
set 1 015 002
0: don't execute set 2 024 001
1: execute set 3 024 061
set 4 025 021
49Z8964A
Fig. 3-174: Testing the communication channel.
The communications link can be tested. For this purpose a 500 ms send signal is
issued through a binary signal input or by a setting parameter. It is extended by
the reset time-delay of the send signal. The remote station receives this signal if
the transmission link is in order.
3-218 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.28 Auto-Reclosing Control (Function Group ARC)

After certain faults, the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) brings about
automatic reclosing of the line section that was interrupted by a protection
device.
3.28.1 Enabling and Disabling the ARC Function

The activation of the function is enabled generally (independently of parameter
subsets) via A RC : Ge ne ral en abl e USER. It is enabled as a function of a
parameter subset via ARC : En able P Sx. If these enabling functions have been
activated, the auto-reclose control function can be disabled or enabled using
setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Parameters and configured binary signal inputs have equal status. If only the
ARC : Ena ble EXT function is assigned to a binary signal input, then ARC will be
enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If
only the ARC : Disabl e EXT parameter has been assigned to a binary signal
input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-219

P438 3 Operation
ARC:
General enable USER
[ 015 060 ]
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0 ARC:
Enabled
1 [ 015 064 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 037 010
Address 037 011
ARC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 013 ]
ARC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 010 ]
ARC:
Enable USER
[ 003 134 ]
0
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ARC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 011 ]
ARC:
Disable USER
[ 003 133 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter ARC:
Enable PSx
set 1 015 046
set 2 015 047
set 3 015 048
set 4 015 049
45Z5039A
Fig. 3-175: Disabling and enabling auto-reclosing control in the P438.
ARC is ready when the following conditions are satisfied:

● Protection is activated (on).
● ARC is not blocked.
● No ARC cycle is running.
● The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB
opening and closing mechanism ready).
● The circuit breaker is in closed position. (Position scanning is optional.)
● No automatic synchronism check cycle is running.
3-220 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
ARC:
CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
[ * ]
0: Without ARC:
CB closed
1: With 303 004
MAIN:
CB closed A EXT
[ 036 051 ] ARC:
Ready
MAIN: [ 004 068 ]
Protection active
306 001
ARC:
CB drive ready EXT
[ 004 066 ]
ARC: ARC:
Blocked Not ready
[ 004 069 ] [ 037 008 ]
ASC:
Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
Parameter ARC:
ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx
Cycle running set 1 015 050
[ 037 000 ] set 2 024 024
set 3 024 084
set 4 025 044
D5Z5066A
Fig. 3-176: ARC readiness in the P438.
3.28.2 ARC Blocked

ARC will be blocked if one of the following conditions applies:
● Distance protection detects a fault in the cable section of the transmission
section.
● A manual close is carried out.
● A trip signal is present at the circuit breaker’s re-trip input (only relevant
with setting AR C : Wi th R-tr ip = 'No').
● A trip signal is present at the back-up circuit breaker / the back-up
protection device.
● A manual trip command has been issued.
● The current measured at the instant of tripping exceeds the threshold
value.
● A signal is present at the binary signal input configured to AR C: Block ing
E XT.
After all blocking conditions have dropped out, the relevant blocking time is
started, and when this time has elapsed, the block is canceled.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-221

P438 3 Operation
ARC: 1
Enabled
[ 015 064 ]
SOTF: 1 ARC:
ARC blocked Blocked
305 650 [ 004 069 ]
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ]
ARC:
Block. time int. PSx
[ * ]
0 &
1
1 t ARC:
1 Block. time running
0: No
1: Yes [ 037 004 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 1
1
[ 039 103 ]
MAIN:
R-trip signal 2
[ 039 104 ]
MAIN:
B-trip signal 1
[ 039 105 ]
MAIN:
B-trip signal 2
[ 039 106 ]
MAIN:
Man. M-trip signal 1
[ 039 081 ]
MAIN:
Man. M-trip signal 2
[ 039 084 ]
MAIN:
Man. R-trip signal 1
[ 039 082 ] ARC:
Blocked by I>
MAIN: [ 037 126 ]
Man. R-trip signal 2
[ 039 085 ]
MAIN:
Man. B-trip signal 1
[ 039 083 ]
MAIN:
Man. B-trip signal 2
[ 039 098 ]
ARC:
Block. ARC f. I> PSx
[ * ]
I̲ ARC:
Block. time ext. PSx
[ * ]
ARC: 1 t
Blocking EXT
[ 036 050 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC:

Block. ARC f. I> PSx Block. time int. PSx Block. time ext. PSx
set 1 015 104 015 043 015 058
set 2 016 104 024 021 024 032
set 3 017 104 024 081 024 092
set 4 020 104 025 041 025 052
48Z9337A
Fig. 3-177: ARC blocking in the P438.
3.28.3 ARC Tripping Times

When protection functions operating with auto-reclose control are started, the
trip times (HSR or TDR) are triggered together with operative time 1 and
operative time 2. Trip times may replace timer stages associated with the
respective protection functions if the following conditions are met:
● The protection function’s trip signal is set as a criterion for the main-trip
command or re-trip command (only relevant when ARC : With R-tr ip is
set to 'Yes').
● The trip time is not set to 'Blocked'.
● The auto-recloser is ready to operate at starting time.
● Operative time 1 or operative time 2 is running.
If the trip time has elapsed during an active auto-reclose cycle while the
operative times are still running, a trip signal from the associated function is
issued. The HSR or TDR trip time having caused the trip signal also determines
when the dead time (HSR or TDR) is to be started. Once the dead time
commences, all trip times already triggered and the operative times will be reset.
3-222 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
The beginning of the following starts or input signals trigger the trip times,
provided that the starting conditions are met and the respective trip times are
not "blocked":
● D IS T: Z 1 (Z1,ze ) s tarti ng
● DI ST: Z2 st ar ting together with train start-up detection dx/dt Z2
● D IS T: Z 3 startin g together with train start-up detection dx/dt Z3
● D IST: Z4 startin g together with train start-up detection dx/dt Z4
● D ELTA : De lt a I startin g
● D TOC : St arting I>H
● DT OC : Start in g I>
● D TOC: Start in g I>>
● DTOCA : St ar ting I>
● DTOCA : St ar ting I>>
● D TOCB: St arti ng I >
● D TOC B: St art in g I >>
● ID MT: Start ing Ire f>
● IDMTA: S tartin g I ref>
● I DMTB: Start in g I ref>
● BUOC: S tart in g I >
● BUOC: S tart ing I >>
● Start by programmable logic
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-223

P438 3 Operation
MAIN:
Fct.asg. M-trip cmd1
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
Fct.asg. R-trip cmd1
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ] ARC:
Trip time HSR elaps.
303 152
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running
[ 037 005 ] ARC:
HSR-tr.DIST t1 PSx
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running [ * ]
[ 037 065 ]
DIST: DIST:
[ 039 003 ] [ 036 026 ]
DIST: DIST:
[ 039 004 ] ARC: [ 039 016 ]
HSR-tr.DIST t2S PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
t2S enable t2S elapsed
303 671
[ 039 009 ]
DIST:
Z2 starting DIST:
[ 039 005 ] Trip signal Z2/t2S
DIST: ARC: [ 039 017 ]
Z2' starting HSR-tr.DIST t2L PSx
[ 039 006 ] [ * ]
DIST:
t2L elapsed
[ 039 010 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z2/t2L
ARC: [ 039 018 ]
HSR-tr.DIST t3S PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
303 672
DIST: [ 039 143 ]
Z3 starting DIST:
ARC: [ 039 145 ]
DIST: HSR-tr.DIST t3L PSx
Z3' starting
[ 039 141 ] [ * ]
DIST:
t3L elapsed
[ 039 144 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z3/t3L
ARC: [ 039 146 ]
HSR-tr.DIST t4S PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
460 662 [ 039 047 ]
DIST:
Z4 starting DIST:
ARC: [ 039 040 ]
DIST: HSR-tr.DIST t4L PSx
Z4' starting
[ 039 043 ] [ * ]
DIST:
t4L elapsed
[ 039 048 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z4/t4L
[ 039 041 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:

HSR-tr.DIST t1 PSx HSR-tr.DIST t2S PSx HSR-tr.DIST t2L PSx HSR-tr.DIST t3S PSx HSR-tr.DIST t3L PSx HSR-tr.DIST t4S PSx HSR-tr.DIST t4L PSx
set 1 015 072 015 144 015 152 015 160 015 168 015 180 015 188
set 2 024 040 015 145 015 153 015 161 015 169 015 181 015 189
set 3 025 000 015 146 015 154 015 162 015 170 015 182 015 190
set 4 025 060 015 147 015 155 015 163 015 171 015 183 015 191 48Z9365A
Fig. 3-178: Auto-reclose trip times for distance protection HSR.
3-224 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ] ARC:
Trip time TDR elaps.
ARC: 303 153
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] ARC:
TDR-tr.DIST t1 PSx
ARC:
Oper. time 2 running [ * ]
[ 037 065 ]
DIST: DIST:
[ 039 003 ] [ 036 026 ]
DIST: DIST:
[ 039 004 ] ARC: [ 039 016 ]
TDR-tr.DIST t2S PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
303 671
[ 039 009 ]
DIST:
Z2 starting DIST:
DIST: ARC: [ 039 017 ]
Z2' starting TDR-tr.DIST t2L PSx
[ 039 006 ] [ * ]
DIST:
t2L elapsed
[ 039 010 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z2/t2L
ARC: [ 039 018 ]
TDR-tr.DIST t3S PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
303 672
DIST: [ 039 143 ]
Z3 starting DIST:
ARC: [ 039 145 ]
DIST: TDR-tr.DIST t3L PSx
Z3' starting
[ 039 141 ] [ * ]
DIST:
t3L elapsed
[ 039 144 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z3/t3L
ARC: [ 039 146 ]
TDR-tr.DIST t4S PSx
[ * ]
DIST: DIST:
460 662 [ 039 047 ]
DIST:
Z4 starting DIST:
ARC: [ 039 040 ]
DIST: TDR-tr.DIST t4L PSx
Z4' starting
[ 039 043 ] [ * ]
DIST:
t4L elapsed
[ 039 048 ]
DIST:
Trip signal Z4/t4L
[ 039 041 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:

48Z9366A
TDR-tr.DIST t1 PSx TDR-tr.DIST t2S PSx TDR-tr.DIST t2L PSx TDR-tr.DIST t3S PSx TDR-tr.DIST t3L PSx TDR-tr.DIST t4S PSx TDR-tr.DIST t4L PSx
set 1 015 073 015 148 015 156 015 164 015 172 015 184 015 192
set 2 024 041 015 149 015 157 015 165 015 173 015 185 015 193
set 3 025 001 015 150 015 158 015 166 015 174 015 186 015 194
set 4 025 061 015 151 015 159 015 167 015 175 015 187 015 195
Fig. 3-179: Auto-reclose trip times for distance protection TDR.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-225

P438 3 Operation
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
&
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ]
ARC:
Ready &
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] ARC:
C HSR-tr.DELTA tD. PSx
ARC: [ * ]
[ 037 065 ]
t 0
DELTA: ARC:
Delta I starting Trip time HSR elaps.
303 152
[ 038 060 ]
DELTA:
Trip signal
[ 038 056 ]
ARC:
C TDR-tr.DELTA tD. PSx
[ * ]
t 0
ARC:
303 153
Parameter ARC: ARC:

HSR-tr.DELTA tD. PSx TDR-tr.DELTA tD. PSx
set 1 008 192 008 196
set 2 008 193 008 197
set 3 008 194 008 198
set 4 008 195 008 199
48Z6366A
Fig. 3-180: HSR and TDR auto-reclose trip times for high impedance protection.
3-226 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n ARC:
Trip time HSR elaps.
Selected signal 303 152
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOC tI>H PSx
[ 037 005 ]
[ * ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I>H Trip signal tI>H
[ 035 022 ] [ 040 076 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOC tI> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I> tI> elapsed
[ 035 020 ] [ 040 010 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOCA tI> PSx DTOC:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ] [ 041 020 ]
DTOCA: DTOCA:
[ 130 069 ] [ 130 077 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOCA tI>>PSx DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ]
[ 130 071 ]
DTOCA: DTOCA:
Starting I>> tI>> elapsed
[ 130 070 ] [ 130 078 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOCB tI> PSx DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>>
[ * ] [ 130 072 ]
DTOCB: DTOCB:
[ 130 089 ] [ 130 097 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOCB tI>>PSx DTOCB:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ]
[ 130 091 ]
DTOCB: DTOCB:
[ 130 090 ] [ 130 098 ]
ARC: DTOCB:
HSR-tr.DTOC tI>> PSx Trip signal tI>>
[ * ] [ 130 092 ]
DTOC: DTOC:
[ 035 021 ] [ 040 106 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.IDMT kIrefPSx DTOC:
Trip signal tI>>
[ * ]
[ 040 011 ]
IDMT: IDMT:
Starting Iref> Trip signal tIref>
[ 040 080 ] [ 040 084 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.IDMTAkIrefPSx
[ * ]
IDMTA: IDMTA:
Starting Iref> tIref> elapsed
[ 130 110 ] [ 130 112 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.IDMTBkIrefPSx IDMTA:
Trip signal tIref>
[ * ] [ 130 113 ]
IDMTB:
48Z9367A
IDMTB: tIref> elapsed

Starting Iref>
[ 130 130 ] [ 130 132 ]
IDMTB:
Trip signal tIref>
[ 130 133 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:
HSR-tr.DTOC tI>H PSx
HSR-tr.DTOC tI> PSx
HSR-tr.DTOC tI>> PSx
HSR-tr.IDMT kIrefPSxHSR-tr.DTOCA tI> PSx
HSR-tr.DTOCA tI>>PSx HSR-tr.DTOCB tI>>PSx
HSR-tr.DTOCB tI> PSx HSR-tr.IDMTAkIrefPSx
HSR-tr.IDMTBkIrefPSx
set 1 015 069 015 105 015 074 015 094 015 196 015 197 015 213 015 214 015 217 015 219
set 2 024 052 020 105 020 107 020 113 020 196 020 197 020 213 020 214 020 217 020 219
set 3 024 053 021 105 021 107 021 113 021 196 021 197 021 213 021 214 021 217 021 219
set 4 024 054 022 105 022 107 022 113 023 196 023 197 023 213 023 214 023 217 023 219
Fig. 3-181: Auto-reclose trip times for DTOC and IDMT protection HSR.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-227

P438 3 Operation
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n ARC:
Selected signal 303 153
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
Oper. time 1 running ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOC tI>H PSx
[ 037 005 ]
[ * ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
DTOC: DTOC:
Starting I>H Trip signal tI>H
[ 035 022 ] [ 040 076 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOC tI> PSx
[ * ]
DTOC: DTOC:
[ 035 020 ] [ 040 010 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOCA tI> PSx DTOC:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ] [ 041 020 ]
DTOCA: DTOCA:
[ 130 069 ] [ 130 077 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOCA tI>>PSx DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ]
[ 130 071 ]
DTOCA: DTOCA:
[ 130 070 ] [ 130 078 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOCB tI> PSx DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>>
[ * ] [ 130 072 ]
DTOCB: DTOCB:
[ 130 089 ] [ 130 097 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOCB tI>>PSx DTOCB:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ]
[ 130 091 ]
DTOCB: DTOCB:
[ 130 090 ] [ 130 098 ]
ARC: DTOCB:
TDR-tr.DTOC tI>> PSx Trip signal tI>>
[ * ] [ 130 092 ]
DTOC: DTOC:
[ 035 021 ] [ 040 106 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.IDMT kIrefPSx DTOC:
Trip signal tI>>
[ * ]
[ 040 011 ]
IDMT: IDMT:
Starting Iref> Trip signal tIref>
[ 040 080 ] [ 040 084 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.IDMTAkIrefPSx
[ * ]
IDMTA: IDMTA:
Starting Iref> tIref> elapsed
[ 130 110 ] [ 130 112 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.IDMTBkIrefPSx IDMTA:
Trip signal tIref>
[ * ] [ 130 113 ]
48Z9368A
IDMTB:
IDMTB: tIref> elapsed
Starting Iref>
[ 130 130 ] [ 130 132 ]
IDMTB:
Trip signal tIref>
[ 130 133 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:
TDR-tr.DTOC tI>H PSx
TDR-tr.DTOC tI> PSx
TDR-tr.DTOC tI>> PSx
TDR-tr.IDMT kIrefPSx
TDR-tr.DTOCA tI> PSx
TDR-tr.DTOCA tI>>PSx TDR-tr.DTOCB tI>>PSx
TDR-tr.DTOCB tI> PSx TDR-tr.IDMTAkIrefPSx
TDR-tr.IDMTBkIrefPSx
set 1 015 070 015 106 015 075 015 095 015 198 015 199 015 215 015 216 015 218 015 220
set 2 024 055 020 106 020 108 020 114 020 198 020 199 020 215 020 216 020 218 020 220
set 3 024 056 021 106 021 108 021 114 021 198 021 199 021 215 021 216 021 218 021 220
set 4 024 057 022 106 022 108 022 114 023 198 023 199 023 215 023 216 023 218 023 220
Fig. 3-182: Auto-reclose trip times for DTOC and IDMT protection TDR.
3-228 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] ARC:
HSR-tr.BUOC tI> PSx
ARC: [ * ]
[ 037 065 ]
BUOC: ARC:
Starting I> Trip time HSR elaps.
[ 036 013 ] 303 152
ARC:
HSR-tr.BUOC tI>> PSx
[ * ]
BUOC: BUOC:
Starting I>> Trip signal I>
[ 036 115 ] [ 036 014 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr.BUOC tI> PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
303 153
ARC:
TDR-tr.BUOC tI>> PSx
[ * ]
BUOC:
Trip signal I>>
[ 036 116 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:

HSR-tr.BUOC tI> PSx HSR-tr.BUOC tI>> PSx TDR-tr.BUOC tI> PSx TDR-tr.BUOC tI>> PSx
set 1 015 109 015 111 015 110 015 112
set 2 020 109 020 111 020 110 020 112
set 3 022 109 021 111 021 110 021 112
set 4 023 109 022 111 022 110 022 112
48Z5357B
Fig. 3-183: Auto-reclose trip times for BUOC protection HSR and TDR.
3.28.4 Starting the ARC by Programmable Logic

This example illustrates the possible interconnection and the binary signal output
for starting the trip time using a binary signal input.
By using the programmable logic, a binary signal input with an operate delay and
an AND element is implemented. The output from the AND element must be
included in the configuration of the ‘m out of n’ selection for the main trip
command. The trip time can be triggered by the output signal AR C: St ar t by
LOGIC.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-229

P438 3 Operation
Configure List Parameter Inputs
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 e.g. LOGIC: Input 04 EXT

OR
(030 000) (034 003)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 L OGIC: Output 01 ( t)

OR
(030 004) (042 033)
AR C: Not re ady
AND NOT
(037 008)
In this example, the following list settings need to be set (see Section 6.13.5.1,
(p. 6-44)).
LOGIC:
Fct.assignm. outp. 1
[ 030 000 ]
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
ARC:
Signal 1 Fct.assignm. tLOGIC
[ 015 033 ]
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Output 1 1 out of n
t 0
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t) ARC:
Start by LOGIC
[ 037 078 ]
LOGIC:
[ 030 004 ]
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 2
[ 030 005 ]
m out of n
ARC:
Not ready
[ 037 008 ]
Output 2
LOGIC: LOGIC:
Output 02 (t) Output 02 (t)
[ 042 035 ]
48Z5366A
Fig. 3-184: Example of programmable logic in the auto-reclose control function.
3-230 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
MAIN:
[ 021 025 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2 m out of n
Signal n
Selected signal
ARC:
With R-trip
[ 015 018 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] ARC:
HSR-tr. LOGIC PSx
ARC: ARC:
Oper. time 2 running [ * ] Trip time HSR elaps.
[ 037 065 ] 303 152
t 0
ARC: ARC:
Start by LOGIC Trip signal
[ 037 078 ] [ 039 099 ]
ARC:
TDR-tr. LOGIC PSx
[ * ]
Parameter ARC: ARC:
HSR-tr. LOGIC PSx TDR-tr. LOGIC PSx
t 0
set 1 015 098 015 099 ARC:
set 2 024 110 024 122 303 153
set 3 024 160 024 172
set 4 025 110 025 122
48Z5358A
Fig. 3-185: HSR and TDR auto-reclose trip times for programmable logic.
3.28.5 Starting the ARC Cycle

When the ARC function is ready, an ARC cycle is started by one of the following
functions:
● Starting of protection functions that have a trip time configured and thus
allow reclosing.
● Starting or tripping of an external protection device, if it has been
configured accordingly (ARC: P aral le l tr ip PSx).
● A test HSR.
As the auto-reclose cycle runs, the A RC : Re ady signal is no longer taken into
account.
The auto-reclose cycle consists in:
● Dead time HSR, dead time TDR or maximum dead time is running.
● Reclaim time 1 is running.
The ARC: De f. recl .time runn. signal is issued with the last reclose command
in the auto-reclose cycle. Simultaneously the last, uninterruptible reclaim time 1
is triggered. An auto-reclose cycle is terminated when this last reclaim time 1 has
elapsed.
If there is a new protection start during the last reclaim time 1, the auto-recloser
is also blocked for the duration of the starting pulse. The A RC : Lock f.
Gen.sta rti ng signal is issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-231

P438 3 Operation
3.28.6 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)

If the starting conditions are met then any auto-recloser-relevant protection start
will trigger an auto-reclose cycle. Any start will trigger the associated trip times,
operative time 1 and operative time 2. Operative time 1 and operative time 2
have equal status when they are running. Starting conditions for an auto-reclose
cycle must be released while operative timer stages are running. This means that
the circuit breaker has opened (start and trip signals of the function have
dropped out) so that a dead time may be triggered. Which dead time is triggered
depends on which operative time has elapsed.
Voltage-independent reclosure
When the start signal is reset, operative time 1 is terminated and the HSR dead
time begins. If there is no starting during the HSR dead time, a reclose command
is issued once the HSR dead time has elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is
triggered. If there is no starting during reclaim time 1, the ARC : Reclosure
successful signal will be issued when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The auto-
reclose cycle is complete.
Voltage-dependent reclosure
Should starting conditions for an auto-reclose cycle drop out after operative time
1 has elapsed but not before operative time 2 has elapsed, the maximum dead
time (ARC : Dead time max PSx) will be triggered. With the triggering of the
maximum dead time a reclosure of the line from the far end will be expected. A
reclose command is issued and the maximum dead time is reset when the
voltage criterion (AR C: tV> PSx) is met and the associated time delay
(A RC : V> PS x) has elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is triggered. If no
start occurs during reclaim time 1, the ARC: R eclosur e successful signal will
be issued when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The auto-reclose cycle is complete.
HSR rejection
Reclaim time 1 is triggered should the circuit breaker fail to clear the fault during
the operative times. All protection timer stages are enabled again
simultaneously, provided that their trip time was not set to 'Blocked'.
If operative times elapse without the protection having reached a decision to trip,
the ARC function is ready again immediately after the relevant starting condition
has dropped out.
Unsuccessful high-speed reclosure

If the HSR does not succeed and another protection start occurs then a time-
delayed reclosure (TDR) is started if at least one TDR is permitted. If no TDR is
permitted after a HSR then the reclaim time 1 presently running is the last
reclaim time 1 of the autoreclose cycle. All trip times are reset when reclaim time
1 has elapsed.
Simultaneously all protection timer stages are enabled again. If a trip signal is
issued during the last reclaim time 1 then it will be regarded as a final trip. The
auto-reclose cycle is complete after the last reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The final
trip will trigger reclaim time 2. The auto-reclose control function remains blocked
while reclaim time 2 is running after an unsuccessful reclose attempt. Auto-
reclose blocking may be removed if one of the following conditions is met:
● Reclaim time 2 has elapsed (if it was not set to 'Blocked')
● Reclaim time 2 was reset by a setting parameter or by an appropriately
3-232 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Suppressing CB trip signals

When the A RC : C ycle run n in g signal appears, the A RC: Sig.in terr. CB trip
signal (interruption of breaker trip signal) is issued and it is reset after the final
HSR or TDR of the current auto-reclose cycle, once the close command pulse
time has elapsed. When the ARC : Bl ocked signal is issued during an auto-
reclose cycle, the signal is likewise reset immediately.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-233

P438 3 Operation
HSR successful HSR has failed
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting
[ 039 003 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DIST t1
460 670 1 1
ARC:
t1 running
460 672 6
DIST:
Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 016 ]
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] 2 2
ARC:
Dead time HSR runn.
[ 037 067 ] 3 3
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ] 7 7
ARC:
Recl. time 1 running
[ 036 042 ] 4 4
ARC:
Reclosure successful
[ 036 062 ]
ARC:
[ 036 221 ] 5
MAIN:
Final trip
[ 038 103 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: DIST: MAIN:
HSR-tr.DIST t1 PSx Operative time 1 PSx HSR dead time PSx Reclaim time 1 PSx Reclaim time 2 PSx t1 PSx Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
set 1 015 072 015 066 015 056 015 054 015 124 012 028
ARC:
set 2 024 040 024 035 024 030 024 028 015 125 012 078 No. permit. TDR PSx
set 3 025 000 024 095 024 090 024 088 015 126 013 028 [ 015 068 ]
set 4 025 060 025 055 025 050 025 048 015 127 013 078 Setting: 0
48Z5359B
Fig. 3-186: Signal sequence for a HSR with a trip during operative time 1, triggered by a trip in distance protection
zone 1.
3-234 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
HSR successful HSR has failed
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting
[ 039 003 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DIST t1
460 670 1 1
ARC:
t1 running
460 672
DIST:
Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 016 ]
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
ARC:
[ 037 065 ]
2 2
ARC:
Max. dead time runn.
[ 037 069 ] 3 3
ARC:
V> starting 4
ARC:
tV> running 5
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ] 7
ARC:
[ 036 042 ] 6 6
ARC:
[ 036 062 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: MAIN:
HSR-tr.DIST t1 PSx Operative time 2 PSx Dead time max PSx V> PSx tV> PSx Reclaim time 1 PSx Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
set 1 015 072 015 083 015 084 015 128 015 140 015 054
ARC:
set 3 025 000 025 002 025 003 015 138 015 142 024 088 [ 015 068 ]
set 4 025 060 025 062 025 063 015 139 015 143 025 048 Setting: 0
48Z5360C
Fig. 3-187: Signal sequence for a HSR with a trip during operative time 2, triggered by a trip in distance protection
zone 1.
3.28.6.1 Test HSR

Triggering a test HSR is possible only if the auto-recloser is ready. Once a test
HSR has been triggered, a trip signal of defined duration is issued. The
subsequent sequence corresponds to a successful HSR (open and reclose
command when the HSR dead time has elapsed). Once the close command pulse
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-235

P438 3 Operation
time has elapsed, further triggering during the reclaim time does not result in a
further HSR.
A test HSR can be triggered either from the front panel user interface (HMI) or
using a binary signal input and it will add an increment to the ARC: No. o f HSR
Recloses counter.
For each ‘Test HSR’ request that does not result in a HSR test, the ARC: Re ject
test HSR signal i s generated.
ARC:
Test HSR USER
[ 011 066 ]
ARC:
Test HSR
0: don't execute [ 034 023 ]
1: execute
ARC: ARC:
Test HSR EXT Reject test HSR
[ 037 017 ] [ 036 055 ]
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
48Z5361A
Fig. 3-188: Test HSR.
3.28.7 Time-Delayed Reclosure (TDR)

Multiple reclosures using TDRs are possible if the operating mode is set
accordingly. A TDR may be performed after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as
the result of the HSR. This is possible only if the setting ARC: No. permit . TDR
PSx (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero.
If the starting conditions are met then any start by a protection function
associated with the auto-recloser will trigger the associated trip times.
Simultaneously operative time 1 and operative time 2 are also triggered.
Voltage-independent reclosure
When the start signal is reset, operative time 1 is terminated and the TDR dead
time begins. If there is no starting during the TDR dead time, a reclose command
is issued once the TDR dead time has elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is
triggered. If there is no starting during reclaim time 1, the ARC: Reclosure
successful signal will be issued when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The auto-
reclose cycle is complete.
Voltage-dependent reclosure
Should starting conditions for an auto-reclose cycle drop out after operative time
1 has elapsed but not before operative time 2 has elapsed, the maximum dead
time (A RC : D ead tim e max P Sx) will be triggered. With the triggering of the
maximum dead time a reclosure of the line from the far end will be expected. A
reclose command is issued and the maximum dead time is reset when the
voltage criterion (ARC : t V> PSx) is met and the associated time delay
(ARC : V> PSx) has elapsed. Simultaneously reclaim time 1 is triggered. If no
start occurs during reclaim time 1, the A RC : Re cl osure succe ssful signal will
be issued when reclaim time 1 has elapsed. The auto-reclose cycle is complete.
TDR rejection
the operative times. All protection timer stages are enabled again
simultaneously, provided that their trip time was not set to 'Blocked'.
3-236 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
If operative times elapse without the protection having reached a trip decision,
reclaim time 1 is triggered. The auto-reclose cycle is complete when reclaim time
1 has elapsed.
Unsuccessful high-speed reclosure

If there is a new protection start during reclaim time 1 and at least one TDR is
still permitted, then reclaim time 1 is terminated and, when the trip time has
elapsed, another trip command is issued to begin a new reclosure attempt. If no
further TDR is permitted then the reclaim time 1 presently running is the last
reclaim time 1 of the auto-reclose cycle. All trip times are reset when reclaim
time 1 has elapsed. Simultaneously all protection timer stages are enabled again.
If a trip signal is issued during the last reclaim time 1 then it will be regarded as
a final trip. The auto-reclose cycle is complete after the last reclaim time 1 has
elapsed.
The final trip will trigger reclaim time 2. The auto-reclose control function
remains blocked while reclaim time 2 is running after an unsuccessful reclose
attempt. Auto-reclose blocking may be removed if one of the following conditions
is met:
● Reclaim time 2 has elapsed (if it was not set to 'Blocked')
● Reclaim time 2 was reset by a setting parameter or by an appropriately
the operative times. Simultaneously all protection timer stages are enabled
again. If operative times are elapsing without the protection having reached a
decision for a trip command, the ARC function is immediately ready again after
the relevant starting has dropped out.
Suppressing CB trip signals

When the AR C: Cy cle runn in g signal appears, the A RC : Sig.inte rr. CB trip
signal (interruption of breaker trip signal) is issued and it is reset after the final
HSR or TDR of the current auto-reclose cycle, once the close command pulse
time has elapsed. When the A RC: Block e d signal is issued during an auto-
reclose cycle, the signal is likewise reset immediately.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-237

P438 3 Operation
HSR has failed TDR has failed TDR successful
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DIST:
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting
[ 039 003 ]
ARC:
HSR-tr.DIST t1
460 670
1
ARC:
TDR-tr.DIST t1
460 671
2 2
DIST:
Trip signal Z1/t1
[ 039 016 ]
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] 3 3 3
ARC:
Dead time HSR runn.
[ 037 067 ] 4
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ] 5 5
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ] 7 7 7
ARC:
[ 036 042 ] 6 6 6
ARC:
[ 036 062 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: MAIN:
HSR-tr.DIST t1 PSx TDR-tr.DIST t1 PSx Operative time 1 PSx HSR dead time PSx TDR dead time PSx Reclaim time 1 PSx Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
set 1 015 072 015 073 015 066 015 056 015 057 015 054
ARC:
set 3 025 000 025 001 024 095 024 090 024 091 024 088 [ 015 068 ]
set 4 025 060 025 061 025 055 025 050 025 051 025 048 Setting: 2
48Z5362B
Fig. 3-189: Signal sequence of a failed HSR followed by a failed TDR and then by a final successful TDR with a trip
during operative time 1, triggered by a trip in distance protection zone 1.
3.28.8 Zone Extension

Zone extension (ZE) of impedance zone 1 of the distance protection function is
only initiated by the ARC if protective signaling is not ready.
HSR and TDR activate different zone extension factors.
3-238 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
BUOC:
Trip signal I>
[ 036 014 ]
DIST:
Trip signal ARC:
[ 036 009 ] Zone ext. f. HSR PSx
[ * ]
ARC: 1 ARC:
Recl. time 1 running Zone extension HSR
[ 036 042 ] 0: No 303 001
ARC: 1: Yes
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] Zone ext.dur. RC PSx
[ * ]
ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR 0
[ 037 007 ] ARC:
1 Zone extension RC
MAIN: 2
303 002
Close command
[ 037 009 ] 0: No
1: Following HSR
2: Following TDR
ARC:
Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
[ * ]
0
ARC:
1 Zone extension TDR
303 000
0: No
ARC:
TDR permitted 1: Yes
303 019
ARC:
Dead time TDR runn.
[ 037 003 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC:

Zone ext. f. HSR PSx Zone ext.dur. RC PSx Zone ext. f. TDR PSx
set 1 015 059 015 088 015 071
set 2 024 033 024 047 024 039
set 3 024 093 024 007 024 099
set 4 025 053 025 067 025 059
D3Z5099B
Fig. 3-190: Zone extension by ARC.
3.28.8.1 Zone Extension by kze HSR

Zone extension by the zone extension factor kze HSR is affected by the following
settings:
● Setting for A RC: Zone ext. f. HSR PSx Yes
The measuring range is extended when the ARC is ready and while
operative time 1 is elapsing.
● Setting for A RC : Zon e ext.dur. RC P Sx
o Following HSR
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is
elapsing if the close command is issued by an HSR.
o Following TDR
The measuring range is extended while the close command time is
elapsing. How the close command is triggered is not important.
If the two parameters are set for No or No, respectively, then there is no zone
extension.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-239

P438 3 Operation
3.28.8.2 Zone Extension by kze TDR

The measuring range of impedance zone 1 is extended by the zone extension
factor kze HSR after a close command is issued by the TDR function, as long as
another TDR is permitted and the setting for AR C: Zone ext. f . TDR PSx is
Yes. Zone extension is canceled during the course of the TDR dead time. If the
setting is No, there is no zone extension.
3.28.9 ARC after Trip by Thermal Overload Protection

The thermal overload protection trip signal may be included in the auto-reclose
functional sequence.
Parameter A RC : RC f. TH ER M tri p PSx must be set for a reclosure to be
effected after a thermal overload protection trip. If this parameter is set to 'Yes' a
reclose command will be issued and reclaim time 1 triggered when the thermal
overload protection trip signal is reset. In addition the following conditions apply
for a reclosure to be effected after a thermal overload protection trip:
● The thermal overload protection’s trip signal is set as a criterion for the
main-trip command or re-trip command (only relevant when ARC: Wit h R-
t rip is set to 'Yes').
3.28.10 ARC with Parallel Protection Device

The trip signal from a second protection device operating in parallel to the P438
can be included in the auto-reclose functional sequence.
In order to have a protection device, operating in parallel, trigger the ARC
function, binary signal inputs have to be configured appropriately and the
parameter ARC : Paral lel tri p PSx must be set. When this parameter is set to
'With Start ARC' the starting or the trip command issued by the protection
device, operating in parallel, is included in the auto-reclose functional sequence.
In addition the following conditions apply to have the ARC function triggered by
the protection device, operating in parallel:
● The trip signal of the parallel protection device is set as a criterion for the
main-trip command or re-trip command (only relevant when ARC : With R-
tri p is set to 'Yes').
Depending on the configured binary signal inputs, operative times are triggered
by the starting or the trip command issued by the protection device, operating in
parallel.
3-240 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Trigger with ARC: General Starting EXT Trigger with ARC: General Starting EXT
ARC:
Ready
[ 004 068 ]
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
ARC:
General starting EXT
[ 037 096 ]
MAIN:
Parallel trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
Terminated Terminated
ARC:
[ 037 005 ] 2 2
ARC:
Dead time HSR runn.
[ 037 067 ] 3 3
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ] 7 7
ARC:
[ 036 042 ]
4 4
ARC:
[ 036 062 ]
ARC:
Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: DIST: MAIN:
HSR-tr.DIST t1 PSx Operative time 1 PSx HSR dead time PSx Reclaim time 1 PSx Reclaim time 2 PSx t1 PSx Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
set 1 015 072 015 066 015 056 015 054 015 124 012 028
ARC:
set 3 025 000 024 095 024 090 024 088 015 126 013 028 [ 015 068 ]
set 4 025 060 025 055 025 050 025 048 015 127 013 078 Setting: 0
48Z5363A
Fig. 3-191: Signal sequence for a HSR with a trip during operative time 1, triggered by a trip from a protection
device, operating in parallel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-241

P438 3 Operation
ARC:
DELTA: Operative time 1 PSx
Delta I starting [ * ]
[ 038 060 ]
ARC: ARC:
Enabled Operative time 2 PSx
[ 015 064 ]
[ * ]
ARC:
Blocked
[ 004 069 ] ARC:
HSR dead time PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Z1 (Z1,ze) starting
[ 039 003 ]
DIST: ARC:
Z1'(Z1',ze) starting Dead time max PSx
[ 039 004 ] [ * ]
DIST:
Z2 starting ARC:
[ 039 005 ] No. permit. TDR PSx
DIST: [ * ]
Z2' starting
[ 039 006 ]
ARC:
DIST: TDR dead time PSx
Z3 starting [ * ]
[ 039 140 ]
DIST:
Z3' starting ARC:
[ 039 141 ] Reclaim time 1 PSx
[ * ]
DIST:
Z4 starting
[ 039 042 ] ARC:
DIST: Reclaim time 2 PSx
Z4' starting [ * ]
[ 039 043 ]
DTOC: ARC:
Starting I>H Parallel trip PSx
[ 035 022 ] [ * ]
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ] ARC:
RC f. THERM trip PSx
DTOC: [ * ]
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>
[ 130 069 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>> ARC:
[ 130 070 ] Trip signal
[ 039 099 ]
DTOCB:
Starting I> ARC:
[ 130 089 ] Cycle running
DTOCB: [ 037 000 ]
Starting I>>
[ 130 090 ] ARC:
IDMT: [ 037 005 ]
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ] ARC:
BUOC: [ 037 065 ]
Starting I>
[ 036 013 ] ARC:
Dead time HSR runn.
BUOC: [ 037 067 ]
Starting I>>
[ 036 115 ] ARC:
ARC: Max. dead time runn.
Start by LOGIC [ 037 069 ]
[ 037 078 ] ARC:
ARC: Dead time TDR runn.
Trip time HSR elaps. [ 037 003 ]
303 152
ARC:
ARC: Dead time running
Trip time TDR elaps. [ 037 002 ]
303 153
ARC:
THERM: Recl. time 1 running
Trip signal [ 036 042 ]
[ 039 020 ]
ARC:
MAIN: Recl. time 2 running
M-trip signal 1
[ 039 101 ] [ 036 221 ]
ARC: ARC:
With R-trip Def. recl.time runn.
[ 015 018 ] [ 036 228 ]
MAIN: ARC:
R-trip signal 1 Lock f. Gen.starting
[ 039 103 ] [ 036 229 ]
ARC: ARC:
General starting EXT (Re)close signal HSR
[ 037 096 ] [ 037 007 ]
MAIN: ARC:
Parallel trip EXT (Re)close signal TDR
[ 037 019 ] [ 037 006 ]
ARC:
Test HSR ARC:
[ 034 023 ] Sig.interr. CB trip
[ 036 040 ]
IDMTA:
Starting Iref> ARC:
[ 130 110 ] Reclosure successful
[ 036 062 ]
IDMTB:
Starting Iref>
[ 130 130 ]
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:
Operative time 1 PSx Operative time 2 PSx HSR dead time PSx Dead time max PSx No. permit. TDR PSx
set 1 015 066 015 083 015 056 015 084 015 068
set 2 024 035 024 042 024 030 024 043 024 037
set 3 024 095 025 002 024 090 025 003 024 097
set 4 025 055 025 062 025 050 025 063 025 057
Parameter ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC: ARC:

TDR dead time PSx Reclaim time 1 PSx Reclaim time 2 PSx Parallel trip PSx RC f. THERM trip PSx
set 1 015 057 015 054 015 124 015 053 015 176
set 2 024 031 024 028 015 125 024 027 015 177
set 3 024 091 024 088 015 126 024 087 015 178
set 4 025 051 025 048 015 127 025 047 015 179
48Z9369A
Fig. 3-192: Auto-reclose sequence.
3-242 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.28.11 ARC Counters

The following ARC signals are counted in the P438:
● Number of high-speed reclosures.
● Number of time-delayed reclosures.
The counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
ARC: + ARC:
(Re)close signal HSR No. of HSR
[ 037 007 ] R [ 004 004 ]
ARC: + ARC:
(Re)close signal TDR No. of TDR
[ 037 006 ] R [ 004 008 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ARC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 005 244 ]
ARC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 005 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
48Z6365A
Fig. 3-193: ARC Counters.
3.28.12 Start of Operative Time Using Programmable Logic
LOGIC:
[ 030 000 ]
LOGIC:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 030 001 ]
IDMT: ARC:
Trip signal tIref> Fct.assignm. tLOGIC
[ 040 084 ] [ 015 033 ]
LOGIC: 1 out of n
Output 01
t 0
ARC:
Start by LOGIC
LOGIC: [ 037 078 ]
Output 01 (t)
MAIN:
[ 021 007 ]
m out of n
48Z93A4A
Fig. 3-194: Example: Start of the ARC operative time using output 01 of the programmable logic.
By using the assignment (015 033) A RC: Fct.ass ignm. tL OGIC, additional
user-specific conditions for starting an ARC cycle can easily be defined within the
programmable logic.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-243

P438 3 Operation
All internal signals (for example an IDMT trip signal or a ground fault direction
determination decision) and all external conditions fed in by means of binary
input signals are available for that purpose (unless for the latter the equivalent
signal (037 096) AR C: Gen er al s tarti ng EXT is to be used). With the logical
operators and time stages of the programmable logic, even complex
dependencies can be realized.
Under the precondition that the auto-reclosing control function (ARC) is ready,
the ARC operative time is started as soon as the assigned logical output enters
the active state.
Note that this signal assignment does not automatically lead to a trip. A trip has
to be defined separately in the programmable logic. In the simplest case, this can
be achieved by linking the logical signal (with or without an appropriate delay) to
the general trip command 1. Solely the successful execution of this trip
command (more precisely, the raise and termination of the general trip signal 1
prior to the operative time 1 or 2 have elapsed) lead to the start of the dead
time.
The example in Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-243) illustrates a possible configuration.
In general, any equation within the programmable logic function can be used to
start the ARC tripping time.
3-244 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.29 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)

The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the P438 to verify that
before a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between system
sections that are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the system
sections is de-energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages –
generally the supply caternary voltage and reference voltage – are compared for
differences in frequency, angle, and voltage.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-245

P438 3 Operation
3.29.1 Disabling and Enabling the ASC Function
ASC:
General enable USER
[ 018 000 ]
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0 ASC:
Enabled
1 [ 018 024 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 037 049
Address 037 061
ASC:
Ext./user enabled
[ 037 092 ]
ASC:
Enable EXT
[ 037 049 ]
ASC:
Enable USER
[ 003 136 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
Disable EXT
[ 037 061 ]
ASC:
Disable USER
[ 003 135 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
Parameter ASC:
Enable PSx
set 1 018 020
set 2 018 021
set 3 018 022
set 4 018 023
19Z5232A
Fig. 3-195: Enabling/disabling the Automatic Synchronism Check function.

The function is enabled generally (independently of the parameter subsets) at
A SC : Gener al en abl e U SER. It is enabled as a function of a parameter subset
via ASC: Enable PSx. If these enabling functions have been activated, ASC can
be disabled or enabled using setting parameters or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. Parameters and configured binary signal inputs
have equal status. If only the A SC : Enable EX T function is assigned to a binary
3-246 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
signal input, then the ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal
and disabled by a negative edge. If only the A SC: Dis able E XT function has
been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no
effect.
If the ASC function is disabled an activation enable will always be issued.
3.29.2 ASC Readiness and Blocking
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip Vref EXT
[ 036 086 ]
ASC: ASC:
Blocking EXT Blocked
[ 037 048 ] [ 038 018 ]
ASC: ASC:
Enabled Ready
[ 018 024 ] [ 037 079 ]
ASC:
MAIN: Not ready
Protection active [ 037 082 ]
306 001
ASC:
Clos.rej.w.block PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Close enable w.block
305 001
0 ASC:
Close reject.w.block
1 305 002
0: No
1: Yes
ASC:
Active for HSR PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
0 Active
305 003
1
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
HSR
303 156
ASC:
Active for TDR PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
ARC:
TDR
303 006
ASC:
Manual close request
305 000
Parameter ASC: ASC: ASC:

Clos.rej.w.block PSx Active for HSR PSx Active for TDR PSx
set 1 018 003 018 001 018 002
set 2 077 032 077 030 077 031
set 3 078 032 078 030 078 031
set 4 079 032 079 030 079 031
19Z51BCA
Fig. 3-196: ASC readiness and blocking.
The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no

blocking. Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer m.c.b. was
tripped or by an appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can
specify whether closing or reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with
or without a check) when the ASC function is blocked.
The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-
delayed reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a
check.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-247

P438 3 Operation
3.29.3 Close Request
ARC:
(Re)close request ASC:
[ 037 077 ] Gen. close request
306 012
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DEV01: ASC:
Close request Manual close request
307 001
305 000
ASC:
AC effect. for DEV01
305 040
ASC:
AR close requ. USER
[ 008 238 ]
1 500ms 1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
AR Close request
[ 008 239 ]
ASC: 50ms 0
AR close request EXT 1
[ 008 236 ] 500ms
ASC: 50ms 0
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
Address 037 063
ASC:
Test AR close r.USER
[ 008 237 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1 100ms 1 1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC: ASC:
Test AR close r. EXT Test AR close requ.
[ 000 106 ] [ 008 240 ]
19Z8073A
Fig. 3-197: Close request for autoreclose control.
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC, via setting parameters, from an
appropriately configured binary signal input (A SC: Enabl.close requ.EXT), or
via a close request from the control function. Close requests via a setting
parameter, the binary signal input or the control function are accepted only if no
ARC cycle is running.
3-248 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
ARC:
(Re)close request ASC:
[ 037 077 ] Gen. close request
306 012
ARC:
Cycle running
[ 037 000 ]
DEV01: ASC:
Close request Manual close request
307 001
305 000
ASC:
305 040
ASC:
MC close requ. USER
[ 018 004 ]
1 500ms 1
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC:
MC Close request
[ 034 018 ]
ASC: 50ms 0
MC Close request EXT 1
[ 037 062 ] 500ms
ASC: 50ms 0
Enabl.close requ.EXT
[ 037 063 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ 152 xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U x4
U xx
Address 037 063
ASC:
Test MC close r.USER
[ 018 005 ]
ASC:
Test
305 004
0
1 100ms 1 1
500ms
0: don't execute
1: execute
ASC: ASC:
Test MC close r. EXT Test MC close requ.
[ 037 064 ] [ 034 019 ]
19Z8072A
Fig. 3-198: Close request for manual close command.
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is
issued before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued.
Otherwise an A SC : C lose r e j ecti on signal is generated for 100 ms.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-249

P438 3 Operation
Close enable Close reject
ASC: ASC:
Cycle running Cycle running
[ 038 019 ] [ 038 019 ]
ASC: ASC:
Gen. close request Gen. close request
ASC: ASC:
Operat.time running Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ] [ 037 093 ]
① ①
ASC: ASC:
Close enable Close rejection
[ 037 083 ] [ 037 086 ]
100ms
100ms
MAIN: MAIN:
Close command Close command
[ 037 009 ] [ 037 009 ]
②
① ②
ASC: MAIN:
Parameter Operative time PSx Close cmd.pulse time
[ 015 067 ]
set 1 018 010
set 2 077 034
set 3 078 034
set 4 079 034 D5Z5073C
Fig. 3-199: Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection.
ASC:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
Φ ASC:
Gen. close request Cycle running
[ 038 019 ]
ASC: ASC:
Test Close rejection
[ 037 086 ]
ASC: ASC:
Close reject.w.block Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ]
ASC:
Parameter Operative time PSx
set 1 018 010

set 2 077 034
set 3 078 034
set 4 079 034 D5Z5076B
Fig. 3-200: ASC sequence control.
3-250 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.29.4 Extended Settings for the Close Enable Conditions

The close enable conditions can now be set separately for auto-reclose control
and manual close command. This makes it possible to select different operating
modes as well as different tolerance ranges.
Close enable conditions for Auto- Close enable conditions for Manual
reclose control close command
ASC: AR op. mode PSx ASC: MC op. mode PSx

ASC : AR wit h t C B PSx A SC: MC wit h tC B P Sx
ASC : AR Op.m ode v-chk .PSx A SC: MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
ASC: AR V> volt.ch eck P Sx A SC: MC V> volt.che ck PSx
ASC: AR V< volt .che ck P Sx ASC: MC V < vol t. che ck P Sx
ASC : AR t min v-ch eck PSx A SC: MC tmin v-ch eck P Sx
AS C: AR V> sync.che ck P Sx ASC: MC V > sync.che ck PSx
ASC: AR D el ta Vmax P Sx ASC: MC De lta Vmax P Sx
ASC : AR Delt a f m ax PSx ASC: MC Del ta f max P Sx
ASC : AR D elta phi ma x P Sx ASC: MC De lta phi max P Sx
ASC: AR t min syn c.chk P Sx ASC: MC tmin sync.chk P Sx
The automatic reclosure setting parameters become active when a close request
is issued by the integrated ARC (for an RRC, HSR or TDR) or by a close request
from an external ARC device sent to the binary signal input function A SC: AR
close reque st E XT.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-251

P438 3 Operation
3.29.5 Considering the CB Close Time
yes yes
Close with tCB Δf < 10 mHz
no no
Normal mode, Asynchronous mode, Synchronous mode,

close if: close if: close if:
ΔV < ΔVmax ΔV < ΔVmax ΔV < ΔVmax
Δf < Δfmax Δf < Δfmax Δφ < Δφmax
Δφ < Δφmax for tmin,synchr. for tmin,synchr.
for tmin,synchr. within operative time. within operative time.
within operative time.
Raise close command
so that closing takes place at
Δφ = 0
(taking CB close time and
internal delays into account).
47Z1085C_EN
Fig. 3-201: Functional sequence and close conditions for the Synchronism check.
In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting ASC: AR with tCB PSx to Yes
makes it possible to consider the circuit breaker closing time when issuing a
close command.
The condition for “slightly asynchronous power systems” is given if the difference
in frequencies lies within the range of 10 mHz < Δf < Δfmax. If this condition and
the voltage condition (ΔV < ΔVmax) are met then the next point in time is
continuously calculated at which the phasors for Vref and the corresponding
voltage of the three-phase system are in phase (e.g. difference in voltage phase
angles approaches 0°). The close command, allowing for the set CB close time
M AIN: tC B, C lose is then issued sooner.
3.29.6 ASC Operating Modes

The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode
setting – (018 025) A SC: A R op. mode PSx or (000 056) ASC: MC op. mode
PSx, resp.
The following operating mode settings are possible:
● Voltage-checked (see Section 3.29.6.1, (p. 3-253))
● Synchronism-checked (see Section 3.29.6.2, (p. 3-256))
● Voltage/synchronism-checked (see Section 3.29.6.3, (p. 3-258))
3-252 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.29.6.1 Voltage-Checked Close Enable
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-checked
ASC:
AR V> volt.check PSx
3: Volt./sync.-checked [ * ]
V̲A
Vref
ASC:
AR V< volt.check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
AR tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx
[ * ]
1: Vref but not V

2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
1 ASC:
100ms Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
ASC:
1 Close enable
100ms [ 037 083 ]
ARC:
HSR
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ] Parameter ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC:
AR op. mode PSx AR V> volt.check PSx AR V< volt.check PSx AR Op.mode v-chk.PSx AR tmin v-check PSx
set 1 018 025 026 017 018 017 018 029 018 018
set 2 018 026 077 043 077 040 018 030 077 041
set 3 018 027 078 043 078 040 018 031 078 041
set 4 018 028 079 043 079 040 018 032 079 041 48Z9345A
Fig. 3-202: Voltage-checked close enable for autoreclose control.
The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-

checked close enable without affecting the former.
For this purpose the voltages are monitored to determine whether they exceed
or fall below the set threshold values.
ASC : AR V> v olt .ch eck PSx ASC: MC V> vol t.ch eck P Sx
ASC : AR V< v olt .che ck P Sx A SC: MC V < volt.che ck PSx
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-253

P438 3 Operation
Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all three
phase-to-ground voltages (or – alternatively, see above – the voltage measured
at T90) need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to meet the condition
for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the set operating
mode for the voltage synchronism check are met, then the close enable is issued
after the set minimum time has elapsed.
ASC : AR t min v-check PSx A SC: MC tmin v-ch eck P Sx
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately
for each parameter subset:
● Vref but not V
● V but not Vref
● Not V and not Vref
● Not V or not Vref
● N V&Vref or V&n Vref
3-254 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
Active
305 003
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ]
1: Voltage-checked
ASC:
MC V> volt.check PSx
3: Volt./sync.-checked [ * ]
V̲A
Vref
ASC:
MC V< volt.check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
MC tmin v-check PSx
[ * ]
ASC:
MC op.mode v-chk.PSx
[ * ]
1: Vref but not V

2: V but not Vref
3: Not V and not Vref
4: Not V or not Vref
6: N V&Vref or V&n Vref
1 ASC:
100ms Close enable,volt.ch
[ 037 085 ]
ASC:
1 Close enable
100ms [ 037 083 ]
ARC:
HSR
ASC:
Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ] Parameter ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC:
MC op. mode PSx MC V> volt.check PSx MC V< volt.check PSx MC op.mode v-chk.PSx MC tmin v-check PSx
set 1 000 056 000 064 000 068 000 060 000 072
set 2 000 057 000 065 000 069 000 061 000 073
set 3 000 058 000 066 000 070 000 062 000 074
set 4 000 059 000 067 000 071 000 063 000 075 48Z9346A
Fig. 3-203: Voltage-checked close enable for manual close control.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-255

P438 3 Operation
3.29.6.2 Synchronism-Checked Close Enable
ASC: &
Active
ASC:
AR op. mode PSx
[ * ] ASC:
c AR V> sync.check PSx
↗ 2: Sync.-checked ≥1 [ * ]
↗ 3: Volt./sync.-checked
V̲A
ASC:
Vref AR tmin sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
& t 0 1 ASC:
100ms Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
t1 t2
ASC: >
Test
ASC:
>R Volt. magnit. diff.
ASC:
c AR Delta Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ] ASC:
>R Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ΔVmax ASC:
>R Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC:
◄
◄ c AR Delta f max PSx
[ * ]
c
Δfmax
ASC:
Parameter AR op. mode PSx
φ
set 1 018 025
◄
◄ set 2 018 026
set 3 018 027
ASC: ASC: set 4 018 028
Phi offset PSx AR Delta phi max PSx
[ * ] [ * ] ASC:
Parameter AR V> sync.check PSx
φ - φcorr Δφmax set 1 018 011

set 2 077 035
set 3 078 035
set 4 079 035
ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC:
Parameter AR tmin sync.chk PSx AR Delta Vmax PSx AR Delta f max PSx Phi offset PSx AR Delta phi max PSx
set 1 018 015 018 012 018 014 018 034 018 013
set 2 077 039 077 036 077 038 077 042 077 037
set 3 078 039 078 036 078 038 078 042 078 037
set 4 079 039 079 036 079 038 079 042 079 037
48Z9347A
Fig. 3-204: Synchronism-checked close enable for auto-reclose control.
3-256 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Before a close enable signal is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for
synchronism. Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
● The measuring voltage and the reference voltage must exceed the set
threshold value.
ASC : A R V> syn c.ch eck PSx A SC : MC V > sync.ch eck P Sx
● The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference

voltage must not exceed the set threshold value.
ASC : AR Delt a V max P Sx A SC: MC D el ta V max PSx
● The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference

voltage must not exceed the set threshold value.
ASC : AR Delt a f m ax PSx A SC: MC D elta f max PSx
● The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage

must not exceed the set threshold value. (In these comparisons the set
offset angle A SC: Ph i offs e t PSx is taken into account.)
ASC : AR Delt a phi max P Sx ASC: MC Del ta ph i max PSx
If these conditions are met for at least the set time A SC : A R tmin s ync.chk
PS x or AS C: MC t min sync.ch k P Sx, respectively, then a close enable signal
is issued. The ASC operating time for the determination of differences in voltage,
angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are
stored as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. In
the event of another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the
new data.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-257

P438 3 Operation
ASC: &
Active
ASC:
MC op. mode PSx
[ * ] ASC:
cMC V> sync.check PSx
↗ 2: Sync.-checked ≥1 [ * ]
↗ 3: Volt./sync.-checked
V̲A
ASC:
Vref MC tmin sync.chk PSx
[ * ]
& t 0 1 ASC:
100ms Close enable,sync.ch
[ 037 084 ]
t1 t2
ASC: >
Test
ASC:
>R Volt. magnit. diff.
ASC:
c MC Delta Vmax PSx [ 004 091 ]
[ * ] ASC:
>R Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
ΔVmax ASC:
>R Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC:
◄
◄ c MC Delta f max PSx
[ * ]
c
Δfmax
ASC:
Parameter MC op. mode PSx
φ
set 1 000 056
◄
◄ set 2 000 057
set 3 000 058
ASC: ASC: set 4 000 059
Phi offset PSx MC Delta phi max PSx
[ * ] [ * ] ASC:
Parameter MC V> sync.check PSx
φ - φcorr Δφmax set 1 000 052

set 2 000 053
set 3 000 054
set 4 000 055
ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC: ASC:
Parameter MC tmin sync.chk PSx MC Delta Vmax PSx MC Delta f max PSx Phi offset PSx MC Delta phi max PSx
set 1 000 098 000 080 000 084 018 034 000 089
set 2 000 099 000 081 000 086 077 042 000 091
set 3 000 100 000 082 000 087 078 042 000 092
set 4 000 101 000 083 000 088 079 042 000 093
48Z9348A
Fig. 3-205: Synchronism-checked close enable for manual close command.
3.29.6.3 Voltage/Synchronism-Checked Close Enable

If this setting has been selected, then the close enable signal is issued if the
conditions for voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
3-258 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.29.7 Testing the ASC Function
Close enable Close reject
ASC: ASC:
Cycle running Cycle running
[ 038 019 ] [ 038 019 ]
ASC: ASC:
Gen. close request Gen. close request
ASC: ASC:
Operat.time running Operat.time running
[ 037 093 ] [ 037 093 ]
① ①
ASC: ASC:
Close enable Close enable
[ 037 083 ] [ 037 083 ]
② ② ②
ASC: ASC:
Close rejection Close rejection
[ 037 086 ] [ 037 086 ]
100ms
① ②
ASC:
Parameter Operative time PSx ≥ 100 ms
set 1 018 010
set 2 077 034
set 3 078 034
set 4 079 034 19Z5230B
Fig. 3-206: ASC sequence during testing.
For test purposes a close request can be issued via a setting parameters or an
appropriately configured binary signal input (see Fig. 3-206, (p. 3-259)). In this
case no close command is issued and it is not counted.
Separate triggering parameters are available for testing the function with
parameters for manual (MC) and automatic (AR) reclosure.
Triggering parameter for auto-reclose Triggering parameter for manual close

control command
ASC: AR close re qu. USER ASC: MC close re qu . USER

AS C: A R close re que st E XT ASC: MC Close re qu es t EXT
ASC : AR C lose requ es t ASC: MC Cl ose reque st
ASC : Test AR close r.USER ASC: Te st MC close r.USER
ASC: Test AR clos e r. EXT ASC: Te st MC close r. EXT
ASC: Test AR clo se re qu . A SC: Test MC close re qu.
The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request.
The network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and
ASC: C lose en abl e is set accordingly. If at the end of the operate time no
network synchronism is registered, a 100 ms signal ASC : C lose r ejection is
issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-259

P438 3 Operation
3.29.8 Integrating the ASC Function into the Control and Monitoring of
Switchgear Units
ASC:
Enabled
[ 018 024 ]
ASC:
CB assignment PSx
[ * ]
No assignment
DEV01
DEV02
DEV03
DEVxx ASC:
305 040
Sel. DEV01
ASC:
Close enable DEV01
305 041
ASC:
Close enable
[ 037 083 ]
ASC:
System integrat. PSx
[ * ]
2
1: Autom.synchron.check
2: Autom.synchr.control
Parameter ASC: ASC:

CB assignment PSx System integrat. PSx
set 1 037 131 037 135
set 2 037 132 037 136
set 3 037 133 037 137
set 4 037 134 037 138
12Z51BGB
Fig. 3-207: Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units.
ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible.
This requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that
the ASC system integration is set to Autom.synchr.control. If the control function
issues a close request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires
the ASC : Cl ose enable (see Section 3.43.6.6, (p. 3-345)).
However if AS C: Syst e m inte grat. PSx is set to Autom.synchron.check ASC
will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and
continuously updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations
have been set accordingly – to the central control station, where operators may
make decisions as to which external device is to be given a switching command.
3-260 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.29.9 Measured Values Obtained by ASC
ASC:
Transm.cycle,meas.v.
[ 101 212 ]
ASC:
Cycle running c
[ 038 019 ]
ASC:
Voltage Vref
[ 004 087 ]
ASC:
Volt. magnit. diff.
[ 004 091 ]
ASC:
Angle difference
[ 004 089 ]
ASC:
Frequ. difference
[ 004 090 ]
48Z9349A
Fig. 3-208: Measured values obtained by ASC.
The following measured values are obtained and calculated during an ASC cycle
and are transmitted during a set cycle time:
● Voltage from the reference voltage channel
● Difference in phase voltage magnitudes
● Difference in phase angles
● Frequency difference
Outside of the ASC cycle the measured values have the status of Not measured.
3.29.10 ASC Counters
ASC: >S
Manual close request 11 & >+
1 ASC:
>R No. RC aft. man.clos
>R
MAIN: [ 004 009 ]
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
ASC: >+
Gen. close request ASC:
>R No. close requests
[ 009 033 ]
ASC: >+
Close rejection ASC:
No. close rejections
[ 037 086 ] >R
[ 009 034 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
↗ 1: execute ≥1
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
ASC:
Reset counters EXT
[ 006 074 ]
ASC:
Reset counters USER
[ 003 089 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute 47Z1377B
Fig. 3-209: ASC counters.
The following ASC signals are counted:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-261

P438 3 Operation
● Number of reclosures after a close request via setting parameters or an

appropriately configured binary signal input
● Number of close requests
● Number of close rejections
The counters can either be reset individually (at the address at which they are
displayed) or as a group.
3-262 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.30 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group

DTOC)
A three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC) can be
enabled concurrently with distance protection.
Stage I>H can be used as an instantaneous high-current stage. Stages I> and
I>> can optionally be operated in directional mode.
Inrush stabilization and harmonic blocking block the selected DTOC overcurrent
stages (see Section 3.13.4, (p. 3-107) and Section 3.13.5, (p. 3-109)).
3.30.1 Enabling or Disabling DTOC Protection

DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled via parameter settings. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter subset.
DTOC:
General enable USER
[ 031 068 ]
0
DTOC:
1 Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOC:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter DTOC:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 072 098
1 set 2 073 098
set 3 074 098
0: No set 4 075 098
1: Yes
45Z8089A
Fig. 3-210: Disabling or enabling DTOC protection.
3.30.2 Current Measurement

Definite-time overcurrent protection measures the current I to determine
whether it exceeds the set thresholds.
Stage I>H can be used as an instantaneous high-current stage. In this case, it
operates if two consecutive sampled values (instantaneous values) exceed the
operate threshold. If the high break output relays are employed, a tripping time
≤ 3 ms can be achieved (otherwise, the contact closure time must be added).
When a timer stage operates and the set operate delays have elapsed, signals
are issued and can be used as criteria for fault recording or tripping. The timer
stages connected in series to the triggers can be blocked by way of appropriately
configured binary signal inputs.
Depending on the settings for the MA IN: Fun ct. Rush res t r. PSx or
MAI N: Fun ct.Har m.block. PSx parameters, starting decisions can be
cancelled when the inrush or harmonic blocking is detected.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-263

P438 3 Operation
DTOC:
Enabled
[ 040 120 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 041 060 ]
MAIN:
Protection active DTOC: DTOC:
306 001 I> PSx tI> PSx DTOC:
Trip signal tI>
[ * ] [ * ]
[ 041 020 ]
DTOC:
tI> elapsed
I̲
[ 040 010 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI>> EXT
[ 041 061 ] DTOC: DTOC:
I>> PSx tI>> PSx DTOC:
[ * ] Trip signal tI>>
[ * ]
[ 040 011 ]
DTOC:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 106 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC:
Blocking tI>H EXT
[ 041 062 ]
DTOC: DTOC:
I>H PSx tI>H PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
DTOC:
Trip signal tI>H
[ 040 076 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>H
MAIN:
Inrush stabil. trigg [ 035 022 ]
306 014
MAIN:
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
Parameter DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC:

I> PSx I>> PSx I>H PSx tI> PSx tI>> PSx tI>H PSx
set 1 072 007 072 008 072 009 072 019 072 020 072 021
set 2 073 007 073 008 073 009 073 019 073 020 073 021
set 3 074 007 074 008 074 009 074 019 074 020 074 021
set 4 075 007 075 008 075 009 075 019 075 020 075 021
48Z9361A
Fig. 3-211: Definite-time overcurrent protection (without short-circuit direction determination).
3.30.3 Direction Measurement

The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled at
DTOC: D irect ion m eas ur e m.. All settings relevant to short-circuit direction
determination can be set separately for stages I> and I>>. When a starting
signal is issued by I> or I>> and the measured voltage level has dropped below
the value for V< the fault angle ϕ is calculated and the short-circuit direction is
determined. The short-circuit characteristic is defined by the angles β and γ. The
algorithm decides that the fault direction is forward when the calculated angle ϕ
lies within the range given by γ ≤ ϕ ≤ β.
In order for direction measurement to function correctly, even at very small fault
voltage values, the information stored in the voltage memory is also put to use in
these cases.
Using the D TOC : Timer Start tI> PSx and DTOC : Timer Start tI>> PSx
settings, it is possible to select separately for each stage whether the timer stage
is started with the triggering of current thresholds I> or I>> or, additionally, with
a directional signal. The starting signal for each stage is formed according to the
starting conditions selected for the timer stages.
The direction determination and the starting of the respective stage are only
enabled if the measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage
3-264 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
threshold V<. Setting the undervoltage threshold V< to Blocked will disable this
voltage scan and tripping will be permanently enabled.
● VF > 0.1 Vn
measured fault voltage Vf.
● VF < 0.1 Vn
Voltage memory enabled:
voltage values stored in the voltage memory.
Voltage memory not enabled:
measured fault voltage down to a minimum value of 1 V. If the fault voltage
drops to a value of less than approximately 1 V, an accurate direction
determination is no longer possible. In this case, a Fault forward decision is
issued - independently of the actual fault direction.
Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage-measuring
circuit will either lead to the DTOC protection operating non-directionally or to it
becoming blocked.
The starting direction may be freely set.
3.30.4 Load Flow Direction
Forward direction
Backward direction V̲
I̲
68Z50ABB
Fig. 3-212: Example of a fault direction determination characteristic.
Load flow direction determination is active when no short-circuit direction

determination has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded the load angle ϕ is
calculated and the load flow direction is determined according to the short-circuit
characteristic selected.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-265

P438 3 Operation
The load flow direction is displayed for as long as there is no fault (short-circuit)
condition apparent, which would be characterized by the starting of the current
stages and the enabling of the undervoltage stage.
DTOC:
Timer Start tI> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: With starting
DTOC: 2: With direction
Blocking tI> EXT DTOC:
C tI> PSx
[ 041 060 ]
DTOC: [ * ]
Enabled DTOC:
[ 040 120 ] C I> PSx
DTOC:
MAIN: [ * ] tI> elapsed
Protection active [ 040 010 ]
306 001
I̲ DTOC:
Starting I>
[ 035 020 ]
DTOC:
Direction I> forw.
402 412
DTOC:
Direction I> backw.
402 413 DTOC:
DTOC: I> triggered
Trip I> Non-direct. 310 049
402 414 DTOC:
DTOC: Trip signal tI>
Direction measurem. [ 041 020 ]
[ 031 131 ]
0: Without
DTOC:
Timer Start tI>> PSx
[ * ]
1
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
DTOC: DTOC:
Blocking tI>> EXT C tI>> PSx
[ 041 061 ] [ * ]
DTOC:
C I>> PSx
DTOC:
[ * ] tI>> elapsed
[ 040 106 ]
DTOC:
Starting I>>
[ 035 021 ]
DTOC:
Direction I>> forw.
402 415 DTOC:
DTOC: I>> triggered
Direction I>> backw. 310 050
402 416 DTOC:
DTOC: Trip signal tI>>
Trip I>> Non-direct.
402 417 [ 040 011 ]
MAIN:
306 014
MAIN:
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
Parameter DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC:

Timer Start tI> PSx I> PSx tI> PSx Timer Start tI>> PSx I>> PSx tI>> PSx
set 1 071 146 072 007 072 019 072 245 072 008 072 020
set 2 071 147 073 007 073 019 073 044 073 008 073 020
set 3 071 148 074 007 074 019 074 044 074 008 074 020
set 4 071 149 075 007 075 019 075 044 075 008 075 020
48Z9362A
Fig. 3-213: Definite-time overcurrent protection (incl. short-circuit direction determination).
3-266 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MCMON: <1V
Meas. circ. V faulty DTOC:
Direct. using Vmeas
[ 038 023 ] [ 036 137 ]
V̲
< 0.1 Vnom
DTOC:
DTOC: [ 036 136 ]
Beta (I>) PSx
[ * ]
>0.05 Inom DTOC:
Gamma (I>) PSx
[ * ]
C1
I̲
C2
φF DTOC:
Φ 1
Fault I> forward
[ 035 137 ]
φS
Φ 2 DTOC:
V̲(memory) Fault I> backward
[ 035 140 ]
DTOC: 30 ms 0
Direction I> forw. DTOC:
Power flow I>forw.
MAIN: [ 035 223 ]
Vmemory enable DTOC:
Direction I> backw. 30 ms 0 DTOC:
310 057 Power flow I>backw.
DTOC: [ 035 224 ]
I> triggered
310 049
DTOC:
DTOC: I> Forw. w/o meas.
V < V< (I>) DTOC: [ 041 198 ]
403 410 Beta (I>>) PSx
[ * ]
DTOC:
V ≥ Vmin (I>) DTOC:
Gamma (I>>) PSx
402 418 [ * ]
C1
C2
DTOC:
Φ 1 Fault I>> forward
[ 035 147 ]
Φ 2 DTOC:
Fault I>> backward
[ 035 148 ]
DTOC: 30 ms 0 DTOC:
Direction I>> forw. Power flow I>>forw.
[ 035 227 ]
DTOC:
Direction I>> backw. 30 ms 0 DTOC:
Power flow I>>backw.
DTOC: [ 035 228 ]
I>> triggered
310 050
DTOC:
DTOC: I>> Forw. w/o meas.
V < V< (I>>)
403 411 [ 041 199 ]
DTOC:
V ≥ Vmin (I>>)
402 419
Parameter DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC:

Beta (I>) PSx Gamma (I>) PSx Beta (I>>) PSx Gamma (I>>) PSx
set 1 076 068 076 073 076 069 076 074
set 2 077 068 077 073 077 069 077 074
set 3 078 068 078 073 078 069 078 074
set 4 079 068 079 073 079 069 079 074
48Z9363A
Fig. 3-214: Fault direction determination.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-267

P438 3 Operation
DTOC:
Vmin (I>) PSx
[ * ]
V̲ DTOC:
V ≥ Vmin (I>)
402 418
DTOC:
Mode V<Vmin (I>) PSx
[ * ]
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
DTOC:
Mode w/o V (I>) PSx
DTOC:
[ * ] Meas. I> non-direct.
[ 035 077 ]
1 DTOC:
Dir.meas. I> blocked
[ 035 080 ]
2
1: Non-directional
2: Blocked
DTOC: DTOC:
V< (I>) PSx Direction (I>) PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
V̲
2
3
Setting blocked
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
DTOC:
Direction I> forw.
402 412
DTOC:
Fault I> forward
[ 035 137 ]
DTOC:
Direction I> backw.
DTOC: 402 413
Fault I> backward
[ 035 140 ]
DTOC:
Trip I> Non-direct.
402 414
DTOC:
V < V< (I>)
403 410
Parameter DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC: DTOC:

Vmin (I>) PSx Mode V<Vmin (I>) PSx Mode w/o V (I>) PSx V< (I>) PSx Direction (I>) PSx
set 1 076 157 076 113 076 128 076 131 076 080
set 2 077 157 077 113 077 128 077 131 077 080
set 3 078 157 078 113 078 128 078 131 078 080
set 4 079 157 079 113 079 128 079 131 079 080
48Z93A7
Fig. 3-215: Determining the starting direction for stage I> (also valid for stage I>>).
3-268 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.31 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups

DTOCA and DTOCB)
These function groups provide a definite time current (IA, IB) supervision in the
operating mode “Autotransformer feed". If the operating mode is set to “Classic
single feed” or “Single feed w. sum I” both function groups are inactive.
The DTOC function group is always available. In all the operating modes, it
supervises the total current independently of the DTOCA and DTOCB function
groups.
The DTOCA (DTOCB) protection function provides two definite-time overcurrent
protection stages.
3.31.1 Enabling and Disabling the DTOCA and DTOCB Functions

DTOCA (DTOCB) protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
DTOCA (DTOCB) protection is ready when it is activated, enabled, unblocked and
in the Autotransformer feed operating mode.
DTOCA:
General enable USER
[ 130 065 ]
0
DTOCA:
1 Enabled
[ 130 073 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DTOCA:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes DTOCA:
Not ready
DTOCA: [ 130 076 ]
Blocking EXT
[ 130 079 ] MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
2
Parameter DTOCA:
3 Enable PSx
set 1 130 060
set 2 131 060
2: Autotransformer feed set 3 132 060
3: Single feed w. sum I set 4 133 060 48Z9341
Fig. 3-216: Disabling, enabling and readiness in DTOCA protection. (Only DTOCA is shown; the logic, however, also
applies to DTOCB with different numerical addresses.)
3.31.2 Starting and Tripping

When the DTOCA (DTOCB) protection function is active, it monitors the current to
detect when the set thresholds are exceeded. When a stage operates and the set
time-delays have elapsed, signals are issued and can be used as criteria for fault
recording or tripping. The timer stages connected in series to the triggers can be
blocked by way of appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Depending on the settings of the MA IN: Funct .Rus h rest r.PSx or
MAIN : Funct.Harm .bl ock.PSx parameters, starting decisions issued by the
DTOCA (DTOCB) function can be cancelled when the inrush stabilization function
has detected an inrush current or harmonic blocking.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-269

P438 3 Operation
DTOCA:
Blocking tI> EXT
[ 130 066 ]
DTOCA:
Not ready
[ 130 076 ]
DTOCA: DTOCA:
Enabled DTOCA:
I> PSx tI> PSx DTOCA:
[ 130 073 ] tI> elapsed
[ * ] [ * ]
MAIN: [ 130 077 ]
Protection active
306 001
DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>
I̲A [ 130 071 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>
[ 130 069 ]
DTOCA:
Blocking tI>> EXT
[ 130 068 ]
DTOCA: DTOCA:
I>> PSx tI>> PSx DTOCA:
tI>> elapsed
[ * ] [ * ]
[ 130 078 ]
DTOCA:
Trip signal tI>>
[ 130 072 ]
DTOCA:
Starting I>>
[ 130 070 ]
MAIN:
306 014
MAIN:
Harm. blk. trigg
460 649
Parameter DTOCA: DTOCA: DTOCA: DTOCA:

set 1 130 061 130 062 130 063 130 064
set 2 131 061 131 062 131 063 131 064
set 3 132 061 132 062 132 063 132 064
set 4 133 061 133 062 133 063 133 064 48Z9342A
Fig. 3-217: Starting and tripping of the DTOCA.
3-270 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.32 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)

The P438 provides a single-stage inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
This IDMT function can be activated concurrently with the other protection
functions. Inverse overcurrent protection may optionally be operated with short-
circuit direction determination.
The inrush stabilization and harmonic blocking functions may intervene in the
functional sequence of the IDMT function.
3.32.1 Disabling and Enabling IDMT Protection

IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
IDMT:
General enable USER
[ 017 096 ]
1 IDMT:
Enabled
0: No [ 040 100 ]
1: Yes
IDMT:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter IDMT:
Enable PSx
set 1 072 000
set 2 073 000
set 3 074 000
set 4 075 000
48Z6377A
Fig. 3-218: Disabling or enabling IDMT protection.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-271

P438 3 Operation
3.32.2 Time-Dependent Characteristics

The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table below). The
measured variable is the current I. The tripping characteristics available for
selection are shown in the following figures (Fig. 3-219, (p. 3-273) to Fig. 3-222,
(p. 3-275)).
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Reset
Characteristic Characteristic
Characteristic a b c R
settable factor:
k = 0.05 ... 10.00
0 Definite Time t =k
a
Per IEC 255–3 t =k · I b
(I ) -1
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
a k ·R
Per IEEE C37.112 t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
(I )b - 1 -
1 (I )
ref ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
a k ·R
Per ANSI t = k ·( I + c) tr = I 2
b
(I ) -1 1- ( I )
ref ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
1
11 RI-Type Inverse t =k · 0.236
0.339 - I
(I )
ref
I
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse t = k · (5.8 - 1.35 · ln I )
ref
Once a ratio I/Iref greater than 20 is reached, the tripping time is bounded on the
lower end.
3-272 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEC 255–3
Characteristic 1: IEC 255–3, Standard Inverse Characteristic 2: IEC 255–3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1
k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 3: IEC 255–3, Extremely Inverse Characteristic 4: IEC 255–3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Fig. 3-219: Tripping characteristics as per IEC 255-3.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-273

P438 3 Operation
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per IEEE C37.112
Characteristic 5: IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse Characteristic 6: IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 7: IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-220: Tripping characteristics as per IEEE C37.112.
3-274 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
IDMT Tripping Characteristics per ANSI
Characteristic 8: ANSI, Normally Inverse Characteristic 9: ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 k=0.1
k=0.05
I/Iref I/Iref
Characteristic 10: ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref
Fig. 3-221: Tripping characteristics as per ANSI.
IDMT Tripping Characteristics, RI-Type Inverse and RXIDG-Type Inverse
Characteristic 11: RI-Type Inverse Characteristic 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse

1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s

k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.05 k=0.1
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
I/Iref I/Iref
Fig. 3-222: RI-type inverse and RXIDG‑type inverse tripping characteristics.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-275

P438 3 Operation
3.32.3 Determining Trip Time

The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds an adjustable threshold. The
IDMT protection function is triggered if 1.05 times the set current reference is
exceeded. The P438 will determine the trip time according to the set
characteristic and the current level value. Additionally, a minimum trip time can
be set, independently of the current level, which will in no case be under-run.
The inverse time-delayed stage may be blocked using an appropriately
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IDMT:
Enabled
[ 040 100 ]
IDMT:
Iref PSx
[ * ]
1.05 Iref
I̲ IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Characteristic PSx
IDMT: [ * ]
Block. tIref> EXT
[ 040 101 ] IDMT:
MAIN: Char. factor kt PSx
Inrush stabil. trigg [ * ]
306 014
MAIN: IDMT:
Harm. blk. trigg Min. trip time PSx
460 649 [ * ]
IDMT:
Hold time PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Reset PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Memory clear
[ 040 110 ]
IDMT:
Hold time running
I/Iref [ 040 053 ]
IDMT:
tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
IDMT:
Trip signal tIref>
[ 040 084 ]
Setting
IDMT:
Characteristic PSx
0: Definite Time
1: IEC Standard Inverse
2: IEC Very Inverse
3: IEC Extr. Inverse
4: IEC Long Time Inv.
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
6: IEEE Very Inverse
7: IEEE Extremely Inv. Setting
8: ANSI Normally Inv. IDMT:
9: ANSI Short Time Inv. Reset PSx
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse 1: Without delay
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse 2: Delayed as per char.
Parameter IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT:

Iref PSx Characteristic PSx Char. factor kt PSx Min. trip time PSx Hold time PSx Reset PSx
set 1 072 050 072 056 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
set 2 073 050 073 056 073 053 073 077 073 071 073 059
set 3 074 050 074 056 074 053 074 077 074 071 074 059
set 4 075 050 075 056 075 053 075 077 075 071 075 059
48Z9364A
Fig. 3-223: Inverse-time overcurrent protection.
3-276 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.32.4 Direction Measurement

The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled at I DMT: Direct ion
mea surem.. When a starting signal is issued and the measured voltage level
has dropped below the value for V<, the fault angle ϕ is calculated and the fault
direction is determined. The short-circuit characteristic is defined by the angles β
and γ. The software decides that the fault direction is ”forward“ when the
calculated angle ϕ lies within the range given by γ ≤ ϕ ≤ β.
In order for direction measurement to function correctly, even at very small fault
voltage values, the information stored in the voltage memory is also put to use in
these cases.
The setting at I DMT: Ti mer Sta. tIre f >PSx defines whether the timer stage is
started when IDMT protection is triggered or, if a directional signal is also
required. The starting signal is also formed according to the starting conditions.
The direction determination and the starting of the respective stage are only
enabled if the measured voltage value is below a settable undervoltage
threshold V<. Setting the undervoltage threshold V< to Blocked will disable this
voltage scan and tripping will be permanently enabled.
● VF > 0.1 Vn
measured fault voltage Vf.
● VF < 0.1 Vn
Voltage memory enabled:
voltage values stored in the voltage memory.
Voltage memory not enabled:
measured fault voltage down to a minimum value of 1 V. If the fault voltage
drops to a value of less than approximately 1 V, an accurate direction
determination is no longer possible. In this case, a Fault forward decision is
issued - independently of the actual fault direction.
Another setting is used to determine whether a failure of the voltage-measuring
circuit will either lead to the protection operating non-directionally or to it
becoming blocked.
The starting direction may be freely set.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-277

P438 3 Operation
3.32.5 Load Flow Direction

Load flow direction determination is active when no short-circuit direction
determination has been enabled.
When a permanent current enable value is exceeded the load angle ϕ is
calculated and the load flow direction is determined according to the short-circuit
characteristic selected.
The load flow direction is displayed for as long as there is no fault (short-circuit)
condition apparent, which would be characterized by the starting of the current
stages and the enabling of the undervoltage stage.
Forward direction
Backward direction V̲
I̲
68Z50ABB
Fig. 3-224: Example of a fault direction determination characteristic.
3-278 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
IDMT: IDMT:
C Iref PSx Timer Sta. tIref>PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
1.05 Iref
2
1: With starting
2: With direction
IDMT:
Enabled C
[ 040 100 ]
IDMT:
MAIN: Starting Iref>
Protection active
[ 040 080 ]
306 001
I̲
MAIN:
306 014
IDMT:
Forwards trip
307 104
IDMT:
Backwards trip IDMT:
307 105 Iref> triggered
310 038
IDMT:
Non-directional trip
307 106
IDMT:
Direction measurem. IDMT:
[ 017 109 ] Characteristic PSx
[ * ]
0: Without
IDMT:
Char. factor kt PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
IDMT: Min. trip time PSx
Block. tIref> EXT [ * ]
[ 040 101 ]
IDMT:
Setting Hold time PSx
IDMT: [ * ]
Characteristic PSx C
IDMT:
Reset PSx
0: Definite Time [ * ]
2: IEC Very Inverse C
4: IEC Long Time Inv. IDMT:
5: IEEE Moderately Inv. Memory clear
6: IEEE Very Inverse I/Iref [ 040 110 ]
7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
8: ANSI Normally Inv. IDMT:
Hold time running
9: ANSI Short Time Inv. [ 040 053 ]
10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
11: RI-Type Inverse IDMT:
12: RXIDG-Type Inverse tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
IDMT:
Setting Trip signal tIref>
IDMT: [ 040 084 ]
Reset PSx
1: Without delay
2: Delayed as per char.
Parameter IDMT: IDMT:

Iref PSx Timer Sta. tIref>PSx
set 1 072 050 006 061
set 2 073 050 006 062
set 3 074 050 006 063
set 4 075 050 006 064
Parameter IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT: IDMT:

Characteristic PSx Char. factor kt PSx Min. trip time PSx Hold time PSx Reset PSx
set 1 072 056 072 053 072 077 072 071 072 059
set 2 073 056 073 053 073 077 073 071 073 059
set 3 074 056 074 053 074 077 074 071 074 059
set 4 075 056 075 053 075 077 075 071 075 059
48Z6375A
Fig. 3-225: IDMT protection (including short-circuit direction determination).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-279

P438 3 Operation
MCMON: < 1 V IDMT:

Meas. circ. V faulty Direct. using Vmeas
[ 038 023 ] [ 041 015 ]
V̲
< 0. 1 Vnom
IDMT:
[ 041 014 ]
IDMT:
Beta PSx
[ * ]
> 0. 05 Inom IDMT:
Gamma PSx
[ * ]
C1
I̲
C2
IDMT:
K Φ1 Fault forward
[ 041 008 ]
IDMT:
S Φ2 Fault backward
V̲(memory) [ 041 009 ]
IDMT:
Forward direction 30 ms 0 Power flow forward
[ 041 017 ]
MAIN: Backward direction IDMT:

Vmemory enable 30 ms 0 Power flow backward
305 049 [ 041 018 ]
IDMT:
Iref> triggered
310 038 IDMT:
Forw. w/o measurem.
IDMT: [ 041 189 ]
V < V<
307 108
*
Parameter IDMT: IDMT:
Beta PSx Gamma PSx
set 1 072 046 072 047
set 2 073 046 073 047
set 3 074 046 074 047
set 4 075 046 075 047
48Z6376A
Fig. 3-226: Fault direction determination.
3-280 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MCMON:
[ 038 023 ]
IDMT:
Mode w/o voltage PSx
[ * ]
IDMT:
Meas.non-directional
1 [ 041 007 ]
2 IDMT:
Dir. meas. blocked
1: Non-directional
[ 041 006 ]
2: Blocked
IDMT: IDMT:
V< PSx Direction (I>) PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
1
V̲
2
3
Setting blocked
1: Forward directional
2: Backward directional
3: Non-directional
IDMT:
Forwards trip
IDMT: 307 104
Fault forward
[ 041 008 ]
IDMT:
Backwards trip
IDMT: 307 105
Fault backward
[ 041 009 ]
IDMT:
Non-directional trip
307 106
IDMT:
V < V<
307 108
*
Parameter IDMT: IDMT: IDMT:
Mode w/o voltage PSx V< PSx Direction (I>) PSx
set 1 072 119 072 081 072 048
set 2 073 119 073 081 073 048
set 3 074 119 074 081 074 048
set 4 075 119 075 081 075 048
48Z63AJA
Fig. 3-227: Determining starting direction.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-281

P438 3 Operation
3.32.6 Holding Time
Case A
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time running
[ 040 053 ]
Determ. trip time
Per characteristic
Non-delayed
IDMT:
tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Case B
IDMT:
Starting Iref>
[ 040 080 ]
IDMT:
Hold time running
[ 040 053 ]
Determ. trip time
Non-delayed
Per characteristic
IDMT:
tIref> elapsed
[ 040 082 ]
Parameter IDMT:
Hold time PSx
set 1 072 071
set 2 073 071
set 3 074 071
set 4 075 071 19Z5025B
Fig. 3-228: Effect of hold time shown with a phase current stage as an example. Example A: Hold time determined
is not reached. Example B: Hold time determined is reached.
Depending on the current flow the P438 will determine the tripping time and a
timer stage is started. The setting of the hold time defines the time period during
which the IDMT protection starting time is stored after the starting has dropped
out. Should starting recur during the hold time period then the time of the
renewed starting will be added to the time period stored. When the starting
times sum reach the tripping time value determined by the P438 then the
corresponding signal will be issued. Should starting not recur during the hold
time period then, depending on the setting, the memory storing the accumulated
starting times value will either be cleared without delay or according to the
characteristic set. In Fig. 3-228, (p. 3-282), the effect of hold time is shown by
the example of a phase current stage.
3-282 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.33 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Groups

IDMTA and IDMTB)
These function groups provide an inverse-time current (IA, IB) supervision in the
operating mode “Autotransformer feed". If the operating mode is set to “Classic
single feed” or “Single feed w. sum I” both function groups are inactive.
The IDMT function group is always available. In all the operating modes, it
supervises the total current independently of the IDMTA and IDMTB function
groups.
The IDMTA (IDMTB) protection function provides a single-stage inverse-time
overcurrent protection.
3.33.1 Enabling and Disabling the IDMTA and IDMTB Functions

IDMTA (IDMTB) protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
IDMTA (IDMTB) protection is ready when it is activated, enabled, unblocked and
in the Autotransformer feed operating mode.
IDMTA:
General enable USER
[ 130 107 ]
0
IDMTA:
1 Enabled
[ 130 109 ]
0: No
1: Yes
IDMTA:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes IDMTA:
Not ready
IDMTA: [ 130 117 ]
Blocking EXT
[ 130 116 ] MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
2
Parameter IDMTA:
3 Enable PSx
set 1 130 100
set 2 131 100
2: Autotransformer feed set 3 132 100
3: Single feed w. sum I set 4 133 100 48Z9343
Fig. 3-229: Disabling, enabling and readiness in IDMTA protection. (Only IDMTA is shown; the logic, however, also
applies to IDMTB with different numerical addresses.)

The P438 checks whether the current value exceeds an adjustable threshold. The
IDMT protection function is triggered if 1.05 times the set current reference is
exceeded. The P438 will determine the trip time according to the set
characteristic and the current level value. Additionally, a minimum trip time can
be set, independently of the current level, which will in no case be under-run. The
inverse time-delayed stage can be blocked using an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
Depending on the settings of the MA IN: F unct.Rus h re st r.PSx or
MAIN : F unct .Harm.bl ock.PSx parameters, starting decisions issued by the
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-283

P438 3 Operation
IDMTA (IDMTB) function can be cancelled when the inrush stabilization function
has detected an inrush current or harmonic blocking.
IDMTA: &
Enabled
[ 130 109 ]
IDMTA:
Not ready
[ 130 117 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
IDMTA:
c Iref PSx
[ * ]
c
1.05 Iref
IDMTA:
I̲A Starting Iref>
&
[ 130 110 ]
IDMTA:
Block. tIref> EXT
[ 130 108 ]
MAIN:
306 014
IDMTA: Setting
Characteristic PSx
MAIN: IDMTA:
Harm. blk. trigg [ * ] Characteristic PSx
460 649
IDMTA: 0: Definite Time

Char. factor kt PSx
[ * ] 2: IEC Very Inverse
IDMTA: 4: IEC Long Time Inv.
Min. trip time PSx
5: IEEE Moderately Inv.
Setting [ * ] 6: IEEE Very Inverse
IDMTA: 7: IEEE Extremely Inv.
Reset PSx IDMTA: 8: ANSI Normally Inv.
Hold time PSx
9: ANSI Short Time Inv.
1: Without delay [ * ] 10: ANSI Long Time Inv.
2: Delayed as per char. 11: RI-Type Inverse
IDMTA: 12: RXIDG-Type Inverse
Reset PSx
[ * ]
c
c
Φ IDMTA:
Memory clear
[ 130 115 ]
I/Iref IDMTA:
Hold time running
[ 130 114 ]
IDMTA:
IDMTA: IDMTA: IDMTA: tIref> elapsed
Parameter Iref PSx Characteristic PSx Char. factor kt PSx [ 130 112 ]
IDMTA:
set 1 130 101 130 102 130 103 Trip signal tIref>
set 2 131 101 131 102 131 103 [ 130 113 ]
set 3 132 101 132 102 132 103
set 4 133 101 133 102 133 103
IDMTA: IDMTA: IDMTA:

Parameter Min. trip time PSx Hold time PSx Reset PSx
set 1 130 104 130 105 130 106

set 2 131 104 131 105 131 106
set 3 132 104 132 105 132 106
set 4 133 104 133 105 133 106 48Z9344A
Fig. 3-230: Starting and tripping of the IDMTA.
3-284 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.34 Defrost Protection (Function Group DFRST)

Under certain operating conditions (no load, cold winter nights) catenaries can
ice over. In order to prevent this, two catenaries each are connected in series
and heated with a comparatively low current. The defrost protection function
measures the feed and return current and processes these current values in a
differential protection function for sensitive short-circuit protection.
3.34.1 Enabling and Disabling DFRST Functions

DFRST protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Enabling
can be carried out separately for each setting group.
DFRST:
General enable USER
[ 019 096 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DFRST:
Enable PSx
[*]
DFRST:
Enabled
0 [ 041 203 ]
1
Parameter DFRST:
0: No Enable PSx
1: Yes set 1 019 130
set 2 019 131
set 3 019 132
set 4 019 133
48Z5058A
Fig. 3-231: Disabling, enabling and readiness in DFRST protection.
3.34.2 Transformer Matching

Current transformers for the acquisition of the catenary and defrost currents can
be dimensioned within a certain range. From the CT transformation ratio data,
the P438 calculates a matching factor.
f=I dfrst, CT.prim /I nom, CT.prim
The matching factor is limited to a range of 1/32 at the minimum and 32 at the
maximum. If it is outside these limits, the P438 generates an error message.
The P438 generates a differential current (Id) and a restraining current (IR) from
the primary values of the catenary current and the defrost current.
Current monitoring is based on a single differential protection characteristic with
two slopes. The equations for the two parts of the characteristic are given below.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-285

P438 3 Operation
Operating zone
Blocking zone
48Z5066A
Fig. 3-232: Differential characteristic.

The elapsing of the operate delay can be blocked using DFRST: Blocking t
EXT.
DFRST:
General enable USER
[ 019 096 ]
1 DFRST:
Enabled
[ 041 203 ]
0: No
1: Yes
c
MAIN:
Inom C.T. prim.
[ 010 001 ]
MAIN:
[ 010 016 ]
SFMON:
Match.fact.DFRSTinv.
COMP [ 098 033 ]
DFRST:
Mismatch
[ 041 207 ]
DFRST:
Scaling factor
[ 004 203 ]
DFRST:
Blocking t EXT
[ 041 206 ]
c
DFRST:
Id> PSx
[*]
DFRST:
DFRST: c t PSx
m1 PSx [*]
[*]
I̲
DFRST:
Trip signal
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst [ 041 205 ]
DFRST:
Starting
[ 041 204 ]
Parameter DFRST: DFRST: DFRST:

Id> PSx m1 PSx t PSx
set 1 019 134 019 138 019 142
set 2 019 135 019 139 019 143
set 3 019 136 019 140 019 144
set 4 019 137 019 141 019 145
48Z5400A
Fig. 3-233: The defrost protection function.
3-286 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.35 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)

Using this function, thermal overload protection can be implemented.
Disabling and Enabling Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection may be disabled or enabled by setting parameters.
THERM:
General enable USER
[ 022 050 ]
0
THERM:
1 & Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
0: No
1: Yes y PSU: Parameter THERM:
PS y active Enable PSx
PSU: 1 036 090 set 1 072 175

PS y active 2 036 091 set 2 073 175
[ * ] 3 036 092 set 3 074 175
4 036 093 set 4 075 175
19Z6112B
Fig. 3-234: Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
3.35.1 Readiness of Thermal Overload Protection

Thermal overload protection is not ready (TH ERM: Not ready) if one of the
following conditions applies:
● Thermal overload protection is disabled.
● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of a fault in the coolant
temperature (ambient) acquisition.
● Thermal overload protection is blocked because of an incorrect setting.
● The thermal replica is blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal
input.
3.35.2 Operating Modes

Two operating modes can be selected for thermal overload protection.
● Relative replica
● Absolute replica
Either operating mode can be enabled or disabled individually. Only one of the
operating modes may be enabled for thermal overload protection. However, if
both operating modes are enabled at the same time, the thermal overload
protection is blocked and the error message TH ER M: Set tin g error, block. is
generated by the P438.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-287

P438 3 Operation
3.35.3 Parallel line switching

Thermal overload protection can be adapted to differing switching states in the
catenary system by varying the effective reference current Iref by multiplication
with the parallel line factors, THE RM: F actor 2 P L PSx and THERM: Fact or 3
PL P Sx.
The setting for THERM: Con trol via USE R determines whether parallel line
switching is carried out from the local HMI or using the binary signal inputs.
Switching using the binary signal inputs requires that THERM: Control via
USER is set to 'No'. If the setting for TH ER M: Cont rol via USER is 'Yes' ,
switching using the binary signal inputs is not possible.
THERM:
Control v. user EXT
[ 038 169 ] THERM:
Control via USER
[ 022 009 ]
>1
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
THERM:
Number PL USER
[ 022 062 ]
THERM:
& >1 1 PL active
1 [ 039 070 ]
& >1
2 THERM:
& >1 2 PL active
3
[ 039 072 ]
1: 1 par. line
THERM:
2: 2 par. lines 3 PL active
& [ 039 074 ]
3: 3 par. lines
& & THERM:

1 PL select. extern.
[ 038 071 ]
&
THERM: THERM:
Select 2 PL EXT 2 PL select. extern.
[ 038 072 ] [ 038 073 ]
THERM: THERM:
Select 3 PL EXT 3 PL select. extern.
[ 038 074 ] [ 038 075 ]
c1
c2
c3
THERM:
Iref PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Factor 2 PL PSx
[ * ]
THERM:
Factor 3 PL PSx
[ * ]
Iref 1
c2PL · Iref 2
c3PL · Iref 3
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM:
Iref PSx Factor 2 PL PSx Factor 3 PL PSx
THERM:
set 1 072 179 072 173 072 174 cPL · Iref
set 2 073 179 073 173 073 174 305 203
set 3 074 179 074 173 074 174

set 4 075 179 075 173 075 174 48Z5074A
Fig. 3-235: Parallel line switching.
3.35.4 Coolant Temperature Effect

To permit coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition, the analog (I/O) module Y
with a 20 mA current input and the “PT100” input or the temperature p/c board
(the RTD module) with the temperature sensor inputs T1 to T9 must be fitted.
Thus, up to 11 measuring inputs are available.
3-288 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
One of these measuring inputs is selected for the primary measurement of

coolant temperature by setting the parameter TH ER M: Se le ct C TA PSx.
If the parameters THE RM: Se lect CTA PSx have been set incorrectly the
thermal overload protection is blocked and the error message THER M: Se t ting
err or,b lock . is generated.
An open measuring circuit, due to a broken wire, is determined by the measured
value inputs (function group MEASI). This will result in the issuance of these
signals:
● MEASI : O pe n circ. 20mA i np.
● MEASI : O pe n circ. P T1 00
● M EA SI: Ov erl oad 2 0mA i npu t
The thermal model uses these signals as a criterion to determine a fault in the
coolant temperature measurement. A fault at both measured value inputs
selected will lead to the issuance of the signal TH ER M: CTA error.
The setting for THERM: Fu nct.f .CTA fai l .P Sx determines how the thermal
overload protection is to continue functioning when the coolant temperature
measurement has failed. The following functions can be selected to guarantee
continued and stable performance of the thermal overload protection when the
coolant temperature measurement has failed.
● Default temperature value:
The coolant temperature set at THERM: Defau lt C TA PSx is applied.
The thermal overload protection function is not blocked.
As a rule there is an erratic change of the measured value when a fault has
occurred in the coolant temperature measurement. The temperature
measured before such an erratic change is stored and applied. The thermal
overload protection function is not blocked.
● Last measured temperature:
The coolant temperature set at TH ERM: De fault CTA PSx is applied if no
last measured values are available because a device warm restart or a
parameter subset selection was carried out.
● Blocking:
The signals THE RM: Warn in g and TH ERM: Trip signal are reset and
blocked. The thermal model will then be continued and displayed on the
basis of the measured current alone. All further measured values are issued
as Not measured.
All parameters relevant to coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition are hidden
if the analog module Y has not been fitted in the P438. The tripping time is
calculated by including the setting for THERM: Defau lt CTA PSx.
3.35.5 Minimum Coolant Temperature

A setting for a minimum coolant temperature is provided for catenary sections
where coolant temperatures may differ strongly from measured values. For
instance in winter months the temperature measured in a tunnel will be higher
than the ambient temperature measured at the feeder point. In such cases the
measured coolant temperature is limited to a low value set at
THERM: Minimum te mpe rat.P Sx.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-289

P438 3 Operation
3.35.6 Thermal Overload Protection Operation without Coolant

Temperature (Ambient) Acquisition
In order to ensure thermal overload protection, without taking into account an
offset due to a variable coolant temperature, it is recommended to set the
THER M: D efau lt C TA PSx parameter to the maximum permitted coolant
temperature.
THERM:
Select CTA PSx
[ * ]
2
& THERM:
With CTA
0: Default temp. value 305 201
1: From PT100
2: From 20 mA input
MEASI: &
Open circ. PT100
[ 040 190 ]
&
MEASI:
Overload 20mA input
[ 040 191 ]
MEASI: THERM:
Open circ. 20mA inp. CTA error
[ 040 192 ] [ 039 111 ]
THERM:
CTA error EXT
[ 038 062 ]
SFMON:
THERM: CTA error
Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
[ 098 034 ]
[ * ]
2
& THERM:
Block. by CTA error
3 305 200
1: Default temp. value

2: Last meas.temperat.
3: Blocking
THERM: THERM:
Parameter Select CTA PSx Funct.f.CTA fail.PSx
set 1 072 177 076 177

set 2 073 177 077 177
set 3 074 177 078 177
set 4 075 177 079 177 45Z8010A
Fig. 3-236: Coolant temperature monitoring.
3.35.7 Relative Replica

The rated operating current of the protected object and its overload tolerance for
maximum coolant (ambient) temperature are the basis of the relative thermal
replica.
In the Relative replica operating mode, the following settings have to be made
for thermal overload protection:
● The rated operating current of the protected object: THERM: Iref PSx
● The tripping threshold Δϑtrip is set at TH ER M: Rel. O/T trip PSx.
If coolant temperature (ambient) acquisition is used, the following parameters
must be set:
● The maximum permissible temperature of the protected object Θmax,
THE RM : Max.p erm.obj.tmp.P Sx
● The maximum coolant temperature (maximum ambient) Θc,max,
THER M: Max .perm.cool.tm pPSx
3-290 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.35.8 Absolute Replica

The thermal limit current of the protected object is the reference current of the
absolute thermal replica. For this limit current, an overtemperature results at the
maximum coolant temperature.
In the Absolute replica operating mode, the following parameters have to be set
for thermal overload protection:
● The thermal limit current of the protected object: THE RM: Iref PSx
● The limit temperature for tripping Θmax,
THERM: Max.perm.obj .tmp.P Sx
● The overtemperature as a result of a persistent limit current (Θmax -
Θc,max ), THERM: O/T f .Ire f pe rs. P Sx
The maximum permitted coolant temperature Θc,max is derived from the difference
between the T H E R M : M a x . p e r m . o b j . t m p . P S x and T H E R M : O / T f . I r e f p e r s .
P S x settings.
3.35.9 Tripping Characteristics
Θ/%
10000
1000
τ / min
100
200
10 110 1000
50
t / min
1
200
110
30
50
0.1
200
110
0.01
50 1
0.001
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I / I ref
D5Z50BEB_EN
Fig. 3-237: Tripping characteristics of thermal overload protection (tripping characteristics apply to ΔϑP = 0 % and
identical settings for the maximum permissible coolant temperature and coolant temperature).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-291

P438 3 Operation
The selected current (THERM: I) is used to track a first-order thermal replica as

specified in IEC 255-8. Other than the operating mode dependent settings the
following parameters will govern the tripping time:
● The set thermal time constant τ of the protected object,
THER M: Ti m.con st.1, >Ibl PSx
● The accumulated thermal load Δϑ0
● The current measured coolant temperature Θc
● If the value of the selected current (THERM: I) is greater than 10·Iref then
only the fixed maximum value 10·Iref is used for calculating the tripping
time.
The tripping threshold in the two operating modes is calculated as follows:
I
(I )2 - Δϑ0
ref
t = τ · ln Θa - Θa,max
I
(I )2 - Δϑtrip · (1 - Θ )
ref max - Θa,max
The Δϑtrip tripping threshold is set to a fixed value of 100% if the operating mode
is Absolute replica.
3.35.10 Warning Signal

Depending on the selected operating mode, a warning signal can be set at one of
the following parameters:
● Relative replica: TH ERM: R el. O/T warn in g PSx
● Absolute replica: TH ERM: A bs. O/T warni ng PSx
Additionally, a time-to-tripping threshold (pre-trip time) can be set. When the
time left until tripping falls below this setting, a warning signal will be issued.
3-292 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.35.11 Trip
THERM:
I
305 202
MAIN:
Protection active & c
306 001
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Starting k*Iref>
THERM: [ 041 108 ]
Block Replica EXT
[ 041 074 ]
THERM:
Block. by CTA error &
305 200
THERM:
Iref PSx c
[ * ] <0.1 Iref
THERM:
THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx
Start.fact.OL_RC PSx c [ * ]
[ * ]
THERM:
c Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx
k·Iref [ * ]
THERM:
c Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx
THERM: [ * ]
Absolute replica
[ 022 065 ] THERM:
c Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx
[ * ]
0 THERM: THERM:
c Rel. O/T warning PSx Within pre-trip time
[ * ]
1 [ 041 109 ]
THERM:
0: No Rel. O/T trip PSx SFMON:
c [ * ] Setting error THERM
1: Yes [ 098 035 ]
THERM:
c Default CTA PSx THERM:
[ * ] Setting error,block.
THERM: THERM: [ 039 110 ]
Relative replica Hysteresis trip PSx THERM:
[ 022 064 ] [ * ] Warning
THERM: [ 039 025 ]
0 Warning pre-trip PSx THERM:
[ * ] Trip signal
1 [ 039 020 ]
THERM:
0: No Buffer empty
1: Yes [ 039 112 ]
THERM:
THERM: Status therm.replica
With CTA c [ 004 016 ]
305 201
R THERM:
Coolant temperature I/Iref Object temperature
[ 004 137 ]
THERM: THERM:
Reset replica Coolant temperature
[ 039 061 ] [ 004 149 ]
c THERM:
Pre-trip time left
[ 004 139 ]
THERM:
Temp. offset replica
[ 004 109 ]
THERM:
Coolant temp. p.u.
Iref PSx Start.fact.OL_RC PSx Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx [ 004 178 ]
THERM:
set 1 072 179 072 180 072 187 Object temp. p.u.
set 2 073 179 073 180 073 187 [ 004 179 ]
set 3 074 179 074 180 074 187 THERM:
set 4 075 179 075 180 075 187 Therm. replica p.u.
[ 004 017 ]
Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx Current I,therm prim
set 1 072 188 072 182 [ 007 220 ]
set 2 073 188 073 182 THERM:
Current I,therm p.u
set 3 074 188 074 182
[ 007 221 ]
set 4 075 188 075 182
Parameter THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM: THERM:

Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx Rel. O/T warning PSx Rel. O/T trip PSx Default CTA PSx Hysteresis trip PSx Warning pre-trip PSx
set 1 072 185 072 184 072 181 072 186 072 183 072 191
set 2 073 185 073 184 073 181 073 186 073 183 073 191
set 3 074 185 074 184 074 181 074 186 074 183 074 191
set 4 075 185 075 184 075 181 075 186 075 183 075 191 48Z9340A
Fig. 3-238: Thermal overload protection.
The trip threshold is set according to the selected operating mode with the
following parameters:
● Relative replica: TH ERM: R el. O/T tr ip P Sx
● Absolute replica: TH ERM: Max. pe rm.obj. tmp.PSx
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-293

P438 3 Operation
If a trip command is issued, the trip signal is maintained until the status of the
thermal replica has decreased by the value set at THERM: Hystere sis t rip
PSx, at least for a fixed time of 5 s.
3.35.12 Cooling
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the thermal replica is
applied with the time constant set at TH ER M: Tim .const.2,<Ibl PSx. This
element in the thermal model takes account of the cooling characteristics of
stopped motors.
The two time constants T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 1 , > I b l P S x and

T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x should be set to identical values for
transformers and power lines.
3.35.13 Resetting
The thermal replica may be reset either via a setting parameter or via an
appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even when
thermal overload protection is disabled. Thermal overload protection can be
blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
THERM:
Reset replica USER
[ 022 061 ]
0
THERM:
1 Reset replica
[ 039 061 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
THERM:
Enabled
[ 040 068 ]
THERM:
Reset replica EXT
[ 038 061 ]
Q9Z5020A
Fig. 3-239: Resetting the thermal replica.
3-294 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.36 Under and Overvoltage Protection (Function Group V<>)

The P438 provides a two-stage time-delayed voltage protection function for over-
and undervoltage monitoring.
3.36.1 Disabling and Enabling V<> Protection

V<> protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters. Moreover,
V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the
voltage measuring circuit.
V<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 030 ]
0
1
0: No
1: Yes
V<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ] V<>:
&
Enabled
0 [ 040 066 ]
1
0: No
1: Yes & V<>:
Ready
MCMON: [ 042 003 ]
[ 038 023 ]
MAIN: V<>:
M.c.b. trip V EXT Not ready
[ 004 061 ] [ 042 004 ]
Parameter V<>:
Enable PSx
set 1 076 000

set 2 077 000
set 3 078 000
set 4 079 000 48Z5073A
Fig. 3-240: Enabling, disabling and readiness of V<> protection.
3.36.2 Voltage Monitoring

The P438 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked using
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip
commands, then it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the
trip command would always be present when the system voltage were
disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to reclose the circuit breaker.
Furthermore, the undervoltage protection function provides a window function.
The windows are defined by the settings for V<>: Vmin PSx and by the set
thresholds V < or V < < , respectively. The setting for V <>: V min PSx defines
the lower threshold for both windows. With an appropriate setting of the
successive timer stages, this provision can be used to bridge short periods of
voltage failure as encountered in switching operations.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-295

P438 3 Operation
V<>:
Blocking tV> EXT
[ 041 068 ]
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ] V<>:
MAIN: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
Protection active [ * ]
306 001
V<>: V<>:
V> PSx tV> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
V̲ tV> elapsed
[ 041 034 ]
V<>:
Starting V>
[ 041 030 ]
V<>: V<>:
Blocking tV>> EXT V> PSx
[ 041 069 ] [ * ]
V<>: V<>:
V>> PSx tV>> PSx
[ * ] [ * ]
V<>:
tV>> elapsed
[ 041 035 ]
V<>:
Starting V>>
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>: [ 041 096 ]
V> PSx tV> PSx V>> PSx tV>> PSx Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set 1 076 003 076 005 076 004 076 006 076 048
set 2 077 003 077 005 077 004 077 006 077 048
set 3 078 003 078 005 078 004 078 006 078 048
set 4 079 003 079 005 079 004 079 006 079 048 48Z9338A
Fig. 3-241: Overvoltage monitoring.
3-296 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
V<>:
Blocking tV< EXT
[ 041 070 ]
V<>:
Ready
[ 042 003 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V<>: V<>:
V< PSx tV< PSx
V<>:
V> PSx [ * ] [ * ]
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed
V̲
[ 041 041 ]
V<>:
tV< elapsed & Vmin
[ 041 026 ]
V<>: Setting(s) blocked V<>:

Blocking tV<< EXT Starting V<
[ 041 071 ] [ 041 037 ]
1 V<>:
V<>: Fault V<
tV<< PSx
[ 041 110 ]
[ * ]
V<>:
V<< PSx
IDMT:
[ * ] Dir. meas. blocked
[ 041 006 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed
[ 041 042 ]
Setting(s) blocked
IDMT:
Fault backward
[ 041 009 ]
V<>: 1 V<>:
Vmin PSx Fault V<<
[ * ] [ 041 112 ]
V<>:
tTransient PSx
[ * ]
V<>:
tV< elaps. transient
1 [ 042 023 ]
V<>:
tV<< elapsed trans.
1 [ 042 025]
1 V<>:
tV</<< elaps. trans.
[ 042 007]
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>:
V< PSx tV< PSx Vmin PSx
set 1 076 007 076 009 076 046
set 2 077 007 077 009 077 046
set 3 078 007 078 009 078 046
set 4 079 007 079 009 079 046
Parameter V<>: V<>: V<>: V<>:

V<< PSx tV<< PSx tTransient PSx Hyst. V<> meas. PSx
set 1 076 008 076 010 076 029 076 048
set 2 077 008 077 010 077 029 077 048
set 3 078 008 078 010 078 029 078 048
set 4 079 008 079 010 079 029 079 048 48Z9339A
Fig. 3-242: Undervoltage monitoring.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-297

P438 3 Operation
3.37 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)

The P438 monitors the voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below set
frequencies.
The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the zero
crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The evaluation time is settable. The
evaluation is blocked if the voltage falls below a settable threshold, see
Section 3.13.6, (p. 3-111).
The over-/underfrequency protection function has five stages. The operation of
over-/underfrequency protection will be explained below using the first stage as
an example.
3.37.1 Disabling or Enabling Over‑/Underfrequency Protection
f<>:
General enable USER
[ 023 031 ]
1 f<>:
& Enabled
[ 042 100 ]
0: No
1: Yes
f<>:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
1 Not ready
0
[ 042 140 ]
1
f<>:
0: No & Ready
1: Yes [ 042 101 ]
f<>:
Blocked by V<
[ 042 102 ]
f<>:
Parameter Enable PSx
set 1 018 196

set 2 018 197
set 3 018 198
set 4 018 199 12Z8804A
Fig. 3-243: Enabling, disabling and readiness of f<> protection.
The frequency protection can be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.

3.37.2 Operating Modes of Over-/Underfrequency Protection

For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can
choose between the following operating modes:
● Frequency monitoring
● Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
● Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring
(Δf/Δt)
3-298 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.37.3 Frequency Monitoring

Depending on the setting, the P438 monitors the frequency to determine
whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess
of the set nominal frequency is set, the P438 checks to determine whether the
frequency exceeds the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set
nominal frequency is set, the P438 checks to determine whether the frequency
falls below the operate threshold. If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a
set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an
appropriately configured binary signal input.
3.37.4 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Differential Frequency

Gradient Monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the
frequency is also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is
reached (in addition to being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set
threshold). Monitoring for overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a
frequency increase; monitoring for underfrequency is combined with monitoring
for a frequency decrease. If both operate conditions are satisfied, a set timer
stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately
3.37.5 Frequency Monitoring Combined with Mean Frequency Gradient

Monitoring (Δf/Δt)
f<
Δf
Δt Δt
t
Start Δt Start Δt
Function blocked
Trip Δf/Δt
F5Z0128C
Fig. 3-244: Operation of frequency monitoring combined with Δf/Δt monitoring.
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual

substations and may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-299

P438 3 Operation
sense to take the mean value of the frequency gradient into account for load-
shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring
must be set for “underfrequency monitoring”.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting
of frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value Δf within
the set time Δt, then the Δf/Δt monitoring function operates instantaneously and
generates a trip signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate
decision of the monitoring function, then the Δf/Δt monitoring function will be
blocked until the underfrequency monitoring function drops out. The trip signal
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-300 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
f<>:
Blocking f1 EXT
[ 042 103 ]
f<>:
Oper. mode f1 PSx
[ * ]
1: f
2: f with df/dt
f<>:
f1 PSx
3: f w. Delta f/Delta t [ * ]
MAIN:
Nominal frequ. fnom
[ 010 030 ]
f<>:
f<>: tf1 PSx
Ready [ * ]
[ 042 101 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f<>:
f<>: Trip signal f1
Blocked by V< [ 042 111 ]
[ 042 102 ]
MAIN:
M.c.b. trip V EXT
[ 004 061 ]
f<>:
Starting f1
[ 042 107 ]
f<>:
df1/dt PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
No. periods reached
305 701
f<>:
fMeas df/dt
305 726
f<>:
Start. cond. met Starting f1/df1
[ 042 108 ]
SFMON:
f> Setting error f<>
f<>: [ 098 028 ]
Delta f1 PSx
[ * ]
f<>:
Delta t1 PSx
[ * ]
df/dt
f<>:
Delta f1 triggered
[ 042 109 ]
Start. cond. met
f<>:
Delta t1 elapsed
[ 042 110 ]
Parameter f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>: f<>:

Oper. mode f1 PSx f1 PSx df1/dt PSx Delta f1 PSx Delta t1 PSx tf1 PSx
set 1 018 120 018 100 018 108 018 112 018 116 018 104
set 2 018 121 018 101 018 109 018 113 018 117 018 105
set 3 018 122 018 102 018 110 018 114 018 118 018 106
set 4 018 123 018 103 018 111 018 115 018 119 018 107
47Z0152A
Fig. 3-245: First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-301

P438 3 Operation
3.37.6 fmin/fmax Measurement

For the acquisition of the minimum frequency during an underfrequency
condition and for the acquisition of the maximum frequency during an
overfrequency condition, the two following measured event values are available:
● f<>: Max . frequ. f or f >
● f<>: M in . fr eq u. f or f <
Both measured event values are reset automatically at the onset of a new
overfrequency or underfrequency situation. A manual reset is also possible:
● f<>: R e set meas .val . USER
3-302 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.38 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)

The P438 features the CB failure protection function. Main-trip and re-trip circuits
can be monitored by the integrated CB failure protection function.
3.38.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Failure Protection

Circuit breaker failure protection may be disabled or enabled using setting
parameters. Enabling can be carried out separately for each setting group.
CBF:
General enable USER
[ 022 100 ]
0
CBF:
1 Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
0: No
1: Yes
CBF:
Enable PSx
[ * ]
Parameter CBF:
Enable PSx
0
set 1 072 110
1 set 2 073 110
set 3 074 110
0: No set 4 075 110
1: Yes
48Z5061A
Fig. 3-246: Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection.
3.38.2 Readiness of Circuit Breaker Protection
MAIN: CBF:
Protection active Not ready
306 001 [ 040 025 ]
CBF:
Enabled
[ 040 055 ]
CBF:
Blocking EXT
[ 038 058 ]
48Z5062A
Fig. 3-247: Signal C B F : N o t r e a d y.
Circuit breaker failure protection will be unavailable under the following

conditions:
● The CBF function is not activated.
● The protection function is not enabled.
● Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured
binary signal input.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-303

P438 3 Operation
3.38.3 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection
CBF:
Imin< PSx
[ * ]
f0
I̲
CBF: c
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF: CBF:
Mon. time M-trip PSx R-trip signal
[ 039 022 ]
[ * ]
& CBF:
Failure M-trip
MAIN: >1 t 0 [ 039 021 ]
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ] CBF:
&
MAIN: Mon. t. M-trip runn.
M-trip command 2 [ 036 066 ]
[ 039 058 ]
>1 CBF:
MAIN: CB failure
Parallel trip EXT [ 036 017 ]
[ 037 019 ]
c CBF:
CB1 failure
[ 036 075 ]
CBF: CBF:
Mon. time R-trip PSx B-trip signal
[ * ] [ 039 023 ]
& CBF:
Failure R-trip
t 0 [ 036 056 ]
& CBF:
Mon. t. R-trip runn.
[ 036 110 ]
CBF:
tImin< PSx
[ * ]
&
CBF:
CB Superv. Signal
[ 039 000 ]
MAIN: t 0
CB closed A EXT
[ 036 051 ]
CBF:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
Parameter CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF:

Imin< PSx Mon. time M-trip PSx Mon. time R-trip PSx tImin< PSx Operative time PSx
set 1 072 112 072 115 072 116 072 113 072 114
set 2 073 112 073 115 073 116 073 113 073 114
set 3 074 112 074 115 074 116 074 113 074 114
set 4 075 112 075 115 075 116 075 113 075 114
48Z9370A
Fig. 3-248: CB failure protection and CB monitoring, operating mode is set to classic single feed.
Circuit breaker failure protection is started by the main-trip command or by the

trip command of an external protection device (wired to an appropriate binary
input). These commands start a timer stage. Once this has elapsed, a re-trip
results unless the current monitored by the circuit breaker failure protection
function has fallen below the set threshold. Only the fundamental component of
the current is monitored here.
If the fault is still present once the first timer stage CBF: Mon. time M-tr ip
P Sx has elapsed, a signal is issued to trigger the re-trip.
If the fault is still present once the second timer stage CBF: Mon. time R-tr ip
PSx has elapsed, a signal is issued to trigger the trip of an upstream circuit
breaker (a "backtrip").
Additionally, the circuit breaker auxiliary contact can be monitored. This is only
possible if a binary signal input has been set to MAIN: CB closed A EXT has
been configured. The pickup of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact starts a timer
3-304 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
stage. If the monitored current exceeds CBF: Imi n< PSx, then a CBF : C B
Supe rv. Signal alarm results.
The auxiliary contact supervision is only active for the set operative time. This
ensures that a C BF: CB Supe rv. Signal signal (which might lead to switching
off the entire installation) will not be issued during protection injection testing.
Following figure shows the function with one circuit breaker. The measured
current I is evaluated internally by the functions when the parameter
MAIN : Feeder mode has been set to the operating mode classic single feed.
CBF:
Imin< PSx
[ * ]
f0
I̲A >1
f0
I̲B
CBF: c
Not ready
[ 040 025 ]
CBF: CBF:
Mon. time M-trip PSx R-trip signal
[ 039 022 ]
[ * ]
& CBF:
Failure M-trip
MAIN: >1 t 0 [ 039 021 ]
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ] & CBF:
MAIN: Mon. t. M-trip runn.
M-trip command 2 [ 036 066 ]
[ 039 058 ]
MAIN: >1
Parallel trip EXT
[ 037 019 ]
c
CBF: CBF:
Mon. time R-trip PSx B-trip signal
[ 039 023 ]
[ * ]
& CBF:
Failure R-trip
t 0 [ 036 056 ]
& CBF:
Mon. t. R-trip runn.
[ 036 110 ]
CBF: & >1 CBF:

tImin< PSx CB1 failure
[ * ] [ 036 075 ]
& >1 CBF:

CB failure
MAIN: t 0 [ 036 017 ]
CB closed A EXT
[ 036 051 ]
& >1 CBF:
MAIN: t 0 CB2 failure
CB closed B EXT & [ 036 076 ]
[ 031 030 ]
CBF:
Operative time PSx
[ * ]
>1 CBF:
CB Superv. Signal
[ 039 000 ]
Parameter CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF: CBF:

Imin< PSx Mon. time M-trip PSx Mon. time R-trip PSx tImin< PSx Operative time PSx
set 1 072 112 072 115 072 116 072 113 072 114
set 2 073 112 073 115 073 116 073 113 073 114
set 3 074 112 074 115 074 116 074 113 074 114
set 4 075 112 075 115 075 116 075 113 075 114
48Z9371A
Fig. 3-249: CB failure protection and CB monitoring, operating mode is set to either autotransformer feed or classic
single feed with residual current measurement.
Above figure shows the function with two circuit breakers. The measured
currents IA (catenary 1) and IB (catenary 2 or feeder) are evaluated internally by
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-305

P438 3 Operation
the functions when the parameter MA IN: Fe eder mode has been set to the
following operating modes:
● Autotransformer feed
● Classic single feed with residual current measurement (Single feed w. sum
I)
3-306 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.39 Circuit Breaker Monitoring (Function Group CBM)

The P438 features a circuit breaker monitoring function. This function supports
state-controlled maintenance of circuit breakers.
3.39.1 Disabling and Enabling Circuit Breaker Monitoring

Circuit breaker monitoring may be disabled or enabled using setting parameters.
CBM:
General enable USER
[ 022 010 ]
0
CBM:
1 Enabled
[ 044 130 ]
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5404A
Fig. 3-250: Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
3.39.2 Variants
The wear condition of a circuit breaker may be determined using a variety of
methods:
● Monitoring the mechanical switching operations
● Accumulating ruptured current values
● Accumulating the squared ruptured current values
● Calculating the current-time integral of ruptured and accumulated current
values
● Calculating the remaining switching operations with reference to the CB
wear characteristic.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-307

P438 3 Operation
3.39.3 CB Wear Characteristic

Manufacturers of circuit breakers usually provide wear characteristics displaying
the maximum number of permissible CB operations in relation to the ruptured
current.
Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-308) displays the wear characteristics for a circuit breaker with
a nominal current of 2000 A and a maximum ruptured current of 63 kA. The
mean ruptured current is 48 kA.
100000
Number of permissible CB operations
10000
1000
100
10
0.1 1 10 100
Disconnection current in kA 19Z6123A_EN
Fig. 3-251: Circuit breaker wear characteristic.
The knee points in Fig. 3-251, (p. 3-308) are necessary to set the wear
characteristic for the circuit breaker:
● The circuit breaker's nominal current (CBM: Inom,CB) and the permitted
number of CB operations at nominal current (CBM: Perm. CB op.
Inom,C B)
● The circuit breaker's mean ruptured current (CBM: Med. curr. Itrip ,CB)
and the permitted number of CB operations at mean ruptured current
(CBM: Pe rm. C B op. Im e d,C B)
● The circuit breaker's maximum ruptured current (CBM: Max. curr.
I trip,C B) and the permitted number of CB operations at maximum
ruptured current (CBM: Pe rm. CB op. Imax,CB)
The mean ruptured current is not available for all types of circuit breakers.
In such a case the parameters for this knee point are to be set to Blocked. A knee
point is not considered in the characteristic when at least one of the parameters
for the knee point is set to Blocked.
For proper performance of circuit breaker monitoring it should be observed that
the knee points must be applied in a logically correct sequence (continuously
descending). When set currents and numbers of CB operations are not plausible
according to the characteristic the P438 will issue an error message and block
circuit breaker monitoring.
3-308 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.39.4 Calculating the CB Wear State

The current wear state of the circuit breaker is given as the number of remaining
CB operations at nominal current conditions. The number of remaining CB
operations nrem(Inom,CB) is calculated and displayed phase selectively after each
disconnection by the P438.
Calculation is per this equation:
n(I nom,CB)
nrem(I nom,CB) = nrem,0(I nom,CB) - n(I d,CB)
Where:
● Inom,CB: Nominal current for the CB
● n(Inom,CB): Max permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
● Id,CB: Ruptured current
● n(Id,CB): Permitted number of CB operations at Id,CB according to wear
characteristics
● nrem,0(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB
before disconnection
● nrem,(Inom,CB): Remaining permitted number of CB operations at Inom,CB after
disconnection
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-309

P438 3 Operation
3.39.5 Operating Modes
MAIN: & c
Protection active
306 001
CBM:
Enabled CBM:
[ 044 130 ] Operating mode
[ 022 007 ]
1: With trip cmd. only

2: With CB sig.EXT only
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
CBM: c
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM:
& >1 c Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
MAIN: >1
M-trip signal 1 CBM:
[ 039 101 ]
& c Perm. CB op. Inom,CB
MAIN: [ 022 013 ]
M-trip signal 2
[ 039 102 ] CBM:
c Med. curr. Itrip,CB
MAIN: [ 022 014 ]
R-trip signal 1 &
[ 039 103 ] CBM:
MAIN: c Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
R-trip signal 2 [ 022 015 ]
[ 039 104 ] >1
CBM:
MAIN: c Max. curr. Itrip,CB
CB open A EXT [ 022 016 ]
[ 044 131 ] CBM:
c Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
CBM:
c Corr. Acqu.t.CB sig.
[ 022 018 ]
fnom CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
I̲ [ 008 011 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
[ 008 014 ]
48Z9372A
Fig. 3-252: Triggering and calculation of CB condition monitoring, operating mode is set to classic single feed.
3-310 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
MAIN: & c
Protection active
306 001
CBM:
Enabled CBM:
[ 044 130 ] Operating mode
[ 022 007 ]
1: With trip cmd. only

2: With CB sig.EXT only
3: CB sig. EXT or trip
CBM: c
Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
CBM:
& >1 c Inom,CB
[ 022 012 ]
MAIN: >1
M-trip signal 1 CBM:
[ 039 101 ]
& c Perm. CB op. Inom,CB
MAIN: [ 022 013 ]
M-trip signal 2
[ 039 102 ] CBM:
c Med. curr. Itrip,CB
MAIN: [ 022 014 ]
R-trip signal 1 &
[ 039 103 ] CBM:
MAIN: c Perm. CB op. Imed,CB
R-trip signal 2 [ 022 015 ]
[ 039 104 ] >1
CBM:
MAIN: c Max. curr. Itrip,CB
CB open A EXT [ 022 016 ]
[ 044 131 ] CBM:
c Perm. CB op. Imax,CB
[ 022 017 ]
CBM:
c Corr. Acqu.t.CB sig.
[ 022 018 ]
fnom CBM:
No. of CB oper. A
I̲A [ 008 011 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. A
[ 008 014 ]
fnom CBM:
No. of CB oper. B
I̲B [ 008 012 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]
48Z9373A
Fig. 3-253: Triggering and calculation of CB condition monitoring, operating mode is set to either autotransformer
feed or classic single feed with residual current measurement.
Setting the parameter CB M: Operati ng m ode will select the condition under
which the function will be triggered:
● With trip cmd. only: Function triggered only by the general trip command
● With CB sig.EXT only: Function triggered by the CB open signal generated
by an auxiliary contact
● CB sig. EXT or trip: Function triggered by the general trip command or CB
open signal generated by an auxiliary contact
Measured values and counters are re-determined with each triggering and
compared with set threshold values.
A correction value for the CB open time can be set in order to determine the
exact trip time C BM: Corr. A cqu. t.C B si g.. This permits proper evaluation of
leading or lagging auxiliary contacts.
The triggering and calculation of CB condition monitoring are shown in the above
figures when parameter MA IN: Feeder mode has been set to one of these
operating modes:
● Classic single feed: please refer to Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)
● Autotransformer feed or classic single feed with residual current
measurement (Single feed w. sum I): please refer to Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-311

P438 3 Operation
Should a trip occur because of excessive catenary overloading it is guaranteed

that the wear presentations are carried out only for the involved CB.
3.39.6 Cycle for Circuit Breaker Monitoring

The circuit breaker monitoring cycle is defined selectively. During an active cycle
the signals C BM: Cycl e run nin g A or C BM: Cycle running B are issued.
The cycle is started by a trigger criterion. Definition for the end of a cycle: The
remaining time of a power cycle duration has elapsed after the last detected
current zero crossing. The CBM: Curr. f low en ded A (CBM: Curr. flow
e nded B) signal is then issued.
The maximum cycle time duration is defined with 220 milliseconds. The start of
the cycle time is corrected by the settable correction times. A fault on a CB pole
is considered to be apparent if further current zero crossings are detected after
the maximum cycle time has elapsed. Measured values from the respective CB
tripping are canceled and the CBM: tm ax> A (CBM: tmax> B) signal is
issued.
3-312 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.39.7 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations

Depending on the selected operating mode the P438 will calculate the current
wear state of the circuit breaker after each disconnection. The number of
remaining CB operations at CB nominal current are calculated and displayed. A
threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: Remain No. CB op. <.
An alarm is issued should the number of remaining CB operations drop below this
threshold.
CBM:
c No. CB operations >
[ 022 019 ]
CBM: >1 CBM:

No. of CB oper. A Sig. No. CB op. >
[ 008 011 ] [ 044 135 ]
CBM:
No. of CB oper. B
[ 008 012 ]
46Z5036A
Fig. 3-254: Monitoring the remaining number of CB operations at nominal current.
At the same time each switching operation will increment the P438's counter for
the number of CB operations. The number of CB operations performed is
displayed. A threshold value can be set with the parameter CBM: No. C B
ope rat ions >. An alarm is issued should the number of CB operations
performed exceed this threshold.
CBM:
c Remain No. CB op. <
[ 022 020 ]
CBM: >1 CBM:

Remain. No. CB op. A Sig. Rem. No.CB op.<
[ 008 014 ] [ 044 136 ]
CBM:
Remain. No. CB op. B
[ 008 015 ]
46Z5037A
Fig. 3-255: Monitoring the number of CB operations performed.
3.39.8 Monitoring Ruptured Currents

In addition to the evaluation of the CB wear state and monitoring of the number
of CB operations performed, the P438 features the means to accumulate and
display the ruptured current values and the square of these values. Threshold
values can be set with the parameters C BM: Σ Itri p>, C BM: Σ It rip**2> and
CBM: ΣI *t>. An alarm is issued should the accumulated current values exceed
any of these thresholds.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-313

P438 3 Operation
3.39.9 Blocking Circuit Breaker Monitoring

When protection injection testing is carried out the circuit breaker monitoring
function should be blocked, so that such testing does not corrupt monitoring
results. CBM protection is blocked if one of the following conditions is met:
● Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by parameters.
● Circuit breaker monitoring is blocked by an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
CBM: CBM:
General enable USER Blocked
[ 044 199 ]
[ 022 010 ]
&
CBM:
Blocking EXT
[ 044 128 ]
CBM:
Blocking USER
[ 022 150 ]
0: No
1: Yes
48Z5346B
Fig. 3-256: Blocking circuit breaker monitoring.
3.39.10 Resetting Measured Values

Measured values from the respective last CB trip may be reset via the interfaces
on the P438. Accumulated measured values are not affected by such a reset
operation.
3.39.11 Setting Measured Values

Setting measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function is necessary
when the respective CB has already been exposed to operating conditions or has
been replaced. The available interfaces on the P438 may be used to set
measured values in the circuit breaker monitoring function.
Only such measured values and counter values in the P438 may be set to new
values that do not have their default values set to Blocked.
The stored value will remain unchanged if the default value is set to Blocked.
Executing the set command results in initializing all default values in the P438 to
Blocked.
3-314 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.40 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)

Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it
is only applied for monitoring and signaling purposes as well as to monitor
temperature limits.
3.40.1 Enable/Disable the Limit Value Monitoring Function

The Limit Value Monitoring function can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
LIMIT:
General enable USER
[ 014 010 ]
0: No
1: Yes
LIMIT:
Enable PSx
[*]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Parameter LIMIT:
Enable PSx
set 1 072 240
set 2 073 240
set 3 074 240
set 4 075 240
48Z5405A
Fig. 3-257: Disabling and Enabling LIMIT.
3.40.2 Monitoring Measured Values

With the P438 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit
values:
● Current: I>, I>>
● Catenary current or catenary current 1: IA>, IA>>
● Feeder current or catenary current 2: IB>, IB>>
● Plausibility current or alternatively defrost current: Iplaus/Idfrst>, Iplaus/
Idfrst>>
● Voltage: V<, V<<, V>, V>>
● Catenary voltage: VA<, VA<<, VA>, VA>>
● Feeder voltage: VB<, VB<<, VB>, VB>>
● Frequency: f<, f<<, f>, f>>
● Linearized 20mA current: IDC,lin<, IDC,lin<<, IDC,lin>, IDC,lin>>
● Measured temperature: T<, T<<. T>, T>>
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or
lower limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-315

P438 3 Operation
3.40.3 Monitoring Measured Current Value
LIMIT:
Enabled LIMIT: LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] I> PSx tI> PSx
[*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
I̲ LIMIT:
tI> elapsed
[ 004 062 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
I>> PSx tI>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tI>> elapsed
[ 040 157 ]
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT:

set 1 072 241 072 242 072 243 072 244
set 2 073 241 073 242 073 243 073 244
set 3 074 241 074 242 074 243 074 244
set 4 075 241 075 242 075 243 075 244
48Z5406A
Fig. 3-258: Measured current value monitoring.
The measured current value is monitored by two stages to determine whether it

exceeds set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a signal is issued
after a set time delay has elapsed.
3-316 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.40.4 Monitoring Catenary and feeder Currents
LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] IA> PSx tIA> PSx
[*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
I̲A LIMIT:
tIA> elapsed
[ 040 232 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IA>> PSx tIA>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tIA>> elapsed
[ 040 233 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IB> PSx tIB> PSx
[*] [*]
I̲B LIMIT:
tIB> elapsed
[ 040 234 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IB>> PSx tIB>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tIB>> elapsed
[ 040 235 ]

IA> PSx IA>> PSx tIA> PSx tIA>> PSx
set 1 076 200 076 201 076 202 076 203
set 2 077 200 077 201 077 202 077 203
set 3 078 200 078 201 078 202 078 203
set 4 079 200 079 201 079 202 079 203

IB> PSx IB>> PSx tIB> PSx tIB>> PSx
set 1 076 204 076 205 076 206 076 207
set 2 077 204 077 205 077 206 077 207
set 3 078 204 078 205 078 206 078 207
set 4 079 204 079 205 079 206 079 207
48Z5409A
Fig. 3-259: Monitoring catenary and feeder currents.
The catenary and feeder currents are monitored by two stages to determine
whether they exceed set thresholds. If any of the thresholds are exceeded a
signal is issued after a set time-delay has elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-317

P438 3 Operation
3.40.5 Monitoring Plausibility or Defrost Current
LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] Iplaus/Idfrst> PSx tIplaus/Idfrst> PSx
[*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst LIMIT:
tIplaus/Idfrst> elps
[ 040 236 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
Iplaus/Idfrst>> PSx tIplaus/Idfrst> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tIplaus/Idfrst>>elps
[ 040 237 ]

Iplaus/Idfrst> PSx Iplaus/Idfrst>> PSx tIplaus/Idfrst> PSx tIplaus/Idfrst> PSx
set 1 076 224 076 225 076 226 076 227
set 2 077 224 077 225 077 226 077 227
set 3 078 224 078 225 078 226 078 227
set 4 079 224 079 225 079 226 079 227
48Z5417A
Fig. 3-260: Monitoring plausibility or defrost current.
The plausibility or defrost current is monitored by two stages to determine

3-318 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.40.6 Monitoring Voltage
LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT:

Enabled V> PSx tV> PSx
[ 040 074 ] [*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V̲ LIMIT:
tV> elapsed
[ 040 140 ]
LIMIT:
tV> & tV< elapsed
LIMIT: LIMIT: [ 040 144 ]
V>> PSx tV>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tV>> elapsed
[ 040 141 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
V< PSx tV< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tV< elapsed
[ 040 142 ]
LIMIT:
tV>>&tV<< elapsed
LIMIT: LIMIT: [ 040 145 ]
V<< PSx tV<< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tV<< elapsed
[ 040 143 ]

V> PSx V>> PSx tV> PSx tV>> PSx
set 1 072 247 072 248 072 249 072 250
set 2 073 247 073 248 073 249 073 250
set 3 074 247 074 248 074 249 074 250
set 4 075 247 075 248 075 249 075 250

V< PSx V<< PSx tV< PSx tV<< PSx
set 1 072 251 072 252 072 253 072 254
set 2 073 251 073 252 073 253 073 254
set 3 074 251 074 252 074 253 074 254
set 4 075 251 075 252 075 253 075 254
48Z5407A
Fig. 3-261: Monitoring voltage.
The voltage is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls

below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is issued
once a set time-delay has elapsed. In addition a multiple signal is issued if any of
the tV> or tV>> (tV< or tV<<) time-delays have elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-319

P438 3 Operation
3.40.7 Monitoring Catenary and feeder Voltages

Enabled VA> PSx tVA> PSx
[ 040 074 ] [*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
V̲A LIMIT:
tVA> elapsed
[ 040 240 ]
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT: LIMIT:

VA> PSx tVA> PSx tVA>& tVA< elapsed
LIMIT: LIMIT:
VA>> PSx tVA>> PSx [ 040 244 ]
set 1 076 208 076 210
[*] [*]
set 2 077 208 077 210
set 3 078 208 078 210
set 4 079 208 079 210
LIMIT:
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT: tVA>> elapsed
VA>> PSx tVA>> PSx [ 040 241 ]
set 1 076 209 076 211
set 2 077 209 077 211
set 3 078 209 078 211 LIMIT: LIMIT:
set 4 079 209 079 211 VA< PSx tVA< PSx
[*] [*]
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT:
VA< PSx tVA< PSx
set 1 076 216 076 218
LIMIT:
set 2 077 216 077 218 tVA< elapsed
set 3 078 216 078 218 [ 040 242 ]
set 4 079 216 079 218

VA<< PSx tVA<< PSx LIMIT: LIMIT: tVA>>& tVA<< elapsed
VA<< PSx tVA<< PSx [ 040 245 ]
set 1 076 217 076 219 [*] [*]
set 2 077 217 077 219
set 3 078 217 078 219
set 4 079 217 079 219
LIMIT:
tVA<< elapsed
[ 040 243 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
VB> PSx tVB> PSx
[*] [*]
V̲B/V̲ref LIMIT:
tVB> elapsed
[ 040 246 ]

VB> PSx tVB> PSx tVB>& tVB< elapsed
LIMIT: LIMIT:
set 1 076 212 076 214 VB>> PSx tVB>> PSx [ 040 250 ]
set 2 077 212 077 214 [*] [*]
set 3 074 212 074 214
set 4 075 212 075 214
LIMIT:
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT: tVB>> elapsed
VB>> PSx tVB>> PSx [ 040 247 ]
set 1 076 213 076 215
set 2 077 213 077 215
set 3 078 213 078 215 LIMIT: LIMIT:
set 4 079 213 079 215 VB< PSx tVB< PSx
[*] [*]
Parameter LIMIT: LIMIT:
VB< PSx tVB< PSx
set 1 076 220 076 222
LIMIT:
set 2 077 220 077 222 tVB< elapsed
set 3 078 220 078 222 [ 040 248 ]
set 4 079 220 079 222

VB<< PSx tVB<< PSx LIMIT: LIMIT: tVB>>& tVB<< elapsed
VB<< PSx tVB<< PSx [ 040 251 ]
set 1 076 221 076 223
[*] [*]
set 2 077 221 077 223
set 3 078 221 078 223
set 4 079 221 079 223
LIMIT:
tVB<< elapsed
[ 040 249 ]
48Z5408A
Fig. 3-262: Monitoring catenary and feeder voltages.
The catenary and feeder voltages are monitored by two stages to determine
3-320 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.40.8 Monitoring Frequency

Enabled f> PSx tf> PSx
[ 040 074 ] [*] [*]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
f LIMIT:
tf> elapsed
[ 040 196 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
f>> PSx tf>> PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tf>> elapsed
[ 040 197 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
f< PSx tf< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tf< elapsed
[ 040 198 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
f<< PSx tf<< PSx
[*] [*]
LIMIT:
tf<< elapsed
[ 040 199 ]

f> PSx f>> PSx tf> PSx tf>> PSx
set 1 072 211 072 212 072 213 072 214
set 2 073 211 073 212 073 213 073 214
set 3 074 211 074 212 074 213 074 214
set 4 075 211 075 212 075 213 075 214

f< PSx f<< PSx tf< PSx tf<< PSx
set 1 072 215 072 216 072 217 072 218
set 2 073 215 073 216 073 217 073 218
set 3 074 215 074 216 074 217 074 218
set 4 075 215 075 216 075 217 075 218
48Z5418A
Fig. 3-263: Monitoring frequency.
The frequency is monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds or

falls below set thresholds. If it exceeds or falls below the thresholds a signal is
issued once a set time-delay has elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-321

P438 3 Operation
3.40.9 Monitoring the Linearized Measured DC Values
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>
[ 040 180 ]
LIMIT:
[ 040 074 ] IDC,lin> tIDC,lin>
[ 014 110 ] [ 014 112 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI: LIMIT:
Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. tIDC,lin> elapsed
[ 004 136 ] [ 040 182 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin>>
[ 040 181 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin>> tIDC,lin>>
[ 014 111 ] [ 014 113 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin>> elapsed
[ 040 183 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<
[ 040 184 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin< tIDC,lin<
[ 014 114 ] [ 014 116 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin< elapsed
[ 040 186 ]
LIMIT:
Starting IDC,lin<<
[ 040 185 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
IDC,lin<< tIDC,lin<<
[ 014 115 ] [ 014 117 ]
LIMIT:
tIDC,lin<< elapsed
[ 040 187 ]
S8Z52G6A
Fig. 3-264: Monitoring the linearized measured DC values.
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by
two stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If any of the
measured values exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-322 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.40.10 Monitoring the Measured “PT 100” Temperature Value
LIMIT:
Starting T>
[ 040 170 ]
LIMIT:
Enabled
[ 040 074 ] LIMIT: LIMIT:
T> tT>
[ 014 100 ] [ 014 103 ]
MAIN:
Protection active
306 001
MEASI: LIMIT:
Temperature T tT> elapsed
[ 004 133 ] [ 040 172 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T>>
[ 040 171 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T>> tT>>
[ 014 101 ] [ 014 104 ]
LIMIT:
tT>> elapsed
[ 040 173 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<
[ 040 174 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T< tT<
[ 014 105 ] [ 014 107 ]
LIMIT:
tT< elapsed
[ 040 176 ]
LIMIT:
Starting T<<
[ 040 175 ]
LIMIT: LIMIT:
T<< tT<<
[ 014 106 ] [ 014 108 ]
LIMIT:
tT<< elapsed
[ 040 177 ]
19Z5212A
Fig. 3-265: Monitoring the measured “PT 100” temperature value.
The temperature value that is measured by the P438 with a resistance

thermometer (PT 100) connected to the analog (I/O) module Y, is monitored by
two stages to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding
upper or lower limit values. If any of the measured values exceed or fall below
the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued after the
associated time period has elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-323

P438 3 Operation
3.41 Programmable Logic (Function Groups LOGIC and LOG_2)

Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals
within a framework of Boolean equations.
Two function groups for programmable logic are available, that can be used
independently of each other. There are only two differences between these two
function groups:
● LOGIC offers 128 logical equations.
LOG_2 offers only 4 logical equations.
● On the other hand, LOG_2 features long-term timers.
For example for output 1:
o LOGI C: Ti me t1 ou tpu t 1 and LOGIC: Time t2 output 1: settable
from 0 to 600 s.
o L OG_2: Ti me t 1 ou tput 1 and LOG_2 : Time t2 output 1: settable
from 0 to 60,000 s.
The following description concentrates on the function group LOGIC. Where

applicable, any differences to LOG_2 are mentioned.
Binary signals in the P438 may be linked by logical “OR” or “AND” operations
with the option of additional NOT operations by setting L OGIC: Fct.assignm.
outp. 1 (or LOGIC : F ct.as s ignm . outp. 2 to L OGIC : Fct.assignm.outp.
128, or LOG_2 : F ct .as si gnm. ou tp. 1 to L OG_2: Fct.assignm. out p. 4).
The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before “AND” before “OR”.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In
addition to the signals generated by the P438, initial conditions for governing the
equations can be set using setting parameters, through binary signal inputs, or
through the serial interfaces.
Logical operations of the function group LOGIC can be controlled through the
binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals LOGI C: Inpu t 01 EXT (or LOGIC: Input 0 2 EXT, …,
LOGIC : I np ut 4 0 EXT) have an updating function, whereas the input signals
LOGIC : Set 1 EXT (or LOGI C: Set 2 E XT, …, LOGIC: Set 8 EXT) are
latched. The logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs configured
for LOGIC : Se t 1 E XT if the corresponding reset input LOGIC: Reset 1 EX T)
has been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as “Logic externally set”. If the
input signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they
both have a logic value of “1”), then the last plausible state remains stored in
memory. (For LOG_2, there are no such parameters for assigning binary input
signals.)
3-324 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ When using the programmable logic, it is necessary to carry out a
functional type test to conform with the requirements of the relevant
protection/control application. In particular, it is necessary to verify that
the requirements for the implementation of logic linking (by setting) as
well as the time performance during startup of the P438, during operation
and when there is a fault (blocking of the P438) are fulfilled.
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 1 has been set
[ 034 067 ]
0: No
1: Yes
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
LOGIC:
Address 034 051 1 set externally
[ 034 075 ]
Address 034 059
LOGIC:
Set 1 EXT
[ 034 051 ]
LOGIC:
Reset 1 EXT
[ 034 059 ]
49Z9107A
Fig. 3-266: Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals. (The logic does not apply to
LOG_2.)
The L OGIC : Trigge r 1 signal is a “triggering function” that causes a 100 ms

pulse to be issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-325

P438 3 Operation
LOGIC:
General enable USER
LOGIC:
[ 031 099 ] Enabled
[ 034 046 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN: LOGIC:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001
[ 030 000 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
LOGIC: LOGIC:
Input 01 EXT Op. mode t output 1
[ 034 000 ] [ 030 001 ]
0
LOGIC:
Input 16 EXT
[ 034 015 ] 1
2
3
LOGIC:
1 has been set 4
[ 034 067 ]
5
0 5
LOGIC:
8 has been set
[ 034 074 ] 0: Without timer stage
LOGIC:
Time t1 output 1
1: Oper./releas.delay
[ 030 002 ]
2: Oper.del./puls.dur.
LOGIC: LOGIC:
1 set externally Time t2 output 1
[ 034 075 ] 3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
[ 030 003 ]
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt
5: Minimum time
LOGIC:
8 set externally LOGIC:
[ 034 082 ] Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
LOGIC:
Set 1 USER
[ 034 030 ]
LOGIC:
Set 8 USER
[ 034 037 ]
LOGIC:
Trigger 1
[ 034 038 ]
0
LOGIC:
1 Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
LOGIC:
Trigger 8
[ 034 045 ]
1
0: don't execute
1: execute
D5Z52CDA
Fig. 3-267: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOGIC (shown here for output 1).
3-326 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
LOG_2:
General enable USER
LOG_2:
[ 011 137 ] Enabled
[ 011 138 ]
0: No
1: Yes LOG_2:
Op. mode t output 1
[ 050 001 ]
MAIN: LOG_2:
Protection active Fct.assignm. outp. 1
306 001 [ 050 000 ] 0
1
Signal 1 2
3
Signal 2
4
Signal 3 5
0 5
Signal n
0: Without timer stage
LOG_2:
1: Oper./releas.delay Time t1 output 1
2: Oper.del./puls.dur. [ 050 002 ]
3: Op./rel.delay,retrig
LOG_2:
4: Op.del./puls.dur.,rt Time t2 output 1
5: Minimum time [ 050 003 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1 (t)
[ 052 033 ]
LOG_2:
Output 1
[ 052 032 ]
19Z80CDA
Fig. 3-268: Setting options for programmable logic, function group LOG_2 (shown here for output 1).
The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher order, equation
as an input signal thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean equations. The
equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each equation.
It should be noted that in the case of overlapping equations, the result is
provided by the equation with the highest order.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage with two
timer elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of
assigning a freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each
Boolean equation. In the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer
stage t2 has no effect. The following diagrams (Fig. 3-269, (p. 3-328) to
Fig. 3-273, (p. 3-330)) show the time characteristics for the various timer stage
operating modes.
If the P438 is switched to offline the equations are not processed and all outputs
are set to the “0” logic level.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-327

P438 3 Operation
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BYA
Fig. 3-269: Operating mode 1: Pickup/reset delay (Oper./releas.delay). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t) t2 t2
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
D5Z50BZA
Fig. 3-270: Operating mode 2: Pulse, delayed pickup (Oper.del./puls.dur.). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if
the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
3-328 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
Retrigger pulse
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t2
t2
D5Z50CAA
Fig. 3-271: Operating mode 3: Pickup/reset delay, retriggerable (Op./rel.delay,retrig). (This diagram is also valid for
LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
t2 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
t1 = 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t2 t2
Retrigger pulse
t1, t2 > 0s
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t2 t1 t2
t1 t1
D5Z50CBA
Fig. 3-272: Operating mode 4: Pulse, delayed pickup, retriggerable (Op.del./puls.dur.,rt). (This diagram is also valid
for LOG_2, if the signal parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-329

P438 3 Operation
LOGIC:
Output n
LOGIC:
Output n (t)
t1 t1
D5Z50CCA
Fig. 3-273: Operating mode 5: Minimum time (Minimum time). (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the signal
parameters are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary

input signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation
then has the same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has
been assigned were triggered.
3-330 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
LOGIC:
Sig.assig. outp. 1
[ 044 000 ]
Signal 1 EXT
[ AAA AAA ]
Signal 2 EXT
[ BBB BBB ]
Signal 3 EXT
[ CCC CCC ]
Signal n EXT
[ NNN NNN ]
Signal 1 EXT
Address AAA AAA
LOGIC: [ AAA AAA ]
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address AAA AAA
-Uxxx
LOGIC:
Sig.assig.outp. 1(t)
[ 044 001 ]
Signal 2 EXT
Address BBB BBB
[ BBB BBB ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
INP:
Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
Address BBB BBB
-Uxxx
D5Z52FBA
Fig. 3-274: Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations. (This diagram is also valid for LOG_2, if the
parameters from LOGIC are replaced by the corresponding ones from LOG_2 .)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-331

P438 3 Operation
3.42 TIMER (Function Group TIMER)

Four groups of timer are available in the P438. The timer can set time for starting
and ending automatically with start time (TIMER: Start hour 1, TIMER: St art
minute 1 ) and end time (TIMER: End hour 1, TIMER: End minute 1). Each
of the timer can set one or more repeat days in a week TIMER: Calendar 1
(from Monday to Sunday).
For example, it is able to set time for automatic's activation (e.g. keeping the
output relay closed) between 12 PM and 18 PM from Monday to Friday for timer
stage1 and between 16 PM and 19 PM on Saturday and Sunday for timer stage 2.
From version -655 the timer settings allow more flexibility.
If the end time is before (smaller than) start time, the "active" window will end on
the next day. For example, timer stage 1 is set for Saturday with start time 18
p.m. and end time 12 p.m., then it will be active from Saturday 18 p.m. until
Sunday 12 p.m.
If start and end timers are set to the same value, the timer stage gets active for
24h. For example, timer stage 1 is set for Saturday with start time 12 p.m. and
end time 12 p.m., then it will be active from Saturday 12 p.m. until Sunday 12
p.m.
The internal clock is the source of the Timer function. It is also possible to use the
time synchronised clock signal (GPS, DCF77, SNTP).
TIMER:
Calendar 1
TIMER: c
General enable USER [ 014 178 ]
[ 014 199 ]
TIMER: m out of n
Monday
[ 014 139 ]
.
.
.
TIMER:
Sunday
[ 014 169 ]
Φ
Hardware clock
Selected day of week c
TIMER:
Start hour 1
[ 014 089 ]
TIMER:
Start minute 1
[ 014 102 ]
TIMER:
End hour 1
[ 014 109 ]
TIMER:
End minute 1
[ 014 118 ]
Φ
TIMER:
Timer stage 1
[ 015 006 ]
19Z8854A
Fig. 3-275: TIMER logic (Calendar 1 shown as an example for 4 calendar timers).
3-332 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function

Groups DEV01 to DEV10)
The P438 is designed to control up to 10 switchgear units. The two-pole forcibly
guided termination contacts on the binary module X(6I 6O) are available for up to
6 of these.
For the remaining 4 switchgear units binary inputs and outputs on the power
supply module can be used in combination with external high-break relays, or
further binary modules with high-break contacts (ordering option).
See the table in Section 4.3, (p. 4-8) for the slots that have to be used for a
particular set of ordered modules.
The P438 provides a bay panel concept to simplify the configuration of the
switchgear control functions. The bay panel type defines the layout of a bay with
its switchgear units on the HMI, an automated I/O assignment and the
system/bay interlocking equations for all required switchgear units. The selection
of a bay type can be done with the parameter (220 000) MA IN: Type of bay. It
is also possible to create a customized bay type and upload it to the P438. (See
Section 3.43.1, (p. 3-333) for some more information.)
3.43.1 Bay Type Selection

The bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units on the HMI, an
automated I/O assignment and the system/bay interlocking equations for all
required switchgear units.
It is possible – using a special Bay Configuration Tool (BTC) being part of Easergy
Studio – to create a customized bay type and upload it to the P438.
To create customized bay types, the “Bay Type Configurator” (BTC), version 2.7
or higher, is needed. Older versions of the BTC can create not compatible hex files
and thus can lead to communication failures.
The parameter – MAI N: Type of bay – can then be used to select (i. e. activate)
this user-defined bay type. Note that there is no restriction to only one user-
defined bay type: In fact, multiple customized bay types can be created with
different IDs and be loaded into the P438. When using the BTC to create a bay
type, it is recommended to always use an ID number in the range of 5000 …
9999 for any customized bay type, because the pre-defined standard bay types
use IDs in the reserved range of 0001 … 4999. If the user tries to select a non-
existing ID via (220 000) MAI N: Type of bay (i. e. an ID for which neither a
standard nor a customized bay type is defined), then the selection will be
rejected and an error message “Signal from device: Bay type not assigned
(0x8073)” will be reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P438 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. This automatic assignment is defined via the parameter
MAIN : Auto-assi gn me nt I/O.
Should the required bay type be missing from the standard selection then the
user can contact the manufacturer of the P438 to request the definition of a
customized bay type to load into the P438.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-333

P438 3 Operation
In general, the selection of a bay type (via M A I N : T y p e o f b a y) is accepted by

the P438 only if all of the following requirements are fulfilled:
● The selected ID number is known by the P438, i. e. is either available
as a pre-defined standard bay type, or matches a bay type definition
that has been loaded as a customized bay type into the P438
memory in file transfer mode.
● A binary I/O module has been fitted to slot 6/7 (40 TE case) or 12/14
(84 TE case).
● The hardware (in particular the set of all binary I/O modules and
power supply) has got a sufficient number of inputs and outputs as
required by the selected bay type.
● None of the inputs/outputs required by the selected bay type has
been previously assigned to a non-control function.
In case of the setting M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O = Yes, the following two
constraints must be noted:
● The activation of a new bay type overwrites all DEVxx / SIG_1 /
CMD_1 assignments to I/O elements that have been previously made
(for the previous bay type definition).
● If the automatic I/O assignment fails because some required inputs
and outputs have been assigned to a non-control function, or because
the number of I/O elements available is not sufficient, then the
previously selected bay type remains active and an error message
“Signal from device: Hardware module not fitted (0x8063)” is
reported in the “kommprot.txt” log file.
3-334 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43.2 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
MAIN:
Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl.
[ 221 057 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
...
Signal n
Without function ≥1 MAIN:

Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Inp.asg.interl.deact
[ 221 007 ]
Without function &
Selected signal
MAIN:
SI active USER
[ 221 002 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Subst. interl. act.
0 [ 221 000 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
BI active USER
[ 221 003 ]
≥1 MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
0 [ 221 001 ]
0: No
1: Yes
49Z88ABC
Fig. 3-276: General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or canceling the
interlocks.
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control
functions of the P438, the P438 first checks whether the switch command may be
executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has
been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are
defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is
subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different
conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without
station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled
for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station
interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and
each control direction.
The bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately
configured binary signal input. This cancellation is effective for all of the
operating modes “Local”, “Remote” and “Remote & Local” (setting L OC : F ct .
assign. L /R k ey = R & L <-> L). In other words, the functionality of the binary
input for cancelling the bay and station interlocks is independent of the operating
mode of the control point for switching between local and remote control.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-335

P438 3 Operation
All station interlock functionality (e.g. the parameter M A I N : S I a c t i v e U S E R) is

active and available only if a communication module (i. e. a module of type “A”)
with 2 serial interfaces is fitted and either the IEC 60870‑5‑101 or ‑103
communication protocol is configured.
ILOCK:
Rset ILOCK violation
[ 221 123 ]
0 t
DEV01: ≥1 ≥1 MAIN:
Open cmd. rejection Interlock equ. viol.
⋮ [ 221 018 ]
DEVxx:
Open cmd. rejection
DEV01: ≥1
Close cmd. rejection
⋮
DEVxx:
19Z83ADA
Fig. 3-277: Rejection of the switching commands.
During a switch command is being executed, any further switch command is

rejected (“Double Command Lockout”). This includes interlocking of parallel
switching operations and further switch commands to the currently selected
switching unit.
3-336 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Control command Control command Control command

open / close open / close received open / close received
received from COMM1. from local HMI. from binary input.
Int. flag Int. flag Int. flag

OR (221 101) yes OR (221 101) yes OR (221 101) yes
OR (221 102) OR (221 102) OR (221 102)
OR (221 103) OR (221 103) OR (221 103)
set? set? set?
Command Command Command
rejected. rejected. rejected.
no no no
Internal flag set, Internal flag set, Internal flag set,

(221 101) set. (221 102) set. (221 103) set.
Cmd start:
Internal no
Command
parameter rejected.
check OK?
yes
no
Interlocking Command
check OK? rejected.
yes
Command Command received:

execution.
from COMM1: from local HMI: from binary input:
MAIN: MAIN: MAIN:

Command Cmd. fr. comm.interf Command from HMI Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl
termination.
221 101 221 102 221 103
Internal flag reset,

(221 101) reset,
(221 102) reset,
(221 103) reset.
19Z8123A
Fig. 3-278: “Double Command Lockout”.
3.43.3 Designation of External Devices

Each external device represented in the Bay Panel is identified by an external
device designation. The user can either select this designation from a list of over
70 pre-defined names (via the parameter D EV 0 1: D esign at. ex t. dev . in case
of DEV01, for example), or this parameter is set to Device Name User. With this
selection, a user-defined text for the name of the external device will be used as
the designation. This user-defined text has to be entered at DE V01: DEV-
Na me User (in case of DEV01, for example).
(The maximum length is 4 characters, as with the fixed identifiers. Longer text
entries are truncated to 4 characters internally.)
3.43.4 Defining a Bay Panel Type

With the selection of a Bay Panel type, the following definitions are made:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-337

P438 3 Operation
● Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.

● Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P438.
● The bay interlock conditions for the “Open” / “Close” command control of
the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock
function.
● Binary inputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
● Binary outputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
When a Bay Panel type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status
signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically
if M AI N: Auto-assign me nt I/O is set to Yes. If set to No, the user will need to
carry out this configuration. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows
which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands
for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P438 and the different possibilities to integrate a
switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P438 (processing of status
signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one
switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in
this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group
“COMM1:” with a blank address [ --- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or
from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address.
3-338 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43.5 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear

Units
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
Switch.device closed
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
c
◄
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
t 0
&
DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 027 ]
& ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
Control state
0: Intermediate pos. [ 210 018 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position 19Z50AJB
Fig. 3-279: Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units.
3.43.5.1 Status Signals

The status signals “Open” and “Closed” are assigned to binary signal inputs. The
signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see
Section 3.46.1.1, (p. 3-364)) are used for further processing. If no logic value of
“1” is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring
function is started. For the duration of the set time period for running time
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-339

P438 3 Operation
monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined
position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal “Intermediate position” is
issued.
If DEV01: Int erm. pos . suppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swit ch. device ope n, D EV 01: Switch.device closed or
D EV01: D ev. inte rm./f lt. pos.
The signal “Faulty position” is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have
not reached either their “Open” or “Closed” position after the set time period for
running time monitoring and the delay time set in MAIN: Delay
Man.Op .Supe rv. have elapsed. If DEV 01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. is set to
Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is
no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs
will be signaled.
3.43.5.2 Switch Truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to “Open” while the input has a logic value of
“1”.
3.43.6 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
3.43.6.1 Local or Remote Control of External Devices

Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The
selection of the control point is described in Section 3.4.6, (p. 3-15). Usually,
remote control is carried out via the communication interface, local control via
the keys on the local control panel. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled
via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via
D EV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.ope n or DEV01: In p.a sg.el.ct r.close). The setting
MAIN : Electrical control determines whether the inputs function as remote or
local control points.
Dependent on the respective position of control the P438 will issue the following
logic state signals:
● MA IN : C md. fr. comm.i nt e rf, or
● MA IN : C omm and f rom H MI, or
● MA IN : Cmd. fr. ele ctr.ctrl
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating
data memory:
● D EV01: Open cm d. recei ved
● D EV01: C lose cmd. recei ved
The operating mode of the control point is signaled as follows:
“Remote” “Local” “Remote & Local”

L OC: Rem.acc.block.active No Yes No
L OC: Loc.acc.bl ock. active Yes No No
3-340 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43.6.2 Selection of the Switchgear Unit to be Controlled and Generating a

Switching Request
LOC:
Loc.acc.block.active
[ 221 005 ]
LOC:
Return t. illum. trg
305 550
LOC:
305 551
MAIN:
Interlock equ. viol.
[ 221 018 ]
DEV01
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
MAIN:
Electrical control
[ 221 061 ]
2: Local
1: Remote
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
COMM1:
Open command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
COMM1:
Close command DEV01
[ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
DEV01:
End open command
307 002
DEV01:
End close command
307 003
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
MAIN:
307 012
End command
306 028
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
COMM1:
Motor rel. mon. trg. 307 011
[ --- --- ]
19Z50AAA
Fig. 3-280: Generating a switching request.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-341

P438 3 Operation
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is

sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control
panel using the selection key and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key to
generate the switching request. For control via binary inputs, the appropriate
control inputs need to be configured for switchgear units selected to be
controlled. For control via the communication interface, the control commands
“Open” or “Close” will also address the switchgear unit to be controlled.
3.43.6.3 Enabling Switching Commands
DEV01:
Open request
DEV01:
Close request
DEV01:
Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op
[ 210 041 ]
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
⋮
ILOCK:
Output 32
[ 250 063 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI open
Output 01 & ≥1
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. &
DEV01:
[ 221 001 ] Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl
[ 210 042 ] & ≥1 DEV01:
Open cmd. rejection
MAIN:
Subst. interl. act. ≥1
[ 221 000 ]
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ] & DEV01:
ILOCK: Enable BI close
Output 02 & ≥1
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl ≥1
[ 210 025 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes & ≥1 DEV01:
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int. ≥1
[ 210 026 ]
&
↗ 1: Yes DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI open
[ 210 039 ]
ILOCK:
Output 03 &
DEV01:
Fct.assig.BIwSI clos
[ 210 040 ]
ILOCK:
Output 04 &
&
&
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Enable SI Close 19Z50AEB
Fig. 3-281: Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching
commands by the bay interlock function.
3-342 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Before a switching command is executed, the P438 checks the interlocking

conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching
command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or
without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an
output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the
interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the “Open”
command for operation without the station interlock function.
3.43.6.4 Bay Interlock for Operation with the Station Interlock Function
MAIN:
Communication error
[ 221 019 ]
DEV01:
Close request
307 001
DEV01:
Open request
307 000
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act.
[ 221 001 ]
DEV01:
Enable BI open
307 004
DEV01:
Enable BI close
307 005 COMM1:
Open request DEV01
MAIN:
[ --- --- ]
Subst. interl. act.
[ 221 000 ]
DEV01:
Open w/o stat.interl
[ 210 025 ] DEV01:
Enable SI Open
307 019
0
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1: COMM1:
Enable SI open DEV01 Close request DEV01
[ --- --- ] [ --- --- ]
DEV01:
Close w/o stat. int.
[ 210 026 ]
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
307 020
0: No
1: Yes
COMM1:
Enabl.SI close DEV01
[ --- --- ]
19Z50AFA
Fig. 3-282: Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock.
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be

a communication link with the substation control level. If the P438 detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there
will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function,
the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching
enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At
substation control level, there will then be a check – taking into account the
station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the
substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching
operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still
present. Optionally, the “Open” or “Close” switching operation can be carried out
without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay
interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will
be considered.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-343

P438 3 Operation
3.43.6.5 Linking Protection Commands to Switching Commands

For circuit breakers, the “Open” command can be linked to the protection trip
signals. The “Close” command can also be linked to the close command of the
protection functions. The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units
are circuit breakers. The trip (open) or close commands of the protection
functions are executed directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.1
[ 210 021 ]
MAIN:
DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
0
DEV01:
1 Protection trip cmd.
307 013
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
M-trip command 1
[ 039 011 ]
DEV01:
With gen. trip cmd.2
[ 210 022 ]
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
M-trip command 2
[ 039 058 ]
DEV01:
With close cmd./prot
[ 210 023 ]
1 DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
307 014
0: No
1: Yes
MAIN:
Close command
[ 037 009 ]
48Z9357A
Fig. 3-283: Linking to the protection commands.
3-344 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43.6.6 Issue of Switching Commands
DEV01:
Protection trip cmd.
DEV01:
Protect. close cmd.
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd.
[ 221 230 ]
↗ MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
DEV01:
Oper. mode cmd.
[ 210 024 ]
1 & 1
t
2
& 1
t
3
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control
& 1
t
& 1
t DEV01:
MAIN: ≥1 Open command
Protection enabled [ 210 028 ]
&
[ 003 030 ]
DEV01:
↗ 0: No (= off) & ≥1 Close command
& [ 210 029 ]
MAIN:
Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
MAIN:
Enable control
[ 221 058 ]
MAIN:
Bay interlock. act. ≥1
[ 221 001 ]
&
DEV01:
Enable BI open
DEV01:
Enable SI Open
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
DEV01:
Open request
&
≥1
&
DEV01:
Enable BI close
DEV01:
Enable SI Close
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
DEV01: & ≥1
Close request
ASC:
&
ASC:
Close enable DEV01 19Z81AGB
Fig. 3-284: Issue of switching commands.
Dependent on the operating mode (set at D EV 0 1: Ope r. mode cmd.) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or
according to time control.
When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) is active and the parameter
AS C: Syst em int egrat . P Sx is set to Autom.synchr.control a “Close” request
will automatically issue a “Close” command for the circuit breaker after a close
enable was issued by the ASC.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-345

P438 3 Operation
However if AS C: Syst em i ntegrat. PSx is set to Autom.synchron.check ASC

will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and
continuously updated by the ASC function is transmitted – when configurations
have been set accordingly – to the central control station, where operators may
make decisions as to which external device is to be given a switching command.
3.43.6.6.1 Blocking of Switchgear Device Operation
DEV01: c
Function group DEV01
[ 210 047 ]
DEV01:
Block cmd open
[ 218 120 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
DEV01:
Open cmd blocked
Signal n 460 513
Selected signal
DEV01:
Block cmd close
[ 218 160 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
DEV01:
Close cmd blocked
Signal n 460 514
Selected signal
19Z8103A
Fig. 3-285: Blocking of switchgear device operation.
It is possible to generally block open and / or close commands to a switchgear

device. Setting parameters D EV 01: Bl ock cmd open and DEV01: Block
cmd c lose (and correspondent parameters for the other DEVxx) are available
for this purpose. Due to safety reasons the blocking inputs are effective only if no
command is active. During a switching operation the blocking is disabled to
secure that the switch will move always into a safe position.
To each of these setting parameters can be signals assigned; each of these
signals then activate the blocking of the switching command appropriate to this
setting parameter. In this case the signal MA IN: Interlock e qu. viol. is issued,
just like with a breach of the interlocking conditions.
3.43.6.6.2 External Termination Control

If the operating mode Time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the
control process of external switchgear units by using external termination
contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P438 at MAIN: W. ext. cmd.
termin. to Yes and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be
connected to the external termination contacts. The input configuration has to be
done for each device separately. Be aware that an external command
termination does not make sense for a fast switch as a circuit breaker, as its
operation is edge-controlled and involves no motor being directly time-controlled
(contrast to a disconnector drive).
3-346 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43.6.7 Switch Truck

For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is
possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If
such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the
associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of
“1”.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-347

P438 3 Operation
3.43.6.8 Time Control of Switching Commands
DEV01:
Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug
[ 210 014 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
⋮
Signal n
Without function ≥1
Selected signal
DEV01:
≥1 Switch. device open
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc. [ 210 036 ]
[ 210 011 ] & DEV01:
≥1 [ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
=1 1 Dev. interm./flt.pos
>S [ 210 038 ]
11 &
1
>R
Selected group >S &
11
◄ >R
1
≥1 DEV01:
End open command
c
≥1 DEV01:
◄ End close command
DEV01:
Open signal EXT Φ & >S
11
[ 210 030 ] Debouncing 1
>R
&
DEV01:
Closed signal EXT Chatter suppression DEV01:
[ 210 031 ] Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 004 ]
◄ ◄
MAIN: t 0
Direct motor control & ≥1 ≥1
DEV01: &
Open command &
DEV01:
[ 210 028 ] Switch. device runn.
DEV01: &
Close command DEV01:
Stat.ind.interm.pos.
[ 210 029 ]
& [ 210 027 ]
DEV01:
Start runn.time mon.
& & ≥1
0 5s 0 &
&
1
0: No ◄
1: Yes
0
0⋯3 DEV01:
DEV01: Control state
StartCmdTime superv. [ 210 018 ]
0: Intermediate pos.
[ 210 007 ]
1: Open
2: Closed
19Z80AKB
t 0 3: Faulty position MAIN:

& Startcmdtime exceed.
& [ 221 112 ]
≥1
Fig. 3-286: Monitoring of switching commands.
After sending an Open / Close command, running time monitoring for the
switchgear unit is started.
The P438 expects that the switchgear unit has reached its intermediate position
within a period of time that can be configured via DEV0 1: StartC mdTime
superv . (for DEV01, respective setting parameters exist for the other DEVxx). If
3-348 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
the switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and an exceeded timer is flagged by
the signal MA IN : Startcmdti me e xcee d.. In case of a switchgear unit for
which it is (almost) impossible to detect the intermediate position (for example a
Circuit Breaker) it is recommended to switch off this monitoring by setting the
parameter to Blocked.
Moreover, the P438 expects a status signal – “Open” or “Closed” to be issued by
the switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status
signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at
appropriately configured binary inputs on the P438, which can be set to
debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see Section 3.46.1.1, (p. 3-364)). For
the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear
unit are back to a defined position – either “Open” or “Closed” – the signal
“Intermediate position” is issued.
If DEV01: Int erm. pos. s u ppr. is set to Yes, the previous switchgear unit
status will continue to be signaled to the communication interfaces while the
switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have
reached their new position, the updated status is signaled accordingly to the
communication interfaces. This parameter has no impact to internal signals, such
as DEV01: Swi tch. de vice ope n, DEV 01: Swit ch. device closed or
D EV01: Dev. int erm./flt.pos.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their “Open” or
“Closed” position after the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed the signal Faulty position is issued. If DE V0 1: Stat .in d.in ter m. pos. is
set to Yes, a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and
there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary
inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n.. is set to No) the switching command is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or
‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time period for running time
monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-341)).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected
(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n.. is set to Yes) the switching command is
terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination
command is issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is
active.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-349

P438 3 Operation
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
3
1
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
1 3 4
10 ms DEV01: DEV01:
Latching time Op.time switch. dev.
[ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
19Z5201B
Fig. 3-287: Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
DEV01:
3
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
1 3
10 ms DEV01:
Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
19Z5202B
Fig. 3-288: Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control, example for
switching operation “close”.
3-350 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.43.6.9 Monitoring the Number of CB Operations Permitted

The maximum number of CB operations within an ARC cycle (or within a specific
time period) may be set with parameter MAIN: CB1 max . oper. cap.
Associated with this parameter is the counter at MA IN: CB1 act . ope r. cap. to
which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as
the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a “1 out of n”
parameter at MAI N: CB1 ready f ct.ass ign.
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at MA IN: CB1
act. oper. cap. are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation
of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals DE V0 1: Swit ch.
device open and DE V01 : Switch.de vice clos e d.
The counter at MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. may only be decremented to a
value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control
functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB
fault has occurred (i.e. MAI N: CB1 f aul ty EXT is set to Yes) the counter
M AIN: CB1 act. ope r. cap. is immediately set to 1.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-351

P438 3 Operation
3.43.7 Direct Motor Control
3.43.7.1 Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control
DEV01: + MAIN:
Start runn.time mon. No. motor drive op.
307 008
R [ 221 025 ]
MAIN:
Perm.No.mot.drive op
MAIN: [ 221 027 ]
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ]
1: execute COMP
MAIN: n
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
MAIN:
Reset LED MAIN:
306 020 n>No. permiss. oper. Mon. mot. drives tr.
[ 221 056 ]
n=1
MAIN:
Mon.time mot.drives
[ 221 026 ]
MAIN:
Cool.time mot.drives t
[ 221 028 ]
19Z6417A
Fig. 3-289: Monitoring the Motor Drives in Case of Direct Motor Control.
For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches, isolating
links or grounding switches, a monitoring function is provided to protect motors
from overheating.
The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. If
the number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set
limit, the signal MAI N: Mon. mot. drive s tr . is issued. For the duration of the
set cooling time, no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be
executed. Once the set cooling time has elapsed, the control commands are
enabled again.
3.43.7.2 Counter for the Open / Close Commands
DEV01:
Operation counter
[ 210 043 ]
DEV01:
m CT=m Operation counter
[ 210 043 ]
DEV01:
Open command
[ 210 028 ] ≥1 +
DEV01:
Oper.count.limit
R
DEV01: [ 218 211 ]
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
COMP
[ 003 002 ] 1 ≥1 DEV01:
1: execute Warning op.count.
[ 219 081 ]
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z8104A
Fig. 3-290: Counter for the Open / Close Commands.
3-352 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
The diagram above shows the example of function group DEV01. The logic,
however, is valid for all DEVxx with the appropriate parameters.
All Open and Close commands to the switchgear unit are counted. One counter
per DEVxx function group is available for this purpose.
Moreover, a limit value can optionally be set for the counter value. If the counter
value reaches the set limit a warning signal is issued. Due to safety reasons the
switchgear control will not be blocked when the set limit has been reached.
3.43.7.3 Time Control for Direct Motor Control

The control sequence described above applies to all switchgear units operated
via an “Open” contact or a “Close” contact. For bays with direct motor control of
load disconnecting switches, isolating links or grounding switches, the following
modified control sequence described below applies to motor-operated switchgear
units. The list of Bay Panel types shows which bay types are defined for direct
motor control. An example for the connection of a bay with direct motor control
is illustrated in Chapter “Installation and Connection”.
If a Bay Panel type with direct motor control is selected, a binary input for the
status signal of the motor relay and one output relay each to trigger the motor
relay and the shunt windings will have to be configured. In the example
illustrated in Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354), the single-pole command
CMD _1: C omman d C012 is defined for control of the motor relay, the single-
pole command C MD_1: Command C0 11 is defined for control of the shunt
windings and the single-pole signal SIG_1: Si gnal S0 12 E XT (debounced and
conditioned by chatter suppression) is defined for the status signal to the motor
relay.
After triggering the motor relay, a set monitoring time period is started during
which the status signal must be issued by the motor relay. If the status signal is
not received during this time period a signal is transferred to the substation
control level.
The P438 issues the following signals (depending on the type of fault) when the
monitoring time delay has expired:
● (221 110) MAIN: DE V op.ti me e xce e de d – This fault signal is issued (as
a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after a command has been issued and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
For further processing each of these fault signals may be configured to selection
parameters from the function groups LED (assignment to LED indicators), OUTP
(assignment to output relays), LOGIC (processing by the programmable logic
function), COMMx / IEC / GOOSE (signaling via the control system) or they may be
mapped to the signal panel as an alarm signal. Acknowledging from the local
control panel HMI is done by pressing the CLEAR (C) key.
If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time
period, the running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously
with this status signal. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as
with electromechanically operated switchgear units.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected the
“Close” command to the motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has
elapsed, when either the “Open” or “Closed” position status signal is received or
the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Fig. 3-280,
(p. 3-341)). The monitoring time period is again started with the termination of
the “Close” command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the control
commands “Open” or “Close” are also terminated. The same is valid for the
shunt windings.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-353

P438 3 Operation
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected

(MAIN : W. e xt. cmd. termi n. is set to Yes) the switching command to the
motor relay is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when a
termination command is issued while the set time period for running time
monitoring is active. The switching command to the motor relay is always
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed. The monitoring time period is
again started with the termination of the “Close” command to the motor relay
and after it has elapsed the control commands “Open” or “Close” are also
terminated.
MAIN:
Protection enabled
[ 003 030 ]
0: No (= off)
MAIN:
W. ext. cmd. termin.
[ 221 063 ]
0: No
1: Yes
DEV01:
Switch. device runn.
307 010
DEV01:
Latching time runn.
307 011
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Open
[ 210 015 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
&
Signal n
Selected signal
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
Selected signal
MAIN:
Direct motor control
306 029
DEV01: & CMD_1:

Open command Command C012
[ 210 028 ] [ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
& & CMD_1:
Command C011
[ 200 051 ]
DEV01:
Latching time elaps.
307 012
MAIN:
Mon.time Dir.Contr.
[ 221 060 ]
COMM1:
& Motor rel. mon. trg.
SIG_1: Debouncing [ --- --- ]
Signal S012 EXT
[ 226 092 ] &
MAIN:
Chatter suppression & End command
306 028
DEV01:
& Start runn.time mon.
307 008
SIG_1:
Logic signal S012
[ 226 093 ]
48Z9358A
Fig. 3-291: Control and monitoring of the motor relay.
3-354 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
CMD_1:
Command C011
[ 200 051 ]
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
CMD_1:
Command C012
[ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
10 ms MAIN: DEV01: DEV01:

Mon.time Dir.Contr. Latching time Op.time switch. dev.
[ 221 060 ] [ 210 005 ] [ 210 004 ]
19Z5203C
Fig. 3-292: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-355

P438 3 Operation
DEV01:
Close command
[ 210 029 ]
CMD_1:
Command C012
[ 200 056 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Inp. asg. end Close
[ 210 016 ]
10 ms MAIN: DEV01:
Mon.time Dir.Contr. Latching time
[ 221 060 ] [ 210 005 ]
19Z5204C
Fig. 3-293: Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination.
3-356 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.44 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)

The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units in the bay are
enabled only after interlock conditions have been checked. The interlock
conditions are defined in the form of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic
function.
The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the ‘Open’ and ‘Close’ operations of the individual switchgear units
in the bay. The bay interlock equations for operation with station interlock differ
from the bay interlock equations for operation without station interlock. These
automatically defined interlock conditions – determined by the choice of bay type
– can be modified by the user at any time to fit particular station requirements.
The following signals acquired by the P438 are linked by logic operations for the
bay interlock:
● Function blocks 1 and 2
● Programmable logic outputs
● Switchgear position signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
● Single-pole signals, after debouncing and chatter suppression
A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available to
define interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without
the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: “NOT” before
“AND” before “OR”. The output signal of one equation can be fed into a higher-
order equation as an input thus creating a sequence of interlinked Boolean
equations.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-357

P438 3 Operation
ILOCK:
[ 250 000 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 1 active
[ 221 015 ]
MAIN:
Fct. block. 2 active
[ 221 023 ]
MAIN:
DEV op.time exceeded
[ 221 110 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01
[ 042 032 ]
LOGIC:
Output 01 (t)
[ 042 033 ]
DEV01:
Switch. device open
[ 210 036 ]
DEV01:
[ 210 037 ]
DEV01:
Dev. interm./flt.pos
[ 210 038 ]
SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
[ 226 005 ]
GOOSE:
Ext.Dev01 closed
[ 109 002 ]
GOOSE:
Ext.Dev01 interm.pos
[ 109 003 ]
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
& ≥1
ILOCK:
Output 01
[ 250 032 ]
48Z9359A
Fig. 3-294: Interlocking logic as illustrated for equation 1.
3.44.1 IEC 61850 Reporting

As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
IEC 61850 communication protocol it is a requirement that these interlock
conditions are cyclically checked and not only with the request for a switching
operation.
Therefore the parameter (221 104) IL OCK: Cycl e t inte rl.check allows for
setting the cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s), after which a check of the
interlock conditions is carried out. If this parameter is set to blocked (default
value), the ILOCK signals over IEC 61850 will be updated only if a control
command gets executed. If the DEV state changes without a control command
these signals remain unchanged. As additional processor capacity must be
provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable
compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. On the one hand it is
desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that
changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays, but
on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so short that the P438
system will be under too much strain. As the P438 CPU load is dependent on the
3-358 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to

suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-359

P438 3 Operation
3.45 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)

Commands may be transmitted to the P438 via the communications interface.
When the P438 receives such a command, and if the remote control mode is
enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal
issued.
The user can select the operating mode for each 1-pole command. The following
settings are possible:
● Long command
● Short command
● Persistent command
If the operating mode Long command or Short command has been selected the
output relay will be triggered for the time period set at MAIN: Cmd. dur. long
cmd. or MA IN : Cmd . dur. s h ort cmd..
The setting options and the functional sequence are shown in the example for
Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.
MAIN:
Cmd. dur.long cmd. OUTP:
[ 221 230 ] Fct.assignment K xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
MAIN:
Cmd. dur. short cmd.
[ 221 231 ]
K x1
CMD_1: CMD_1:
Command C001 config. Oper. mode cmd. C001 K x2 -K xxx
[ 200 004 ] [ 200 002 ]
K x3
K xx
0 1
1 2 Address 200 001 &
0: No 3
1: Yes
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Persistent command
CMD_1:
& 1 ≥1 Command C001
& t [ 200 001 ]
COMM1:
Command C001
[ - - - - - - ]
LOC:
[ 221 004 ]
& 1
t
&
19Z50ALB
Fig. 3-295: Functional sequence for single-pole commands, as illustrated for Command C001.
3-360 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.46 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)

Binary, single-pole signals issued by the system may be transmitted by the P438
via its appropriately configured binary signal inputs to the control station.
Such single-pole input signals are conditioned by debouncing and chatter
suppression (see Section 3.46.1.1, (p. 3-364)). This conditioned signal is then
presented as SI G_1: L ogi c s ign al S00 1 (to SIG_1: L ogic s ignal S012).
Signaling behavior via the communications interface is determined by selecting
the operating mode. The following settings are possible:
● Without function
● Start/end signal
● Transient signal
If setting Without function has been selected then no message is transmitted
when the signal state at the binary signal input changes. If setting Start/end
signal has been selected then a message is transmitted every time the signal
state at the binary signal input changes. A requirement for transmission of the
“Start signal” message is that the logic “1” signal is present for the set minimum
time period. If setting Transient signal has been selected then a message is
transmitted every time the signal state at the binary signal input changes form
logic “0” to logic “1”.
The following figure displays setting modes and the functional sequence with the
example for logic signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole
signals.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-361

P438 3 Operation
SIG_1: SIG_1:
Signal S001 config. Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 007 ] [ 226 003 ]
0: No Selected group
1: Yes
Debouncing SIG_1:
Logic signal S001
SIG_1: [ 226 005 ]
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
Chatter suppression
SIG_1:
Min. sig. dur. S001
[ 226 002 ]
COMM1:
Signal S001,log
[ --- ---]
SIG_1:
Oper. mode sig. S001
[ 226 001 ]
0: Without function
1: Start/end signal
2: Transient signal
19Z50AMA
Fig. 3-296: Functional sequence for single-pole signals with the example for logic signal S001.
3-362 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.46.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control
SIG_1:
Gr.asg. debounc.S001
[ 226 003 ]
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
4: Group 4
5: Group 5
6: Group 6
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
SIG_1:
Signal S001 EXT
[ 226 004 ]
DEV01:
Gr. assign. debounc.
[ 210 011 ]
8 MAIN:
Debounce time gr. 1
1: Group 1 [ 221 200 ]
2: Group 2 MAIN:
Chatt.mon. time gr.1
3: Group 3
[ 221 201 ]
4: Group 4
MAIN:
5: Group 5 Change of state gr.1
6: Group 6 [ 221 202 ]
7: Group 7
8: Group 8
Debouncing
&
COMM1:
DEV01: Chatter suppression Debounced signal
Closed signal EXT 304 400
[ 210 031 ] Group 1
DEV01:
Open signal EXT
[ 210 030 ]
19Z5067B
Fig. 3-297: Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1.
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time
acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as
standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for
each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set.
Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious
pickups.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-363

P438 3 Operation
3.46.1.1 Debouncing and Chatter Suppression
3.46.1.1.1 Debouncing
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e
Signal sequence
time tag
F0Z5011B
Fig. 3-298: Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge (e.g. parameter
M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort or 1stEdge,OpMem sorted.) Example: Set debouncing
time: 50 ms, s: start, e: end.
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of
the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers
the timer stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram
containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the
time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter MAIN: Tim e
t ag to the value After debounce time.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is
generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce
time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of
MAIN : Time tag to the value 1stEdge,OpMem unsort) they are not necessarily
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter
has been set to the value 1stEdge,OpMem sorted then all entries are always
saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.
Time Tag
The following overview illustrates how the (221 098) MAIN: Time tag setting is
operating.
3-364 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
Acquisition of binary signals for control

1) 1)
0 T1 T2
Voltage present at input terminals:

Filter function to suppress transient interferences (required number of steps with
active signal) [F]
3)
(226 004) SIG_1 : Signal S001 EXT
}
(no time tag, internal signal to start debouncing)2)
1stEdge,OpMem sorted:
(226 005) SIG_1: Logic signal S001
● on COMM1/IEC T L
(Signaling at T2 with time tag T1

T=L
● internal on operating memory
(Entry in operating memory at T2 with time tag T2
1stEdge,OpMem unsort:
● on COMM1/IEC T L

T L
After debounce time:

● on COMM1/IEC T=L
T=L
T = Time tag
L = Log of state
1) T2 = T1 (cycle time) + debounce time

2) SIG_1: Signal S00 1 EXT is not foreseen for any further transmission via communication
interface, neither for assigning to functions nor LOGIC.
3) Filter (e. g. 3 sampling steps)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-365

P438 3 Operation
3.46.1.1.2 Chatter Suppression
Telegram with
time tag 1s 2e 3s 4e
Signal sequence
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
20ms 200ms
200ms
time tag
Debouncing
F0Z5012A
Fig. 3-299: Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression. Set debouncing time: 20 ms, set chatter monitoring
time: 200 ms, number of admissible signal changes: 4, s: start, e: end.
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the
set monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated
for the admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can
be set. After the first “inadmissible” signal change, no further telegrams are
generated and the timer stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing,
it is re-triggered by each new signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed,
each signal change triggers a telegram.
3-366 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3 Operation P438
3.47 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)

The P438 features four binary counters. Each of these can count the positive
pulse edges of a binary signal present at an appropriately configured binary
signal input. Such a binary signal can be provided with debouncing.
3.47.1 Enable/Disable the Counting Function

The counting function (COUNT) can be disabled or enabled via setting
parameters.
3.47.2 Debouncing
Count
Signal sequence
50ms
19Z50APA
Fig. 3-300: Debouncing signal flow. Set debouncing time: 50 ms.
The first positive pulse edge of the binary input signal to be counted will trigger a
timer stage which will continue to run for the set debouncing time period. Each
positive pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage. The
binary input signal will be counted if it is stable during the set debouncing time
period.
The debouncing time can be set separately for each of the four counters.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it
is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, it will not be
counted.
3.47.3 Counting Function

The debounced binary signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. The counters may
be set to a specific count value (preload function) by setting a parameter or via
the serial interfaces. The values of the counters can be shown on the LC-display
and read out via the PC interface or the communications interface.
For each of the four counters, there is a limit value that can be optionally set:
● COUN T: Limi t coun ter 1 (and the same way for counters 2 to 4),
● settable from 1 to 65000,
● setting “Blocked” disables the limit check. (This setting is the default
value.)
A warning signal (C OUNT: Warn in g cou nt 1 and the same way for counters 2
to 4) is issued if the associated counter value exceeds the set limit.
3.47.4 Transmitting the Counter Values via Communications Interface

The counter values are transmitted via the communications interface when a
signal is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input, a trigger
signal is issued by a setting parameter or at cyclic intervals as set at the cycle
time stage COUNT: Cycl e t.cou nt trans m. When the counter value is
transmitted at cyclic intervals, then transmission is time synchronized if the ratio
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3-367

P438 3 Operation
60/(set cycle time) comes to an integer. In all other cases the counter values are
transmitted at time intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
3.47.5 Counter Values Reset
COUNT:
General enable USER
[ 217 000 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Enabled
0: No [ 217 001 ]
MAIN: 1: Yes
Protection enabled COUNT:
[ 003 030 ] Count 1
1: Yes (= on) [ 217 100 ]
COUNT: COUNT:
Debounce t. count. 1 m CT=m Count 1
[ 217 160 ] [ 217 100 ]
+
COUNT: Debouncing
Set counter 1 EXT
R
[ 217 130 ]
COUNT:
Transmit counts USER
[ 217 008 ]
0
COUNT:
1 Transmit counts
[ 217 010 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
C
COUNT:
Transmit counts EXT
[ 217 009 ]
COUNT:
Cycle t.count transm
C
[ 217 007 ] COMM1:
Count 1
[ --- --- ]
G
COUNT:
Reset USER
[ 217 003 ]
= 0 min
0
COUNT:
1 Reset
[ 217 005 ]
0: don't execute
1: execute
COUNT:
Reset EXT
[ 217 004 ]
MAIN:
General reset USER
[ 003 002 ] 1
1: execute
MAIN:
General reset EXT
[ 005 255 ]
19Z82ANA
Fig. 3-301: Binary Count. (This diagram shows counter 1 as an example. The displayed logic is also valid for
counters 2 to 4, where C O U N T : S e t c o u n t e r 1 E X T and C O U N T : C o u n t 1 have to be replaced by the
respective parameters.
The counter values may be reset – all at once – by setting parameter

C OUNT: Re se t U SER or via an appropriately configured binary signal input as
well as by the general reset action.
3-368 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
4 Design
The P438 is available in different types of cases and with different combinations
of modules.
The P438 is equipped with a fixed local control panel. The local control panel is
covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of IP protection will be
maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel
display consisting of multi-colored LED indicators is also incorporated (see
Section 6.2, (p. 6-2)). The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in
plain text on a label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the hinged
cover at the bottom of the local control panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-1

P438 4 Design
4.1 Designs
The P438 is available in a surface-mounted and a flush-mounted case. Depending
on the connection type – pin-terminal or ring-terminal connection – the case sizes
differ. The location diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)) show the available
combinations of case widths and connection types.
Electrical connections are made via plug-in threaded terminal blocks. The
threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after unscrewing the torx head steal screws on the sides (see
Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➀) and removing the local control panel. The local control
panel can then be secured by inserting the tabs in the slots in the left side wall
(see Fig. 4-1, (p. 4-3), ➁). The flush-mounted case is connected at the back of
the case.
WARNING
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
⚫ The local control panel (or front element) is connected to processor
module P by a plug-in connecting cable. Make sure the connector position
is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage
or unintended equipment operation.
DANGER
⚫ Do not open the secondary circuit of live system current transformers! If
the secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the
resulting voltages will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
⚫ For pin-terminal connection devices, the terminal block for system current
transformer connection is not a shorting block! Therefore always short-
circuit the system current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
injury.
4-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

4 Design P438
Fig. 4-1: Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel . The illustration shows the 84TE case with fixed
local control panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-3

P438 4 Design
4.2 Dimensional Drawings
4.2.1 Dimensional Drawings for the 40 TE Case
147.5
177.5
184.5
213.4 257.1
242.6
260.2
Fig. 4-2: Surface-mounted 40 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)
4-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

4 Design P438
177.5
227.9
213.4 253.6
203.0
155.4
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
181.3
Fig. 4-3: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
101.6
177.5
213.4 227.9
242.6 253.6
260.2
6.4
186.5
101.6
224.5
242.6
Fig. 4-4: Flush-mounted case 40 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with

angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-5

P438 4 Design
4.2.2 Dimensional Drawings for the 84 TE Case
147.5
177.5
184.5
434.8 257.1
464.0
481.6
Fig. 4-5: Surface-mounted 84 TE case. (Dimensions in mm.)

177.5
227.9
434.8 253.6
284.9
259.0
25.9
159.0
168.0
5.0
5.0
410.0
Fig. 4-6: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets).
(Dimensions in mm.)
4-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

4 Design P438
101.6
177.5
434.8 227.9
253.6
464.0
481.6
6.4
186.5
101.6
445.9
464.0
Fig. 4-7: Flush-mounted case 84 TE with panel opening, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame).
(Dimensions in mm.)
The device has increased mechanical robustness if flush-mount method 2 (with

angle brackets and frame) is used for the flush-mounted case.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-7

P438 4 Design
4.3 Hardware Modules

The P438 is constructed from standard hardware modules. The following table
gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P438.
Key:
● ●: standard equipment,
● ○: optional,
● ☐: depending on order,
● *: Module is not depicted in the terminal connection diagrams (Section 5.7,
(p. 5-34)).
● →xx: Module has to be fitted into slot number xx.
● 1st→xx, 2nd→yy [etc.]: If several modules of the same type may be ordered,
these must be fitted into the appropriate slots in a particular order: If only
one has been ordered it must be fitted into slot xx (i. e. slot yy is not
permitted). If two modules have been ordered these must be fitted into
slots xx and yy, etc.
4-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

4 Design P438
Item Number Description Type Width P438 P438 P438

‑418 ‑419 ‑420
9650356 A ff Serial communication module A(CH1 CH2) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(for RS 485 wire connection) →02 →02 →02
9650355 A ff Serial vommunication module

(for plastic fiber)
9650354 A ff Serial communication module

(for glass fiber, ST connector)
9652162 A ff Single IP Ethernet module A(SEB LC) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(100 Mbit/s, glass fiber LC connector, →02 →02 →02
2nd wire RJ45)
9652161 A ff Single IP Ethernet module A(SEB RJ45)

(100 Mbit/s, wire RJ45)
9652160 A ff Redundant IP Ethernet module A(REB LC)

(100 Mbit/s, glass fiber LC connector,
PRP/HSR/RSTP switchable, 2nd wire
RJ45)
9652159 A ff Redundant IP Ethernet module A(REB RJ45)

(100 Mbit/s, wire RJ45, PRP/HSR/RSTP
switchable, 2nd wire RJ45)
9651567 D ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3 A(CH3) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(RS 485) →03 →03 →03
9651569 D ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3

(for glass fiber)
9651566 D ff InterMiCOM Module COMM3

(RS 232)
0336187 D ff * Bus module (digital, for 40 TE device) B ●
0336188 C ff * Bus module (digital, for 84 TE device) B ● ●
0336421 B ff * Bus module (analog) B ● ● ●
9651473 Local control module (text HMI, L ☐ ☐ ☐

European font)
9651474 Local control module (text HMI, L ☐ ☐ ☐

Cyrillic font)
9650319 Local control module L ☐

(graphical HMI, 40 TE)
9650257 Local control module L ☐ ☐

(graphical HMI, 84 TE)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-9

P438 4 Design

‑418 ‑419 ‑420
9652190 E ff * Processor Unit P 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐

(Railway comp. Ethernet Board 2) →01 →01 →01
(Pre-Assembled)
9652191 E ff * Processor Unit

(Railway without communication
module)

(Railway with serial communication
modules)

(Railway with Ethernet board 2)
9652179 A ff Transformer module 3 × 1/5 A, T 8TE ☐ ☐ ☐

2 × 100 V, 4 × Freq →04 →04 →04
(Pin connection)
9652180 A ff Transformer module 3 × 1/5 A,

2 × 100 V, 4 × Freq
(Ring connection)
9651534 B ff Power supply module 24 – 60 V DC, V(4I 8O) 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐

standard variant →09 →20 →20
(switching threshold 18 V)
9651536 B ff Power supply module 24 – 60 V DC,

switching threshold 73 V



9651544 B ff Power supply module 60 – 250 V DC / V(4I 8O) 4TE ☐ ☐ ☐

100 – 230 V AC, Standard variant →09 →20 →20
with switching threshold at 65% of 24
VDC (VA,min)
9651546 B ff Power supply module 60 – 250 V DC /

100 – 230 V AC, Special variant with
switching threshold at 65% of 110
VDC (VA,nom)
4-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

4 Design P438

‑418 ‑419 ‑420

VDC (VA,nom)

VDC (VA,nom)

VDC (VA,nom)
0337612 A ff Binary I/O module X(24I) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(24 binary inputs), Standard variant 1st→0 1st→1 1st→
with switching threshold at 65% of 24 8 6 16
VDC (VA,min)
2nd→ 2nd→ 2nd→
03 03 03
9651304 A ff Binary I/O module
(24 binary inputs), Special variant
with switching threshold at 65% of
110 VDC (VA,nom)

127 VDC (VA,nom)

220 VDC (VA,nom)

250 VDC (VA,nom)
9651493 B ff Binary module (4 high-break X(4H) 4TE ○→1 ○→1 ○→1

contacts) 0 8 8
9651512 B ff Binary I/O module X(6I 3O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 3 output relays), →10 →18 →18
Standard variant with switching
threshold at 65% of 24 VDC (VA,min)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-11

P438 4 Design

‑418 ‑419 ‑420
9651513 B ff Binary I/O module

(6 binary inputs, 3 output relays),
Special variant with switching
threshold at 65% of 110 VDC
(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
0337377 E ff Binary I/O module X(6I 6O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 6 output relays), 1st→0 1st→1 1st→
Standard variant with switching 6 2 12
07 14 14
(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
4-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

4 Design P438

‑418 ‑419 ‑420

(VA,nom)
000336971 D ff Binary I/O module X(6I 8O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(6 binary inputs, 8 output relays), 1st→0 1st→1 1st→
Standard variant with switching 6 0 10
07 12 12
(6 binary inputs, 8 output relays), 3rd→ 3rd→
Special variant with switching 14 14
threshold at 65% of 110 VDC 4th→ 4th→
(VA,nom) 16 16

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)

(VA,nom)
0336973 B/D ff Binary module (6 output relays) X(6O) 4TE ○ ○ ○

→10 →18 →18
0337406 D ff Analog I/O module, standard variant Y(4I) 4TE ○ ○ ○

(switching threshold 18 V) →08 →08 →08
9651307 A ff Analog I/O module, switching

threshold 73 V

threshold 90 V

threshold 146 V

threshold 155 V
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 4-13

P438 4 Design
The space available for the modules measures 4 HE in height by 40 TE or 84 TE

in width (HE = 44.45 mm, TE = 5.08 mm).
The location of the individual modules and the position of the threaded terminal
blocks in the P438 are shown in the location figures and terminal connection
diagrams (Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)).
4-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
5 Installation and Connection
DANGER
⚫ When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be
present in certain parts of the equipment.
injury.
DANGER
area.
in operation.
must be employed.
injury.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-1

P438 5 Installation and Connection
WARNING
HAZARD OF UNSAFE OPERATION
⚫ The user should be familiar with the warnings in the Safety Guide
(SFTY/5LM/L11 or later version) before working on the equipment.
⚫ The user should be familiar with the safety messages in Chapter 5,
Chapter 10, Chapter 11 and Chapter 12 and with the content of Chapter 13
of this technical manual, before working on the equipment.
⚫ Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If
any other modification is made without the express permission of
Schneider Electric, it will invalidate the warranty, and may render the
product unsafe.
The signals MAI N: Bl ocked/faulty and SFMON: War ning (LED) are
permanently assigned to the LEDs labeled OUT OF SERVICE and ALARM and can
be assigned to output relays to indicate the health of the device.
It is recommended that the signals MA IN: Blocke d/faulty and
SFMON : Wa rning ( LED) are communicated to the substation automation
system for alarm purposes, using hardwiring via output relays or the
WARNING
HAZARD OF EQUIPMENT DAMAGE OR LIFETIME REDUCTION
⚫ The instructions given in the Section 5.5, (p. 5-14) (“Protective and
Operational Grounding”) should be noted. In particular, check that the
protective ground connection is secured with a tooth lock washer, as per
the diagram “Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal” (Fig.
5-8. (p. 5-15)).
⚫ If a cable screen is added to this connection or removed from it, then the
protective grounding should be checked again.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury
or equipment damage.
5-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5 Installation and Connection P438
WARNING
⚫ Do not sustain exposure to high humidity during storage, the value shall
not exceed 75 % relative humidity.
⚫ Once the device has been unpacked, it is recommended to energize it
within the three following months.
⚫ The device has to be energized at least once in 4 years, if it is not in
permanent operation.
⚫ Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment
before energization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage,
unintended equipment operation or reduction of equipment lifetime.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-3

5.1 Unpacking and Packing

All P438 devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons and shipped
with outer packaging. Our products leave our factory in closed, sealed original
packaging. If at receipt of the delivery the transport packaging is open or the
seal is broken, the confidentiality and authenticity of the information contained in
the products cannot be ensured.
Use special care when opening cartons and unpacking devices, and do not use
force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting documents and the type
identification label supplied with each individual device from the inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped
can be determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of
components should be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in
proper mechanical condition.
If the P438 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If
the original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms
to DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height ≤ 0.8 m.
5-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type

The nominal data and design type of the P438 can be determined by checking
the type identification label (see below). One type identification label is located
under the upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found
on the inside of the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed
to the outside of the P438 packaging.
Px3x-xxxxxxxx-3xx-4xx-6xx-7xx- 48 - 250 V
9xx-8xx Vx-
100 - 230 V
SER No. 3xxxxxxx /xx/xx
In 1/5A 50 / 60Hz
E.Serial No. 3.xxxxxx.x
E.Reg No. STxxxxxxxxx Vn 50 - 130V
Fig. 5-1: Example of the type identification label of a device from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family.
The P438 design version can be determined from the order number. A
breakdown of the order number is given in Chapter “Order Information”
(Chapter 15, (p. 15-1)).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-5

5.3 Location Requirements

The P438 has been designed to conform to EN 60255-6. Therefore it is important
when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several
of these important operating conditions are listed below.
5.3.1 Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 °C to +55 °C [+23 °F to +131 °F]

Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P438.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt.
Solar Radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
5.3.2 Mechanical Conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g

Earth quake resistance: 5 ... 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 ... 35 Hz, 5 m/s²,
3 x 1 cycle
5.3.3 Electrical Conditions for Auxiliary Voltage of the Power Supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
5.3.4 Electromagnetic Conditions

Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given
in Section 4.2, (p. 4-4). When the P438 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring
to the P438 is normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the
wiring is to be at the back, an opening can be provided above or below the
surface-mounted case. Fig. 5-2, (p. 5-7) shows such an opening.
D5Z50MBA
Fig. 5-2: Opening (cutout) for running the connecting leads to an 40 TE surface-mounted case.
The opening width for the 40 TE surface-mounted case: 213 mm (shown in this
figure), for the 84 TE surface-mounted case: 435 mm. The other dimensions are
the same for all cases.
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and
mounting dimensions are given in Chapter “Design”. When the P438 is mounted
on a cabinet door, special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree
of protection required for the cabinet (IP 51).
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See “Protective and Operational
Grounding” (Section 5.5, (p. 5-14))
Instructions for selecting the flush-mount method:

The P438 has increased mechanical robustness if either the surface-mounted case
or – for the flush-mounted case – flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and
frame) is used. In this case, test severity class 2 of the vibration test, test severity
class 2 of the shock response test on operability as well as test severity class 1 of
the shock response test on permanent shock are applied additionally.
Dimensions of the panel cutouts:

Dimensional drawings of the panel cutouts for all cases can be found in Section 4.2,
(p. 4-4).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-7

For flush-mount method 1 (without angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
Before the P438 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must
be taken down. The local control panel is removed as described below:
1. Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower
both hinged flaps 180° up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them
slightly. The side mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
2. Remove the M3.5 screws (see Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-9)).
3. Then remove the local control panel.
WARNING
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see
Fig. 5-3, (p. 5-9)). Now insert the P438 into the panel opening from the rear so
that the upper M4 screws fit into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the
M4 screws. After this, replace the local control panel.
NOTICE
⚫ When replacing the local control panel, take care not to tighten the screws
with too much strength! (Fastening torque 1.5 to 1.8 Newton meters).
⚫ If the control panel thickness is ≥ 2 mm, the longer screws as enclosed
within the device packing must be used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
5-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Merely loosen the For panels with a

upper screws and thickness ≥ 2 mm,
hook device on side replace the M3 bolts
plates to mount with the enclosed
longer M3 bolts
< 3 mm
M4
M3.5
Remove the lower

screws completely
prior to mounting
12Y6181B
Fig. 5-3: Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 TE case.
NOTICE
⚫ The equipment provides increased mechanical robustness if either the
surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)) is used.
DANGER
⚫ Secure connection of protective grounding conductor: See Section 5.5, (p.
5-14).
injury.
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is
as follows:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-9

1. Remove the screws as shown in Fig. 5-4, (p. 5-10), ➀ and mount the
enclosed angle brackets using these same screws.
2. Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
3. Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws
(see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)).
4. Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
45Z5058A
Fig. 5-4: Mounting the angle brackets.
Angle brackets
M6
B6
6.4
M6 x 15
Height: 204mm
for
Frame 280mm
Width:
E case
the 40T
12Y6183B
Fig. 5-5: Installation of a case into a control panel, flush-mount method 2 (with angle brackets and frame). Example
for a device in a 40 TE case.
5-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

The cover frame width of the 40 TE surface-mounted case is: 280 mm, of the
84 TE case is: 486 mm. The cover frame height is for all cases: 204 mm.
NOTICE
⚫ The equipment provides increased mechanical robustness if either the
surface-mounted case or for the flush-mounted case flush-mount method 2
(with angle brackets and frame, see Fig. 5-5, (p. 5-10)) is used.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 TE case with a

second sub-rack to form a 19″ mounting rack (see Fig. 5-6, (p. 5-12)). The
second sub-rack can be another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a
blank front panel. Fit the 19″ mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Fig. 5-7,
(p. 5-13).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-11

Connection flange
Tapped bush
Bolt
61Y5077A
Fig. 5-6: Combining 40 TE flush-mounted cases to form a 19″ mounting rack.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
5-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Covering flange
Rack frame
61Y5078A
Fig. 5-7: Installing the P438 in a cabinet with a 19″ mounting rack.
DANGER
5-14).
injury.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-13

5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
DANGER
⚫ The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment
grounding requirements.
⚫ The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case
must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location
provided. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is
required.
⚫ In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device.
The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
⚫ All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as
short as possible.
⚫ The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the
protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety
given by this setup.
injury.
5-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1
2 1
3
2
4
4
PE terminal PE terminal
surface-mount. case flush-mount. case
Pos. Description Pos. Description
1 Nut M4 1 Nut M4
2 Tooth lock wash.A4.3 2 Tooth lock wash.A4.3
3 Clamp bracket 3 Clamp bracket
4 Bolt M4 4 Bolt M4
19Y5220B
Fig. 5-8: Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-15

5.6 Connection
The P438 Rail Catenary Protection Device must be connected in accordance with
the terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification label. The
relevant terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P438 are to be found
either in the supporting documents supplied with the device, or in Section 5.7,
(p. 5-34).
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm² (US: AWG12) are
sufficient to connect a system current transformer to a current input on the P438.
To reduce CT knee-point voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install
shorter copper conductors with a greater cross section between the system
current transformers and the current inputs on the P438. Copper conductors
having a cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14) are adequate to connect binary
signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential.
Connections that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when
binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output
relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections
should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections.
DANGER
⚫ When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the
device must always be installed outside of this hazardous area to protect
this equipment.
injury.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
5.6.1.1 Power Supply

Before connecting the auxiliary voltage VA for the P438 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with
the nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
DANGER
⚫ The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply
module V is removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
injury.
5.6.1.2 Current-Measuring Inputs

When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the
secondary nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
5-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

DANGER
terminals.
injury.
5.6.1.3 Connecting the Measuring Circuits

The system transformers must be connected in accordance with the standard
schematic diagrams shown in Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18) to Fig. 5-14, (p. 5-23).
It is essential that the grounding configuration shown in the diagram be followed.
If the CT or VT connection is reversed, this can be taken into account when
making settings (see Chapter “Settings”).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-17

Supply Catenary
MAIN:
I> Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]

MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Catenary
Rail 48Z9301A
Fig. 5-9: Connecting the measuring circuits in the 'Classic single feed' operating mode.
5-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Supply Catenary
Supply Feeder
MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
2
I>
3

MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
I>
V̲A
V̲B/V̲ref
V̲B/V̲ref
+ V̲
-
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲A
I̲B
X.Y I̲B
1: Standard
2: Opposite
+ I̲
-
Feeder
Catenary
Rail 48Z9302A
Fig. 5-10: Connecting the measuring circuits in the 'Autotransformer feed' operating mode.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-19

Supply Catenary
I>
MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]

Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲A
I̲B
X.Y I̲B
1: Standard
2: Opposite
+ I̲
-
Catenary
Rail
Catenary
Rail 48Z9304A
Fig. 5-11: Connecting the measuring circuits in the 'single feed with summated current' operating mode.
5-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Supply Catenary
Q1 Q2
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
I̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 036 ] [ 010 017 ]
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Catenary 1
Q3
Catenary 2
Q4
Rail
48Z9303A
Fig. 5-12: Connecting the measuring circuits for 'Defrost operation'.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-21

Supply Catenary
I>
MAIN:
Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 004 ] [ 010 003 ]
I̲A
X.Y I̲
1: Standard
2: Opposite
MAIN: MAIN:
[ 010 036 ] [ 010 017 ]
I̲plaus/I̲dfrst
1: Standard
2: Opposite
Catenary
Rail 48Z9300A
Fig. 5-13: Connecting the measuring circuits for 'Plausibility check'.
5-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Supply Catenary
MAIN:
Feeder mode
[ 010 135 ]
I> 1

Vnom V.T. sec.
[ 010 009 ]
V̲A
V̲
I>
V̲B/V̲ref
V̲B/V̲ref
Catenary
Rail
48Z9305A
Fig. 5-14: Connecting the measuring circuits for ASC.
5.6.1.4 Connecting Protective Signaling

Either a transmission device or pilot wires are required for signal transmission,
depending on the operating mode selected. Twisted pair cores should be used as
pilot wires. Two or four cores are required. If only two cores are available, there
must be an all-or-nothing relay in each station for coupling received and
transmitted signals. The coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed for
half the loop voltage. Fig. 5-15, (p. 5-24) shows the connection with two cores
and Fig. 5-16, (p. 5-25) the connection with four cores.
The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set to either Transm. rel. break
con. or Transm. rel. make con. In the first case the break contact of the
transmitting relay must be wired, and in the second case the make contact must
be wired. The figures show the connection for the setting Transm. rel. break con.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-23

Protection device a L+ L-
PSIG1:
Send signal
[ 036 035 ]
-K1
L+
PSIG1:
Receive EXT
L-
[ 036 048 ]
P438
Protection device b L- L+
PSIG1:
Receive EXT -K2
[ 036 048 ]
L+
L-
PSIG1:
Send signal
[ 036 035 ]
P438
48Z93A2A
Fig. 5-15: Connection of protective signaling with two cores.
5-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

L+ L-
Protection device a
PSIG1:
Send signal
[ 036 035 ]
L+
PSIG1:
Receive EXT
L-
[ 036 048 ]
P438
L-
Protection device b L+
PSIG1:
Send signal
[ 036 035 ]
PSIG1: L+
Receive EXT
[ 036 048 ] L-
P438
48Z93A3A
Fig. 5-16: Connection of protective signaling with four cores.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-25

5.6.1.5 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer

A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog
module Y. This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire
method (see Fig. 5-17, (p. 5-26)). No supply conductor compensation is
required in this case.
PT 100
P438
S8Z52H9A
Fig. 5-17: Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method.
5.6.1.6 Connecting Binary Inputs and Output Relays

The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring
these components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O
modules (X) varies (see Section 2.5.7, (p. 2-12)).
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P438 can automatically configure the
binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of
switchgear units. The standard configuration of binary inputs and output relays
for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in the technical
manual "Bay Types").
The polarity for connected binary signal inputs is to be found in the terminal
connection diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in
Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)). This is to be understood as a recommendation only.
Connection to binary inputs can be made as desired.
5.6.1.7 Connecting Trip and Close Command Relays

Standard outputs of Px30 aren't supposed to open DC current flowing through
inductive CB coil. This task has to be addressed by properly applied CB auxiliary
contacts (52a/b).
5-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Kxx CB
MICOM P30 52a
49Z9005A
Fig. 5-18: Example of trip circuit wiring.
In order to ascertain that the inductive coil current is switched off from the CB
auxiliary contacts, the setting of minimum pulse duration for trip commands
(MA IN : Mi n.dur. M-tri p cmd1 etc.) and close command need to consider the
operating times of the circuit breaker and its auxiliary contacts. Sufficient margin
has to be applied for pulse duration. A common setting is to double operating
time of the circuit breaker, e.g. for a CB trip operation time top of 100 ms, the
minimum trip pulse time should be 0.2 s (see the following figure).
CB Closed (52a)
top
CB's operating time
tmop= 2*top
MAIN:
48Z93A6A
Fig. 5-19: Example of trip pulse timing.
This of course also applies to device open/close command outputs operated with
fix (short or long) command duration (e.g. DEVxx Oper. mode cmd. = Short
command).
If the Px30 output contact triggers an auxiliary relay which opens or closes the
CB consecutively, then it should be verified, that the make/continuous/break coil
currents of this auxiliary relay are within the limit values given in Section 2.5.7,
(p. 2-12).
Note: Upon testing such command outputs, the CB (or equivalent auxiliary
components) must not be mechanically locked, so that the auxiliary 52a/b
contact could operate and break the DC current. If the CB has to stay locked,
tripping or closing circuit has to be opened by terminal disconnection or test
switch.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-27

5.6.1.8 Connection of Switchgear Units Having Direct Motor Control

In the case of bay types having direct motor control, one binary input is
configured for the status signal and one output relay is configured for triggering
and resetting the motor relay. A connection example for a direct motor control is
shown in the following diagram.
CIRCUIT BREAKER DRIVE Q1 DRIVE Q2 DRIVE Q8 TRIGGER. Shunt wd. MOTOR RELAY
OPEN CLOSE MONITORING

MOTOR RELAY
‑K200.1
‑X061 1 7 ‑X062 4 ‑X071 1 ‑X072 4
OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE

‑K601.1 ‑K602.1 ‑K603.1 ‑K604.1 ‑K605.1 ‑K606.1 ‑K701.1 ‑K702.1 ‑K705.1 ‑K706.1
P438
‑X061 3 5 9 ‑X062 2 6 8 ‑X071 3 5 ‑X072 6 8
for Q1 for Q2 for Q8

A1 A2 A1 A2 A1 A2
Q0 Q0
‑K200
OPEN CLOSE
‑K200.2
‑M1 ‑M2 ‑M3
‑X061 4 6 ‑X062 3 1 9 7 ‑X071 6 4
OPEN CLOSE CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN

‑K601.2 ‑K602.2 ‑K604.2 ‑K603.2 ‑K606.2 ‑K605.2 ‑K702.2 ‑K701.2
P438
‑X061 2 8 ‑X062 5 ‑X071 2
E1 E3 E1 E3 E1 E3 ‑X073 8
M1 M2 M3 X//Y
‑U706
P438
E4 E4 E4 ‑X073 9
‑K200.3
‑X072 7 9
‑K705.2 ‑K706.2
P438
‑X072 5
S8Z01G3A
Fig. 5-20: Connection example, motor with shunt winding for a direct motor control, bay type No. 89
(A23.105.M04), feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar.
5-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG‑B Interface

An IRIG‑B interface for time synchronization is available with the Ethernet
module. It is connected by a BNC connector. Demodulated and modulated
signals can be used.
5.6.3 Connecting the Communication Interfaces
5.6.3.1 PC Interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a
personal computer (PC).
DANGER
⚫ The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection.
Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation
from circuits connected to the system that is required per IEC/EN
60255-27. Therefore DO NOT leave any permanent cable connection on
the PC interface connector at the HMI front panel.
injury.
WARNING
UNEXPECTED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ Do not use a PC with active termination on any connection pin of the
RS232 interface. Wrong termination can drive the device to delay
operating actions from the HMI as long as this wrong termination is active
on the PC interface.
5.6.3.2 Communication Interfaces

The communication interfaces are provided as a permanent connection of the
device to a control system for substations or to a central substation unit.
Depending on the type, communication interface 1 on the device is connected
either by a special fiber-optic connector or an RS 485 interface with twisted pair
copper wires. Communication interface 2 is only available as an RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable
requires special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this
operating manual.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-29

DANGER
⚫ Do not connect or disconnect the RS 485 or fiber-optic interface when the
supply voltage for the device is under power and in operation.
injury.
An RS 485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices
can be established by using the optional communication interface. The
communication master could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices
linked to the communication master, e.g. P438, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P438 was designed so that data transfer in
a full duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between
devices. Data transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only
for a half duplex transmission mode. To connect the RS 485 communication
interface the following must be observed:
● Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
● At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
● Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in
the immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to
national standards.
● All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at
both ends.
● Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4‑wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also
possible. A cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire
data link. A 2-wire data link is shown in Fig. 5-21, (p. 5-31), and a 4-wire data
link is shown in Fig. 5-22, (p. 5-32) as an example for channel 2 on the
communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on the communication
module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:
The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped
electrically with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P438. The two
devices situated at either far end must have a 200 to 220 Ω resistor installed to
terminate the data transmission conductor. In devices from the Easergy MiCOM
30 family, and also in the P438, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485
interface hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external
resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:
Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end
of the data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an
electrically full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system,
e.g. the P438, are connected to the transmitter of the communication master
device, and the transmitters of slave devices are connected to the receiver of the
master device. Devices equipped electrically with only a half duplex RS 485
communication interface are connected to the transmitter of the communication
master device. The last device in line (master or slave device) on the data
transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver terminated with
a 200 to 220 Ω resistor each. In devices from the Easergy MiCOM 30 family, and
also in the P438, a 220 Ω resistor is integrated into the RS 485 interface
5-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

hardware and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is

therefore not necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the
device (resistor order number see Chapter “Accessories and Spare Parts”).
-X9/-X10
200 ... 220 Ω
− 1 −
D1[T] + 2 + D2[R]
− 4 −
D2[R] + 5 + D1[T]
XXXX P438
First participant Last participant

connect. to the line connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X9/-X10 1 2 3 4 5
− + − + − + − +
D2[R] D1[T] D2[R] D1[T]
P438 XXXX
Device with half-

duplex interface
19Z6480C
Fig. 5-21: 2-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-31

-X9/-X10
200 ... 220 Ω
D1[T] D2[R]
D2[R] D1[T]
XXXX P438
First participant Last participant
connect. to the line connect. to the line
(e.g. the master)
-X9/-X10
D2[R] D1[T] D2[R] D1[T]
P438 XXXX
Device with half-

duplex interface
19Z6481B
Fig. 5-22: 4-wire data link. (Note: the setting M A I N : C h a n n . a s s i g n . C O M M 1 / 2 decides about whether -X9
(=channel 1) or -X10 (=channel 2) is used.)
For CH1/CH2 connection diagram, please refer to Section 5.7, (p. 5-34)
5-32 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.6.3.3 Ethernet Module Connection

The diagram and the related tables below show the Interface arrangement of
Ethernet module, as they are the fiber/copper connectors and IRIG‑B connector.
B A ETH
ACT
LNK
A ETH
ACT
LNK
ETH A
ETH A
ETH B
ETH A
ETH B
ETH C
ETH C
ETH C
ETH C
IRIG B
IRIG B
IRIG B
IRIG B
Fig. 5-23: SEB Fiber. Fig. 5-24: SEB Fig. 5-25: REB Fiber. Fig. 5-26: REB
Copper. Copper.
Connector Connections
ETH A Fiber/Copper
ETH B Fiber/Copper
ETH C Copper
IRIG-B Demodulated (DC IRIG-B)/ Modulated (AC IRIG-B)
Tab. 5-1: Connector functionality.
LED Function On Off Flashing
Green Link Link o.k. Link broken

Yellow Activity Packets received/ emitted
Tab. 5-2: LED functionality.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-33

5.7 Location and Connection Diagrams
5.7.1 Location Diagrams P438‑418/419/420

Location diagram for P438 in 40 TE case
● Transformer module: Ring terminal connection, other modules pin-terminal
connection (P438 ‑418)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
P A A T X X Y V X
CH1 CH3 3J 6I 6I 4I 4I 6O
CH2 2V 8O 8O 8O
alt.
alt. alt. alt. alt. alt.
A
SEB Y X X X X
LC/ 4I 6I 6I 24I 6I
RJ45 6O 6O 3O
alt. alt.
A
REB X
LC/ 4H
RJ45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
Location diagram for P438 in 84 TE case

● Pin-terminal connection (P438 ‑419)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 CH3 3J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 2V 8O 8O 8O 8O 8O
alt.
alt. alt. alt. alt.
A
SEB X X X X
LC/ 6I 6I 24I 6I
RJ45 6O 6O 3O
alt.
A alt.
REB
LC/ X
RJ45 4H
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
● Ring-terminal connection (P438 ‑420)
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
P A A T Y X X X X X V
CH1 CH3 3J 4I 6I 6I 6I 6I 6O 4I
CH2 2V 8O 8O 8O 8O 8O
alt. alt. alt. alt. alt.
A X X X X
SEB 6I 6I 24I 6I
LC/ 6O 6O 3O
RJ45
alt. alt.
A X
REB 4H
LC/
RJ45
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Each of the numbered slots can be fitted with max. 1 module.

If a location diagram shows several modules for a particular slot, then these are
alternatives, depending on the ordering options.
5-34 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.7.2 Terminal Connection Diagrams P438‑418/419/420
“_” is a placeholder for the slot.

See also Section 5.5, (p. 5-14), “Protection Conductor Terminal (PCT) / Case
Grounding / Protective Earth”
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-35

Transformer Type T Power supply Type V Binary Type X Binary Type X

module 3J 2V module 4I 8O module 6I 6O module 24I
Ring Pin Voltage measuring Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin Signal inputs
inputs
X041 X041 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1
Output relays Output relays Vin
1 1 1 1 1 1 U_01
13 1 V̲A
T5 2 2 K_01 2 2 2 2
14 2 U_02
3 3 3 3 K_01 3 3
U_03
15 3 4 4 4 4 4 4
U_04
5 5 5 5 K_02 5 5
16 4 U_05
6 6 K_02 6 6 6 6
17 5 V̲B/V̲ref U_06
7 7 7 7 7 7
T6 U_07
18 6 8 8 8 8 8 8
U_08
9 9 K_03 9 9 K_03 9 9
X__2 X__2
X__2
10 1 10 1 Vin
11 7 10 1 U_09
11 2 K_04 11 2 K_04 11 2
12 8 12 3 K_05 12 3 U_10
12 3
13 4 K_06 13 4 U_11
13 4
14 5 K_07 14 5 U_12
Current measuring 14 5
inputs 15 6 15 6 K_05 U_13
15 6
X042 16 7 K_08 16 7 U_14
16 7
1 1 IA 17 8 17 8 K_06 U_15
► T1
Signal inputs 18 9
17
18
8
9
U_16
2 2 18 9
Vin Signal inputs
3 3 IB U_01 X__3
► T2
X__3
19 1 Vin
U_01
X__3
4 4
19 1 Vin
20 2 19 1 U_17
5 5 I̲plaus/I̲dfrst Vin
► T3 20 2
Vin
U_02
21 3 U_02 20 2
U_18
6 6 21 3 22 4 21 3
Vin U_19
22 4 U_03 22 4
7 7 Vin
U_03 23 5 U_20
23 5
8 8 Vin U_21
23 5 24 6 U_04 24 6
Vin U_22
24 6 U_04 25 7 25 7
Vin U_23
U_05 26 8
Power supply U_24
25 7 26 8 27 9
+ V Vin
26 8
aux
U100 27 9 U_06
−
27 9
Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X Binary Type X

module 6I 3O module 6I 8O module 6O module 4H
Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin Ring Pin
X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1 X__1

Output relays Output relays Output relays High-break
1 1 1 1 1 1
contacts
2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01 2 2 K_01
3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
K_01
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 +
6 6 6 6 K_02 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 K_02 8 8 8 8 K_02
9 9 9 9 K_03 9 9
X__2
X__2 X__2
X__2
10 1 10 1
10 1
11 2 11 2 K_04 11 2 11 2
12 3 12 3 K_05 K_02
12 3 12 3 +
13 4 13 4 K_06 13 4
14 5 K_03 14 5 K_07 14 5 K_03
15 6 15 6
15 6
16 7 16 7 K_08
16 7
17 8 Signal 17 8 X__3
inputs 17 8
18 9 18 9
Signal 18 9
inputs
Vin
U_01 X__3
Vin
19 1 U_01 19 1
X__3 X__3
Vin K_03
19 1 U_02 20 2 19 1 20 2 +
Vin
20 2 21 3 U_02 20 2 K_04
Vin
21 3 U_03 21 3
Vin
22 4 22 4 U_03 22 4
Vin
23 5 U_04 23 5 23 5 K_05 26 8
Vin
24 6 24 6 U_04 24 6 K_04
Vin 27 9 +
25 7 U_05 25 7 25 7
Vin
26 8 U_05 26 8 K_06
Vin
27 9 U_06 26 8 27 9
Vin
27 9 U_06
5-36 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Analog Type Y Communication Type A Communication Type A

module 4I module CH1 / CH2 module InterMiCOM CH3
Ring Pin
X__1 Measuring Per order Per order

X__1
outputs
1 1 Serial [Channel 1] Serial [COMM3]
2 2 K_01 optical fiber link optical fiber link
3 3 valid X7 X31
1 RX
4 4 X//Y U17 X//Y U22
5 5 ► ⋂
6 6 ◄ X8 X32
0…20 mA 1 TX
7 7
U_08 X//Y U18 X//Y U23
8 8 K_02
9 9 valid
or wire link or wire link
X9 X//Y X33 X//Y

X__2 1 1
10 1 2 D2[R] 2 D2[R]
11 2 ► ⋂ 3
U19
3
U24
12 3 ◄ 4 4
0…20 mA
U_08 5 D1[T] 5 D1[T]
Signal and
measuring inputs
13 4 RS 422 / 485 RS 422 / 485
Vin
14 5 U_01 Serial [Channel 2]
15 6 wire link only or wire link
Vin
16 7 U_02
17 8
X10 X//Y X34 X//Y
Vin 1 1
U_03 M5[DCD]
2 D2[R] 2
18 9 D2[R]
Vin 3 3
U_04 U20 D1[T] U27
4 4
5 D1[T] 5 E
X__3 E2[G]
19 1
7
20 2 +UB
► ⋂
U_05
RS 422 / 485
21 3 0…20 mA IRIG-B
22 4
◄ RS 232
time synchronization
◄ ⋂
U_06
X11
23 5 PT100 1
24 6
► U21
Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A Communication Type A

module SEB LC module SEB RJ45 module REB LC module REB RJ45
Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC] Ethernet [IEC]
optical glass fiber LC wire link optical glass fiber LC wire link
Port A Port C Port A Port A
X13 X13
X15 X13
RX RX
1 1
U26 > X//Y U31 U26 > X//Y U29
TX X//Y TX X//Y
RJ45 RJ45
Port B
Port B X14
X14 1
and Ethernet RX > X//Y U30
service interface IRIG-B
Port C
time synchronization
X//Y U28 RJ45
X15 TX
1 X11
> X//Y U31 1
(DC IRIG-B)
Demodulated
RJ45
2 Isolated GND U21
3 and Ethernet and Ethernet
service interface service interface
Modulated Port C Port C
(AC IRIG-B)
X15 X15
1 1
IRIG-B
> X//Y U31 > X//Y U31
time synchronization RJ45 RJ45
X11
(DC IRIG-B)
1 Demodulated
IRIG-B IRIG-B
2 Isolated GND U21
time synchronization time synchronization
3
X11 X11
Modulated (DC IRIG-B) (DC IRIG-B)
(AC IRIG-B) 1 Demodulated 1 Demodulated
2 Isolated GND U21 2 Isolated GND U21

3 3
Modulated Modulated
(AC IRIG-B) (AC IRIG-B)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5-37

5-38 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
6 Local Control (HMI)
6.1 Local Control Panel (HMI)

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel
(HMI). All the data required for operation of the protection device is entered from
the local control panel, and the data important for system management is read
out there as well. The following tasks can be handled from the local control
panel:
● Controlling switchgear units
● Readout and modification of settings
● Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status
signals
● Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
● Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short
circuits in the power system
● Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in
testing and commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and
a specific operating program.
6.1.1 Ordering options

For the local control panel (HMI), the following ordering options are available:
● HMI with text display
● HMI with graphic display
Where necessary, a distinction will be made between these ordering options
throughout this chapter.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-1

P438 6 Local Control (HMI)
6.2 Display and Keypad
6.2.1 Text Display

The local control panel as a text display includes an LC display containing 4 × 20
alphanumeric characters.
There are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the
LCD and six additional freely configurable function keys on the right hand side of
the LCD.
Furthermore the local control panel (HMI) is provided with 23 LED indicators. 17
of these are on the left hand side of the LCD. The other six LED indicators are
situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys. (See
Section 3.12, (p. 3-84) for the configuration of the LED indicators.)
TRIP
H18
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY
H19
EDIT MODE
H20
H21
H22
H23
Fig. 6-1: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the text display
6.2.2 Graphic Display

The local control panel is a graphic LC display with a resolution of 128 × 128
pixels (divided semi-graphically into 16 lines of 21 characters each).
Moreover, there are twelve keys and 17 LED indicators.
6-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6 Local Control (HMI) P438
H4 TRIP
H3 ALARM
H2 OUT OF SERVICE
H1 HEALTHY
H17 EDIT MODE
H5
H6
H7
H8
H9
H10
H11
H12
H13
H14
H15
H16
Fig. 6-2: View of the local control panel and layout of the LED indicators for the graphic display.
6.2.3 Display Illumination

If none of the control keys are pressed, the display illumination will switch off
once the set “return time illumination” (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”)
has elapsed. Pressing any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on
again. In this case the control action that is normally triggered by that key will
not be executed. Reactivation of the display illumination is also possible by using
a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function “return time
illumination” (L OC : R e tur n time ill umi n.) is set to blocked.
6.2.4 Contrast of the Display

The contrast of the LC display can be adjusted by pressing 3 keys on the local
control panel at the same time, as follows:
Keep the Enter key ( ) and the Clear key ( ) pressed simultaneously, then you
can press “Up” or “Down” ( , ) to raise or lower the contrast, respectively.
6.2.5 Short Description of Keys
6.2.5.1 “Up” and “Down” Keys
Panel Level: The “up”/“down” keys switch between the pages of the Measured
Value Panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-3

Menu Tree Level: Press the “up” and “down” keys to navigate up and down
through the menu tree in a vertical direction. If the unit is in input mode, the
“up” and “down” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. Press the “up” and “down” keys in this
mode to change the setting value.
● “Up” key: the next higher value is selected.
● “Down” key: the next lower value is selected.
With list settings, press the “up” and “down” key to change the logic operator of
the value element.
6.2.5.2 “Left” and “Right” Keys
Menu Tree Level: Press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through the
menu tree in a horizontal direction. If the unit is in input mode, the “left” and
“right” keys have a different function.
Input mode: Settings can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled
by the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the “left” and “right” keys are
pressed, the cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled
value moves one digit to the right or left.
● “Left” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the left.
● “Right” key: the cursor moves to the next digit on the right.
In the case of a list setting, press the “left” and “right” keys to navigate through
the list of items available for selection.
6.2.5.3 ENTER Key
Panel Level: Press the ENTER key at the Panel level to go to the menu tree.
Menu Tree Level: Press the ENTER key to enter the input mode. Press the
ENTER key a second time to accept the changes as entered and exit the input
mode. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is
active.
6.2.5.4 CLEAR Key
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event
data. The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Input mode: When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected
and the input mode is exited.
6-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.2.5.5 READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel
level or from any other point in the menu tree.
6.2.5.6 „Local/Remote“ Key
The local/remote key is effective in the Bay Panel except where a binary signal
input has been configured for this function.
The local/remote key is the transfer switch between remote and local control
(setting R <-> L), or between remote&local and local control (setting R & L <->
L). If the “Local/Remote” key is set to switch from Remote control to Local
control, then this can only occur if the password has first been entered first.
Switching from Local to Remote control will occur without checking the password.
6.2.5.7 Page Key
Panel Level: Pressing the page key shows the next panel.
Menu Tree Level: When the page key is pressed the Menu Tree Level is exited
and the Bay Panel is accessed.
6.2.5.8 Selection Key
Bay Panel: The Selection key is effective only in the Bay Panel and only if local
control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. The selected external device will be marked by
an asterisk (*) – as long as no external device names are displayed. Otherwise
the external device name will flash and will be displayed in the status line.
Signal Panel: The Selection key is used to select a flashing signal (not yet
acknowledged) and will also automatically switch to pages that might be
available. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the Selection
key again will start with the first flashing signal.
6.2.5.9 OPEN Key
The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-5

Pressing the OPEN key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account
the interlock equation – to assume the “open” status.
6.2.5.10 CLOSE Key
The CLOSE key is effective in the Bay Panel only.

Pressing the CLOSE key controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “closed” status.
6-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.3 Display Levels

All data relevant for operation and all device settings are displayed on two levels.
At the Panel level, data such as measurements are displayed in Panels that
provide a quick overview of the current state of the bay. The “menu tree” level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a
selected event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in
the menu tree, press the “READ” key:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-7

6.4 Availability of the Bay Panel

The Bay Panel is only available under these conditions:
1. On the hardware side the protection unit must be fitted with the binary
module X(6I 6O) to a slot supporting this module.
2. By selecting and sending a bay type (with parameter MAIN: Type of
ba y) a bay type has been generated.
To access a selected event recording from either the panel level or from any
other point in the menu tree, press the “READ” key .
From the control and display panels (e.g. measured value panels or the bay
panel) the user can access the menu tree level by pressing the “ENTER” key.
To return to the previously selected control and display panel from the menu tree
level the user must simultaneously press the keys “Cursor up” and “RESET”. (If
previously no panel was selected, i.e. after a system restart, then the bay panel,
if available, is accessed.)
After the set LOC : Au tom. re turn time has elapsed the protection unit will
also return automatically from the menu tree level to the control and display
panel last selected.
The user can move from a bay panel to a measured value panel by pressing the
key “Cursor left” and back again by pressing the key “Cursor right”.
6-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.5 Display Panels on the Text Display

The text display of the P438 can display Measured Value Panels which are called
up according to system conditions.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. The
system condition determines which Panel is called up (examples are the
Operation Panel and the Fault Panel). Only the Measured Value Panels relevant
for the particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Operation Panel is always provided.
Measured Value
Bay Panel Panel(s) Record View
(state-dependent)
X0 :running Voltage VAB prim. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
>Q0 :running 20.7 kV Operat. data record
Q8 :running Voltage VBC prim.
Local Remote 20.6 kV
Control and Display Panels
+
Device type
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1
Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Control Menu tree
Fig. 6-3: Display panels and menu tree.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-9

6.6 Display Panels on the Graphic Display

The following display panels are available with the graphic display:
● Bay Panel
● Signal Panel
● Measured Value Panels, which are called up according to system conditions
● Event Panel
The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a
one line diagram. If user-defined bay types are applied, resulting information
may be sub-divided into up to eight pages. A maximum of 28 physical and logic
binary status may be configured to one Signal Panel and, depending on the
operating mode, acknowledged. Selected measured values are displayed on the
Measured Value Panels. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the
particular design version of the given device and its associated range of
functions are actually available.
The Event Panel displays the most recent events, each with a time tag, such as
the opening of a switchgear unit.
Bay Panel Signal Panel Measured Value Panel(s) Event Panel Record View
(state-dependent)
Control and Display Panels
Device type 
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1 Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Control Menu tree
Fig. 6-4: Display panels and menu tree.
6-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.7 Menu Tree and Data Points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using
a menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the
LC-Display always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected
by the user. The data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch
and they are displayed either with their plain text description or in numerically
encoded form, as selected by the user. The value associated with the selected
data point, its meaning, and its unit of measurement are displayed in the line
below.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-11

6.8 List Data Points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data
points generally have more than one associated value element. This category
includes tripping matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When
a list data point is selected, the symbol ‘↓‘ is displayed in the bottom line of the
LCD, indicating that a sub-level is situated below this displayed level. The
individual value elements of a list data point are found at this sub-level. In the
case of a list parameter, the individual value elements are linked by operators
such as “OR”.
6-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.9 Configurable Function Keys
This section applies only to devices fitted with an HMI with text display (ordering
option).
6.9.1 Configuration of the Function Keys F1 to Fx

Function keys [F1] to [Fx] can be assigned a password (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-
54)). In such a case they are effective only after that password has been
entered. By default, no password is required to use the function key.
It is assumed for the following operating example that function key [F1] is
enabled only after the password (as assigned at F_K EY: Pass word funct. key
1) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will
remain active for the duration set at F _KE Y: R etu rn tim e fct.k ey s.
Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-13

Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Step 0 Display example. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press function key [F1].

Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt
to enter the password if it is required. ********
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step and the
next do not exist and the function key is effective
immediately as described in Step 3.)
Step 2a If a password is set, press the keys corresponding to

the set password, for example:
“Left” *
“Down”
“Right”
“Up”
The display will change as shown in the right hand side
column. *
Now press the ENTER key. If the correct password has Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
been entered, the active display will re-appear. Voltage B-C prim.
Function key [F1] is now effective for the set return 20.6 kV
time.
By default, no password is required and therefore
function key [F1] is always effective.
Each function key can be assigned its own password,
and the return time is running after correct password
entry for each individual function key!)
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is Voltage B-C prim.
pressed. 20.6 kV
6-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 3 Press [F1] again. The function configured to this Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
function key is carried out. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 4 When function keys are pressed during their associated Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
Param. change enabl.
return time, then the set function is carried out directly, Yes
i.e. without checking for the password again.
(By default, i.e. no password required, this step does
not exist and the function key is permanently effective.)
6.9.2 Function Keys F1 to Fx as Control Keys

As described in Section 3.7, (p. 3-58) function keys [F1] to [Fx] may be
configured as control keys (for [F1] e.g. at F _KEY: Fct. assignm. F1).
In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see Section 6.9.1,
(p. 6-13)) and the configuration to “Key/Switch” is ignored.
In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control
commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the
four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.
● MAI N: L ocal/ Remote key
The “Local/Remote” control command is effective only in the bay panel
except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function.
Depending on the configured functionality, the “Local/Remote” command
toggles either between “Remote” and “Local” control, or between “Local/
Remote” and “Local” control. (The parameter LOC: Fct. assign. L/R ke y
may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of
the two switching modes is active.) If the “Local/Remote” command is
configured such that it will switch from “Remote” control to “Local” control,
then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at
LOC: Password L /R. Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control will
occur without checking the password.
● MAIN : D evice se le ction ke y
This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if
“Local” control is activated.
If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on
the text display HMI with the flashing symbol “>” in front of the external
devices’ designation text.
● MAIN : Devi ce O P EN ke y
The OPEN command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “open” status.
● MAI N: D ev ice CLOSE ke y
The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key
assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into
account the interlock equation – to assume the “closed” status.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-15

6.10 Changing between Display Levels
6.10.1 Note Concerning the Step-by-Step Descriptions

The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays
can be changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right
of the enter key indicates that the LED indicator labeled Edit Mode is illuminated.
The examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described
in this manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.10.2 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Text Display)
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level
After start-up of the device, the menu tree level is displayed.

Action
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. No (=off)
Step 1 First press the “up” key and hold it down while pressing Voltage A-B prim.
20.7 kV
the CLEAR key. Voltage B-C prim.
Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and 20.6 kV
+
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of
stored data.
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level

Action
Step 0 Example of a Measured Value Panel. Voltage A-B prim.

20.7 kV
Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the P438
Menu Tree Level.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”), the
display will automatically switch to the Panel level if a Measured Value Panel has
been configured.
6-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.10.3 Changing Between Display Levels (HMI with Graphic Display)
Jumping from Panel Level to Menu Tree Level
After start-up of the device, the display is at the Panel Level. The Bay Panel is
displayed.

Action
Step 0 Example of a display after start-up of the device.

P438 10:33:22
Note: When the device is delivered, it is set for a BB1
BB2
dummy bay without switchgear units. Therefore only the
Q1 Q2
name of the device appears on the Bay Panel. The
display shown in the example will not appear until a Q0
“real” bay type has been selected. Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
Curr. IP,max prim. ↓
Step 1 Press the Enter key to go from the Panel Level to the P438
Parameters
Menu Tree Level.
Jumping from Menu Tree Level to Panel Level

Action
Step 0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can jump to the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device on-line
Panel Level from any position within the menu tree. No (=off)
Step 1 Press the Page key.

P438 10:33:22
Alternatively first press the “up” key and hold it down BB1
BB2
while pressing the CLEAR key.
or Q1 Q2
Note: It is important to press the “up” key first and
release it last in order to avoid unintentional resetting of Q0
stored data. Q9
+ Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/LOC”), the
display will switch automatically to the Bay Panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-17

6.11 How to use Cyber Security Features

These sections shows the most common tasks associated with Cyber Security
features.
For many of these tasks, the steps you take are the same as you have performed
previously and with the main changes being in the steps you use to login and/or
logout.
6.11.1 Usage
6.11.1.1 How to Login
6.11.1.1.1 Local Default Access

If the Local Default Access is enabled, the user can login via the front panel
without password with associated roles.
6.11.1.1.2 Login with Prompt User List

This login process will happen if authorization is required for the current
operation.
In this case, the IED will prompt the user list, and the user needs to select proper
user name and enter the password to login.
Login Step / Description Control Display

Action
Step 0 When operation needs authorization, the CS Cyber Security

insuff. rights
insufficient rights message is displayed for 2 seconds
Step 1 The user list is shown Select a user

DefaultOperator
Select proper user by pressing the 'up' or 'down' DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
Or
Step 2 Confirm the selection by 'Enter' key
Step 3 Password message is shown for user to enter User Password?

********
Step 4 If password is correct Cyber Security

login successful
Step 5 If password is incorrect, passord message shows again Cyber Security

login failed
(as in step 3)
Step 6 If decided not to login (by pressing the 'CLEAR' key), User not selected
Aborted with C key
the message is displayed for 2 seconds.
6-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.11.1.2 How to Logout
6.11.1.2.1 How to Logout at the IED

For security consideration, it would be better to logout the IED once the
configuration done.
The user can be logged out with 'HMI Logout' in the menu tree: 'Par/Conf/CS'.
6.11.1.2.2 How to Logout at Easergy Studio

● Right-click on the device name and select Log Off.
● In the Log Off confirmation dialog click Yes.
6.11.1.3 How to Disable a Physical Port

It is possible to disable unused physical ports for security reason.
The physical ports can be disabled by using Easergy Studio or the front panel.
This can’t be done by the SAT. An Engineer-role is needed to perform this action.
IEC 61850 section:
● Allows to disable the physical interface A/B or A (if available).
● Allows to disable the physical interface C.
The physical ports can be disabled with 'Block Port A/B' or 'Block Port C' in the
menu tree: 'Par/Conf/IEC'.
PC section (IEC 103):
● Allows to disable commands and measurements. If both are disabled, the
complete interface is disabled.
It can be disabled with 'Command blocking' or 'Sig./meas.val.block' in the menu
tree: 'Par/Func/Glob/PC'.
6.11.1.4 How to Secure Function key

In cyber security implementation, this function has been linked to the front panel
authorization.
● When the function key pressed, if there is no user login in the front panel or
the logged- in user is not authorized, a prompt message will be raised in
the front panel to ask the user login.
Once the user logged-in, function key password is needed if function key
has a password. If the user already logged in with authorization and the
function key has no password, the command will be executed immediately.
● By default, the OPERATOR or ENGINEER Roles are able to operate the
function keys.
● If unauthorized users press Function Key during the setting change, they
need to commit the changes first then login with authorized user to operate
the function key.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-19

6.12 Control at Panel Level
6.12.1 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Text Display)

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel (LOC : F ct.
Opera tion Panel), the Overload Panel (L OC: Fct. Overload Panel), and the
Fault Panel (L OC : F ct . Faul t P ane l).
Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the
given device and its associated range of functions are actually available. The
selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see
Section 6.13.5.1, (p. 6-44) for instructions regarding selection. If
“MAIN : Wit hou t function” has been selected for a given panel, then that
panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. Should the device detect a fault, then the Fault
Panel is displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset,
by pressing the CLEAR key, for example.

Action
Step 0 Two measured values can be displayed simultaneously Voltage VA prim.

20.7 kV
on the Panel. Voltage VB/Vref prim.
20.6 kV
Step 1 If more than two measured values have been selected, Voltage V prim.
20.8 kV
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the Current I prim.
“up” or “down” keys. 415 A
or
The device will also show the next page of the
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-Time for
Panels (LOC : Hold -tim e for Pan els, located at “Par/
Conf” in the menu tree) has elapsed.
6.12.1.1 Bay Panel
6.12.1.1.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel

If available the Bay Panel will display switching state signals from external
devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or
remote). The text display HMI will show up to 3 external devices, one per line,
where the external device selected is marked with the flashing symbol “>” in
front of the external devices’ designation text.
6-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Fig. 6-5: Example of a bay panel.
The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their

numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there
are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their
current state is displayed (“Interm. pos.”, “Open”, “Closed” or “Faulty pos.”).
The active control unit (“Remote” or “Local”) is displayed in the fourth line, as
well as its state: “Locked” or “Unlocked”.
6.12.1.1.2 Controlling Switchgear Units

Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the
unit has been set for “local control”.
The following example assumes that the configurable function keys are set as
follows (see also Section 6.9.2, (p. 6-15)):
● [F1]: MAI N: Local /R emote ke y – called “local/remote” key in the
following example
● [F2]: MAIN : De vice se l ecti on key – called “select” key in the following
example
● [F3]: MAIN : De vi ce CL OSE key – called “close” key in the following
example
● [F4]: MAI N: Devi ce OP EN key – called “open” key in the following
example
If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and local control (R↔L),
then the switch from “remote” to “local” operation requires a password.
The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and
the factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see
Section 6.13.9.3, (p. 6-57)) the following description will apply accordingly.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-21


Action
Step 0 Select the Bay Panel. X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to P438 10:33:22
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight ********
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence: P438 10:33:22
“Left”
*
“Down” P438 10:33:22
“Right” P438 10:33:22
“Up” P438 10:33:22
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right. *
Now press the Enter key. X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
If the correct password has been entered, the Bay Panel Q8 :Closed
will re-appear. The fourth line will display “Local”. Local Locked
If an invalid password has been entered, the display
shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing X0 :Closed
Q0 :Closed
the Clear key before the enter key is pressed. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only X0 :Closed
>Q0 :Closed
switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be Q8 :Closed
selected. The external device designation for the Local Locked
selected switchgear unit –“Q0”, for example – is marked
by a flashing “>” character.
Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit, press the X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
Clear key. Press the Selection key to select a new Q8 :Closed
switchgear unit. Local Locked
6-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the keys “Open”

or “Close” to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with bay
interlock conditions – if applicable – is checked. or
Step 4a If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that X0 :Closed

Q0 :Interm. pos
an operation can be carried out, then the switch Q8 :Closed
command is executed. The status “Interm[ediate] Local Locked
pos[ition]” is displayed while the switchgear unit is
operating.
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has X0 :Closed

Q0 :Open
elapsed, the resulting switching status is displayed. Q8 :Closed
Local Locked
Step 4b If the check of interlock conditions determines that X0 :Closed

Q0 :Closed
switching is not allowed, then the selected switchgear Q8 :Closed
unit is no longer marked. Local Locked
If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly,
the LED indicator for the signal MAI N: Inte rlock equ.
viol. will be illuminated.
Step 5 If no control action takes place within a set time period

after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time
for illumination (L OC : Return t ime ill umi n.) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Re turn time s elect .)
has elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
Step 6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote X0 :Closed

Q0 :Open
control; this is accomplished without a password prompt. Q8 :Closed
Remote Locked
6.12.2 Control at Panel Level (HMI with Graphic Display)

At Panel Level, the user can move from one Panel type to another by pressing
the Page key (in one direction only) or the “left”/”right” keys (in both directions).
6.12.2.1 Bay Panel (HMI with Graphic Display)
6.12.2.1.1 Information Displayed on the Bay Panel

Fig. 6-6, (p. 6-24) shows an example of a Bay Panel. The top line shows the
device type on the left and the current time of day on the right. Together with a
customized Bay Type with more than one Bay Panel page the top line will include
a page marker in the center. The page markers run from “PAGE A” (first page) to
“PAGE H” (eighth page).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-23

Fig. 6-6: Example of a Bay Panel.
The Bay Panel shown below in one-line diagram representation is a function of

the set bay type. The symbols shown in the following table are used to represent
the switchgear units and other external devices as well as the status of
switchgear units. The user can switch between character sets 1, 2, and 3.
Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in as-delivered condition but can be
replaced by a user-defined character set – by using a special ancillary tool. The
symbols of character set 1 are used in the following description.
The fourth line from the bottom shows (in abbreviated form) whether a bay
interlock is active. The third line from the bottom indicates whether remote or
local control is permitted. In the example shown here, remote control is
activated. The two lines at the bottom contain measured value data. The arrows
to the right of the measured value data indicate that additional measured values
can be called up by pressing the “up” or ”down” keys.
6-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

External device Position, e.g.: Setting

LOC:
DEV01: Character set
Control state 1: Character set 1 2: Character set 2
Circuit breaker 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Switch disconnector 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Disconnector 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Switch truck 1: Open
2: Closed
3: Faulty position
Fuse unit 1: Open
2: Closed
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-25

6.12.2.1.2 Measured Value Display in the Bay Panel

Action
Step 0 Measured values are shown one at a time.

A configuration step determines whether the measured P438
BB1
10:33:22
value will also be displayed in bar chart form. BB2
Q1 Q2
A configuration step determines whether the measured
value will also be displayed in bar chart form. The Q0
position of the bar chart can also be set for horizontal or Q9
vertical display (the setting applies to all measured
values). The arrows under the bar chart indicate that Locked
1: Remote
Q8
additional measured values can also be displayed. 1088A ↑

Step 1 By pressing the “up” or “down” key the next measured

value is displayed. In the example shown, no bar chart P438
BB1
10:33:25
display has been configured for the measured value. BB2
or Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1000A ↑
Current A prim. ↓
6-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.12.2.1.3 Controlling Switchgear Units

Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the
unit has been set for “local control”. If the local/remote key is set to switch
between remote and local control (R↔L), then the switch from “remote” to
“local” operation requires a password. When more than one Bay Panel page is
used only joint “local/remote” switching is available.
The following example is based on the (R↔L) setting for the local/remote key and
the factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see
Section 6.13.9.3, (p. 6-57)) the following description will apply accordingly.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-27


Action
Step 0 Select the Bay Panel.

P438 10:33:22
BB1
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
Step 1 Press the “local/remote” key (L/R) to switch the device to P438 10:33:22
local operation. The Bay Panel is no longer displayed.
The device type appears in the first line and eight ********
asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to
enter the password.
Step 2a Press the following keys in sequence: P438 10:33:22
“Left”
*
“Down” P438 10:33:22
“Right” P438 10:33:22
“Up” P438 10:33:22
The display will change as shown in the column on the

right. *
Now press the enter key.

P438 10:33:22
If the correct password has been entered, the Bay Panel BB1
BB2
will re-appear. The third line from the bottom will display
Q1 Q2
“Local”.
If an invalid password has been entered, the display Q0
shown above in Step 1 will appear. Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
6-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 2b This control step can be canceled at any time by pressing

the CLEAR key before the enter key is pressed. P438
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
Step 3a Press the Selection key to select a switchgear unit. Only

switchgear units that are electrically controllable can be P438
BB1
10:33:22
selected. The external device designation for the BB2
selected switchgear unit –“Q0”, for example – is Q1 Q2
displayed in flashing characters (underlined in the

Q0
example to the right) and also appears in the bottom line
Q9
of the display. If the display of external device
designations has been disabled, the selected switchgear Locked Q8
2: Local
unit will be marked by a flashing asterisk (*). The 1088A
designation of the selected external device appears in Q0
the bottom line of the display.
Step 3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear unit, press the

CLEAR key. Press the Selection key to select a new P438
BB1
10:33:22
switchgear unit. BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
Step 4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the keys “Open”

or “Close” to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with bay
interlock conditions – if applicable – is checked. or
Step 4a If the check of bay interlock conditions determines that

an operation can be carried out, then the switch P438
BB1
10:33:22
command is executed. The “off-end” (intermediate BB2
position) symbol is displayed while the switchgear unit is Q1 Q2
operating.
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-29


Action
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit has

elapsed, the resulting switching status is displayed. P438
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
Step 4b If the check of interlock conditions determines that

switching is not allowed, then the selected switchgear P438
BB1
10:33:22
unit is no longer highlighted. BB2
Q1 Q2
If the LED indicators have been configured accordingly,
the LED indicator for MAI N: Inter lock equ. viol. will Q0
be illuminated. Q9
Locked Q8
2: Local
1088A ↑
Step 5 If no control action takes place within a set time period

after selection of a switchgear unit or if the return time
for illumination (L OC: R eturn t ime il l umi n.) or the
return time for selection (LOC: Return time s elect .)
has elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
Step 6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to remote

control; this is accomplished without a password prompt. P438
BB1
10:33:22
BB2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Locked Q8
1: Remote
1088A ↑
6-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.12.2.2 Signal Panel(s)
The Signal Panel is applicable to the local control panel with graphic display only.
The Signal Panel is used to display the up to 28 different physical and logical
binary states that the device has available. The top line in the display shows the
panel designation “Signals” and the current time of day. The following empty line
separates the heading from actual signals. This gives display capacity of up to
seven signals to one Signal Panel. Additional pages are created when more than
seven signals have been configured. As with all other panels, switching between
pages is carried out automatically, after the parameter panel hold-time
(LOC : Hold -ti me for P ane ls) has elapsed, or manually by pressing the “Up”/
“Down” keys.
Each signal consists of two lines. The first line shows a status marker (square).
□ clear Signal inactive / not powered.

▀ black Signal active / powered.
▣ flashing Signaling.
Moreover, the first line shows the associated function group. The second line
shows the full text for this signal.
6.12.2.2.1 Automatic Activation

When automatic activation of the Signal Panel is set
(LOC : Aut.act iv.Sign.Pan el) each status change of signals, configured to a
panel, is automatically switched from the Bay Panel page or the Operation Panel/
Event Panel (depending on the actual selection) to the Signal Panel. Depending
on the range of functions available in the device, the displays of Overload Panels,
Ground Fault Panels or Fault Panels have a higher priority and will be shown
when an event has occurred. Using the Page key will make the display jump to
the other panels at any time.
6.12.2.2.2 Status Display and Signaling

To differentiate between the states “signal active / powered” and “signal
inactive / not powered” shown on the Signal Panel the parameter
(L OC : Stat .ind.S ign.P ane l) is used. This will distinguish between a clear/black
square alone and the simultaneous change over from normal display to
highlighting of text in both lines (the first line with the status marker will remain
unchanged).
By using the parameter (LOC : I ndi cat.Sign.P ane l) the signaling of status
changes of signals in the Signal Panel is controlled. There is a difference between
no signaling (acknowledgement is not necessary, but, if so configured, the Signal
Panel is switched on at any status change), signaling by the flashing status
marker “▣” alone or by flashing of the two lines (change over from normal
display to highlighting of text and the status marker). The flashing frequency is
fixed and may not be changed.
Each status change of signals, configured to a panel of the Bay Panel page can
be set to call for user attention either by having the status marker or both signal
lines flash when a new event has occurred. The switching control will then
automatically switch to the page, which includes the first signal that has
experienced a status change. After pressing the Selection key this flashing
signal is selected on the current page (signal preceded by a flashing cursor “>”).
The next flashing signal can be called up by pressing the Selection key again. At
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-31

this point it may occur that the display will automatically jump to the next page.
When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again
will start with the first flashing signal.
Depending on LOC : Sign. caus. Si gn. Pan elthe cause of a flashing signal may
be set. Either each status change of the binary information or only “incoming”
edges for transient signals will lead to a flashing signal. The status change is
generally shown as ’storing” i.e. the flashing signal will remain until it has been
acknowledged.
6.12.2.2.3 Acknowledging Flashing Signals

Acknowledging a flashing signal that has been selected will occur by pressing the
CLEAR key . This will not reset illuminated LED indicators but will only
acknowledge the display. The flashing will stop when the CLEAR key is pressed
and a static status display will appear. Then the display will automatically jump
to the next flashing signal. This will enable the user to acknowledge any flashing
signals by multiple pressing of the CLEAR key. As long as the Selection key is
pressed and no resetting has occurred the current page will be continuously
displayed (no automatic switching to the next page). The selection will remain
active until the time set for L OC: Re tu rn ti me s elect. has elapsed. When the
time has elapsed the display will jump to the next page. During an active
selection the user may at any time jump to the next or the previous page by
pressing the “up” or “down” keys (similar to the Measured Value Panel and the
Event Panel).
6.12.2.2.4 Status Change Signaling

As long as at least one status change signal in the Signal Panel has not been
acknowledged, LOC : Ch g.Sig.P ane l stat. will show the status change of the
Signal Panel as a static signal. This signal is made available in the selection
tables for the function groups LED, OUTP, LOGIC, PC, COMM1 and COMM2.
The second internal logic signal LOC : C hg.Sig.P anel flash.. shows the status
change of the Signal Panel as an alternating signal with a frequency of about
0.5 Hz. This signal is only made available in the selection tables for the function
groups LED, OUTP and LOGIC. It is generated independent of the operating mode
as set in LO C : Sign.cau s .Sign .P ane l; for example a LED configured to this
signal will also be triggered as flashing even if the operating mode is set to
Without signalling.
In order to be able to continue with the processing of flashing signals the device
has two internal logic signals available.
6-32 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Description Display
Step 1 Example of a Signal Panel with status display by status

markers (squares) Signals 23:56:10
■INP:
State U 1604
□MAIN:
■FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
■LOC:
■OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
□PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
■LOGIC:
Reset 3 EXT
Step 2 Example of a Signal Panel with status display by status

markers (squares) and highlighting of lines Signals 23:56:10
■ INP:
State U 1604
□ MAIN:
■ FT_RC:
Fault mem. overflow
■ LOC:
■ OUTP:
Outp. relays blocked
□ PSS:
Activate PS 3 EXT
■ LOGIC:
Reset 3 EXT
Step 3a Example of the selection of a status display with status

markers. >SFMON:
Battery failure
Cursor “>” is flashing.

>SFMON:
Battery failure
Step 3b Example of the selection of a status display with status

markers and highlighting of text. >SFMON:
Battery failure
Cursor “>” and highlighted text are flashing.

>SFMON:
Battery failure
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-33

6.12.2.3 Measured Value Panels on the Graphic Display

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can
first be selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select
different sets of measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel,
the Ground Fault Panel, and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels
relevant for the particular design version of the given device and its associated
range of functions are actually available. The selected set of values for the
Operation Panel is always available. Please see the section entitled “Setting a
List Parameter” (Section 6.13.5, (p. 6-44)) for instructions regarding selection.
The measured value display can be structured by inserting a dummy or
placeholder in the list of selected measured values. If the MAIN: Without
funct ion setting has been selected for a given panel, then that panel is
disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the
corresponding Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or
ground fault situation exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is
displayed and remains active until the measured fault values are reset, by
pressing the CLEAR key , for example.

Action
Step 0 The uppermost line of the display shows the type of Meas.values 16:57:33
measured values being displayed. In this example, the Voltage A-B prim.
display shows measured operating values (abbreviated 20.7 kV
as “Meas. values”). The time of day is shown at the Voltage B-C prim.
upper right of the display. 20.6 kV
Voltage C-A prim.
Up to six selected measured values can be displayed
20.8 kV
on the Panel simultaneously. Current A prim.
415 A
Current B prim.
416 A
Current C prim.
417 A
↓↑
Step 1 If more than six measured values have been selected, Meas.values 16:57:35
they can be viewed one page at a time by pressing the Voltage A-B norm.
“up” or ”down” keys. The device will also show the 0.7 kV
next page of the Measured Value Panel after the set or Voltage B-C norm.
Hold-time for Panels (setting in menu tree: “Par/Conf/ 0.6 kV
LOC”) has elapsed. Voltage C-A norm.
0.8 kV
Current A norm.
1.5 A
Current B norm.
1.6 A
Current C norm.
1.7 A
↓↑
6-34 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.12.2.4 Event Panel on the Graphic Display

The Event Panel shows the signals relevant for operation, each with the complete
time tag (date and time of day). A maximum of three signals are displayed. The
Event Panel is based on entries in the operating data memory (menu tree:
“Oper/Rec/OP_RC”).

Action
Step 0 The uppermost line of the display shows the panel Events 16:57:33
designation and the current time of day. Below this 20.04.13
line, the signals are shown in chronological order. The 05:21:32.331 MAIN
arrows at the bottom of the display area indicate that Trip command
additional signals can also be displayed. Start
05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.13
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
Start
↓↑
Step 1 Pressing the “up” or “down” keys will display the Events 16:57:35
signals one at a time.
05:21:35.501 MAIN
or Trip command
End
21.04.13
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/faulty
Start
08:10:59.688 GRUND
Blocked/faulty
End
↓↑
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-35

6.13 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.13.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and Function Groups

All data points are organized in different folders based on practical control
requirements.
At the root of the menu tree is the unit type; the tree branches into the three
main folders “Settings”, “Measurements & Tests” and “Fault & Event Records”,
which form the first folder level. Up to two further folder levels follow so that the
entire folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three
folder levels.
At the end of each branch of folders are the various function groups in which the
individual data points (settings) are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
plane 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
plane 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
01.01.16 dd.mm.yy
points
Fig. 6-7: Basic menu tree structure.
6-36 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.13.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode

The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode
and plain text mode. In the address mode the display shows settings, signals,
and measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain
text mode the settings, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form
of plain text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The
active branch of the menu tree is displayed in plain text in both modes. In the
following examples, the display is shown in plain text mode only.

Action
Step 0 In this example, the user switches from plain text mode Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
Device online
to address mode. No (=off)
Step 1 To switch from address mode to plain text mode or vice Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
versa, press the CLEAR key and either the “left” key or 0
the “right” key simultaneously. This can be done at any
point in the menu tree. +
or
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-37

6.13.3 Change-Enabling Function

Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the
associated value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the
input mode. This safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
● Global change-enabling function: To activate the global change-
enabling function, set the LOC: P aram. cha nge enabl. parameter to
Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered.
Thereafter, all further changes – with the exception of specially protected
control actions (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-52)) – are enabled without
entering the password.
● Selective change-enabling function: Password input prior to any setting
change.
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when
the global change-enabling function has been activated. The following
example is based on the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-54)), the following
description will apply accordingly.
6-38 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC, select the Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

LOC: Param. change enabl. parameter. No
Step 1 Login procedure Cyber Security

insuff. rights
Press the ENTER key. Insufficient rights message is
displayed for 2 seconds.
Select proper user by pressing 'up' and 'down'. Select a user

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the User Password?
********
display.
Enter the configured password of the selected user. Cyber Security

login successful
Please refer to Section 3.3.2, (p. 3-6) for detailed
information about the compatibility with or without
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
indicates that the setting can now be changed by No
pressing the “up” or “down” keys.
Step 3 Change the setting to Yes. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Yes
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator will go out. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The unit is enabled for further setting changes. Yes
The same procedure applies to any setting change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
setting change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global
change-enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global
change-enabling function has been activated.
6.13.3.1 Automatic Return

The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from
remaining activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set
return time (L O C: Aut om. re tur n ti me, menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”) has
elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically deactivated, and the
display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the current system
condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is pressed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-39

6.13.3.2 Forced Return

The return described above can be forced from the local control panel by first
pressing the “up” key and then holding it down while pressing the CLEAR key.
It is important to press the “up” key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all settings can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to disable the protective function
(MAIN : Prote ction e na bl ed, menu tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN). Such settings
include the configuration settings, by means of which the device interfaces can
be adapted to the system. The following entries in the “Change” column of the
“Telegram Documentation” (part of the separately available
“DataModelExplorer”) indicate whether values can be changed or not:
● “on”: The value can be changed even when the protective function is
enabled.
● “off”: The value can only be changed when the protective function is
disabled.
● “–”: The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the protective function is disabled.
6-40 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.13.4 Changing Parameters

If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied, the desired setting can be
entered.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-41


Action
Step 0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

In this example, the change-enabling function is Yes
activated and the protective function is disabled, if
necessary.
Step 1 Select the desired setting by pressing the keys. Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
50000 s

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 3 he LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
last digit of the value is highlighted by a cursor 50000̲ s
(underlined).
Step 4 Press the “left” or “right” keys to move the cursor to Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
the left or right. 5000̲0 s
Step 5 Change the value highlighted by the cursor by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
the “up” and “down” keys. In the meantime the device 5001̲0 s
will continue to operate with the old value.
6-42 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
MODE will go out and the device will now operate with 50010 s
the new value. Press the keys to select another setting
for a value change.
Step 7 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Conf/LOC
Autom. return time
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), 50000 s
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator will go out and
the device will continue to operate with the old value.
A further setting can be selected for a value change by
pressing the keys.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-43

6.13.5 List Parameters
6.13.5.1 Setting a List Parameter

Using list settings, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order
to perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measurements
that will be displayed on Measured Value Panels. As a rule, the selected elements
are linked by an “OR” operator. Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and
NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC function group for linking the selected list
items. In this way binary signals and binary input signals can be processed in a
Boolean equation tailored to meet user requirements. For the DNP 3.0
communication protocol, the user defines the class of a setting instead of
assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be used here as an
illustration.
6-44 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 0 Select a list setting (in this example, the parameter Par/Conf/LOC
Fct.asg. num. displ.
LOC : Fct .a sg. num. di spl. at “Par/Conf/LOC” in the
menu tree). The down arrow (↓) indicates that a list ↓
setting has been selected.
Step 1 Press the “down” key. The first function and the first Par/Conf/LOC
selected signal will appear in the third and fourth lines, #01 MEASO
respectively. The symbol “#01” in the display indicates Current A-1
the first item of the selection. If MAIN: W i th out
funct ion appears for the first item, then this means
that no function assignment has yet been made.
Step 2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

the “right” and “left” keys. OR #02 MAIN
Frequency f,1
Once the end of the list is reached, the display shown Par/Conf/LOC
on the right will appear. #05 MAIN
?????
Step 3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the list. The LED Par/Conf/LOC
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. #02 MAIN
Frequency f,1
Step 4 Scroll through the assignable functions by pressing the Par/Conf/LOC

“right” and “left” keys in the input mode. #02 MAIN
Angle phi N,1
Step 5 Select the operator or the class using the “up” and Par/Conf/LOC
“down“ keys. In this particular case, only the “OR” OR #02 MAIN
operator can be selected. There is no limitation on the Angle phi N,1
selection of classes.
Step 6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator will go out. The Par/Conf/LOC
assignment has been made. The unit will now operate OR #02 MAIN
with the new settings. Angle phi N,1
If no operator has been selected, the “OR” operator is
always assigned automatically when the ENTER key is
pressed. There is no automatic assignment of classes.
Step 7 Press the “up” key to exit the list at any point in the Par/Conf/LOC
list.
↓
Step 8 If you wish to reject the new setting while you are still Par/Conf/LOC
entering it (LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), OR #02 MAIN
press the CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Frequency f,1
MODE will be extinguished.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-45

6.13.5.2 Deleting a List Parameter

If MAIN : Wit hou t fun ction is assigned to a given item, then all the following
items are deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6-46 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.13.6 Memory Readout

Memories can be read out after going to the corresponding entry point. This does
not necessitate activating the change-enabling function or even disabling the
protective functions. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not
possible.
The following memories are available:
● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/OP_RC”: Operating data memory
● In the menu tree “Oper/Rec/MT_RC”: Monitoring signal memory
● Event memories
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/FT_RC”: Fault memories 1 to 8
o In the menu tree “Events/Rec/OL_RC”: Overload memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit.
6.13.6.1 Readout of the Operating Data Memory

The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of
100 entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the operating data memory. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No
Step 2 Press the “left” key repeatedly to display the entries Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 PSIG
one after the other in chronological order. Once the Enabled USER
end of the operating data memory has been reached, Yes
pressing the “left” key again will have no effect.
Step 3 Press the “right” key to display the previous entry. Oper/Rec/OP_RC
01.01.13 11:33 ARC
Enabled USER
No
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the operating Oper/Rec/OP_RC
data memory to return to the entry point.
↓
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-47

6.13.6.2 Readout of the Monitoring Signal Memory

If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring
routines or if it detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning
of the unit, then an entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum
of 30 entries is possible. After that an “overflow” signal is issued.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the monitoring signal Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
memory.
↓
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the monitoring signal Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to display the entries Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 10:01 SFMON
one after the other in chronological order. If more than Exception oper. syst.
30 monitoring signals have been entered since the last
reset, the “overflow” signal is displayed as the last
entry.
Step 3 Press the “left” key to display the previous entry. Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
Checksum error param
Step 4 If the “down” key is held down while a monitoring Mon. signal record.
01.01.13 13:33 SFMON
signal is being displayed, the following additional Checksum error param
information will be displayed:
● First First: 13:33:59.744

Updated: Yes
Time when the signal first occurred
Acknowledged: No
● Updated Number: 5
The fault is still being detected (Yes) or is no
longer detected (No) by the self-monitoring
function.
● Acknowledged
The fault was no longer detected by the self-
monitoring function and has been reset (Yes).
● Number
The signal occurred x times.
Step 5 Press the “up” key at any point within the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC
Mon. signal record.
signal memory to return to the entry point.
↓
6-48 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.13.6.3 Readout of the Event Memories (Records)

There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored
in event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
Step 0 Select the entry point for the first fault memory, for Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
example. If the memory contains entries, the third line 01.01.13 10:00:33
of the display will show the date and time the fault ↓
began. If the third line is blank, then there are no entries
in the fault memory.
Step 1 Press the “down” key to enter the fault memory. First, Fault recording 1
FT_RC
the fault number is shown. In this example it is the 22nd Event
fault since the last reset. 22
Step 2 Press the “right” key repeatedly to see first the Fault recording 1
200 ms FT_DA
measured fault data and then the binary signals in Running time
chronological order. The time shown in the second line is 0.17 s
the time, measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal started or Fault recording 1
ended. 0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached (after the
Start
“right” key has been pressed repeatedly), pressing the
“right” key again will have no effect.
Fault recording 1
241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
Step 3 Press the “left” key to see the previous measured value Fault recording 1
0 ms FT_RC
or the previous signal. Record. in progress
Start
Step 4 Press the “up” key at any point within the fault memory Events/Rec/FT_RC
Fault recording 1
to return to the entry point. 01.01.13 10:00:33
↓
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-49

6.13.7 Resetting
All information memories – including the event memories and the monitoring
signal memory – as well as the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition,
the LED indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new
fault – provided that the appropriate operating mode has been selected – so that
they always indicate the latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which
is always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED
indicator test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by
this action, so that inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset
signal pattern is reliably prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight
consecutive events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should
not be necessary, in principle.
Deleting the event memories completely (e.g. after a function test), can be
accomplished by various resetting actions including the configuration of a group
resetting for several memories. An overview of all resetting actions can be found
in section “Resetting Actions” in Chapter “Operation”.
Resetting a single memory from the local control panel is described in the
following with the example of a fault memory. In this example the global change-
enabling function has already been activated.
6-50 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 0 Select the reset setting. Line 3 of the display shows the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
number of faults since the last reset, 10 in this 10
example.

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
10
Don't execute
Step 3 Press the “Up” or “Down” keys to change the setting to Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
Execute. 10
Execute
Step 4 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC
Reset recording
MODE will be extinguished. The value in line 3 is reset 0
to 0.
Step 5 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault recordings Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
after leaving the standard control mode (the LED 10
indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR
key. The LED indicator will be extinguished, and the
fault recordings remain stored unchanged in the
protection unit’s memory. Any setting can be selected
again for a value change by pressing the keys.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-51

6.13.8 Password-Protected Control Actions

Certain actions from the local control panel such as a manual trip command for
testing purposes can only be carried out by entering a password so as to prevent
unwanted output even though the global change-enabling function has been
activated (see Section 6.13.3, (p. 6-38)).
This setup is designed to prevent accidental output and applies even when the
global change-enabling function has been activated. The password consists of a
pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a specific time interval. If
the password has been changed by the user (see Section 6.13.9, (p. 6-54)),
the following description will apply accordingly.
6-52 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN”, select the Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man.M-trip cmd USER
parameter MAI N: Man .M-trip cmd USER. Don't execute

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed by Don't execute
pressing the “up” or “down” keys.
Step 3 Change the setting to execute. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man.M-trip cmd USER
Execute
Step 4 Press the enter key again. The LED indicator labeled Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
EDIT MODE will go out. The unit will execute the Don't execute
command.
Step 5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is on, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man.M-trip cmd USER
the control action can be terminated by pressing the Don't execute
CLEAR key. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will
be extinguished.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-53

6.13.9 Changing the Password
6.13.9.1 Local Control Panel with Password Protection

The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered
sequentially within a specific time interval. The “left”, “right”, “up” and “down”
keys may be used to define the password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and
4, respectively:
1 2
6-54 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
LOC: Password setting. ********

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The Par/Conf/LOC
Password
third line shows an underscore character ( _ ) as the _
prompt for entering a new password.
Step 3 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
Step 4 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new password again. _
Step 5 Re-enter the password. Par/Conf/LOC

Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
Step 6a Press the ENTER key again. If the password has been Par/Conf/LOC
Password
re-entered correctly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT ********
MODE goes out and the display appears as shown on
the right. The new Password is now valid.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-55


Action
Step 6b If the password has been re-entered incorrectly, the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE remains on and the **
display shown on the right appears. The password has _
to be re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change of the Password by pressing the CLEAR key (see
Step 8).
Step 7 The change in password can be canceled at any time Par/Conf/LOC

Password
before Step 6 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password continues to be valid.
6.13.9.2 Local Control Panel without Password Protection

Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also
possible. To select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in
steps 4 and 6 of Table, (p. 6-55), without entering anything else. This will
configure the local control panel without password protection, and no control
actions involving changes will be possible until the global change-enabling
function has been activated (see “Change-Enabling Function”, Section 6.13.3,
(p. 6-38)).
6-56 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

6.13.9.3 Changing and Displaying the L/R Password

In order to enable local control on devices fitted with the graphic display HMI
(ordering option) the L/R password has to be entered.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-57


Action
Step 0 In the menu tree “Par/Conf/LOC”, select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
LOC: Password L/R setting. ********

insuff. rights

DefaultOperate
DefaultEngineer
DefaultViewer
or
********
display.

login successful
Cyber Security.
Step 2 The red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will be Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
illuminated. The current Password L/R will appear in the 1423
third line.
Step 3 Enter the new password, which in this example is done Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
by pressing the “up” key followed by the “down” key. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
Step 4 Press the enter key again. Asterisks appear in the third Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
line, and a cursor (underscore) in the fourth line **
prompts the user to enter the new Password L/R again. _
Step 5 Re-enter the new Password L/R. Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
**
6-58 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Action
Step 6a Press the ENTER key again. If the new Password L/R has Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
been re-entered correctly, the red LED indicator labeled ********
EDIT MODE will be extinguished and the display
appears as shown on the right. The new Password L/R is
now valid.
Step 6b If the new Password L/R has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
incorrectly, the red LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
**
remains illuminated and the display shown on the right _
hand side appears. The new Password L/R needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the change of
the Password L/R by pressing the CLEAR key (see Step
8).
Step 7 The change of the Password L/R can be canceled at any Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR key. If this is ********
done, the original Password L/R continues to be valid.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 6-59

6-60 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
7 Settings
7.1 Parameters
The P438 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by
appropriate settings. This chapter gives instructions for determining the settings,
which are located in the folder titled “Parameters” in the menu tree. The
sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree.
The P438 devices are supplied with a factory-set standard configuration of
settings that, in most cases, correspond to the default settings or become
apparent after a “cold restart”. The P438 is blocked in that case. All settings
must be re-entered after a cold restart.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P438_en_P01.zip.
In contrast to P438 versions before P438‑630, the implementation of the IEC 61850
protocol now features parameters that cannot be modified from the local control
panel (HMI) or with the operating program. Instead, these parameters are set with
a special IEC 61850 operating software, named “IED Configurator”.
Therefore these settings are not listed in this chapter or the following chapter.
These parameters are described in Chapter “IEC 61850 Settings via IED
Configurator”.
Cancelling a Protection or Control Function

The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage
system by including the relevant protection or control functions in the device
configuration and cancelling all others (removing them from the device
configuration).
The following conditions must be met before cancelling a protection or control
function:
● The protection or control function in question must be disabled.
● None of the functions of the protection or control function to be cancelled
may be assigned to a binary input.
● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to
a binary output or an LED indicator.
● No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list
setting.
● None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to
other signals by way of an “m out of n” parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured
value belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: “LIMIT:”).
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Input” (INP)

The P438 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the
system. The number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are
shown in the terminal connection diagrams. The “DataModelExplorer” (available
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-1

P438 7 Settings
as a separate ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options
for all binary inputs.
The P438 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum
number possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing
binary signal inputs are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs, one should keep in mind that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs
U C01 to U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN: Auto-
assignme nt I /O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P438 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to
the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A and B
as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for functions from the
DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new
bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering
signals must persist for at least 30 ms. The operating mode for each binary
signal input can be defined.
The user can specify whether the presence (active ‘high’ mode) or absence
(active ‘low’ mode) of a voltage shall be interpreted as the logic “1” signal.
General Notes on the Configuration of Function Group “Binary Output” (OUTP)

The P438 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and
connection schemes for the available binary output relays are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The “DataModelExplorer” (available as a separate
ZIP archive file) gives information about the configuration options for all binary
outputs.
The P438 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O
module is not installed or has fewer output relays than the maximum number
possible at this slot, then the configuration addresses for the missing output
relays are automatically hidden in the menu tree.
7-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating
of the binary I/O modules (X) varies (see Chapter “Technical Data”). One signal
can also be assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of
contact multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B.
(Whether automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting MA IN : Auto-
assignme nt I/O.) Depending on the connection type chosen for the P438 – pin-
type or ring-type cable socket terminals – the symbolic slots A and B correspond
to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin-type cable socket terminals Ring-type cable socket terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type – in the case of auto-
assignment – is given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A and B
are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there
will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in the
List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the device.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the
selected operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-
signal (ES) mode or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or
non-latching mode. For output relays operating in latching mode, the operating
mode setting also determines when latching will be cancelled.
General Notes on the Configuration of the LED Indicators

The P438 has LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. LED indicator
H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled “HEALTHY” and signals the operational
readiness of the protection unit (supply voltage present). LED indicators H 2 and
H 3 are not configurable either. H 2 is labeled “OUT OF SERVICE” and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled “ALARM” and signals a warning alarm.
LED indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the “EDIT MODE”. Section
“Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators (Function Group LED)”
in Chapter “Operation” describes the layout of the LED indicators and the factory
setting for LED indicator H 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES)
mode (“open-circuit principle”) or normally-energized (NE) mode (“closed-circuit
principle”) and in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators
operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines when
latching will be cancelled.
With the multi-color LED indicators the colors red and green can be
independently assigned with functions. The third color amber results as a
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-3

P438 7 Settings
mixture of red and green, i.e. when both functions assigned to the LED indicator
are simultaneously present.
7.1.1 Device Identification

The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and
the design version of the P438. They have no effect on the device functions.
These settings should only be changed if the design version of the P438 is
modified.
7-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Default Min Max Unit Logic Diagram
Device DVICE: De vice t ype 000 000
438 0 1000
[spacer]
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S oft ware ve rsi on 1X X 024 219
Not measured 0 65535
[spacer]
The setting defines the software version of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
[spacer] DVICE: S W date 002 122
1997-01-01 1997-01 2098-11 dd.mm.yy

-01 -08
[spacer]
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.
Note: The centuries are not displayed. The supported dates range from January
1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion communic. 002 103
Not measured 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
Software version for the device's communication software. This display cannot
be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: DM I EC 618 50 ve rsion 002 059
[spacer]
Software version of the communication software based on the device's protocol
per IEC 61850. This display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: Text vers .dat a mode l 002 121
0 0 255
[spacer]
Using the ‘text replacement tool' provided by the operating program, the user
can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and load them
into the device. These customized data models contain an identifier defined by
the user while preparing the data model. This identifier is displayed at this point
in the menu tree. Standard data models have the identifier ‘0' (factory-set
default).
[spacer] DVICE: Lang uage v ersion 002 123
0.0 0.0 899.9
[spacer]
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: F numb er 002 124
0 0 9999
[spacer]
The F number is the serial number of the device. The display cannot be altered.
[spacer] DVICE: AFS Orde r No. 001 000
0:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-5

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: PCS Or de r No. 001 200
0:
[spacer]
Order numbers for the device. The user cannot alter this number.
[spacer] DVICE: Order ext . No. 1 000 003
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
7-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
0 0 999
[spacer]
Order extension numbers for the device.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ar. slot 1 086 050
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-7

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 9 086 058
65535: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule var. slot 1 0 086 059
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.
The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given time.
[spacer] DVICE: M odule vers . slot 1 086 193
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
7-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 6 086 198
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
[spacer] DVICE: M odule v ers . slot 1 0 086 202
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module A in this design version.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-9

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module A 086 190
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module A.
[spacer] DVICE: M AC add ress module A 104 061
2:
[spacer]
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is
introduced during manufacture and can only be read.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module L in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module L 086 191
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of module L.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion of module B 086 192
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
65535: Not fitted
[spacer]
Item number of the analog bus module B in this design version.
[spacer] DVICE: Vers ion m odul e B (a) 086 189
27: Not fitted
[spacer]
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.
[spacer] DVICE: IP addres s 111 000
2:
[spacer] DVICE: S ubnet mas k 111 001
2:
[spacer] DVICE: M AC add ress 111 003
2:
[spacer]
Display of the IP address (or subnet mask, MAC address, respectively) of the
Ethernet interface of the processor module. This can be useful for network
analysis, especially if these settings have been retrieved via DHCP.
[spacer] DVICE: Cust omer ID data 1 000 040
0.00 0.00 99.99
7-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
0.00 0.00 99.99
[spacer]
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
[spacer] DVICE: Location 001 201
0:
[spacer]
Reference input for the device's location as selected by user.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice ID 000 035
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code for use by the PC programs for operating and setting. Further
instructions on this setting are given in the description of the respective
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: S ubst ation ID 000 036
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: Fee de r ID 000 037
0 0 9999
[spacer]
operating program.
[spacer] DVICE: De vice password 1 000 048
0 0 9999
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-11

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DVICE: De vice p assword 2 000 049
0 0 9999
[spacer]
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See
description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI 002 131
Not measured 0.00 655.35
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rsion DHMI DM 002 132
1.10 0.00 655.35
[spacer] DVICE: S W ve rs.Chin.DHMI DM 008 233
2.00 0.00 655.35
[spacer]
Internal software version numbers.
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Local HM I ex is ts 221 099
1: Yes
[spacer]
When set to Yes it is apparent that the device is fitted with the local control
panel (HMI).
7-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Parameter Address
Cyber Security CS: Cyb erSe curi ty Ver s. 180 031
2 0 65535
[spacer]
Version of Cyber Security implementation within the device. Easergy MiCOM 30
is starting with value 2 to be compatible with other Schneider Electric devices.
[spacer] CS: Num ber of us e rs 180 002
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Actual number of users in RBAC configuration.
[spacer] CS: Comms log out 180 032
0: don't execute
[spacer]
If executed, the current logged in user at PC port or via Tunneling interface is
logged out (can be only executed by Comms).
[spacer] CS: HM I logout 180 033
0: don't execute
[spacer]
If executed, the current logged in user at HMI interface is logged out (can be
only executed by HMI).
[spacer] CS: Comms us ername 180 043
0:
[spacer]
Display of the name of the user which is logged in either at PC-port or via
Tunneling.
[spacer] CS: HM I us ername 180 034
0:
[spacer]
Display of the name of the user which is logged in at HMI.
[spacer] CS: Us e r acces s role 180 013
0:
[spacer]
Role(s) of user which is actually logged in. It will be set by the device after
successful login and will be cleared when user is logged off. Of the first 5 roles of
a user, the first 3 chars of the roles names will be displayed separated with one
blank between each.
[spacer] CS: Max log in at te mpts 180 011
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Number of possible login attempts or blocked (blocked means no limitation of
attempts).
[spacer] CS: Log in at te mpt s l eft 180 010
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Remaining login attempts.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-13

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CS: Blocking time 180 015
0 0 1800 s
[spacer]
Time how long login shall be blocked after erroneous login attempts or blocked
(blocked means it will not getting active).
[spacer] CS: Block time left 180 012
0 0 1800 s
[spacer]
Remaining blocking login time after erroneous login attempts.
[spacer] CS: Res ult E PW s ett ing 180 041
0 -5 0
[spacer]
Display of a value to informe on the result of the password setting. (EPW =
Encrypted Password)
[spacer] CS: Change p inco de 180 003
0 0 0
[spacer]
Change the PIN code using the navigation keys of the HMI. It is not necessary at
[spacer] CS: Config dis abled 180 044
1: Yes
[spacer]
Configure disabled or not.
[spacer] CS: Recovery Pass wor d 180 014
0:
[spacer]
Display of the Token and allow entry for reset to factory password.
[spacer] CS: Res et RBAC 180 045
12 1 12
[spacer]
Only on HMI. Starting reset timer and display code.
7-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Configurable func‐ F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F1 080 112
tion keys
061 000: MAIN: Without function
[spacer] F_KEY: Fct. ass i gnm. F2 080 113
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to the function keys. Either a single function or a menu
jump list may be selected. There are two menu jump lists, which are assembled
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1 or LO C: F ct . me nu jmp list 2,
respectively.
[spacer] F_KEY: Oper ating mode F 1 080 132
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
1: Key
[spacer]
Choice between operation of the function key as a key or switch.
[spacer] F_KEY: Re tur n time fct .k e ys 003 037
60 60 60000 s
[spacer]
Once the password has been entered, the function keys remain active for no
longer than this time. Thereafter, the function keys are disabled until the
password is entered again.
[spacer] F_KEY: Pas s wor d funct. key 1 003 036
0 0 4444
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-15

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] F_KEY: Pas s word funct. key 2 030 242
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
0 0 4444
[spacer]
Definition of the password for enabling the function keys.
7-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Languag e (tongue ) 003 020
2: English
[spacer]
Language in which texts will be displayed on the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] LOC: De cim al de limit er 003 021
1: Dot
[spacer]
Character to be used as decimal delimiter on the local control panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis pl. ex t.de v.de sig 221 032
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be displayed
on the Bay Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis play L/ R 221 070
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the control site – “Local” or “Remote” – shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Dis pl. inte rl. stat . 221 071
1: With Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the “Locked” or “Unlocked” status shall be
displayed on the bay panel.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word 003 035
1234 0 4444
[spacer]
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel can
be defined here.
[spacer] LOC: Pas s word L / R 221 040
1423 0 4444
[spacer]
The password used to change the setting from “Remote” to “Local” control can
be defined here. (Switching from “Local” to “Remote” control occurs without
checking the password.)
[spacer] LOC: Bus bar1 Name by Use r 218 191
0:
[spacer] LOC: De signation busbar 1 221 033
1: BB1 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
0:
2: BB2 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-17

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0:
3: BB3 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Setting for the busbar designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel. At
LOC: Bus bar1 Name by Use r any text (max. 3 characters) may be
entered which will then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
LOC: De signat ion busbar 1 has been set to BB-User Name. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at L OC: Designat ion
busbar 1 it will be used and L OC : Busbar 1 Name by User will be
ignored. A designation with more than 3 characters is internally truncated. (The
same is true of BB2,...)
[spacer] LOC: BB S ect.1-Name Use r 218 195
0:
[spacer] LOC: De signat. bus se ct .1 221 035
1: BSa Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer] LOC: BB S ect.2-Name Use r 218 196
0:
[spacer] LOC: De signat. bus se ct .2 221 036
2: BSb Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Setting for the busbar section designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel. At
LOC: BB S ect.1-Name Use r any text (max 3 characters) may be entered
which will then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
LOC: De signat. bus se ct .1 has been set to BB-Sect.User Name. When
one of the pre-defined designations is selected at LOC: De signat. bus
sect.1 it will be used and LOC : BB S ect .1 -Na meUse r will be ignored. A
designation with more than 3 characters is internally truncated. (The same is
true of busbar section 2.)
[spacer] LOC: Character se t 221 038
1: Character set 1 Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
The user can choose between several character sets to represent switchgear
and their switching states on the Bay Panel.
Note: Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in the factory default
setting, but can be replaced by an user-defined character set, by applying an
accessory tool to the operating program.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. re set ke y 005 251
060 000: MAIN: Without function Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
[spacer]
Selection of counters and memories that are reset by pressing the RESET key on
the local control panel. (Resetting LED indicators and measured event values is
permanently assigned internally, so that they are always reset when the RESET
key is pressed.)
7-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Fct. re ad ke y 080 110
[spacer]
Selection of up to 16 functions to be triggered when pressing the read key.
Event counters and event recordings are offered for selection. If several
functions have been selected then they will be sequentially triggered by
repeated pressing of the read key.
[spacer] LOC: Oper ation mode 011 240
0: LOC Direct
[spacer]
This setting defines which of the three implemented operating modes the P438
shall use for the local control of switchgear units via LOC.
[spacer] LOC: SI reque st 221 118
1: Yes
[spacer]
This setting defines whether or not the check of the interlock equations, that is
carried out with the local control of switchgear units, also includes a check of
station interlocking.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. ass ign. L/R k e y 225 208
1: R <-> L Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-15)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches
between remote / local control (L↔R) or between remote+local control / local
control (R&L↔L).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 1 030 238
[spacer] LOC: Fct. m enu jmp li st 2 030 239
[spacer]
Selection of specified functions which will be sequentially displayed by repeated
reading of the menu jump list 1 (or 2).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Operat ion P anel 053 007
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also
referred to as the Operation Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Ove r lo ad Pane l 053 005
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Sig nal P anel 221 072
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Signal Panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-19

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Aut.activ.S ign.P ane l 221 073
0: Activation off Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Activation of the automatic switching to the Signal Panel at every change of
state of a configured signal.
[spacer] LOC: St at.ind.S ign.P anel 221 074
1: Filled box Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Definition of display type of active / inactive signals on the Signal Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Indicat.S ign .P anel 221 075
0: Without signalling Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Definition of signal type at change of state and response to an acknowledge
command.
[spacer] LOC: Sig n.caus .S ign.P anel 221 078
1: All status changes Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)
[spacer]
Definition of cause for signaling (every change of state / incoming signals only).
[spacer] LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003
[spacer]
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.
[spacer] LOC: Fct.as g. num. dis pl. 221 041
[spacer]
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in numerical
form.
[spacer] LOC: Fct. asg . b ar displ. 221 042
[spacer]
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in bar form.
Note: Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected
for display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured values
that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form!
In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the selection list for
the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured value that cannot
be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list for numerical
measured values.
Example: Current IB is to be displayed. In this case, either the primary current
IB or the per-unit current IB shall be selected for the numerical display. The per-
unit current IB shall be entered at the same position in the selection list for the
bar chart display.
[spacer] LOC: Bar disp lay ty pe 221 039
0: No bar display Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Disabling the bar chart display or definition of the orientation of the bar chart to
display measured values on the Bay Panel.
7-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOC: Scal. bar dis play I 221 044
1: 1.2 Inom Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Scaling of measured current values to be displayed in bar chart form.
[spacer] LOC: Scal. bar dis play V 221 045
1: 1.2 Vnom Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Scaling of measured voltage values to be displayed in bar chart form.
[spacer] LOC: Dis play b ar scale 221 046
1: Yes Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
Setting this window can disable the scalable bar chart.
[spacer] LOC: Hold- tim e for P anels 031 075
5 1 10 s Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-12)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period during which a panel is displayed, before switching to
the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are selected than can
be shown on the LC-Display.
[spacer] LOC: Hold- t. meas.v. dis pl 031 072
Blocked 1 60 s
[spacer]
Always when the time period set here has elapsed the next value will be shown
on the Bay Panel display. With a setting to Blocked this automatic switching
forward to the next measured value will be deactivated. Independent of this the
next or the previous configured measured value may be selected by pressing
the keys “cursor down” or “cursor up”.
[spacer] LOC: Autom . re t ur n t ime 003 014
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)

Fig. 3-6, (p. 3-12)
[spacer]
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set time
period, the change-enabling function is deactivated.
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time selec t. 221 030
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
[spacer] LOC: Re t ur n time illumi n. 003 023
60 60 60000 s Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-9)
[spacer]
period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-21

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
PC link PC: Bay addre ss 003 068
1 0 254 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer] PC: De vice addr ess 003 069
1 0 255 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in communication via
the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected for both addresses.
[spacer] PC: Baud rate 003 081
115.2: 115.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Parit y bit 003 181
1: Even Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the P438.
[spacer] PC: Spontan. sig. e nable 003 187
0: None Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Select. s pontan. si g. 003 189
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Trans m.enab.cyc l. dat 003 084
0: Without Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: Cycl. d ata ILS t e l. 003 185
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the PC interface.
[spacer] PC: De lta V 003 055
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta I 003 056
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] PC: De lta P 003 059
15.0 0.0 15.0 %Snom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the set
delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta f 003 057
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta T 003 156
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Tref
[spacer]
The measured temperature value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs
by more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta Z 003 157
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Zref
[spacer]
The measured operating impedance value is transmitted via the PC interface if it
differs by more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta phi 003 158
3.0 0.0 15.0 %phi,ref
[spacer]
The measured load angle value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by
more than the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta meas.v.ILS te l 003 155
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta quantity
from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] PC: De lta t 003 058
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this time
period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered by the
other delta conditions.
[spacer] PC: Time-out 003 188
1 1 60 min Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
Setting for the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-23

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Function gr oup CO MM1 056 026
communication
interface 1
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the
function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings
and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
[spacer] COMM 1: General enabl e USE R 003 170
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Basic IEC87 0-5 e nabl 003 215
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . - 10 1 e nable 003 216
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addit . I LS e nable 003 217
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US e nable 003 220
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 enable 003 231
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER e nable 103 040
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m unicat. prot ocol 003 167
[spacer]
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
7-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: -103 pr ot. var iant 003 178
1: Private Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the 103 protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US prot . variant 003 214
1: Compatible Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
The user may select between two variants of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Line idle stat e 003 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 1: Baud rat e 003 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Parity bit 003 171
2: Even Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P438.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-25

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Dead t ime moni toring 003 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
The P438 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 1: Mon. tim e pol ling 003 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet comm. addre ss 003 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
“ASDU”: Application Service Data Unit
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP 3 003 240
0 0 255 Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices.
The address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at COM M1: Octet comm. addr ess is the lower-order octet of the
DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
7-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Pos. acknowle dge me nt 103 060
1: Single character E5
[spacer]
The following transmission frame formats are available (according to the
standard):
● Short message FT 1.2: short message with a fixed block length of 5
characters
● Single character E5: single control character
[spacer] COMM 1: Address mode 003 168
1: Physical
[spacer]
Setting for the address mode.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t monit or on 003 166
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities.
[spacer] COMM 1: Name of manufac ture r 003 161
1: SE Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note:
● This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
● This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet address ASD U 003 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-27

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 003 177
65535: All Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 003 179

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via “logical” communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Transm .enab.c ycl.dat 003 074
0: Without Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Enabling of cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 003 175

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined
telegram via the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta V 003 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta I 003 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
7-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta P 003 054
15.0 0.0 15.0 %Snom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta f 003 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta T 003 251
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Tref
[spacer]
The measured temperature is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta Z 003 252
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Zref
[spacer]
The measured operating impedance is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured
value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta phi 003 253
3.0 0.0 15.0 %phi,ref
[spacer]
The measured load angle is transmitted via the communication interface if it
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta me as. v.ILS t el 003 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-29

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t 003 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (e ne r gy) 003 151
Blocked 0 15 min Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted via
the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer] COMM 1: Cont in. ge ner al scan 003 077
Blocked 10 9000 s Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
A continuous or background general scan means that the P438 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals through the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there will
be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be set defines
the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m . addr ess le ngth 003 201
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the communication address length.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200
0 0 255 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order communication address.
[spacer] COMM 1: Caus e transm. le ngth 003 192
1: W/o source address Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the cause of transmission.
7-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Address le ngt h AS DU 003 193
1 1 2 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common address for identification of telegram
structures.
[spacer] COMM 1: Octet 2 addr. ASD U 003 194
0 0 255 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the common higher-order address for identification of
telegram structures.
[spacer] COMM 1: Addr.le ngth inf. obj. 003 196
2 2 3 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the address for information objects.
[spacer] COMM 1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197
0 0 255 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the length of the higher-order address for information objects.
[spacer] COMM 1: Inf .No.<- >funct.t ype 003 195
0: No Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be
reversed in the object address.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e tag length 003 198
3 3 7 Byte Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the time tag length.
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU1 / ASDU20 conv . 003 190
1: Single signal Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as a
single signal or double signal.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-31

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: AS DU2 co nver si on 003 191
1: Single signal Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a single
signal or double signal.
[spacer] COMM 1: Init ializ. signal 003 199
1: Yes Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.
[spacer] COMM 1: Balance d ope ration 003 226
0: No Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced basis
(full duplex operation).
[spacer] COMM 1: Direction bit 003 227
0 0 1 Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tim e- out int erv al 003 228
0.40 0.10 2.55 s Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. cmds 003 210
[spacer]
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the selected
commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first command is given the register no. 00301, the second the register no.
00302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel ec. si g. 003 211
[spacer]
signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the first
signal is given the register no. 10301, the second the register no. 10302, etc.
7-32 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . m. val. 003 212
[spacer]
measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that
the first measured value is given the register no. 30301, the second the register
no. 30302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Reg.asg. sel . par am. 003 213
[spacer]
parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means that the
first parameter is given the register no. 40301, the second the register no.
40302, etc.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( MO DBUS) 003 152
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again through the communication
interface after this time has elapsed.
[spacer] COMM 1: Autom .eve nt c onfirm. 003 249
0: Without Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
[spacer]
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master in order
for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char act . De lay 003 241
0 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the start
of sending the 'response'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Phys . Char . Time out 003 242
40 0 254 Bit Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm. M ode 003 243
1: Multi-frame fragment Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Setting for the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-33

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244
0.10 0.05 2.54 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
[spacer] COMM 1: Link Max. Re tr ie s 003 245
2 1 10 Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl.Con firm.T ime out 003 246
5.0 0.5 25.4 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
[spacer] COMM 1: Appl. Ne ed Time De l. 003 247
60 5 254 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Time interval within which the slave requests time synchronization cyclically
from the master.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. input s 003 232
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 – binary inputs.
Assignment of indices is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin.output s 003 233
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 – binary outputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. bin. count . 003 234
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 – binary counters.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
7-34 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog inp. 003 235
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 – analog inputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Ind ./cl. analog outp 003 236
[spacer]
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 – analog outputs.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta me as. v. ( DNP 3 ) 003 250
16 0 255 Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values in
object 30. The threshold values can be changed separately by the master for
each measured value by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t ( DNP 3) 003 248
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
[spacer]
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m and sel ect ion 103 042
[spacer]
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Signal se lec tion 103 043
[spacer]
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.
[spacer] COMM 1: Meas . v al. sel ect ion 103 044
[spacer]
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
[spacer] COMM 1: Param et er s ele ct ion 103 045
[spacer]
Selection of settings to be altered via the Courier protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the Courier protocol is enabled.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-35

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 1: Delta t (COURIE R) 103 046
5 1 120 s Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
[spacer]
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are again
transmitted.
7-36 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Functio n gr oup CO MM2 056 057
communication
interface 2
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the
0: No Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
[spacer] COMM 2: Line idle stat e 103 165
1: Light on / high Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Setting for the line idle state indication.
[spacer] COMM 2: Baud rat e 103 071
19.2: 19.2 kBaud Baud Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Baud rate of the communication interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Parity bit 103 171
2: Even Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system connected
to the P438.
[spacer] COMM 2: Dead t ime moni toring 103 176
1: Yes Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
The P438 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive pause
occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if it is not
required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
[spacer] COMM 2: Mon. time pol ling 103 202
25 3 254 s Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be less
than the time set here.
[spacer] COMM 2: Posit ive ackn. faul t 103 203
0: No
[spacer]
It is possible to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after
transmission (and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the
COMM2/PC interface).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-37

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet comm. addre ss 103 072
1 0 254 Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer] COMM 2: Name of manufac ture r 103 161
1: SE Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Setting for the name of the manufacturer.
Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
[spacer] COMM 2: Octet address ASD U 103 073
1 0 255 Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
for both addresses.
[spacer] COMM 2: Spontan. s ig. enabl e 103 177
0: None Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Se le ct. s pont an.sig. 103 179
[spacer]
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via communication interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Transm .enab.c ycl.dat 103 074
0: Without Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the communication
interface.
[spacer] COMM 2: Cycl. dat a ILS t e l. 103 175
[spacer]
Selection of the measured values transmitted in a user-defined telegram via the
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta V 103 050
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Vnom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
7-38 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta I 103 051
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Inom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta P 103 054
15.0 0.0 15.0 %Snom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta f 103 052
2.0 0.0 2.0 %fnom Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication interface if
it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta T 103 251
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Tref
[spacer]
The measured temperature is transmitted via the communication interface if it
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta Z 103 252
3.0 0.0 15.0 %Zref
[spacer]
The measured operating impedance is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by more than the set delta quantity from the last measured
value transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta phi 103 253
3.0 0.0 15.0 %phi,ref
[spacer]
The measured load angle is transmitted via the communication interface if it
transmitted.
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta me as. v.ILS t el 103 150
3.0 0.0 15.0 Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
[spacer] COMM 2: Delta t 103 053
1 0 15 min Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface after
this time period has elapsed – provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-39

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
InterMiCOM COMM 3: Function gr oup CO MM3 056 058
interface
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.
This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
0: No
[spacer]
[spacer] COMM 3: Baud rate 120 038
9600: 9600 baud Baud
[spacer]
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the guidance
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
[spacer] COMM 3: Source addr es s 120 031
1: 1
[spacer]
Address for send signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Receiving addr es s 120 032
2: 2
[spacer]
Address for receive signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Fct. ass ignm. se nd 1 121 001
7-40 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Fct. ass ignm. re c. 1 120 001
[spacer]
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals
[spacer] COMM 3: Ope r. mode rec eiv e 1 120 002
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive signals
1 to 4 (single-pole transmission).
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
1: Direct intertrip
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-41

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 3: Ope r. m ode rec eiv e 8 120 023
1: Direct intertrip
[spacer]
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive
signals 5 to 8 (two-pole transmission).
[spacer] COMM 3: Default value rec . 1 120 060
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.
[spacer] COMM 3: Tim e- out comm.faul t 120 033
50 10 60000 ms
[spacer]
This timer triggers the alarm signals COMM3: C ommunications faul t
and S F MON: Com munic .fault CO M M3 the received signals to their user-
defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has elapsed since the
most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
[spacer] COMM 3: Tim e- out link fail. 120 035
5 0 600 s
[spacer]
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this timer
stage has elapsed, alarm signals C OMM 3: C omm. link failure and
SFMO N: Comm .link fail.C OMM3 are raised. These can be mapped to
give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that maintenance
attention is required.
7-42 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] COMM 3: Limit te le gr. e r r ors 120 036
Blocked 1 100 %
[spacer]
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted
before an alarm is raised (CO M M3 : Lim.e x ce e d.,tel.e rr. and
SFMO N: Lim .e x ce ed.,t e l.e r r.). When this threshold is exceeded, the
receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-43

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Function grou p IEC 056 059
Communication
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function
group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden.
[spacer] IEC: Ge neral enable US ER 104 000
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group IEC.
[spacer] IEC: IEC 61850 e nabl e 104 077
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling IEC 61850.
[spacer] IEC: ET H COM M Mode 104 080
1: PRP Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Selection of the redundant Ethernet protocol between PRP, HSR and RSTP.
[spacer] IEC: IEC prot. vari ant 104 084
[spacer]
Selection of the enabled Ethernet protocol.
[spacer] IEC: Block Port A/ B 104 073
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
When Port A/B blocked is activated, Port A for SEB or Port A&B for REB will be
disabled.
[spacer] IEC: Block Port C 104 074
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
When Port C blocked is activated, Port C will be disabled.
[spacer] IEC: Switch Config. Bank 104 043
0: don't execute Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set
communication parameters as the active communication settings.
[spacer] IEC: Active Conf ig. Name 104 045
2:
[spacer]
Name of the configuration bank currently valid.
Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
7-44 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Active Config. Ve r s. 104 046
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Name 104 047
2:
[spacer]
Name of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer] IEC: Inact . C onfig. Ve r s . 104 048
2:
[spacer]
Version number of the inactive configuration bank.
[spacer] IEC: IED nam e 104 057
2:
[spacer]
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the
Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
[spacer] IEC: IP address 104 001
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of the device for the server function in the system.
Note: This is an information parameter ('read only') and its value is set from the
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 104 005
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-
network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s 104 011
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for
communication links to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-45

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: IP address 2 104 070
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address 2 of the device for the server function in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask 2 104 071
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask 2 defines which part of the IP address 2 is addressed by the
sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway add re s s 2 104 072
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway 2 for
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address Interface 2 (If fitted).
[spacer] IEC: IP address VLAN 1 104 091
2:
[spacer] IEC: IP address VLAN 2 104 095
2:
[spacer]
Assigned IP address of VLAN in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
[spacer] IEC: Identifier VLAN 1 104 092
0 0 65535
[spacer] IEC: Identifier VLAN 2 104 096
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Assigned VLAN ID in the system.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Vlan ID.
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask VL AN 1 104 093
2:
[spacer] IEC: Subnet m ask VL AN 2 104 097
2:
[spacer]
The subnet mask of VLAN defines which part of the IP address is addressed by
the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: VLAN Subnet Mask.
7-46 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s VL 1 104 094
2:
[spacer] IEC: Gat eway addre s s VL 2 104 098
2:
[spacer]
This parameter shows the network gateway of the VLAN for communication links
to clients outside of the local network.
"IED Configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 1 IP 104 202
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SNTP s erve r 2 IP 104 210
2:
[spacer]
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.
"IED Configurator".
[spacer] IEC: SGCB Re svT ms 104 199
30 0 600
[spacer]
The configuration attribute ResvTms defines the time interval in seconds for
which the reservation of a SGCB is granted by a client. A reservation of a SGCB
starts after a successful selection of a Setting Group using the service
SelectEditSG. The client is granted to edit one or multiple parameters of this
SGCB if this time has not elapsed.
[spacer] IEC: SigGGI O1 sel ect ion 104 064
[spacer]
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol
IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler
inputs).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . local t ime 104 206
0 -1440 1440 min Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Time difference between UTC and local time at the devices' substation (IED).
[spacer] IEC: Diff . d ayl.sav. t ime 104 207
60 -1440 1440 min Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-47

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: Switch.dayl.sav .ti me 104 219
1: Yes Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is
wanted. If it is wanted, the time switching is executed upon receiving a related
SNTP frame.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t 104 220
5: Last Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. d 104 221
7: Sunday Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s t. m 104 222
3: March Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
These three parameters define the date (e.g. at what day of the year) for
switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. Available for
IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e s tar t are the values First, Second, Third, Fourth, and
Last. For IEC: Dayl.sav.ti me st . d the seven weekdays are available so
that for example a setting like “on the last Sunday in March” may be used.
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st .0:00 + 104 223
120 0 1440 min Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to
standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to
3:00 AM the parameter IE C: D ayl.sav .t .st .0:00 + is set to 120 (minutes).
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd 104 225
5: Last Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd d 104 226
7: Sunday Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.tim e e nd m 104 227
10: October Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer] IEC: Dayl.sav.t.en d 0:00 + 104 228
180 0 1440 min Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
This parameter defines the date and time of day for the clock changeover from
daylight saving time to standard time. The setting is similar to that for the clock
changeover to daylight saving time.
7-48 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Function group GOOS E 056 068
Orientated
Substation Events
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function
group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function
group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: Switch Conf ig.
Bank.
[spacer] GOOSE: Gene ral e nable US ER 106 001
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE.
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-49

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-50 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-51

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-52 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-53

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 100 fct .as si g. 112 067
7-54 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 8 fct .as si g. 112 075
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-55

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE input to a binary logical state
signal on the device (IED) so that it can be processed further by the protection,
control or logic functions. The signal configured at this point will receive the
state of the data attribute, as configured above, and which was received with
the Dataset of GOOSE.
7-56 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Virtual Inputs VINP: Function gr oup VINP 056 098
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group VINP or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
[spacer] VINP: General e nable USE R 115 000
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling VINP function.
[spacer] VINP: I nput 1 fct .ass ig. 115 150
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-57

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] VINP: I nput 15 f ct .ass ig. 115 164
7-58 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-59

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Function assignment of the virtual binary inputs VINP to a binary logical state
signal on the device so that they can be processed further by the protection,
control or logic functions.
Parameter Address
IRIG‑B interface IRIGB: Function group IRIG B 056 072
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the
and signals are hidden.
[spacer] IRIGB: Gener al e nable US ER 023 200
0: No Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-57)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
7-60 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Binary input INP: Filter 010 220
6 0 20 Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-61)
[spacer]
Input filter which is activated when either the mode Active "high", filt. or Active
"low", filt. has been selected for INP: Ope r. mode U xxx. In order to
suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to
set this parameter to 6 [steps].
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 301 152 217
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-61

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-62 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-63

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] INP: Fct. as signm. U 100 1 152 163
7-64 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-65

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-66 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 301 152 218
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-67

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-68 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-69

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-70 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer] INP: Oper. m ode U 100 1 152 164
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-71

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
7-72 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
1: Active "high"
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-73

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: F unction group MEAS I

056 030
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] MEASI: Ge ne ral enabl e US E R 011 100
0: No Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-62)

Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-71)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.
[spacer] MEASI: E nable IDC p. u. 037 190
0.000 0.000 0.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must flow in order for the P438 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
[spacer] MEASI: I DC < ope n circuit 037 191
3.0 0.0 10.0 mA Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P438 will issue an “open
circuit” signal.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC 1 037 150
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
Blocked 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
7-74 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
Setting for the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: I DC ,lin 1 037 151
0.000 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-75

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1.200 0.000 1.200 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
Setting for the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val. IDC ,lin1 037 192
0 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin1.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled val.IDC ,l in2 0 037 193
1200 -32768 32767 Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
[spacer]
Setting for the scaled value of IDC,lin20.
[spacer] MEASI: T ype of T empSe ns or s 004 254
0: PT 100
[spacer]
Selection of the temperature sensor type (PT 100, NI 100 or NI 120).
7-76 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Fct. ass i gnm. K 3 0 1 151 045
output
[spacer] OUTP: Fct. ass i gnm. K 3 0 2 151 048
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-77

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] OUTP: Fct. ass ignm. K 8 0 1 150 169
7-78 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-79

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-80 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to output relays.
[spacer] OUTP: Oper. mode K 3 01 151 046
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-81

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
7-82 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-83

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
7-84 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-85

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Function group M EASO 056 020
output
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration.
settings and signals are hidden. If the function group is cancelled from the
configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] MEASO: Ge ne ral e nable US ER 031 074
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. BC D 053 002
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output BC D 010 010
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer]
Setting for the transmission time of the selected measured value in BCD form.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale B CD 016 082
1.00 0.01 100.00
[spacer]
Scaling factor setting for the measured value to be transmitted in BCD form.
The scaling factor is calculated according to the following formula:
M x,max
Scaling factor =
M x,scal
where:
Mx,scal: scaled measured value
Mx,max: maximum transmitted value for the selected measured value
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m in. val. B C D 037 140
0.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m ax. v al. BC D 037 141
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: BC D-Out min. value 037 142
0 0 399
7-86 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: BC D-Out max. value 037 143
399 0 399
[spacer]
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD form.
For measured values in the range “measured values to be issued” the output
value should change linearly with the measured value.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be issued: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: “Scaled min. val. BCD” ...
“Scaled max. val. BCD”
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
BCD display values for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; range: “BCD-Out min. value” ... “BCD-Out max. value”
BBCD display values for measured values ≤ Mx,min; range: “BCD-Out min.
value”
BCD display values for measured values ≥ Mx,max; range: “BCD-Out max.
value”
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 1 053 000
[spacer] MEASO: Fct . as s ignm. A- 2 053 001
[spacer]
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 1 010 114
0.10 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Hold t ime output A- 2 010 115
0.10 0.10 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for output of the selected measured value.
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d min. val. A-1 037 104
0.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 1 037 105
Blocked 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d max. v al. A- 1 037 106
1.000 0.000 1.000 Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d min. val. A-2 037 110
0.000 0.000 1.000
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-87

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d kne e v al. A- 2 037 111
Blocked 0.000 1.000
[spacer] MEASO: Scale d m ax. v al. A- 2 037 112
1.000 0.000 1.000
[spacer]
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax (x = 1, 2) is
to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range “measured values to
be issued” is defined. In this range the characteristic has two linear sections,
which are separated by a knee point.
● Range of measured values for the variable Mx: Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
● Range of associated scaled measured values: 0 ... 1
● Range of measured values to be issued: Mx,min ... Mx,max
● Range of scaled measured values to be output: Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
● Designation of the set values in the data model: „Scaled min. val. Ax“ ...
„Scaled max. val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
● Designation of value for knee point: Mx,knee
● Designation of scaled knee point value: Mx,scaled,knee
● Designation of this set value in the data model: „Scaled knee val. Ax“
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1)/(Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 1 037 107
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 1 037 108
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 1 037 109
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut min. v al. A- 2 037 113
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut kne e point A- 2 037 114
Blocked 0.00 20.00 mA
7-88 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: AnOut max. v al. A- 2 037 115
20.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Output current range for measured values in the range “measured values to be
issued”; designation in the data model: “An-Out min. val. Ax” ... “An-Out max.
val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≤ Mx,min; designation in the data
model: “An-Out min. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values ≥ Mx,max; designation in the data
model: “An-Out max. val. Ax”
Output current to be set for measured values = Mx,knee; designation in the data
model: “AnOut knee point Ax”
with:
Mx,min ... Mx,max: measured values to be issued
[spacer] MEASO: Output value 1 037 120
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
0.00 0.00 100.00 %
[spacer]
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%, can be
issued.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-89

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
LED indicators LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n 085 184
060 001: MAIN: Healthy
[spacer]
Display of the operational readiness of the protection device.
The function MAIN: He althy is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 2 y ell. 085 001
004 065: MAIN: Blocked/faulty
[spacer]
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.
The function MAIN: Blocke d/ fault y is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 3 y ell. 085 004
036 070: SFMON: Warning (LED)
[spacer]
The function SFM ON: Warning (LED ) is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 red 085 007
036 251: MAIN: Gen. trip signal
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H 4 gre e n 085 057
7-90 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H1 0 red 085 025
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H1 0 gre e n 085 075
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-91

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H20 gre e n 085 167
[spacer] LED: F ct.ass ig. H21 red 085 140
[spacer]
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
080 111: LOC: Edit mode
[spacer]
The function LOC: Edit mode is permanently assigned.
[spacer] LED: O pe rating mode H 1 085 182
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The operating mode ES updating is permanently assigned.
1: ES updating
[spacer]
1: ES updating
[spacer]
The ES updating operating mode is permanently assigned.
3: ES reset (fault)
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
7-92 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
1: ES updating
[spacer]
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
1: ES updating
[spacer]
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-93

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Chann.ass ign.C OMM 1/ 2 003 169
1: COMM1->chann.1,(2-2) Fig. 3-94, (p. 3-132)
[spacer]
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication channels.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd blocking USE R 103 213
1: Command blocking HMI
[spacer]
Blocking of the command from the user interface (HMI) or PC interface.
[spacer] MAIN: Auto- assig nme nt I/ O 221 065
1: Yes
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling of automatic assignment of binary inputs and outputs to
the set bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Type of bay 220 000
1 1 9999
[spacer]
Configuration of a bay type.
[spacer] MAIN: Prim .S ource TimeS ync 103 210
0: COMM1/IEC
[spacer]
Selection of the primary source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses.
[spacer] MAIN: Backup SourceT ime Sy nc 103 211
1: COMM2/PC
[spacer]
Selection of the backup source for date and time synchronization. Available are
COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal pulses. The
backup source is used when there is no synchronization generated by the
primary source after MAIN: Time s ync. time-out has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s ync. t ime -out 103 212
Blocked 1 60 min
[spacer]
Time-out setting for the time synchronization generated by the primary source.
7-94 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160
1: Current IA
[spacer] FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
2: Current IB
246: Pls./Defrst/IN curr.
5: Voltage VA
6: Voltage VB/Vref
[spacer]
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Function group DIST 056 014
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group DIST or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
High Impedance pro‐ DELT A: F unction group DELT A

056 078
tection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DELTA or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Function group MC MON 056 015
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-95

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Function g roup BUOC

056 002
time protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group BUOC or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Switch on to fault SOT F : Funct ion group SOTF 056 003
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG1: Function group P SIG 056 004
0: Without
[spacer] PSIG2: Function group P SIG 056 096
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: Function gro up ARC 056 005
control
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
7-96 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: Function gr oup AS C 056 006
synchronism check
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ASC or including it in the configuration. If any function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC: Function group D TOC 056 008
current protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCA: Functio n group D TOC A 056 079
current protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DTOCA or including it in the configuration. If the
Note: The function group DTOCA is active only with the setting
MAIN: Fe e de r mode = Autotransformer feed.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCB: F unctio n group D TOC B 056 080
current protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DTOCB or including it in the configuration. If the
Note: The function group DTOCB is active only with the setting
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-97

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: F unction g roup IDMT

056 009
rent protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMTA: Function group IDM TA

056 090
rent protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IDMTA or including it in the configuration. If the
Note: The function group IDMTA is active only with the setting MAIN: Feed er
mode = Autotransformer feed.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMTB : Funct ion group IDM TB

056 091
rent protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group IDMTB or including it in the configuration. If the
Note: The function group IDMTB is active only with the setting M AIN: Feed er
Parameter Address
Defrost protection DFR ST : Funct ion group DF RS T 056 052
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group DFRST or including it in the configuration.
7-98 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Function group THER M 056 023
protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Funct ion group V<>

056 010
tion
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Function group f<> 056 033
underfrequency pro‐
tection
0: Without
[spacer]
Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF: Function group CBF 056 040
failure protection
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-99

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBM: Function g ro up CBM 056 062
condition monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CBM or including it in the configuration. If the function
signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Function g roup LIMI T 056 025
monitoring
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC

056 017
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration.
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Function gr oup L OG _2

056 089
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group LOG_2 (“Logic 2”) or including it in the configuration.
7-100 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Real Timer TIM ER : F unction group TIMER 056 093
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group TIMER or including it in the configuration. If the
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-101

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Funct ion group DEV0 1 210 047
0: Without
[spacer] DEV02: Funct ion group DEV0 2 210 097
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the
configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all
associated settings and signals are hidden.
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, s ignal 210 034
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
7-102 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
1 0 254
3 0 254
5 0 254
7 0 254
9 0 254
11 0 254
13 0 255
15 0 254
17 0 254
19 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the signal.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
[spacer] DEV01: Funct . type, c ommand 210 032
242 1 254
242 1 254
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-103

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
242 1 254
[spacer]
Setting for the function type of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the “low
address” of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-
C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
[spacer] DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
65 0 254
67 0 254
69 0 254
71 0 254
73 0 254
75 0 254
77 0 254
79 0 254
81 0 254
7-104 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
83 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the information number of the command.
Note: If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-105

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: Function gro up C MD _1 249 252
commands
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 config. 200 004
0: No Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-360)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-106 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the command or including it in the configuration. If the command is
cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the
exception of this setting.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-107

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function gro up S IG_1 249 250
1: With
[spacer]
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration.
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 config. 226 007
0: No Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-362)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-108 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-109

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-110 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Cancelling the signal or including it in the configuration. If a signal is cancelled,
then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Function gr oup CO UNT 217 047
0: Without
[spacer]
Cancelling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-111

P438 7 Settings
7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
Parameter Address
PC link PC: Command b lock ing 003 182
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at the PC
interface.
[spacer] PC: Sig./m eas .val.bl ock . 003 086
0: No Fig. 3-10, (p. 3-17)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or measured
data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. US ER 003 172
communication
interface 1
1: Yes Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 1.
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 003 076
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer]
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
7-112 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Com m and bloc k. US ER 103 172
communication
interface 2
0: No Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at communication
interface 2.
[spacer] COMM 2: Sig./ meas.block .US E R 103 076
0: No Fig. 3-19, (p. 3-28)
[spacer]
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Com m and block. USE R 104 085
Communication
1: Yes
[spacer]
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected at IEC
[spacer] IEC: Ctrl b lock e d use r 221 125
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
When control blocking is activated, controls are rejected at IEC communication,
i.e no output data (digital by relays) will be issued to the process.
[spacer] IEC: Sig./me as.block.US E R 104 088
0: No
[spacer]
measured data are transmitted through IEC communication interface.
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Outp .rel.block USER 021 014
output
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-69)
[spacer]
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-113

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Protection e nabled 003 030
0: No (= off) Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-106)
[spacer]
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Some parameters can only be changed
when protection is disabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode USER 003 012
0: No Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-133)
[spacer]
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
[spacer] MAIN: Nominal fr equ. fnom 010 030
50: 50 Hz Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the nominal frequency of the protected system.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e tag 221 098
1: 1stEdge,OpMem sorted
[spacer]
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and
conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for
the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is
detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data
memory are made in chronological order or not.
[spacer] MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. 010 001
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)

Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-97)
Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
[spacer] MAIN: Iplaus / Id frst ,C Tpri m 010 016
1000 1 10000 A Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)

Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of CT Plausibility check current or defrost current.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002
100.0 0.1 1000.0 kV Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
Setting for the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
7-114 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inom de vice 010 003
1.0: 1.0 A A Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)

Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91)
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-92)
Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-93)
Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-19)
Fig. 5-11, (p. 5-20)
Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-21)
Fig. 5-13, (p. 5-22)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for
measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal device
current.
[spacer] MAIN: Iplaus / Id frst ,C Tnom 010 017
1.0: 1.0 A A Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-92)

Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-93)
Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-21)
Fig. 5-13, (p. 5-22)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal current of the CT for measurement of CT
Plausibility check current or defrost current.
[spacer] MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009
100 50 130 V Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)

Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91)
Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-93)
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-94)
Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-19)
Fig. 5-11, (p. 5-20)
Fig. 5-13, (p. 5-22)
Fig. 5-14, (p. 5-23)
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-115

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Conn. m eas . circ. I 010 004
1: Standard Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)

Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91)
Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-92)
Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-93)
Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-19)
Fig. 5-11, (p. 5-20)
Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-21)
Fig. 5-13, (p. 5-22)
[spacer]
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the
measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter “Installation and
Connection”, then this parameter must be set to Standard, if the P438's
'forward' decision is to be in the direction of the catenary. If the connection
direction is reversed or – given a connection scheme according to Chapter
“Installation and Connection” – if the 'forward' decision is to be in the feeder
direction, it must be set to Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Ms Circ.Ip laus/ Idfr st 010 036
1: Standard Fig. 3-56, (p. 3-92)

Fig. 3-57, (p. 3-93)
Fig. 5-12, (p. 5-21)
Fig. 5-13, (p. 5-22)
[spacer]
If the connection is as shown in Chapter “Installation and Connection”, then the
setting must be Standard. If the connection direction is reversed then the
setting must be Opposite.
[spacer] MAIN: Fe e de r m ode 010 135
1: Classic single feed Fig. 3-53, (p. 3-89)

Fig. 3-54, (p. 3-90)
Fig. 3-55, (p. 3-91)
Fig. 3-58, (p. 3-94)
Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-269)
Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-283)
Fig. 5-9, (p. 5-18)
Fig. 5-10, (p. 5-19)
Fig. 5-11, (p. 5-20)
Fig. 5-14, (p. 5-23)
[spacer]
For use with single-voltage systems select the Classic single feed setting, for use
with dual-voltage systems select the Autotransformer feed setting.
7-116 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. I 011 030
0.000 0.000 0.200 Inom Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)

Fig. 3-60, (p. 3-97)
Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents are
displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Me as. value re l. V 011 032
0.000 0.000 0.200 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured
operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages, and,
if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 1 005 248
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res e t 1 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. res et 2 005 249
[spacer]
Assigning specific memories and counters which are to be reset jointly if
MAIN: Group res e t 2 USER is enabled.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 1 021 021
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 1 (MAIN: B lock ing 1 EX T) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as sign. bloc k. 2 021 022
[spacer]
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking
input 2 (MAIN: B lock ing 2 EX T) is activated.
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d.block . USER 021 012
0: No Fig. 3-85, (p. 3-122)
[spacer]
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Block. M -t ri p USE R 022 090
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)

Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Blocking of the main-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] MAIN: Block. R -t ri p USE R 022 091
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer]
Blocking of the re-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-117

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Block. B-trip US ER 022 092
0: No
[spacer]
Blocking of the back-trip commands from the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. M-t rip cmd1 021 007

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-226)
Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-231)
Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. M-t rip cmd2 021 008
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a main-trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. R-t rip cmd1 021 025

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-226)
Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a re-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. R-t rip cmd2 021 026
[spacer]
Specification as to whether trip command 4 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. B-t ri p cmd1 021 027
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a back-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct.as g. B-t ri p cmd2 021 028
[spacer]
Assignment of the signals leading to a Trip command 2.
7-118 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . M- trip cmd1 021 034
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)

Fig. 5-19, (p. 5-27)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the main-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . M- trip cmd2 021 035
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Main-Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . R- trip cmd1 021 036
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the re-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . R- trip cmd2 021 037
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Re-Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . B-t rip c md1 021 038
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the back-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Min.dur . B-t rip c md2 021 039
0.25 0.10 10.00 s Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum duration of the Trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching M - trip cmd1 021 040
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the main-trip command should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching M - trip cmd2 021 041
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the main-trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching R- trip cmd1 021 042
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the re-trip command should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching R- trip cmd2 021 043
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the re-trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Latching B -t rip cmd1 021 044
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the back-trip command should latch.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-119

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Latching B -t rip cmd2 021 045
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer]
Specification as to whether the trip command 2 should latch.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig . as g. CB open 021 017
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P438 to evaluate the “CB open”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Sig .as sign. CB clos e 021 020
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P438 to evaluate the “CB closed”
position signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Deb ounce time gr . 1 221 200
0.02 0.01 2.54 s Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-363)
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
0.02 0.01 2.54 s
[spacer]
Setting for the debouncing time.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.m on. time gr.1 221 201
0.0 0.0 25.4 s Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-363)
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
7-120 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
0.0 0.0 25.4 s
[spacer]
Setting for the chatter monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: Change of s tate gr.1 221 202
0 0 254 Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-363)
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
0 0 254
[spacer]
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur.long cmd. 221 230
20 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a long command.
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . d ur. short cmd. 221 231
1 1 254 s
[spacer]
Setting for the command duration for a short command.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim eT agAft erDe bounce 221 083
0: No
[spacer]
When this setting is activated, the time tag for the signal is issued after
debouncing.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-121

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Oper. mod e CB Trip 221 080
1: With command Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-126)
[spacer]
Definition of the operating mode of the CB trip.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. ctr l.enabl. 221 057
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.int er l.deact 221 007
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to disable interlocking of control commands
for switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key s w. 221 008
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
[spacer] MAIN: Electrical c ontrol 221 061
1: Remote
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control
switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control.
[spacer] MAIN: Delay Man.Op.S upe r v. 221 079
3 0 255 s
[spacer]
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal “Sw. dev. interm. pos.” already present and the status signal continuously
absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective
binary inputs, will be issued. (See also “Processing status signals from manually
operated switchgear”.)
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.assig n. t ripping 221 010
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external
protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Prot.t rip>CB tr ipped 221 012
0: Without function Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-126)
[spacer]
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the
CB trip signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp. as g. CB t ri p 221 013
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used by the P438 to signal the “CB open” position
signal.
7-122 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg.C B tr.en. ext 221 050
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. C B t rip ex t 221 024
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052
[spacer]
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group
signal).
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. cnt.tr f.tr . 221 011
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals used to trigger counters.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. re set count 221 009
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals used to reset counters.
[spacer] MAIN: Cycle t.count t r ans f 221 021
3 1 10000 min
[spacer]
Cycle period for transmission of counter values.
[spacer] MAIN: Clos e cmd.puls e ti me 015 067
0.100 0.100 0.500 s Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer]
Setting for the duration of the close command.
[spacer] MAIN: tCB, Close 000 032
Blocked 0.000 0.200 s Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer]
This setting determines the CB close time. In slightly asynchronous power
systems, the CB close time is taken into account by the automatic synchronism
check (ASC) to issue of a close command. This is only possible if
setting ASC: AR with t CB P Sx = Yes or ASC : M C with tCB PS x = Yes.
[spacer] MAIN: ClCmd inhi b.by CB cl 015 042
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the reclose command will be inhibited as soon
as the “Circuit breaker closed” signal starts.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-123

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Re l.t . e nab. man.c md 003 088
60 1 3600 s Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)

Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Setting for the release time of the enable for the manual trip or close command,
respectively.
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. as s ign. fault 021 031
[spacer]
Selection of the signals to be signaled as Blocked/Faulty in addition to the
messages that always result in the message Blocked/Faulty.
Parameter Address
Parameter subset PSS: Control via USE R 003 100
selection
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local control
panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting Yes.
[spacer] PSS: Param.sub s.se l. USE R 003 060
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSS: Ke ep tim e 003 063
Blocked 0.000 65.000 s Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer]
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection is
carried out via the binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may occur
during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no binary
signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected from the local
control panel shall apply.
7-124 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. warni ng 021 030
[spacer]
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals “Warning
(LED)” and “Warning (relay)” and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled
“ALARM”. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading to blocking of the
device are not configurable. They always result in the above signals and
indication.
[spacer] SFMO N: M on. s ig. r et e ntion 021 018
Blocked 0 240 h
[spacer]
This setting defines the duration (in hours) for which a device-internal fault is
stored, so that a decision may be taken between an automatic warm restart and
an automatic device blocking. (Setting to Blocked may be considered the same
as unlimited storage.)
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. t ri gge r 003 085
[spacer]
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: I> 016 013
Blocked 0.10 10.00 Inom
[spacer]
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase current that will trigger
disturbance recording.
[spacer] FT_RC: Pre- fault time 003 078
5 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded before the onset of a
fault (pre-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Post -f ault ti me 003 079
2 1 50 Periods Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
[spacer] FT_RC: Max. re cording t ime 003 075
50 5 300 Periods Fig. 3-112, (p. 3-157)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-125

P438 7 Settings
7.1.3.2 Gene ral Functions
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Evaluat ion t ime 018 201
5 3 6 Periods Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-111)
[spacer]
Setting for the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be issued.
[spacer] MAIN: Undervolt . blo ck. V< 018 200
0.65 0.20 2.00 Vnom Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-111)
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
7-126 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Ge ne ral e nable U SE R 031 073
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-158)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the distance protection function.
[spacer] DIST: X parame t er av ail . 023 050
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
[spacer]
Making the reactance parameter "visible", i.e. available.
[spacer] DIST: Z par am e ter av ail . 023 051
1: Yes Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
[spacer]
Making the impedance parameter "visible", i.e. available.
[spacer] DIST: X parame t er us ed 023 052
0: No Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
[spacer]
This parameter enables the usage of X values as setting parameter for the
polygon characteristic instead of Z values.
It shall be set to "yes" only, if the parameter DIST: X parameter avai l . is
set to "yes" and DIST : Z par ame ter av ail . is set to "No".
[spacer] DIST: WPC zone availabl e 022 002
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-181)

Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Making the setting parameters for wrong phase coupling “visible”, i.e. available.
[spacer] DIST: Block. if tr ip I>H 022 151
1: Yes
[spacer]
Setting of temporary blocking (80 ms) of distance protection decisions if high-set
stage I>H has issued a trip signal.
Enable for switching the zone reaches of the distance protection via the local
control panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-127

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Contr ol via USE R 022 008
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
[spacer]
Enabling switching of distance protection zone reaches via the user interface
(HMI) or the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
When set to No the switching of zone reaches can be done:
● via binary input, or
● via appropriately configured function keys.
When set to Yes the switching of zones can be done:
● via IEC communication protocol (PDIS.Mod), or
● via the local control panel (HMI) or operating program (setting parameters
(022 011) DIST : S el ect Z1/ Z1' US E R, (022 021) DIST: S elect
Z2/Z2' USER, (022 038) D IS T: Se le ct Z3/ Z3' USER).
[spacer] DIST: Select Z1/Z1' USE R 022 011
1: Z1 Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
1: Z2 Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
1: Z3 Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
1: Z4 Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
[spacer]
Switching the zone reaches of the distance zones.
7-128 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
High Impedance pro‐ DELT A: Ge ne ral enabl e US E R

022 179
tection
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling DELTA protection.
[spacer] DELT A: X superv. available 022 188
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Making reactance release globally visible, i.e. available.
[spacer] DELT A: D elta Phi avai lable 022 189
0: No Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-188)
[spacer]
Making sudden angle change monitoring globally visible, i.e. available.
[spacer] DELT A: S upe rv. I(5 fn)av ail. 022 193
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Making the harmonics stabilization feature globally visible, i.e. available.
[spacer] DELT A: B locking by CB- clos e 022 191
1: Yes Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
High impedance protection is blocked by a Close command, issued to the circuit
breaker, which depends on the duration of the tBlock time delay.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-129

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Gener al e nable USER 014 001
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-192)
Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-193)
Fig. 3-232, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the measuring-circuit monitoring function.
[spacer] MCM ON: FF,Vre f enable d US ER 014 013
1: Yes Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the “Fuse Failure” monitoring function of the reference
voltage Vref.
[spacer] MCM ON: S caling fact . Iplaus 004 255
Not measured 0.032 32.000 Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Display of the calculated matching factor of the plausibility current.
[spacer] MCM ON: Op er. de lay F F , Vre f 014 012
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay for “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference voltage
Vref.
Parameter Address
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Gener al e nable USE R

014 011
time protection
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-199)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling BUOC protection
Parameter Address
Switch on to fault SOT F : Ge ne ral e nable US ER 011 068
protection
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.
7-130 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG1: General enable USER 015 004
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-204)
[spacer] PSIG2: General enable USER 019 254
0: No
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling protective signaling.
Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: General e nable USE R 015 060
control
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-220)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling auto-reclosing control.
[spacer] ARC: W ith R-trip 015 018
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer]
Specify whether the re-trip command is included in the auto-recloser.
[spacer] ARC: Fct.as signm. tL OG IC 015 033

Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-243)
[spacer]
Function assignment to tLOGIC.
Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: General enable US ER 018 000
synchronism check
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-246)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the automatic synchronism check.
[spacer] ASC: Transm .cycle ,me as .v. 101 212
3 0 10 s Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-261)
[spacer]
Cycle period for transmission of ASC measured values.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-131

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC: Gener al e nable USE R 031 068
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-263)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] DTOC: Direction meas ure m. 031 131
0: Without
[spacer]
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without
direction measurement.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCA: General enabl e USE R 130 065
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-269)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function for CT A.
Note: The function group DTOCA is active only with the setting
MAIN: Fe e de r m ode = Autotransformer feed.
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCB: Gene ral e nable US ER 130 085
current protection
0: No
[spacer]
Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function for CT B.
Note: The function group DTOCB is active only with the setting
MAIN: Fe e de r m ode = Autotransformer feed.
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: Gene ral e nable US E R

017 096
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-218, (p. 3-271)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct ion me as ur em. 017 109
0: Without
[spacer]
The user may select a definite-time overcurrent protection with or without
direction measurement.
7-132 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMTA: Gene ral e nabl e US E R

130 107
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-283)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function for CT A.
Note: The function group IDMTA is active only with the setting MAIN: Feed er
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMTB : Ge ne ral e nabl e USE R

130 127
rent protection
0: No
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the inverse-time overcurrent protection function for CT B.
Note: The function group IDMTB is active only with the setting M AIN: Feed er
Parameter Address
Defrost protection DFR ST : Ge ne ral e nable US ER 019 096
0: No Fig. 3-231, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling defrost protection.
[spacer] DFR ST : Scaling factor 004 203
Not measured 0.000 30.000 Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Display of the calculated matching factor for defrost protection.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-133

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Gene r al e nabl e US E R 022 050
protection
0: No Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-287)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling thermal overload protection.
[spacer] THER M : R e lat ive re pl ic a 022 064
1: Yes Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling the Relative replica mode of operation.
Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
[spacer] THER M : Absolut e r eplica 022 065
0: No Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling the Absolute replica mode of operation.
Note that it is not permitted to enable both Absolute replica and Relative replica
modes.
[spacer] THER M : Control v ia USER 022 009
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
[spacer]
Enabling parallel line switching via the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] THER M : Num ber PL USE R 022 062
1: 1 par. line Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
[spacer]
Setting for the number of parallel lines via the user interface (HMI).
[spacer] THER M : No. of pa r. line s 022 069
1 1 3
[spacer]
Display of the number of active parallel lines.
[spacer] THER M : No. of p.lines e xt . 022 074
1 1 3
[spacer]
Display of the number of parallel lines pre-selected via binary inputs.
[spacer] THER M : O/ T f . I ref per si st 004 138
Not measured -40 300 K
[spacer]
Display of over-temperature as a result of persisting Iref.
Note: This display is only visible in the Relative replica mode of operation.
7-134 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: General enable US ER

023 030
tion
0: No Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-295)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling time-voltage protection.
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Gene ral e nable USER 023 031
tection
0: No Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-298)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling over-/underfrequency protection.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF: Gener al e nable USE R 022 100
failure protection
0: No Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-303)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling circuit breaker failure protection.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-135

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBM: Gener al e nable USE R 022 010
0: No Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-307)
[spacer]
Enabling or disabling circuit breaker monitoring.
[spacer] CBM: Blocking USER 022 150
0: No Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-314)
[spacer]
Setting for temporary blocking of circuit breaker monitoring during protection
injection testing.
[spacer] CBM: Op er ating mode 022 007
3: CB sig. EXT or trip Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
This setting defines starting criteria for circuit breaker monitoring. To evaluate
all trip commands issued by the protection device With trip cmd. only must be
selected. For further evaluation of operational trip commands the additional CB
auxiliary contact CB sig. EXT or trip is used.
[spacer] CBM: I nom,CB 022 012
2000 1 65000 A Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Setting for the CB nominal current.
[spacer] CBM: M e d. curr. I t ri p,CB 022 014
Blocked 1 65000 A Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Setting for the average CB disconnection current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
[spacer] CBM: M ax . curr. It r ip,CB 022 016
63000 1 65000 A Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum CB disconnection (ruptured) current.
[spacer] CBM: Per m . CB op. Inom,CB 022 013
30000 1 65000 Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at nominal current.
[spacer] CBM: Per m . CB op. Imed, CB 022 015
Blocked 1 65000 Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations at average disconnection
(ruptured) current.
Note: In general valid only for pneumatically operated CBs.
7-136 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM: Per m . CB op. Imax,CB 022 017
20 1 65000 Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations permitted at maximum CB
disconnection (ruptured) current.
[spacer] CBM: No. CB ope rations > 022 019
10000 1 65000 Fig. 3-254, (p. 3-313)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of mechanical CB switching operations.
[spacer] CBM: R e main No. CB op. < 022 020
1000 1 65000 Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-313)
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the number of remaining CB operations at CB
nominal current.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip > 022 022
1000 1 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip **2> 022 081
1000 1 65000 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the accumulated CB disconnection (ruptured)
current values to the second power.
[spacer] CBM: ΣI* t> 022 096
1000.0 1.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Setting for the warning stage with the sum of the current-time integrals of the
CB disconnection (ruptured) current values
[spacer] CBM: C orr. Acqu.t. trip 022 153
0.000 0.000 0.200 s
[spacer]
Correction of the delay period between the forming of the device internal trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts.
[spacer] CBM: C orr. Acqu.t.C B sig. 022 018
0.000 -0.200 0.200 s Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Correction of the time tolerances permissible for leading or lagging CB auxiliary
contacts.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-137

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Ge neral e nable US ER 014 010
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-257, (p. 3-315)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling limit value monitoring.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin> 014 110
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin>> 014 111
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> 014 112
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> 014 113
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin< 014 114
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IDC,lin<< 014 115
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< 014 116
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< 014 117
Blocked 0.00 20.00 s Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T> 014 100
200 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.
7-138 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : T>> 014 101
200 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > 014 103
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> 014 104
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : T< 014 105
-20 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : T<< 014 106
-20 -20 200 °C Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < 014 107
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << 014 108
Blocked 0 1000 s Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-139

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: General enable USE R

031 099
0: No Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 US ER 034 030
0: No Fig. 3-266, (p. 3-325)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm. outp. 1 030 000

Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-243)
Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
060 000: MAIN: Without function s Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-230)
7-140 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-141

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-142 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-143

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-144 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Fct.as s ignm.outp.1 00 045 140
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-145

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-146 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 030 001
0: Without timer stage Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-230)

Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-243)
Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
[spacer] LOGIC: Op. m ode t output 1 0 030 037
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-147

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-148 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-149

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-150 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-151

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-152 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-153

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOGIC: Tim e t1 output 1 030 002
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-154 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-155

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-156 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-157

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-158 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-159

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-160 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-161

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-162 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-163

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-164 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-165

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
7-166 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 044 000
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-167

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p. 1 0 044 018
7-168 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-169

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-170 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-171

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-172 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig. out p.10 0 048 070
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-173

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of the
logic equation.
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 044 001
7-174 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p.10 (t ) 044 019
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-175

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-176 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-177

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-178 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Sig .as sig.out p1 00( t) 048 071
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-179

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
7-180 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
logic equation.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-181

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: General e nabl e USE R

011 137
0: No Fig. 3-268, (p. 3-327)
[spacer]
Enable/disable the function group LOG_2 (Programmable Logic 2).
[spacer] LOG_2: Fct.assig nm. outp. 1 050 000
060 000: MAIN: Without function s
[spacer]
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
[spacer] LOG_2: Op . m ode t output 1 050 001
[spacer]
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
[spacer] LOG_2: T im e t 1 output 1 050 002
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-268, (p. 3-327)
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
0 0 60000 s Fig. 3-268, (p. 3-327)
0 0 60000 s
0 0 60000 s
7-182 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0 0 60000 s
[spacer]
Settings for timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.
Note: This setting has no effect in the “minimum time” operating mode.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig. o ut p. 1 064 000
[spacer]
logic equation.
[spacer] LOG_2: S ig.as sig.out p. 1 (t ) 064 001
[spacer]
logic equation.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-183

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Real Timer TIM ER : Ge ne ral e nable US E R 014 199
0: No Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling TIMER protection.
[spacer] TIM ER : Calendar 1 014 178
[spacer]
The setting defines the calender day of week for the TIMER. One or more of the
seven weekdays can be selected.
[spacer] TIM ER : S tart hour 1 014 089
0 0 23 h Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
[spacer]
The parameter defines the start hour of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : S tart m inute 1 014 102
0 0 59 min Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
[spacer]
The parameter defines the start minute of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : E nd hour 1 014 109
0 0 23 h Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
0 0 23 h
0 0 23 h
7-184 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0 0 23 h
[spacer]
The parameter defines the end hour of the TIMER.
[spacer] TIM ER : E nd m inute 1 014 118
0 0 59 min Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
0 0 59 min
[spacer]
The parameter defines the end minute of the TIMER.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-185

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: De sign. command C 001 200 000
commands
1: C001
[spacer] CMD_1: De sign. command C 002 200 005
2: C002
3: C003
4: C004
5: C005
6: C006
7: C007
8: C008
9: C009
10: C010
11: C011
12: C012
13: C013
14: C014
15: C015
16: C016
17: C017
18: C018
7-186 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
19: C019
20: C020
21: C021
22: C022
23: C023
24: C024
25: C025
26: C026
[spacer]
Selection of the command designation.
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C 001 200 002
3: Persistent command Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-360)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-187

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] CMD_1: Oper. m ode cmd. C 011 200 052
[spacer]
Selection of the command operating mode.
7-188 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Des ignat . si g. S 001 226 000
1: S001
[spacer] SIG_1: Des ignat . si g. S 002 226 008
2: S002
3: S003
4: S004
5: S005
6: S006
7: S007
8: S008
9: S009
10: S010
11: S011
12: S012
13: S013
14: S014
15: S015
16: S016
17: S017
18: S018
19: S019
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-189

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
20: S020
21: S021
22: S022
23: S023
24: S024
25: S025
26: S026
27: S027
28: S028
29: S029
30: S030
31: S031
32: S032
33: S033
34: S034
35: S035
36: S036
37: S037
38: S038
7-190 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
39: S039
40: S040
41: S041
42: S042
43: S043
44: S044
45: S045
46: S046
47: S047
48: S048
49: S049
50: S050
51: S051
52: S052
53: S053
54: S054
55: S055
56: S056
57: S057
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-191

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
58: S058
59: S059
60: S060
61: S061
62: S062
63: S063
64: S064
[spacer]
Selection of the signal designation.
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mod e s ig. S 001 226 001
1: Start/end signal Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-362)
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
7-192 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] SIG_1: Op er. mode s ig. S 012 226 089
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-193

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
7-194 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
1: Start/end signal
[spacer]
Selection of the signal operating mode.
[spacer] SIG_1: Gr.as g. de bounc.S0 01 226 003
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-362)
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-195

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
7-196 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-197

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
7-198 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
[spacer] SIG_1: M in. sig. dur. S0 01 226 002
0 0 254 s Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-362)
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-199

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
7-200 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-201

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
0 0 254 s
[spacer]
The logic “1” signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the Start/end signal mode.
7-202 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : General enable US ER 217 000
0: No Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
[spacer]
Disabling or enabling binary counts.
[spacer] COUNT : Deb ounce t. c ount. 1 217 160
3 0 1000 ms Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
3 0 1000 ms
[spacer]
Setting for the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.
[spacer] COUNT : Limit count e r 1 217 221
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit for the counter value. A warning signal is issued if the counter
value exceeds the set limit. Setting this parameter to Blocked disables the limit
check.
[spacer] COUNT : Cycle t.count t r ans m 217 007
0: No transmission Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
[spacer]
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
[spacer] COUNT : IEC61850 pulsQty 221 096
1 0 1000
[spacer]
Setting the scaling factor to transmit the counter value via IEC 61850. According
to the standard the resulting value is calculated as:
Value transmitted = actual value · pulsQty
(see IEC 61850: Value = actVal · pulsQty).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-203

P438 7 Settings
7.1.3.3 Param eter S ubs et s
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Rush I(2fn)/I( fn) PS x 017 098 001 091 001 092 001 093
Blocked 10 35 % Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of inrush stabilization.
[spacer] MAIN: I> lif t rush rs tr PSx 017 095 001 085 001 086 001 087
10.0 5.0 20.0 Inom Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-107)
[spacer] MAIN: I> e nable r ush r .P S x 017 058 017 113 017 254 017 255
0.25 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold for disabling the inrush stabilization.
[spacer] MAIN: t lift rus h r st r. PSx 019 001 019 002 019 003 019 004
Blocked 0.01 10.00 s Fig. 3-69, (p. 3-107)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum duration of inrush stabilization.
[spacer] MAIN: Funct.R us h r est r. PS x 017 093 017 064 017 082 017 083
[spacer]
Select the protection elements that shall be blocked when the inrush
stabilization is triggered.
[spacer] MAIN: I(3fn)/I(fn) PS x 020 229 020 230 020 231 020 232
Blocked 5 100 % Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-109)
Blocked 5 100 % Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-109)
Blocked 5 100 % Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Setting for the ratio of the third, fifth and seventh harmonic current components
to the fundamental.
[spacer] MAIN: I>Enable harm.b. PS x 020 244 020 245 020 246 020 247
0.25 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-109)
[spacer] MAIN: I>Lift harm.blk . P Sx 020 248 020 249 020 250 020 251
2.5 1.0 20.0 Inom Fig. 3-71, (p. 3-109)
[spacer]
Settings for the current thresholds of the range in which harmonic blocking
activates.
[spacer] MAIN: Funct.Har m.block .P Sx 020 252 020 253 020 254 020 255
[spacer]
Select the protection elements that shall be blocked when the harmonics
blocking is triggered.
7-204 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: For w.lengt h A- 1 P Sx 010 005 010 006 010 007 010 008
acquisition
10.00 0.01 500.00 km Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer] FT_DA: For w.lengt h A- 2 P Sx 008 115 008 116 008 117 008 118
Blocked 0.01 500.00 km
[spacer] FT_DA: For w.lengt h A- 10 PSx 008 147 008 148 008 149 008 150
[spacer]
The forward line length A-y defines the length - in km - of line section y of the
catenary line. The calculation of fault location is based on this value.
A maximum of 10 line sections may be defined; line distance and line reactance
for line sections not needed are to be set to Blocked.
[spacer] FT_DA: XLf orw.,s ec A- 1 PS x 010 012 010 013 010 014 010 015
10 | 2 (For MAIN: Inom 0.1 | 500 | Ω Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)

device=1.0A | 5.0A) 0.02 100
Blocked | Blocked 0.1 | 500 | Ω

(For MAIN: Inom device=1.0A | 0.02 100
5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-205

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)
[spacer] FT_DA: XLf orw.,s ec A- 10 P S x 008 187 008 188 008 189 008 190

5.0A)
[spacer]
The forward line reactance A-y defines reactance Xy of section y of the catenary
line. The calculation of fault location is based on this value.
[spacer] FT_DA: For w.lengt h B- 1 P Sx 011 145 011 146 011 147 011 148
10.00 0.01 500.00 km Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
7-206 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: For w.lengt h B- 10 PSx 011 181 011 182 011 183 011 184
[spacer]
The forward line length B-y defines the length - in km - of line section y of the
feeder line. The calculation of fault location is based on this value.
Note: Not available when setting MAIN: Fe e der mode = Classic single
feed.
[spacer] FT_DA: XLf orw.,s ec B- 1 P Sx 011 185 011 186 011 187 011 188

device=1.0A | 5.0A) 0.02 100

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-207

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address

5.0A)

5.0A)
[spacer]
The forward line reactance B-y defines reactance Xy of section y of the feeder
feed.
[spacer] FT_DA: Outp . f lt.locat . P Sx 010 032 010 033 010 034 010 035
1: Always Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-149)
[spacer]
Setting for the conditions under which a fault location is output.
[spacer] FT_DA: Backw.length A-1 PS x 023 053 023 064 023 065 023 066
10.00 0.01 500.00 km Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
The backward line length A-y defines the length - in km - of line section y of the
7-208 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: XLbackw.,s ecA- 1 P Sx 023 157 023 167 023 168 023 169

device=1.0A | 5.0A) 0.02 100

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)
[spacer]
The backward line reactance A-y defines reactance Xy of section y of the
[spacer] FT_DA: Backw.length B-1 PS x 023 117 023 127 023 128 023 129
10.00 0.01 500.00 km Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer] FT_DA: Backw.length A-10PS x 023 063 023 114 023 115 023 116
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-209

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: Backw.length B-1 0PS x 023 126 023 154 023 155 023 156
[spacer]
The backward line length B-y defines the length - in km - of line section y of the
feeder line. The calculation of fault location is based on this value.
feed.
[spacer] FT_DA: XLbackw.,s ecB- 1 P Sx 023 205 023 223 023 224 023 225

device=1.0A | 5.0A) 0.02 100
[spacer] FT_DA: XLbackw.,s ecA- 10 P S x 023 166 023 194 023 195 023 204

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)
7-210 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)

5.0A)
[spacer]
The backward line reactance B-y defines reactance Xy of section y of the feeder
Note: Not available when setting MAIN: F eede r mode = Classic single
feed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-211

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Enable PS x 072 200 073 200 074 200 075 200
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-158)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which distance protection is enabled.
[spacer] DIST: Characteristic P Sx 012 040 073 097 074 097 075 097
2: Polygon Fig. 3-120, (p. 3-163)
[spacer]
Selection of the characteristic used in distance measurement.
[spacer] DIST: I> PSx 072 195 073 195 074 195 075 195
0.50 0.10 2.00 Inom Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current sensitivity of the distance zones.
[spacer] DIST: Z1, f orward P S x 076 093 077 093 078 093 079 093
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Z1, backward PSx 076 100 077 100 078 100 079 100
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Z1' , f orwar d PSx 076 096 077 096 078 096 079 096
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Z1' , backward P Sx 076 103 077 103 078 103 079 103
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
30.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
Blocked 0.1 750.0 Ω
30.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
7-212 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
40.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
40.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the impedance boundaries of zones 1 to 4 (or 1' to 4') of the circular
and polygonal characteristics, in forward and reverse directions, in secondary
values.
[spacer] DIST: R1, f or w. ( pol y) P Sx 076 115 077 115 078 115 079 115
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: R1, b ackw.( poly ) PSx 076 121 077 121 078 121 079 121
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: R1' , forw.( poly ) P Sx 076 118 077 118 078 118 079 118
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: R1' , backw.(poly) PSx 076 124 077 124 078 124 079 124
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
30.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
30.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
30.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
30.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-213

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
40.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer] DIST: R4, b ackw.(poly ) PSx 080 021 081 021 082 021 083 021
40.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
40.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
40.0 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the resistance boundaries (arc reserve) of zones 1 to 4 (or 1' to 4') of
the polygonal characteristic, in forward and reverse directions, in secondary
values.
[spacer] DIST: Rg1, forward P Sx 076 138 077 138 078 138 079 138
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Rg1, backwar d PS x 076 144 077 144 078 144 079 144
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Rg1', for ward PS x 076 141 077 141 078 141 079 141
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Rg1', backwar d PS x 076 147 077 147 078 147 079 147
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
[spacer] DIST: Rg2', backwar d PS x 076 148 077 148 078 148 079 148
0.10 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
7-214 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer] DIST: Rg3', bac kwar d PS x 076 149 077 149 078 149 079 149
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer] DIST: Rg4', bac kwar d PS x 080 026 081 026 082 026 083 026
0.1 0.1 650.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the limit resistance for simultaneous load blinding of zones 1 to 4 (or
1' to 4') of the circular and polygonal characteristics, in forward and reverse
directions, in secondary values.
Note: The maximum setting value Rg is set to the same value as that of
impedance reach Z of the respective zone. If Rg is higher, the signal “Setting
Error Distance Protection” is issued and the protection function is blocked.
[spacer] DIST: Alpha_L 1 (poly) PS x 012 013 012 063 013 013 013 063
45 40 90 ° Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
45 40 90 ° Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
45 40 90 °
45 40 90 °
[spacer]
Setting for the slope angle of the tripping characteristic of impedance zones 1 to
4 in R-direction (resistance line), usually identical to the line impedance angle.
[spacer] DIST: Be ta 1 PSx 072 208 073 208 074 208 075 208
135 90 135 ° Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
135 90 135 ° Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
135 90 135 °
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-215

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Be ta 4 PS x 080 013 081 013 082 013 083 013
135 90 135 °
[spacer]
Angle setting for load blinding (directional line) in quadrant 2 or 4 of impedance
zones 1 to 4 of the circular and polygonal characteristics.
[spacer] DIST: Alpha 1 PS x 076 090 077 090 078 090 079 090
0 0 40 ° Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
0 0 40 ° Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0 0 40 °
0 0 40 °
[spacer]
Angle setting for load blinding (directional line) in the first or third quadrant of
impedance zones 1 to 4 of the circular characteristic.
[spacer] DIST: Gamm a 1 PSx 076 247 077 247 078 247 079 247
-45 -45 0 ° Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
-45 -45 0 ° Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
-45 -45 0 °
-45 -45 0 °
[spacer]
Angle setting in quadrant 4 or 2 until the limit resistance is active with a
simultaneous load blinding, for the impedance zones 1 to 3 of the circular and
polygonal characteristics.
[spacer] DIST: X1', backward P Sx 021 244 021 254 021 255 022 198
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: X1, for ward PSx 021 239 021 245 021 246 021 247
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: X1, backwar d PS x 021 242 021 248 021 249 021 250
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: X1', forwar d PS x 021 243 021 251 021 252 021 253
10.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
7-216 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
20.00 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
[spacer] DIST: X2', back ward P Sx 023 003 023 010 023 011 023 012
Blocked 0.10 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
30.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
30.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
40.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
40.0 0.1 750.0 Ω
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance boundaries of zones 1 to 4 (or 1' to 4') of the polygonal
characteristics, in forward and reverse directions, in secondary values.
[spacer] DIST: t1 PS x 012 028 012 078 013 028 013 078
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175)

Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-210)
Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] DIST: t3S PS x 012 030 012 080 013 030 013 080
0.60 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zone 1.
0.30 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-211)
Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-212)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-217

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0.60 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 2 to 4 if short circuit detection
is active (dependent on dx/dt detection).
[spacer] DIST: t2L PSx 012 190 012 191 012 192 012 193
20.0 0.1 1000.0 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
30.0 0.1 1000.0 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
30.0 0.1 1000.0 s Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stages of impedance zones 2 to 4 if starting detection is
active (dependent on dx/dt detection).
[spacer] DIST: kze, HSR PSx 012 034 012 084 013 034 013 084
1.50 1.00 450.00 Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
Setting for the zone extension factor HSR for zone1.
Note: The zone extension HSR is controlled by
● Switch on to fault protection,
● an appropriately configured binary signal input.
[spacer] DIST: kze, TDR PSx 012 046 012 096 013 046 013 096
1.50 1.00 450.00 Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
Setting for the zone extension factor TDR for zone 1.
[spacer] DIST: kzeExt/SO TF/PS IG P Sx 012 067 012 068 012 069 012 070
1.50 1.00 450.00 Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer]
Setting for the zone extension factor of external zone extension, switch on to
fault protection or protective signaling function.
[spacer] DIST: t1,ze Ext /S OF / PS G P Sx 012 198 012 199 012 200 012 201
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175)

Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stage of external zone extension, switch on to fault
protection or protective signaling function.
[spacer] DIST: Op.mod e dx/ dt , Z 2PS x 072 107 073 107 074 107 075 107
0: Without Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
[spacer] DIST: Op.mod e dx/ dt , Z 3PS x 072 197 073 197 074 197 075 197
0: Without
7-218 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Op.mod e dx / dt , Z 4PS x 080 029 081 029 082 029 083 029
0: Without
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of train start-up detection in zones 2, 3 or 4.
[spacer] DIST: De lta I( di/ dt), Z2PS x 072 198 073 198 074 198 075 198
1.00 0.10 2.00 Inom Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
1.00 0.10 2.00 Inom
1.00 0.10 2.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the current increase required to detect a short circuit operation in the
zone 2, 3 or 4. It must be set to Blocked in order to disable sudden current
change monitoring.
[spacer] DIST: De lta V(dv/ dt) ,Z2 P Sx 072 139 073 139 074 139 075 139
0.25 0.05 1.00 Vnom Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
0.25 0.05 1.00 Vnom
0.25 0.05 1.00 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the voltage drop required to detect a short circuit operation in the
zone 2, 3 or 4. It must be set to Blocked in order to disable sudden voltage
change monitoring.
[spacer] DIST: D.phi( dphi/ dt ),Z2P Sx 072 206 073 206 074 206 075 206
30 5 90 ° Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
30 5 90 °
30 5 90 °
[spacer]
Setting for the angle change required to detect a short circuit operation in the
zone 2, 3 or 4. It must be set to Blocked in order to disable sudden angle change
monitoring.
[spacer] DIST: WPC enable d PS x 076 130 077 130 078 130 079 130
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-181)

Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling the zone of wrong phase coupling protection.
[spacer] DIST: WPC V< PS x 076 132 077 132 078 132 079 132
0.50 0.10 2.00 Vnom Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the undervoltage conditions to detect a wrong phase coupling.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-219

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: WPC Zmin PS x 076 135 077 135 078 135 079 135
10.00 0.10 500.00 Ω Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the internal limit impedance of the wrong phase coupling protection
zone.
[spacer] DIST: WPC Zmax PS x 076 136 077 136 078 136 079 136
20.00 0.10 500.00 Ω Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the external limit impedance of the wrong phase coupling protection
zone.
[spacer] DIST: WPC alp ha PSx 076 133 077 133 078 133 079 133
100 90 145 ° Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the left limit angle of the wrong phase coupling protection zone.
[spacer] DIST: WPC be ta PS x 076 134 077 134 078 134 079 134
170 145 180 ° Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the right limit angle of the wrong phase coupling protection zone.
[spacer] DIST: WPC t PSx 076 137 077 137 078 137 079 137
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stage of the wrong phase coupling protection zone.
7-220 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
High Impedance pro‐ DELT A: E nable PSx

062 030 063 030 064 030 065 030
tection
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which high impedance protection is
enabled.
[spacer] DELT A: I min PS x 062 031 063 031 064 031 065 031
0.20 0.10 2.00 Inom Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-186)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum current trigger for high impedance protection.
[spacer] DELT A: D elta I PSx 062 037 063 037 064 037 065 037
0.50 0.10 2.00 Inom Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold to detect a sudden current change.
[spacer] DELT A: D elta Phi PSx 062 034 063 034 064 034 065 034
30 5 90 ° Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-188)
[spacer]
During a defined sampling interval should the angle (with sudden angle change
monitoring enabled) change by more than the value set for this parameter, then
this signal is issued: DELTA: D elt a Phi star ting
[spacer] DELT A: I (3fn) / I (fn) P Sx 062 040 063 040 064 040 065 040
15 5 50 % Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the ratio of the third harmonic current component to the
fundamental. This value is used as the operate threshold for the harmonics
stabilization feature.
[spacer] DELT A: I (5fn) / I (fn) P Sx 062 042 063 042 064 042 065 042
15 5 50 % Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Setting for the ratio of the fifth harmonic current component to the
fundamental. This value is used as the operate threshold for the harmonics
stabilization feature.
[spacer] DELT A: k S t,I( x fn) /I(fn) P Sx 062 041 063 041 064 041 065 041
Blocked 1.00 10.00 Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
Setting whether high impedance protection is Blocked or stabilized (dynamically
extended by multiplication with the factor set here).
[spacer] DELT A: X, forwar d PS x 062 032 063 032 064 032 065 032
10.00 2.00 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance limit in the forward direction.
Note: The value range depends on the setting at M AIN: Inom devic e.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-221

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DELT A: X, backward P Sx 062 033 063 033 064 033 065 033
10.00 2.00 300.00 Ω Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Setting for the reactance limit in the reverse direction.
Note: The value range depends on the setting at M AIN: Inom device.
[spacer] DELT A: t De lta PS x 062 039 063 039 064 039 065 039
0.25 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
The timer stage tDelta is triggered with operation of high impedance protection
and a Trip signal is issued when the tDelta time-delay set here has elapsed.
[spacer] DELT A: t Block PS x 062 045 063 045 064 045 065 045
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Setting for the blocking time duration.
[spacer] DELT A: M ode w/o Volt g. P Sx 062 036 063 036 064 036 065 036
1: Delta I only Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-185)

Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
Setting whether high impedance protection will continue to operate or be
Blocked even where voltage measurement in Delta I operating mode is not
available.
7-222 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Enable PS x 014 200 014 201 014 202 014 203
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-192)
Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-193)
Fig. 3-232, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which CT and VT Supervision is enabled.
[spacer] MCM ON: I -m onit. e nable d PSx 014 240 014 241 014 242 014 243
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer]
Disabling and enabling current plausibility.
[spacer] MCM ON: S e le ct curr e nt PSx 014 092 014 093 014 094 014 095
1: IA
[spacer]
When selecting the operating modes Autotransformer feed and Single feed w.
sum I, this setting is used to define whether the plausibility of the resulting
current or a phase current is to be checked for measuring-circuit monitoring
(MCMON) of the current.
[spacer] MCM ON: I d>, I- monit . PSx 014 244 014 245 014 246 014 247
0.30 0.10 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)

Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the differential characteristic of current
plausibility.
[spacer] MCM ON: m 1, I-monit . P Sx 014 248 014 249 014 250 014 251
0.50 0.20 1.50 Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)

Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the gradient of the differential characteristic of current plausibility.
[spacer] MCM ON: I > lift monit or. PS x 006 207 006 208 006 209 006 210
1.00 0.50 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Maximum value of the plausibility check current.
[spacer] MCM ON: V-monit . e nable d PSx 014 225 014 226 014 227 014 228
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
Disabling/enabling undervoltage monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: V<, V- monit . PSx 014 229 014 230 014 231 014 232
0.65 0.10 1.80 Vnom Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of undervoltage monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: t V<, V-monit . P Sx 014 233 014 234 014 235 014 236
5.00 0.10 60.00 s Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer]
Setting for the time delay of undervoltage monitoring.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-223

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MCM ON: FF enable d PS x 014 204 014 205 014 206 014 207
0: No Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Enabling/disabling “Fuse Failure” monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: I > e nable V<,F F PS x 014 188 014 237 014 238 014 239
0.10 0.00 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)

Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Enabling undervoltage and fuse failure monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: V<, FF PS x 014 208 014 209 014 210 014 211
0.65 0.10 1.80 Vnom Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the enable value V< of “Fuse Failure” monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: V>, FF PS x 014 212 014 213 014 214 014 215
0.80 0.10 1.80 Vnom Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the reset value V> of “Fuse Failure” monitoring.
[spacer] MCM ON: Delta V, FF PS x 014 216 014 217 014 218 014 219
0.35 0.05 0.50 Vnom Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum voltage change for the detection of a “Fuse Failure”
condition.
[spacer] MCM ON: Delta I, FF PS x 014 221 014 222 014 223 014 224
0.10 0.05 0.50 Inom Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum current change for the detection of a “Fuse Failure”
condition.
7-224 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Enable PSx

072 118 073 118 074 118 075 118
time protection
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-199)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which backup overcurrent-time
protection is enabled.
[spacer] BUOC: I> PS x 010 058 010 078 010 098 011 018
1.00 0.20 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I> of the phase current of the backup overcurrent-
time protection.
[spacer] BUOC: I>> PS x 010 127 010 129 010 131 010 133
2.00 0.20 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I>> of the current of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
[spacer] BUOC: tI> PS x 010 059 010 079 010 099 011 019
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage I> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
[spacer] BUOC: tI>> PSx 010 128 010 130 010 132 010 134
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of stage I>> of the backup overcurrent-time
protection.
Parameter Address
Switch on to fault SOT F : Enab le PS x 011 120 011 121 011 122 011 123
protection
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-201)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which switch on to fault protection is
enabled.
[spacer] SOT F : Operating mode PS x 011 061 011 114 011 115 011 116
4: Trip with starting Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
The setting of the operating mode defines whether, while the timer is running, a
general starting will lead to a trip command (Trip with starting) or if the
measuring range of the impedance zone 1 is extended by the set zone extension
factor DIST : k ze, HS R PS x (Trip with overreach).
[spacer] SOT F : Man. close t ime r P Sx 011 060 011 111 011 112 011 113
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-202)
[spacer]
Setting for the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-225

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG1: Enable PS x 015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-204)
[spacer] PSIG2: Enable PS x 020 002 020 003 020 004 020 005
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is
enabled.
[spacer] PSIG1: Operating mode P Sx 015 000 024 000 024 060 025 020
0: Without Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)

Fig. 3-162, (p. 3-208)
Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] PSIG2: Operating mode P Sx 019 239 019 242 019 243 019 244
0: Without
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of protective signaling.
[spacer] PSIG1: Fct. S end S ignal PS x 019 108 019 114 019 115 019 117
[spacer] PSIG2: Fct. S end S ignal PS x 020 030 020 031 020 032 020 033
[spacer]
N-to-m parameter to select, which starting signals and direction shall be logically
combined with NOT/AND/OR logic to get sent as an active PSIG signal to the
opposite device.
[spacer] PSIG1: R ele ase t . send PS x 015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021
0.25 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-205)

Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] PSIG2: R ele ase t . send PS x 019 245 019 246 019 247 019 248
0.25 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.
[spacer] PSIG1: Trip de lay t ime P Sx 019 179 019 180 019 181 019 182
0.10 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] PSIG2: Trip de lay t ime P Sx 020 047 020 048 020 049 020 050
0.10 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the trip delay of the trip signal.
[spacer] PSIG1: Echo on rec eiv e PSx 015 003 024 002 024 062 025 022
0: Without Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] PSIG2: Echo on rec eiv e PSx 019 249 019 251 019 252 019 253
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting determines whether protective signaling operates with or without
echo.
7-226 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] PSIG1: Op. delay e cho PS x 015 022 024 008 024 068 025 028
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] PSIG2: Op. delay e cho PS x 020 018 020 019 020 020 020 021
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the echo pulse.
[spacer] PSIG1: Puls e du r. e cho P Sx 015 023 024 009 024 069 025 029
0.10 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] PSIG2: Puls e du r. e cho P Sx 020 022 020 023 020 024 020 025
0.10 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for echo pulse duration.
[spacer] PSIG1: Fct.Telecom.chnl. PSx 019 149 019 160 019 161 019 162
[spacer] PSIG2: Fct.Telecom.chnl. PSx 020 039 020 040 020 041 020 042
[spacer]
Definition of the related communication link to the relevant PSIG receive signal.
[spacer] PSIG1: Telecom.fl t.enl. PS x 019 175 019 176 019 177 019 178
0.25 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-208)
[spacer] PSIG2: Telecom.fl t.enl. PS x 020 043 020 044 020 045 020 046
0.25 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Time stage to enlarge the telecommunication fault signal for a further duration
time to be reliably detected by the alarm logic.
[spacer] PSIG1: t Trans.bl ock . PS x 015 024 024 010 024 070 025 030
0.05 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] PSIG2: t Trans.bl ock . PS x 020 026 020 027 020 028 020 029
0.05 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the transient blocking time of protective signaling.
[spacer] PSIG1: Fct. Trip Signal PS x 019 118 019 119 019 146 019 147
[spacer] PSIG2: Fct. Trip Signal PS x 020 034 020 035 020 036 020 037
[spacer]
Definition of the receive signal in combination with internal starting & state
signals to generate a related trip command.
[spacer] PSIG1: Funct.B lock S ig P Sx 019 222 019 223 019 224 019 225
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-227

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] PSIG2: Funct.B lock S ig P Sx 020 052 020 053 020 054 020 055
[spacer]
Definition of the blocking signal activated by the received signal.
[spacer] PSIG1: V< weak infee d PS x 015 020 024 006 024 066 025 026
0.60 0.10 0.90 Vnom Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] PSIG2: V< weak infee d PS x 020 010 020 011 020 012 020 013
0.60 0.10 0.90 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the weak infeed logic.
[spacer] PSIG1: Trip signal V< PSx 015 021 024 007 024 067 025 027
0: Without Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] PSIG2: Trip signal V< PSx 020 014 020 015 020 016 020 017
0: Without
[spacer]
This setting determines whether a trip signal will be issued when the weak-
infeed logic is triggered.
[spacer] PSIG1: tV< PSx 015 019 024 005 024 065 025 025
0.20 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] PSIG2: tV< PSx 020 006 020 007 020 008 020 009
0.20 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of weak-infeed logic.
7-228 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: Enable PS x 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049
control
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-220)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.
[spacer] ARC: C B clos.pos .s ig. PS x 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044
0: Without Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-221)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be taken into account or
not. If the setting is With, a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
Then the ARC function is ready only if the CB is closed.
[spacer] ARC: Paralle l trip PS x 015 053 024 027 024 087 025 047
0: Without start ARC Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether and how the trip command(s) of a protection device
operating in parallel to the P438 will affect operation of the ARC function.
[spacer] ARC: Op erative t ime 1 P Sx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055
0.30 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for operative time 1.
If the fault is cleared within this time, the fixed dead time 1p or 3p (depending
on the trip condition and HSR operating mode) is started.
[spacer] ARC: Op erative t ime 2 P Sx 015 083 024 042 025 002 025 062
0.30 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for operative time 2.
If the fault is cleared within this time, the maximum dead time is started.
[spacer] ARC: V> PS x 015 128 015 129 015 138 015 139
0.50 0.20 2.00 Vnom
[spacer]
Voltage enabling of reclosure when operative time 2 is used.
[spacer] ARC: t V> PSx 015 140 015 141 015 142 015 143
0.10 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Time delay of voltage enabling.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DIS T t1 P Sx 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a distance protection zone 1
start.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DIS T t2S PS x 015 144 015 145 015 146 015 147
Blocked 0.01 60.00 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-229

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DIS T t2L P Sx 015 152 015 153 015 154 015 155
Blocked 0.1 600.0 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
start together with train start-up detection dx/dt in zone 2.
Blocked 0.01 60.00 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Blocked 0.1 600.0 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
Blocked 0.01 60.00 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Blocked 0.1 600.0 s Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
[spacer]
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DEL TA t D. PS x 008 192 008 193 008 194 008 195
Blocked 0.000 10.000 s
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the high
impedance protection.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC t I>H PS x 015 069 024 052 024 053 024 054
Blocked 0.000 10.000 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC high-
current stage.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC t I> PS x 015 105 020 105 021 105 022 105
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC t I>> PS x 015 074 020 107 021 107 022 107
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC 1st or
2nd high-current stage.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC A t I > PS x 015 196 020 196 021 196 023 196
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC A t I >>PS x 015 197 020 197 021 197 023 197
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC B tI> PS x 015 213 020 213 021 213 023 213
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
7-230 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.DTOC B tI>>PS x 015 214 020 214 021 214 023 214
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the 1st or 2nd high-
current stage of DTOCA or DTOCB.
Note: The function groups DTOCA and DTOCB analyze only CT A or CT B,
respectively, and therefore they are active only with the setting
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.I DMT k IrefP Sx 015 094 020 113 021 113 022 113
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the IDMT Ikref
stage.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.I DMT AkI r efPSx 015 217 020 217 021 217 023 217
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.I DMT Bk IrefP Sx 015 219 020 219 021 219 023 219
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the Ikref stage of
IDMTA or IDMTB.
Note: The function groups IDMTA and IDMTB analyze only CT A or CT B,
M AI N: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.BUOC t I> PS x 015 109 020 109 022 109 023 109
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr.BUOC t I>> PS x 015 111 020 111 021 111 022 111
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the BUOC 1st or
[spacer] ARC: HSR -tr. LO GIC P S x 015 098 024 110 024 160 025 110
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Setting for the HSR tripping time and start via programmable logic.
[spacer] ARC: HSR d ead t ime P Sx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050
1.00 0.30 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
[spacer] ARC: Dead tim e max P Sx 015 084 024 043 025 003 025 063
1.00 0.30 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum dead time.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-231

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t . f . HS R P Sx 015 059 024 033 024 093 025 053
0: No Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended by the
zone extension factor kze HSR during normal system operation and while the
operative times are elapsing.
Note: This setting is only active if protective signaling is not ready.
[spacer] ARC: No. permit . T DR PS x 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057
0 0 9 Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for the number of time-delayed reclosures permitted. With the 0 setting,
only one HSR is carried out.
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DIS T t1 PS x 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a distance protection zone 1
start.
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DIS T t2 S P Sx 015 148 015 149 015 150 015 151
Blocked 0.01 60.00 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DIS T t2 L PS x 015 156 015 157 015 158 015 159
Blocked 0.1 600.0 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer]
Blocked 0.01 60.00 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
Blocked 0.1 600.0 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer]
Blocked 0.01 60.00 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
Blocked 0.1 600.0 s Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer]
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DEL TA tD . P Sx 008 196 008 197 008 198 008 199
Blocked 0.000 10.000 s
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the high
impedance protection.
7-232 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO C t I>H P Sx 015 070 024 055 024 056 024 057
Blocked 0.000 10.000 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC high-
current stage.
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO C t I> P Sx 015 106 020 106 021 106 022 106
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO C t I>> PS x 015 075 020 108 022 108 023 108
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the DTOC 1st or
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO CA t I> PSx 015 198 020 198 021 198 023 198
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO CA t I>>P Sx 015 199 020 199 021 199 023 199
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO CB t I> P Sx 015 215 020 215 021 215 023 215
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.DTO CB t I>>P Sx 015 216 020 216 021 216 023 216
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the 1st or 2nd high-
current stage of DTOCA or DTOCB.
Note: The function groups DTOCA and DTOCB analyze only CT A or CT B,
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.I DMT kIre fPS x 015 095 020 114 021 114 022 114
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the IDMT Ikref
stage.
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.I DMT AkIre fPS x 015 218 020 218 021 218 023 218
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.I DMT BkIre fPS x 015 220 020 220 021 220 023 220
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the Ikref stage of
IDMTA or IDMTB.
Note: The function groups IDMTA and IDMTB analyze only CT A or CT B,
M AI N: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.BUO C tI> P Sx 015 110 020 110 021 110 022 110
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-233

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr.BUO C tI>> PS x 015 112 020 112 021 112 022 112
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping timer stage initiated by a start of the BUOC 1st or
[spacer] ARC: T DR -tr. L OGI C PS x 015 099 024 122 024 172 025 122
Blocked 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-231)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR tripping time and start via programmable logic.
[spacer] ARC: T DR d ead time PSx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051
1.00 0.30 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for the TDR dead time.
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t . f . T DR PS x 015 071 024 039 024 099 025 059
0: No Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the measuring range shall be extended prior to
a TDR.
[spacer] ARC: R eclaim time 1 PS x 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048
1.00 1.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for reclaim time 1.
[spacer] ARC: R eclaim time 2 PS x 015 124 015 125 015 126 015 127
1.00 1.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
Setting for reclaim time 2.
[spacer] ARC: Block. AR C f. I> PS x 015 104 016 104 017 104 020 104
Blocked 1.00 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer]
Setting for the current threshold via which the auto-recloser is blocked.
[spacer] ARC: Block. tim e int . P Sx 015 043 024 021 024 081 025 041
5 1 600 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
cancellation of the blocks set by internal functions, such as SOTF.
[spacer] ARC: Block. tim e e xt. PS x 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052
5 1 600 s Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer]
Setting for the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
7-234 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t .dur. RC P S x 015 088 024 047 025 007 025 067
0: No Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-239)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether the following takes place:
● A zone extension will be carried out during a close command by a HSR that
is not synchronism-checked.
● Zone extension will occur with each reclose command.
[spacer] ARC: R C f. THER M t r ip PS x 015 176 015 177 015 178 015 179
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer]
This setting determines whether a reclose command shall be issued for a
thermal overload protection trip signal.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-235

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: Enab le PS x 018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023
synchronism check
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-246)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism check
(ASC) is enabled.
[spacer] ASC: CB ass ignm ent PS x 037 131 037 132 037 133 037 134
0: Not assigned Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-260)
[spacer]
This setting defines the function group DEVxx that will control the circuit
breaker.
[spacer] ASC: Sys te m int e grat . PS x 037 135 037 136 037 137 037 138
1: Autom.synchron.check Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-260)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether ASC will operate in “Autom. synchron. check” or
“Autom. synchr. control” mode.
[spacer] ASC: Active for HSR PS x 018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Active for TDR PS x 018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Clos .rej.w.block PS x 018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Op erative time PS x 018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034
100.0 0.0 6000.0 s Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-250)
[spacer]
Setting for the operative time for ASC.
[spacer] ASC: Phi off set PS x 018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042
0 -180 180 ° Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)

Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Setting for a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the
differential angle is correct.
[spacer] ASC: AR op. m ode P Sx 018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028
1: Voltage-checked
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
7-236 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: AR with tCB PSx 000 038 000 039 000 050 000 051
0: No
[spacer]
Function ASC provides a choice as to whether the CB operating time (tCB), as
configured at M AI N: tCB , C los e is to be taken into account for the precisely
synchronized reclosure (AR) or not.
[spacer] ASC: AR Op.m ode v- chk .P Sx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032
1: Vref but not V Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-253)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer] ASC: AR V> volt.che ck PS x 026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043
0.80 0.10 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-253)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
“Voltage present”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: AR
Op.mode v-chk.PS x.
[spacer] ASC: AR V< volt.che ck PS x 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040
0.20 0.10 0.80 Vnom Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-253)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as “No voltage”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: AR
Op.mode v-chk.PS x.
[spacer] ASC: AR tmin v- check PS x 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041
0.10 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-253)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer] ASC: AR V> s ync.che ck PS x 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035
0.80 0.40 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to
obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: AR Delt a Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036
0.10 0.02 0.40 Vnom Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential voltage between
measured and reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-237

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: AR Delt a f max PS x 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038
0.20 0.01 1.00 Hz Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential frequency between
[spacer] ASC: AR Delt a phi max PS x 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037
15 5 100 ° Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting the maximum differential angle between
[spacer] ASC: AR tmin sync.chk PS x 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039
0.10 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)
[spacer]
Auto-reclosing control: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer] ASC: MC op. mod e P Sx 000 056 000 057 000 058 000 059
1: Voltage-checked
[spacer]
Manual close command: Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting for the
operating mode.
[spacer] ASC: MC wit h tCB P Sx 000 102 000 103 000 104 000 105
0: No
[spacer]
Manual close command: In slightly asynchronous power systems, setting this
parameter to Yes ensures that the circuit breaker closing time is taken into
account by the automatic synchronism check (ASC) to issue of a close
command.
[spacer] ASC: MC op.mode v- chk. PSx 000 060 000 061 000 062 000 063
1: Vref but not V Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-255)
[spacer]
Manual close command: This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions
for a voltage controlled close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC V> volt .che ck PSx 000 064 000 065 000 066 000 067
0.80 0.10 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-255)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as
“Voltage present”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
7-238 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: MC V< volt .che ck PSx 000 068 000 069 000 070 000 071
0.20 0.10 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-255)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized
as “No voltage”.
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting ASC: MC
op.mode v-chk .PS x.
[spacer] ASC: MC tm in v-che ck P Sx 000 072 000 073 000 074 000 075
0.10 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-255)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which voltage conditions must be met so that the
close enable of the ASC is effected.
[spacer] ASC: MC V> sync .che ck P Sx 000 052 000 053 000 054 000 055
0.80 0.40 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the threshold of the minimum voltage to
obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
[spacer] ASC: MC De lta Vmax PS x 000 080 000 081 000 082 000 083
0.10 0.02 0.40 Vnom Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential voltage between
[spacer] ASC: MC De lta f max P S x 000 084 000 086 000 087 000 088
0.20 0.01 2.00 Hz Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential frequency between
[spacer] ASC: MC De lta phi max P Sx 000 089 000 091 000 092 000 093
15 5 100 ° Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting the maximum differential angle between
[spacer] ASC: MC tm in s ync.chk PS x 000 098 000 099 000 100 000 101
0.10 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer]
Manual close command: Setting for the operate delay value to define the
minimum time period during which synchronism conditions must be met so that
the close enable of the ASC is effected.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-239

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC: Enable PSx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-263)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
[spacer] DTOC: I>H PS x 072 009 073 009 074 009 075 009
10.00 1.00 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
[spacer]
Setting for the threshold of the instantaneous high-set stage I>H.
[spacer] DTOC: I> PS x 072 007 073 007 074 007 075 007
1.00 0.08 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)

Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: I>> PS x 072 008 073 008 074 008 075 008
2.00 0.20 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)

Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value of the overcurrent stage.
[spacer] DTOC: tI>H PSx 072 021 073 021 074 021 075 021
Blocked 0.000 30.000 s Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of instantaneous high-set stage I>H.
[spacer] DTOC: tI> PSx 072 019 073 019 074 019 075 019
Blocked 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)

Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: tI>> PSx 072 020 073 020 074 020 075 020
Blocked 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)

Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the overcurrent stage.
[spacer] DTOC: Tim er St art tI> P Sx 071 146 071 147 071 148 071 149
1: With starting Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether timer stage tI> is started with triggering of current
thresholds I> or, additionally, with a directional signal.
[spacer] DTOC: Tim er St art tI>> P Sx 072 245 073 044 074 044 075 044
[spacer]
This setting defines whether timer stage tI>> is started with the triggering of
current thresholds I>> or, additionally, with a directional signal.
[spacer] DTOC: Be ta (I>) P Sx 076 068 077 068 078 068 079 068
135 50 220 ° Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
that the direction is forward.
7-240 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC: Be ta (I>>) P Sx 076 069 077 069 078 069 079 069
135 50 220 ° Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic determines
[spacer] DTOC: Gamm a (I>) PSx 076 073 077 073 078 073 079 073
-45 -130 40 ° Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I> starting signal logic determines
[spacer] DTOC: Gamm a (I>>) PSx 076 074 077 074 078 074 079 074
-45 -130 40 ° Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the I>> starting signal logic determines
[spacer] DTOC: Direction (I>) P Sx 076 080 077 080 078 080 079 080
3: Non-directional Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-268)
[spacer]
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI> trip signal is sent: forward,
reverse or non-directional.
[spacer] DTOC: Direction (I>>) P Sx 076 088 077 088 078 088 079 088
3: Non-directional
[spacer]
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tI>> trip signal is sent: forward,
[spacer] DTOC: V< (I>) PS x 076 131 077 131 078 131 079 131
Blocked 0.50 1.80 Vnom Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-268)
[spacer]
The tI> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
Enabling is permanent if it is set to Blocked.
[spacer] DTOC: V< (I>>) PS x 076 150 077 150 078 150 079 150
Blocked 0.50 1.80 Vnom
[spacer]
The tI>> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
[spacer] DTOC: Vmin ( I>) PSx 076 157 077 157 078 157 079 157
0.010 0.002 0.050 Vnom Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-268)
[spacer]
A direction decision of the I> overcurrent stage is possible only if the short
circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
[spacer] DTOC: Vmin ( I>>) PSx 076 158 077 158 078 158 079 158
0.010 0.002 0.050 Vnom
[spacer]
A direction decision of the I>> overcurrent stage is possible only if the short
circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-241

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC: Mod e w/ o V (I>) PS x 076 128 077 128 078 128 079 128
2: Blocked Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-268)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
[spacer] DTOC: Mod e V<Vmin ( I>) PSx 076 113 077 113 078 113 079 113
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, for a short circuit voltage which is lower than Vmin,
the I> overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
[spacer] DTOC: Mod e V<Vmin(I>>) P Sx 076 127 077 127 078 127 079 127
1: Non-directional
[spacer]
the I>> overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
[spacer] DTOC: Mod e w/ o V (I>>) PS x 076 129 077 129 078 129 079 129
2: Blocked
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, for a voltage measuring circuit failure, the I>>
overcurrent stage should operate non-directional or should be blocked.
7-242 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCA: Enab le PS x 130 060 131 060 132 060 133 060
current protection
0: No Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-269)
[spacer] DTOCB: E nable PSx 130 080 131 080 132 080 133 080
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection – DTOCA / DTOCB – is enabled.
[spacer] DTOCA: I> PS x 130 061 131 061 132 061 133 061
1.00 0.08 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: I > PS x 130 081 131 081 132 081 133 081
1.00 0.08 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account,
and MAIN: Fe eder mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] DTOCA: I>> PS x 130 062 131 062 132 062 133 062
2.00 0.20 20.00 Inom Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: I >> PS x 130 082 131 082 132 082 133 082
2.00 0.20 20.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for operate value I>>. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into account,
and MAIN: Fe eder mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] DTOCA: tI> PSx 130 063 131 063 132 063 133 063
Blocked 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: tI > PS x 130 083 131 083 132 083 133 083
Blocked 0.00 60.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>. Note that only CT A / CT B
is taken into account, and MAIN: F eede r mode must be set to
Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] DTOCA: tI>> PSx 130 064 131 064 132 064 133 064
Blocked 0.00 60.00 s Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: tI >> PS x 130 084 131 084 132 084 133 084
Blocked 0.00 60.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overcurrent stage I>>. Note that only CT A /
CT B is taken into account, and M AIN: F ee der mode must be set to
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-243

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: E nable PS x

072 000 073 000 074 000 075 000
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-218, (p. 3-271)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent
protection is enabled (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: I ref PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current of the curve.
[spacer] IDMT: C haracteristic P Sx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056
0: Definite Time Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic.
[spacer] IDMT: C har. factor kt P S x 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053
1.00 0.01 10.00 Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer]
Setting for the characteristic time multiplier
[spacer] IDMT: M in. trip t ime P Sx 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time.
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime PSx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time or intermittent faults.
[spacer] IDMT: R e se t PS x 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059
1: Without delay Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer]
Setting for the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMT: T im e r S ta. tIre f>P S x 006 061 006 062 006 063 006 064
[spacer]
This setting defines whether timer stage tIref> is started with the triggering of
IDMT protection or, additionally, with a directional signal.
[spacer] IDMT: B e ta PS x 072 046 073 046 074 046 075 046
135 50 220 ° Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
7-244 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT: Gamm a PSx 072 047 073 047 074 047 075 047
-45 -130 40 ° Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
[spacer]
Angles β and γ set the range in which the inverse-time overcurrent starting
signal logic determines that the direction is “forward”.
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct ion ( I>) PS x 072 048 073 048 074 048 075 048
[spacer]
Setting for the measuring direction for which a tIref> trip signal is sent: forward,
[spacer] IDMT: V< PS x 072 081 073 081 074 081 075 081
Blocked 0.50 1.80 Vnom Fig. 3-227, (p. 3-281)
[spacer]
The tIref> trip signal is enabled only if the voltage is lower than the set value.
[spacer] IDMT: Vm in PSx 072 133 073 133 074 133 075 133
0.010 0.002 0.050 Vnom
[spacer]
A direction decision of the definite-time overcurrent protection is possible only if
the short circuit voltage is higher than this set value.
[spacer] IDMT: O p. m ode V<Vmin P Sx 072 138 073 138 074 138 075 138
1: Non-directional
[spacer]
the definite-time overcurrent protection should operate non-directional or should
be blocked.
[spacer] IDMT: M ode w/o v olt age PSx 072 119 073 119 074 119 075 119
2: Blocked Fig. 3-227, (p. 3-281)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether, in case of voltage measuring circuit failure, the
definite-time overcurrent protection function should operate non-directionally or
should be blocked.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-245

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMTA: Enable PSx

130 100 131 100 132 100 133 100
rent protection
0: No Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-283)
[spacer] IDMTB : Enab le PS x 130 120 131 120 132 120 133 120
0: No
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which inverse-time overcurrent
protection – IDMTA / IDMTB – is enabled (phase current system).
[spacer] IDMTA: I r ef PSx 130 101 131 101 132 101 133 101
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : I ref PS x 130 121 131 121 132 121 133 121
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current of the curve. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken
into account, and M AIN: Fe ede r mode must be set to Autotransformer
feed.
[spacer] IDMTA: C haracteri stic P Sx 130 102 131 102 132 102 133 102
0: Definite Time Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : C haracteri stic P Sx 130 122 131 122 132 122 133 122
0: Definite Time
[spacer]
Setting for the tripping characteristic. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into
account, and MAIN: F eede r mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] IDMTA: C har. factor kt P Sx 130 103 131 103 132 103 133 103
1.00 0.01 10.00 Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : C har. f actor kt P Sx 130 123 131 123 132 123 133 123
1.00 0.01 10.00
[spacer]
Setting for the characteristic time multiplier. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken
into account, and M AIN: Fe ede r mode must be set to Autotransformer
feed.
[spacer] IDMTA: M in. trip time PS x 130 104 131 104 132 104 133 104
1.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : M in. t rip time PS x 130 124 131 124 132 124 133 124
1.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum trip time. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken into
account, and MAIN: F eede r mode must be set to Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] IDMTA: Hold t ime PSx 130 105 131 105 132 105 133 105
0.00 0.00 600.00 s Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
7-246 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMTB : Hold time P S x 130 125 131 125 132 125 133 125
0.00 0.00 600.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the hold time or intermittent faults. Note that only CT A / CT B is
taken into account, and MAIN: Fe ede r mode must be set to
[spacer] IDMTA: R e s et PS x 130 106 131 106 132 106 133 106
1: Without delay Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : R ese t PS x 130 126 131 126 132 126 133 126
1: Without delay
[spacer]
Setting for the release or reset characteristic. Note that only CT A / CT B is taken
into account, and MAIN: Fe ede r mode must be set to Autotransformer
feed.
Parameter Address
Defrost protection DFR ST : Enab le PS x 019 130 019 131 019 132 019 133
0: No Fig. 3-231, (p. 3-285)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which defrost protection is enabled.
[spacer] DFR ST : Id> PS x 019 134 019 135 019 136 019 137
0.05 0.01 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Setting for the pickup threshold of the differential characteristic of the defrost
protection function.
[spacer] DFR ST : m1 PS x 019 138 019 139 019 140 019 141
0.50 0.20 1.50 Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Setting for the gradient of the differential characteristic of the defrost protection
function.
[spacer] DFR ST : t PSx 019 142 019 143 019 144 019 145
0.50 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the defrost protection function.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-247

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Enable PSx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175
protection
0: No Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-287)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload protection
is enabled.
[spacer] THER M : Ir ef PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179
1.00 0.10 4.00 Inom Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)

Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the reference current.
[spacer] THER M : S tar t .f act.OL_RC PS x 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180
1.15 1.05 1.50 Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the starting factor to trigger overload recording.
[spacer] THER M : Tim.const .1 ,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
[spacer] THER M : Tim.const .2 ,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188
30.0 1.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (cooling time constant).
Note: This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all
other cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
[spacer] THER M : O/ T f .Iref pe r s. PS x 072 167 073 167 074 167 075 167
80 0 300 K
[spacer]
Setting for the overtemperature resulting from persistent thermal limit current.
Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of operation.
[spacer] THER M : R e l. O/ T warning P Sx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184
95 50 200 % Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the warning stage.
Note: This setting is enabled only in the Relative replica operating mode.
[spacer] THER M : R e l. O/ T t rip P Sx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181
100 50 200 % Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the trip stage.
Note: This setting is enabled only in the Relative replica operating mode.
7-248 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : Abs. O/ T warning PS x 072 153 073 153 074 153 075 153
95 0 300 °C
[spacer]
Setting for the temperature (in °C) to trigger a warning alarm.
Note: This setting is only enabled in the Absolute replica mode of operation.
[spacer] THER M : M ax.pe rm.obj .t mp.PS x 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182
120 0 300 °C Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THER M : M ax.pe rm.cool.t mpPS x 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185
40 0 300 °C Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
Note: This setting is active only if the coolant temperature is measured via the
PT 100 or the 20 mA input.
[spacer] THER M : S ele ct CTA P Sx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177
0: Default temp. value Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-290)
[spacer]
This setting defines whether coolant temperature (ambient) shall be measured
and, if so, whether data acquisition shall take place via the PT 100 or the 20 mA
input.
[spacer] THER M : De fault CTA PS x 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186
40 -40 300 °C Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
[spacer] THER M : Funct.f.CT A fai l. PSx 076 177 077 177 078 177 079 177
1: Default temp. value Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-290)
[spacer]
The setting defines how the thermal overload protection function will continue to
operate in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition. User can select
between Default temp. value, Last meas.temperat. and Blocking.
[spacer] THER M : M inimu m te mper at.PS x 076 178 077 178 078 178 079 178
-40 -40 100 °C
[spacer]
Setting for the minimum coolant temperature to be used for trip time calculation
if a cable runs in an underground tunnel system.
[spacer] THER M : Hyste re sis t ri p PSx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183
2 2 30 % Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trip stage.
[spacer] THER M : R e tain r e pl ic a PS x 009 019 009 030 009 032 009 039
0: No
[spacer]
With this parameter it can be configured whether the thermal replica is retained
in the non-volatile section of the device's memory so that it will still be available
after an interruption of the supply voltage.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-249

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : Warning pre-t rip PS x 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191
30.0 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between the
warning time and the trip time is set here.
[spacer] THER M : Factor 2 PL PS x 072 173 073 173 074 173 075 173
2.00 0.20 3.00 Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
[spacer] THER M : Factor 3 PL PS x 072 174 073 174 074 174 075 174
3.00 0.20 3.00 Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
[spacer]
Setting for the parallel line factors for 2- or 3-parallel line operation.
7-250 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Enable PS x

076 000 077 000 078 000 079 000
tion
0: No Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-295)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which V<> protection is enabled.
[spacer] V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003
1.10 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)

Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>.
[spacer] V<>: V> > PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004
1.20 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V>>.
[spacer] V<>: tV> PS x 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer] V<>: tV>> PS x 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
[spacer] V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007
0.80 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<.
[spacer] V<>: V< < PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008
0.70 0.20 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for operate value V<<.
[spacer] V<>: Vm in PS x 076 046 077 046 078 046 079 046
0.25 0.00 1.20 Vnom Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for the lower threshold of the window function.
[spacer] V<>: tV< PS x 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] V<>: tV<< PS x 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010
Blocked 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer] V<>: tT rans ient P Sx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029
1.00 0.00 100.00 s Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer]
Setting for the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-251

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: Hyst . V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048
3 1 10 % Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer]
Setting for the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured
voltages.
7-252 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : Enable PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199
tection
0: No Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-298)
[spacer]
This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
[spacer] f<> : Oper. m ode f1 PS x 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123
1: f Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
1: f
1: f
1: f
1: f
[spacer]
Setting for the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency
protection.
[spacer] f<> : f1 PS x 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : f2 PS x 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f3 PS x 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f4 PS x 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
49.80 10.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer] f<> : f5 PS x 019 151 019 152 019 153 019 154
49.80 40.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection
function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency exceeds
this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal frequency and the
frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the chosen operating mode,
either a signal is issued without further monitoring, or further monitoring
mechanisms are started.
[spacer] f<> : tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107
0.00 0.00 10.00 s Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-253

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer] f<> : tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer] f<> : tf5 PSx 019 155 019 156 019 157 019 158
0.00 0.00 10.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.
[spacer] f<> : df1/dt PS x 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : df2/dt PS x 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df3/dt PS x 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df4/dt PS x 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer] f<> : df5/dt PS x 019 159 013 092 013 093 013 094
2.0 0.1 10.0 Hz/s
[spacer]
Setting for the frequency gradient to be monitored.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f with df/dt has been
selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 PS x 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
0.30 0.01 5.00 Hz
[spacer]
Setting for Delta f.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 PS x 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119
0.30 0.04 3.00 s Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : De lta t2 PS x 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
7-254 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : De lta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
0.30 0.04 3.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for Delta t.
Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode f w. Delta f/Delta t has
been selected.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-255

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF: Enable PS x 072 110 073 110 074 110 075 110
failure protection
0: No Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-303)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which breaker failure protection is
enabled.
[spacer] CBF: I min< PS x 072 112 073 112 074 112 075 112
0.20 0.10 1.00 Inom Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer]
Setting for the Imin< current threshold. Current falling below this threshold will
be interpreted as breaker opening, and reset the CBF timers.
[spacer] CBF: t Im in< PSx 072 113 073 113 074 113 075 113
0.10 0.00 50.00 s Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
[spacer] CBF: Op er ative time PS x 072 114 073 114 074 114 075 114
30.0 1.0 500.0 s Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer]
Setting for the operative time of CB auxiliary contact monitoring.
[spacer] CBF: M on. time M - trip PS x 072 115 073 115 074 115 075 115
0.15 0.00 2.00 s Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time of the main-trip command before issuing a re-
trip.
[spacer] CBF: M on. time R - trip P S x 072 116 073 116 074 116 075 116
0.30 0.00 2.00 s Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time of the re-trip command before issuing a back-
trip.
7-256 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Enable PS x 072 240 073 240 074 240 075 240
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-257, (p. 3-315)
[spacer]
This setting defines the setting group in which the limit value monitoring
function is enabled.
[spacer] LIMIT : I> PSx 072 241 073 241 074 241 075 241
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-316)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I>.
[spacer] LIMIT : I> > PSx 072 242 073 242 074 242 075 242
1.20 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-316)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold I>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tI> PS x 072 243 073 243 074 243 075 243
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-316)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tI>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tI>> PS x 072 244 073 244 074 244 075 244
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-316)
[spacer]
Setting for operate delay tI>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : IA> PS x 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage of catenary current IA or
catenary 1 current.
Note: Valid only with settings
● MAIN: Fee de r mode = Autotransformer feed and
● M AIN: Fee de r mode = Single feed w. sum I.
[spacer] LIMIT : IA>> PS x 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage of catenary current IA
or catenary 1 current.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-257

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA> PSx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of catenary current IA or
catenary 1 current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA>> PSx 076 203 077 203 078 203 079 203
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of catenary current IA
or catenary 1 current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IB> PS x 076 204 077 204 078 204 079 204
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage of feeder current IB or
catenary 2 current.
[spacer] LIMIT : IB>> PS x 076 205 077 205 078 205 079 205
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage of feeder current IB or
catenary 2 current.
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB> PSx 076 206 077 206 078 206 079 206
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of feeder current IB or
catenary 2 current.
7-258 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB>> PSx 076 207 077 207 078 207 079 207
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer]
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of feeder current IB or
catenary 2 current.
[spacer] LIMIT : Iplaus/ I dfr st > P Sx 076 224 077 224 078 224 079 224
1.10 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-318)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage of the CT Plausibility
check current or defrost current.
[spacer] LIMIT : Iplaus/ I dfr st >> P Sx 076 225 077 225 078 225 079 225
1.20 0.10 5.00 Inom Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-318)
[spacer]
[spacer] LIMIT : tIp laus /I dfr st > PS x 076 226 077 226 078 226 079 226
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-318)
[spacer]
[spacer] LIMIT : tIp laus /I dfr st > PS x 076 227 077 227 078 227 079 227
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-318)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage of the CT
Plausibility check current or defrost current.
[spacer] LIMIT : V> PSx 072 247 073 247 074 247 075 247
1.10 0.10 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V>.
[spacer] LIMIT : V>> PS x 072 248 073 248 074 248 075 248
1.20 0.10 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV> PS x 072 249 073 249 074 249 075 249
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV>> PS x 072 250 073 250 074 250 075 250
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-259

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : V< PSx 072 251 073 251 074 251 075 251
0.90 0.10 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V<.
[spacer] LIMIT : V<< PS x 072 252 073 252 074 252 075 252
0.80 0.10 3.00 Vnom Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold V<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV< PS x 072 253 073 253 074 253 075 253
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tV<< PS x 072 254 073 254 074 254 075 254
Blocked 0.5 1000.0 s Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA> PS x 076 208 077 208 078 208 079 208
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first overvoltage stage of catenary voltage
VA.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA>> PS x 076 209 077 209 078 209 079 209
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the second overvoltage stage of catenary
voltage VA.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA> PS x 076 210 077 210 078 210 079 210
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overvoltage stage of catenary voltage
VA.
7-260 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>> PS x 076 211 077 211 078 211 079 211
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overvoltage stage of catenary
voltage VA.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA< PS x 076 216 077 216 078 216 079 216
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first undervoltage stage of catenary voltage
VA.
[spacer] LIMIT : VA<< PS x 076 217 077 217 078 217 079 217
0.80 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate value of the first undervoltage stage of catenary voltage
VA.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA< PS x 076 218 077 218 078 218 079 218
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undervoltage stage of catenary voltage
VA.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA<< PS x 076 219 077 219 078 219 079 219
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second undervoltage stage of catenary
voltage VA.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-261

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : VB> PSx 076 212 077 212 078 212 079 212
1.10 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the first overvoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
Note: Valid only with settings MAIN: F e ede r mode = Autotransformer feed
and
MAIN: Fe e de r m ode = Single feed w. sum I.
[spacer] LIMIT : VB>> PSx 076 213 077 213 078 213 079 213
1.20 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the second overvoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
and
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB> PS x 076 214 077 214 078 214 079 214
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first overvoltage stage of the feeder voltage.
and
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>> PS x 076 215 077 215 078 215 079 215
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second overvoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
and
[spacer] LIMIT : VB< PSx 076 220 077 220 078 220 079 220
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the first undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
and
7-262 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : VB<< PSx 076 221 077 221 078 221 079 221
0.90 0.10 1.50 Vnom
[spacer]
Setting for the operate threshold of the second undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
and
MAIN: Fe e de r mode = Single feed w. sum I.
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB< PS x 076 222 077 222 078 222 079 222
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the first undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
and
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB<< PSx 076 223 077 223 078 223 079 223
1.0 0.5 1000.0 s
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the second undervoltage stage of the feeder
voltage.
and
[spacer] LIMIT : f > PSx 072 211 073 211 074 211 075 211
105.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f>.
[spacer] LIMIT : f >> PSx 072 212 073 212 074 212 075 212
110.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf> PS x 072 213 073 213 074 213 075 213
Blocked 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f>.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf>> PS x 072 214 073 214 074 214 075 214
Blocked 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f>>.
[spacer] LIMIT : f < PSx 072 215 073 215 074 215 075 215
95.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f<.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-263

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : f << PSx 072 216 073 216 074 216 075 216
90.00 80.00 120.00 %fnom Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for operate threshold f<<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf< PS x 072 217 073 217 074 217 075 217
Blocked 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f<.
[spacer] LIMIT : tf<< PS x 072 218 073 218 074 218 075 218
Blocked 1.0 1000.0 s Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of f<<.
7-264 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
7.1.3.4 Cont rol
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: BI active USE R 221 003
1: Yes Fig. 3-276, (p. 3-335)
[spacer]
Enabling the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: SI active USER 221 002
0: No Fig. 3-276, (p. 3-335)
[spacer]
Enabling the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 1 221 014
[spacer] MAIN: Inp.asg. fct .block. 2 221 022
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Op. delay fct . block 221 029
0 0 60 s Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-112)
[spacer]
Setting for the operate delay of the function blocks.
[spacer] MAIN: Pe rm.No.mot .dr iv e op 221 027
15 1 20 Fig. 3-289, (p. 3-352)
[spacer]
Setting for the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M AIN: Mon.ti me mot .dr iv e s.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time mot. drive s 221 026
15 1 20 min Fig. 3-289, (p. 3-352)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.
[spacer] MAIN: Cool.t ime mot.drive s 221 028
3 0 10 min Fig. 3-289, (p. 3-352)
[spacer]
Setting for the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.
[spacer] MAIN: Mon.time Dir.Cont r. 221 060
0.10 0.01 2.00 s Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-355)

Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-356)
[spacer]
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 max . ope r. c ap. 221 084
1 1 99
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 max . ope r. c ap. 221 088
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-265

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 re ady fct. ass ign 221 085
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. with the value at MAIN: CB1 max. ope r.
cap..
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 re ady fct. ass ign 221 089
[spacer]
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at
MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. (or MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap.) with the
value at MAI N: CB1 max. oper . cap. (or M AI N: CB 2 max. oper .
cap., respectively).
[spacer] MAIN: W. ex t. cmd. t ermin. 221 063
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the control
process of motor driven switchgear.
7-266 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
External device DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 000
0: Not assigned
[spacer] DEV02: De signat. e xt. dev. 210 050
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Setting for the designation of the respective external device. Either one of the
pre-defined designations or the term Device Name User may be selected. In the
latter case any text (max 4 characters) may be entered at DEV01: D EV-
Name Use r that will be used as the devices' designation. (The same holds for
DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: DEV- Name Us er 218 101
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
0:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-267

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0:
0:
0:
0:
[spacer]
Any text (max. 4 characters) may be entered as the devices’ name which will
then be used as the designation, if the associated parameter
DEV01: De signat. e xt. dev. has been set to Device Name User. When
instead one of the pre-defined designations is selected at DE V01: Des ig nat.
ext. de v. it will be used and DE V01: D EV- Name User is ignored. A
designation with more than 4 characters is internally truncated. (The same holds
for DEV02 etc.)
[spacer] DEV01: Oper. m ode cmd. 210 024
3: Time control Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-345)
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
3: Time control
[spacer]
Selecting the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
7-268 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV01: Latching ti me 210 005
0.00 0.00 5.00 s Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-341)

Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-350)
Fig. 3-288, (p. 3-350)
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-355)
Fig. 3-293, (p. 3-356)
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
0.00 0.00 5.00 s
[spacer]
Setting for the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear
position signal – “Open” or “Closed” – has been received.
[spacer] DEV01: Op.tim e swit ch. dev. 210 004
20 0 254 s Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
Fig. 3-287, (p. 3-350)
Fig. 3-292, (p. 3-355)
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-269

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
20 0 254 s
[spacer]
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).
[spacer] DEV01: Gr. as s ign. de bounc . 210 011
1: Group 1 Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
1: Group 1
[spacer]
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter
suppression.
[spacer] DEV01: S tartCm dTi me superv . 210 007
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
[spacer] DEV02: S tartCm dTi me superv . 210 057
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
7-270 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV03: S tartCmdTi me superv . 210 107
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
This parameter allows for defining a monitoring timer for the begin of a switch
command.
After sending an Open / Close command, the corresponding timer starts. If the
switchgear unit has not reached its intermediate position after this time has
elapsed then the command is deactivated and MAIN: S tar tcmdtime
exceed. is signaled.
In the default setting blocked this monitoring is switched off. This is
recommended for switchgear units for which it is impossible to detect the
intermediate position.
[spacer] DEV01: Interm . pos. s uppr . 210 012
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-271

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV08: Interm . p os. s uppr . 211 112
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the “intermediate position” signal will be
suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
[spacer] DEV01: S tat .ind .in ter m.pos. 210 027
0: No Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the “Faulty position” signal is issued.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg . s w.tr . pl ug 210 014

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
7-272 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Definition of the binary signal that is used to signal the position (“plugged-in” /
“unplugged”) of the switch truck plug.
[spacer] DEV01: With ge n. trip cmd.1 210 021
0: No Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-344)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-273

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 1” of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as
“circuit breakers”. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
0: No Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-344)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip
command 2” of the protection function.
[spacer] DEV01: With close c md. /pr ot 210 023
0: No Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-344)
0: No
0: No
0: No
7-274 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the “close
command” of the protection function.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .e l.ctrl.open 210 019
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-275

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV10: Inp.asg .el.ctrl.open 211 219
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp.asg .el.ctr.clos e 210 020
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to
move the switchgear unit to the “Closed” position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be
selected.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd ope n 218 120
7-276 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
Select whether open commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Block cmd clos e 218 160
[spacer]
Select whether close commands for the switchgear unit shall be blocked.
[spacer] DEV01: Oper.count .l imit 218 211
Blocked 1 65000 Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-352)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-277

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
Blocked 1 65000
[spacer]
Setting a limit value for the number of switching commands for the respective
switchgear unit.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Ope n 210 015
7-278 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Open”
command.
[spacer] DEV01: Inp. as g. e nd Close 210 016
[spacer]
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the “Close”
command.
[spacer] DEV01: Open w/o s tat. int e rl 210 025
0: No Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-343)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-279

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Open” position is permitted without
a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e w/ o stat . int . 210 026
0: No Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-343)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
This setting specifies whether switching to “Closed” position is permitted
without a check by the station interlock function.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I open 210 039
7-280 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
included in the bay type definitions (see “List of Bay Types” in the Appendix).
If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new
interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the
function assignment.
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as sig.BI wS I clos 210 040
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-281

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock with substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I op 210 041
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Open” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
7-282 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] DEV01: Fct.as g.BI w/ o S I c l 210 042
[spacer]
This setting defines which output will issue the “Close” enable to the interlocking
logic when there is “bay interlock without substation interlock”.
Note: The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are
Parameter Address
External device DEV02: S ec. timer 2 210 059
0 0 65000 s
[spacer] DEV03: S ec. timer 3 210 109
0 0 65000 s
[spacer]
Setting for the secondary timer.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-283

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Cycle t int erl.che ck 221 104
Blocked 0.1 10.0 s
[spacer]
The interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in the
“phase 2” of the IEC 61850 communication protocol. Therefore it is a
requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as
with software versions that still implement “phase 1”, only with the request for a
switching operation.
This parameter sets the cycle time, after which a check of the interlock
conditions is carried out.
As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it
must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting
value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as
short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without
any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so
short that the P438 will be under too much strain. As the CPU load of the P438 is
dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is
not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
[spacer] ILOCK: R se t ILOCK violati on 221 123
Blocked 1 10 s Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-336)
[spacer]
The interlock violation signal (221 018) M AIN: Interlock equ. viol. will be
automatically reset after the time period set here. (The default value Blocked
disables the automatic reset.)
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assig nm. outp. 1 250 000
7-284 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

7 Settings P438
Parameter Address
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.1 0 250 009
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7-285

P438 7 Settings
Parameter Address
[spacer] ILOCK: Fct.assig nm. outp.2 9 250 028
[spacer]
Definition of the interlock conditions.
7-286 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
8 Information and Control Functions
8.1 Operation
The P438 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals,
and acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object
as well as fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical
purposes. This information can be read out from the integrated local control
panel or via the operating program.
All this information can be found in the “Operation” and “Events” folders in the
menu tree.
Note
Detailed information about all parameters, including complete selection tables and
IEC 60870‑5‑103 protocol properties, are separately available as a set of interlinked
PDF files for user-friendly navigation, packed in one ZIP archive named
DataModelExplorer_P438_en_P01.zip.
A list of the Logical Nodes that have been implemented for the IEC 61850 protocol
can be found in a separate document.
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 M e as ur ed Ope rating Dat a
Parameter Address
InterMiCOM COMM 3: No. t el. err ors p.u. 120 040
interface
0.0 0.0 100.0 %
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer] COMM 3: No.t.err.,max,st ore d 120 041
0.0 0.0 100.0 %
[spacer]
Display of the updated measured operating value for the proportion of corrupted
messages within the last 1000 received messages.
[spacer] COMM 3: Loop back res ult 120 057
....: Not measured
[spacer] COMM 3: Loop back rec eiv e 120 056
Not measured 0 255
[spacer]
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-1

P438 8 Information and Control Functions
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Curr e nt IDC

004 134
Not measured 0.00 24.00 mA Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
Display of the input current.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr e nt IDC p.u. 004 135
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer] MEASI: Curr . IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136
Not measured 0.00 1.20 IDC,nom Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer]
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.
[spacer] MEASI: S caled value IDC, lin 004 180
Not measured -32000 32000 Fig. 3-39, (p. 3-66)
[spacer]
Display of the scaled linearized value.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e T 004 133
Not measured -40.0 215.0 °C Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-67)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e Tmax 004 233
Not measured -40.0 215.0 °C Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-67)
[spacer]
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature
input on the analog p/c board.
[spacer] MEASI: T emp eratur e p.u. T 004 221
Not measured -0.40 2.15 100°C Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-67)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature measured at the “PT 100” temperature input on the
analog p/c board referred to 100°C.
Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Curr ent A- 1 005 100
output
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Curr ent A- 2 005 099
0.00 0.00 20.00 mA
[spacer]
Display of the current on the analog measured data output (A1: channel 1; A2:
channel 2).
8-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

8 Information and Control Functions P438
Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090
1997-01-01 1997-01 2098-11 dd.mm.yy Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-127)

-01 -08
[spacer]
Date display. The date can also be set here. The centuries are not displayed.
The supported dates range from January 1st, 1997, until November 7th, 2098.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e of day 003 091
00:00:00 00:00:00 24:00:00 hh:mm:ss Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Display of the time of day. The time can also be set here.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witc hing 003 095
0: Standard time Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-127)
[spacer]
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.
This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que nc y f 004 040
Not measured 10.00 70.00 Hz Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Display of system frequency.
[spacer] MAIN: Iplaus / Id frst . pr im. 004 200
Not measured 0 25000 A Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
Display of CT plausibility check current or defrost current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current I prim. 004 110
[spacer]
Display of phase current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA pr im. 005 040
[spacer]
Display of catenary current IA or catenary 1 current as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IB prim. 006 040
[spacer]
Display of feeder current IB or catenary 2 current as a primary quantity.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-3

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Current I(fn) prim 008 109
[spacer]
Display of the fundamental current component as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Current I(2fn) pr im 008 095
[spacer]
Display of the second harmonic current component as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
Display of the third harmonic current component as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
Display of the fifth harmonic current component as a primary quantity.
[spacer]
Display of the seventh harmonic current component as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage V prim. 004 112
Not measured 0.00 250.00 kV Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
Display of the updated voltage as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage VA pr im. 005 042
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the catenary voltage as a primary quantity.
Note: Valid only with setting M AIN: F ee der mode = Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage VB/ Vref prim 006 042
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for feeder voltage VB or reference voltage Vref as a
primary quantity.
Note: Valid only with setting
● M AI N: Fee de r mode = Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] MAIN: Act.energy outp. prim 008 065
2: MWh
[spacer] MAIN: Act.energy inp. pr im 008 066
2: MWh
[spacer] MAIN: Re act.en. outp. pri m 008 067
2: Mvarh
8-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Re act. en. inp. pr im 008 068
2: Mvarh
[spacer]
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
At run-time, the value is displayed with 32 bit precision. (But note that for
technical reasons, this value is internally stored as a text value.)
Value ranges:
● MAIN: Act .e ne rgy outp.pr im – 0 … 6,553,500.00 MWh
● MAIN: Act.ene rgy inp. pri m – 0 … 6,553,500.00 MWh
● MAIN: Re act .e n. out p. pr im – 0 … 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
● MAIN: Re act. e n. inp. prim – 0 … 6,553,500.00 Mvar h
Note: As an alternative, the same values also exist as numbers with 16 bit
precision:
● (005 061) M AIN: Act .e ne rgy out p.prim
● (005 062) M AI N: Act .e ne r gy inp. pri m
● (005 063) M AIN: Re act .e n. out p. prim
● (005 064) M AIN: Reac t. e n. inp. prim
[spacer] MAIN: Active powe r P pr im. 004 050
Not measured -320.00 320.00 MW Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Re ac. powe r Q prim. 004 052
Not measured -320.00 320.00 Mvar Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Act.energy outp. prim 005 061
0.00 0.00 650.00 MWh Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer] MAIN: Act.energy inp. pr im 005 062
0.00 0.00 650.00 MWh Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer] MAIN: Re act.en. outp. pri m 005 063
0.00 0.00 650.00 Mvarh Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-5

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Re act. en. inp. pr im 005 064
0.00 0.00 650.00 Mvarh Fig. 3-66, (p. 3-102)
[spacer]
Display of the updated active energy output (or active energy input, reactive
energy output, reactive energy input, respectively) as a primary quantity.
The value is displayed as a number with 16 bit precision.
Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 MVAr h is exceeded,
the determination of the energy output is restarted, and the value that
exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle. Moreover, a counter is
incremented:
● (009 090) M AI N: No.ov e r fl.act .e n.out: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: Act.e nergy out p.prim
● (009 091) M AIN: No.ov e rfl.act .e n.inp: Counter for value overflow
of M AIN: Act .ene rgy inp. pri m
● (009 092) M AI N: No.ov /fl. re ac.e n.out: Counter for value overflow
of M AIN: Re act.en. outp. pr im
● (009 093) M AI N: No.ov/ fl.r eac.e n.inp: Counter for value overflow
of MAI N: R eact . en. inp. pr im
Note that the maximum value of these counters is 10000.
As an alternative to these 16 bit numbers, there are also 32 bit precision values
available:
● (008 065) M AIN: Act. ene r gy o utp.pr im
● (008 066) M AIN: Act .ene rgy i np. prim
● (008 067) M AI N: R eact .e n. outp. pri m
● (008 068) M AI N: R eact . en. inp. pri m
[spacer] MAIN: Load im pe d. Z prim. 005 005
Not measured 0.0 500.0 Ω Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Display of the updated load impedance value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load react. X prim. 005 196
Not measured -500.0 500.0 Ω Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Display of the updated load reactance value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load res is t . R pr im. 005 198
[spacer]
Display of the updated load resistance value as a primary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load flow dir e ct ion 004 166
....: Undefined Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-99)
[spacer]
Display of the load flow direction.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi 004 167
Not measured -180 180 ° Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-99)
[spacer]
Display of the load angle (power factor angle).
8-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Fre que nc y f p.u. 004 070
Not measured 0.200 4.000 fnom Fig. 3-65, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Display of system frequency referred to fn.
[spacer] MAIN: Iplaus / Id frst . p. u. 004 201
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Idfrst,nom Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
Display of the CT plausibility check current or defrost current referred to Iplaus/
dfrst,n.
[spacer] MAIN: Current I p.u. 004 111
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom Fig. 3-59, (p. 3-96)
[spacer]
Display of the current referred to In.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IA p.u. 005 041
[spacer]
Display of catenary current IA or catenary 1 current referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Current IB p.u. 006 041
[spacer]
Display of feeder current IB or catenary 2 current referred to Inom.
● M AI N: Feeder mode = Autotransformer feed and
● MAIN: Fe eder mode = Single feed w. sum I.
[spacer] MAIN: Current I( fn) p.u. 008 110
[spacer]
Display of the fundamental current component referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Current I( 2fn) p.u. 008 096
[spacer]
Display of the second harmonic current component referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the third harmonic current component referred to Inom.
[spacer]
Display of the fifth harmonic current component referred to Inom.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-7

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Current I(7fn) p.u. 021 058
[spacer]
Display of the seventh harmonic current component referred to Inom.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage V p.u. 004 113
Not measured 0.000 5.000 Vnom Fig. 3-61, (p. 3-98)
[spacer]
Display of the voltage referred to Vn.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage VA p. u. 005 043
[spacer]
Display of the updated catenary voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer] MAIN: Voltage VB/ Vref p.u. 006 043
[spacer]
Display of the updated feeder voltage VB or reference voltage Vref referred to
Vnom.
Note: Valid only with setting
● M AIN: Fe eder mode = Autotransformer feed.
[spacer] MAIN: Active powe r P p. u. 004 051
Not measured -7.500 7.500 Snom Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent power
Snom.
[spacer] MAIN: Re ac. powe r Q p.u. 004 053
Not measured -7.500 7.500 Snom Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal apparent
power Snom.
[spacer] MAIN: Load im pe dance Z p.u 005 004
Not measured 0.000 3.300 Znom Fig. 3-64, (p. 3-101)
[spacer]
Display of the updated operating impedance referred to Znom = 300 Ω.
[spacer] MAIN: Load angle phi p.u. 004 078
Not measured -1.80 1.80 phi,ref Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-99)
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load angle referred to φnom = 100°.
[spacer] MAIN: Active powe r fac tor 004 054
Not measured -1.000 1.000 Fig. 3-63, (p. 3-100)
[spacer]
Display of the updated active power factor.
[spacer] MAIN: Load im pe dance Z s ec 005 000
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load impedance as secondary quantity.
8-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Load reac tance X se c 005 195
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load reactance as secondary quantity.
[spacer] MAIN: Load res is t . R se c 005 197
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the load resistance as secondary quantity.
Parameter Address
Defrost protection DFR ST : Cur rent Id p. u. 004 196
Not measured 0.000 25.000 Inom
[spacer]
Display of the per-unit differential current of the defrost protection.
[spacer] DFR ST : Cur rent IR p.u. 004 197
[spacer]
Display of the per-unit restraining current of the defrost protection.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-9

Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : S tatus the rm.re plica 004 016
protection
Not measured -25000 25000 % Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm pr im 007 220
[spacer] THER M : Curre nt I,t he rm p. u 007 221
Not measured 0.000 2.400 Iref Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the “thermal current” (as a primary quantity, or as a per unit quantity,
respectively).
These measured operating values are calculated as follows:
Statustherm. repl.
I therm,prim = I ref I nom,CT,prim
100
I therm,prim
I therm,p.u. =
I ref I nom,CT,prim
With:
● Itherm,prim = THERM : Cur re nt I, ther m prim
● Itherm,p.u. = THE RM: C ur rent I,t herm p.u
● Statustherm. repl. = THE RM : St at us the rm.re plica
● Iref = THER M: Ire f P Sx
● Inom,CT,prim = M AIN: Inom C. T. pri m.
In a measured values message the thermal current is processed as a per-unit
variable referred to Iref.
[spacer] THER M : Object te mpe r at ur e 004 137
Not measured -40 300 °C Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t empe ratur e 004 149
[spacer]
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
CTA PSx.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer] THER M : Pre - trip t ime left 004 139
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (“time-to-trip”).
8-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : The rm . replica p.u. 004 017
Not measured -2.50 2.50 100% Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function
referred to a buffer content of 100%.
[spacer] THER M : Object te mp. p.u. 004 179
Not measured -0.40 3.00 Tref Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THER M : Coolant t emp. p.u. 004 178
Not measured -0.40 2.00 Tref Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer]
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100°C.
[spacer] THER M : Te m p. offse t re pli ca 004 109
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Count 1 217 100
0 0 65535 Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
[spacer] COUNT : Count 2 217 080
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Display of the updated count.
Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-11

8.1.1.2 Physical S tat e S ignals
Parameter Address
Configurable func‐ F_KEY: St ate F1 080 122
tion keys
0: "Off"
[spacer] F_KEY: St ate F2 080 123
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
0: "Off"
[spacer]
The state of the function keys is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the function key.
● "Off": The function key is in the “Off” position.
● "On": The function key is in the “On” position.
8-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
InterMiCOM COMM 3: State r ece iv e 1 120 000
interface
0: 0
[spacer] COMM 3: State r ece iv e 2 120 003
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the relevant receive signal.
[spacer] COMM 3: State send 1 121 000
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-13

Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: Input 1 st ate 106 200
Orientated
Substation Events
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 2 st ate 106 201
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 st at e 106 209
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-15

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-17

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 10 0 stat e 112 167
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-19

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 114 stat e 112 181
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer]
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
8-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Virtual Inputs VINP: I nput 1 stat e 115 010
0: 0
[spacer] VINP: I nput 2 stat e 115 011
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
[spacer] VINP: I nput 10 s tate 115 019
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-21

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-23

Parameter Address
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
0: 0
8-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Binary input INP: State U 301 152 216
0: "Low"
[spacer] INP: State U 302 152 219
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-25

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-27

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] INP: State U 120 3 152 204
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-29

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
8-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
0: "Low"
[spacer]
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input mode.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-31

Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: St ate K 301 151 044
output
0: Inactive Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] OUTP: St ate K 302 151 047
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-32 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] OUTP: St ate K 100 1 150 216
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-33

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-34 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-35

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the output relay.
● Inactive: The output relay is not energized.
● Active: The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output relay.
8-36 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
LED indicators LED: S tat e H 1 green 085 180
1: Active
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 2 ye ll. 085 000
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 3 ye ll. 085 003
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 4 re d 085 006
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H10 re d 085 024
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H17 re d. 085 181
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-37

Parameter Address
[spacer] LED: S tat e H20 red 085 136
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H 4 g reen 085 056
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer] LED: S tat e H10 gr e en 085 074
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
8-38 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
0: Inactive
[spacer]
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
● Inactive: The LED indicator is not energized.
● Active: The LED indicator is energized.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-39

8.1.1.3 Logic S tat e Sig nals
Parameter Address
Cyber Security CS: HM I pincode changed 180 100
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the PIN code of HMI is changed.
[spacer] CS: COMM pas s w. change 180 101
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the password of communication interface is changed.
[spacer] CS: HM I pincode invalid 180 102
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the PIN code via HMI is invalid.
[spacer] CS: COMM pas s w. inv alid 180 103
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the password via communication interface is invalid.
[spacer] CS: re set tok en ge ne rat e 180 104
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the reset token is generated.
[spacer] CS: RBAC re s et s uc ce ss 180 105
0: No
[spacer]
Display when the RBAC reset is successful.
[spacer] CS: RBAC re s et f ailed 180 106
0: No
[spacer]
Display when the RBAC reset is failed.
[spacer] CS: Us e r01 blocke d 180 107
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-40 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CS: Us e r07 block e d 180 113
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is blocked.
[spacer] CS: HM I logged in 180 122
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is logged in via HMI.
[spacer] CS: COMMS logge d in 180 123
0: No
[spacer]
The signal shows the user is logged in via communication interface.
[spacer] CS: IEC C S br ick faul ty 180 124
1: Yes
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-41

Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Ed it mode 080 111
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is in edit mode. As a standard this signal is linked
to LED: Fct.as sig. H1 7 r ed.
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 1 E XT 030 230
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 1 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 1.)
[spacer] LOC: Tr ig. m enu jmp 2 E XT 030 231
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that menu jump list 2 is being triggered. (See the corresponding setting
at LOC: Fct. menu jmp lis t 2.)
[spacer] LOC: Illum ination on EX T 037 101
1: Yes
[spacer]
This signal shows that the backlighting for the front panel LCD is switched on.
[spacer] LOC: Loc.acc.block .act iv e 221 005
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-15)
[spacer] LOC: Re m.acc.block. act ive 221 004
0: No Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-15)
[spacer] LOC: Chg.Sig.Pane l s tat. 221 076
0: No Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)
[spacer] LOC: Chg.Sig.Pane l flash. 221 077
0: No Fig. 3-5, (p. 3-11)
8-42 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Com m and bloc k. E X T 003 173
communication
interface 1
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas. block EX T 037 074
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: Com m and bloc king 003 174
0: No Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
[spacer] COMM 1: Sig./ meas.v al.block. 037 075
0: No Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 60870- 5- 10 3 003 219
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 60870- 5- 10 1 003 218
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: IEC 60870- 5, ILS 003 221
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: MODB US 003 223
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: DNP3 003 230
0: No
[spacer] COMM 1: COUR IER 103 041
0: No
Parameter Address
InterMiCOM COMM 3: Res et No.t lg. er r.EX T 006 054
interface
0: No
[spacer] COMM 3: Com m unicati ons fault 120 043
0: No
[spacer] COMM 3: Com m . link fai lur e 120 044
0: No
[spacer] COMM 3: Lim.ex ce e d.,te l.e rr . 120 045
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-43

Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Com m . link fault y 105 180
Communication
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is
missing or there is a non-plausible parameter setting.
[spacer] IEC: Com m and block. EX T 104 086
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Sig./me as. block E XT 104 089
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Multip le ctr l le ve l 221 124
0: No
[spacer]
Display when control from multiple levels is allowed, i.e. (225 208) L OC: Fc t.
ass ig n. L/R k e y is set to R & L <-> L, and relay is in 'R&L' mode.
[spacer] IEC: Com m and blocki ng 104 087
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Control res erv at io n 221 082
0: No
[spacer]
Display when a client has made a reservation to control an external device
(“select” for control by control mode “select before operate”).
[spacer] IEC: Sig./me as.val.block. 104 090
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Control b lock e d 221 126
0: No Fig. 3-26, (p. 3-50)
[spacer]
Display when control via communication is blocked, i.e. (221 125) IEC: Ctrl
blocke d us er is set to Yes.
[spacer] IEC: Port A/ B blocke d 104 075
0: No
[spacer]
Display when Port A for SEB or Port A&B for REB is blocked.
[spacer] IEC: Port C blocked 104 076
0: No
[spacer]
Display when Port C is blocked.
[spacer] IEC: Port A fault y 104 197
0: No
[spacer] IEC: Port B f aulty 104 198
0: No
[spacer] IEC: IEC 61850 E D2 104 081
0: No
8-44 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] IEC: IEC 61850 E D1 104 082
0: No
[spacer] IEC: IEC 60870-5 -1 04 104 083
0: No
[spacer] IEC: VLAN e nable d 104 196
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-45

Parameter Address
Generic Object GOOSE: IE D link f ault y 107 250
Orientated
Substation Events
0: No
[spacer]
Display which appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured
GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device
will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out
independent of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time period at
which the next state signal must be received.
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D01-16 link ed 107 251
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D97-112 link e d 112 204
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: IE D113-12 8 link e d 112 205
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Or dRun01-1 6 link ed 107 248
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Or dRun17-3 2 link ed 107 249
2:
[spacer] GOOSE: Uniqueness 1- 16 007 217
[spacer] GOOSE: Uniqueness 17-3 2 007 218
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 01 faul ty 111 100
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-46 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-47

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-48 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-49

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-50 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-51

Parameter Address
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 100 fault y 111 199
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-52 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] GOOSE: Input 11 8 fault y 111 217
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 posit ion 109 000
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-53

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-54 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-55

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-56 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-57

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 positi on 114 012
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
8-58 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-59

Parameter Address
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
0: Interm. pos.
[spacer]
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external
device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 ope n 109 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-60 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-61

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-62 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-63

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-64 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 open 114 013
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-65

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-66 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of
an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 close d 109 002
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-67

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-68 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-69

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-70 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-71

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 cl ose d 114 014
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-72 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state
of an external device.
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v01 int erm.pos 109 003
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-73

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-74 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-75

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-76 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-77

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-78 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] GOOSE: Ext .De v100 int e rm.po 114 015
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-79

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,
representing the state of an external device.
8-80 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Virtual Inputs VINP: I nput 1 fault y 115 080
0: No
[spacer] VINP: I nput 2 fault y 115 081
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-81

Parameter Address
[spacer] VINP: I nput 20 f au lt y 115 099
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-82 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-83

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
IRIG‑B interface IRIGB: EB R S ynchr on. r e ady 023 203
0: No Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-57)
[spacer] IRIGB: Enabled 023 201
0: No Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-57)
[spacer] IRIGB: S ynchron. re ady 023 202
0: No Fig. 3-32, (p. 3-57)
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Re set Tm ax E X T

006 076
0: No
[spacer] MEASI: E nable d 035 008
0: No Fig. 3-35, (p. 3-62)

Fig. 3-43, (p. 3-71)
[spacer] MEASI: O pe n circ. P T10 0 040 190
0: No Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-67)
[spacer] MEASI: O ve rload 20 mA input 040 191
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer] MEASI: O pe n circ. 2 0 mA inp. 040 192
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
8-84 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Block outp.r el. EXT 040 014
output
0: No
[spacer] OUTP: Re s e t latch. E XT 040 015
0: No
[spacer] OUTP: Outp . relay s blocke d 021 015
1: Yes Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-69)
[spacer] OUTP: Latching res et 040 088
0: No Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-69)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-85

Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Output e nabl ed E XT 036 085
output
1: Yes
[spacer] MEASO: Rese t output EX T 036 087
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Enab led 037 102
0: No
[spacer] MEASO: Output r ese t 037 117
0: No Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-72)
[spacer] MEASO: Valid BC D value 037 050
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MEASO: 1-digit b it 0 (B C D) 037 051
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MEASO: 10-digit bit 0 (BC D) 037 055
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MEASO: 100-dig. bit 0 (BC D) 037 059
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MEASO: 100-dig. bit 1 (BC D) 037 060
0: No Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014
0: No Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-1 out put 037 118
0: No Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
[spacer] MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015
0: No
8-86 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MEASO: Value A- 2 out put 037 119
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-87

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: Dis able prot ect . E XT 003 026
2: Not configured
[spacer] MAIN: Enable prot ect . E XT 003 027
2: Not configured
[spacer] MAIN: General re s et E XT 005 255
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 1 E XT 005 209
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Group res et 2 E XT 005 252
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. EX T 065 001
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t latch.tr ip E X T 040 138
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. c E XT 005 210
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB open A E XT 044 131
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB close d A EXT 036 051
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-114)
[spacer] MAIN: CB close d B E XT 031 030
0: No Fig. 3-77, (p. 3-114)
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 faulty E XT 221 086
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 faulty E XT 221 090
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocking 1 E X T 040 060
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocking 2 E X T 040 061
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block. trip cmd. E X T 036 045
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block. M -t ri p EXT 038 050
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block. R -t ri p EXT 038 051
0: No
8-88 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Block. B-tr ip E X T 038 052
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Block.rush re s tr .E X T 039 169
0: No
[spacer]
Inrush stabilization may be blocked using this setting.
[spacer] MAIN: Block. harm.bl k. E X T 021 073
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip cmd1 E XT 039 054
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip cmd1 E XT 039 055
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p cmd1 E X T 039 107
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip cmd2 E XT 039 056
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vr e f E XT 036 086
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip cmd2 E XT 039 057
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p cmd2 E X T 039 108
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.trip cmd. EXT 039 053
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Paralle l tr ip EX T 037 019
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. E X T 041 022
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer] MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.e nabl. EXT 041 023
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Manual close E XT 036 047
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode EXT 037 070
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s witc hing E X T 003 096
0: Standard time
[spacer] MAIN: Min-puls e c lock EXT 060 060
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-89

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Healthy 060 001
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the protection unit is operational. By default this signal is linked to
LED: F ct.ass ig. H 1 gre e n.
[spacer] MAIN: Tim e s ynchr oniz ed 009 109
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Blocked/fault y 004 065
1: Yes Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-113)
[spacer] MAIN: Protect. not r e ady 004 060
1: Yes Fig. 3-76, (p. 3-113)
[spacer] MAIN: Tes t m ode 037 071
0: No Fig. 3-95, (p. 3-133)
[spacer] MAIN: Prot. ex t. e nable d 003 028
0: No Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-106)
[spacer] MAIN: Prot. ex t. dis able d 038 046
1: Yes Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-106)
[spacer] MAIN: Trip cm d. block ed 021 013
1: Yes Fig. 3-85, (p. 3-122)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip b locked 039 050
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip b lock e d 039 051
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip blocke d 039 052
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer] MAIN: Latch. trip c. res et 040 139
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip command 035 071
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip com mand 1 039 011
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip com mand 1 039 012
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip command 1 039 013
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip com mand 2 039 058
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip com mand 2 039 059
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
8-90 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip command 2 039 060
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer] MAIN: Gen. t rip signal 036 251
0: No Fig. 3-86, (p. 3-122)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip s ignal 1 039 101
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip s ignal 1 039 103
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip signal 1 039 105
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer] MAIN: M-trip s ignal 2 039 102
0: No Fig. 3-82, (p. 3-119)
[spacer] MAIN: R-trip s ignal 2 039 104
0: No Fig. 3-83, (p. 3-120)
[spacer] MAIN: B-t r ip signal 2 039 106
0: No Fig. 3-84, (p. 3-121)
[spacer] MAIN: Final trip 038 103
0: No Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-123)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. trip cmd e nabl. 039 080
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip si gnal 1 039 081
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip si gnal 1 039 082
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p signal 1 039 083
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. M-trip si gnal 2 039 084
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. R-trip si gnal 2 039 085
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. B-t ri p signal 2 039 098
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. cl. cmd.enabl. 039 113
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e command 037 068
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer] MAIN: Clos e command 037 009
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-91

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: General star ting 036 000
0: No Fig. 3-80, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] MAIN: St art. PIR M -tr ip 039 014
0: No Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] MAIN: St art. PIR R -tr ip 039 015
0: No Fig. 3-81, (p. 3-117)
[spacer] MAIN: Rush re straint r eady 041 024
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Rush re str.t riggere d 041 025
0: No Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)
[spacer] MAIN: Harm.b locking ready 021 016
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: HARM. blk . t rigge re d 021 011
0: No Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
[spacer] MAIN: I(3fn) s tarti ng 023 253
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Fault forward 036 018
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] MAIN: Fault backward 036 019
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] MAIN: tVmemory act iv e 040 034
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Load flow for ward 039 076
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Load flow back wards 039 077
0: No Fig. 3-62, (p. 3-99)
[spacer] MAIN: Enable cont rol 221 058
1: Yes Fig. 3-276, (p. 3-335)
[spacer] MAIN: Sub st. interl. act . 221 000
0: No Fig. 3-276, (p. 3-335)
[spacer] MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001
0: No Fig. 3-276, (p. 3-335)
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. b lock . 1 act iv e 221 015
0: No Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-112)
8-92 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Fct. b lock . 2 act iv e 221 023
0: No Fig. 3-74, (p. 3-112)
[spacer] MAIN: Mon. mot. driv es t r . 221 056
0: No Fig. 3-289, (p. 3-352)
[spacer] MAIN: Interlock e qu. viol. 221 018
0: No Fig. 3-277, (p. 3-336)
[spacer] MAIN: CB tr ip inte rnal 221 006
0: No Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-126)

Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-148)
Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-150)
Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-151)
[spacer] MAIN: CB tr ipped 221 016
0: No Fig. 3-89, (p. 3-126)
[spacer] MAIN: DEV op.time ex ce e de d 221 110
0: No
[spacer]
In the case of direct motor control by motor relay K200 this fault signal is issued
(as a group signal) when no positive position signal (status signal) has been
received from the external device after it has been issued a close command and
the set running time-delay has elapsed.
[spacer] MAIN: Chatt.s uppr . st arte d 221 121
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the chatter suppression has started.
[spacer] MAIN: St artcm dt ime e xce e d. 221 112
0: No Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
[spacer]
If the monitoring, set by D EV01 : St artC mdTime superv. (or
DEV02: S tartCmdTi me superv . etc.), is active then an exceeded timer is
flagged by this logic state signal.
[spacer] MAIN: Shunt t rip ove rr un 221 114
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that any of the operated switchgear units happens to end up in a faulty
position after termination of the switching command.
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 act iv e 221 017
0: No Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-116)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 s tore d 221 054
0: No Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-116)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 act iv e 221 053
0: No Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-116)
[spacer] MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 s tore d 221 055
0: No Fig. 3-79, (p. 3-116)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-93

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Comm unication e rr or 221 019
1: Yes Fig. 3-90, (p. 3-127)
[spacer] MAIN: SI com m u. dist urbe d 221 031
1: Yes
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . f r. comm.inte r f 221 101
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Cmd . f r. electr .c trl 221 103
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Comm and from HM I 221 102
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device se le ction key 006 001
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device OPEN k e y 006 002
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Device CLOS E k e y 006 003
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Local/Re mo te ke y 006 004
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Dumm y entry 004 129
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Without func tion 060 000
0: No
[spacer] MAIN: Without func tion 061 000
0: No
8-94 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Parameter subset PSS: Control via user EX T 036 101
selection
0: No
[spacer] PSS: Activate PS 1 EX T 065 002
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSS: Control via user 036 102
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer] PSS: Ex t.s el.param.s ubse t 003 061
0: No param. subset sel Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer] PSS: PS 1 activat ed ext . 036 094
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer] PSS: Actual p ar am. s ubs e t 003 062
1: Parameter subset 1 Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
[spacer] PSS: PS 1 active 036 090
1: Yes Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
0: No Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-95

Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: C B faulty E X T 098 072
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
0: No Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-136)
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
0: No Fig. 3-97, (p. 3-136)
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm restart e x ec. 041 202
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t 093 024
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st./ SW update 093 025
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B locking /HW fail ure 090 019
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware clock fai l. 093 040
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: +15V s upply faulty 093 081
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule s lot 1 096 100
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-96 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module s lot 5 096 104
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-97

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule C omm 096 125
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot 1 097 000
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: D e fe ct.module slot10 097 009
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A DP R fault y 093 070
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A RAM fault y 093 071
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y 093 110
0: No
8-98 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I RIGB faulty 093 117
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal t erminat ion 093 030
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call 093 031
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref. 093 033
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt 093 012
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt. fail.RAM 093 026
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
0: No Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-140)
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um DM OD 093 023
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block . 093 015
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ty pe of bay 096 122
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-99

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. S W ve r s .C OMM1 093 075
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC 093 079
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nom not adjust able 093 118
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip Vref 098 011
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong s et. DIST Rg1 098 046
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong s et. DIST Rg1' 098 047
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong s et. DIST X/ R 097 023
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
8-100 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd er volt age 098 009
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: F F, V tri gge r ed 098 021
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M .circ. V,Vref fl ty. 098 023
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. V f aul ty 098 017
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M .circ. Vre f fault y 098 255
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M atch.fact. DF RSTinv. 098 033
0: No Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer] SFMO N: M atch.fct.I M CMONinv 098 059
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y 098 005
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas .circ .V,I fault y 098 016
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C ommunic.fault C OMM 3 093 140
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware e r ror COM M3 093 143
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error 098 034
0: No Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-290)
[spacer] SFMO N: C omm.link fail.C OMM3 093 142
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: L im .e x ce ed.,t e l.e r r. 093 141
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: T elecom. faulty / PSI G 098 006
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM 098 035
0: No Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong S ett ing F .loc 098 200
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M 098 020
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-101

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: C B No. C B op. > 098 066
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B rem . No. C B op. < 098 067
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣItrip > 098 068
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣItrip**2 > 098 069
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> A 098 070
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> B 098 071
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng A-1 093 114
0: No Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC 093 116
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
0: No Fig. 3-40, (p. 3-67)
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer] SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp. 098 026
0: No Fig. 3-38, (p. 3-65)
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
0: No Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 098 053
0: No
[spacer] SFMO N: O utput 30 ( t) 098 054
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-102 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Res e t record. EX T 005 213
recording
0: No Fig. 3-93, (p. 3-131)
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Res et record. E XT 005 240
recording
0: No
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: R e s et rec ord. EXT 005 241
0: No
[spacer] OL_RC: R e cord. in progr es s 035 003
0: No Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-143)
[spacer] OL_RC: Over l. me m. ove rfl ow 035 007
0: No Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-144)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-103

Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: Block fault l oc. EX T 011 225
acquisition
0: No
[spacer]
Calculation of the fault location is blocked. The parameters FT_DA: Fault
location, FT_DA: Fault locat ion A, F T_D A: Fault location B are
set to Not measured.
Note: FT _DA: Fault locat ion A, F T_D A: Fa ult location B are
available only with the settings MAIN: Fe ede r mode = Autotransformer
feed and
MAIN: Fee de r mode = Single feed w. sum I.
[spacer] FT_DA: Wrong s et ting F. loc 008 191
0: No
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigg er E X T 036 089
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Res et record. E XT 005 243
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Trigg er 037 076
0: No Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-154)
[spacer] FT_RC: I> triggere d 035 013
0: No
[spacer] FT_RC: Record. in progre ss 035 000
0: No Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-154)
[spacer] FT_RC: Syst e m d is t urb. runn 035 004
0: No Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-154)
[spacer] FT_RC: Fault m em. ov e rf low 035 001
0: No Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-156)
[spacer] FT_RC: Faulty time t ag 035 002
0: No
8-104 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Distance protection DIST: Contr ol vi a use r EXT 038 171
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Z1' enable d E XT 038 067
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Blocking t 1 E XT 039 163
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Blocking t 2S EXT 039 164
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Blocking t 2L E XT 039 165
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Blocking t W PC EXT 039 168
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Zone e xtens ion E XT 036 046
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Enabled 036 104
0: No Fig. 3-113, (p. 3-158)
[spacer] DIST: Not ready 041 086
0: No Fig. 3-117, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DIST: Zone 1 not r eady 038 034
1: Yes Fig. 3-115, (p. 3-159)
1: Yes Fig. 3-116, (p. 3-160)
1: Yes
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-105

Parameter Address
1: Yes
[spacer] DIST: di/d t not r e ady , Z2 039 030
1: Yes Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-177)
[spacer] DIST: du/ dt not ready, Z 2 039 031
1: Yes Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-177)
[spacer] DIST: dphi/ dt not re ady ,Z2 039 032
1: Yes Fig. 3-130, (p. 3-177)
1: Yes
1: Yes
1: Yes
1: Yes
1: Yes
1: Yes
[spacer] DIST: WPC not ready 039 156
1: Yes Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] DIST: Wrong se tt ing DIST 041 085
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
[spacer] DIST: tVme m ory act iv e 024 220
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Contr ol via use r 038 172
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
[spacer] DIST: Z1' ext . e nabled 038 078
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
8-106 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Z1 enabled 039 066
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
[spacer] DIST: Z1' enable d 039 067
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
0: No Fig. 3-121, (p. 3-164)
[spacer] DIST: WPC enable d 039 155
0: No Fig. 3-134, (p. 3-181)
[spacer] DIST: Z1 extended ex ter n. 036 140
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Zone e xtens ion S OT F 036 134
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Zone e xtens ion HS R 036 103
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Zone e xtens ion T D R 038 022
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal 036 009
0: No Fig. 3-137, (p. 3-183)
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal Z1/ t1 039 016
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175)

Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-210)
Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-212)
Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal Z1,ze 035 074
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-107

Parameter Address
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal Z2/ t2 S 039 017
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-211)
Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-212)
Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal Z2/ t2 L 039 018
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer] DIST: U< signal WP C 019 073
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Dis t De lta 019 074
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Dis t Test 019 075
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Trip s ignal WP C 039 159
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer] DIST: I> s tarting 039 001
0: No Fig. 3-118, (p. 3-161)
[spacer] DIST: Z1 (Z1,ze ) s tart ing 039 003
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Z2 starting 039 005
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
8-108 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Z1' (Z1',ze ) star ting 039 004
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
[spacer] DIST: Z2' s tarti ng 039 006
0: No Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)

Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DIST: WPC s tart ing 039 158
0: No Fig. 3-135, (p. 3-182)
[spacer] DIST: Starting 036 135
0: No Fig. 3-123, (p. 3-167)

Fig. 3-124, (p. 3-168)
Fig. 3-126, (p. 3-172)
Fig. 3-127, (p. 3-173)
Fig. 3-136, (p. 3-182)
[spacer] DIST: Forwar d fault 036 138
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Backwards fault 036 139
0: No
[spacer] DIST: Dir ect. using Vme as 038 045
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DIST: Dir ect. using me mory 038 047
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DIST: Forw. w/o me asure m. 038 044
0: No Fig. 3-119, (p. 3-162)
[spacer] DIST: di/d t s tar ting, Z2 039 007
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
[spacer] DIST: dv/dt s tar t ing, Z2 039 008
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
[spacer] DIST: dphi/ dt s tart ing, Z2 039 142
0: No Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-109

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DIST: t1 elaps e d 036 026
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer] DIST: t1,ze elaps e d 035 079
0: No Fig. 3-128, (p. 3-175)
[spacer] DIST: t2S elaps e d 039 009
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
[spacer] DIST: t2L elaps ed 039 010
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
8-110 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No Fig. 3-129, (p. 3-176)

Fig. 3-178, (p. 3-224)
Fig. 3-179, (p. 3-225)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-111

Parameter Address
High Impedance pro‐ DELT A: B lock. tDe lt a E XT

038 053
tection
0: No
[spacer]
Blocking of timer stage DE LTA: t Del ta PSx.
[spacer] DELT A: E nable d 038 054
0: No Fig. 3-138, (p. 3-184)
[spacer]
Indicates that high impedance protection is switched on.
[spacer] DELT A: Not ready 038 055
1: Yes Fig. 3-139, (p. 3-185)
[spacer]
Indicates that high impedance protection is not ready (i.e. a blocking condition is
apparent).
[spacer] DELT A: D elta I ext ende d 038 066
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Indicates that the harmonics stabilization feature has detected a load variation.
[spacer] DELT A: D elta I blocked 038 068
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Indicates that the sudden current change criterion is blocked.
[spacer] DELT A: I min s tar t ing 038 059
0: No Fig. 3-140, (p. 3-186)
[spacer]
The full-cycle r.m.s. value of the current has exceeded the set minimum current
value.
[spacer] DELT A: D elta I s tarti ng 038 060
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-191)
[spacer]
Indicates that the sudden current change criterion is met. This signal is used as
a starting for high impedance protection.
[spacer] DELT A: D elta Phi st art ing 038 063
0: No Fig. 3-142, (p. 3-188)
[spacer]
This signal is issued if the angle (with sudden angle change monitoring enabled)
changes by more than the value set for DE LT A: Delta Phi PSx within a
defined sampling interval.
[spacer] DELT A: I (3fn) s tart ing 038 076
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Indicates that the ratio of the third harmonic current component to the
fundamental has exceeded the starting value set for DELT A: I(3fn)/ I( fn )
PSx.
8-112 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] DELT A: I (5fn) s tart ing 038 077
0: No Fig. 3-143, (p. 3-189)
[spacer]
Indicates that the ratio of the fifth harmonic current component to the
fundamental has exceeded the starting value set for DELT A: I(5fn)/ I(fn )
PSx.
[spacer] DELT A: X- release 038 065
0: No Fig. 3-141, (p. 3-187)
[spacer]
Indicates that the measured reactance value is within the set limits.
[spacer] DELT A: T rip s ignal 038 056
0: No Fig. 3-144, (p. 3-191)

Fig. 3-180, (p. 3-226)
[spacer]
Trip signal by the high impedance protection function.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-113

Parameter Address
Measuring-circuit MCM ON: Blocking V< EX T 038 033
monitoring
0: No
[spacer] MCM ON: Blocking FF E XT 038 037
0: No
[spacer] MCM ON: Blocking FF, Vre f E XT 018 099
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer]
This parameter allows to block the “Fuse Failure” monitoring of the reference
voltage via binary input (e. g. from circuit breaker auxiliary contacts) or
programmable logic.
[spacer] MCM ON: Enabled 040 094
0: No Fig. 3-145, (p. 3-192)

Fig. 3-146, (p. 3-193)
Fig. 3-232, (p. 3-286)
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as . circ . I faul ty 040 087
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as . volt age o.k . 038 048
0: No Fig. 3-151, (p. 3-198)
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as . circ . V faulty 038 023
0: No Fig. 3-152, (p. 3-198)
[spacer] MCM ON: M e as .circ.V, I fault y 037 020
0: No
[spacer] MCM ON: Und ervolt age 038 038
0: No Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
[spacer] MCM ON: FF, V t rigge re d 035 081
0: No Fig. 3-149, (p. 3-196)
[spacer] MCM ON: FF, Vr e f tr iggere d 038 100
0: No Fig. 3-150, (p. 3-197)
[spacer] MCM ON: M is match scal.Iplaus 040 129
0: No Fig. 3-147, (p. 3-193)
8-114 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Backup overcurrent- BUOC: Blocking t I> EX T

038 127
time protection
0: No
[spacer] BUOC: Blocking t I>> EX T 038 128
0: No
[spacer] BUOC: Enabled 040 093
0: No Fig. 3-153, (p. 3-199)
[spacer] BUOC: Not r e ady 040 030
1: Yes Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-199)
[spacer] BUOC: Active 037 021
0: No Fig. 3-154, (p. 3-199)
[spacer] BUOC: St arting I> 036 013
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] BUOC: St arting I>> 036 115
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
[spacer] BUOC: Tr ip s ignal I> 036 014
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)

Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
[spacer] BUOC: Tr ip s ignal I>> 036 116
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)

Fig. 3-183, (p. 3-229)
[spacer] BUOC: Gen. t rip signal 036 122
0: No Fig. 3-155, (p. 3-200)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-115

Parameter Address
Switch on to fault SOT F : Blocking EXT 036 098
protection
0: No
[spacer] SOT F : Par. ARC r unning EX T 039 063
0: No
[spacer] SOT F : Enab led 040 069
0: No Fig. 3-156, (p. 3-201)
[spacer] SOT F : Z1 extended 035 076
0: No Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-202)
[spacer] SOT F : tManual-close runn. 036 063
0: No Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-202)
[spacer] SOT F : Trip s ignal 036 064
0: No Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-202)
8-116 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG1: Enable E XT 037 025
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSIG1: Disab le EXT 037 026
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSIG1: Blocking E XT 036 049
0: No
[spacer] PSIG1: Telec.f ault y E X T 004 064
0: No
[spacer] PSIG1: Test te lecom. EX T 036 038
0: No
[spacer] PSIG1: R eceive EXT 036 048
0: No
[spacer] PSIG1: Weak inf. trigg. E XT 043 062
0: No
[spacer] PSIG1: Block. weak inf. E XT 036 255
0: No
[spacer] PSIG1: Enabled 015 008
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-204)
[spacer] PSIG1: Ext./ use r e nable d 037 023
1: Yes Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-204)
[spacer] PSIG1: R ead y 037 027
0: No Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-204)
[spacer] PSIG1: Telecom. fault y 036 060
0: No Fig. 3-161, (p. 3-208)
[spacer] PSIG1: Test te lecom. chann. 034 016
0: No Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] PSIG1: Trans ient block ing 037 255
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] PSIG1: S end 012 243
0: No Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-205)

Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] PSIG1: S end s ignal 036 035
0: No Fig. 3-159, (p. 3-205)

Fig. 3-174, (p. 3-218)
[spacer] PSIG1: R es e t s end timer 019 148
0: No Fig. 3-170, (p. 3-214)
[spacer] PSIG1: Echo s tarti ng 019 227
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-217)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-117

Parameter Address
[spacer] PSIG1: S end Echo 019 228
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] PSIG1: Echo s tarte d 019 229
0: No Fig. 3-173, (p. 3-217)
[spacer] PSIG1: R eceive signal 006 036
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] PSIG1: S tart s ignal 019 183
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] PSIG1: Trip signal 038 007
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)

Fig. 3-164, (p. 3-210)
Fig. 3-166, (p. 3-211)
Fig. 3-168, (p. 3-212)
[spacer] PSIG1: Block s ignal 019 226
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)
[spacer] PSIG1: Weak inf. re ady 019 231
0: No Fig. 3-172, (p. 3-216)
[spacer] PSIG1: V< t rigge red 019 230
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] PSIG1: Weak infe ed s tart . 043 064
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] PSIG1: WI T rip Signal 019 232
0: No Fig. 3-171, (p. 3-215)
[spacer] PSIG1: Z1 Ext end ed 019 233
0: No Fig. 3-160, (p. 3-207)
8-118 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG2: Enable E XT 020 071
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSIG2: Disab le EXT 020 072
2: Not configured
[spacer] PSIG2: Blocking E XT 024 096
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Telec.f ault y E X T 019 236
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Test te lecom. EX T 020 066
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: R eceive EXT 020 067
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Weak inf. trigg. E XT 020 076
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Block. weak inf. E XT 020 069
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Enabled 019 255
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Ext./ use r e nable d 020 070
1: Yes
[spacer] PSIG2: R ead y 020 073
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Telecom. fault y 020 068
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Test te lecom. chann. 020 064
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Trans ient block ing 020 074
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: S end 019 238
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: S end s ignal 020 065
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: R es e t s end timer 020 038
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Echo s tarti ng 020 057
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: S end Ech o 020 058
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-119

Parameter Address
[spacer] PSIG2: Echo s tarte d 020 059
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: R eceive signal 019 237
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: S tart s ignal 020 051
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Trip signal 020 075
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Block s ignal 020 056
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Weak inf. re ady 020 061
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: V< t rigge red 020 060
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Weak infe ed s tart . 020 077
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: WI T rip Signal 020 062
0: No
[spacer] PSIG2: Z1 Ext end ed 020 063
0: No
8-120 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: Enable EXT 037 010
control
2: Not configured
[spacer] ARC: Disable EXT 037 011
2: Not configured
[spacer] ARC: Blocking E XT 036 050
0: No
[spacer] ARC: R ese t counte rs E X T 005 244
0: No
[spacer] ARC: T est HS R EXT 037 017
0: No
[spacer] ARC: C B d rive ready EX T 004 066
0: No
[spacer] ARC: General s tarti ng EXT 037 096
0: No
[spacer] ARC: R ese t recl.t ime 2 E X T 036 223
0: No
[spacer] ARC: Enable d 015 064
0: No Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-220)
[spacer] ARC: Ex t./us er enable d 037 013
1: Yes Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-220)
[spacer] ARC: R eady 004 068
0: No Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-221)
[spacer] ARC: Not ready 037 008
1: Yes Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-221)
[spacer] ARC: Lock f. Gen.star ting 036 229
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Blocke d 004 069
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer] ARC: Blocke d by I> 037 126
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer] ARC: Block. time running 037 004
0: No Fig. 3-177, (p. 3-222)
[spacer] ARC: ( Re)close r e que st 037 077
0: No
[spacer] ARC: T est HS R 034 023
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-236)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-121

Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: R eject tes t HS R 036 055
0: No Fig. 3-188, (p. 3-236)
[spacer] ARC: C ycle running 037 000
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: S tart by LOGIC 037 078
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-230)

Fig. 3-194, (p. 3-243)
[spacer] ARC: S ig.inte rr. CB tr ip 036 040
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Op er. tim e 1 running 037 005
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Op er. tim e 2 running 037 065
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Dead tim e running 037 002
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Dead tim e HSR r unn. 037 067
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: M ax . d ead time runn. 037 069
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Dead tim e TDR r unn. 037 003
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t ens ion HSR 036 226
0: No
[spacer] ARC: Zone e x t ens ion TDR 036 227
0: No
[spacer] ARC: ( Re)close s ignal HSR 037 007
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: ( Re)close s ignal TD R 037 006
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: R ecl. t ime 1 running 036 042
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: R ecl. t ime 2 running 036 221
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: R ese t reclaim time 2 036 222
0: No
[spacer] ARC: Def. re cl.time runn. 036 228
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
8-122 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] ARC: R eclosure s uc ce ss ful 036 062
0: No Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
[spacer] ARC: T rip s ignal 039 099
0: No Fig. 3-185, (p. 3-231)

Fig. 3-192, (p. 3-242)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-123

Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: R es et counter s E XT 006 074
synchronism check
0: No
[spacer] ASC: Enab le EXT 037 049
2: Not configured
[spacer] ASC: Disable EXT 037 061
2: Not configured
[spacer] ASC: Blocking EXT 037 048
0: No
[spacer] ASC: Te s t AR clos e r . E XT 000 106
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode automatic reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t M C close r. EXT 037 064
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a test triggering of the ASC in operating
mode manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Enab l.close re qu.E X T 037 063
1: Yes
[spacer] ASC: MC Close r eques t EXT 037 062
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: AR close re que st E X T 008 236
0: No
[spacer]
Close request via external signal for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
automatic reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Ext./us e r enabled 037 092
1: Yes Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-246)
[spacer] ASC: Enab le d 018 024
0: No Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-246)
[spacer] ASC: Blocked 038 018
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
[spacer] ASC: R eady 037 079
0: No Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
[spacer] ASC: Not re ady 037 082
1: Yes Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
8-124 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] ASC: Te s t AR clos e r equ. 008 240
0: No Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
[spacer] ASC: Te s t M C clos e re qu. 034 019
0: No Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-249)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a test triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: AR Clos e r e ques t 008 239
0: No Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-248)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
[spacer] ASC: MC Close r eques t 034 018
0: No Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-249)
[spacer]
Signaling of a close request for a triggering of the ASC in operating mode
manual reclosure.
[spacer] ASC: Cycle running 038 019
0: No Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-250)

Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-261)
[spacer] ASC: Op erat.t ime running 037 093
0: No Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-250)
[spacer] ASC: Clos e e nable 037 083
0: No Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-253)

Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-255)
[spacer] ASC: Clos e e nable,vol t.ch 037 085
0: No Fig. 3-202, (p. 3-253)

Fig. 3-203, (p. 3-255)
[spacer] ASC: Clos e e nable,sy nc. ch 037 084
0: No Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)

Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
[spacer] ASC: Clos e re je ct ion 037 086
0: No Fig. 3-200, (p. 3-250)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-125

Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOC: Blocking t I>H E X T 041 062
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOC: Blocking t I> EX T 041 060
0: No
[spacer] DTOC: Blocking t I>> EX T 041 061
0: No
[spacer] DTOC: Enabled 040 120
0: No Fig. 3-210, (p. 3-263)
[spacer] DTOC: Not r e ady 040 027
1: Yes
[spacer] DTOC: St arting I >H 035 022
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
[spacer] DTOC: St arting I > 035 020
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)

Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: St arting I >> 035 021
0: No Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)

Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: tI> e lap sed 040 010
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: tI>> elap se d 040 106
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: Tr ip s ignal tI>H 040 076
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
[spacer] DTOC: Tr ip s ignal tI> 041 020
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
8-126 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOC: Tr ip s ignal tI>> 040 011
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-211, (p. 3-264)
Fig. 3-213, (p. 3-266)
[spacer] DTOC: Fault I> forward 035 137
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Fault I>> forward 035 147
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Fault I> back ward 035 140
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Fault I>> back ward 035 148
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Power flow I>for w. 035 223
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Power flow I>>forw. 035 227
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Power flow I>bac kw. 035 224
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Power flow I>>bac kw. 035 228
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: I> For w. w/ o me as. 041 198
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: I>> For w. w/o meas . 041 199
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Direct. using Vmeas 036 137
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Direct. using memory 036 136
0: No Fig. 3-214, (p. 3-267)
[spacer] DTOC: Me as . I> non- dire ct. 035 077
0: No Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-268)
[spacer] DTOC: Me as . I>> non- direc t 035 078
0: No
[spacer] DTOC: Dir.m eas. I> blocke d 035 080
0: No Fig. 3-215, (p. 3-268)
[spacer] DTOC: Dir.m eas. I>> block. 035 133
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-127

Parameter Address
Definite-time over‐ DTOCA: Blocking EX T 130 079
current protection
0: No
[spacer] DTOCB: B locking EX T 130 099
0: No
[spacer]
Function groups DTOCx are blocked.
Note: Blocking DTOCx via binary input signal can be required, e.g. for the case
that the overcurrent supervision is needed only in case of disconnected
autotransformers.
[spacer] DTOCA: Blocking t I> EX T 130 066
0: No
[spacer] DTOCA: Blocking t I> > EX T 130 068
0: No
[spacer] DTOCB: B locking t I> EX T 130 086
0: No
[spacer] DTOCB: B locking t I> > EX T 130 088
0: No
[spacer]
Blocking of DTOCx timer stage tI> or tI>>, respectively.
[spacer] DTOCA: Enab led 130 073
0: No Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-269)
[spacer] DTOCB: E nabled 130 093
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the function group DTOCx is enabled.
[spacer] DTOCA: Not re ady 130 076
1: Yes Fig. 3-216, (p. 3-269)
[spacer] DTOCB: Not ready 130 096
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the function group DTOCx is not ready.
Note: The function groups DTOCx are never ready with the setting
MAIN: Fe e de r m ode = Classic single feed.
[spacer] DTOCA: St arting I> 130 069
0: No Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCA: St arting I>> 130 070
0: No Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: S tar ting I> 130 089
0: No
8-128 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] DTOCB: S tar ting I>> 130 090
0: No
[spacer]
An overcurrent fault is detected by the function group DTOCx.
[spacer] DTOCA: tI> e lapse d 130 077
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCA: tI>> elapse d 130 078
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: tI > elapse d 130 097
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] DTOCB: tI >> e lapse d 130 098
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Signal that the DTOCx timer stage has elapsed.
[spacer] DTOCA: Trip s ignal t I> 130 071
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCA: Trip s ignal t I>> 130 072
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-217, (p. 3-270)
[spacer] DTOCB: T rip s ignal t I> 130 091
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer] DTOCB: T rip s ignal t I>> 130 092
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Trip signal from function group DTOCx. This signal can be assigned to the trip
commands (e.g. MAIN: Fc t.as g. M-t rip cmd1).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-129

Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMT: B lock. tIr e f> EX T

040 101
rent protection
0: No
[spacer] IDMT: E nabled 040 100
0: No Fig. 3-218, (p. 3-271)
[spacer] IDMT: S tar t ing Ir e f> 040 080
0: No Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer] IDMT: M eas.non-dire ct ional 041 007
0: No Fig. 3-227, (p. 3-281)
[spacer] IDMT: D ir. m e as. bloc ked 041 006
0: No Fig. 3-227, (p. 3-281)

Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] IDMT: Hold t ime running 040 053
0: No Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer] IDMT: M em ory cle ar 040 110
1: Yes Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer] IDMT: t I re f> elapse d 040 082
0: No Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)

Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer] IDMT: T rip s ignal tIre f> 040 084
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-223, (p. 3-276)
Fig. 3-225, (p. 3-279)
[spacer] IDMT: F ault forward 041 008
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
[spacer] IDMT: F ault backward 041 009
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)

Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] IDMT: Powe r flow forwar d 041 017
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
[spacer] IDMT: Powe r flow back ward 041 018
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
[spacer] IDMT: F orw. w/ o me asure m. 041 189
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct . us ing Vme as 041 015
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
8-130 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMT: D ire ct . us ing me mo ry 041 014
0: No Fig. 3-226, (p. 3-280)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-131

Parameter Address
Inverse-time overcur‐ IDMTA: B locking EXT

130 116
rent protection
0: No
[spacer] IDMTB : Blocking EXT 130 136
0: No
[spacer]
Function groups IDMTx are blocked.
Note: Blocking IDMTx via binary input signal can be required, e.g. for the case
that the overcurrent supervision is needed only in case of disconnected
autotransformers.
[spacer] IDMTA: B lock. tIre f> EX T 130 108
0: No Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : Block. t Ire f> E X T 130 128
0: No
[spacer]
Blocking of IDMTx timer stage tIref>.
[spacer] IDMTA: Enabled 130 109
0: No Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-283)

Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : Enab led 130 129
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the function group IDMTx is enabled.
[spacer] IDMTA: Not r e ady 130 117
1: Yes Fig. 3-229, (p. 3-283)

Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : Not ready 130 137
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the function group IDMTx is not ready.
Note: The function groups IDMTx are never ready with the setting
MAIN: Fee de r mode = Classic single feed.
[spacer] IDMTA: S tar ting I re f> 130 110
0: No Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : S tarting Iref> 130 130
0: No
[spacer]
An overcurrent fault is detected by the function group IDMTx.
[spacer] IDMTA: t Ir e f> ela pse d 130 112
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
8-132 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] IDMTB : t Iref> elapse d 130 132
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Signal that the DTOCx timer stage tIref> has elapsed.
[spacer] IDMTA: T r ip s ignal tIre f> 130 113
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : T rip s ignal tIre f> 130 133
0: No Fig. 3-181, (p. 3-227)

Fig. 3-182, (p. 3-228)
[spacer]
Trip signal from function group IDMTx. This signal can be assigned to the trip
commands (e.g. MAIN: Fc t.as g. M-t rip cmd1).
[spacer] IDMTA: Hold t ime running 130 114
0: No Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : Hold time r unning 130 134
0: No
[spacer]
Signal that the hold-time for IDMTx (see IDM TA: Hold time PSx,
IDMTB : Hold time P S x) is running.
[spacer] IDMTA: M e m ory cle ar 130 115
1: Yes Fig. 3-230, (p. 3-284)
[spacer] IDMTB : M em ory c le ar 130 135
1: Yes
[spacer]
Signal that the memory storing the sum of the starting times is clear.
Parameter Address
Defrost protection DFR ST : Blocking t EXT 041 206
0: No
[spacer] DFR ST : Enab led 041 203
0: No Fig. 3-231, (p. 3-285)

Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer] DFR ST : Starting 041 204
0: No Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer] DFR ST : Trip signal 041 205
0: No Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
[spacer] DFR ST : Mis mat ch 041 207
0: No Fig. 3-233, (p. 3-286)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-133

Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : Control v . use r E XT 038 169
protection
0: No
[spacer] THER M : B lock R e pli ca E XT 041 074
0: No
[spacer] THER M : R e s et re pli ca E XT 038 061
0: No
[spacer] THER M : CTA e rror EX T 038 062
0: No
[spacer] THER M : S ele ct 2 PL EXT 038 072
0: No
[spacer] THER M : S ele ct 3 PL EXT 038 074
0: No
[spacer] THER M : Enable d 040 068
0: No Fig. 3-234, (p. 3-287)
[spacer] THER M : Not r eady 040 035
1: Yes
[spacer] THER M : Control v ia use r 038 170
0: No
[spacer] THER M : 1 PL select. e xt e rn. 038 071
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
[spacer] THER M : 1 PL active 039 070
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
0: No Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
[spacer] THER M : R e s et re pli ca 039 061
0: No Fig. 3-239, (p. 3-294)
[spacer] THER M : S tar t ing k*Ire f> 041 108
0: No Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer] THER M : Warning 039 025
0: No Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
8-134 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] THER M : Within pre-t rip t ime 041 109
1: Yes Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer] THER M : Tr ip s ignal 039 020
0: No Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer] THER M : R e clos ur e block e d 039 024
0: No
[spacer] THER M : B uf fer empty 039 112
1: Yes Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
[spacer] THER M : CTA e rror 039 111
0: No Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-290)
[spacer] THER M : S et ting e rror,bl ock . 039 110
0: No Fig. 3-238, (p. 3-293)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-135

Parameter Address
Time-voltage protec‐ V<>: Blocking tV> E XT

041 068
tion
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV>> E XT 041 069
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV< E XT 041 070
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Blocking tV<< E XT 041 071
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Enable d 040 066
0: No Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-295)
[spacer] V<>: Ready 042 003
0: No Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-295)
[spacer] V<>: Not ready 042 004
0: No Fig. 3-240, (p. 3-295)
[spacer] V<>: General star ting 041 135
0: No
[spacer] V<>: Starting V> 041 030
0: No Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V>> 041 096
0: No Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer] V<>: tV> elaps e d 041 034
0: No Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer] V<>: tV>> elap se d 041 035
0: No Fig. 3-241, (p. 3-296)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V< 041 037
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: Starting V<< 041 099
0: No
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps e d 041 041
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elap se d 041 042
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps e d & Vmi n 041 026
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elap se d & Vmi n 041 066
0: No
8-136 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] V<>: tV< elaps . transient 042 023
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: tV<< elapse d t rans . 042 025
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: tV</ << elaps . t rans . 042 007
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: Fault V< 041 110
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
[spacer] V<>: Fault V<< 041 112
0: No Fig. 3-242, (p. 3-297)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-137

Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : R es e t me as.val. EXT 006 075
tection
0: No
[spacer] f<> : Blocking f1 E XT 042 103
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : Enable d 042 100
0: No Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-298)
[spacer] f<> : R ead y 042 101
0: No Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-298)
[spacer] f<> : Not ready 042 140
0: No Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-298)
[spacer] f<> : Blocked b y V< 042 102
0: No Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-111)

Fig. 3-243, (p. 3-298)
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f1 042 107
0: No Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f1/df1 042 108
0: No Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : De lta f1 t rigge red 042 109
0: No Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : De lta t1 e laps ed 042 110
0: No Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
[spacer] f<> : Trip signal f1 042 111
0: No Fig. 3-245, (p. 3-301)
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f2/df2 042 116
0: No
8-138 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] f<> : De lta f2 t ri gge red 042 117
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] f<> : S tarting f3 /df3 042 124
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-139

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF: Blocking EXT 038 058
failure protection
0: No
[spacer] CBF: C B1 failure 036 075
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: C B2 failure 036 076
0: No Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: Enable EXT 038 041
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF: Disable EXT 038 042
2: Not configured
[spacer] CBF: Enabled 040 055
0: No Fig. 3-246, (p. 3-303)
[spacer] CBF: Not r e ady 040 025
1: Yes Fig. 3-247, (p. 3-303)
[spacer] CBF: Ex t./ us er enabled 038 040
1: Yes
[spacer] CBF: M on. t. M- trip r unn. 036 066
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: M on. t. R- tr ip r unn. 036 110
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: C B S upe rv. S ignal 039 000
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: R -trip s ignal 039 022
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: B-t rip s ig nal 039 023
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: C B f ailure 036 017
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
[spacer] CBF: Failure M -tri p 039 021
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
8-140 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBF: Failure R -t ri p 036 056
0: No Fig. 3-248, (p. 3-304)

Fig. 3-249, (p. 3-305)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-141

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBM: Blocking EXT 044 128
0: No
[spacer] CBM: R e se t m eas .val . E XT 005 247
0: No
[spacer] CBM: Enabled 044 130
0: No Fig. 3-250, (p. 3-307)
[spacer] CBM: Blocked 044 199
0: No Fig. 3-256, (p. 3-314)
[spacer] CBM: C ycle running A 044 205
0: No
[spacer] CBM: C ycle running B 044 206
0: No
[spacer] CBM: S ig. No. CB op. > 044 135
0: No Fig. 3-254, (p. 3-313)
[spacer] CBM: S ig. R em . No .C B op.< 044 136
0: No Fig. 3-255, (p. 3-313)
[spacer] CBM: S ignal ΣItrip> 044 137
0: No
[spacer] CBM: S ignal ΣItrip**2> 044 138
0: No
[spacer] CBM: S ignal ΣI*t > 044 139
0: No
[spacer] CBM: t max > A 044 177
0: No
[spacer] CBM: t max > B 044 178
0: No
[spacer] CBM: C urr. flow e nded A 044 201
0: No
[spacer] CBM: C urr. flow e nded B 044 202
0: No
[spacer] CBM: S e tting e rro r C BM 044 204
0: No
8-142 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Limit value LIMIT : Enabled 040 074
monitoring
0: No Fig. 3-257, (p. 3-315)
[spacer] LIMIT : tI> elaps e d 004 062
0: No Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-316)
[spacer] LIMIT : tI>> elapse d 040 157
0: No Fig. 3-258, (p. 3-316)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA> elaps e d 040 232
0: No Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIA>> elapse d 040 233
0: No Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB> elapse d 040 234
0: No Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIB>> elaps e d 040 235
0: No Fig. 3-259, (p. 3-317)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIp laus /I dfr st > e lps 040 236
0: No Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-318)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIp laus /I dfr st >>elps 040 237
0: No Fig. 3-260, (p. 3-318)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV> e lapse d 040 140
0: No Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV>> e lapse d 040 141
0: No Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV< e lapse d 040 142
0: No Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV<< e lapse d 040 143
0: No Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV> & tV< elaps e d 040 144
0: No Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer] LIMIT : tV>>& tV<< e lapse d 040 145
0: No Fig. 3-261, (p. 3-319)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA> elapse d 040 240
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>> e lapse d 040 241
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA< elapse d 040 242
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-143

Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA<< e lapse d 040 243
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>& tVA< e lapse d 040 244
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVA>>& tVA< < e lapsed 040 245
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB> e laps ed 040 246
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>> e laps ed 040 247
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB< e laps ed 040 248
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB<< e laps ed 040 249
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>& tVB< el apse d 040 250
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tVB>>& tVB<< elapse d 040 251
0: No Fig. 3-262, (p. 3-320)
[spacer] LIMIT : tf> elaps e d 040 196
0: No Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer] LIMIT : tf>> elap se d 040 197
0: No Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer] LIMIT : tf< elaps e d 040 198
0: No Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer] LIMIT : tf<< elap se d 040 199
0: No Fig. 3-263, (p. 3-321)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting I DC ,lin> 040 180
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting I DC ,lin>> 040 181
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin> elaps ed 040 182
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin>> elaps ed 040 183
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting I DC ,lin< 040 184
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting I DC ,lin<< 040 185
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
8-144 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin< elaps ed 040 186
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIDC,lin<< elaps ed 040 187
0: No Fig. 3-264, (p. 3-322)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T > 040 170
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T >> 040 171
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT > elaps ed 040 172
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT >> elaps ed 040 173
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T < 040 174
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : St arting T << 040 175
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT < elaps ed 040 176
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : tT << elaps ed 040 177
0: No Fig. 3-265, (p. 3-323)
[spacer] LIMIT : tIPxx trigge re d 221 232
0: Not triggered
[spacer] LIMIT : tVPGxx t rigger e d 221 233
0: Not triggered
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-145

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Input 01 EXT

034 000
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Input 02 EXT 034 001
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-146 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-147

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Se t 1 EXT 034 051
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] LOGIC: Re s e t 1 EXT 034 059
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
2: Not configured
[spacer] LOGIC: 1 has been s et 034 067
0: No Fig. 3-266, (p. 3-325)
8-148 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: 1 se t e xte rnally 034 075
0: No Fig. 3-266, (p. 3-325)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Enabled 034 046
0: No Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 0 1 042 032
0: No Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 0 1 (t) 042 033
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-230)

Fig. 3-267, (p. 3-326)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-149

Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 02 042 034
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output 02 (t) 042 035
0: No Fig. 3-184, (p. 3-230)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-150 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-151

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-152 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-153

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-154 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-155

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-156 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-157

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-158 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-159

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output100 047 070
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output100 ( t ) 047 071
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-160 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] LOGIC: Output10 6 ( t ) 047 083
0: No
[spacer] LOGIC: Output10 7 047 084
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-161

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-162 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOG_2: Enable d

011 138
0: No Fig. 3-268, (p. 3-327)
[spacer] LOG_2: Out put 1 052 032
0: No Fig. 3-268, (p. 3-327)
[spacer] LOG_2: Out put 1 (t ) 052 033
0: No Fig. 3-268, (p. 3-327)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-163

Parameter Address
Real Timer TIM ER : M onday 014 139
0: No Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
[spacer] TIM ER : T ue sday 014 148
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : W edne sd ay 014 149
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : T hur s day 014 158
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : F riday 014 159
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : S atur day 014 168
0: No
[spacer] TIM ER : S unday 014 169
0: No Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
[spacer] TIM ER : T im e r s tage 1 015 006
0: No Fig. 3-275, (p. 3-332)
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-164 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Open s ignal E X T 210 030
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e d signal EXT 210 031
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Control st at e 210 018
0: Intermediate pos. Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
[spacer] DEV01: S witch. devi ce ope n 210 036
0: No Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
[spacer] DEV01: S witch.dev ice c los ed 210 037
0: No Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
[spacer] DEV01: De v. inte rm./flt .pos 210 038
0: No Fig. 3-279, (p. 3-339)

Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
[spacer] DEV01: Open command 210 028
0: No Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-345)
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e command 210 029
0: No Fig. 3-284, (p. 3-345)
[spacer] DEV01: Open cmd. rece iv e d 218 000
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Clos e cmd. re ce ive d 218 001
0: No
[spacer] DEV01: Warning op. count . 219 081
0: No Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-352)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-165

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the number of switching commands has exceeded the set limit
value.
Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: M el se c. t ime r 2 210 067
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: Control s tat e 210 068
[spacer] DEV02: S witch. d evi ce ope n 210 086
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: De v. interm./flt .pos 210 088
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV02: Open cm d. rece iv e d 218 002
0: No
0: No
8-166 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
[spacer] DEV03: M el se c. t ime r 3 210 117
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-167

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-168 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-169

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-170 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-171

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-172 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-173

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-174 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 01 250 032
0: No Fig. 3-294, (p. 3-358)
[spacer] ILOCK: Output 02 250 033
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-175

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Output of the respective equation of the interlocking logic.
These logic state signals are transmitted with the request for a switching
operation, and cyclically (according to the setting ILO CK: Cycle t
inte rl.che ck).
8-176 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Single-pole CMD_1: Com mand C 0 01 200 001
commands
0: No Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-360)
[spacer] CMD_1: Com mand C 0 02 200 006
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354)
0: No Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-177

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-178 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Single-pole signals SIG_1: S ignal S 00 1 EX T 226 004
0: No
[spacer] SIG_1: Logic s ignal S0 0 1 226 005
0: No Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-362)
[spacer] SIG_1: S ignal S 00 2 EX T 226 012
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-179

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354)
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-180 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-181

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-182 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-183

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
8-184 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-185

Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Se t counte r 1 E X T 217 130
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Se t counte r 2 E X T 217 085
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Transm it count s E XT 217 009
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t EXT 217 004
0: No
[spacer] COUNT : Enab led 217 001
0: No Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
[spacer] COUNT : Transm it count s 217 010
0: No Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t 217 005
0: No Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
[spacer] COUNT : Warning count 1 217 191
0: No
0: No
0: No
0: No
[spacer]
Warning that the counter value has exceeded the set limit value.
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Parameter Address
Device DVICE: S e rvice info 03 1 08 0 031 080
0: No
8-186 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Local control panel LOC: Param . change enabl. 003 010
0: No
[spacer]
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 1: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st 003 180
communication
interface 1
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 003 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “starting”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 003 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as “ending”.
[spacer] COMM 1: Se l. po s. dev. tes t 221 105
0: Not assigned
[spacer]
Select a device DEVxx for testing the transmission of switchgear device position
in monitoring direction.
[spacer] COMM 1: Tes t p osition de v. 221 106
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carry out a test to check the transmission of switchgear device position in
monitoring direction for the device selected at C OMM1: S el. pos .
dev.test.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-187

Parameter Address
“Logical” COMM 2: Se l.s pont an.s ig.te st 103 180
communication
interface 2
[spacer]
Signal selection for testing purposes.
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig.s t ar t 103 184
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".
[spacer] COMM 2: Tes t s pont .s ig. end 103 186
[spacer]
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Parameter Address
InterMiCOM COMM 3: Rse t.No.tlg.er r. USE R 120 037
interface
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting counter for number of telegram errors.
[spacer] COMM 3: Se nd s ignal for t es t 120 050
0: None
[spacer] COMM 3: Log. s tat e for t est 120 051
1: 1
[spacer] COMM 3: Se nd s ignal , te st 120 053
0: don't execute
[spacer] COMM 3: Loop back se nd 120 055
170 0 255
[spacer]
Setting a bit pattern consisting of 3 bits.
[spacer] COMM 3: Loop back t est 120 054
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Carrying out a loop back test with the PCOMM interface.
[spacer] COMM 3: Hold time for te s t 120 052
10 1 600 s
[spacer]
Selecting the hold time (in seconds) for the functional testing.
8-188 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
IEC 61850 IEC: Se l.s pontan.si g.t est 104 245
Communication
[spacer] IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig.s tar t 104 246
[spacer] IEC: Tes t sp ont.sig. end 104 247
[spacer] IEC: Se l. pos . d ev .t es t 104 248
0: Not assigned
[spacer] IEC: Tes t pos ition DEV 104 249
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Measured data input MEASI: Re set Tmax US ER

003 045
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to
updated measured values.
Parameter Address
Binary and analog OUTP: Re s e t latch. US ER 021 009
output
[spacer]
Reset of latched output relays from the user interface.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay assign. f.t e st 003 042
[spacer]
Selection of the relay to be tested.
[spacer] OUTP: Re lay te st 003 043
[spacer]
The relay selected for testing is triggered for the duration set at OUTP: H ol d -
time f or tes t.
[spacer] OUTP: Hold- tim e for t e st 003 044
1 1 10 s Fig. 3-42, (p. 3-70)
[spacer]
Setting for the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered for
functional testing.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-189

Parameter Address
Measured data MEASO: Rese t output USE R 037 116
output
[spacer]
Resetting the measured data output function.
8-190 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: General re s et USER 003 002
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● All counters
● LED indicators
● Operating data memory
● All event memories
● Event counters
● Fault data
● Measured overload data
● Recorded fault values
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t indicat. USE R 021 010
[spacer]
Reset of the following displays:
● LED indicators
● Fault data
[spacer] MAIN: Rs e t .lat ch.t rip US ER 021 005
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t m eas .v. en.USE R 003 032
[spacer]
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Re s e t c. cl/ t r. cUS ER 003 007

Fig. 3-87, (p. 3-123)
[spacer]
The counters for counting the close and trip commands are reset.
[spacer] MAIN: Group res e t 1 USER 005 253
[spacer] MAIN: Group res e t 2 USER 005 254
[spacer]
Group of resetting commands.
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.trip cmd.USER 003 064
0: No Fig. 3-88, (p. 3-124)
[spacer]
Enabling of manual trip commands from the local control panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-191

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Man.M- trip cmd US ER 003 065
[spacer]
A trip command is issued from the local control panel for 100 ms.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.M- trip cmd2 US ER 003 082
[spacer]
A trip command is issued from the front panel HMI for the 100 ms.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.R- trip cmd US ER 003 066
[spacer]
Note: This command is not executed unless the manual trip has been
configured as re-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.R- trip cmd2 US ER 003 083
[spacer]
configured as a re-trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.B-trip cmd USE R 003 067
[spacer]
configured as a back-trip command.
[spacer] MAIN: Man.B-trip cmd2 U SE R 003 087
[spacer]
configured as a back-trip command 2.
[spacer] MAIN: En.m an.clos .cmd.USE R 003 105
0: No Fig. 3-78, (p. 3-115)
[spacer]
Setting the enable for the issue of a close command from the local control panel
(enables manual breaker close operations).
[spacer] MAIN: Man. clos e cmd. US ER 018 033
[spacer]
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time.
8-192 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t War m re st art 003 039
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer] MAIN: Warm re star t 010 166
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the power
supply is turned on.
[spacer] MAIN: Sof t Cold re star t 000 085
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P438 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P438 is blocked after a cold restart.
[spacer] MAIN: Cold rest art 009 254
0: don't execute
[spacer]
A cold restart is carried out. A cold restart means that all settings and recordings
are cleared. Parameter values used by the P438 after a cold restart have been
selected in such a manner that the P438 is blocked after a cold restart.
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Res e t record. USE R 100 001
recording
[spacer]
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Res et record. USE R 003 008
recording
[spacer]
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-193

Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: R e s et reco rd. US E R 100 003
[spacer]
Reset of the overload memory.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigg er US E R 003 041
[spacer]
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
[spacer] FT_RC: Res et record. USE R 003 006
[spacer]
Reset of the following memories:
● LED indicators
● Fault memory
● Fault counter
● Fault data
● Recorded fault values
Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG1: Enable US ER 003 132
[spacer]
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSIG1: Disab le USER 003 131
[spacer]
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] PSIG1: T es t telecom. USE R 015 009
[spacer]
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
8-194 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Protective signaling PSIG2: Enable US ER 019 235
0: don't execute
[spacer] PSIG2: Disab le USER 019 234
0: don't execute
[spacer] PSIG2: T es t tele com. USE R 020 001
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: Enable US ER 003 134
control
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ARC: Disable USER 003 133
[spacer]
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ARC: T est HS R USER 011 066
[spacer]
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.
[spacer] ARC: R ese t recl.t ime 2US E R 003 025
0: don't execute
[spacer]
The reset of the reclaim time 2 (which has been triggered after the final trip)
removes the auto-reclose blocking.
[spacer] ARC: R ese t counte rs US ER 003 005
[spacer]
The ARC counters are reset.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-195

Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: Enab le USER 003 136
synchronism check
[spacer]
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ASC: Disable USER 003 135
[spacer]
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] ASC: AR close re qu. US E R 008 238
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer] ASC: MC clos e r e qu. USE R 018 004
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t AR clos e r .US ER 008 237
[spacer]
A close request is issued with Automatic Reclose parameters. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer] ASC: Te s t M C close r.USER 018 005
[spacer]
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will trigger
the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to the CB if the
check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
[spacer] ASC: R es et counter s US ER 003 089
[spacer]
The ASC counters are reset.
Parameter Address
Thermal overload THER M : R e s et re pli ca USER 022 061
protection
[spacer]
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
8-196 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : R es e t me as.val. US E R 003 080
tection
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting the measured event values f<>: M ax. frequ. for
f> and f<>: Min. fre qu. for f<.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBF: Enable US ER 003 016
failure protection
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is enabled from the local control panel.
[spacer] CBF: Disable USER 003 015
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Circuit breaker failure protection is disabled from the local control panel.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-197

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBM: I nitialize value s 003 011
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Values are initialized to trigger circuit breaker condition monitoring.
[spacer] CBM: R e se t m eas .val . USER 003 013
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Resetting circuit breaker condition monitoring
[spacer] CBM: S e t No. CB oper. A 022 131
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer] CBM: S e t No. CB oper. B 022 132
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
Set the number of CB operations.
[spacer] CBM: S e t remain. CB op. A 022 134
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer] CBM: S e t remain. CB op. B 022 135
Blocked 0 65000
[spacer]
Set the remaining CB operations.
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣItrip A 022 137
Blocked 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣItrip B 022 138
Blocked 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣItrip* *2 A 022 140
Blocked 0 65000 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣItrip* *2 B 022 141
Blocked 0 65000 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣI* t A 022 143
Blocked 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer] CBM: S e t ΣI* t B 022 144
Blocked 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Set the limit values for the ruptured currents and their squares. (An alarm is
displayed if these limit values are exceeded.)
8-198 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Programmable Logic LOGIC: Trigger 1

034 038
[spacer] LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
0: don't execute
[spacer]
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point by a 100 ms pulse.
Parameter Address
Binary counts COUNT : Transmit count s USE R 217 008
[spacer]
Count transmission.
[spacer] COUNT : Re s e t USE R 217 003
[spacer]
Count reset.
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: Ope rat. data re cor d. 003 024
recording
0 0 100 Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the operating data log.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-199

Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: Mon. s ignal rec ord. 003 001
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
8-200 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event Counters
Parameter Address
InterMiCOM COMM 3: No. t ele gram er ror s 120 042
interface
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of corrupted telegrams.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-201

Parameter Address
Main function MAIN: No. g ene ral s tart . 004 000
[spacer]
Number of general starting signals.
[spacer] MAIN: CB1 act. oper . cap. 221 087
1 1 99
[spacer] MAIN: CB2 act. oper . cap. 221 091
1 1 99
[spacer]
Setting for the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a
limited time period).
[spacer] MAIN: No. M -trip cmds. 1 009 005
[spacer]
Number of main-trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. M -trip cmds. 2 009 027
[spacer]
Number of main-trip 2 commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. R -trip cmds. 1 009 006
[spacer]
Number of re-trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. R -trip cmds. 2 009 028
[spacer]
Number of re-trip 2 commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. B- trip cmds. 1 009 007
[spacer]
Number of back-trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. B- trip cmds. 2 009 029
[spacer]
Number of back-trip 2 commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. f inal t rip c mds . 004 005
[spacer]
Number of final trip commands.
[spacer] MAIN: No. close c ommands 009 055
[spacer]
Number of close commands.
8-202 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] MAIN: No.overfl .act.e n. out 009 090
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
Note: The maximum value of this counter is 10000.
[spacer] MAIN: No.overfl .act.e n. inp 009 091
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy input
was exceeded.
[spacer] MAIN: No.ov/f l.re ac.e n.out 009 092
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
[spacer] MAIN: No.ov/f l.re ac.e n.inp 009 093
[spacer]
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
[spacer] MAIN: No. m otor dri ve op. 221 025
[spacer]
Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated during
the monitoring time.
[spacer] MAIN: Count, binary 221 020
0: don't execute
Parameter Address
Operating data OP_R C: No. oper. data sig. 100 002
recording
0 0 100 Fig. 3-98, (p. 3-139)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-203

Parameter Address
Monitoring signal MT _RC: No. m onit. signals 004 019
recording
0 0 30 Fig. 3-99, (p. 3-140)
[spacer]
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-102, (p. 3-143)
[spacer]
Number of overload events.
Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: No. of f aults 004 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
Number of faults.
[spacer] FT_RC: No. sys te m dis t urb. 004 010
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-110, (p. 3-154)
[spacer]
Number of system disturbances.
Parameter Address
Auto-reclosing ARC: No. of HSR 004 004
control
[spacer]
Number of three-pole high-speed reclosures.
[spacer] ARC: No. of TDR 004 008
[spacer]
Number of time-delay reclosures.
8-204 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: No. R C aft. man.clos 004 009
synchronism check
[spacer]
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.
[spacer] ASC: No. clos e re que st s 009 033
[spacer]
Number of close requests.
[spacer] ASC: No. clos e re je ct ions 009 034
[spacer]
Number of close rejections.
Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBM: No. of CB ope r. A 008 011
0 0 65000 Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)
Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer] CBM: No. of CB ope r. B 008 012
0 0 65000 Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Number of mechanical switching operations made.
[spacer] CBM: R e main. No. CB op. A 008 014
30000 0 65000 Fig. 3-252, (p. 3-310)

Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer] CBM: R e main. No. CB op. B 008 015
30000 0 65000 Fig. 3-253, (p. 3-311)
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations (as shown by evaluating wear with
reference to the CB wear characteristic).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-205

Parameter Address
External device DEV01: Operation counte r 210 043
0 0 65535 Fig. 3-290, (p. 3-352)
[spacer] DEV02: Operation counte r 210 093
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
0 0 65535
[spacer]
Number of switching operations made. It is also possible to manually set this
counter to any value from 0 to 65535.
[spacer] DEV01: De v. op. c apabi li ty 210 003
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
1 1 99
8-206 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
1 1 99
1 1 99
[spacer]
Number of remaining switching operations. It is also possible to manually set
this counter to any value from 1 to 99.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-207

8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Parameter Address
Overload data OL_DA: Ove rload dur ation 004 102
acquisition
Not measured 0.0 6500.0 s Fig. 3-100, (p. 3-141)
[spacer]
Duration of the overload event.
[spacer] OL_DA: S tatus TH ERM r e pl ic a 004 147
Not measured 0 250 % Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.
[spacer] OL_DA: L oad curre nt T HERM 004 058
[spacer]
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function to
calculate the tripping time.
[spacer] OL_DA: Ob ject t emp. THE RM 004 035
[spacer]
Display of the temperature of the protected object.
[spacer] OL_DA: C oolant temp. T HERM 004 036
[spacer]
Display of coolant temperature, dependent on the setting for THE RM: Sel ect
CTA PSx.
When set to Default temp. value the set temperature value will be displayed.
When set to From PT100 the temperature measured by the resistance
thermometer will be displayed. When set to From 20 mA input the temperature
measured via an external 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
[spacer] OL_DA: Pre - trip t .le ft THE RM 004 148
Not measured 0.0 1000.0 min Fig. 3-101, (p. 3-142)
[spacer]
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection function
will reach the tripping threshold (“time-to-trip”).
[spacer] OL_DA: Of fs et THERM r epl ic a 004 154
[spacer]
Display of the additional reserve if coolant temperature is taken into account
and if the measured coolant temperature is lower than the set maximum
permissible coolant temperature. (In this case, the thermal model has been
shifted downwards.)
If there is no coolant temperature acquisition and if the coolant temperature and
the maximum permissible coolant temperature have been set to the same
value, then the coolant temperature is not taken into account and the
characteristic is a function of the current only. The additional reserve amounts
to 0 in this case.
8-208 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Fault data FT_DA: Fault d uration 008 010
acquisition
[spacer]
Display of the fault duration.
[spacer] FT_DA: Running t ime 004 021
[spacer]
Display of the running time.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault d et er m. 004 198
0: No fault Fig. 3-105, (p. 3-148)
[spacer]
Display of the protection element/zone that has identified the fault.
[spacer] FT_DA: Run tim e t o meas . 004 199
[spacer]
Display of the fault data acquisition time from the onset of the fault.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curre nt p.u. 004 025
[spacer]
Display of the fault current referred to Inom.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curre nt A p.u. 004 181
[spacer]
Display of the catenary current referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault curre nt B p.u. 004 182
[spacer]
Display of the feeder current referred to In.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault vol tage p.u. 004 026
[spacer]
Display of the fault voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault vol tage A p.u. 004 183
Not measured 0.000 3.000 Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the catenary voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault vol tage B p. u. 004 184
Not measured 0.000 3.000 Vnom
[spacer]
Display of the feeder voltage referred to Vnom.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault loop angle 004 024
Not measured -180 180 ° Fig. 3-107, (p. 3-150)
[spacer]
Display of the fault angle.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-209

Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault loop angle A 235 203
Not measured -180 180 °
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault loop angle B 236 203
Not measured -180 180 °
[spacer]
Display of the fault angle for the catenary line or feeder line.
Note: This measurement value is available only with the settings
MAIN: Fe e de r m ode = Autotransformer feed and
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault react ance, pr im 004 029
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault react .,pri A 235 206
Not measured -320.00 320.00 Ω
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault react .,pri B 236 206
Not measured -320.00 320.00 Ω
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity for the catenary line or
feeder line.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault im pedance ,pr im 004 176
[spacer]
Display of the fault impedance as a primary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault im ped.,pri A 235 207
Not measured 0.00 320.00 Ω
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault im ped.,pri B 236 207
Not measured 0.00 320.00 Ω
[spacer]
Display of the fault impedance as a primary quantity for the catenary line or
feeder line.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault react ance, se c. 004 028
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault react .,s ec A 235 205
Not measured | Not measured -320 | 320 | 64 Ω

(For MAIN: Inom device=1.0A | -64
5.0A)
8-210 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault re act .,s ec B 236 205
Not measured | Not measured -320 | 320 | 64 Ω

(For MAIN: Inom device=1.0A | -64
5.0A)
[spacer]
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity for the catenary line or
feeder line.
MAIN: Fe e de r mode = Autotransformer feed and
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault impe dance ,se c. 004 023
[spacer]
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault impe d.,s e c. A 235 202
Not measured | Not measured 0|0 320 | 64 Ω

(For MAIN: Inom device=1.0A |
5.0A)
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault impe d.,s e c B 236 202
Not measured | Not measured 0|0 320 | 64 Ω

(For MAIN: Inom device=1.0A |
5.0A)
[spacer]
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity for the catenary line or
feeder line.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault locat. pe rce nt 004 027
Not measured -320.00 320.00 % Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting at
FT_DA: XLf orw.,s ec A- 1 PS x.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault loc. pe rce nt A 235 204
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault loc. pe rce nt B 236 204
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %), referred to the setting at
FT_DA: XLf orw.,s ec A- 1 PS x, for the catenary line or feeder line.
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault location 004 022
Not measured -500.0 500.0 km Fig. 3-109, (p. 3-152)
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-211

Parameter Address
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault location A 235 201
[spacer] FT_DA: Fault location B 236 201
[spacer]
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km for the catenary line or feeder
line.
[spacer] FT_DA: Ip laus/Idfrst. p.u. 004 177
Not measured 0.00 100.00 Idfrst,nom Fig. 3-108, (p. 3-151)
[spacer]
Display of the CT plausibility check current or defrost current referred to In.
Parameter Address
Automatic ASC: Voltage Vref 004 087
synchronism check
[spacer] ASC: Volt. m agnit . di ff. 004 091
Not measured -3.000 3.000 Vnom Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)

Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-261)
[spacer]
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop voltage
and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom. The display
only appears if ASC is operating.
[spacer] ASC: Angle dif fe rence 004 089
Not measured -180.0 180.0 ° Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)

Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-261)
[spacer]
Display of the angle difference between measured voltage and reference
voltage at the time of the close request (in degrees).
This display only appears when the automatic synchronism check function is
active.
[spacer] ASC: Fre qu. dif fe re nce 004 090
Not measured -5.00 5.00 Hz Fig. 3-204, (p. 3-256)

Fig. 3-205, (p. 3-258)
Fig. 3-208, (p. 3-261)
[spacer]
Display of the frequency difference between measured voltage and reference
voltage at the time of the close request (in Hz). This display only appears when
the automatic synchronism check function is active.
8-212 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
Over-/ f<> : M ax. frequ. for f> 005 002
tection
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Maximum frequency during an overfrequency condition.
[spacer] f<> : M in. frequ. for f< 005 001
Not measured 12.00 70.00 Hz
[spacer]
Minimum frequency during an underfrequency condition.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-213

Parameter Address
Circuit breaker CBM: I tr ip,p rim A 009 212
Not measured 0 65000 A
[spacer] CBM: I tr ip,p rim B 009 213
Not measured 0 65000 A
[spacer] CBM: I tr ip A 009 047
Not measured 0.00 100.00 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM: I tr ip B 009 048
Not measured 0.00 100.00 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM: I tr ip** 2 A 009 051
Not measured 0.0 6000.0 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer] CBM: I tr ip** 2 B 009 052
Not measured 0.0 6000.0 Inom,CB**

2
[spacer]
Ruptured currents and their squared values.
[spacer] CBM: I *t A 009 061
Not measured 0 60000 As
[spacer] CBM: I *t B 009 062
Not measured 0 60000 As
[spacer]
Current-time integral of the per-unit ruptured current for each circuit breaker
contact.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip A 009 071
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip B 009 073
0 0 65000 Inom,CB
[spacer]
Sum of the per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip **2 A 009 077
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer] CBM: ΣItr ip **2 B 009 078
0 0 65000 Inom,CB**
2
[spacer]
Sum of the squared per-unit ruptured currents for each circuit breaker contact.
[spacer] CBM: ΣI* t A 009 087
0.0 0.0 4000.0 kAs
8-214 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] CBM: ΣI* t B 009 088
0.0 0.0 4000.0 kAs
[spacer]
Sum of the current-time integrals of the per-unit ruptured currents for each
circuit breaker contact.
8.2.3 Event Recording
Parameter Address
Overload recording OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 1 033 020
0 0 9999 Fig. 3-103, (p. 3-144)
[spacer] OL_RC: Over load re cor ding 2 033 021
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the overload log.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 8-215

Parameter Address
Fault recording FT_RC: Fault recor ding 1 003 000
0 0 9999
[spacer] FT_RC: Fault recor ding 2 033 001
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
0 0 9999
[spacer]
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-216 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator

This chapter lists all IEC 61850-specific settings, that are carried out with the
configuration tool “IED Configurator”.
The sequence in which the settings are listed and described in this chapter
corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree of the “IED Configurator”.
However, only those setting parameters are described that are mandatory for
establishing the IEC 61850 communication.
Further setting parameters are listed in the “Settings” chapter under the function
groups IEC and GOOSE. A list of all available Logical Nodes can be found in a
separate document.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-1

P438 9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator
9.1 Manage IED

The menu item “Manage IED” allows for establishing a connection between the
“IED Configurator” and the device.
The P438 features two memory “banks” one of which includes the active setting
parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for
parameters via “IED Configurator” or operating program.
Toggling between active and inactive memory bank is carried out either by
executing the parameter IEC: Switch Config. Bank or via “IED Configurator”
(after the connection has been established) by pressing the “Switch Banks”
button.
Parameter
Active Bank SCL File ID
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the
IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via
menu item “Manage IED”).
SCL File Version
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out
with the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been
established (via menu item “Manage IED”).
Parameter
Inactive Bank SCL File ID
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED
Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established (via menu
item “Manage IED”).
SCL File Version
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with
the IED Configurator, after a connection with the device has been established
(via menu item “Manage IED”).
9-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator P438
9.2 IED Details

The category “IED Details” contains several settings that characterize the device
as well as the SCL file, which identifies the IEC 61850 configuration.
Parameter Default Value
SCL Details SCL File ID PX 438
Identification of the .MCL configuration file. If required, this preset value may be
modified by, for example, entering a bay name.
SCL File Version 251.2.01
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration.
If required, this preset value may be modified by, for example, identifying the
revision states during engineering.
Parameter Address
IED Details Name 104 057
Explicitly assigned device name for the function in the system (IED); is part of
the Logical Device Name.
Important note: According to the IEC standard the name must consist of only
letters (A..Z, a..z), digits (0..9) and underscore characters (_), and the name
must start with a letter. Note that a non-standard name causes problems with
the IEC 61850 communication.
Parameter
Template Details ICD Template
SCL Schema Version
Description
Type
Configuration Revision
Supported Models
The values listed in the column “Template Details” only provide information.
They are preset and cannot be modified.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-3

9.3 Communications
The category “Communications” contains the general network-related settings.
Connected Sub- Interface 1 Connected Sub-Network NONE

Network
Interface 2 Connected Sub-Network NONE2
Optional name available to identify the Ethernet network.
Access Point AP1
Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified.
Parameter Default Value Address
Address Enable VLANs false

Configuration
Checkbox to enable/disable VLANs. When the checkbox is checked, all

configurations for physical Interfaces that have defined any VLANs will be
replaced by the configuration of these VLANs (grouped by physical interfaces).
Enable Port Assignment false
Checkbox to enable/disable Port Assignment. When the checkbox is checked,

Port Assignments configuration will appear for all physical interfaces supported
by the device.

Interface 1
IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 001
Assigned IP address of the Interface1 of P437 for the server function in the
system.
SubNet Mask 0.0.0.0 104 005
Gateway Address 0.0.0.0 104 011
9-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661


Interface 2 (if fitted)
IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 070
Assigned IP address of the Interface2 of P437 for the server function in the
system.
SubNet Mask 0.0.0.0 104 071

Interface 1 VLAN1/VLAN2
VLAN Id (hex) 1 104 092
2 104 096
Assigned VLAN ID of Interface 1. (These parameters appear when checkbox of

Enable VLANs is switched on.)
IP Address 192.168.10.4 104 091
192.168.11.4 104 094
Assigned IP address of VLAN in the system.
SubNet Mask 255.255.255.0 104 093
255.255.255.0 104 097
The subnet mask of VLAN defines which part of the IP address is addressed by
the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
0.0.0.0 104 098
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway of the VLAN for
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-5

IEC 61850 (MMS)
Checkbox to enable/disable MMS of IEC 61850. (These parameters can be

configured for Interface1, Interface2, VLAN1 and VLAN2 separately when
checkbox of Enable Port Assignment is switched on.)
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
Checkbox to enable/disable Network Time Protocol.
IED Configuration (TLS)
Checkbox to enable/disable Transport Layer Security of IED configuration.
Basic Administration (SSH/SFTP)
Checkbox to enable/disable basic administration SSH/SFTP.
User management (RBAC) (Webservice)
Checkbox to enable/disable user management of RBAC (Role Based Access

Control).
General TCP Keepalive 5 seconds

Configuration
Communication monitoring at TCP level.
Database Lock Timeout 2 minutes
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced. (The default
value above is in seconds. The IED Configurator, however, displays converts this
to minutes.)
9-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

9.4 SNTP
The category “SNTP” contains the clock synchronization settings.
9.4.1 General Config
Client Operation Poll Rate (seconds) 64
Polling interval for clock synchronization.
Accepted Stratum Level All levels (0 - 15)
Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset,

cannot be modified.
9.4.2 External Server 1

Settings for the primary clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the “Use Anycast” button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 202

Parameters
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the “Use Anycast” button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
9.4.3 External Server 2

Settings for the backup clock synchronization server.
Note that all values except IP Address and the “Use Anycast” button are usually
disabled and may be accepted only when imported from an XML configuration
file.
External Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 104 210

Parameters
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization.

Clicking the “Use Anycast” button in the IED Configurator changes the value
such that any server in the local network is appointed to provide clock
synchronization.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-7

9.5 Dataset Definitions
Parameter
Dataset Definitions Name
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned name for the dataset.
Location
Saving datasets at System/LLN0 is compulsory.
Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset.

The “GOOSE Capacity” display allows for checking the length of a dataset for
less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages.
Note: It is not possible to read the IEC configuration back from the P437 if the
“Dataset” sizes exceed the GOOSE size limit significantly. Too large a dataset
can spoil IEC61850 communication. Hence, the dataset size limit of 100% of the
9-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

9.6 GOOSE Publishing
9.6.1 System/LLN0
Network Parameters Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00
Virtual MAC address that the sending device provides as the destination; preset.
Application ID (hex) 0000
Explicitly (and uniquely) assigned ID-number of the GOOSE.
VLAN Identifier (hex) 0
ID-number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset.
VLAN Priority 4
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset.
Repeat Message Minimum Cycle Time 10 ms

Transmission
Parameters
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
Maximum Cycle Time 1s
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period;
preset.
Increment 900
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send
repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-9

Message Data GOOSE Identifier TEMPLATESystem/

Parameters LLN0$GO$gcb01
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE.
Configuration Revision 1
Revision status of the configuration.
9-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

9.7 GOOSE Subscribing
9.7.1 Mapped Inputs
Source Network Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

Parameters
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
ID-number of the GOOSE.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-11

GOOSE Source Source Path

Parameters
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Data Obj Index 1
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
Data Obj Type Unknown
Structure of the data object; possible settings:

● Unknown
● Boolean (logical value)
● Int8 (Integer, with 8 digits)
● UInt8 (Positive integer, with 8 digits)
● Float (Floating-point number)
● BStr2 (Binary state, with 2 digits)
● SPS (Single-pole signal)
● DPS (Two-pole signal)
Quality Obj Index 1
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of
the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
9-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Destination Evaluation Expression Equal to

Parameters
Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set

integer value; the parameter is not supported in the device.
● Equal to (Compared to: equal)
● Not equal to (Compared to: unequal)
● Greater than (Compared to: greater)
● Less than (Compared to: less)
● Pass through (Do not compare)
Default Input Value False
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed.
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
Invalidity Quality bits
Quality criterion, which is to be tested.

● Invalid / Questionable: Invalid / questionable
● Source: Information source is faulty
● Relay test: Sending device is set to test mode
● OperatorBlocked: Blocked by operator
and
● Overflow: Measured value has exceeded its capacity
● OutofRange: Measured value has exceeded its range
● BadReference: Referenced value is faulty
● Oscillatory: Value is volatile
● Failure: Faulty
● OldData: Information is out-of-date
● Inconsistent: Information is unreliable
● Inaccurate: Information is inaccurate
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-13

9.8 Report Control Blocks
9.8.1 System/LLN0
Report Parameters Report Type
Report type:
● Unbuffered (updating)
● Buffered (saving)
Report ID TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$RP
$urcbP, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR
$brcbA, ...,
TEMPLATESystem/
LLN0$BR$brcbH
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report.
Revision status of the configuration.
9-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

9.9 Controls
9.9.1 Control Objects
Parameter
Control Object ctlModel

Parameters
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set:

● Status only (manually operated switching device)
● Direct control with enhanced security (direct command issue with
extended monitoring of command effecting)
● SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security (switching device
selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting)
sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without issuing a command.
9.9.2 Uniqueness of Control
Source Network Multicast MAC Address 01-0C-CD-01-00-00

Parameters
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset.
ID-number of the GOOSE.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-15

GOOSE Source Source Path

Parameters
Information data attribute in the transmitting device.
GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device.
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device.
Data Obj Index 1
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
Default Input Value True
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed:
● False – not set
● True – set
● Last Known Value – retain last value received
● Double Point: intermediate (00) – switching device in intermediate position
● Double Point: Off (01) – switching device open
● Double Point: On (10) – switching device closed
● Double Point: Bad state (11) – switching device in intermediate position
9-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

9.10 Measurements
Parameter
Scaling Unit Multiplier
Multiplication factor; not supported.
Parameter
Range configuration Scaled Measurement Range: Min
Scaled Measurement Range: Max
Lower / Upper measuring range limit value; not supported.
Deadband Deadband 10000

Configuration
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have
the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent
the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value
must exceed the smallest display value.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9-17

9.11 Configurable Data Attributes
9.11.1 System/LLN0
Parameter
Mod.measCyc Value
Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead

band evaluations.
Parameter
Mod.enCyc Value
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval
in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Parameter
Mod.comtrade Value
Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.
Parameter
Mod.distExtr Value
Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.
9-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
10 Commissioning
10.1 Safety Instructions
DANGER
⚫ When installing and connecting the device the warning notices at the
beginning of Chapter “Installation and Connection” (Chapter 5) must be
observed.
injury.
DANGER
area.
in operation.
must be employed.
injury.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-1

P438 10 Commissioning
DANGER
⚫ The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment
grounding requirements.
⚫ The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case
must be grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location
provided. The bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol: .
The cross-section of the ground conductor must conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 2.5 mm² (≤ AWG12) is
required.
⚫ In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the
power supply module (identified by the letters “PE” on the terminal
connection diagram) is also required for proper operation of the device.
The cross-section of this ground conductor must also conform to applicable
national standards. A minimum cross section of 1.5 mm² (US: AWG14 or
thicker) is required.
⚫ All grounding connections must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept as
short as possible.
⚫ The protective conductor (earth) must always be connected to the
protective grounding conductor terminal in order to guarantee the safety
given by this setup.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in
compliance with the maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs
(see “Technical Data”, Chapter 2).
terminals.
injury.
10-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

10 Commissioning P438
DANGER
injury.
DANGER
⚫ When increased-safety machinery is located in a hazardous area the
device must always be installed outside of this hazardous area to protect
this equipment.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection.
Consequently, the female connector does not have the extra insulation
from circuits connected to the system that is required per IEC/EN
60255-27. Therefore DO NOT leave any permanent cable connection on
the PC interface connector at the HMI front panel.
injury.
DANGER
⚫ Do not connect or disconnect the RS 485 or fiber-optic interface when the
supply voltage for the device is under power and in operation.
injury.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-3

WARNING
HAZARD OF UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
⚫ When using the programmable logic (function group LOGIC), the user must
carry out a functional type test to conform to the requirements of the
relevant protection/control application.
⚫ In particular, it is necessary to verify that the requirements for the
implementation of logic linking (by setting) as well as the time
performance during device startup, during operation and when there is a
fault (device blocking) are fulfilled.
10-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

10.2 Commissioning Tests
10.2.1 Preparation
After the P438 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, (p. 5-
1), the commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked
again:
● Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?
● Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary
voltage of the device?
● Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly
isolated. The conditions given in IEC/EN 60255-27 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on.
After voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various
startup tests are carried out (see Section 3.15, (p. 3-136)). The LED indicators for
HEALTHY (H1) and OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will light up. After approximately 15 s,
the P438 is ready for operation. By default (factory setting) or after a cold restart,
the device type “P438” and the time are displayed on the first line of the LCD
after the device has started up. If a bay type has already been selected this bay
will then be shown as a single-pole display.
Once the change enabling command has been issued (see Section 6.13.3, (p. 6-
38)), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering settings from the
integrated local control panel is described in Section 6.13.4, (p. 6-41).
First the type of bay wanted is to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y, Par/Conf menu

branch. When the automatic assignment has been enabled at M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O then selecting the type of bay will automatically configure binary
signal inputs and output relays according to the definitions corresponding to the
bay type.
After pressing the ENTER key to confirm the setting parameter M A I N : T y p e o f
b a y the signal Bay initialization is displayed on the LCD for a time duration of 20 s.
The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. A control action is not possible
during this time period.
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting
the P438 and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be
made from the integrated local control panel.
Par/DvID menu branch:

● D VIC E: De vice pas sword 1
● DV IC E: Devi ce pass word 2
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-5

Par/Conf menu branch:

● PC : Bay add ress
● PC : De vice addr e ss
● PC : Bau d rat e
● PC : Pari ty b it
● COMM1: Fu nct ion grou p COMM1
● C O MM 1: General e nable USER
● COMM1: Name of man uf actu rer
● CO MM1: Line idle s tat e
● CO MM1: Baud r ate
● COMM1: Pari ty bit
● C OM M1: Commun icat. protocol
● C OM M1: Octe t comm. addres s
● CO MM1: Oct et addres s A SDU
● C OMM2: Fun ction group COMM2
● COMM2: Ge ne ral e nabl e U SER
● C OMM2: Nam e of m anu factur e r
● COMM2: Line idl e s tate
● COMM2: Baud rate
● COMM2: Parity bit
● COMM2: Octet comm. addres s
● COMM2: Oct et addre ss ASDU
● C OM M3: Funct i on group COMM3
● CO MM3: Ge ne ral en able USER
● C OM M3: Bau d rate
Par/Func/Glob menu branch:

● PC: C omm an d blocki ng
● PC: Sig./me as.val. bl ock.
● COMM1: C ommand bl ock. USER
● CO MM1: S ig ./me as. bl ock.USER
● C OM M2: Command block. USER
● COMM2: Sig./mea s.block. USER
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters “Settings” and “Information
and Control Functions”.
The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol. If
another protocol is being used for the communication interface, additional settings
may be necessary. See Chapter “Settings” for further details.
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out
again before the blocking is cancelled:
10-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

● Is the correct bay type configured?

● Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the
terminal connection diagram?
● Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
● Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
● Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
● Are the interlocking conditions and the external interlock inputs correctly
configured?
● Have all settings been made correctly?
Now blocking can be cleared as follows (Par/Func/Glob menu branch):
● MA IN : Protection e nable d = Yes (= on)
10.2.2 Cyber Security Commission

For Easergy MiCOM 30 without Cyber Security, password is managed and
modified through HMI and Easergy Studio only, as previous password
management.
For device with Cyber Security, access to some parts of the menu is only possible
with an user authentification after "Log in" with an user name and password. The
user should "Log out" after operation (see Section 3.3.1, (p. 3-4)).
The Security Administration Tool (SAT) is used to access to security functions
rights with the security administration role (by default). It provides:
● User accounts setting.
● Rights and roles management.
● Rights and roles administration.
User accounts setting button gives access to user informations and

authentification tools: you can manage login (user name and password and
arrow password), login attempts, inactivity time etc.).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-7

You can associate (add or remove) role(s) to an user account:
You can edit rights (associated Element To Secure (ETS)) for each role:
You can edit Elements To Secure (ETS) by editing permissions, objects and
rights:
10-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Set “Network Device List…” to select file to send to the device.
Please, refer to the “Security Administration Tool ” for complete information about
security administration tool.
10.2.3 Testing
When testing trip or close commands configured to standard outputs, the CB must
not be mechanically locked, so that its auxiliary 52a/b contact could operate and
break the DC current. If the CB has to stay locked, tripping or closing circuit has to
be opened by terminal disconnection or test switch. Otherwise there is a high risk
of damaging the P438 output contact.
By using the signals and displays generated by the P438, it is possible to

determine whether the P438 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the
station. Signals are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into
the event memory. In addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the
appropriate signal in the menu tree.
If the user does not wish the circuit breaker to operate during protection testing,
the trip commands can be blocked through MAI N: Trip cmd. block. USER
(Par/Func/Glob menu branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Furthermore, it is possible to block each trip command separately for testing
purposes. This is implemented using the parameters MAI N: Block . M-trip
USE R, M AI N: Block. R-tri p USER or MA IN: Bl ock. B-t r ip U SER (Par/Func/
Glob menu branch) or through the appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
Selection of the trip command from the integrated local control panel is
password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-52)).
The manual trip command is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to effect a trip (in the configuration of trip
commands).
If the P438 is connected at substation control level, the user is advised to

activate the test mode via MA IN : Tes t mode USE R (Par/Func/Glob menu
branch) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. The telegrams are
then identified accordingly (reason for transmission: test mode).
10.2.4 Checking the Binary Signal Inputs

By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch), it is
possible to determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized
correctly by the device. The values displayed have the following meanings:
● "Low": Not energized.
● "High": Energized.
● Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-9

10.2.5 Checking the Output Relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test
purposes (time setting at OU TP : H ol d-tim e for test in Oper/CtrlTest menu
branch). First select the output relay to be tested (OUTP: Relay assign.
f.t est, Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
Test triggering then occurs via OUTP: Re l ay tes t (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
It is password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-52)).
DANGER
⚫ Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
injury.
10.2.6 Checking the Communications Interfaces Signals

When using the IEC 60870‑5‑103, IEC 870‑5‑101 or ILS‑C interface protocols,
each signal generated in the P438 can be transmitted to the connected control
station for test purposes. First select the signal to be tested
(COMM1: S el .spon tan.s ig.te st, CO MM2: Sel.spontan.sig.te st, menu
branch Oper/CtrlTest).
The respective signal is transmitted according to CO MM1: Test
spont .sig.start or C OM M1 : Te s t spon t. si g. e nd (or COMM2: Test
spont.sig.start, C OMM2 : Te st s pont.s ig. en d, all in menu branch Oper/
CtrlTest).
Signal generation is password-protected (see Section 6.13.8, (p. 6-52)).
10.2.7 Checking the Transformer Connections

The user can check to make sure connection to the system's current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data
displays for load angle or for active/reactive power in the Oper/Cycl/Data menu
branch. The load angle is only determined if at least 10% of the nominal device
current is flowing.
10.2.8 Checking the Protection Function

Four parameter subsets are stored in the P438, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter
subset is activated. The active parameter subset is displayed at PSS: Act ual
param. subse t (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
10.2.8.1 Checking Distance Protection

Before checking the distance protection function, set an adequate pre-fault time
(> 11 periods at nominal voltage) in order to ensure exact synchronization of the
voltage memory.
In order to check the distance protection function the value at DIST: I> PSx
must be exceeded. Commonly, double the operate threshold is used. At the same
time, one needs to take into account that, at low voltages, the load blinding by
the angles DIS T: Be ta 1 PSx and DI ST: Gamma 1 PSx is reduced.
10-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Furthermore, the signal at the binary signal input configured for MA IN: M.c. b.
trip V EX T must have a logic value of 0 before checking all the distance zones.
DANGER
⚫ Application of analog test values to the measuring inputs must be in
(see Chapter “Technical Data”, Chapter 2).
injury.
10.2.8.1.1 Characteristics
With the P438, the user may choose between a polygonal and a circular tripping
characteristic. This selection of the tripping characteristic will then govern
calculation of the tripping impedances. This selection of the tripping
characteristic will then govern calculation of the testing impedances. Functional
testing at significant fault angles (for example, 0°, line impedance angle, 90°), in
each case at the zone boundary (tripping impedances +5% or -5%), is
recommended.
10.2.8.1.2 Checking the Voltage Memory

The voltage stored by the voltage memory is used in certain cases for direction
determination.
The voltage memory is enabled if the following two conditions are satisfied for at
least 11 periods (minimum synchronization time):
● The voltage is greater than 0.65 Vnom.
● The frequency is in the range 0.95·fnom < f < 1.05·fnom .
With the starting, the voltage memory is decoupled and the stored voltage can
be used for directional measurement for 6 s maximum.
10.2.8.2 Checking Switch On To Fault protection

In order to check the switch on to fault protection (SOTF), the signal at the binary
signal input configured for MAI N: Manual cl ose EXT must have a logic value
of 1. During the set time SOTF: Man. cl ose ti mer P Sx, tripping proceeds
either with general starting or with operation of the dynamic reach stage of
distance protection - depending on the operating mode setting at
SOTF : Oper ating mode P Sx.
10.2.8.3 Checking Measuring-Circuit Monitoring

The voltage-measuring circuit are monitored. Operation of the monitoring
functions can be observed by selecting the logic state signals MCMON: Me as.
circ. V faulty (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch). The monitoring signals can also be
entered into the monitoring signal memory and identified by reading out the
monitoring signal memory.
Undervoltage monitoring operates if there is no general starting (the distance
protection starting or the overcurrent protection starting can be avoided by a
zero current supply) and the voltage falls below the operate value.
A trip signal is issued once the set operate delay has elapsed.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-11

10.2.8.4 Fuse Failure Monitoring

Fuse failure monitoring identifies a fault in the voltage-measuring circuit by the
monitoring of current and voltage in the absence of general starting. If the
voltage falls below the operate threshold of the undervoltage limit, a sudden
voltage decrease without a sudden current increase has to be detected at the
same time.
When checking the function, the current operate value of DIST: I> PSx should
not be exceeded.
10.2.8.5 Checking Backup Overcurrent-Time Protection

The switch to backup overcurrent-time protection (BUOC) – provided it has been
appropriately set – is brought about by the internal measuring-circuit monitoring
function or, if the voltage transformer miniature circuit breaker trips, by the
binary input signal MAI N: M.c.b. t rip V EXT.
If the current exceeds the threshold operate value set at BUOC: I> PSx , then
the timer stage is started. After the set time delay (BUOC: tI> PSx ) has
elapsed, the P438 trips. The second stage of the BUOC function operates in the
same manner.
DANGER
injury.
10.2.8.6 Checking Definite-time Overcurrent Protection

In order to check definite-time overcurrent protection, appropriate test currents
are applied. If the current exceeds the threshold operate value set at DTOC: I>
PSx , then the timer stage is started. Once the set delay DTOC: tI> PSx has
elasped, the P438 issues a trip. The second DTOC stage is equivalent. In order to
check the instantaneous high-current stage DTOC: I>H P Sx, an adequately
high current should be added at maximum amplitude after an appropriate
preceding event. Accelerated tripping can only result if the associated time delay
D TOC : tI >H PS x has been set to zero delay.
DTOCA and DTOCB functions operate in the same manner (no instantaneous
high-current). By injecting appropriate analog test values at the current
measuring inputs it is possible to check the overcurrent stages and their
associated timer stages.
10-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

DANGER
injury.
10.2.8.7 Checking the Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection Function

By injecting appropriate analog test values at the current measuring inputs it is
possible to check the overcurrent stages and their associated timer stages
(IDMT, IDMTA, IDMTB functions).
DANGER
injury.
Tripping times issued by the inverse-time maximum current protection, and

dependent on the tripping characteristic selected, are given in the table in
section “Inverse-time Overcurrent Protection” (Section 3.32.2, (p. 3-272)).
10.2.8.8 Checking the Thermal Overload Protection Function

By injecting appropriate analog test values it is possible to check the reference
current setting and the associated time delay.
DANGER
injury.
Before the thermal overload protection can be tested the thermal replica must
always be cleared. Clearing the thermal replica is done by short term disabling of
the protection by setting M AIN: P rotecti on e nabled to No (= off) (Par/Func/
Glob menu branch). The actual status of the thermal replica may be read out
from the operating data display at TH ER M: Stat us therm .r eplica (Oper/Cycl/
Data menu branch). The tripping time may be checked:
With the thermal replica cleared an applied test current is abruptly changed from
0 to the value ≥ 0.1·Iref
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-13

I
(I )2 - Δϑ0
ref
t = τ · ln Θa - Θa,max
I
(I )2 - Δϑtrip · (1 - Θ )
ref max - Θa,max
10.2.8.9 Checking the Time-Voltage Protection Function

In order to check the voltage-time protection function, appropriate test voltages
are applied. If the voltage exceeds the set operate value V<>: V> PSx or falls
below the set operate value V <>: V< PSx then the associated timer stage is
started. Once the set time delay V<>: tV > P Sx or V<>: tV < PSx has
elapsed, the P438 issues a trip. The second stage of the V<> function operates
in the same manner. If using the window function for the undervoltage is used,
the voltage must not fall below the set minimum value V<>: Vmin PSx .
DANGER
injury.
10.2.8.10 Checking Protective Signaling

The protective signaling function can only be tested if protective signaling is
ready. This can be determined by checking logic state signal PSIG1: Ready
(Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
● Protective signaling is not enabled.
(This can be determined by checking P SIG1 : Enable d in the Oper/
Cycl/Log menu branch.)
This may be due to the following reasons:
o P SIG1: Ge ne ral e nable USER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) is set to
No
o PS IG1: Enab le P Sx (in one of the Par/Func/PSx menu branches,
depending on the parameter subset) is set to No.
o Protective signaling is disabled via an appropriately configured binary
signal input or from the integrated local control panel. (This can be
determined by checking logic state signal PSIG1: Ext./use r enabled
in the Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
● Protective signaling is being blocked by triggering a correspondingly
configured binary signal input (P SI G1: Bl ocking EXT).
● A fault has been detected in the communications channel. (This can be
determined by checking logic state signal P SI G1: Telecom . faulty in the
Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal
for test purposes using a setting parameter (PSIG1: Test telecom. USER in
the Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or by triggering an appropriately configured
binary signal input. This pulse will be present for 500 ms and is extended for the
set reset time. If the “with echo” setting has been selected in the protection
device at the remote station, then the received signal will be returned.
10-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

10.2.8.11 Checking the Auto-Reclosing Function

The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This may be
determined by checking logic state signal AR C : C B driv e ready E XT (Oper/
Cycl/Log).
If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
● The ARC function is not enabled.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal A RC: En abled,
(Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch)). This can have the following causes:
o AR C : Ge ne r al en able USER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) is set to No
o AR C : E nabl e P Sx (in one of the Par/Func/PSx menu branches,
depending on the parameter subset) is set to No.
o ARC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or a
setting parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal AR C: Ext ./user
e nab le d, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch)
● The ARC function is blocked by Switch On To Fault protection, backup DTOC
protection, Ground Fault protection, Ground Fault (Short-Circuit) Protection
Signaling, a manual trip command or via an appropriately configured signal
input (AR C: Bl ockin g E XT). (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal ARC: Blocked, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
● There is no signal with a logic value of “1” at the binary signal input
configured for ARC: CB dri ve ready EXT.
● There is no signal with a logic value of “1” at the binary signal input
configured for MAIN: C B clos ed A EXT. The circuit breaker position
signal is only necessary if the setting at ARC : C B clos .pos .s ig. PSx is
Yes.
● An ARC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal ARC: Cycle runn in g in the Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
● An ASC cycle is in progress. (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal ASC: Cycle ru nni ng, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
A test HSR can be executed for testing purposes using a setting parameter or by
triggering binary signal inputs. The test HSR function first issues a trip command
and then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
10.2.8.12 Checking the Automatic Synchronism Check

The automatic synchronism check can only take place if it is ready. This can be
determined by checking logic state signal ASC: R eady.
The possible reasons for the ASC function not being ready are as follows:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-15

● The ASC function is not enabled. (This can be determined by checking logic
state signal A SC : En able d, (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.) This can have
the following causes:
o ASC : Gen eral en abl e USER (Par/Func/Gen menu branch) has been
set to No.
o ASC: E nabl e P Sx (Par/Func/PSx menu branch, depending on the
parameter subset) has been set to No.
o ASC is disabled via an appropriately configured binary signal input or a
setting parameter.
(This can be determined by checking logic state signal ASC: Ext ./use r
ena ble d, Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch.)
● A logic “1” signal is present at the binary signal inputs configured for
M AI N: M.c.b. t r ip V EXT.
● The ASC function will be blocked by triggering the binary signal input
configured for ASC: Blocki ng EXT.
The setting determines whether a close enable may be carried out in case of
blocking.
For test purposes, a close request can be generated for 500 ms using ASC: Te st
MC close r.USER the setting parameter (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch) or by
triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input (ASC: Test MC clo se
r. EX T). The check can only be carried out if there is no ARC cycle running. The
P438 checks whether enabling is permitted or not according to the set
conditions. If a positive decision is reached, then there is an ASC: Close
enabl e signal. No (re-)close command takes place! If the check determines that
enabling is not permitted, the signal A SC : C los e re je ction is issued.
10.2.9 Checking Control Functions

The selected bay type is displayed on the Bay Panel. The selection of the Bay
Panel is described in the Chapter 6. The current switching state of the switchgear
units is displayed on the Bay Panel if state signals from such switching devices
are connected properly to binary signal inputs on the P438. Should the switching
state not be displayed correctly then it can be determined by checking the
physical state of binary signal inputs whether the state signals are presented
correctly to the P438 (check at parameter INP: State U xxx, Oper/Cycl/Phys
menu branch).
10.2.9.1 Local/Remote Selection

Controlling switchgear units may be carried out from keys on the local control
panel, remotely via the communication interface or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The control site – Local or Remote – is selected
by the L/R key on the local control panel or by an appropriately configured binary
signal input. The L/R key has no effect when a binary signal input has been
configured. Using the L/R key on the local control panel to switch from “Remote”
to “Local” is only possible after the “Password L/R” was entered (see
Chapter “Local Control Panel” for further information). The Bay Panel display will
show which control site has been selected.
10.2.9.2 Local Control

The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the selection key on
the local control panel, and pressing the “Open” or “Close” key will generate a
switching request. When control is carried out with binary signal inputs the
respective binary signal input is to be triggered.
10-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

10.2.9.3 Remote Control

Remote control of switchgear units may be carried out via the communication
interface or with appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
10.2.9.4 Switchgear Unit Cannot Be Controlled

Should a switchgear unit refuse to be controlled, then this may be due to the
following reasons:
● General enable for switch commands has not been set.
(Configuration at MA IN: In p.as g. ct rl.e nabl., Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
● Interlocking has operated.
(Check at MAIN: Inte rlock e qu. viol., Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
● Only with bays for direct motor control:
The motor protection has operated.
(Check at parameter MAI N: Mon. mot. drive s t r., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch)
Which interlock(s) is(are) activated may be checked at:
● Bay interlock (BI): MAI N: Bay in terl ock. act., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
● Substation interlock (SI): MAI N: Subs t. i nte rl. act., Oper/Cycl/Log menu
branch
● With control set to “Local”:
It is possible to deactivate the interlock through an appropriately
(Configuration at MAIN: I np. asg. in terl .deact, Par/Func/Glob menu
branch)
A substation interlock is only effective when a communication link exists from the
communication interface to the substation control level. If the communication link
is disrupted then the device switches automatically to bay interlock (BI) without
substation interlock (SI). Whether or not a communication error is present can be
checked at M A I N : C o m m u n i c a t i o n e r r o r (Oper/Cycl/Log menu branch).
The substation interlock (SI) can be deactivated selectively for any switchgear unit
and in any control direction – “Open” or “Close”. (Check – e.g. for DEV01 – at
D E V 0 1 : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or D E V 0 1 : C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t . (Par/Func/
Cont menu branch).
10.2.10 Completing Commissioning

Before the P438 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the
following steps have been taken:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 10-17

● (Reset at MAI N: Ge ne ral re se t USER (password-protected) and

MT_RC : Reset r ecor d. USE R, both in Oper/CtrlTest menu branch.)
● Blocking of output relays has been cancelled.
(OU TP: Out p.re l.bl ock U SER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
● Blocking of the trip command has been cancelled.
(MAI N: Trip cmd.bl ock. USER, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting No.)
● The device is on-line.
(MAI N: P r ote ct ion e nable d, Par/Func/Glob menu branch, setting Yes (=
on).)
● Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabled – if it was previously cancelled for
testing purposes.
(MC MON: General en abl e USER, Par/Func/Gen menu branch, setting
Yes)
● The correct control point – Local or Remote – has been activated.
● The required interlock equations have been activated.
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling
“HEALTHY” (H1) should be on.
10-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
11 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and
possible methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation
only, and in cases of doubt it is better to return the P438 to the manufacturer.
Please follow the packaging instructions in Section 5.1, (p. 5-4) when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
DANGER
⚫ Before checking further, disconnect the P438 from the power supply.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment to isolate
the device.
injury.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
Problem
● Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.
o Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection
points.
o Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct.
The P438 is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
● The P438 issues an “Alarm” signal on LED H 3.
o Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal
memory (see Section 6.13.6.2, (p. 6-48)). The table below lists possible
monitoring or warning indication (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at SFMON: Fct. ass ign. warning), the faulty area,
the P438's response, and the mode of the output relay configured for
“Warning” and “Blocked/faulty”.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-1

P438 11 Troubleshooting
Key
● –: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
● Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
● Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the
monitoring signal is still present.
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: F ct . as s ign. war ning 021 030
[spacer] SFMO N: M on. s ig. r et e ntion 021 018
11-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

11 Troubleshooting P438
Parameter Address
Self-monitoring SFMO N: C B faulty E X T 098 072
[spacer]
The external input MAIN: C B1 faulty E XT or MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT
has become active.
Device reaction: –
“Warning” output relay: Yes
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: –
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (LE D) 036 070
[spacer]
Warning configured for LED H3.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arning (re lay ) 036 100
[spacer]
Warning configured for an output relay.
[spacer] SFMO N: W arm re start e x ec. 041 202
[spacer]
A warm restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t exe c. 041 201
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out.
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re star t 093 024
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction: Warm restart
2nd device reaction: Device blocking
“Blocked/faulty” output relay: Yes
[spacer] SFMO N: C old re st./ SW update 093 025
[spacer]
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
[spacer] SFMO N: B lockin g /HW fail ure 090 019
[spacer]
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
“Warning” output relay: Updating
[spacer] SFMO N: R elay Kxx faulty 041 200
[spacer]
Multiple signal: output relay defective.
'Warning' output relay: Updating
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-3

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
[spacer]
The hardware clock has failed.
[spacer] SFMO N: B at te ry failure 090 010
[spacer]
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW d.loade d 096 121
[spacer]
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
[spacer]
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer]
The +24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
[spacer] SFMO N: - 15V s upply faulty 093 080
[spacer]
The −15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
11-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer]
Module in wrong slot.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module D ig.Bus 096 123
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong digital bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong module HM I 096 124
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong HMI. Since this is checked using the
module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade to a
version that is not compatible with the hardware.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-5

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odul e Comm 096 125
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong communication module. Since this is
checked using the module variant number this signal can also occur after a
firmware upgrade to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong m odule Ana. Bus 096 126
[spacer]
The device has been fitted with a wrong analog bus. Since this is checked using
the module variant number this signal can also occur after a firmware upgrade
to a version that is not compatible with the hardware.
[spacer]
Defective module in slot x.
11-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A DP R fault y 093 070
[spacer]
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only detected
during device startup.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule A RAM fault y 093 071
[spacer]
RAM fault on communication module A.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y DP R fault y 093 110
[spacer]
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the data
transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.
[spacer] SFMO N: M odule Y RAM fault y 093 111
[spacer]
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.
[spacer] SFMO N: I RIGB faulty 093 117
[spacer]
The IRIGB interface is enabled but there is no plausible input signal.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef . ope r at. code 093 010
[spacer]
Undefined operation code.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-7

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: Abnormal te rmi nation 093 030
[spacer]
The application has been terminated in an unexpected way. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: B ad arg. s ys t em call 093 031
[spacer]
Invalid parameter when calling a function of the operating system. If this error
occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the
device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: M ute x de adloc k 093 032
[spacer]
Software threads are locked from each other by mutex. If this error occurs
during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is
blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid memory ref. 093 033
[spacer]
Attempt to access an invalid memory segment. If this error occurs during a
(re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: U ne xpe ct e d e xc ept ion 093 034
[spacer]
Miscellaneous error message from the processor or operating system. If this
error occurs during a (re-)start of the device then this message is displayed and
the device is blocked.
11-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid ar ithm. op. 093 011
[spacer]
Invalid arithmetic operation.
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd ef ined i nter rupt 093 012
[spacer]
Undefined interrupt.
[spacer] SFMO N: E x ce pt ion oper .s ys t . 093 013
[spacer]
Interrupt of the operating system.
[spacer] SFMO N: Pr ote ction f ailure 090 021
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has detected
an error.
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um error param 090 003
[spacer]
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has been
detected.
[spacer] SFMO N: C lock sync. e rror 093 041
[spacer]
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between the
time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is greater than
10 ms.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-9

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nt e rm.volt .fail.RAM 093 026
[spacer]
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the processor
module or the power supply module is removed from the bus module (digital).
This fault is only detected during device startup. After the fault is detected, the
software initializes the RAM. This means that all records are deleted.
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rflow MT_RC 090 012
[spacer]
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.
[spacer] SFMO N: C he ck s um DM OD 093 023
[spacer]
A checksum that was calculated from the data model in the memory of the
device yielded a wrong result. If this error occurs during a (re-)start of the device
then this message is displayed and the device is blocked.
[spacer] SFMO N: S em aph. M T_RC block . 093 015
[spacer]
Software overloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid type of bay 096 122
[spacer]
If the user has selected a bay type that requires a P438 hardware configuration
that is not actually fitted, then this signal is generated.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. S W ve r s .C OMM1 093 075
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.
11-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nval. C onfig. I EC 093 079
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the IEC configuration.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s. Y 093 113
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nom not adjust able 093 118
[spacer]
Transformer module T is not suitable for setting Inom.
[spacer] SFMO N: T im e -out module Y 093 112
[spacer]
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module Y. It
has detected an error.
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip Vref 098 011
[spacer]
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of automatic synchronism check (ASC).
[spacer] SFMO N: M .c.b. trip V 098 000
[spacer]
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
Device reaction: Blocking of the short-circuit direction determination.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-11

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong s et . DIS T Rg4' 098 008
[spacer]
The set value Rg is too high and no closed tripping characteristic can be
determined.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong s et. DIST X/ R 097 023
[spacer]
There is a mismatch on the combination of the setting parameters DIS T: X
parameter avail., DIST: Z par ame ter avail. and DIS T: X
parameter us ed.
Note: The parameter DIS T: X parame te r use d enables the usage of X
values as setting parameter for the polygon characteristic instead of Z values. It
shall be set to "yes" only, if the parameter DIST : X parameter avail. is
set to "yes" and DIST : Z par ame ter av ail . is set to "No".
[spacer] SFMO N: U nd er volt age 098 009
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.
[spacer] SFMO N: F F, V trigge r ed 098 021
[spacer]
The fuse failure monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltage-
measuring circuit.
[spacer] SFMO N: M .circ. V,Vref fl ty. 098 023
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or the
reference voltage faulty.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault.
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. V f aul ty 098 017
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
[spacer] SFMO N: M .circ. Vre f fault y 098 255
[spacer]
The voltage-measuring circuits for the reference voltage are faulty.
Device reaction: Selective blocking of the neutral-point displacement voltage
monitor in function groups V<> and LIMIT as well as blocking of ASC.
11-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: M atch.fact. DF RSTinv. 098 033
[spacer]
The amplitude matching factor of the defrost protection is invalid.
[spacer] SFMO N: M atch.fct.I M CMONinv 098 059
[spacer]
The amplitude matching factor of the current measuring circuit monitoring is
invalid.
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas . cir c. I fault y 098 005
[spacer]
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the current-
measuring circuits.
[spacer] SFMO N: M eas .circ .V,I fault y 098 016
[spacer]
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits faulty.
[spacer] SFMO N: C ommunic.fault C OMM 3 093 140
[spacer]
The set time C OMM3: T ime -out comm.faul t has elapsed since the most
recent 100% valid telegram was received. The receive signals are set to their
user-defined default values.
[spacer] SFMO N: Hardware e r ror COM M3 093 143
[spacer]
The device has detected a hardware error in the effective connection
InterMiCOM (communication interface 3).
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid SW ver s DHMI 093 145
[spacer]
Incorrect or invalid software was loaded to operate the detachable display
(DHMI).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-13

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: C T A error 098 034
[spacer]
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.
[spacer] SFMO N: C omm.link fail.C OMM3 093 142
[spacer]
Timer stage COM M3: T ime -out link fail . has elapsed indicating a
persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.
[spacer] SFMO N: L im .e x ce ed.,t e l.e r r. 093 141
[spacer]
The threshold set for timer stage COMM3: Limit telegr. e rrors was
exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default values.
[spacer] SFMO N: T elecom. faulty / PSI G 098 006
[spacer]
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
Device reaction: Blocking of protective signaling.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror THE RM 098 035
[spacer]
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
Device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload protection.
[spacer] SFMO N: W rong S ett ing F .loc 098 200
[spacer]
Signal indicating that the line sections have been incorrectly set for the
calculation of fault location.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror CB M 098 020
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for circuit breaker monitoring.
11-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: C B No. C B op. > 098 066
[spacer]
The maximum number of CB operations performed has been exceeded.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B rem. No. C B op. < 098 067
[spacer]
The minimum number of CB operations performed at nominal current has fallen
below the threshold.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣItrip > 098 068
[spacer]
The maximum sum of disconnection current values has been exceeded.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B ΣItrip**2 > 098 069
[spacer]
The maximum sum of the disconnection current values to the second power has
been exceeded.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng BCD 093 124
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog I/O
module Y.
Device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> A 098 070
[spacer] SFMO N: C B tm ax> B 098 071
[spacer]
The maximum duration for the opening of a CB pole has been exceeded.
Disconnection is not determined for this CB pole.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-15

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scaling A- 2 093 115
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels of
analog I/O module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: I nvalid scali ng IDC 093 116
[spacer]
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog I/O
module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: PT 100 open c ir cuit 098 024
[spacer]
The P438 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer “PT100” to the analog I/O module Y.
[spacer] SFMO N: O ve rload 20 mA input 098 025
[spacer]
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.
[spacer] SFMO N: O pe n circ. 20 mA inp. 098 026
[spacer]
The P438 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.
[spacer] SFMO N: S etting e rror f<> 098 028
[spacer]
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for “overfrequency”
monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and nominal frequency).
This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f/Delta t operating mode.
Device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under frequency protection function
11-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Parameter Address
[spacer] SFMO N: I nv.inp.f.cloc k sy nc 093 120
[spacer]
The function was configured to a binary signal input on the analog I/O module Y.
Such a configuration is not permitted for this function.
[spacer]
These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by selection
at S FMON: Fct. ass ign. warning. The warning signals are also recorded
in the monitoring signal memory.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 11-17

11-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
12 Maintenance
DANGER
or later version) and appropriate Chapter5, Chapter 10, Chapter 11,
injury.
The P438 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are
selected to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 12-1

P438 12 Maintenance
12.1 Maintenance Procedures in the Power Supply Area

Replacement of the power supply module must be carried out by trained
personnel, and the power supply voltage must be turned off while the work is
being performed.
DANGER
⚫ Always disconnect the device from the auxiliary power supply, before
removing any hardware module.
⚫ Switch off all the power supplies in connection to the equipment to isolate
the device, before removing any hardware module.
injury.
DANGER
injury.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
WARNING
In general, the electronic components used for the device family Easergy MiCOM
30 are designed for a long service life.
For the power supply, however, dimensioning requirements dictate the use of
electrolytic capacitors that are subject to increased wear and tear. The useful life
of these capacitors depends on their temperature and thus on the components
fitted in the device, the load conditions, device location and environmental
conditions.
The internal voltage levels are cyclically checked by the P30 self-monitoring
functions. In case the voltage levels deviate from their specified values a warning
message will be issued or, for persistent problems, the device will be set to a
safe condition (blocking). Hence, there is no imperative need to replace the
power supply module after a pre-defined period of time. However, should you
12-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

12 Maintenance P438
need to guarantee a high availability of the device then we recommend

preventive replacement of the power supply module after a period of 8 to 10
years.
Moreover, the power supply module of the P438 is equipped with a lithium
battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for keeping the internal clock
running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply. The useful life of the
lithium battery depends on the auxiliary power supply of the device.
● If the P438 is continuously connected to the auxiliary power supply, then
there is no discharging of the battery, and the battery will thus not be
depleted during its service life.
● Should the P438 be disconnected from the auxiliary power supply for
several years, then the battery capacity would decrease.
During normal operation, the battery voltage is monitored. If the voltage falls
below a pre-defined threshold, a warning message will be issued and the battery
has to be replaced.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Section 10.2, (p. 10-5) must be carried out.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 12-3

P438 12 Maintenance
12.2 Routine Functional Testing

The P438 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely injection
tested for proper operation. The first functional tests should be carried out
approximately 6 to 12 months after commissioning. Functional tests should be
performed at intervals of 2 to 3 years – 4 years at the maximum.
The P438 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing
basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the
self-monitoring feature without injection testing from the device terminals. The
respective device-specific properties and settings must be observed in such
cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device
from the outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
12-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

12 Maintenance P438
12.3 Analog Input Circuits

The analog inputs are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-aliasing
filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-
monitoring function, the CT/VT supervision function that is available for the
device’s general functions can detect deviations in many cases. However, it is
still necessary to test from the device terminals in order to make sure that the
analog measuring circuits are functioning correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the
primary measured operating data using the operating data measurement
function or to use a suitable testing instrument. A “small” measured value (such
as the nominal current in the current path) and a “large” measured value (such
as the nominal voltage in the voltage path) should be used to check the
measuring range of the A/D converter. This makes it possible to check the entire
dynamic range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1%. An important factor in
evaluating device performance is long-term performance based on comparison
with previous measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test can be used to check transmission performance and
the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter. This
can best be done by measuring the trigger point of the first zone when there is a
two-phase ungrounded fault. For this test, the value of the short-circuit current
should be such that a loop voltage of approximately 2 V is obtained at the
device's terminals with the set impedance. Furthermore, a suitable testing
instrument that correctly replicates the two-phase ungrounded fault should be
used for this purpose.
Additional analog testing of such factors as the impedance characteristic or the
starting characteristic is not necessary, in our opinion, since information
processing is completely digital and is based on the measured analog current
and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with type
testing.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 12-5

P438 12 Maintenance
12.4 Binary Opto Inputs

The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a
testing function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each
input can be read out (Oper/Cycl/Phys menu branch). This check should be
performed for each input being used and can be done, if necessary, without
disconnecting any device wiring.
12-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

12 Maintenance P438
12.5 Binary Outputs

With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes
even two-phase triggering of the relay coils of all the relays. There is no
monitoring function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing
relays must be triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions.
For these testing purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the
software through a special control function (Oper/CtrlTest menu branch).
DANGER
⚫ Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so
that no inadvertent switching operations will take place.
injury.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 12-7

P438 12 Maintenance
12.6 Communication Interfaces

The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface
also includes the communication module. The complete communication system,
including connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally
monitored as long as a link is established through the control program or the
communication protocol.
12-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
13 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of
-25°C to +70°C (-13°F to +158°F) must be maintained during storage (see
chapter entitled “Technical Data”). The relative humidity must be controlled so
that neither condensation nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the
electrolytic capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every
4 years. Recharge the capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P438 for
approximately 10 minutes.
If the units are stored during a longer time, the battery of the power supply
module is used for the continuous buffering of the event data in the working
memory of the processor module. Therefore the battery is permanently required
and discharges over time. In order to avoid this continuous discharge, it is
recommended to remove the power supply module from the mounting rack
during long storage periods. The contents of the event memory should be
previously read out and stored separately!
WARNING
⚫ Do not sustain exposure to high humidity during storage, the value shall
not exceed 75% relative humidity.
⚫ Once the device has been unpacked, it is recommended to energize it
within the three following months.
⚫ The device has to be energized at least once in 4 years, if it is not in
permanent operation.
⚫ Where electrical equipment is being installed, sufficient time should be
allowed for acclimatization to the ambient temperature of the environment
before energization.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage,
unintended equipment operation or reduction of equipment lifetime.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 13-1

P438 13 Storage
13-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
14 Accessories and Spare Parts

The P438 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. LED indicators
that are not already configured and labeled can be labeled using the label strips
supplied. Affix the label strips to the front of the unit at the appropriate location.
The label strips can be filled in using a “Stabilo” brand pen containing water-
resistant ink (Type OH Pen 196 PS).
Description Order No.
Cable bushings 88512‑4‑0337414‑301
Resistor 200 Ω 255.002.696
84 TE frame 88512‑4‑9650723‑301
Operating program for Windows On request (Easergy Studio) or can be

downloaded from SE website
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 14-1

P438 14 Accessories and Spare Parts
14-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
15 Order Information
Basic Configuration Variants
Order information MiCOM P438
Rail catenary protection device P438- 0 2 -311 -4xx -661 -46x -9x x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection, 5 -418
Basic device 84TE, pin-terminal connection, 7 -419
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 -420
basic complement with 4 binary inputs, 8 output relays
and 6 function keys
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with text display 3
Flush-mounted, local control panel with text display 4
13)
Surface-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 5
13)
Flush-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 6
Processor extension, Current and voltage transformers

2)
Inom = 1 A/ 5 A (3-pole T1...T3) and Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (2-pole) 9 2
26)
Additional binary I/O options:
Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays) 1
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays) 2
5)
5) 29)
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) 5
for the control of up to 3 additional switchgear units
15)
for the control of up to 6 additional switchgear units
for the control of up to 3 switchgear units
and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 12 output relays (2-pole))
5) 15)
9
and 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 8 output relays)
With 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 12 output relays (2-pole))
5) 15) 29)
A
and 2 binary modules (add. 12 binary inputs and 16 output relays)
5)
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) B
5) 29)
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays (2-pole)) C
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 15-1

P438 15 Order Information
Further Options
Power supply and additional binary I/O options:

VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC E
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC F
VA,nom = 24 ... 60 VDC and 6 output relays G
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays H
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays J
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC K
and 6 binary inputs and 3 output relays
VA , nom = 24 … 60 VDC and 4 high break contacts L
VA,nom = 60 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 4 high break contacts M
Further add. options:

Without 0
With analog module 2
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
3) 24)
With analog and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) A
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

>18 V (standard variant) Without order extension No.
8)
>90 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 125...150 V) -461
8)
>155 V (60...70% of VA,nom = 220...250 V) -462
8)
>73 V (67% of VA,nom = 110 V) -463
8)
>146 V (67% of VA,nom = 220 V) -464
15-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

15 Order Information P438
Communication Options
With communication / information interface:

Without Without order extension No.
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fiber, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fiber, ST connector 4
Ethernet Board 2, 100 Mbit/s, Protocol IEC 61850 Ed. 1 or 2 (switchable)

without Cyber Security compatibility -97
(28)
with Cyber Security compatibility -99
Single connection, wire RJ45 1

Single connection, glass fiber LC 2
and 2nd 100 Mbit/s Ethernet service interface, wire RJ45
Redundant connection, wire RJ45, RSTP/ HSR/ PRP (switchable) 3

Redundant connection, glass fiber LC, RSTP/ HSR/ PRP (switchable) 4
With guidance / protection interface:

Without Without order extension No.
Protocol InterMiCOM -95
For connection to glass fiber 820 nm Multimode, ST connector 4
Language:
4)
English (German) Without order extension No.
4)
Px40 English (English) -800
4)
German (English) -801
4)
French (English) -802
4)
Spanish (English) Not yet available - on request -803
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 15-3

P438 15 Order Information
Key
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!
3) This option is excluded in 40 TE if the InterMiCOM interface (‑95x) is ordered.
4) Second included language in brackets.
5) For 84TE version only.
8) Standard variant recommended if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required
by the application.
13) Graphic display with minimum of one binary module (6 binary inputs and 6
output relays) only.
15) Option with graphic display only.
24) Analog module on Slot 3 and add. 24 binary module on Slot 8.
25) Only for datamodel <660 with IEC 61850 Edition 1, no Cyber Security
compatibility.
26) Maximum 2 binary input/ output boards for 40TE version and max 4 for 84TE
version in total.
27) BI6 BO6 for 84TE version on slot 12+14.
28) According BDEW / NERC / IEEE 1686.
29) This option is excluded when BI24 is ordered
Information about Ordering Options

Language version
In order to display the Russian data model, the corresponding order extension
number (‑805) must be added upon ordering so that the hardware option
supporting Cyrillic characters is integrated. With this ordering option, reference
menu texts (English) will be available for display. However, other Western
European languages containing extra characters will not be fully supported.
Consequently, selecting the “Russian / English” ordering option means that it will
not be possible to download Western European data models into the device.
Binary Inputs' Switching Threshold
The standard version of binary signal inputs (opto-couplers) is recommended in
most applications, as these inputs operate with any voltage from 18 V. Special
versions with higher pick-up/drop-off thresholds (see also “Technical Data”,
Chapter 2, (p. 2-1)) are provided for applications where a higher switching
threshold is expressly required.
15-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
A1 Function Groups
ARC Auto-reclosing control
ASC Automatic synchronism check
BUOC Backup overcurrent-time protection
CBF Circuit breaker failure protection
CBM Circuit breaker condition monitoring
CMD_1 Single-pole commands
COMM1 “Logical” communication interface 1
COMM2 “Logical” communication interface 2
COMM3 InterMiCOM interface
COUNT Binary counts
CS Cyber Security
DELTA High Impedance protection
DEV01 External device
DFRST Defrost protection
DIST Distance protection
DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection
DTOCA Definite-time overcurrent protection
DTOCB Definite-time overcurrent protection
DVICE Device
F_KEY Configurable function keys
f<> Over-/underfrequency protection
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A1-1

P438 A1 Function Groups
FT_DA Fault data acquisition
FT_RC Fault recording
GOOSE Generic Object Orientated Substation Events
IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection
IDMTA Inverse-time overcurrent protection
IDMTB Inverse-time overcurrent protection
IEC IEC 61850 Communication
ILOCK Interlocking logic
INP Binary input
IRIGB IRIG‑B interface
LED LED indicators
LIMIT Limit value monitoring
LOC Local control panel
LOG_2 Programmable Logic
LOGIC Programmable Logic
MAIN Main function
MCMON Measuring-circuit monitoring
MEASI Measured data input
MEASO Measured data output
MT_RC Monitoring signal recording
OL_DA Overload data acquisition
OL_RC Overload recording
OP_RC Operating data recording
OUTP Binary and analog output
PC PC link
PSIG1 Protective signaling
PSIG2 Protective signaling
PSS Parameter subset selection
SFMON Self-monitoring
SIG_1 Single-pole signals
SOTF Switch on to fault protection
A1-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A1 Function Groups P438
THERM Thermal overload protection
TIMER Real Timer
V<> Time-voltage protection
VINP Virtual Inputs
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A1-3

P438 A1 Function Groups
A1-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
A2 Internal Signals
ARC: CB closed Fig. 3-176, (p. 3-221)
ARC: Zone extension HSR Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-239)
ARC: Zone extension RC Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-239)
ARC: Zone extension TDR Fig. 3-190, (p. 3-239)
ASC: AC effect. for DEV01 Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-260)
ASC: Active Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
ASC: Close enable DEV01 Fig. 3-207, (p. 3-260)
ASC: Close enable w.block Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
ASC: Close reject.w.block Fig. 3-196, (p. 3-247)
ASC: Gen. close request Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-248)

Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-249)
ASC: Manual close request Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-248)

Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-249)
ASC: Test Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-248)

Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-249)
BUOC: Bl.Start. I> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
BUOC: Bl.Start. I>> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
COMM1: Close request DEV01 Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-343)
COMM1: Communication error Fig. 3-12, (p. 3-20)

Fig. 3-13, (p. 3-21)
Fig. 3-14, (p. 3-22)
Fig. 3-15, (p. 3-23)
Fig. 3-16, (p. 3-24)
Fig. 3-17, (p. 3-25)
COMM1: Count 1 Fig. 3-301, (p. 3-368)
COMM1: Debounced signal Fig. 3-297, (p. 3-363)
COMM1: Motor rel. mon. trg. Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354)
COMM1: Open request DEV01 Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-343)
COMM1: Selected protocol Fig. 3-11, (p. 3-19)
COMM1: Signal S001,log Fig. 3-296, (p. 3-362)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A2-1

P438 A2 Internal Signals
DELTA: Bl.Start Delta I Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)
DEV01: Close cmd blocked Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-346)
DEV01: Close request Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-341)
DEV01: Enable SI Close Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-343)
DEV01: Enable SI Open Fig. 3-282, (p. 3-343)
DEV01: End close command Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
DEV01: End open command Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
DEV01: Latching time elaps. Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-341)
DEV01: Latching time runn. Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-341)
DEV01: Open cmd blocked Fig. 3-285, (p. 3-346)
DEV01: Open request Fig. 3-280, (p. 3-341)
DEV01: Protect. close cmd. Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-344)
DEV01: Protection trip cmd. Fig. 3-283, (p. 3-344)
DEV01: Start runn.time mon. Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354)
DEV01: Switch. device runn. Fig. 3-286, (p. 3-348)
DIST: Bl.Start. WPC Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DIST: Bl.Start. Z1'(Z1', ze) Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DIST: Bl.Start. Z1(Z1, ze) Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DIST: Bl.Start. Z2 Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DIST: Bl.Start. Z2' Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DIST: Blocking Fig. 3-114, (p. 3-158)
A2-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A2 Internal Signals P438
DIST: t2S enable Fig. 3-131, (p. 3-178)
DTOC: Bl.Start. I> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DTOC: Bl.Start. I>> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DTOCA: Bl.Start. I> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DTOCA: Bl.Start. I>> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DTOCB: Bl.Start. I> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
DTOCB: Bl.Start. I>> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
f<>: fMeas Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-111)
f<>: No. periods reached Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-111)
f<>: V̲Meas Fig. 3-73, (p. 3-111)
FT_DA: Outp. fault location Fig. 3-106, (p. 3-149)
FT_RC: Fault recording n Fig. 3-111, (p. 3-156)
IDMT: Bl.Start. Iref> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
IDMTA: Bl.Start. Iref> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
IDMTB: Bl.Start. Iref> Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)

Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-61)

Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-71)
Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-106)
Fig. 3-96, (p. 3-135)
Fig. 3-158, (p. 3-204)
Fig. 3-175, (p. 3-220)
Fig. 3-195, (p. 3-246)
Fig. 3-197, (p. 3-248)
Fig. 3-198, (p. 3-249)
Fig. 3-266, (p. 3-325)
Fig. 3-274, (p. 3-331)
INP: Oper. mode U xxx Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-61)
INP: State U xxx Fig. 3-34, (p. 3-61)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A2-3

P438 A2 Internal Signals
LED: Fct.assig. Hxx red Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-87)
LED: Oper. mode H xx Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-87)
LED: State Hxx red Fig. 3-52, (p. 3-87)
LOC: Remote&local control Fig. 3-9, (p. 3-15)
LOC: Return t.select. trg Fig. 3-3, (p. 3-9)

Fig. 3-4, (p. 3-9)
MAIN: Blck.1 sel.functions Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-113)
MAIN: Blck.2 sel.functions Fig. 3-75, (p. 3-113)
MAIN: End command Fig. 3-291, (p. 3-354)
MAIN: Harm. blk. trigg Fig. 3-72, (p. 3-110)
MAIN: Inrush stabil. trigg Fig. 3-70, (p. 3-108)
MAIN: Protection active Fig. 3-68, (p. 3-106)
MAIN: Reset LED Fig. 3-92, (p. 3-131)
MAIN: Time tag Fig. 3-91, (p. 3-127)
MCMON: V< triggered Fig. 3-148, (p. 3-194)
MEASO: Enable Fig. 3-44, (p. 3-71)
MEASO: Output value x Fig. 3-47, (p. 3-76)

Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
MEASO: Reset meas.val.outp. Fig. 3-45, (p. 3-72)
OUTP: Fct.assignment K xxx Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-69)

Fig. 3-49, (p. 3-82)
Fig. 3-295, (p. 3-360)
OUTP: Oper. mode K xxx Fig. 3-41, (p. 3-69)
Signal 1 EXT Fig. 3-274, (p. 3-331)
Signal 2 EXT Fig. 3-274, (p. 3-331)
SOTF: ARC blocked Fig. 3-157, (p. 3-202)
THERM: Block. by CTA error Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-290)
THERM: cPL · Iref Fig. 3-235, (p. 3-288)
THERM: With CTA Fig. 3-236, (p. 3-290)
A2-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
A3 Glossary
Modules
A: Communication module
B: Digital bus module
L: MMI module
P: Processor module
T: Transformer module
V: Power supply module
X: Binary I/O module
Y: Analog I/O module
Symbols
Graphic symbols for block diagrams

Binary elements in compliance with DIN 40900 part 12, September 1992,
IEC 617-12: modified 1991
Analog information processing in compliance with DIN 40900 part 13, January
1981. To document the linking of analog and binary signals, additional symbols
have been used, taken from several DIN documents.
As a rule, direction of the signal flow is from left to right and from top to bottom.
Other flow directions are marked by an arrow. Input signals are listed on the left
side of the signal flow, output signals on the right side.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A3-1

P438 A3 Glossary
Symbol Description
To obtain more space for representing a group of related

elements, contours of the elements may be joined or cascaded if
the following rules are met:
There is no functional linkage between elements whose common
contour line is oriented in the signal flow direction.
=
Note:
This rule does not necessarily apply to configurations with two or
more signal flow directions, such as for symbols with a control
block and an output block.
D5Z08X1B
There exists at least one logical link between elements whose
common contour line runs perpendicularly to the signal flow
direction.
Components of a symbol
A symbol consists of a contour or contour combination and one or
more qualifiers.
Description of the example symbol in the left column

● Blue line: Contur
● Dark red lines: Inputs
● Green lines: Outputs
● Green hash characters: Preferred location for the general
D5Z08X2B
function qualifying symbol
● Dark blue asterisk characters: Alternative location for the
general function qualifying symbol
Control block
A control block contains an input function common to several
symbols. It is used for the collective setting of several trigger
elements, for example.
D5Z08X3B
Output block
An output block contains an output function common to several
symbols.
D5Z08X4B
A3-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A3 Glossary P438
Settable control block

The 6 digits in square brackets represent the address under
MAIN:
Inom device
[ 010 003 ]
which the function shown in the text is implemented.
D5Z08X5B
Settable control block with function blocks

MAIN: The digits in the function block show the settings that are
Inom device
[ 010 003 ] possible for this function.
1.0
The text below the symbol assigns the corresponding unit or
5.0
1.0: 1.0 A
meaning to each setting.
5.0: 5.0 A
D5Z08X6B
Static input
Only the state of the binary input variable is effective.
D5Z08XBB
Dynamic input
Only the transition from value 0 to value 1 is effective.
D5Z08XAB
Negation of an output
The value up to the border line is negated at the output.
D5Z08X8B
Negation of an input
The input value is negated before the border line.
D5Z08X7B
Dynamic input with negation

Only the transition from value 1 to value 0 is effective.
D5Z08X9B
AND element
& The output variable will be 1 only if all input variables are 1.
D5Z08XCB
OR element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least one input variable is
D5Z08XDB
1.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A3-3

P438 A3 Glossary
Threshold element
The output variable will be 1 only if at least two input variables
D5Z08XEB
are 1. The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other
number.
(m out of n) element
The output variable will be 1 only if just one input variable is 1.
D5Z08XFB The number in the symbol may be replaced by any other number
if the number of inputs is increased or decreased accordingly.
Delay element
t1 t2
The transition from value 0 to 1 at the output occurs after a time
D5Z08XGB
delay of t1 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
The transition from value 1 to 0 at the output occurs after a time
delay of t2 relative to the corresponding transition at the input.
t1 and t2 may be replaced by the actual delay values (in seconds
or strobe ticks).
Monostable flip-flop
1 The output variable will be 1 only if the input variable changes to
100ms
D5Z08XHB
1. The output variable will remain 1 for 100 ms, regardless of the
duration of the input value 1 (non-retriggerable).
Without a 1 in the function block, the monostable flip-flop is
retriggerable.
The time is 100 ms in this example, but it may be changed to any
other duration.
Analog-digital converter
An analog input signal is converted to a binary signal.
D5Z08XJB
Subtractor
The output variable is the difference between the two input
D5Z08XKB
variables.
A summing element is obtained by changing the minus sign to
a plus sign at the symbol input.
Schmitt Trigger with binary output signal

The binary output variable will be 1 if the input signal exceeds a
D5Z08XLB
specific threshold. The output variable remains 1 until the input
signal drops below the threshold again.
Memory, general
Storage of a binary or analog signal.
D5Z08XMB
A3-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A3 Glossary P438
Non-stable flip-flop
When the input variable changes to 1, a pulse sequence is
D5Z08XNB
generated at the output.
The ! to the left of the G indicates that the pulse sequence starts
with the input variable transition (synchronized start).
If there is a ! to the right of the G, the pulse sequence ends with
the ending of the 1 signal at the input (synchronized stop).
Amplifier
The output variable is 1 only if the input variable is also 1.
D5Z08XOB
Band pass filter

50Hz
The output only transmits the 50 Hz component of the input
D5Z08XPB
signals. All other frequencies (above and below 50 Hz) are
attenuated.
Counter
+
At the + input the input variable transitions from 0 to 1 are
R
D5Z08YFB
counted and stored in the function block.
At the R(eset) input a transition of the input variable from 0 to 1
resets the counter to 0.
Electromechanical drive in general, here a relay, for example.
D5Z08YGB
Signal level converter

L+
V1
with electrical isolation between input and output.
L-
D5Z08XQB L+ = pos. voltage input
L− = neg. voltage input
U1 = device identifier
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A3-5

P438 A3 Glossary
Input transformer with phase and item identifiers (according to

A.1 DIN EN 60445)
A.2 IA T1
D5Z08XRB
Phase identifiers for current inputs:
● for A: A1 and A2
● for B: B1 and B2
● for C: C1 and C2
● for N: N1 and N2
Phase identifiers for voltage inputs

● via transformer 1:
o for A: 1U
o for B: 1V
o for C: 1W
o for N: 1N
● via transformer 2:
o for A: 2U
o for B: 2V
Item identifiers
● for current transformers:
o for A: T1
o for B: T2
o for C: T3
o for N: T4
● for voltage transformer 1:
o for A: T5
o for B: T6
o for C: T7
o for N: T8
● for VG-N transformer: T90
● for voltage transformer 2:
o for A: T15
Change-over contact
with item identifier
D5Z08XSB
Special symbol
Output relay in normally-energized arrangement (“closed-circuit
D5Z08XTB
operation”).
A3-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A3 Glossary P438
PC interface
with pin connections
−12V 9
+12V 1
0V 5
RXD 3
V24
TXD 2
D5Z08XVB
Multiplier
The output variable is the result of the multiplication of the two
D5Z08XWB
input variables.
Divider
The output variable is the result of the division of the two input
D5Z08XXB
variables.
Comparator
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) are
equal to the function in the function block.
D5Z08XYB
Formula block
The output variable becomes 1 only if the input variable(s) satisfy
2.5
the equation in the function block
D5Z08XZB
Examples of Signal Names

All settings and signals relevant for protection are shown in the block diagrams of
Chapter “Operation” as follows:
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A3-7

P438 A3 Glossary
Signal Name Description

♦ FT_RC: Fault recording n Internal signal names are not coded by a data model address.
305 100
In the block diagrams they are marked with a diamond. The
small figure underneath the signal name represents a code that
is irrelevant to the user.
The internal signal names used and their origins are listed in
Appendix.
DIST: VNG>> triggered Signal names coded by a data model address are represented
[ 036 015 ]
by their address (shown in square brackets). Their origin is
given in Chapters “Setting” and “Information and Control
Functions”.
MAIN: General reset USER A specific setting to be used later on is shown with its signal
[ 003 002 ]
↗1: Execute
name, address, and the setting preceded by the setting arrow.
Symbols Used
Symbol Meaning
t Time duration
V Voltage, potential difference
V̲ Complex voltage
I Electrical current
I̲ Complex current
Z̲ Complex impedance
|Z̲| Modulus of complex impedance
f Frequency
δ Temperature in °C
Σ Sum, result
Ω Unit of electrical resistance
α Angle
φ, ϕ Phase angle. With subscripts: specific angle between a defined current

and a defined voltage.
τ Time constant
ΔT Temperature difference in K
A3-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1 Telecontrol Interface per EN 60870-5-101 or IEC 870-5-101

(Companion Standard)
This section incorporates Section 8 of EN 60870-5-101 (1996), which includes a
general definition of the telecontrol interface for substation control systems.
A4.1.1 Interoperability
This application-based standard (companion standard) specifies parameter sets
and other options from which subsets are to be selected in order to implement
specific telecontrol systems. Certain parameters such as the number of bytes
(octets) in the COMMON ADDRESS of the ASDU are mutually exclusive. This
means that only one value of the defined parameter is allowed per system. Other
parameters, such as the listed set of different process information in the
command and monitor direction, permit definition of the total number or of
subsets that are suitable for the given application. This section combines the
parameters given in the previous sections in order to facilitate an appropriate
selection for a specific application. If a system is made up of several system
components supplied by different manufacturers, then it is necessary for all
partners to agree on the selected parameters.
The boxes for the selected parameters should be checked [see National Preface
of EN 60870-5-101].
The overall definition of a system may also require individual selection of certain
parameters for specific parts of a system such as individual selection of scaling
factors for individually addressable measured values.
A4.1.1.1 Network Configuration (Network-Specific Parameters)
[✓] Point-to-point configuration [✓] Multipoint-party line configuration
[✓] Multiple point-to-point configuration [ ] Multipoint-star configuration
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-1

P438 A4 Telecontrol Interfaces
A4.1.1.2 Physical Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)

(See National Preface of EN 60870-5-101.)
Transmission Rate (Control Direction)
(The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be
identical.)
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
[ ] 100 bit/s [✓] 2400 bit/s [ ] 2400 bit/s
[ ] 200 bit/s [✓] 4800 bit/s [ ] 4800 bit/s
[ ] 300 bit/s [✓] 9600 bit/s [ ] 9600 bit/s
[✓] 600 bit/s [ ] 19200 bit/s
[✓] 1200 bit/s [ ] 38400 bit/s
[ ] 56000 bit/s
[ ] 64000 bit/s
Transmission Rate (Monitor Direction)

(The transmission rates for control direction and monitor direction must be
identical.)
Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Unbalanced interface V.24/V.28, Balanced interface X.24/X.27

Standardized Recommended with > 1 200 bit/s
[ ] 100 bit/s [✓] 2400 bit/s [ ] 2400 bit/s
[ ] 200 bit/s [✓] 4800 bit/s [ ] 4800 bit/s
[ ] 300 bit/s [✓] 9600 bit/s [ ] 9600 bit/s
[✓] 600 bit/s [ ] 19200 bit/s
[✓] 1200 bit/s [ ] 38400 bit/s
[ ] 56000 bit/s
[ ] 64000 bit/s
A4-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A4 Telecontrol Interfaces P438
A4.1.1.3 Link Layer (Network-Specific Parameters)

Frame format FT 1.2, single character 1, and the fixed time-out interval are used
exclusively in this companion standard.
Link Transmission Procedure
[✓] Balanced transmission
[✓] Unbalanced transmission
Address Field of the Link
[✓] Not present (balanced transmission only)
[✓] One octet
[✓] Two octets (balanced transmission only)
[✓] Structured
[✓] Unstructured
Frame Length
[240] Maximum length L (number of octets)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-3

A4.1.1.4 Application Layer

Transmission mode for application data
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 870-5-4, is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
Common Address of ASDU (System-Specific Parameter)
[✓] One octet [✓] Two octets
Information Object Address (System-Specific Parameter)
[✓] One octet [✓] Structured
[✓] Two octets [✓] Unstructured
[✓] Three octets
Cause of Transmission (System-Specific Parameter)
[✓] One octet [✓] Two octets (with originator address)
Selection of Standard ASDUs

Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
A4-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

[✓] <1> = Single-point information M_SP_NA_1
[✓] <2> = Single-point information with time tag M_SP_TA_1
[✓] <3> = Double-point information M_DP_NA_1
[✓] <4> = Double-point information with time tag M_DP_TA_1
[✓] <5> = Step position information M_ST_NA_1
[✓] <6> = Step position information with time tag M_ST_TA_1
[✓] <7> = Bit string of 32 bit M_BO_NA_1
[✓] <8> = Bit string of 32 bit with time tag M_BO_TA_1
[✓] <9> = Measured value, normalized value M_ME_NA_1
[✓] <10> = Measured value, normalized value with time tag M_ME_TA_1
[✓] <11> = Measured value, scaled value M_ME_NB_1
[✓] <12> = Measured value, scaled value with time tag M_ME_TB_1
[ ] <13> = Measured value, short floating point value M_ME_NC_1
[ ] <14> = Measured value, short floating point value with time tag M_ME_TC_1
[✓] <15> = Integrated totals M_IT_NA_1
[✓] <16> = Integrated totals with time tag M_IT_TA_1
[✓] <17> = Event of protection equipment with time tag M_EP_TA_1
[✓] <18> = Packed start events of protection equipment with time ME_EP_TB_1
tag
[✓] <19> = Packed output circuit information of protection M_EP_TC_1

equipment with time tag
[ ] <20> = Packed single-point information with status change M_PS_NA_1

detection
[ ] <21> = Measured value, normalized value without quality M_ME_ND_1

descriptor
Process Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)

(Incorrectly identified with control direction in IEC 870-5-101.)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-5

[✓] <45> = Single command C_SC_NA_1
[✓] <46> = Double command C_DC_NA_1
[✓] <47> = Regulating step command C_IT_NA_1
[ ] <48> = Set point command, normalized value C_RC_NA_1
[ ] <49> = Set point command, scaled value C_SE_NB_1
[ ] <50> = Set point command, short floating point value C_SE_NC_1
[ ] <51> = Bit string of 32 bit C_BO_NA_1
System Information in Monitor Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] <70> = End of initialization ME_EI_NA_1
System Information in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] <100> = Interrogation command C_IC_NA_1
[✓] <101> = Counter interrogation command C_CI_NA_1
[✓] <102> = Read command C_RD_NA_1
[✓] <103> = Clock synchronization command C_CS_NA_1
[✓] <104> = Test command C_TS_NB_1
[ ] <105> = Reset process command C_RP_NC_1
[ ] <106> = Delay acquisition command C_CD_NA_1

Parameter in Control Direction (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] <110> = Parameter of measured value, normalized value P_ME_NA_1
[✓] <111> = Parameter of measured value, scaled value P_ME_NB_1
[ ] <112> = Parameter of measured value, short floating point value P_ME_NC_1
[ ] <113> = Parameter activation P_AC_NA_1
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
A4-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

[ ] <120> = File ready F_FR_NA_1
[ ] <121> = Section ready F_SR_NA_1
[ ] <122> = Call directory, select file, call file, call section F_SC_NA_1
[ ] <123> = Last section, last segment F_LS_NA_1
[ ] <124> = Ack file, ack section F_AF_NA_1
[ ] <125> = Segment F_SG_NA_1
[ ] <126> = Directory F_DR_TA_1
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-7

A4.1.1.5 Basic Application Functions

Station Initialization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Remote initialization
General Interrogation (System- or Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Global
[✓] Group 1 [✓] Group 7 [✓] Group 13
[✓] Group 5 [✓] Group 11
[✓] Group 6 [✓] Group 12
Addresses per group have to be defined.

Clock Synchronization (Station-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Clock synchronization
Command Transmission (Object-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Direct command transmission [ ] Select and execute command
[ ] Direct set point command [ ] Select and execute set point
transmission command
[ ] C_SE ACTTERM used
[✓] No additional definition
[ ] Short pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the
outstation)
[ ] Long pulse duration (Execution duration determined by a system parameter in the
outstation)
[ ] Persistent output
Transmission of Integrated Totals (Station- or Object-Specific

Parameter)
A4-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

[ ] Counter request [✓] General request counter
[✓] Counter freeze without reset [✓] Request counter group 1
[ ] Counter freeze with reset [✓] Request counter group 2
[ ] Counter reset [✓] Request counter group 3
[✓] Request counter group 4
Addresses per group have to be specified

Parameter Loading (Object-Specific Parameter)
[✓] Threshold value
[ ] Smoothing value
[ ] Low limit for transmission of measured value
[ ] High limit for transmission of measured value
Parameter Activation (Object-Specific Parameter)
[ ] Act/deact of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
File Transfer (Station-Specific Parameter)
[ ] File transfer in monitor direction F_FR_NA_1
[ ] File transfer in control direction F_FR_NA_1
A4.2 Communication Interface per IEC 60870-5-103

This section incorporates Section 8 of IEC 60870-5-103, including definitions
applicable to the P438.
A4.2.1 Interoperability
A4.2.1.1 Physical Layer
A4.2.1.1.1 Electrical Interface
[✓] EIA RS 485
[✓] No. of loads: 32 for one device
Note: EIA RS 485 defines the loads in such a way that 32 of such loads can be
operated on one line. For detailed information see EIA RS 485, Section 3.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-9

A4.2.1.1.2 Optical Interface
[✓] Glass fiber
[✓] Plastic fiber
[✓] F-SMA connector
[ ] BFOC/2.5 connector
A4.2.1.1.3 Transmission Rate
[✓] 9600 bit/s
[✓] 19200 bit/s
A4.2.1.2 Link Layer

There are no selection options for the link layer.
A4.2.1.3 Application Layer
A4.2.1.3.1 Transmission Mode for Application Data

Mode 1 (least significant octet first) as defined in clause 4.10 of IEC 60870‑5‑4 is
used exclusively in this companion standard.
A4.2.1.3.2 Common Address of ASDU
[✓] One COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU (identical to the station address)
[ ] More than one COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
A4.2.1.3.3 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Monitor Direction
System Functions in Monitor Direction
INF Description
[✓] <0> End of general interrogation
[✓] <0> Time synchronization
[✓] <2> Reset FCB
[✓] <3> Reset CU
[✓] <4> Start / restart
[ ] <5> Power on
A4-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Status Indications in Monitor Direction
INF Description P438 Designations

(Address) Description
[✓] <16> Auto-recloser active (015 064) A RC : En able d
[✓] <17> Teleprotection active (015 008) P SIG1: En abl ed
[✓] <18> Protection active (003 030) MA IN: Protecti on en abl ed
[✓] <19> LED reset (021 010) MA IN: Res et in dicat. USER
[✓] <20> Blocking of monitor direction (037 075) C OMM1 : Si g./meas .val. blo ck.
[✓] <21> Test mode (037 071) MA IN: Te st mode
[ ] <22> Local parameter setting
[✓] <23> Characteristic 1 (036 090) P SS: PS 1 active
[✓] <27> Auxiliary input 1 (034 000) L OGIC : I npu t 01 EXT
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-11

Monitoring Signals (Supervision Indications) in Monitor Direction

[✓] <32> Measurand supervision I (040 087) MCMON: Mea s. circ. I faulty
[✓] <33> Measurand supervision V (038 023) MCMON: Mea s. circ. V fault y
[] <35> Phase sequence supervision
[✓] <36> Trip circuit supervision (041 200) SFMON: Rel ay K xx faulty
(The message content is
formed from the OR operation
of the individual signals.)
[ ] <37> I>> back-up operation (037 021) BUOC : A ctive
[✓] <38> VT fuse failure (004 061) MA IN: M.c. b. trip V EXT
[✓] <39> Teleprotection disturbed (036 060) P SI G1: Tel e com. faulty
[✓] <46> Group warning (036 100) SFMON: Warnin g ( re lay)
[✓] <47> Group alarm (004 065) MA IN: Blocke d/f aul ty
Earth Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

[] <48> Earth fault A
[] <49> Earth fault B
[] <50> Earth fault C
[] <51> Earth fault forward, i.e. line
[] <52> Earth fault reverse, i.e. busbar
A4-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Fault Indications in Monitor Direction

[] <64> Start / pick-up A
[] <65> Start / pick-up B
[] <66> Start / pick-up C
[] <67> Start / pick-up N
[✓] <68> General trip (036 251) MA IN: Gen . tri p si gnal
[ ] <69> Trip A
[ ] <70> Trip B
[ ] <71> Trip C
[✓] <72> Trip I>> (back-up operation) (036 014) BUOC : Tri p s ignal I >
[✓] <73> Fault location X in ohms (004 029) F T_DA : F aul t re actan ce ,pri m
[✓] <74> Fault forward/line (036 018) MA IN: Faul t for ward
[✓] <75> Fault reverse/busbar (036 019) MA IN: Faul t backward
[✓] <76> Teleprotection signal (036 035) P SI G1: Sen d s ignal

transmitted
[✓] <77> Teleprotection signal received (006 036) P SI G1: R ecei ve si gn al
[✓] <78> Zone 1 (039 016) D IST: Tri p si gn al Z1/t1
[✓] <79> Zone 2 (039 017) D IST: Tri p si gn al Z2/t2 S
[] <82> Zone 5
[] <83> Zone 6
[✓] <84> General starting (036 000) MA IN: Gen eral startin g
[✓] <85> Breaker failure (036 017) C BF: CB failu re
[ ] <86> Trip measuring system A
[ ] <87> Trip measuring system B
[ ] <88> Trip measuring system C
[ ] <89> Trip measuring system N
[ ] <90> Trip I>
[ ] <91> Trip I>>
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-13


[ ] <92> Trip IN>
[ ] <93> Trip IN>>
Auto-Reclosure Indications in Monitor Direction

[✓] <128> CB ‘on’ by AR (037 007) A RC : (Re ) clos e si gn al HSR
[✓] <129> CB ‘on’ by long-time AR (037 006) A RC : (Re ) clos e si gn al TDR
[✓] <130> AR blocked (037 008) A RC : Not re ady
Measurands in Monitor Direction

[] <144> Measurand I
[] <145> Measurands I, V
[] <146> Measurands I, V, P, Q
[] <147> Measurands IN, VEN
[] <148> Measurands IA,B,C, VA,B,C, P, Q, f
Generic Functions in Monitor Direction
INF Description
[ ] <240> Read headings of all defined groups
[ ] <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
[ ] <243> Read directory of a single entry
[ ] <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
[ ] <245> General interrogation of generic data
[ ] <249> Write entry with confirmation
[ ] <250> Write entry with execution
[ ] <251> Write entry abort
A4-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A4.2.1.3.4 Selection of Standard Information Numbers in Control Direction
System Functions in Control Direction
INF Description
[✓] <0> Initiation of general interrogation
[✓] <0> Time synchronization
General Commands in Control Direction

[✓] <16> Auto-recloser on/off (015 064) A RC : En able d
[✓] <17> Teleprotection on/off (015 008) P SIG1: En abl ed
[✓] <18> Protection on/off (003 030) MA IN: Protecti on en abl ed
[✓] <19> LED reset (021 010) MA IN: Res et in dicat. U SER
[✓] <23> Activate characteristic 1 (003 060) P SS: Param .s u bs. se l. USER
(Switches
PSS: Pa ram.su bs. se l .
USE R to Parameter subset
1.)
(Switches
2.)
(Switches
3.)
(Switches
4.)
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-15

Generic Functions in Control Direction
INF Description
[ ] <240> Read headings of all defined groups
[ ] <241> Read values or attributes of all entries of one group
[ ] <243> Read directory of a single entry
[ ] <244> Read value or attribute of a single entry
[ ] <245> General interrogation of generic data
[ ] <248> Write entry
[ ] <249> Write entry with confirmation
[ ] <250> Write entry with execution
[ ] <251> Write entry abort
A4-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A4.2.1.3.5 Basic Application Functions
[✓] Test mode
[✓] Blocking of monitor direction
[✓] Disturbance data
[ ] Generic services
[✓] Private data
A4.2.1.3.6 Miscellaneous
Measured values are transmitted both with ASDU 3 and ASDU 9. As defined in
Sec. 7.2.6.8, the maximum MVAL can be either 1.2 or 2.4 times the rated value.
In ASDU 3 and ASDU 9, different ratings may not be used; in other words, there is
only one choice for each measurand.
Measured value Max. MVAL = nom. value multiplied by
1.2 or 2.4
Current A [ ] [ ]
Current B [ ] [ ]
Current C [ ] [ ]
Voltage A-G [ ] [ ]
Voltage B-G [ ] [ ]
Voltage C-G [ ] [ ]
Enabled power P [ ] [ ]
Reactive power Q [ ] [ ]
Frequency f [ ] [ ]
Voltage A-B [ ] [ ]
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A4-17

A4-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

P438
A5 Version History
A5.1 Version History – MiCOM P30
A5.1.1 P438 ‑301 ‑40x ‑601 … ‑309 ‑4xx ‑617
A5.1.1.1 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑601

Release: 2001‒12‒03
Initial product release
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-1

P438 A5 Version History
A5.1.1.2 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑602

Release: 2002‒02‒13
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
THERM The operating mode setting has been changed.

The setting (022 063) TH ER M: Operati ng mode is replaced by the following
'yes/no'-selection parameters:
● (022 064) THE RM: Re l ative Re plica
● (022 065) THE RM: A bsol ute Re pli ca
Thus operating mode-dependent visibility control of the parameters is possible.
If the absolute replica is used, the alarm threshold can now be set as absolute
temperature (THERM: A lar m t e mpe rature P Sx).
A5-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5 Version History P438
A5.1.1.3 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑603

Release: 2003‒03‒14
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
COMM1 If an IEC 60870-5 protocol is used, the TH ER M: Trip Signal spontaneo us

signal is now transmitted via the ASDU 1 (spontaneous signal without relative
time).
FT_DA The calculation of the short circuit impedance and reactance and of the fault
location is now also carried out correctly for In = 5 A.
MAIN Binary signals:

● (036 051) MA IN: C B C l ose d Si g. EXT
● (039 014) MAIN: Start. PI R Main -Tri p
● (039 015) MA IN: Start. P IR Re -Trip
were initialized every time that the protection device had been switched to on-
line. If the device was, for example, switched to off-/on-line for a short time, a
faulty operation of circuit breaker supervision resulted and possibly also a start
of the testing functions in the substation control system.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-3

DIST New addresses for the visibility control of the characteristics:

● (022 001) D IST: Circl e Ch ar A vai l ab.
● (022 002) DIST: WP C Zone A vail able
Modification of the designation text of the angle set values according to the
system requirement of the railway companies:
● (012 013) A lpha_L 1 ( P oly) SG1
● (072 208) Bet a 1 Angle SG1
● (076 090) Alpha 1 ( Ci rcle ) SG1
● (076 247) Gamma 1 A ngl e SG1
The characteristic definitions have been changed. If the characteristic
parameters are only relevant for one characteristic type, this is marked by the
addition of “(Circle)” or “(Polygon)” in the designation text.
The tripping area that is defined by Rg is valid only for the circular
characteristic. When making settings, the maximum setting for this value that
has to be taken into account is now the same that the impedance reach Z of the
respective zone in the respective direction. The checking of the setting limit now
takes only place for unblocked zones (Z and Z’) in all setting groups. The fault in
the calculation of the maximum permissible Rg of the 3rd zone has thus also
been eliminated.
The discontinuity recognition functions d/dt have been revised:
● The number of parameters has been drastically reduced:
The sampling interval duration is now permanently 1.5 cycles.
Setting the delta value to 'blocked' now disables the respective measuring
system.
● Also in the operate mode 'OR' the short time is active if there is a
simultaneous blocking of all three measuring systems.
● The dphi/dt measuring has been corrected.
● Signals of individual measuring systems are only issued if the operating
mode dx/dt of the zone is also not set to 'disabled'.
The direction stability has been improved and the tripping time for the faults in
zone 1 has been reduced to 40 ms (if setting t1 = 0 s).
The required minimum voltage for the synchronization of the voltage memory
has been reduced to 0.55 Vn.
The hysteresis for the decision 'direction measurement with voltage memory'
has been extended in order to ensure a stable direction measurement if there
are fault voltages of 10 ±1 V.
Setting parameter (012 202) D IST: V < Load bli nder PS1 has been replaced
by a permanent threshold of 0.1 Vn.
If the polygonal characteristic is used, a tripping for fault impedances in the
quadrant 4 (in the forward range of the characteristic) is now also issued even if
the reverse direction is blocked.
The maximum reach of the third zone has been extended to 700.0 Ω.
A5-4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

C&VTS Fuse failure monitoring has been accelerated so that unwanted distance
protection operation can also be prevented when the load current has exceeded
the low-end threshold I> of the distance measuring system.
The default set value of the enabling threshold (C&VTS: V< VTS/F use Fail
SGx) has been increased to 0.65 Vn.
The (038 023) C&VTS: VTS V olts Failure signal is issued when the M.C.B.
trip of the binary input is triggered, even if C&VTS is disabled or not enabled in
the active setting group.
NOT When the current threshold is exceeded the start of the timer stages only takes
place after the enabling of the backup overcurrent-time protection.
SOTF Processing of the function in the 'trip with start' operating mode has been
optimized so that shorter typical tripping times, < 45 ms, are obtained.
DTOC The time tagging of the signals resulting from instantaneous high-current
tripping has been improved. This concerns the following signals:
● (035 022) DTOC: St art ing I>H
● (040 076) D TO C: Tr ip Si gn al tI>H
● (036 000) MA IN: Gen eral Start
● (036 251) MA IN: Gen Tri p Signal
● (039 101) MA IN: Main-Tri p Signal
● (039 011) MA IN: Mai n-Trip Comman d
The reset mode has been improved so that reset times represent a maximum of
one cycle (measured in the event of a current decrease from double the operate
value to 0).
DFRST The setting range of operate values DIF_X: Id> SGx has been extended to
0.01...1.00 In.
THERM The function's competition problem at start-up initialization has been corrected.
The incorrectly issued (039 110) TH ER M: Sett in g Error,Block. alarm is no
longer displayed.
LOGIC Signals LOGIC : Re se t 6 EXT and LOGIC: Re se t 8 EXT are now available in
the selection table for the configuration of the binary inputs.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-5

A5.1.1.4 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑603‑701

Release: 2003‒08‒14
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
C&VTS The minimum current enabling threshold of the undervoltage and fuse failure
monitoring has been unified to 0.05 In.
The current discontinuity recognition now operates even when the current
decreases.
A detected fuse failure condition is only reset if the measured voltage exceeds
the C&VTS: V > VTS/Fu se Fai l SGx threshold and if simultaneously a
minimum current of 0.05 In flows.
THERM The competition problem of the function in the start-up initialization has been
corrected. The incorrectly issued alarm (039 110) THER M: Set tin g
Error,Block . is no longer displayed.
A5-6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.5 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑603‑702

Release: 2003‒09‒18
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
C&VTS Bug fixing:

Fuse failure monitoring was enabled too early during device initialization, which
caused unwanted starting.
THERM The dead time for very fast alterations of the coolant temperature has been
extended to 1.5 s in order to correct competition problems with measuring-
circuit monitoring of the analog module (for example the (040 190) RTDmA:
PT100 F aulty signal was not always issued in time in order to exclude an
unwanted operation).
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-7

A5.1.1.6 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑613-703

Release: 2003‒11‒04
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
CHECK Bug fixing:

When using the analog module, the (093 112) CH ECK : Time -ou t Module Y
time-out fault occurred after approx. 24.8 days.
A5-8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.7 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑604

Release: 2003‒12‒03
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
OP_RC The list of the following entries has been modified as follows.
Those added:
● (038 073) THERM: 2 P L Se l ect. Exte r n.
● (040 145) LIMIT: tV>> & tV << Elaps ed
● (040 197) LI MIT: tf>> Elaps ed
● (004 062) L I MI T: tI>> Elaps ed
Those removed:
● (039 076) MA IN: Powe r Fl ow Forward
● (039 077)MAIN: P ower Flow Re ve rs e
● (041 085) D I ST: Wrong Se ttin g R g,x
● (040 170) L IMIT: Star ting T>
● (040 171) LIMIT: Startin g T>>
● (040 174)LIMI T: Star ting T<
● (040 175) LI MIT: Start in g T<<
● (040 180) L IMIT: Star ting I DC,l in>
● (040 181)LIMI T: Star ting ID C,li n>>
● ( 040 184) LIMIT: Startin g IDC ,l i n<
● (040 185) LIMI T: Start ing IDC, lin <<
Thus the LIMIT stages do not enter starting signals, but only the signal “timer
stage elapsed”.
MAIN Bug fixing:

The nominal current setting value for (010 017) MAIN: Idfrst,nom Dev ice
was initialized to the default set value of 1 A at each start-up of the device.
DTOC The DTOC Protection is now able to operate in directional mode.
IDMT The IDMT Protection is now able to operate in directional mode.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-9

A5.1.1.8 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑604-704

Release: 2003‒12‒19
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
CHECK Bug fixing:

The monitoring timer of the analog module was incorrectly initialized in version
–604 when switching the nominal frequency, which caused the (093 112)
CHEC K: Tim e -out Modul e Y alarm to be issued.
A5-10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.9 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑604-705

Release: 2005‒01‒31
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
RTDmA Open-circuit monitoring of the 20 mA input and the “PT 100” input has been
improved. The plausibility check of displayed measured variables was extended.
THERM The plausibility check of the “PT 100” measurement was cancelled and now
occurs exclusively in function group RTDmA.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-11

A5.1.1.10 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑605

Release: 2005‒07‒04
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
MAIN An inrush detection function, operating with the second harmonic of the phase
current, has been added in order to prevent unwanted tripping signals issued by
the catenary protection device when autotransformers are switched on or circuit
breakers on locomotives are closed. Blocking of each protection function may be
set individually, when an inrush occurrence is detected.
DIST Bug fixing:

Up to version –604-70x a starting of the protection caused by wrong phase
coupling was not evaluated and signaled. The protection did not issue a trip
signal.
C&VTS The minimum current enable thresholds for undervoltage protection and fuse
failure monitoring are now set via mutual parameters at (014 188) C& VTS: I>
E nab V< FuseF S Gx. External blocking of undervoltage protection and fuse
failure monitoring have been added. Minimum hold-time for fuse failure
monitoring is now set at 125 ms (previously 250 ms).
A5.1.1.11 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑605‑707

Release: 2005‒07‒27
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
MAIN Bug fixing: Up to version –605 there was an occasional changeover to In = 5 A

which was observed when the secondary nominal current was set to In = 1 A,
without this changeover being apparent from the device parameter setting. The
fact that such a changeover had taken place could only be observed by reading
the measured operating values. In order to suppress this mal-functioning a
cyclic refreshing of the secondary nominal current, according to the device
parameter setting, has been introduced.
COMM1(2) The new communication software version 3.17 has been introduced. With this
version the intermittent interruptions of telegrams during communication per
IEC 60870-5-101 protocol no longer occur.
A5-12 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.12 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑605‑708

Release: 2006‒02‒10
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
C&VTS Bug fixing:

● Bug fixing:
Up to version –605–707 undervoltage protection was blocked when no
current was measured and the (014 188) C&VTS: I> Enab V< FuseF
SGx minimum current enabling threshold was set to 0.00 x In.
A5.1.1.13 P438 ‑301 ‑401/402 ‑606

Release: 2006‒01‒27
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
MAIN The close command to the circuit breaker may now be generated from the front
panel user interface (HMI) or via binary signal inputs as well as through auto-
reclose control (RECLS).
It is now possible to select whether the close command is to be terminated by
the 'Closed' position status signal by setting (015 042) MAIN: ClC md Inhib. by
CB C l.
The binary input function (044 131) MAIN: CB Tri p EXT has been
implemented.
CHECK A number of device bugs previously led to a blocking with the second entry to
the monitoring signal memory (i.e. if the recurring fault was already stored in
the monitoring signal memory – see Chapter 10 in the Technical Manual). This
reaction was changed in such a manner that device blocking will only occur if a
renewed appearance of the same device fault lies within a set "memory
retention time" (021 018 C H EC K: Mon .Sig. Re tention). This makes it
possible to tolerate sporadic faults, resulting from control actions, without
having to clear the monitoring signal memory in the interim.
The significance of the time stamp was modified to accommodate this new
feature. The time stamp now represents the last appearance of the fault.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-13

DIST Factors for the zone extension function D IST: kze E xt ende d HSR SGx and
DI ST: kze Ex tended TDR SGx are now only applied in conjunction with auto-
reclose control RECLS.
Setting D I ST: kze SO TF /EXT SGx was introduced in order to enable zone
extension via a binary signal input (036 046 DIST: Zon e E xt e ns ion EXT) or
the switch on to fault protection (SOTF) function.
SOTF This function may now be blocked by a binary signal input, SOTF: Blocking
E XT.
Additionally a blocking signal is sent to auto-recloser (RECLS) during the manual
close time period.
RECLS Auto-reclose control, function group RECLS, has been implemented. It is now
possible to have automatic reclosures consisting of one highspeed reclosure and
up to 9 time-delayed reclosures.
For each tripping function the RECLS function range allows the selection that the
type of fault will permit reclosure or not. Moreover it is possible to block the
function for high current faults.
THERM All parameters associated with coolant temperature acquisition are hidden if
analog module Y has not been fitted to the device. The function operates with a
default coolant temperature.
The further operation may now be selected when there is a CTA failure. (076
177) THER M: Funct .f.CTA Fai l.SGx
A minimum coolant temperature may be set for the power feed of catenary
sections situated in long tunnels: (076 178) TH ERM: Min im um
Temperat.SGx
The following parameter has been deleted: (072 178) THER M: Blk for CTA
Fail SGx
CBM Circuit breaker monitoring, function group CBM, has been implemented. The
permitted remaining number of CB operations at nominal current is calculated
and presented phase selectively and within the framework of CB state
evaluation according to the settable circuit breaker wear characteristic.
The disconnection currents (ruptured current, and also its square) and the
current-time area integrals for each disconnection are phaseselectively
evaluated and accumulated.
mA_OP The listing of possible entries for the analog measured data output with either
BCD or 20 mA (outputs A-1 & A-2) has been extended.
A5-14 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.14 P438 ‑302 ‑403/404/405 ‑607

Release: 2006‒06‒01
Hardware
The device’s case size 40TE has been released.
Binary signal inputs with a higher switching threshold are now available.
Installation is only recommended if the application specifically requires such
Diagram
The new terminal connection diagram is now available for device variant 40TE.
Designation texts for binary signal inputs and output relays have been changed
to comply to the Px3x standard, i.e. a designation is now made up out of the slot
number (1 or 2 digits) and a listing number (2 digits). Example: K2001 instead of
K201 (= first output relay at slot number 20).
These new connection diagrams are now valid:
● P438.403 (for 40TE case, transformer module: ring-terminal connection
other modules: pin-terminal connection)
● P438.404 (for 84TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
● P438.405 (for 84TE case, with ring-terminal connection)
Software
OUTP Bug fixing:

Up to version –606 it was not possible to check the function of output relay -
K208 (now –K2008) during a relay test run.
CBF The designation for this signal has been altered:

● Old designation: (039 000) C BF: CB fail ure
● New designation: (039 000) CBF: CB Su pe rv. Signal
The (036 017) C BF : C B Fail ure mu lti ple signal is now generated as a
spontaneous signal when a trip signal is triggered on the back-up CB or the
upstream CB. This new multiple signal is transmitted using the IEC 60870-5-103
communication protocol as follows:
● Type: 8A, Inf: 80
● ASDU: 2, GA: No
CBM Two independent correction values are now available in order to determine the
trip time. Timing tolerances caused by leading or lagging auxiliary contacts on
the CB may now be compensated by applying parameter (022 018) C BM: C orr .
Acqu.T.CB Sig. A time-delay between the internal forming of the trip
command and the actual opening of the CB contacts may now be set at (022
153) CBM: C orr. A cqu. T. Tri p.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-15

LIMIT The new (041 043) L I MIT: Not R eady signal now indicates that the function
has been globally enabled but that it has not been enabled in the active setting
group itself. This new multiple signal is transmitted using the IEC 60870-5-103
communication protocol as follows:
● Type: 8A, Inf: 3D
● ASDU: 1, GA: Yes
A5-16 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.15 P438 ‑302 ‑403/404/405 ‑608

Release: 2007‒03‒28
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
MAIN The primary source for date and time synchronization may now be selected.
Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal
pulses. Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute
signal pulses. Additionally a back-up source can now be selected.
● (103 210) MA IN: P ri m.Source Time Sync
● (103 211) MAIN: BackupSou rce Time Sync
COMM2/PC With the new setting (103 203) C OMM2 : Pos iti ve Ackn. F ault it is possible
to set whether or not faults can be acknowledged positively after transmission
(and consequently deleted from the fault overview at the COMM2/PC interface).
MAIN Bug fixing:

Up to version –607 a faulty triggering of inrush stabilization was observed when
major current variations occurred.
An external blocking feature for inrush stabilization has been implemented:
● (039 169) MA IN: Block. In ru sh Rs t rE XT
A maximum hold-time for inrush stabilization has been implemented:
● (019 001, 019 002, 019 003, 019 004) MAI N: t Lift Inr.Rstr. SGx
C&VTS Bug fixing:

Up to version –607 triggering of the voltage-measuring-circuit monitoring was
cancelled when the overcurrent functions DTOC and IDMT had been started.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-17

A5.1.1.16 P438 ‑303 ‑406/407/408 ‑610

Release: 2008‒03‒12
Hardware
For all model versions there is now a variant available that features an optional
extended detachable, serially-connected, HMI and provides the following new
functions:
● 6 freely configurable function keys as well as 6 freely configurable LED
indicators (H 18 to H 23) each situated next to a function key.
● The freely configurable LED indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) are
provided as multi-color LEDs.
To disconnect inductive loads there is a module available with 4 heavyduty
contacts fitted to slot 10 on the 40TE case or slot 18 on the 84TE case devices.
The new Ethernet communications module for communication per IEC 61850 is
now available and may be fitted to slot 2 as an alternative to communication
module A. For the optical interface (100 Mbit/s) on the Ethernet communications
module the user may either select the ordering option ST connector or SC
connector.
Diagram
The updated terminal connection diagrams include the wiring configuration for
the new heavy-duty binary I/O module as well as the new Ethernet
communications module.
The following numbers have been generated for the new terminal connection
diagrams:
● P438.406 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection)
● P438.407 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection)
● P438.408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software
DEVICE As the new detachable serial HMI is now available, the following parameters
have been added:
● (002 131) D VIC E: SW Ve rsi on DH MI
● (002 132) DV IC E: SW V ers ion DHMI D M
The order numbers:
● (001 000) DVI CE: A FS Order No.
● (001 200) D VI C E: P CS Orde r No.
may now be entered as an alphanumeric variable containing up to 20
characters.
A5-18 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

LED The new detachable, serially-connected, HMI provides the following extended
display functions:
● The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by the
operating mode LED flashing.
● Two differing signals may now be assigned to the freely configurable LED
indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) to emit either red or green light.
If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED color will be 'amber'
(yellow).
Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently configured
LED indicators H 1 and H 17 are now displayed via configuration parameters and
physical state signals.
F_KEY The new detachable serial HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys
operated either as a key or switch Each function key is provided with
configurable password protection.
HMI As the new detachable, serially-connected, HMI is now available and its
presence is indicated by this additional device identification parameter: (221
099) HMI : L ocal HMI Exi sts.
The setting range for parameter (080 110) HMI: Fct. Read Ke y has been
extended. Instead of selecting only one assigned protocol by pressing the
"READ" key there are now up to 16 different addresses assigned which can be
triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the "READ" key (menu jump
function).
Now it is possible to configure two menu jump lists:
● (030 238) HMI : Fct. Men u Jmp Li st 1
● (030 239) HMI : Fct. Men u Jmp Li st 2
These menu jump lists make it possible to select individual menu points (e.g. set
values, counters, triggering functions, event logs) in a freely configurable
sequence via function keys, binary signal inputs etc.
CHECK The outputs of Boolean equations 30, 31 and 32 may now be used to form
specific alarm signals.
IEC Initial implementation of the IEC 61850 communication protocol.
GSSE In conjunction with the IEC 61850 communication protocol a communication

procedure has been implemented that is compatible with previous UCA2 GOOSE
for the exchange of binary information within an Ethernet network section.
GOOSE For the exchange of binary information in an Ethernet network section the IEC
61850 communication procedure (IEC-GOOSE) has been implemented.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-19

HMI / MAIN Corresponding binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all
default reset functions. Together with the already identified configuration
options these binary input functions are now made available in a configuration
list for the two newly implemented group resetting functions as well as the
extended functional assignment for the "CLEAR" key ('C'):
● (005 248) MAIN : Fct.A s si gn. R es e t 1
● (005 249) MA IN : Fct.As s ign. Res et 2
● (005 251) HMI: Fct. Res et Ke y
MAIN The primary source for date and time synchronization may now be selected.
Available are COMM1, COMM2/PC, IRIG-B or a binary input for minute signal
pulses. Available are COMM1/IEC, COMM2/PC, IRIGB or a binary input for minute
signal pulses. Additionally a back-up source can now be selected. Switching over
to the back-up source will occur according to a settable monitoring time period:
● (103 210) MA IN : Pri m. Source Time Sync
● (103 211) MA IN: Backup Sou rce Time Sync
● (103 212) MAIN : Time Syn c. Time -Out
The outputs of Boolean equations 30, 31 and 32 may now be used to form
specific fault signals. A device blocking will not occur should such a fault signal
be present.
Bug fixing:
With previous versions, blocking of trip commands was not signaled if blocking
was generated by the following parameters:
● (021 012) MAI N: Trip Cmd.Block USE R
● (036 045) MAI N: Bl ock. Trip cmd. EXT
SOTF Bug fixing:

With previous versions blocking of the switching of distance zone reaches from
Z1 or Z1’ depended on the setting parameters for the forward direction only.
A5.1.1.17 P438 ‑304 ‑409/410/411 ‑611

Release: 2008‒06‒23
Hardware
A new communication module A, providing the InterMiCOM protective interface,
COMM3, can now be fitted in slot 3.
Bug fixing:
Binary signal inputs with a higher operate threshold are now also available for
the power supply and the analog modules. Installation is only recommended if
the application specifically requires such binary signal inputs.
Diagram
The new terminal connection diagrams include the COMM3 interfaces of the
InterMiCOM teleprotection feature.
● P438 -409: (40TE case, transformer module with ring-terminal connection,
all other modules with pin-terminal connection
● P438 -410: (84TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
● P438 -411: (84TE case, with ring-terminal connection)
A5-20 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Software
COMM3 Function group COMM3 has been implemented to permit protective signaling
between two MiCOM protection devices.
CBM Bug fixing:

Up to version -610 measured values for the current-time integral calculation
were presented incorrect by a factor 10.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-21

A5.1.1.18 P438 ‑304 ‑409/410/411 ‑611-709

Release: 2008‒09‒29
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
DIST Bug fixing:

With versions previous to -611 wrong phase coupling protection was only
effective up to approximately 70% of the selectable maximum impedance value.
A5-22 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.19 P438 ‑304 ‑409/410/411 ‑612

Release: 2009‒07‒06
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
IEC The state of the LN (BocPhsPTOC1 and BocPhsPTOC2) linked to Backup DTOC is
now signaled by the Mode.
With distance protection operating normal and Backup DTOC ready these LN are
signaled as 'Blocked' (MODE = 2). When the Backup DTOC is activated (i.e. a VT
M.C.B. trip or triggering by the voltagemeasuring circuit monitoring) the LN is
signaled as 'On' (MODE = 1). When the Backup DTOC has not been activated for
a LN then it will remain 'Off' (Mode = 5).
PC / COMM1 / Bug fixing:

COMM2 / IEC With previous versions an incorrect display of the signal DIST: I> Star ting
was sometimes observed in the fault recording. In such cases, with fault
recording commencing, the signal was displayed as 'Enabled'.
The actual signal (binary signal output, LED and spontaneous signal) was always
provided properly.
INP In order to comply with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A, the INP: Filter (010
220) setting is now available. The state of binary signal inputs is now logged by
a circular or ring buffer. When the filter function is used a selected binary signal
input is only then considered as enabled if the set number of sampling steps
was enabled.
MAIN Bug fixing:

Up to version -611-709 measured power values were displayed incorrectly when
the operating mode was set to 'Autotransformer Feed'.
DIST The setting value to enable the first undervoltage stage of the wrong phase
coupling protection (076 132) has been extended.
C&VTS The setting values for the voltage monitoring stages (014 229, 014 208, 014
212) have been extended.
DTOC The setting values to enable the undervoltage stages (076 131, 076 150) have
been extended.
IDMT The setting value to enable the first undervoltage stage (072 081) has been
extended.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-23

RECLS The voltage criterion for a reclose command to be issued after the maximum
dead time period (015 128) has been extended.
CBF The CB trip monitoring function has been removed from the circuit breaker
failure protection. The function will now be enabled only if no trip command has
been issued by the protection device.
A5-24 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.20 P438 ‑305 ‑409/410/411 ‑613

Release: 2009‒09‒14
Hardware
As an option the processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is now
available. This module offers an enhanced feature and the highspeed processing
of the device’s additional functions. Such high-speed processing is the pre-
condition for the successful application of the new high impedance protection
function (DELTA).
Diagram
No changes.
Software
Note:
Software version -613 is compatible with all previous hardware releases. Some of
the functional enhancements are only visible and available if the optional
processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted.
HMI The functional assignment for the "CLEAR" key ('C') has been extended. The
reset of the reclaim time for the RECLS function at parameter (036 223)RECLS :
Reset Recl.Tim e2 EXT may now be selected from the selection table for (005
251) HMI : Fct . Re set Key.
F_KEY The default setting of passwords for the function keys have been changed. Now
no password entry is required when a function key is pressed.
Enabling a password may still be configured for each function key.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-25

MAIN When the optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is
fitted the second, third and fifth harmonic current components are determined
and issued as measured operating data.
The following measured values are now additionally available:
● (008 095) MA IN : Curre nt I (2fn ) Prim
● (008 097) MA IN : Curre nt I (3fn ) Prim
● (008 099) MA IN : C urr en t I( 5f n) Pri m
● (008 096) MA IN : Cu rren t I( 2f n) p.u.
● (008 098) MAI N: Curre nt I( 3f n) p. u.
● (008 100) MAIN : Curre nt I (5f n) p.u .
When the optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is
fitted, the ratio of the sum of the second, third and fifth harmonic current
components to the fundamental is calculated and issued as a measured value
M AI N: kHarm, ∑I( xfn) /I( f n).
The General Start has been extended by the addition of the starting signal from
the high impedance protection function (DELTA, only when the optional
processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted).
The Trip signals and Trip commands have been extended by the addition of the
starting signal from the high impedance protection function (DELTA, only when
the optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted).
The multiple blockings 1 and 2 have been extended by the addition of the high
impedance protection function blocking (DELTA, only when the optional
The inrush stabilization has been extended by the addition of the high
impedance protection function blocking (DELTA, only when the optional
The voltage memory function is now comprehensively available for the distance
protection function and the directional overcurrent stages. The following signals
have been shifted within the function groups:
● Previously: (040 034) DI ST: tV me mor y Active
● Now: (040 034) MA IN: tV memory Active
Synchronization of the voltage memory is now terminated by a General Start.
OSCIL The selection of starting conditions for fault recording has been extended by the
conditions for enabling, starting and tripping from the high impedance
protection function (DELTA, only when the optional processor module with an
integrated DSP coprocessor is fitted).
FT_DA The setting of the fault location determination has been extended. Line
reactance and line length can now be configured in 10 successive sections.
DELTA The DELTA function group has been implemented. This function is available only
when the optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is
fitted.
High impedance errors are detected by sudden current change monitoring and
stabilized by monitoring odd-numbered harmonic current components.
Additional stabilization by sudden angle change monitoring or reactance limits
can be configured.
A5-26 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

DIST The accuracy of timer stages of individual zones has been enhanced.
Load blinding has be extended to the polygonal (quadrilateral) tripping
characteristics. Angle Alpha and reactance limit Rg can now be used to set this
feature. Up to the previous version these parameters were available only for the
circular characteristic.
The following parameters have been renamed:
● D IST : Rg y, Forward SGx
● DI ST: Rgy , Re ve rs e SGx
● DIS T: A lp ha y SGx
The visibility control for circular characteristics has been cancelled. The (022
001) DI ST: Circl e Ch ar A vailab. parameter has been removed.
A fourth distance stage with train start-up detection dx/dt has been
implemented.
A visibility control for zones 3 and 4 has been added.
Parameters: (022 195) DIST: Zone 3 Available and (022 196) DIST: Z one 4
Availabl e are used to render visible input, output and setting parameters for
the respective zones.
Zones are always without effect unless their respective availability has been set.
Bug fixing:
Up to the previous version the WPC zone was processed even when the
corresponding availability had been not set.
When the optional processor module with an integrated DSP coprocessor is
fitted then the distance protection measured values (Z, R, X) may be corrected
by harmonics factor MAI N: kH arm, ∑I( xfn )/I( fn ). Distance zone reaches are
reduced dynamically according to the second, third and fifth harmonic current
components.
DTOC / IDMT Starting timer stages in the directional mode can now be freely selected. It is
now possible to select whether a time delay is started when a stage start is
issued or with an additional directional criterion.
Direction determination by overcurrent stages are now stabilized by the voltage
memory function (function group MAIN). If voltage memory is not enabled a
Fault forward decision is issued, independently of the actual fault direction,
when the short-circuit voltages are < 1.0 V.
A load flow direction is now displayed when the short-circuit direction
determination function is available.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-27

A5.1.1.21 P438 ‑305 ‑409/410/411 ‑613‑711
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
DIST In the case of load blinder blocking (V < 10V) the evaluation of Rg and alpha is
now skipped.
DELTA Internal use of parameters was optimized.
A5.1.1.22 P438 ‑305 ‑409/410/411 ‑613-713
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
FT_DA The calculation of Vmax now takes into account the feeder mode (Classic Single
Feed or Autotransformer Feed).
OSCIL Bug fixing:

The messages (004 181) F T_DA : I c a t p . u . , (004 182) FT_DA : I f d r
p . u . , (004 183) FT_DA : V c a t p . u . , (004 1 84) FT_D A: Vf d r p .
u . were not written into the buffer.
A5-28 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.23 P438 ‑305 ‑409/410/411 ‑614
Hardware
No changes.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
DIST The resolution for the settings of R and Z of zones 3 and 4 has been reduced
from 0.01 Ω to 0.1 Ω.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-29

A5.1.1.24 P438 ‑305 ‑409/410/411 ‑615

Release: 2011‒02‒23
Hardware
New Schneider-Electric design for the local control panel (HMI).
Diagram
No changes.
Software
PC The following menu point has been removed: (003 183) PC: Man ufact urer
Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues
to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The menu point (003 214) COMM1 : MOD BUS V arian t may now be used to
set the MODBUS protocol to the variant Private or Compatible.
The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in
the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private
corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol.
Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1, COMM2 The menu points (003 161) COMM1: Name of man ufact urer and (103 161)
COMM2: Name of manu factu rer can no longer be set by using a selection
list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The
default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts
differing from the default.
Notes:
● These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is
not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel
(HMI). The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations
exceeding this will be truncated.
● The parameter COMM1: Name of manu factu rer is hidden unless an
IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
DIST The resolution for the settings of R and Z of zones 3 and 4 has been reduced
from 0.01 Ω to 0.1 Ω. Moreover, the maximum setting value for the reactance of
zones 3 and 4 has been increased from 650 Ω to 750 Ω.
A5-30 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.25 P438 ‑308 ‑415/416/417 ‑616

Release: 2012‒09‒07
Hardware
The P438 is now fitted with an improved power supply module.
Note that the voltage range has changed for DC input:
● For the DC / AC variant, the range is now 60 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC
(previously 48 … 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC)
● For the DC-only variant, the range is now 24 … 60 VDC
(previously 24 VDC)
A new communication module (“REB” = “Redundant Ethernet Board”) is now
available as an ordering option. This module can be used for redundant
communication via IEC 61850 and may be fitted to slot 2, as an alternative to the
other communication modules. The following communication protocols are
supported:
● SHP (Self-Healing Protocol)
● RSTP (Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol)
● DHP (Dual-Homing Protocol)
A detailed description of the module and the appropriate network connections is
available as a separate document (“Redundant Ethernet Board, Application
Guide”).
The binary module X(6I 3O) with 6 binary signal inputs and 3 output relays is now
optionally available and may be fitted to slot 10 (40 TE case) or 18 (84 TE cases).
Diagram
The diagrams have been adapted to the new selection of modules:
● P438 -412 (transformer module for ring-terminal connection, other modules
for pin-terminal connection)
● P438 -413 (for 84TE pin-terminal connection)
● P438 -414 (for 84TE ring-terminal connection)
Software
Note: Software version -616 is compatible with all previous hardware releases.
However, some of the functional enhancements are only visible and available if
the processor variant with an integrated DSP coprocessor (order option) is fitted.
IEC Bug fixing:

In a few cases a data change report was not transferred when a cyclic report
was generated at the same time.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-31

FT_DA The determination of the fault location has been enhanced for the operating
mode “Autotransformer feed”. It is now possible to set the section lengths and
reactances separately for the catenary and the feeder line.
Therefore there are now parameters FT_D A: Li ne len g t h z - y PSx (for the
line feeds z with z=A / ”catenary line” and z=B / ”feeder line”), instead of the
previously available parameters FT_DA : Lin e len g t h y PSx (y = 1,…,10).
The same holds for the reactances, so there are now parameters FT_D A: Line
reac,secz - y PSx instead of the previously available FT_DA : L ine react , s
ec y PSx.
In operating mode “Classic single feed” only the parameters for line feed A are
available.
The new parameter (011 225) FT_D A: Blocking fau l t l oc. allows for
blocking the determination of the fault location via binary signal, e.g. in case the
autotransformers are still connected.
DIST The parameter (076 132, 077 132, 078 132, 079 132) DI ST: WPC V< PSx can
now be set to Blocked. In this case, protection against wrong phase coupling is
performed without voltage supervision.
DTOC, DTOCA, Two new DTOC function groups, DTOCA and DTOCB, have been implemented.
DTOCB These function groups provide a definite time phase current (IA, IB) supervision
in the operating mode “Autotransformer feed”. If the operating mode is set to
“Classic single feed” both function groups are inactive.
The DTOC function group is still available and unchanged. In both operating
modes it supervises the total current independently of the DTOCx function
groups.
The parameters (130 079) DTOC A : Bl ockin g EXT and (130 099) D TOC B:
Bloc k in g EX T allow for blocking these new DTOCx functions, e.g.if the
supervision is needed only in the case of disconnected autotransformers.
IDMT, IDMTA, IDMTB Two new IDMT function groups, IDMTA and IDMTB, have been implemented.
These function groups provide an inversetime phase current (IA, IB) supervision
in the operating mode “Autotransformer feed”. If the operating mode is set to
“Classic single feed” both function groups are inactive.
The IDMT function group is still available and unchanged. In both operating
modes it supervises the total current independently of the IDMTx function
groups.
The parameters (130 116) ID MTA: Bl ocki ng EXT and (130 136) ID MTB: Bl
ocki ng EXT allow for blocking these new IDMTx functions, e.g. if the
supervision is needed only in the case of disconnected autotransformers.
ARC The ARC function group has been extended to include the new overcurrent
supervision functions DTOCx and IDMTx.
A5-32 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

A5.1.1.26 P438 ‑309 ‑415/416/417 ‑617

Release: 2015‒10‒16
Hardware
The Redundancy Ethernet Board (REB) can now be ordered with an additional
redundancy protocol: PRP (Parallel Redundancy Protocol) is available now as an
alternative to RSTP, SHP or DHP.
The P438 is now fitted with an improved communication module for the
InterMiCOM protocol.
Note: This new module is not supported by previous firmware due to differences
in uploading the firmware to the controller from the main processor during
service bootup.
Diagram
No changes.
Software
The software has been modified to support the new PRP board and the new
InterMiCOM board.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-33

A5.2 Version History – Easergy MiCOM 30
A5.2.1 P438 ‑311 ‑4xx ‑661 ff
A5.2.1.1 P438 ‑311 ‑418/419/420 ‑661 -701

Release: 2018‒01‒17
Hardware
The P438 is now fitted with Ethernet module (SEB LC/RJ45 or REB LC/RJ45). This
module is used for IEC 61850 Edition 1 and Edition 2 and is fitted to slot 2, as an
alternative to other communication modules.
PRP/HSR/RSTP communication protocols are supported.
The P438 is now available with text display or graphic display as an order option.
Diagram
The updated connection diagrams now include the Ethernet module
communication interface with SEB and REB.
● P438 -418 (for 40 TE case, with CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection)
● P438 -419 (for 84 TE case, with pin-terminal connection)
● P438 -420 (for 84 TE case, with ring-terminal connection)
Software
CS Implementation of a dedicated function group that provides Cyber Security

protection to mitigate the security risks.
The Security Administration Tool is required for RBAC configuration and setting
changes.
IEC The protocol of the redundant connection is configurable with IEC : E TH COMM
Mode .
When Ethernet module (REB or SEB) is used, second Ethernet information is
provided.
● (104 080) IE C: E TH C OMM Mode
● (104 072) IE C: Gate way addre ss 2
● (104 070) IEC : IP addr es s 2
● (104 073) I EC: Block Port A /B
● (104 074) I EC : Bl ock P ort C
● (221 125) IEC : C trl blocke d use r
● (104 071) I EC : Subn et mask 2
● (104 079) I EC : IEC prot. varian t
A5-34 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

MAIN The setting (010 135) MA IN: F e eder Mode is extended to an additional
operating mode “Single feed w. sum I”.
Measurement parameters of 3rd CT for MCMON CT Plausibility check or
alternatively DFRST function are added.
● (010 016) MA IN: Ipl aus /Idf rst,CTpri m
● (010 017) MAIN: Iplaus/I df rst,CTn om
● (010 036) MA IN: Ms Ci rc.I pl aus/I df r st
The following measurements are used:
● (005 040) MAIN: Curre nt IA pri m.
● (006 040) MA IN: Cu rren t IB pri m.
● (005 042) MAIN: V oltage VA pri m.
● (006 042) MA IN: Vol tage VB/V ref prim.
● (005 041) MAI N: Cu rren t IA p.u.
● (006 041) MAI N: Cu rren t IB p.u.
● (005 043) MAI N: V oltage V A p.u .
● (006 043) MA IN: Vol tage VB/V r ef p.u .
● (004 200) MA IN: Ipl aus /Idf r st. pri m.
● (004 201) MAIN: Ipl aus/I df r st. p.u .
The following measurements are used to provide the CB open state:
● (031 028) MA IN: C B ope n EXT
● (031 040) MAI N: CB ope n
The selection table for the following m-out-of-n parameters:
● (021 007) MA IN: Fct. asg. M-tri p cmd1
● (021 008) MAIN: Fct. asg. M-tri p cmd2
● (021 025) MA IN: Fct. asg. R -trip cm d1
● (021 026) MA IN: Fct.as g. R-tri p cmd2
● (021 027) MAI N: Fct.as g. B-trip cmd1
● (021 028) MAIN: Fct.as g. B-trip cmd2
are extended to add the following state signals as well:
● (042 032) LOGIC: Outpu t 01 to
● (047 126) L OGI C: Ou tpu t 12 8
● (042 181) LOGIC : Ou tput 33( t ) to
● (047 127) LOGIC: Outpu t 12 8(t)
The harmonics detection and related blocking functionality are added.
● (021 051) MA IN: Curre nt I (7fn ) pri m
● (021 058) MA IN: Curre nt I (7fn ) p.u .
● (020 238) MAI N: I (7fn )/I (fn ) PSx
● (020 252) MAIN: Fun ct. Harm .bl ock P Sx
● (020 244) MAIN: I>E nabl e harm.b. P Sx
● (020 248) MAIN: I>L ift h ar m.blk. P Sx
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-35

FT_DA The enhanced fault locator function with up to 10 impedance segments with
forward and backward. The following addresses are renamed and added
accordingly, take forward as example.
● (010 005) FT_D A: Forw. le ngth A-1 PSx to
● (008 147) F T_D A: F or w. l e ngth A -1 0 PSx
● (010 012) F T_D A : XL f or w, se c A -1 P Sx to
● (008 187) FT_DA : XLf orw,se c A -1 0 P Sx
● (011 145) FT_D A: Forw. le ngth B-1 PSx to
● (011 181) FT_D A: F orw. l e ngth B-10 P Sx
● (011 185) FT_D A: XLf orwt, se c B-1 PSx to
● (011 221) FT_D A: XLf orw,se c B-10 P Sx
FT_RC The channels in the fault recording are changed.

● (035 163) FT_RC: Re c. an alog chan n . 3 Plau s. /Defros t curr.
● (035 165) FT_RC: Rec. analog chan n. 5 V oltage VB/V ref
DIST (012 040) D IST: Ch aracteri sti c P Sx is always visible now.

(022 151) D IST: Bl ock . i f trip I >H for the blocking of the distance function is
provided. The distance protection is blocked for a fix time of 80 ms when a trip
of I>H happens.
The parameters for the polygon characteristic using currently Z/R values. A
setting capability using X/R values are added. The following new parameters are
provided this functionality (X1 as an example):
● (023 050) DIST: X par am e ter avail abl e
● (023 051) D I ST: Z paramete r avai lable
● (023 052) D I ST: X paramete r u s e d
● (021 239) DIST: X1, f orward P Sx
● (021 242) DIST: X1, backw ard PSx
● (021 243) D IST: X1', f or ward P Sx
● (021 244) DIS T: X1', backward PSx
The following plausibility check is added in the device firmware to secure
correct parameter setting:
● (097 023) SFMO N: Wron g s e t. DIST X/R
The following parameters are no more used and switched invisible in the data
model:
● (022 195) SF MO N: Zone 3 avail abl e
● (022 196) SFMON: Zon e 4 avai lable
DELTA The order option for DELTA function is removed and the function is always
visible now.
A5-36 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

MCMON Enhanced MCMON function measuring Iplause with 3rd current transformer is
provided. The following addresses are required:
● (004 255) MC MON: Scali ng f act. Iplaus
● (014 240) MCMON: I-moni t. en able d P Sx
● (014 092) MC MO N: Sele ct cu rren t PSx
● (014 244) MC MON: I d>, I-mon it. P Sx
● (014 248) MC MO N: m 1, I-moni t. PSx
● (006 207) MCMON: I> li f t moni tor. PSx
The following measurements are required:
● (040 087) MC MON: Me as. ci rc. I f aul ty
● (037 020) MC MO N: Me as.circ. V,I fau lty
● (040 129) MC MO N: Mi smatch scal .I pl aus
PSIG1, PSIG2 Two new Protective Signaling function groups, PSIG1 and PSIG2, have been
implemented. The function is transmitting binary signals via binary inputs/
outputs, InterMicom (COMM3) or Ethernet interface (GOOSE) from one to the
other protection device for system wide distance protection applications.
ASC The ASC function (Synchronism Check) has been implemented. Two voltages -
supply caternary voltage and reference voltage -and synchronism conditions are
checked before an automatiic or manual closing occurs.
DTOC The following parameters are added:

● (076 157) DTOC: Vmi n (I >) P Sx
● (076 113) DTOC: Mode V<V min ( I>) ) P Sx
● (076 158) D TOC: Vmi n (I>>) P Sx
● (076 127) D TOC: Mode V<V min (I >>) P Sx
IDMT The following parameters are added:

● (072 133) ID MT: V min P Sx
● (072 138) IDMT: Op. mode V<Vmi n PSx
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-37

CBF The CBF function of the P438 considers the monitoring of 2 CB (circuit breaker).
The following input signals become available to configure related CB supervision
states:
● (036 051) MAI N: CB clos e d A EXT
● (031 030) MAIN : CB cl ose d B E XT
In the “Classic single feed” mode, the CB Closed B signal is not used, whereas
the CB closed A signal is used for the one CB state.
In the “Autotransformer feed” or “Single feed with sum I” mode, both signals
will be used for the CB supervision.
The following logical state signals become available to signalize the CB failure
states as output from the CBF function:
● (036 075) CBF: CB1 fail ure
● (036 076) CBF: CB2 fail ure
The following state signals are kept as building the OR of the two CB states in
the the “Autotransformer feed” or “Single feed with sum I” mode:
● (039 000) CB F: C B Su perv. Sign al
● (036 017) C B F: C B fail ure
In the “Classic single feed” mode, the “CB1 failure” and “CB failure” signals are
equal, normally the CB failure signal is used only.
CBM The CBM function of the P438 considers the monitoring of 2 CB (circuit breaker).
The following logical state signals and function behind become available:
● (044 206) CB M: Cycl e ru n ni ng B
● (044 178) C BM: t max> B
● (044 202) C BM: C urr . fl ow e nde d B
The following command signals and function behind become available:
● (022 132) CB M: Set No. CB ope r. B
● (022 135) CBM: Se t re mai n. CB op. B
● (022 138) CB M: Set Σ Itri p B
● (022 141) C BM: Set ΣI trip**2 B
● (022 144) C BM: Se t Σ I*t B
The following event counters and function behind become available:
● (008 012) CBM: No. of CB ope r. B
● (008 015) C BM: Remai n. No. CB op. B
The following fault data and function behind become available:
● (009 213) C BM: It rip, pri m B
● (009 048) C BM: I tri p B
● (009 052) C B M: Itrip**2 B
● (009 073) C BM: ΣItri p B
● (009 078) C BM: ΣI trip**2 B
● (009 062) C BM: I *t B
● (009 088) CB M: ΣI* t B
A5-38 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

LIMIT Regarding the CT plausibility check and the defrost function, using similar CT
input for measurement, the following harmonized parameter are provided:
● (076 224) LIMIT: Iplau s /Idfrs t> PSx
● (076 225) LIMIT: Iplau s /Idfr s t>> PSx
● (076 226) L IMIT: tI plaus/I df rst> P Sx
● (076 227) LIMIT: tIpl aus /Idf r st>> PSx
The following parameter are renamed to be used for MCMON and DFRST
thresholds together:
● (040 236) LIMIT: tIplau s/Idfrs t> e lps
● (040 237) L IMIT: tIplaus /Idf rst>> el ps
DEV To use a common output contact the protection and control commands can be
internally connected. Common state signal “MAIN: Gen. trip command” is an OR
state of “MAIN: M-trip command 1” and “MAIN: M-trip command 2”.
P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 A5-39

A5-40 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

© 2018 Schneider Electric. All rights reserved.
Schneider Electric
35 rue Joseph Monier
92506 Rueil-Malmaison
FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00
Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00
www.schneider-electric.com
Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P438/EN M/R-b5-A 09/2018

P438 EN M R-b5-A 311 661 PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

P438 EN M R-b5-A 311 661 PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Easergy MiCOM P438

Rail Catenary Protection Device

Version P438 -311 -418/419/420 -661

When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in

1 Application and Scope ........................................................................................ 1-1

2 Technical Data .................................................................................................... 2-1

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1

2.11.1 Organization of the Recording Memories .................................................................................................... 2-24

2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3.13.8 Multiple Blocking ....................................................................................................................................... 3-113

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 3

3.23.2 Minimum Current and Voltage Enabling of DELTA .....................................................................................3-185

4 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

3.30.4 Load Flow Direction ................................................................................................................................... 3-265

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 5

3.39.8 Monitoring Ruptured Currents ................................................................................................................... 3-313

5 Installation and Connection ................................................................................ 5-1

6 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

5.4 Installation .................................................................................................................. 5-7

6 Local Control (HMI) ............................................................................................. 6-1

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 7

7.1.3 F u n c t i o n P a r a m e t e r s .......................................................................................................................... 7-112

8 Information and Control Functions ......................................................................8-1

9 IEC 61850 Settings via IED Configurator .............................................................9-1

10 Commissioning ................................................................................................. 10-1

11 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 11-1

12 Maintenance ..................................................................................................... 12-1

8 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

12.2 Routine Functional Testing ....................................................................................... 12-4

13 Storage ............................................................................................................. 13-1

14 Accessories and Spare Parts ............................................................................. 14-1

15 Order Information ............................................................................................. 15-1

A1 Function Groups ............................................................................................... A1-1

A2 Internal Signals .................................................................................................A2-1

A4 Telecontrol Interfaces ....................................................................................... A4-1

A5 Version History ................................................................................................. A5-1

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 9

10 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

1 Application and Scope

Fig. 1-1: P438 in a 40 TE sized case with text display.

Fig. 1-2: P438 in a 40 TE sized case with graphic display.

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-1

Fig. 1-3: P438 in a 84 TE sized case with text display.

Fig. 1-4: P438 in a 84 TE sized case with graphic display.

1-2 P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661

Protection functions P438

ANSI IEC 61850 Function

21 DisPDISn DIST Distance protection ✓

DELTA Biased high impedance protection (Delta I functionality) ✓

30 / 74 CALHx/ MCMON Measuring circuit supervision voltage and plausibility ✓

50 / 27 SofPhsPSOF1 SOTF Switch on to fault protection ✓

85 - 21 PSCH1/2 PSIG1/2 Protective signaling (two independant channels) ✓

79 RREC1 ARC Auto-reclosing control ✓

25 RSYN1 ASC Automatic synchronism check (✓)

50TD DtpPhsPTOCx DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection, with two stages ✓

51 ItpPhsPTOCx IDMT Inverse time overcurrent protection, single-stage ✓

51 ItpPhAPTOCx/ IDMTA/ Inverse time overcurrent protection, single stage, for ✓

DfrPhsPDIF1 DFRST Defrost differential current protection ✓

49 ThmPTTR1 THERM Thermal overload protection with parallel line switching ✓

27 / 59 VtpPhsPTOVx/ V<> Over- /Undervoltage Protection ✓

P438/EN M/R-b5-A // P438‑311‑661 1-3

Protection functions P438

ANSI IEC 61850 Function